from the following particulars available from the branch prepare branch trading and 564338

M/s Aditya & Co with its H.O. in Chennai invoiced goods to its branch at Delhi at 20% less than the catalogue price which is cost plus 50% with instructions that cash sales were to be made at invoice price and credit sales at catalogue price. Discount on credit sales at 15% on prompt payment will be allowed.

From the following particulars available from the branch, prepare Branch Trading and Branch Profit and Loss Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2010 in the H.O. books, so as to show the actual profit or loss of the branch for the year 2009–2010.

Opening stock (invoice price) Rs 24,000; Goods received from H.O. (invoice price) Rs 2,64,000; Opening Debtors Rs 20,000; Sales Cash Rs 92,000; Sales Credit Rs 2,00,000; Cash realised from Debtors Rs 1,71,270; Discount allowed to debtors Rs 26,730; Expenses at the branch Rs 12,000; Remittance to H.O. Rs 2,40,000; Closing Debtors Rs 22,000; Closing Cash in hand Rs 11,270; Closing Stock (invoice price) Rs 30,000.

It was reported that a part of the stock at the branch was lost by fire during the year whose value is to be ascertained and a provision should be made for discount to be allowed to debtors as on Mar 31, 2010 on the basis of the year’s trend of prompt payment.

a h o sends goods to its branch at cost plus 80 goods are sold to customers at cost 564340

A H.O. sends goods to its branch at cost plus 80%. Goods are sold to customers at cost plus 100%. From the following particulars ascertain the profits made at the H.O.

H.O. Rs

B.O. Rs

Stock

1,00,000

Purchases

10,00,000

Goods sent to Branch (Invoice Price)

4,50,000

Sales

13,50,000

4,50,000

Note: Sales at the H.O. are made at wholesale basis.

from the following particulars calculate the profit made at h o and cochin for the y 564344

X Ltd. has retail branch at Cochin. Goods are sold to customers at cost plus 100%. The wholesale price is cost plus 80%. Goods are invoiced to Cochin at wholesale price. From the following particulars calculate the profit made at H.O. and Cochin for the year 2009:

H.O. Rs

B.O Rs

Stock on Jan 1, 2009

75,000

Nil

Purchases

4,50,000

Nil

Goods sent to Branch (at Invoice Price)

1,62,000

Sales

4,59,000

1,50,000

Note: Sales at H.O. are made on wholesale basis; stock at branch is valued at invoice price.

from the following particulars prepare trading account of the h o and of the branch 564345

Good wills & Co. of Kolkata (H.O.) has a branch at Bhubaneswar. The goods are supplied to branch at 25% less than the list price which is cost plus 100% of cost. From the following particulars, prepare trading account of the H.O. and of the branch:

H.O. Rs

B.O Rs

Opening Stock

15,000

8,250

Purchases during the Year

11,25,000

Goods sent to Branch

4,67,500

Goods received from H.O.

4,67,500

Goods sold to Dealers

6,27,500

Goods sold to Customers (at List Price)

8,00,000

6,00,000

Note: The H.O. supplies goods to its dealers at the same price at which they are supplying

pass journal entries to rectify or adjust the following in the books of both the h o 564347

Pass journal entries to rectify or adjust the following in the books of both the H.O. and the branch for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010:

  1. Goods costing Rs 12,000 purchased by the branch, but payment made by the H.O. The H.O. debited the amount to its own Purchases Account.
  2. Depreciation Rs 9,720 in respect of branch assets whose accounts are kept in H.O. books.
  3. Expenses Rs 22,500 to be charged to the branch for the work done on its behalf by the H.O.
  4. Goods sent by the H.O. to the branch, Rs 72,500, not yet received by the branch.
  5. A remittance of Rs 6,750 made by the branch to its H.O. not yet received by the H.O.
  6. The branch paid Rs 240 dividend to a local shareholder on behalf of the H.O.
  7. Depreciation @ 15% p.a. is to be provided on machinery at branch costing Rs 50,000, the account of which is maintained in the books of H.O.
  8. A sum of Rs 3,330 being arrears of call money from a shareholder was received by the branch in Mar but was not communicated to the H.O. till Apr 10.
  9. Goods worth Rs 60,000 have been supplied by the branch to another branch under the instructions from the H.O.
  10. Branch has received Rs 12,500 from a customer of H.O.

pass journal entries to record these matters in the h o books and write up the two b 564348

A Mumbai Company whose accounting year ends on Mar 31 has two branches – one at Bhopal and other at Patna. The branches keep a complete set of books. On Mar 31, 2010, the Bhopal and Patna branches accounts in Mumbai office books showed debit balances of Rs 91,350 and 1,35,000, respectively, before taking the following information into account:

  1. Goods valued Rs 6,000 were transferred from Bhopal to Patna under instructions from H.O.
  2. The Bhopal branch collected Rs 7,500 from a Bhopal customer of the H.O.
  3. The Patna branch paid Rs 15,000 for certain goods purchased by the H.O. in Patna.
  4. Rs 15,000 remitted by Bhopal branch to Mumbai office on Mar 26, 2010 was received on Apr 2 only.
  5. The Patna branch received on behalf of the H.O. Rs 4,500 as dividend from a Patna Company.
  6. For the year 2009–2010, the Bhopal branch showed a net loss of Rs 3,750 and the Patna branch a net profit of Rs 16,200.

Pass journal entries to record these matters in the H.O. books and write up the two branch accounts there in.

from the following inter branch transactions in june 20 make the entries in the book 564349

A Chennai H.O. passes one entry at the end of each month to adjust the position arising out of inter branch transactions during the month. From the following inter branch transactions in June 20, make the entries in the books of Chennai H.O. (Give details of the workings)

  1. Mumbai Branch:
    1. Received goods from Kolkatta branch Rs 18,000 and Hyderabad branch Rs 12,000.
    2. Sent goods to Hyderabad branch Rs 30,000 and Kolkatta branch Rs 24,000.
    3. Sent acceptances to Kolkatta branch Rs 12,000 and Hyderabad branch Rs 6,000.
  2. Delhi Branch: [In addition to (a) above]
    1. Received goods from Kolkatta branch Rs 30,000 and Mumbai branch Rs 12,000
    2. Cash sent to Kolkatta branch Rs 6,000 Mumbai branch Rs 12,000
  3. Kolkatta Branch: [In addition to (a) & (b)];
    1. Sent goods to Hyderabad branch Rs 18,000
    2. Received Bills receivable from Hyderabad branch Rs 180,000
    3. Received cash from Hyderabad branch Rs 10,000

from the following inter branch transactions in nov 20 make the entry in the books o 564350

H.O. passes adjustment entry at the end of each month to adjust the position arising out of inter branch transactions during the month. From the following inter branch transactions in Nov 20, make the entry in the books of H.O.:

  1. Delhi Branch
    1. Received goods: Rs 30,000 from Mumbai branch, Rs 20,000 from Nagpur branch
    2. Sent goods: Rs 50,000 to Nagpur, Rs 40,000 to Mumbai
    3. Received Bills Receivable Rs 30,000 from Nagpur
    4. Sent acceptances Rs 20,000 to Mumbai Rs 10,000 to Nagpur
  2. Chennai Branch:
    1. Received goods: Rs 50,000 from Mumbai, Rs 20,000 from Delhi
    2. Cash sent: Rs 10,000 to Mumbai; Rs 30,000 to Delhi
  3. Mumbai Branch:
    1. Sent goods to Nagpur: Rs 30,000
    2. Paid Bills payable: Rs 20,000 to Nagpur; Rs 20,000 cash to Nagpur.

the h o of a business and its branch kept their own books and prepares its own profi 564351

The H.O. of a business and its branch kept their own books and prepares its own profit and loss account. The following are the balances appearing in the two sets of books as on Dec 31, 2009 after ascertainment of profit and after making all adjustments except these referred to below:

Particulars

H.O.

Branch

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Capitals

5,00,000

Fixed Assets

1,80,000

80,000

Stock

1,71,000

53,700

Debtors and Creditors

39,100

19,800

24,200

9,600

Cash

53,700

7,100

Profit and Loss Account

73,300

15,300

B.O. Account

1,49,300

H.O. Account

1,40,100

5,93,100

5,93,100

1,65,000

1,65,000

Set out balance sheet of the business as on Dec 31, 2009 and the Journal entries necessary (in both the sets of books) to record the adjustments dealing with the following:

  1. On Dec 31, 2009, the branch had sent a cheque of Rs 5,000 to the H.O. and not received by H.O. not credited to branch account till Jan 5, 2010.
  2. Goods valued Rs 4,200 had been forwarded by the H.O. to branch and invoiced on Dec 29, 2009, but were not received by the branch nor dealt with in branch’s books till Jan 9, 2010.
  3. The profit shown by the branch is to be transferred to the H.O. books.
  4. Branch assets and liabilities are to be recorded in the books of the H.O.

the following is the trial balance of goa branch as on dec 31 2009 564352

The following is the Trial Balance of Goa Branch as on Dec 31, 2009.

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Mumbai H.O.

6,480

Stock Jan 1, 2009

12,000

Purchases

1,95,600

Goods received from H.O.

38,000

Sales

2,76,000

Goods supplied to H.O.

12,000

Salaries

9,000

Debtors

7,400

Creditors

3,700

Rent

3,920

Office Expenses

2,940

Cash at Bank

3,560

Furniture

12,000

Depreciation on Furniture

800

2,91,700

2,91,700

Stock at Branch on Dec 31, 2009 was valued at Rs 15,400. Account of Goa Branch in the H.O. books stood at Rs 920 (Debit). On Dec 26, 2009, the H.O. forwarded goods to the value of Rs 7,400 to the branch where they were received on Jan 5, 2010.

  1. Prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account of Goa Branch for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 and its Balance Sheet on that date.
  2. Pass journal entries in the books of H.O. to incorporate the above shown trial balance
  3. Show Goa Branch Account as it would be closed in H.O. Ledger

the difference between the balances of the current account in the two sets of books 564353

Ashok Ltd. has its H.O. in Chennai and a Branch in Delhi where as separate set of books are used. The following are the trial balances extracted on Mar 31, 20.

Particulars

H.O.

Branch

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Share Capital (Authorised 2,00,000

16,00,000

Equity Shares of Rs 10 each)

Issued: 1,60,000 Equity Shares

Profit and Loss Account (Apr 1, 20 )

50,620

Interim Dividend paid during the Year

60,000

General Reserve

2,00,000

Current Assets

4,44,940

Fixed Assets

10,60,000

1,90,000

Debtors and Creditors

1,01,000

43,800

38,200

20,800

Profit for the Year

1,64,400

63,400

Cash Balance

1,2,460

13,100

Current Account

2,67,420

1,00,920

2,58,020

20,58,820

20,58,820

3,42,220

3,42,220

The difference between the balances of the current account in the two sets of books is accounted for as follows:

  1. Cash remitted by the branch on Mar 31, but received by the H.O. on Apr 2, Rs 6,000.
  2. Stock stolen in transit from H.O. and charged to the branch by the H.O. but not credited to H.O. in the branch books as the branch manager declined to admit any liability (not covered by insurance) Rs 3,400.

You are required to prepare the Branch Current Account in the H.O. books after incorporating Branch Trial Balance through Journal. Also prepare the company’s Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 20–.

the following are the trial balances of vrs ltd chennai and its delhi branch as on d 564354

The following are the Trial Balances of VRS Ltd Chennai, and its Delhi Branch as on Dec 2009:

Dr.

Cr.

Particulars

H.O. Rs

Branch Rs

Particulars

H.O. Rs

Branch Rs

Opening Stock

90,000

32,800

Creditors

40,660

10,820

Purchases

1,20,000

51,320

Goods sent to Branch

28,800

Wages

1,61,680

26,140

Sales

6,60,400

1,39,800

Manufacturing

71,720

13,660

H.O. Account

56,000

Expenses

Machinery:

Capital in Shares

41,10,000

H.O.

2,00,000

Discount Earned

2,200

600

Branch

1,00,000

Purchases Returns

5,100

1,320

Furniture:

H.O.

10,000

Branch

4,000

Rent

12,000

6,600

Salaries

60,000

24,000

Debtors

76,060

16,020

General Expenses

40,000

6,200

Goods Received from H.O.

28,800

Cash In Hand and at Bank

20,600

3,000

Branch Account

72,000

11,37,160

2,08,540

1,13,160

2,08,540

Closing Stock at H.O. was Rs 77,400; and at Delhi Rs 57,400. Depreciation is to be provided @ 10% p.a. on machinery and @ 15% p.a. on furniture. Rent still payable in respect of Dec 2009 for the branch godown is Rs 600.

You are required to prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Account in Columnar form and the Consolidated Balance Sheet. Also show the Branch Account.

using examples illustrate the complexities which may make it difficult for the vario 564360

‘At their simplest, accounts comprise a summary of cash receipts and payments. Concepts such as accruals and substance over form lead to increased complexity and may make it difficult for a user to interpret the results and financial position of a company. The key focus of future accounting standards and legislation should be simplification, not increased disclosure and more complex rules.’

Using examples, illustrate the complexities which may make it difficult for the various users to understand published accounts. Comment on any recent action taken by the Accounting Standards Board or the Government which has affected the complexity of accounts and discuss, reaching a conclusion, whether simplification of company accounts should be a key objective for the Accounting Standards Board and the Department of Trade and Industry.

explain why the frrp disagreed with s plc rsquo s depreciation policies and explain 564361

The following is an extract from a press note published by the Financial Reporting Review Panel (FRRP):

FINDINGS OF THE FINANCIAL REPORTING REVIEW PANEL IN RESPECT OF THE ACCOUNTS OF S PLC FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2001

The Financial Reporting Review Panel has had under consideration the Report and Accounts of S plc for the year ended 31 March 2001 and has discussed them with the company’s directors.

The matters raised by the Panel related to aspects of the company’s implementation of Financial Reporting Standard (FRS) 15 – Tangible Fixed Assets, regarded as standard in respect of financial statements relating to accounting periods ending on or after 23 March 2000.

The company’s stated accounting policy in respect of properties was not to provide any depreciation on any given property until approximately ten years before the end of its useful life, from which point the depreciable amount was written off over the remainder of the useful life. In respect of plant and equipment, it was the company’s policy not to commence depreciation until the accounting year following that in which the assets were acquired. In the Panel’s view, neither of these policies complied with the requirements of FRS 15.

As reported in their Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 March 2002, the directors have accepted the Panel’s findings. The directors have amended the 2001 comparative figures by way of prior year adjustment.

Required:

(a) Explain the role of the Financial Reporting Review Panel (FRRP).

(b) Explain why the FRRP disagreed with S plc’s depreciation policies and explain why it made this disagreement public.

(c) Explain whether the FRRP’s role could be left to the external auditor.

you are the chief accountant of britain plc britain plc has a number of subsidiaries 564364

You are the chief accountant of Britain plc. Britain plc has a number of subsidiaries located in various parts of the world. One of these subsidiaries is Faraway Ltd. Faraway Ltd prepares its financial statements in accordance with local Accounting Standards. The accountant of Faraway Ltd has prepared the financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2001 – also the accounting reference date of Britain plc. The profit and loss account for the year ended 30 September 2001 (together with comparatives) drawn up in loca1 currency (LC) was as shown below.

Year ended 30 September

2001

2000

LC000

LC000

Turnover

56000

53000

Cost of sales

(34000)

(32000)

Gross profit

22000

21000

Other operating expenses

(10000)

(9800)

Operating profit

12000

11200

Interest payable

(4000)

(3800)

Profit before tax

8000

7400

Tax

(3000)

(2800)

Profit after tax

5000

4600

Dividends paid

(2500)

(2400)

Retained profit

2500

2200

Retained profit 1 October 2000 (1 October 1999)

10000

7800

Retained profit 30 September 2001 (30 September 2000)

12500

10000

The local Accounting Standards that are used in preparing the financial statements of Faraway Ltd are the same as UK Accounting Standards with the exception of the following:

  1. Faraway Ltd values its stocks using the LIFO basis. This valuation is acceptable for local tax purposes. Relevant stock values are as follows:

Date

Stock value under LIFO

Stock value under FIFO

LC000

LC000

30 September 2001

9500

10000

30 September 2000

7700

8000

30 September 1999

8600

9000

The stock levels of Faraway Ltd often vary from year to year and prices do not rise

evenly. The rate of local corporate taxation is 36%.

  1. On 1 October 1993, Faraway Ltd acquired an unincorporated business for 50 million units of local currency. The fair value of the net assets of this business on 1 October 1993 was 30 million units of local currency. The resulting goodwill was written off to the profit and loss reserve as permitted by local Accounting Standards. At the date of acquisition, the directors of Faraway Ltd ascertained that the useful economic life of this goodwill was 10 years.

The accountant of Faraway Ltd has sent the financial statements to you with a suggestion that consolidation would be much easier if all group companies used International Accounting Standards to prepare their individual financial statements.

Required

(a) Restate the profit and loss account of Faraway Ltd in local currency (both the current year and the comparative) so as to comply with UK Accounting Standards.

(b) Evaluate the practicality of the suggestion that all group companies should use International Accounting Standards.

three unrelated companies tower plc a public company book ltd a private company and 564368

Three unrelated companies, Tower plc (a public company), Book Ltd (a private company) and Holdings plc (a quoted investment company) have summarised balance sheets, as on 30 June 1985, as set out below with relevant additional information.

  1. Tower plc

£m

£m

Share capital

2.0

Fixed assets

3.3

Share premium account

0.5

Revaluation reserves

1.0

Net current assets

2.7

Profit and loss account

2.5

6.0

6.0

  1. A partial revaluation of fixed assets took place during the year with the following result:

£m

Surplus on land

0.65

Surplus on buildings

0.35

Surplus on plant and machinery

0.10

Deficit on fixtures and fittings

(0.10)

1.00

The directors consider that the value of the remaining fixed assets not revalued is equal to their net book amounts.

(2) Depreciation is provided at 2% on buildings, 15% on plant and machinery, and 20% on fixtures and fittings. All fixed assets are depreciated for the full year on the cost or revalued amounts.

(3) Fixed assets comprise:

£m

Land

1.2

Buildings

0.8

Plant and machinery

0.8

Fixtures and fittings

0.3

Development costs

0.2

3.3

  1. Book Ltd – Current Cost Balance Sheet

£000

£000

£000

45

Fixed assets

50

Current cost reserve

40

Investment in Worm Ltd

40

Retained profit

55

Current assets

Stock

10

Long term work in progress

30

40

Cash

10

50

140

140

(1) No provision has yet been made for the losses of the subsidiary, Worm Ltd. It is estimated that the net assets of Worm Ltd in which Book Ltd has an interest of 60% are £50000.

  1. The current cost reserve comprises:

£000

CCA adjustments passed through profit and loss account

13

Uplift of fixed assets to CCA values

27

40

(3) Long term work in progress includes a profit element of £6000 calculated in accordance with SSAP 9.

(c) Holdings plc

£000

£000

£000

Share capital

650

Fixed assets

Share premium

325

Tangible

20

Reserves

4 380

Investments

5647

Current assets

Debtors

98

Investments

2436

Cash

147

2681

Creditors falling due

within 1 year

1793

888

6555

Creditors falling due in

more than 1 year

(936)

Provisions

(264)

5355

5355

Reserves consist of:

£000

Unrealised capital losses

(48)

Unrealised revenue profits

140

Unrealised revenue losses

(17)

Realised capital profits

2 890

Realised capital losses

(1 241)

Realised revenue profits

2 666

Realised revenue losses

(10)

4380

Requirements

(a) State concisely, for each of the three types of company mentioned, the principles for calculating distributable profits under the Companies Act 1980 (now part of the Companies Act 1985).

(b) Calculate for each of the three companies the maximum legally distributable profits.

(c) Discuss the reasons why it is not normally commercially or practically desirable to make the maximum distribution.

the balance sheet of omega as at 30 september 1992 contained the following balances 564369

The balance sheet of Omega as at 30 September 1992 contained the following balances and notes:

£000

Share capital

10 000

Reserves:

Share premium

Note 1

1 000

Revaluation reserve

Note 2

1 780

Other Reserves:

Merger reserve

Note 3

550

Profit and loss account – 1992

Note 4

1 940

Profit and loss account b/f

(200)

Capital and reserves

15 070

Liabilities

15 070

Total assets

30 140

Note 1 The share premium arose on the issue of shares on 1 October 1989.

Note 2 The revaluation reserve arose as a result of a revaluation of certain of the fixed assets on 1 October 1991. It comprises a gain of £2 000 000 on the revaluation of plant and machinery, which is the balance remaining after the transfer to the profit and loss account of £200 000 representing the depreciation on the revaluation surplus; and a loss of £220 000 arising from the revaluation of office premises. The directors propose to revalue the remaining fixed assets which currently appear at historic cost in a subsequent financial year.

Note 3 The merger reserve represented the premium of £1 450 000 on shares issued on the acquisition on 1 October 1991 of a subsidiary, Alpha plc, in accordance with the merger provisions of the Companies Act 1985 less goodwill of £900 000 arising on a separate transaction. The goodwill has an estimated useful economic life of 15 years.

Note 4 The profit and loss account balance is the balance after:

(i) Writing off the total acquisition goodwill of £400 000 arising on the acquisition on 1 October 1991 of an unincorporated business carried on by Beta Associates. The estimated useful economic life of the goodwill is 10 years.

(ii) Creating a provision of £1 200 000 representing a permanent diminution in the value of a subsidiary, Gamma plc.

(iii) The transfer of the £200 000 mentioned in Note 2 from the revaluation reserve to the profit and loss account representing the amount by which the total depreciation charge for the year exceeded the amount that would have been provided if the plant had not been revalued.

(iv) Crediting an exchange gain of £38 000 that arose on the translation of a long term loan taken out in French francs on 1 October 1991. The loan was taken out to use in the United Kingdom because the interest rate was favourable at the date the loan was raised.

Required

(a) Calculate the amount of distributable profit for Omega on the basis that it is:

(i) A public company.

(ii) An investment company.

(b) Explain briefly:

(i) The disclosure requirements relating to distributable profits in a single company and group context.

(ii) The effect on the distributable profits of the holding company if the group has sufficient distributable profits in aggregate to make a distribution to the holding company’s shareholders but the holding company itself has insufficient distributable profits.

(iii) The effect on the distributable profits of the holding company if the holding company has sold one subsidiary company to another subsidiary for a consideration that exceeds the carrying value of the investment in the holding company’s accounts.

(iv) The effect on the distributable profits of the holding company if a subsidiary company which has a coterminous accounting period declares a dividend after the end of the holding company’s year end.

x ltd is a retail supermarket chain which regularly constructs its own superstores d 564372

X Ltd is a retail supermarket chain which regularly constructs its own superstores. During the year ending 31 December 1995, X Ltd began work on a new site.

On 1 January 1995, a leasehold interest in the site (of 50 years) was purchased for £20 million.

It was considered that a further £10 million would be required to build and fit the superstore. £6 million of the additional £10 million would be spent on the construction of the building and £4 million on fixtures and fittings. Past experience has led the management of X Ltd to believe that the fixtures and fittings would have an average useful economic life of ten years from first use before requiring replacement.

On 1 January 1995, X Ltd borrowed £30 million to finance the project. The £30 million carries no interest but is repayable on 31 December 1997 at a premium of £9.93 million (i.e. £39.93 million is to be repaid in total).

The superstore is to be brought into use on 1 January 1996.

Requirements

(a) Set out the arguments for and against the capitalisation of borrowing costs on constructed fixed assets.

(b) Assuming that borrowing costs ARE capitalised where appropriate, calculate:

(i) the total amount to be included in fixed assets in respect of the development at 31 December 1995, and

(ii) the total amount to be charged to the profit and loss account in respect of the development for the year ending 31 December 1996.

Present value factors are shown below.

Years t

Present value of £1 to be

received after t years

5%

10%

15%

1

0.952

0.909

0.87

2

0.907

0.826

0.756

3

0.864

0.751

0.658

4

0.823

0.683

0.572

5

0.784

0.621

0.497

compute the amounts which will be included in fixed assets in respect of the stores 564373

C & R plc is a large company which operates a number of retail stores throughout the United Kingdom. The company makes up financial statements to 30 September each year.

On 1 October 1996 the company purchased two plots of land at two different locations, and commenced the construction of two retail stores. The construction was completed on 1 October 1997.

Details of the costs incurred to construct the stores are as follows:

Location A

Location B

£000

£000

Cost of land

500

700

Cost of building materials

500

550

Direct labour

100

150

Site overheads

100

100

Fixtures and fittings

200

200

The construction of the stores was financed out of the proceeds of issue of a £10 million zero coupon bond on 1 October 1996. The bond is redeemable at a price of £25 937 000 on 30 September 2006. This represents the one and only payment to the holders of the bond.

Both stores were brought into use on 1 October 1997. The store at Location A was used by C & R plc but, due to a change of plan, the store at Location B was let to another retailer at a commercial rent.

It is the policy of C & R plc to depreciate freehold properties over their anticipated useful life of 50 years, and to depreciate fixtures and fittings over 10 years. The cost of such properties (including fixtures and fittings) should include finance costs, where this is permitted by the regulatory framework in the United Kingdom.

Requirements

(a) Compute the amounts which will be included in fixed assets in respect of the stores at Locations A and B on 30 September 1997.

Give full explanations for the amounts you have included.

(b) Compute the charge to the profit and loss account for depreciation on the fixed assets at the two locations for the year to 30 September 1998, stating clearly the reasons for your answers.

rose ltd operates a number of retail shops of which goods are invoiced at wholesale 564306

Rose Ltd operates a number of retail shops of which goods are invoiced at wholesale price which is cost plus 25% shops sell the goods at the list price which is cost plus 100% from the following particulars. Prepare the necessary ledger accounts:

Rs

Opening Stock at Shops

600

Goods sent to Shops

2,40,000

Goods returned by Shops

2,400

Goods sold at Shops

1,56,000

Goods returned by Customers at Shops

6,000

Goods destroyed by Accident (Retail Value)

1,920

Expenses at the Shop

30,450

show the adjustment entries in the books of the h o and the nagpur branch as at the 564313

A D.T.H. Company having its H.O. in Mumbai with branches at Nagpur and Pune closes its annual accounts on Mar 31. When the following transactions took place:

  1. Remittances of Rs 50,000 made by Nagpur Branch to its H.O. on Mar 29 received by the H.O. on Apr 3.
  2. Dish antennas valuing Rs 40,000 despatched by Pune Branch on Mar 28 (under instructions from H.O.) received by the Nagpur Branch on Mar 30.
  3. Depreciation amounting to Rs 720 on Nagpur Branch fixed assets when accounts of fixed assets are maintained at the H.O.
  4. Dish worth Rs 60,000 despatched by H.O. on Mar 29, received by Pune Branch on Apr 3.

Show the adjustment entries in the books of the H.O. and the Nagpur Branch as at the close of the year (Ignore Narrations).

show out the journal entry that the h o would pass on june 30 2008 showing the worki 564314

Healthy Pharmaceuticals Ltd., Shimla has branches at Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai and Kolkata. These branches are allowed transactions INTERSE under advice to H.O. Following are the inter branch transactions for the month of June 2008.

I Delhi Branch

  1. Sent goods to Mumbai Rs 5,000; Chennai Rs 8,000 and Kolkata Rs 13,000
  2. Drawn bills on Mumbai Rs 3,000; Chennai Rs 5,000 and Kolkata Rs 9,000
  3. Received goods from Mumbai Rs 15,000; Chennai Rs 9,000 and Kolkata Rs 20,000
  4. Bills accepted from Mumbai Rs 3,000; Chennai Rs 5,000 and Kolkata Rs 8,000

II Mumbai Branch: (in addition to transactions as aforesaid)

  1. Sent goods to Chennai Rs 32,000; Kolkata Rs 30,000
  2. Drawn bills on Chennai Rs 17,000; Kolkata Rs 7,000
  3. Received goods from Chennai Rs 12,000; Kolkata Rs 10,000
  4. Accepted bills drawn by Chennai Rs 3,500; Kolkata Rs 6,000

III Chennai Branch: (in addition to transactions as aforesaid)

  1. Goods sent to Kolkata Rs 5,000
  2. Bills drawn on Kolkata Rs 3,000
  3. Goods received from Kolkata Rs 7,500
  4. Bills accepted, drawn by Kolkata Rs 9,000

Show out the Journal entry that the H.O. would pass on June 30, 2008, showing the working out of the net figures in a tabular form.

the following is the trial balance of the goa branch as of sep 30 2008 564315

The following is the Trial Balance of the Goa Branch as of Sep 30, 2008.

Trial Balance of Goa Branch as at 30, Sep 30, 2008

Rs

Rs

H.O. Head Office account

16,200

Stock on October 1, 2007

30,000

Purchases

89,000

Goods received from H.O.

45,000

Sales

1,90,000

Goods supplied to H.O.

30,000

Salaries

7,500

Debtors

18,500

Creditors

9,250

Rent

4,800

Office expenses

2,350

Cash in hand Hand and at Bank

8,900

Furniture

7,000

_____

2,29,250

2,29,250

Additional Information

  1. Stock on hand was valued at Rs 13,500.
  2. The Branch Account in the H.O. Books on Sep 30, 2008 stood at Rs 2,300 (Dr.).
  3. On Sep 27, 2008, the H.O. forwarded goods to the values of Rs 12,500 to the branch, where they were received on Oct 5, 2008.
  4. A cash remittance of Rs 6,000 on Sep 28 was received by H.O. on Oct 3, 2008.

Required

  1. Journal entries required to incorporate the above figures.
  2. The results of trading at the branch separately in the books of H.O.
  3. Goa Branch Account in the books of H.O.

you are required to prepare the trichy branch trading and profit and loss account an 564316

Vasudev, a Chennai trader opens a new branch in Trichy which trades independently of the H.O. The transactions of the branch for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 are as follows:

Rs

Goods Supplied by H.O.

40,000

Purchases from Outsides:

Credit:

31,000

Cash:

6,000

37,000

Sales Credit:

50,000

Cash:

9,200

59,200

Cash received from Customers

60,800

Cash paid to Creditors

28,400

Expenses paid by the Branch

17,900

Furniture and Fixtures purchased by Branch on Credit

7,000

Cash received from H.O. initially

8,000

Remittances to H.O.

22,000

Additional Information

  1. The accounts of the branch fixed assets are maintained at H.O. Books
  2. Write off depreciation on furniture @ 5% p.a.
  3. The branch remitted on Mar 29, 2009 Rs 4,000 was received by the H.O. on Apr 2, 2009
  4. The branch closing stock is valued at Rs 24,000.

You are required to prepare the Trichy Branch Trading and Profit and Loss Account and the Trichy Branch Account in the H.O. Books and H.O. Account in the books of the Branch after incorporation of the branch Trial Balance.

a trader of chennai had a branch in kolkata the branch gets goods partly from chenna 564317

A trader of Chennai had a branch in Kolkata. The branch gets goods partly from Chennai H.O. and partly from outsiders. The branch keeps a separate set of books. The following balances were extracted.

Chennai H.O.

Kolkata Branch

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Capital

2,00,000

Plant and Machinery

1,40,000

Furniture and Fixtures

25,000

12,500

Loose Tools

20,000

9,000

Profit and Loss Account

Jan 1, 2008

17,500

Debtors and Creditors

1,15,000

27,500

5,000

12,500

Cash in Hand

2,500

1,400

Cash at Bank

7,500

3,000

Purchase and Sales

3,00,000

4,05,000

56,000

1,22,500

Salaries and Wages

15,000

8,000

Rent

7,500

4,250

General Expenses

2,500

3,750

Goods from H.O. to Branch

45,000

40,000

Current Account

35,000

27,900

Opening Stock

25,000

20,000

(Jan 1, 2008)

6,95,000

6,95,000

1,62,900

1,62,900

The difference between the balances of H.O. Current Account and Branch Account is due to goods and cheques in transit as at the date of preparation of Trial Balance. Tent of B.O. remains unpaid Rs 75. Plant, furniture and loose tools are to be depreciated at 10% p.a., 15% p.a. and 20% p.a., respectively. Stocks in trade valued on Dec 31, 2008 were as follows:

H.O.: Rs 32,500

B.O.: Rs 17,500

Prepare a Combined Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet on that date.

the following are the respective trial balance of the h o and the branch as on mar 3 564318

Raj Ltd having H.O. in Chennai has a Branch at Kolkata where a complete set of books is maintained. All purchases are made at Chennai and stock required by the branch is invoiced to it by H.O. at selling price less 15%. The branch manager is entitled to a commission equal to one third of net profit earned by the branch on the basis of invoice price. The following are the respective trial balance of the H.O. and the branch as on Mar 31, 2009.

Particulars

H O.

Branch

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Capital

47,100

Sundry Debtors and Creditors

44,850

12,300

3,775

3,075

Stock at the beginning at Cost:

H.O.

62,075

Stock at the beginning at

18,135

18,135

Branch as invoiced

Salaries

17,640

7,340

Sundry Expenses

8,085

1,145

Branch Account

11,615

Cash on Hand and at Bank

12,400

1,630

Furniture

7,500

1,000

Sales

2,05,080

84,100

3,33,865

3,33,865

87,175

87,175

The cost of price invoiced to Kolkata was Rs 40,950. The stock in hand at the end of the year at Chennai was valued at Rs 22,635 at cost and at Kolkata Rs 7,080 at cost and Rs 8,830 at invoice price. The difference between the adjustment accounts is due to remittance in transit from the branch to H.O. You are required to prepare the Trading and Profit and Lost Account for the year enduring on Mar 31, 2009 in Columnar Form and the Consolidated Balance Sheet at that date.

set out the balance sheet of the business as on mar 31 2009 and the journal entries 564319

The H.O. of a business and its branch keep their own books and each prepares its own Profit and Loss Account. The following are the balances appearing in the two sets of books as on Mar 31, 2009 after ascertainment of profit and after making all adjustments except those referred to below:

Particulars

H.O.

Branch

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Capital

2,00,000

Fixed Assets

72,000

32,000

Debtors and Creditors

15,640

7,920

9,680

3,840

Profit and Loss A/c

29,320

6,120

B.O. A/c

59,720

H.O. Account

56,040

2,37,240

2,37,240

66,000

66,000

Set out the Balance Sheet of the business as on Mar 31, 2009 and the Journal entries necessary (in both sets of books) to record the adjustments dealing with the following:

  1. On Mar 30, 2009, the branch had sent a cheque for Rs 2,000 to the H.O., neither received by H.O. nor credited to branch A/c till Apr 5, 2009.
  2. Goods valued at Rs 1,680 had been forwarded by the H.O. to the branch and invoiced on Mar 28, 2009, but were neither received by the branch nor dealt with in branch’s books till Apr 9, 2009.
  3. The profit shown by the branch to be transferred to the H.O. books.
  4. Branch assets and liabilities are to be recorded in the H.O. books.

state whether the following statements are true or false 564320

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Branch accounting is concerned with recording of transactions of different branches in respect of their association with the H.O., with other branches as well with outsiders.
  2. Dependent branches are mere selling agencies and are controlled by the H.O.
  3. Goods supplied to branches for sale are always invoiced at market price only.
  4. Dependent branches perform accounting functions for themselves.
  5. A branch account is a combination of real accounts and nominal accounts.
  6. Petty expenses paid by the branch manager out of cash in hand in the branch are not shown in the branch account.
  7. Usually, dependent branches do not sell goods on credit.
  8. Entities have to be made in the branch account in respect of sales returns and discount allowed.
  9. When goods are transferred between H.O. and branches at a price above cost, it is termed as “loaded price.”
  10. Credit purchases would appear in the branch account.
  11. Credit sales would not affect the branch account directly.
  12. Under Debtors System, control over the stock can be exercised effectively.
  13. Under Stock Debtors System, all items are entered in the branch stock account at loaded price only.
  14. When the stock appears at the loaded price, it is essential to open Stock Reserve Account.
  15. Normal loss affects both gross profit and net profit.
  16. Abnormal loss affects only gross profit.
  17. Independent branches also operate within the framework of broad policies laid down by the H.O.
  18. Goods in transit appear as an asset in the balance sheet.
  19. Cash in transit is a liability.
  20. Goods returned by customers direct to branch are recorded in branch account.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 564321

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. _______ branches are situated in the same country, where H.O. is situated.
  2. _______ branches cannot procure goods from local sources.
  3. To meet incidental expenses, branch managers are supplied with petty cash on _________ system.
  4. Dependent branches keep only _______ records.
  5. _______ branches do not perform accounting functions for themselves.
  6. Generally, a branch account is a combination of real and ________ accounts.
  7. Sales returns, bad debts, discounts allowed do not appear in the _________ under Debtors system.
  8. To ascertain missing figure in respect of debtors, _________ A/c is prepared.
  9. A profit margin of 20% on sale price is equal to ________% profit on cost.
  10. Under Debtors system, H.O. can calculate only ________ profit.
  11. ________ and ________ purchases would not appear in the branch account.
  12. The important limitation of Debtors system is the absence of control over ________.
  13. Normal and abnormal losses are not adjusted with stock in the _______ Account under Debtors system.
  14. Branch Stock Account is a ______ account in nature, under Stock Debtors System.
  15. Branch Stock Account is always prepared at __________ price under Stock Debtors System.
  16. Invoice Price = Cost + ________.
  17. Branch profit/loss is transferred to __________ Account.
  18. Normal loss is a ________ charge, affects only the gross profit.
  19. The stock reserve will be equal to the difference between the wholesale price and _________.
  20. Goods in transit and cash in transit are to be treated as _________ and hence they are shown in the balance sheet.

from the following information prepare branch account in the books of h o 564325

Raj & Co had a branch at Delhi. Goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 25%. Branch is instructed to deposit cash everyday in the H.O. account with the bank. All expenses are paid by cheques by the H.O. except petty cash expenses which are paid by the branch manager. From the following information prepare branch account in the books of H.O.:

Rs

Stock on Jan 1, 2009

7,500

Stock on Dec 31, 2009

9,000

Sundry Debtors on Jan 1, 2009

4,200

Sundry Debtors on Dec 31, 2009

5,400

Cash Sales for the year 2009

32,400

Credit Sales for the year 2009

21,000

Cash remitted to the H.O.

45,000

Furniture purchased by the Branch Manager

3,600

Goods invoiced from the H.O.

54,600

Expenses paid by the H.O.

4,920

Expenses paid by the Branch

360

it was required to write off furniture 10 p a no depreciation is provided on additio 564326

Gain & Co. had a branch at Tiruchirapalli. You are required to prepare branch account in the books of Gani & Co. to ascertain profit made at Tiruchirapalli branch. Transactions during the year ending Mar 31, 2009 were as follows:

Rs

As

Stock at Cost on Apr 1, 2008

4,000

Stock on Mar 31, 2009 with Branch

3,500

Furniture on Apr 1, 2008

2,000

Expenses paid by H.O.

5,300

Goods sent to Branch at Cost

65,000

Goods returned by Branch

5,000

Cash Sales made by Branch

90.500

Expenses still Outstanding at End

500

Furniture purchased by the Branch with permission from the H.O.

1.200

It was required to write off furniture @ 10% p.a. No depreciation is provided on additions during the year.

a trader has a branch at surat to which goods are invoiced at cost plus 20 prepare a 564328

A trader has a branch at Surat to which goods are invoiced at cost plus 20%. Prepare a branch account in H.O. books from the following particulars:

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock at Branch

1,20,000

Branch Expenses paid by H.O.

15,000

Cash Sales at Branch

87,500

Branch Expenses Branch

30,000

Credit Sales

2,05,000

Expenses Unpaid

7,000

Collection from Debtors

1,89,500

Closing Stock at Branch

90,000

Cash received from H.O.

1,50,000

Closing Balance of Debtors

45,800

Goods in Transit from H.O.

18,000

show the branch gross profit for the three months ended on dec 31 2009 564329

Mr. V.R. with H.O. at Delhi who carried on a retail trade opened a branch at Nagpur on Oct 1, 2009 where all sales were on credit basis. All cash collected was immediately remitted to H.O. All goods required by the branch were supplied from H.O. and were invoiced to the branch at 10% above cost. The following were the transactions:

Oct

Nov

Dec

Transaction

Rs

Rs

Rs

Goods sent to Branch (Purchase Price)

20,000

25,000

30,000

Sales as shown by the Branch Monthly Report

19,000

21,000

27,500

Closing Debtors

9,000

4,500

14,500

Returns to H.O. (Invoice Price to Branch)

600

300

1,200

The stock of the goods held by the branch on Dec 31, 2009 amounted to Rs 26,700 at invoice price to branch. Record these transactions in the H.O. books. Show the branch gross profit for the three months ended on Dec 31, 2009.

prepare i branch account ii branch stock account iii branch debtors account iv branc 564331

Shimla H.O. supplies goods to its branch at Chennai at invoice price which is cost plus 50%. All cash received by the branch is remitted to Shimla and all branch expenses are paid by H.O. From the following particulars related to Chennai branch for the year 2009, prepare (i) Branch Account, (ii) Branch Stock Account, (iii) Branch Debtors Account, (iv) Branch Adjustment Account and (v) Branch Expenses Account to ascertain Gross Profit and Net Profit made by the Branch:

Rs

Rs

Stock with Branch on Jan 1, 2009

30,000

Allowance to Customers

1,000

Branch Debtors on Jan 1,2009

6,000

off Selling Price

Petty Cash Balance on Jan 1, 2009

50

(already adjusted on invoicing)

Goods received from H.O.

93,000

Expenses (Cash paid by H.0.)

(at Invoice Price)

Rent

1,200

Goods returned to HO.

1,500

Salaries

12,000

Credit Sales Less Returns

42,000

Petty Cash

500

Cash received from Debtors

45,000

Stock with Branch on Dec

Discount allowed to Debtors

1,200

31,2009 at Invoice Price

27,000

Cash Sales

52,000

Petty Cash balance on Dec 31, 2009

50

Note: Allowance to customers may be treated as sales promotional expense.

you are required to prepare the necessary ledger accounts for hyderabad branch under 564332

Mr. Rai has a branch at Hyderabad and Vijayawada and the goods are invoiced at a profit of 20% on sales. Following information is available of the transactions at Hyderabad branch for the year ending Dec 31, 2009:

Transaction

As on Jan 1, 2009 Rs

As on Dec 31, 2009 Rs

Stock at Invoice Price

1,20,000

?

Debtors

36,000

33,000

Petty Cash

450

750

Transactions during the year 2009:

Rs

Rs

Goods sent to Branch

12,60,000

Goods returned to H.O.

45,000

at Invoice Price

Credit Sales:

5,40,000

Cash Sales

3,15,000

Goods Pilfered (at Invoice Price)

9,000

Normal Loss at Invoice Price

1,050

Cash sent for Petty Expenses

96,000

Goods Lost by Fire at Invoice Price

12,000

Bad Debts at Hyderabad Branch

1,200

Insurance Company paid to H.O. for Loss by Fire at Hyderabad

9,000

insurance Charges paid by H.O.

600

Goods transferred to Vijayawada

36,000

Branch as per instructions by H.O.

Goods returned by Debtors

1,500

Note: Goods transferred to Vijayawada Branch were in transit (as given above) on Dec 31, 2009.

You are required to prepare the necessary ledger accounts for Hyderabad Branch under Stock and Debtors System in the books of H.O.

you are required to record the above instructions in the books of the h o on the bas 564333

Mr. X of Surat has a branch at Jaipur. Goods are sent at invoice price which is fixed at a profit of 20% on sale under the strict instructions of selling goods only at invoice price. Goods are fully insured against fire and theft. Following are the transactions in respect of Jaipur Branch:

Rs

Rs

Opening Balance of Stock

20,000

Loss by Fire (Cost Price)

15,000

Opening Balance of Debtors

6,000

Stock at End (Invoice Price)

7,000

Closing Balance of Debtors

7,000

Cash received from Debtors

89,000

Goods received from H.O.

2,50,000

Goods returned to H.O.

10,000

(at Invoice Price)

Direct Expenses paid by H.O.

6,500

Indirect Expenses paid by H.O.

14,000

Cash sales: 62.5% of Total Sales

You are required to record the above instructions in the books of the H.O. on the basis of Stock and Debtors System and calculate the net profit of the branch.

from the following particulars prepare the branch stock account and the branch profi 564334

VRS Ltd of Chennai invoices goods to its branch at Bangalore at cost plus 33 1/3%. From the following particulars, prepare the Branch Stock Account and the Branch Profit and Loss Account as they would appear in the books of H.O.:

Rs

Stock at Commencement at Branch at Invoice Price

37,500

Stock at Close at Branch at Invoice Price

30,000

Goods sent to Branch during the year at Invoice Price

2,50,000

(includes Goods invoiced at Rs 5,000 to Branch on Dec 31, 2009 but not received by the Branch before the close of the year)

Return of Goods to H.O. (at Invoice Price)

12,500

Credit Sales at Branch

2,25,000

Cash Sales at Branch

12,500

Invoice Value of Goods Preferred

2,500

Normal Loss at Branch due to Wastage and Deterioration of Stock (Invoice Price)

3,750

VRS Ltd closes its books on Dec 31, 2009

you are required to prepare the following accounts in the books of hemant amp co for 564335

Hemant & Co operates a number of retail outlets to which goods are invoiced at wholesale price which is cost plus 25%. These outlets sell the goods at the retail price which is wholesale price plus 20%. Following is the information regarding one of the outlets for the year ending Mar 31, 2010:

Rs

Stock at the Outlet Apr 1, 2009

90,000

Goods Invoiced to the Outlet during the year

9,72,000

Gross Profit made by the Outlet

1,80,000

Goods Lost by Fire

?

Expenses of the Outlet for the year

60,000

Stock at the Outlet Mar 31, 2010

1,08,000

You are required to prepare the following accounts in the books of Hemant & Co for the year ended Mar 31, 2010: (i) Outlet Stock Account, (ii) Outlet Profit and Loss Account, (iii) Stock Reserve Account

good luck ltd chennai had its branches at delhi and kanpur it charged goods to branc 564336

Good Luck Ltd. Chennai had its branches at Delhi and Kanpur. It charged goods to branches at cost plus 25%. Following information is available of the transactions of the Delhi branch for the year ended on Dec 31.

Balance on Jan 1: Stock Rs 60,000; Debtors Rs 20,000; Petty Cash Rs 100.

Rs

Goods sent to Delhi Branch at Invoice Price

6,50,000

Goods returned to H.O. at Invoice Price

20,000

Cash Sales

2,00,000

Credit Sales

3,50,000

Goods Pilfered (Invoice Price)

4,000

Goods Lost in Fire (Invoice Price)

10,000

Insurance co. paid to H.O. for Loss by Fire at Delhi

6,000

Cash sent for Petty Expenses

68,000

Bad Debts at Branch

1,000

Goods transferred to Kanpur Branch under H.O. Advice

30,000

Insurance Charges paid by H.O.

1,000

Goods returned by Debtors

1,000

Balance on Dec 31: Petty cash Rs 460; Debtors Rs 28,000

Goods worth Rs 30,000 (as above) sent by Delhi branch to Kanpur branch was in transit on Dec 31. Show the following accounts in the books of Good Luck Ltd:

(i) Delhi Branch Account, (ii) Delhi Branch Debtors Account, (iii) Delhi Branch Adjustment Account, (iv) Stock Reserve Account, (vi) Goods sent to Delhi Branch

from the following particular prepare noida branch account showing profit or loss 564286

From the following particular, prepare Noida Branch Account showing profit or loss:

Opening Stock at the Branch

Rs

Goods sent to Branch

37,500

Expenses

1,12,500

Salaries

12,500

Rent

400

Other Expenses

940

Sales (cash)

1,50,000

Closing Stock could not be ascertained but it is known that the branch usually sells goods at cost plus 20%. The branch manager entitled to a commission of 5% of profit of branch after charging commission.

prepare the branch account in the books of h o for six months ending on sep 30 2008 564287

Swastika Ltd. of Shimla has a branch at Cochin. Goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 25%. The branch does not maintain account books and all collection at the branch are remitted to H.O. The expenses of the branch are remitted to H.O. The expenses of the branch are reimbursed by the office. From the following particulars, prepare the branch account in the books of H.O. for six months ending on Sep 30, 2008.

Apr 1, 2008

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock

27,500

Bills receivable received

7,500

From customers at branch

Opening Debtors

7,500

Bad Debts

200

Opening Furniture

6,000

Trade discount to Customers

6,000

(already taken into account while invoicing)

Opening Petty Cash

250

Transactions for six months

Goods received from

1,12,500

Goods sent to Branch on

750

H.0 at Cost

Sep 28, 2008 but received by

Branch on Oct 7. 2008

Cash Sales

97,500

Credit Sales

40,000

Cash sent to Branch for expenses

5,250

Goods returned to H.O.

6,375

Cash Discount allowed to

400

Customers

Cash received from Debtors

25,000

Balances on Sep 30, 2008

Sales Return by Customers to

250

Stock in Hand

2,800

Branch

Debtors

?

Petty Cash

250

Depreciate Furniture at 20 % p.a.

Branch manager is entitled to a commission of 5% of profit of the branch after charging such commission.

goods costing rs 1 250 were damaged in transit and a sum of rs 1 000 was recovered f 564288

From the following details relating to Delhi Branch for the year ending Mar 31, 2009, prepare the branch account in the books of Surat H.O.

Rs

Rs

Stock on Apr 1. 2008

12.500

Cash received from Debtors

32500

Debtors on Apr 1, 2008

5,000

Cash paid by Debtors direct to H.O.

2500

Furniture on Apr 1, 2008

3,000

Good returned by the Branch

1000

Petty Cash on Apr 1,2008

500

Good returned by the Debtors

500

Insurance Prepaid on Apt 1, 2008

150

Cash sent to Branch for Expenses:

Salaries Outstanding on Apr 1, 2008

2,000

Rent Rs 400 per ( month

4800

2008 2009

Salary Rs 2,000 per month

2400

Petty Cash

1000

Goods sent during the Year

1,00,000

Insurance up to june 2009

600

Cash Sales during the year

1,35,000

Stock on Mar 31,2009

7500

Total Sales

1,75,000

Petty Cash Expenses

1,100

Discount allowed to Debtors

250

Goods costing Rs 1,250 were damaged in transit and a sum of Rs 1,000 was recovered from the insurance company in full settlement of the claim. Depreciation on furniture @ 10% p.a.

the following information relates to delhi branch for the year ending on mar 31 2009 564289

Mrs. Shree opened a hosiery company, dealing in inner garments in Tiruppur, Tamil Nadu and has opened several branch shops at Chennai, Mumbai, Kolkatta and Delhi. All the purchasing and administration is done at Tiruppur Tamil Nadu H.O. only. Branches sell goods both for cash and on credit terms. The branches are expected to make a profit of 25% on cost price to H.O. The following information relates to Delhi Branch for the year ending on Mar 31, 2009.

Rs

Opening Stock of Goods (at cost to H.O.)

1,12,000

Opening Debtors

40,000

Goods received by Branch at Selling Price

7,50,000

Transfer from Chennai Branch at Selling Price

30,000

Cash Sales

7,10,000

Credit Sales

1,50,000

Goods returned to Mumbai Branch at Selling Price

30,000

Debtors at the End

52,000

Bad Debts written off

5,000

Goods returned by Credit Customers of

3,000

Delhi Branch direct to Tiruppur H.O.

Expenses at the Branch

96,000

Normal Pilferage at Selling Price

10,400

Additional Information

  1. Goods amounting to Rs 20,000 at cost of H.O. reached Delhi Branch on Apr 3, 2009.
  2. Delhi Branch had on Apr 1, 2008 laptop and other accessories at a book value of Rs 1,50,000. Depreciation at 10% p.a. is to be provided on this.

You are required to prepare

  1. Branch Stock Account
  2. Branch Debtors Account

from the following particulars show branch account as maintained by the h o showing 564290

Kolkata H.O. of a company invoices goods to its Nagpur Branch at cost plus 20%. The branch purchases goods from local sources also for which payments are made by the H.O. All cash collected by the branch is banked on the same day to the credit of the H.O. except for a petty cash account maintained by the branch for which periodic transfers are made from the H.O.

From the following particulars, show branch account as maintained by the H.O. showing the profit for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

Imprest Cash:

Rs

On Apr 1, 2008

4,000

On Mar 31, 2009

3,700

Debtors on Apr 1, 2008

50,000

Stock on Apr 1, 2008:

(i) Transferred from H.O. at Invoice Price

48,000

(ii) Direct purchases made by the Branch

32,000

During 2008–2009:

Rs

Cash Sales

90,000

Credit Sales

2,60,000

Direct Purchases made by the Branch

90,000

Goods returned by Customers

6,000

Goods sent to Branch from H.O. at Invoice Price

1,20,000

Goods transferred to Branch from H.O. for petty Cash expenses

5,000

Bad Debts

2,000

Discount allowed to Customers

4,000

Cash received from Customer

2,50,000

Branch Expenses

60,000

Stock on Mar 31, 2009:

(i) Transferred from H.O. at Invoice Price

36,000

(ii) Direct Purchases made by the Branch

24,000

from the following balances as shown by the books prepare branch account 564291

Guber Ltd. has a H.O. at Chennai and retail branches across the country which are supplied goods from the H.O. at 20% profit on sale price. Accounts are kept at H.O. from where all expenses (except petty) are paid. Petty expenses are paid by the branches that are allowed to maintain petty cash balance of Rs 600 on Imp rest system. From the following balances, as shown by the books, prepare branch account.

Balances on Jan 1, 2008

Rs

Petty Cash in Hand at Branch

600

Stock in Hand at Branch at Sales Price

40,000

Sundry Debtors

8,000

Sundry Creditors

2,400

Furniture

16,000

Rent paid up to Mar 31, 2008

600

Transactions during the year 2008:

Goods sent to Branch (Less: return)

2,08,000

Cash Sales at Branch

1,60,000

Credit Sales at Branch

90,000

Allowances to Debtors

1,000

Cash received from Customers

80,000

Bad debts to be written off

400

Cash Purchases by the Branch (with permission)

21,000

Cash paid to Creditors

16,000

Creditors at the end

6,000

Payment by Branch Petty Expenses

360

Payment made by H.O.

Rent for one year (paid) on Apr 1, 2008

3,600

Salaries

4,000

Insurance paid for the year ending Mar 31, 2009

720

Balance on Dec 31, 2008

Stock at Cost

60,000

Write off 10% Depreciation on Furniture

show necessary ledger accounts in the books of h o and calculate the profit and loss 564292

VRV Ltd., Delhi has a branch in Chennai to which goods are sent @ 20% above cost. The branch sells goods at cash and credit basis. Branch expenses are met partly from H.O. and partly by the branch. Following further details are given for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Cost of Goods sent to Branch at cost

1,00,000

Goods received by Branch at Invoice Price

1,10,000

Credit Sales for the year at Invoice Price

82,000

Cash Sales for the year at Invoice Price

29,000

Cash remitted to H.O.

1,11,250

Expenses paid by H.O.

6,000

Bad Debts written off

375

Balances as on

Jan 1, 2008

Dec 31, 2008

Rs

Rs

Stock

12,500 (cost)

14,000 (Invoice Price)

Debtors

16,375

13,000

Cash in Hand

2,500

1,250

Show necessary ledger accounts in the books of H.O. and calculate the profit and loss of the branch for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 under:

  1. Debtors Method
  2. Stock and Debtors Method

you are required to prepare the branch stock account and branch adjustment account a 564293

Renu of Chennai has a branch in Delhi. Goods sent to the branch are invoiced at selling price, i.e. cost plus 33?%. From the following particulars, you are required to prepare the Branch Stock Account and Branch Adjustment Account as they would appear in the books of the H.O.

Rs

Stock on Apr 1, 2008

60,000

Stock on Mar 31, 2009

48,000

Goods sent to Delhi during 2008–2009

4,00,000

At Invoice Price

Sales at Branch

On Credit

1,28,000

On Cash

3,00,000

Returns to H.O. at Invoice Price

20,000

Invoice value of goods lost by fire, not covered by Insurance

4,000

from the following particulars of the branch prepare branch stock account branch deb 564294

Mr. Khan has a retail branch at Vijayawada. Goods are sent by the H.O. to the branch market at selling price which is cost plus 25%. All expenses of the branch are paid by the H.O. All cash collected by the branch (from customers and from cash sales) is deposited to the credit of H.O. From the following particulars of the branch, prepare Branch Stock Account, Branch Debtors Account, Branch Expenses Account and Branch Adjustment Account in the books of H.O.

Rs

Debtors on Jan 1, 2008

36,000

Debtors on Dec 31, 2009

42,000

Inventory with the Branch at Invoice Price:

On Jan 1, 2008

48,000

On Dec 31, 2009

51,000

Cash Sales during the year

1,80,000

Total Amount deposited in the H.O. Account during the year

3,81,000

Returned Goods to H.O. at Invoice Price

15,000

Salaries Paid

18,000

Rent Paid

12,000

Discount allowed to Customers

6,000

Bad Debts written off

3,000

Spoilage

6,000

good wear garments sent goods to kolkata branch at cost plus 25 564295

Good Wear Garments sent goods to Kolkata Branch at cost plus 25%.

Further Information

Rs

Opening Stock at Branch at its Cost

25,000

Goods sent to Branch at its Invoice Price

1,00,000

Loss in Transit at Invoice Price

12,500

Theft (at Invoice Price)

5,000

Loss in Goods (normal) at Invoice Price

2,500

Sales

1,27,500

Expenses

40,000

Closing Stock at Branch at Cost to Branch

30,000

Claims received from the Insurance Company for Loss in Transit

10,000

Show

  1. Branch Stock Account
  2. Branch Adjustment Account
  3. Branch Profit and Loss Account

from the following particulars prepare the branch account branch stock adjustment ac 564296

VRV Ltd. invoices goods to its branch at cost plus 33?%. From the following particulars prepare the Branch Account, Branch Stock Adjustment Account and Branch Profit and Loss Account as they would appear in the books of the H.O.

Rs

Stock in Hand (opening) at the Branch

75,000

Stock in Hand (closing) at the Branch

60,000

Goods sent to Branch (including goods)

5,00,000

Invoiced at Rs 10,000 to branch on Mar

31, 2009

(Not received before the close of year)

(It closed its books on Mar 31, 2009)

Return of Goods to H.O.

25,000

Credit Sales at Branch

1,90,000

Invoice valued of goods pilfered

5,000

Normal Loss at Branch due to Wastage and determination of Stock at Invoice Value

7,500

prepare branch stock account branch debtors account and delhi branch account 564297

. Raj having a H.O. at Chennai, opened several branches at Mumbai, Delhi, Kolkata and Cochin. All the purchasing and administration is done at the H.O. Branches were also allowed to purchase locally. Branches sell both for cash and on credit terms, but all invoices for credit sales are invoices from Chennai and payments from credit customers received there. The branches are expected to achieve a profit of 50% on cost price. The following details relate to the Delhi Branch for the first six months of 2009.

Rs

Goods as on Jan 1, 2009 at branch at Cost Price

28,000

Debtors as on Jan 1, 2009 at branch

9,000

Goods received by the branch at Selling Price

1,80,000

Cash Sales

1,02,000

Credit Sales

60,000

Transfer from other branches to Delhi branch at Selling Price

12,000

Transfer to other branches to Delhi branch at Selling Price

21,000

Goods returned to H.O. at Selling Price

6,000

Cash received by H.O. from Debtors

53,000

Bad Debts written off

2,000

Goods returned by Credit Customers to Branch

2,400

Goods returned by Credit Customers to H.O.

1,200

Goods purchased by Delhi Branch from the Local Suppliers at cost

15,000

Expenses at the Branch

7,500

Stock as on June 30, 2009 at Delhi Branch

From H.O. at Selling Price

45,000

From Goods purchased locally

3,000

Further Information

  1. Goods amounting to Rs 6,000 at cost to H.O. were in transit.
  2. On Jan 1, 2009, the branch had furniture and fixtures at a book value of Rs 20,000. Depreciation at 10% is to be provided per annum.
  3. Goods purchased locally were sold at a profit of 25% on sale price.

Prepare Branch Stock Account, Branch Debtors Account and Delhi Branch Account.

from the following information show the agra branch a c for the year ending mar 31 2 564298

Rainbow & Co. a retail shop at Agra under the supervision of a manager. The ratio of gross profit sales is constant at 25% throughout the year to March 31, 2009.

Branch manager is entitled to a commission of 10% of profit earned by his branch, calculated before charging his commission but subject to a deduction from such commission equal to 25% of any ascertained deficiency of branch stock. All goods were supplied to the branch by the H.O.

From the following information, show the Agra Branch A/c for the year ending Mar 31, 2008–2009.

Rs

Stock on Apr 1, 2008 (at cost)

18,684

Goods sent to Branch (at cost)

72,420

Sales

90,320

Manager’s Commission paid on Account

600

Chargeable Expenses

12,280

Stock at the End (at Selling Price)

30,832

prepare branch stock account branch adjustment account and branch profit and loss ac 564299

Fortune Ltd. with its H.O. in Goa invoiced goods to its branch Bhubaneswar at 20% less than the catalogue price which is cost plus 50% with instructions that cash sales were to be made at invoice price and credit sales at catalogue price less discount at 15% on prompt payment. From the following particulars, prepare Branch Stock Account, Branch Adjustment Account and Branch Profit and Loss Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 in the H.O. Books.

Rs

Stock on Apr 1, 2008 (Invoice Price)

24,000

Debtors received Apr 1, 2008

20,000

Goods received from (H.O) at Invoice Price

2,64,000

Sales (Cash)

92,000

Sales (Credit)

2,00,000

Cash received from Debtors

1,71,270

Discount allowed to Debtors

26,730

Expenses at the Branch

12,000

Remittances to H.O.

2,40,000

Debtors on Mar 31, 2009

22,000

Cash in Hand on Mar 31, 2009

11,270

Stock on Mar 31, 2009

30,000

It was further provided that a part of the stock was lost by fire (not covered by insurance) during the year whose value is to be ascertained and a provision should be made for discount to be allowed to debtors as on Mar 31, 2009, on the basis of year’s trend of prompt payment.

prepare the branch trading and profit and loss account for the year ending on mar 31 564300

A Surat merchant has a branch at Tiruchirapalli (TN) to which charges the goods at cost plus 25%. The Tiruchirapalli Branch keeps its own sales ledger and transmits all cash received to the H.O. every day. All expenses are paid from the H.O. The transactions were as follows:

Rs

Stock on Apr 1, 2009

80,000

Debtors on Apr 1, 2008

800

Rs

Petty Cash

800

Cash Sales

20,800

Goods sent to Branch

1,40,000

Collections from Ledger Account

1,52,000

Goods returned to H.O.

2,000

Bad Debts

1,600

Allowances to Customers

1,400

Return Inwards

3,000

Cheques sent to Branch:

Rent

4,000

Salaries

8,000

Stock as on Mar 31, 2009

1,00,000

Debtors as on Mar 31, 2009

14,000

Petty Cash (including Miscellaneous Income Rs 200 not remitted on Mar 31, 2009)

600

Prepare the Branch Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2009 and the branch accounts in the books of the H.O.

prepare a branch trading and profit and loss account and delhi branch account in the 564301

Jagannath Steels Ltd with its H.O. at Cuttack has a branch at Delhi. Information relating to Delhi branch is furnished for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

Rs

Stock at Branch on Apr 1, 2008

1,57,000

Goods sent to the Branch during the year

4,56,000

Total Sales at Branch (including Rs 1,97,000) for Cash Sales

7,33,000

Cash received from Debtors

5,22,000

Branch Debtors on Apr 1, 2008

1,69,000

Petty Cash on Apr 1, 2008

1,100

Goods returned by the Expenses:

39,000

Salary

1,28,000

Petty Cash

26,000

Rent

30,000

Stock at Branch on Mar 31, 2009

1,88,000

Petty cash at Branch on Mar 31, 2009

900

Prepare a Branch Trading and Profit and Loss Account and Delhi Branch Account in the books of Cuttack H.O.

prepare the branch trading and profit and loss account after and branch account afte 564302

A Delhi merchant opens a branch in Chennai which trades independently of the H.O. The transactions of the branch for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 are as follows.

Rs

Rs

Goods supplied by H.O.

60,000

Cash paid to Creators

42,600

Expenses paid by Branch

26,850

Purchases from outside:

Cash

9,000

Furniture paid by Branch

10,500

Credit

46,500

Cash received from H.O. initially

12,000

Sales

Cash

13,800

Remitted to I 1.0.

33,000

Credit

1,05,000

Cash received from Customers

91,200

Prepare the Branch Trading and Profit and Loss Account after and Branch Account after taking into account the following:

  1. The accounts of fixed assets are maintained in H.O. Books
  2. Write off Depreciation on Furniture @ 20% p.a.
  3. A remittance of Rs 6,000 from the branch to H.O. is in transit
  4. The branch closing stock is valued at Rs 36,000

if the h o sends goods at cost plus 20 branch sells goods at list price which is who 564303

Rs

Opening Stock at a Branch

1,80,000

Goods sent to Branch

13,20,000

Sales at the Branch

13,20,000

Compute the value of closing stock at the branch in each of the following alternatives:

Case (1)

If H.O. invoices goods to its branch at cost plus 25% goods sold to customers at cost plus 100%.

Case (2)

If the H.O. invoices goods to its branch at 20% less than the list price which is cost plus 100%.

Case (3)

If the H.O. sends goods at cost plus 20%. Branch sells goods at list price which is wholesale price plus 10%.

if the h o invoices goods to its branch at cost plus 25 goods are sold to customers 564304

Rs

Opening Stock at H.O.

18,000

Purchases by H.O.

2,00,000

Goods sent to Branch

1,32,000

Sales at H.O.

1,32,000

Compute the value of closing stock at H.O. in each of the following alternative cases:

Case (1)

If H.O. invoices goods to its branch at 20% less than the list price which is cost plus 100%

Case (2)

If the H.O. invoices goods to its branch at cost plus 25%. Goods are sold to customers at cost plus 100%.

Case (3)

If H.O. sells goods at cost plus 20%. Goods are sold to customers at the list price which is wholesale price plus 10%.

a h o invoices goods to its branches at 20 less than the list price customers of h o 564305

A H.O. invoices goods to its branches at 20% less than the list price. Customers of H.O. and the branch are charged for goods sold to them at cost plus 100% from the following particulars. Ascertain the profit made at the H.O. and the branch.

H.O.

Branch

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock at Cost (at Invoice Price for the Branch)

20,000

8,000

Purchases

2,00,000

Goods sent to Branch (Invoice Price)

48,000

Sales

3,00,000

40,000

Expenses

43,000

2,000

show the laptop account and pandey rsquo s account in the books of singh for three y 564251

On Jan 1, 2009 Pandey purchased a laptop from Jaspal Singh on Hire Purchase System over a period of three years. Rs 10,000 was payable on delivery on Jan 1, 2008 and the balance by following installments on 3 Dec 1, in each year:

Rs

2008

20,000

2009

20,000

2010

Balance amount

Jaspal Singh charged interest at 10% on the yearly balances. The cash value of the laptop was Rs 60,000. Depreciation @ 20% p.a. on diminishing balances were written off in each year. Pandey paid all the installments on the due date. Show the Laptop Account and Pandey’s Account in the books of Singh for three years Dec 31, 2010.

prepare the following accounts in the books of rado cabs upto dec 31 2010 1 narain a 564253

Rado Cabs purchased an omni van on Jan 1, 2008 from Narain & Co, Delhi on hire purchase basis. It was agreed upon to make payment as under:

Rs

Jan 1, 2008

on signing the agreement –

62,100

Dec 31, 2008

at the end of first year –

1,19,790

Dec 31, 2009

at the end of second year –

1,19,790

Dec 31, 2010

at the end of third year –

1,19,790

Nothing more payable after third installment. All the installments are duly paid by Rado Cabs. Interest was reckoned @ 10% p.a. depreciation was charged @ 20% p.a. on diminishing balance. Rado Cabs closes its books on 31 Dec every year. Prepare the following accounts in the books of Rado Cabs upto Dec 31, 2010. (1) Narain & Co. Account (2) Omni Van Account and (3) Interest Account

show i machine account ii b ltd account in the books of a ltd and iii machine reposs 564260

A Ltd purchased from B Ltd 3 machines costing Rs 50,000 each on the Hire Purchase System on Jan 1, 2008. Payment was to be as Rs 30,00 down and remaining in 3 equal installments payable on Dec 31, 2008; Dec 31, 2009 and Dec 31, 2010 together with interest @ 9%. A Ltd writes off depreciation @ 20% on the reducing balance. X Ltd paid the installment due at the end of first year, i.e. on Dec 31, 2008 but could not pay the next, i.e. on Dec 31, 2009. B Ltd agreed to leave one machine with A Ltd on Jan 1,2010 adjusting the value of the other two machines against the amount due on Jan 1, 2010. The machines were valued on the basis of 30% depreciation annually on W.D.V. basis. B Ltd spent s 5,000 on the repairs of two repossessed machines and sold one machine for Rs 40,000 on July 1, 2010. Show: (i) Machine Account; (ii) B Ltd Account in the books of A Ltd and (iii) Machine Repossessed Account in the books of B Ltd.

on oct 1 2007 five cars were purchased by sathya on hire purchase system 564262

On Oct 1, 2007 five cars were purchased by Sathya on Hire Purchase System. The cash price of each car was Rs 2,75,000. The payment was to be made as follows:

  1. 10% of Cash Price at the time of delivery
  2. 25% of Cash Price at the end of each one of the subsequent four half years.

The payment due on Sep 30, 2008 could not be made and, hence, cars were seized by the hire vendor but after negotiations, Sathya was allowed to keep three cars on the condition that the value of the other two cars would be adjusted against the amount due, the cars being valued at Cost less 25% depreciation and Sathya would pay the balance in five half yearly Installments together with interest @ 10% p.a. Both the parties close their Books of Account on 31st Mar every year. Sathya charges 15% depreciation on cars on the original cost.

In Oct 2008, the hire vendor spent Rs 30,000 on getting the seized cars thoroughly overhauled and sold them for Rs 4,75,000.

Prepare for two accounting years ended on 31 Mar, 2009. (i) Cars Account in Sathya’s ledger assuming that Sathya debited it with full cash price in the beginning of the contract and (ii) the personal account of Sathya and goods repossessed account in hire vendor’s ledger.

installments due on dec 31 2009 customer paying 564265

ABC Ltd sells goods on hire purchase basis, the price being cost plus 60%. From the following particulars relating to 2009 ascertain the profit or loss on hire purchase transactions.

Rs

Installments due, customers paying on Jan 1, 2009

6,000

Installment not yet due

75,000

Goods sold during the year on H.P. basis, cost

1,80,000

Cash received from H.P. customers

2,70,000

Installments due on Dec 31, 2009, customer paying

9,000

hire purchase stock with customers as on jan 1 2009 564266

From the following particulars, prepare H.P. Trading Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 in the Books of K V Ltd which sells goods of comparatively small value on H.P. basis adding 331/3 % to the cost of goods to fix hire purchase price:

Rs

Hire Purchase Stock with customers as on Jan 1, 2009

42,100

Installments Due as on Jan 1, 2009

1,200

Goods sold on H.P. basis :

3,16,400

Hire Purchase Stock with customers as on Dec 31, 2009

38,000

Installments Due on Dec 31, 2009

1,700

during the year goods sold on h p price rs 5 28 000 purchase rs 4 08 000 cash receiv 564267

M.S. Ltd has a hire purchase department. Goods are sold on hire purchase at a profit of 25% on sale price. From the following particulars prepare H.P. Trading Account for the year upto Mar 31, 2009:

Apr 1, 2008

Mar 3, 2009

Rs

Rs

Stock in the shop

30,000

42,000

Installment Due

18,000

?

Stock with customers at H.P. Price

2,40,000

1,86,000

During the year goods sold on H.P. Price Rs 5,28,000, Purchase Rs 4,08,000; Cash received Rs 4,80,000

mr r m is a hire purchase trader and sells goods on h p basis at cost plus 50 from t 564268

Mr R.M. is a hire purchase trader and sells goods on H.P. basis at Cost PLUS 50%. From the following information, prepare H.P. Trading Account to ascertain profit/loss for the year ending Mar 31, 2009.

Apr 1. 2008

Rs

Mar 31. 2009

Rs

Stock with customers (at H.P. Price)

27,000

Stock at shop (excluding returned goods)

6,00,000

Stock at shop (at cost)

5,40,000

Installment due but not received

2,70,000

Installment due (good)

1,50,000

Stock with customers

9,00,000

Goods Repossessed (worth Rs 60,000)

15,000

[B.Com Delhi Modified]

Cash received form customers

18,00,000

prepare h p trading account to ascertain profit or loss for the year ending dec 31 2 564269

Renu Ltd has a hire purchase department and goods are sold on hire purchase at cost plus 60%. From the following particulars, prepare H.P. Trading Account to ascertain Profit or Loss for the year ending Dec 31, 2009.

Jan 1, 2009

Rs

Goods with H.P. customers (at H.P. Price)

80,000

Dec 31, 2009

Goods sold on H.P. during the year (at H.P. Price)

4,00,000

Cash received during the year from customers

2,80,000

Goods received back from customers (Installments due Rs 10,000) valued at

1,500

Goods with hire purchase customers (at H.P. Price)

1,80,000

prepare hire purchase trading account for the year ending on dec 31 2009 564270

The following are the particulars from the Books of Amar & Co who sells goods of small value on hire purchase basis at 50% profit on cost. Prepare Hire Purchase Trading Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2009.

Jan 1, 2009

Dec 31, 2009

Rs

Rs

Stock with the customers

54,000

?

Stock in the shop

1,08,000

1,23,000

Installment Due

30,000

54,000

Goods repossessed (Installments Due Rs 16,000) valued at Rs 3,000 which had been included in the stock at the end at Rs 3,000. Cash received from customers Rs 3,60,000 Purchases Rs 3,60,000.

you are required to ascertain the profit made for the year ended dec 31 2009 using s 564272

Verma & Co has a hire purchase department which sells goods at Cost PLUS 50%. From the following information, you are required to ascertain the profit made for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 using stock and debtors method:

Rs

Stock on hire with customers at selling price as on Dec 31, 2008

81,000

Stock at shop (at cost) as on Dec 31, 2008

1,62,000

Installment due on Dec 31, 2008

45,000

Cash received from customers

5,40,000

Goods repossessed (Installments due Rs 18,000)

4,500

Installments due from paying customers

81,000

Closing stock at shop (including repossessed goods)

1,84,500

Purchases made in the year

5,40,000

it is informed that cash received from the customers is rs 79 200 and that the rate 564274

Fortune (India) sells goods both on Hire Purchase System and cash retail system. He has prepared one Trading Account for both the business and has treated total goods supplied to customers on H.P. system as sales which is as under:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

To Opening Stock at shop

21,000

By Sales Cash

18,000

To Purchases

1,07,500

By Sales Hire Purchase

1,32,000

To Gross Profit

35,000

By Closing Stock at shop

13,500

Cash Sales: 3,000

M.P. Sales: 32,000

1,63,500

1,63,500

It is informed that cash received from the customers is Rs 79,200 and that the rate of gross profit for H.P. System is 32% on Cost and Cash Sales are made at the H.P. Price as reduced by 1/11.

He now wishes to take credit for such proportion of profit as the installments bear to the total amounts receivable under the H.P. agreements and to adopt stock method of dealing the H.P. transactions. Construct new Trading Accounts for both business separately.

prepare accounts showing the profit or loss made by the company by adopting stock an 564275

Shiva Ltd commenced business on Jan 1, 2009. It sells both on Hire Purchase System and Cash Retail System. Information about terms is given below:

VCP

VCR

Rs

Rs

Cash Price

10,000

30,000

Cost

8,000

24,000

Cash down for Hire Purchase

2,000

6,000

Monthly Installment

1,000

3,000

No. of Installments

10

12

The company purchased goods costing Rs 1,00,00,000 in all and made cash sales totaling Rs 86,00,000. Stock in hand on Dec 31, 2009 was valued at R. 12,00,000. H.P. transactions were as follows:

No. sold

Installment

Installments Due

Collected

(Customer Praying)

VCR

20

110

10

VCR

40

260

15

3 VCPs and 2 VCRs on which only 4 installments were collected were repossessed and were valued at Rs 32,000. This is not included in the figure of stock mentioned above. Prepare accounts showing the profit or loss made by the company by adopting Stock and Debtors System.

prepare installment debtors account and interest suspense account as they would appe 564277

Mr. Rao sells consumer durables under Installment System under which 20% of the total dues are to be paid on delivery and the balance in eight equal quarterly installments commencing from the last date of the quarter in which goods have been delivered. 15% of the total dues are attributed towards interest for which credit to revenue is taken as:

In the year of Sale : 30% Next Year : 50% The year after Next : 20%

Total dues for goods sold and delivered during the last three years had been

Rs

2007

2,00,000

2008

2,50,000

2009

3,00,000

On Jan 1, 2009, Installment Debtors Account and Interest Suspense Account showed balance of Rs 1,67,500 (Dr.) and Rs 32,250 (Cr) respectively. The deliveries have been even throughout the year and all the installments have been collected on due date.

Prepare Installment Debtors Account and Interest Suspense Account as they would appear in 2009.

compute the cost price of the goods and the profit margin for the unsold stock 564281

Goods are invoiced to branches at cost plus 25%. A branch reports unsold stock of Rs 50,000. Compute the cost price of the goods and the profit margin for the unsold stock.

Load is 25% – Cost is Rs 100

Selling Price

=

Rs 25 + 100 = Rs 125

If Selling Price

=

Rs 50,000

then Profit Margin

=

25 × 50,000/125 = Rs 10,000

i.e. Cost Price

=

Rs 50,000 – 10,000

=

Rs 40,000

depreciate the furniture 20 p a 564282

From the following information, you are required to prepare Jaipur Branch Account in the books of Cennai H.O. for the year ending Mar 31, 2009.

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock (at cost)

2,00,000

Closing Stock (at cost)

2,75,000

Opening Debtors

20,000

Closing Debtors

2,00,000

Opening Petty Cash

1,000

Closing Petty Cash

500

Opening Creditors

10,000

Furniture (at end)

?

Furniture (beginning)

25,000

Closing Creditors

7,500

Goods sent to Branch

Goods sent to Branch

(at cost)

7,00,000

for Expenses

75,000

Goods Returned by

Branch (at cost)

25,000

Cash Received from Debtors

6,25,000

Cash sales

1,25,000

Depreciate the furniture @ 20% p.a.

from the following information prepare nagpur branch account in the books of mumbai 564283

From the following information prepare Nagpur Branch Account in the books of Mumbai H.O. for the year ending Mar 31, 2009:

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock (at cost)

1,00,000

Cash received by the Branch from Customers

7,00,000

Opening Debtors

12,500

Discount allowed to Customers

500

Opening Petty Cash

200

Bad Debts written off

1,500

Furniture On the beginning)

10,000

Credit Sales

7,50,000

Opening Creditors

8,500

Cash Sales

1,50,000

Goods sent to Branch (at cost)

5,50,000

Petty Expenses paid by the Branch

4,000

Goods returned to H.O. (at cost)

12,500

Cheques sent to Branch for Expenses:

36,000

Salaries

Goods returned by Customers to

5,000

Rent and Insurance

14,000

Blanch

Petty Cash

4,500

prepare delhi branch account in the books of chennai h o for the year ending on mar 564284

A company with its H.O. at Chennai has a branch at Delhi. The branch receives all goods from H.O. which also remits cash for all expenses. Sales are made by the branch on credit as well as for cash. Total sales by the branch for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 amounted to Rs 2,80,000 out of which 20% is cash sale. Further information taken from the branch reveals:

Apr 1, 2008

Mar 31, 2009

Rs

Rs

Stock in Trade

12,500

18,000

Debtors

30,000

24,000

Furniture

4, 000

?

Petty Cash

60

90

Expenses actually incurred by the branch during the year were

Rs

Salaries

18,000

Rent

4,500 (up to Dec 2008)

Petty Expenses

2,800

Sale of furniture on Oct 1, 2008 (book value of furniture on the date of sale Rs 475) amounted to Rs 450.

All sales are made by the branch at cost plus 25%

Depreciation on furniture is 10% p.a.

Prepare Delhi Branch Account in the books of Chennai H.O. For the year ending on Mar 31, 2009.

Goods are sold to customers at cost plus 50%. Depreciate the furniture @ 10%

from the following particulars prepare branch account i at cost price and ii at acco 564285

Good Luck Co. Chennai has a branch at Lucknow. It invoices goods to the branch at selling price which is cost plus 33?%. From the following particulars prepare branch account. (i) At cost price and (ii) At account and goods sent to branch account in the Books of Good Luck Co. Chennai.

Rs

Stock on Jan 1, 2008 (invoice price)

30,000

Debtors on Jan 1, 2008

22,800

Goods invoiced to branch during the year (at invoice price)

1,34,000

Sales at Branch:

Rs

Rs

Cash

62,000

Credit

74,800

Cash received from Debtors

1,36,000

Discount allowed to Customers

80,000

Bad Debts written off

600

Cheques sent to Branch:

500

Salaries

10,000

Sundry Expenses

3,400

13,400

Stock on Dec 31, 2008 (at Invoice Price)

26,8000

prepare the adjusting entries for the month of march 564186

The ledger of Hammond, Inc., on March 31, 2010, includes these selected accounts before adjusting entries are prepared.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

$3,600

Office Supplies

2,800

Office Equipment

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

$5,000

Unearned Service Revenue

9,200

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $100 per month.

2. Supplies on hand total $800.

3. The office equipment depreciates $200 a month.

4. One half of the unearned service revenue was earned in March.

Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.

determine the total assets and total liabilities at june 30 2010 for skolnick co 564187

Skolnick Co. was organized on April 1, 2010. The company prepares quarterly financial statements. The adjusted trial balance amounts at June 30 are shown below:

Debits

Credits

Cash

$6,700

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$850

Accounts Receivable

600

Notes Payable

5,000

Prepaid Rent

900

Accounts Payable

1,510

Supplies

1,000

Salaries Payable

400

Equipment

15,000

Interest Payable

50

Dividends

600

Unearned Rent

500

Salaries Expense

9,400

Common Stock

14,000

Rent Expense

1,500

Commission Revenue

14,200

Depreciation Expense

850

Rent Revenue

800

Supplies Expense

200

Utilities Expense

510

Interest Expense

50

Total debits

37,310

Total credits

$37,310

(a) Determine the net income for the quarter April 1 to June 30.

(b) Determine the total assets and total liabilities at June 30, 2010 for Skolnick Co.

(c) Determine the amount that appears for Retained Earnings.

prepare the adjusting entries for the month of april show computations 564188

Terry Thomas and a group of investors incorporate the Green Thumb Lawn Care Corporation on April 1. At April 30 the trial balance shows the following balances for selected accounts.

Prepaid Insurance

$3,600

Equipment

28,000

Notes Payable

20,000

Unearned Service Revenue

4,200

Service Revenue

1,800

Analysis reveals the following additional data pertaining to these accounts.

1. Prepaid insurance is the cost of a 2 year insurance policy, effective April 1.

2. Depreciation on the equipment is $500 per month.

3. The note payable is dated April 1. It is a 6 month, 12% note.

4. Seven customers paid for the company’s 6 month lawn service package of $600 beginning in April. These customers received the first month of services in April.

5. Lawn services performed for other customers but not billed at April 30 totaled $1,500.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of April. Show computations.

queenan company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at 1 000 for the month o 564190

Queenan Company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at $1,000 for the month of June. The adjusting entry to record this depreciation is as follows:

a

Depreciation Expense

$1,000

Accumulated Depreciation

Queenan Company

1000

b

Depreciation Expense

1000

Delivery Equipment

1,000

c

Depreciation Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation

Delivery Equipment

1,000

d

Delivery Equipment Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation

Delivery Equipment

1000

identify the effect if any that each of the following transactions would have upon c 564192

Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash.

Instructions

Identify the effect, if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. The first transaction has been completed as an example.

Cash

$100

0

(a)Purchased $100 of supplies for cash.

(b) Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $40 of the above supplies.

(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account.

(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.

(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500.

(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.

how do sears rsquo s profit margin ratio and gross profit rate compare to those of w 564198

After having once been as dominant as Wal Mart, in recent years Sears has struggled to survive. It has enacted many changes trying to turn itself around. In the 1990s, it shocked and disappointed many loyal customers by closing its catalog business. It also closed 113 stores and eliminated 50,000 jobs. None of these changes was enough to make Sears truly competitive, so in March 2005 Sears merged with Kmart to form the third largest U.S. retailer. Here is recent data for Sears Holdings, Inc.

Year ended

($ in millions)

1/3/2007

12/28/2006

Net income

$1,490

$858

Sales

53,012

48,911

Cost of goods sold

37,820

35,505

Instructions

Using the basic facts in the table, evaluate the following components of Sears’s profitability for the years ended January 3, 2007 and December 28, 2006.

Profit margin ratio

Gross profit rate

How do Sears’s profit margin ratio and gross profit rate compare to those of Wal Mart and Target for 2007?

the ledger of buerhle inc on march 31 2010 includes the following selected accounts 564160

The ledger of Buerhle, Inc. on March 31, 2010, includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

2,400

Office Supplies

2,500

Office Equipment

30,000

Unearned Revenue

10,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following:

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.

2. Supplies on hand total $900.

3. The office equipment depreciates $500 per month.

4. 2/5 of the unearned revenue was earned in March.

Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of March.

identify when revenue should be recognized in each of the above situations 564164

The following independent situations require professional judgement for determining when to recognize revenue from the transactions.

(a) Southwest Airlines sells you an advance purchase airline ticket in September for your flight home at Christmas.

(b) Ultimate Electronics sells you a home theatre on a “no money down, no interest, and no payments for one year” promotional deal.

(c) The Toronto Blue Jays sell season tickets online to games in the Skydome. Fans can purchase the tickets at any time, although the season doesn’t officially begin until April. The major league baseball season runs from April through October.

(d) You borrow money in August from RBC Financial Group. The loan and the interest are repayable in full in November.

(e) In August, you order a sweater from Sears using its online catalog. The sweater arrives in September, and you charge it to your Sears credit card. You receive and pay the Sears bill in October.

Instructions

Identify when revenue should be recognized in each of the above situations.

identify by number the accounting assumption principle or constraint that describes 564165

These are the assumptions, principles, and constraints discussed in this and previous chapters.

1. Economic entity assumption.

2. Matching principle.

3. Monetary unit assumption.

4. Time period assumption.

5. Cost principle.

6. Materiality.

7. Full disclosure principle.

8. Going concern assumption.

9. Revenue recognition principle.

10. Conservatism.

Instructions

Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation below. Do not use a number more than once.

(a) Is the rationale for why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use the cost principle.)

(b) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.

(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.

(d) Assumes that the dollar is the “measuring stick” used to report on financial performance.

(e) Requires that accounting standards be followed for all significantitems.

(f) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.

(g) Requires recognition of expenses in the same period as related revenues.

(h) Indicates that market value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts.

determine the company rsquo s net earnings on an accrual basis for 2010 show all you 564167

Your examination of the records of a company that follows the cash basis of accounting tells you that the company’s reported cash basis earnings in 2010 are $33,640. If this firm had followed accrual basis accounting practices, it would have reported the following year end balances.

2010

2009

Accounts receivable

$3,400

$2,800

Supplies on hand

$1,300

1,160

Unpaid wages owed

2,000

2,400

Other unpaid amounts

1,600

Instructions

Determine the company’s net earnings on an accrual basis for 2010. Show all your calculations in an orderly fashion.

assume that at the end of the year fun play reported a favorable net income yet the 564169

Fun Play, a maker of electronic games for kids, has just completed its first year of operations. The company’s sales growth was explosive. To encourage large national stores to carry its products Fun Play offered 180 day financing—meaning its largest customers do not pay for nearly 6 months. Because Fun Play is a new company, its components suppliers insist on being paid cash on delivery. Also, it had to pay up front for 2 years of insurance.

At the end of the year Fun Play owed employees for one full month of salaries, but due to a cash shortfall, it promised to pay them the first week of next year.

Instructions

(a) Explain how cash and accrual accounting would differ for each of the events listed above and describe the proper accrual accounting.

(b) Assume that at the end of the year Fun Play reported a favorable net income, yet the company’s management is concerned because the company is very short of cash. Explain how Fun Play could have positive net income and yet run out of cash.

prepare the adjusting entries at march 31 assuming that adjusting entries are made q 564171

The ledger of Thurston Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes these selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.

Debits

Credits

Prepaid Insurance

$3,600

Supplies

$3,000

Equipment

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

8,400

Notes Payable

20,000

Unearned Rent Revenue

10,200

Rent Revenue

60,000

Interest Expense

0

Wage Expense

14,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. The equipment depreciates $280 per month.

2. Half of the unearned rent revenue was earned during the quarter.

3. Interest of $440 is accrued on the notes payable.

4. Supplies on hand total $850.

5. Insurance expires at the rate of $400 per month.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly.

Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense.

prepare the adjusting entries on january 31 account titles are accumulated depreciat 564172

Mark Bennett, D.D.S., opened an incorporated dental practice on January 1, 2010.

During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred:

1. Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $680 of such services was earned but not yet billed to the insurance companies.

2. Utility expenses incurred but not paid prior to January 31 totaled $520.

3. Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for $80,000, paying $20,000 in cash and signing a $60,000, 3 year note payable (Interest is paid each December 31). The equipment depreciates $400 per month. Interest is $500 per month.

4. Purchased a 1 year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for $24,000.

5. Purchased $1,750 of dental supplies (recorded as increase to Supplies). On January

31 determined that $550 of supplies were on hand.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Account titles are: Accumulated Depreciation— Dental Equipment, Depreciation Expense, Service Revenue, Accounts Receivable, Insurance Expense, Interest Expense, Interest Payable, Prepaid Insurance, Supplies, Supplies Expense, Utilities Expense, and Utilities Payable.

what was the cash paid for income taxes during 2007 reported at the bottom of the co 564177

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A at the end of this book.

Instructions

(a) Using the consolidated income statement and balance sheet, identify items that may result in adjusting entries for prepayments.

(b) Using the consolidated income statement, identify two items that may result in adjusting entries for accruals.

(c) What was the amount of depreciation expense for 2007 and 2006? (You will need to examine the notes to the financial statements or the statement of cash flows.) Where was accumulated depreciation reported?

(d) What was the cash paid for income taxes during 2007, reported at the bottom of the consolidated statement of cash flows? What was income tax expense (provision for income taxes) for 2007? Where is income tax payable reported?

because of its accounting problems beazer was late in providing its audited financia 564179

The August 16, 2007, issue of the Wall Street Journalincludes an article by Michael Corkery and David Reilly titled “Beazer’s Accounting Woes Extend Roller Coaster Ride.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following.

(a) Explain what is meant by cookie jar accounting? Why might a company engage in cookie jar accounting?

(b) The article says the company released “unaudited” financial statements to investors.

What does “unaudited” mean? What are the implications to investors of receiving “unaudited” financial statements?

(c) Because of its accounting problems, Beazer was late in providing its audited financial statements to the SEC. What are the possible ramifications of not submitting an annual report on a timely basis?

what journal entry did laser recording make to record the accrued interest 564180

Laser Recording Systems, founded in 1981, produces disks for use in the home market. The following is an excerpt from Laser Recording Systems’ financial statements (all dollars in thousands).

Instructions

(a) Can you tell from the discussion whether Laser Recording Systems has prepaid its legal expenses and is now making an adjustment to the asset account Prepaid Legal Expenses, or whether the company is handling the legal expense via an accrued expense adjustment?

(b) Identify each of the adjustments Laser Recording Systems is discussing as one of the four types of possible adjustments discussed in the chapter. How is net income ultimately affected by each of the adjustments?

(c) What journal entry did Laser Recording make to record the accrued interest?

what are the ethical considerations of the president rsquo s request and terry rsquo 564182

Diamond Company is a pesticide manufacturer. Its sales declined greatly this year due to the passage of legislation outlawing the sale of several of Diamond’s chemical pesticides. During the coming year, Diamond will have environmentally safe and competitive replacement chemicals to replace these discontinued products. Sales in the next year are expected to greatly exceed those of any prior year. Therefore, the decline in this year’s sales and profits appears to be a one year aberration.

Even so, the company president believes that a large dip in the current year’s profits could cause a significant drop in the market price of Diamond’s stock and make it a takeover target. To avoid this possibility, he urges Terry Holton, controller, in making this period’s year end adjusting entries to accrue every possible revenue and to defer as many expenses as possible. The president says to Terry, “We need the revenues this year, and next year we can easily absorb expenses deferred from this year. We can’t let our stock price be hammered down!” Terry didn’t get around to recording the adjusting entries until January 17, but she dated the entries December 31 as if they were recorded then. Terry also made every effort to comply with the president’s request.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical considerations of the president’s request and Terry’s dating theadjusting entries December 31?

(c) Can Terry accrue revenues and defer expenses and still be ethical?

prepare a personal balance sheet using the format you have learned for a classified 564183

Companies prepare balance sheets in order to know their financial position at a specific point in time. This enables them to make a comparison to their position at previous points in time and gives them a basis for planning for the future. In order to evaluate yourfinancial position, you can prepare a personal balance sheet. Assume that you have compiled the following information regarding your finances. (Hint:Some of the items might not be used in your personal balance sheet.)

Amount owed on student loan balance (long term)

$5,000

Balance in checking account

$1,200

Certificate of deposit (6 month)

$3,000

Annual earnings from part time job

11,300

Automobile

7,000

Balance on automobile loan (current portion)

1,500

Balance on automobile loan (long term portion)

4,000

Home computer

800

Amount owed to you by younger brother

300

Balance in money market account

1,800

Annual tuition

6,400

Video and stereo equipment

1,250

Balance owed on credit card (current portion)

150

Balance owed on credit card (long term portion)

1,650

Instructions

Prepare a personal balance sheet using the format you have learned for a classified balance sheet for a company. For the equity account, use M. Y. Own, Capital.

using the following tabular analysis show the effect of each transaction on the acco 564068

During 2010, Bleeker Corp. entered into the following transactions.

1. Borrowed $60,000 by issuing bonds.

2. Paid $9,000 cash dividend to stockholders.

3. Received $17,000 cash from a previously billed customer for services provided.

4. Purchased supplies on account for $3,100.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation Put explanations for changes to Stockholders’ Equity in the right hand margin. For Retained Earnings, use separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends if necessary.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts

Accounts

Bonds

Common

Retained

Cash

+

Receivable

+

Supplies

=

Payable

+

Payable

+

Stock

+

Earnings

post these entries to the cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending 564078

Josh Borke recorded the following transactions during the month of April.

Apr.3

Cash

3,400

Photography Revenue

3,400

Apr.16

Rent Expense

600

Cash

600

Apr.20

Salaries Expense

300

Cash

300

Post these entries to the Cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash. The beginning balance in cash on April 1 was $1,600.

describe the effect of each transaction on assets liabilities and stockholders rsquo 564079

Selected transactions for Ruiz Advertising Company, Inc., are listed here.

1. Issued common stock to investors in exchange for cash received from investors.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Received cash from customers when service was provided.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Paid dividend to stockholders.

6. Incurred advertising expense on account.

7. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Purchased equipment on account.

Instructions

Describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders’ equity.

using the following tabular analysis show the effect of each transaction on the acco 564080

McBride Company entered into these transactions during May 2010.

1. Purchased computers for office use for $30,000 from Dell on account.

2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $12,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Provided computer services to Brieske Construction Company for $5,000 cash.

5. Paid Southern States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Stockholders invested an additional $40,000 in the business in exchange for common stock of the company.

7. Paid Dell for the computers purchased in (1).

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,000 on account.

Instructions

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders’ Equity in the right hand margin.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts

Office

=

Accounts

Common

Retained Earnings

Cash

+

Receivables

+

Equipments

Payable

Stock

+

Revenues

Expenses

Dividends

prepare the debit ndash credit analysis for each transaction 564083

This information relates to Pickert Real Estate Agency.

1

Stockholders invest $30,000 in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

2

Hires an administrative assistant at an annual salary of $42,000.

3

Buys office furniture for $4,600, on account.

6

Sells a house and lot for M.E. Petty; commissions due from Petty, $10,800
(not paid by Petty at this time).

10

Receives cash of $140 as commission for acting as rental agent renting
an apartment.

27

Pays $700 on account for the office furniture purchased on October 3.

30

Pays the administrative assistant $3,500 in salary for October.

Instructions

Prepare the debit–credit analysis for each transaction.

prepare a tabular analysis of the september transactions the column headings should 564084

Selected transactions for A. B. Coors Corporation during its first month in business are presented below.

1

Issued common stock in exchange for $20,000 cash received from investors.

5

Purchased equipment for $10,000, paying $2,000 in cash and the balance
on account.

25

Paid $5,000 cash on balance owed for equipment.

30

Paid $500 cash dividend.

A. B. Coors’s chart of accounts shows: Cash, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Dividends.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions. The column headings should be: Cash + Equipment =Accounts Payable +Stockholders’ Equity. For transactions affecting stockholders’ equity, provide explanations in the right margin.

(b) Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

(c) Post the transactions to T accounts.

selected transactions from the journal of gipson inc during its first month of opera 564085

Selected transactions from the journal of Gipson Inc. during its first month of operations are presented here.

Date

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

1

Cash

5000

Common Stock

5000

10

Cash

1700

Service Revenue

1700

12

Office Equipment

6200

Cash

1200

Notes Payable

5000

25

Accounts Receivable

3100

Service Revenue

3100

31

Cash

600

Accounts Receivable

600

Instructions

(a) Post the transactions to T accounts.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at August 31, 2010.

prepare an income statement a retained earnings statement and a classified balance s 564087

The accounts in the ledger of Thornton Delivery Service contain the following balances on July 31, 2010.

Accounts Receivable

$13,400

Prepaid Insurance

$ 1,800

Accounts Payable

8,400

Repair Expense

1,200

Cash

?

Service Revenue

15,500

Delivery Equipment

59,360

Dividends

700

Gas and Oil Expense

758

Common Stock

40,000

Insurance Expense

600

Salaries Expense

7,428

Notes Payable, due 2013

28,450

Salaries Payable

900

Retained Earnings
(July 1, 2010)

5,200

Instructions

(a) Prepare a trial balance with the accounts arranged as illustrated in the chapter, and fill in the missing amount for Cash.

(b) Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet for the month of July 2010.

from an analysis of the retained earnings columns compute the net income or net loss 564092

On April 1 Flint Hills Travel Agency Inc. was established. These transactions were completed during the month.

1. Stockholders invested $25,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.

2. Paid $900 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased office equipment for $2,800 cash.

4. Purchased $200 of advertising in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $500 cash for office supplies.

6. Earned $10,000 for services provided: Cash of $1,000 is received from customers, and the balance of $9,000 is billed to customers on account.

7. Paid $400 cash dividends.

8. Paid Chicago Tribuneamount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees’ salaries $1,200.

10. Received $9,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Office Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends).Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b)From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

diana kuhlmann started her own consulting firm kuhlmann consulting inc on may 1 2010 564093

Diana Kuhlmann started her own consulting firm, Kuhlmann Consulting Inc., on May 1, 2010. The following transactions occurred during the month of May.

May

1

Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in the business in exchange
for common stock.

2

Paid $700 for office rent for the month.

3

Purchased $500 of supplies on account.

5

Paid $150 to advertise in the County News.

9

Received $1,000 cash for services provided.

12

Paid $200 cash dividend.

15

Performed $4,200 of services on account.

17

Paid $2,500 for employee salaries.

20

Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.

23

Received a cash payment of $1,500 for services provided on account
on May 15.

26

Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.

29

Purchased office equipment for $2,000 paying $200 in cash and
the balance on account.

30

Paid $150 for utilities.

prepare an income statement for august a retained earnings statement for august and 564094

Dick Reber created a corporation providing legal services, Dick Reber Inc., on July 1, 2010. On July 31 the balance sheet showed: Cash $4,000; Accounts Receivable $2,500; Supplies $500; Office Equipment $5,000; Accounts Payable $4,200; Common Stock $6,200; and Retained Earnings $1,600. During August the following transactions occurred.

1. Collected $1,500 of accounts receivable due from customers.

2. Paid $2,700 cash for accounts payable due.

3. Earned revenue of $5,400, of which $3,000 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.

4. Purchased additional office equipment for $4,000, paying $400 in cash and the balance on account.

5. Paid salaries $1,400, rent for August $900, and advertising expenses $350.

6. Paid a cash dividend of $700.

7. Received $5,000 from Standard Federal Bank; the money was borrowed on a 4 month note payable.

8. Incurred utility expenses for the month on account $450.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances.

The column heading should be: Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies +

Office Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Common Stock + Retained Earnings.

(Use separate Revenue, Expense, and Dividend columns). Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) Prepare an income statement for August, a retained earnings statement for August, and a classified balance sheet at August 31.

the bookkeeper for sandy mcclain rsquo s dance studio made the following errors in j 564095

P3 8A The Star Lite Theater Inc. was recently formed. It began operations in March 2010. The Star Lite is unique in that it will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. On March 1, the ledger of The Star Lite showed: Cash $16,000; Land $38,000; Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $22,000; Equipment $16,000; Accounts Payable $12,000; and Common Stock $80,000. During the month of March the following events and transactions occurred. Mar. 2 Rented the three Star Wars movies (Star Wars®, The Empire Strikes Back, and The Return of the Jedi) to be shown for the first three weeks of March. The film rental was $10,000; $2,000 was paid in cash and $8,000 will be paid on March 10. 3 Ordered the first three Star Trek movies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will cost $400 per night. 9 Received $9,200 cash from admissions. 10 Paid balance due on Star Wars movies rental and $2,600 on March 1 accounts payable. 11 Hired J. Carne to operate the concession stand. Carne agrees to pay The Star Lite Theater 15% of gross receipts, payable monthly. 12 Paid advertising expenses $900. 20 Received $7,100 cash from customers for admissions. 20 Received the Star Trek movies and paid rental fee of $4,000. 31 Paid salaries of $3,800. 31 Received statement from J. Carne showing gross receipts from concessions of $10,000 and the balance due to The Star Lite of $1,500 for March. Carne paid half the balance due and will remit the remainder on April 5. 31 Received $20,000 cash from customers for admissions. In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes: Accounts Receivable, Admission Revenue, Concession Revenue, Advertising Expense, Film Rental Expense, and Salaries Expense. Hint: Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance. (SO 3, 5, 6, 7, 8) Instructions.

(a) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances to the ledger.

(b) Journalize the March transactions, including explanations.

(c) Post the March journal entries to the ledger.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on March 31, 2010. Cash $ 31,750 Tot. trial balance $127,200 P3 9A The bookkeeper for Sandy McClain’s dance studio made the following errors in journalizing and posting.

1. A credit to Supplies of $600 was omitted.

2. A debit posting of $300 to Accounts Payable was inadvertently debited to Accounts Receivable.

3. A purchase of supplies on account of $450 was debited to Supplies for $540 and credited to Accounts Payable for $540.

4. A credit posting of $350 to Wages Payable was posted twice.

5. A debit posting to Wages Payable for $250 and a credit posting to Cash for $250 were made twice.

6. A debit posting for $1,200 of Dividends was inadvertently posted to Travel Expense instead.

7. A credit to Service Revenue for $450 was inadvertently posted as a debit to Service Revenue.

8. A credit to Accounts Receivable of $250 was credited to Accounts Payable. Hint: Analyze errors and their effects on the trial balance. (SO 8) Instructions For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; (b) the amount of the difference if the trial balance will not balance; and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example. (a) (b) (c) Error In Balance Difference Larger Column 1. No $600 Debit

from an analysis of the retained earnings columns compute the net income or net loss 564096

Hermesch Window Washing Inc. was started on May 1. Here is a summary of the May transactions.

1. Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.

2. Purchased equipment for $7,000 cash.

3. Paid $700 cash for May office rent.

4. Paid $400 cash for supplies.

5. Purchased $750 of advertising in the Beacon Newson account.

6. Received $5,800 in cash from customers for service.

7. Paid a $500 cash dividend.

8. Paid part time employee salaries $1,700.

9. Paid utility bills $140.

10. Provided service on account to customers $1,000.

11. Collected cash of $240 for services billed in transaction (10).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends).

Revenue is called Service Revenue. Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for May.

what is the increase and decrease side for each account what is the normal balance f 564098

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll in Appendix A at the back of this book contain the following selected accounts, all in thousands of dollars.

Common Stock

$ 24,586

Accounts Payable

11,572

Accounts Receivable

32,371

Selling, Marketing, and Administrative Expenses

97,821

Prepaid Expenses

6,551

Property, Plant, and Equipment

201,401

Net Sales

492,742

Instructions

(a) What is the increase and decrease side for each account? What is the normal balance for each account?

(b) Identify the probable other account in the transaction and the effect on that account when:

(1) Accounts Receivable is decreased.

(2) Accounts Payable is decreased.

(3) Prepaid Expenses is increased.

(c) Identify the other account(s) that ordinarily would be involved when:

(1) Interest Expense is increased.

(2) Property, Plant, and Equipment is increased.

what are some of the advantages to chieftain from having this large a cash balance w 564100

Chieftain International, Inc., is an oil and natural gas exploration and production company. A recent balance sheet reported $208 million in assets with only $4.6 million in liabilities, all of which were short term accounts payable. During the year, Chieftain expanded its holdings of oil and gas rights, drilled 37 new wells, and invested in expensive 3 D seismic technology. The company generated $19 million cash from operating activities and paid no dividends. It had a cash balance of $102 million at the end of the year.

Instructions

(a) Name at least two advantages to Chieftain from having no long term debt. Can you think of disadvantages?

(b) What are some of the advantages to Chieftain from having this large a cash balance? What is a disadvantage?

(c) Why do you suppose Chieftain has the $4.6 million balance in accounts payable, since it appears that it could have made all its purchases for cash?

identify advantages and disadvantages that companies should consider when switching 564101

Doman Industries Ltd., whose products are sold in 30 countries worldwide, is an integrated Canadian forest products company.

Doman sells the majority of its lumber products in the United States, and a significant amount of its pulp products in Asia. Doman also has loans from other countries. For example, the Company borrowed US$160 million at an annual interest rate of 12%.

Doman must repay this loan, and interest, in U.S. dollars. One of the challenges global companies face is to make themselves attractive to investors from other countries. This is difficult to do when different accounting rules in different countries blur the real impact of earnings. For example, in a recent year Domanreported a loss of $2.3 million, using Canadian accounting rules. Had it reported under U.S. accounting rules, its loss would have been $12.1 million. Many companies that want to be more easily compared with U.S. and other global competitors have switched to U.S. accounting principles. Canadian National Railway,

Corel, Cott, Inco, and Thomson Corporation are but a few examples of large Canadian companies whose financial statements are now presented in U.S. dollars, adhere to U.S. GAAP, or are reconciled to U.S. GAAP.

Instructions

(a) Identify advantages and disadvantages that companies should consider when switching to U.S. reporting standards.

(b) Suppose you compare Doman Industries to a U.S. based competitor. Do you believe the use of country specific accounting policies would hinder your ability to compare the companies? If so, explain how.

(c) Suppose you compare Doman Industries to a Canadian based competitor. If the companies apply generally acceptable Canadian accounting policies differently, how could this affect your ability to compare their financial results?

(d) Do you see any significant distinction between comparing statements prepared using generally accepted accounting principles of different countries and comparing statements prepared using generally accepted accounting principles of the same country

(e.g. U.S.) but that apply the principles differently?

who are the stakeholders in this situation 564103

Monica Geller is the assistant chief accountant at BIT Company, a manufacturer of computer chips and cellular phones. The company presently has total sales of $20 million. It is the end of the first quarter and Monica is hurriedly trying to prepare a general ledger trial balance so that quarterly financial statements can be prepared and released to management and the regulatory agencies. The total credits on the trial balance exceed the debits by $1,000.

In order to meet the 4 P.M. deadline, Monica decides to force the debits and credits into balance by adding the amount of the difference to the Equipment account. She chose Equipment because it is one of the larger account balances; percentage wise it will be the least misstated. Monica plugs the difference! She believes that the difference is quite small and will not affect anyone’s decisions. She wishes that she had another few days to find the error but realizes that the financial statements are already late.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What ethical issues are involved?

(c) What are Monica’s alternatives?

in their annual reports to stockholders companies must report or disclose informatio 564105

In their annual reports to stockholders, companies must report or disclose information about all liabilities, including potential liabilities related to environmental clean up. There are many situations in which you will be asked to provide personal financial information about your assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses. Sometimes you will face difficult decisions regarding what to disclose and how to disclose it. Instructions Suppose that you are putting together a loan application to purchase a home. Based on your income and assets, you qualify for the mortgage loan, but just barely. How would you address each of the following situations in reporting your financial position for the loan application? Provide responses for each of the following questions. (a) You signed a guarantee for a bank loan that a friend took out for $20,000. If your friend doesn”t pay, you will have to pay. Your friend has made all of the payments so far, and it appears he will be able to pay in the future. (b) You were involved in an auto accident in which you were at fault. There is the possibility that you may have to pay as much as $50,000 as part of a settlement. The issue will not be resolved before the bank processes your mortgage request. (c) The company at which you work isn”t doing very well, and it has recently laid off employees. You are still employed, but it is quite possible that you will lose your job in the next few months.

before each of its two big semiannual sales nordstrom prints and mails advertisement 564026

Before each of its two big semiannual sales, Nordstrom prints and mails advertisements to its preferred customers and also prints and installs in its stores a variety of signs announcing the sales. Assume that these expenditures cost $2 million per year. Clearly, Nordstrom management believes that spending $2 million to promote the semiannual sales will increase gross margin (sales revenues less cost of sales) by at least $2 million. However, it cannot establish a causal link between any specific promotional expenditure and the sale of a specific item. As a result, Nordstrom treats the promotion costs as period expenses in the period incurred:

Advertising and Promotion Expenses

2,000,000

Cash

2,000,000

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

2,000,000

+ 2,000,000

IncStaRE

To record $2 million of advertising and promotion costs.

indicate the amount of revenue or expense that crandall recognizes during april 564027

Revenue and expense recognition. Crandall SA uses the accrual basis of accounting and recognizes revenues at the time it sells goods or renders services. For each transaction, indicate the amount of revenue or expense that Crandall recognizes during April, and show the journal entry or entries that Crandall would make in April.

a. Collects €15,000 cash from customers during April for merchandise sold and delivered in March. The cost of the merchandise to the firm was €8,000.

b. Sells merchandise to customers during April for €24,500 cash. The merchandise cost the firm €6,500.

c. Sells to customers, on account, merchandise with a selling price of €105,000. The firm expects to collect the cash during May. The merchandise cost the firm €82,000 when it purchased the items from its supplier last month. The firm has not yet paid the supplier for the merchandise.

d. Pays suppliers €45,500 during April for merchandise received by the firm from its suppliers and sold to customers during March for €109,000.

e. Pays suppliers €50,000 during April for merchandise received from its suppliers and sold to customers during April. Crandall sold the merchandise for €90,400.

f. Receives from suppliers and sells to customers during April merchandise that cost €20,000. The selling price of the merchandise to the customer was €38,000, all on account. The firm expects to pay the supplier during May.

g. Receives from suppliers during April merchandise that cost €101,000 and that the firm expects to pay for during May. The firm also expects to sell the merchandise in May for €124,000.

h. Receives €26,500 from customers for merchandise that the firm will deliver in May.

The firm does not yet have the merchandise and expects to acquire it in May for €23,000.

collects 800 cash from a customer during march for a custom made suit that the firm 564035

Revenue recognition. Neiman Marcus, a U.S. retailer, uses the accrual basis of accounting and follows U.S. GAAP. It recognizes revenue at the time it sells merchandise. Indicate the amount of revenue (if any) the firm recognizes during the months of February, March, and April in each of the following hypothetical transactions, in which Neiman Marcus does the following:

a. Collects $800 cash from a customer during March for a custom made suit that the firm will make and deliver to the customer in April.

b. Collects $2,160 cash from customers for meals served in the firm’s restaurant during March.

c. Collects $39,200 cash from customers during March for merchandise sold and delivered in February.

d. Sells merchandise to customers during March on account, for which the firm will collect $59,400 cash from customers during April.

e. Rents space in its store to a travel agency for $9,000 a month, effective March 1. Receives $18,000 cash on March 1 for two months’ rent.

f. Same as part e, except that it receives the check for the March and April rent on April 1.

fonterra has not yet delivered the milk or invoiced the grocery store 564036

Revenue recognition. Fonterra Cooperative Group Limited (Fonterra), a New Zealand dairy cooperative, uses the accrual basis of accounting and recognizes revenue at the time it sells products or renders services. Fonterra applies New Zealand accounting standards and reports its results in millions of New Zealand dollars (NZ$). In answering this problem, assume Fonterra uses IFRS. Indicate which of the following transactions or events immediately gives rise to Fonterra’s recognition of revenue.

a. Fonterra has completed the pasteurization of an order of 13,000 liters of milk it will deliver to a grocery store chain next week. Fonterra has not yet delivered the milk or invoiced the grocery store. The selling price of the milk is NZ$26,000.

b. Refer to part a, and assume that the grocery store paid Fonterra a deposit of NZ$5,000 on the order of the milk.

c. Fonterra delivered the milk and billed the grocery store. The grocery store has not yet paid the invoice.

d. One day after delivery, the grocery store called Fonterra and reported that it has to destroy 3,000 liters of milk because it had spoiled sometime prior to its delivery. The grocer refuses to pay for these 3,000 liters.

e. Fonterra spent NZ$10 million to develop a technique to transform a by product of casein (a protein found in milk and cheese) into ethanol. Fonterra expects to use this technique to generate sales of at least NZ$2 million over the next year.

f. Refer to part e, and assume that Fonterra signed contracts worth NZ$400 million for ethanol sales.

expense recognition tesco plc is a british based grocer and retailer chain 564038

Expense recognition. Tesco Plc. is a British based grocer and retailer chain. It uses the accrual basis of accounting and recognizes revenue at the time it sells goods or renders services. It applies IFRS and reports in pounds sterling (£). Indicate the amount of expense recognized during October (if any) from each of the following hypothetical transactions or events. The firm does the following:

a. Pays £440,000 on October 5 for commercials that appeared on British television during September.

b. Pays £1,200,000 on October 6 for refrigeration units delivered to its stores on September 30. The firm expects the refrigerators to last for five years and have no salvage value.

c. Pays £300,000 on October 10 for property taxes for the period from October 1 of this year to September 30 of next year.

d. Pays £15,500 on October 15 for cleaning supplies purchased on October 10. Cleaning supplies on hand on October 1 cost £3,500 and on October 31 cost £5,400.

e. Pays £4,000 on October 20 for repairs to a forklift truck on October 1. The truck had a remaining useful life of five years on October 1.

f. Pays £100,000 on October 25 as a deposit on land Tesco plans to purchase for a new store.

g. Pays £200,000 on October 31 as rent on a warehouse for October and November.

compute net income for the year ended january 31 2008 by analyzing the change in ret 564039

Relating net income to balance sheet changes. Comparative balance sheet data for Bombardier Corporation (Bombardier), a Canadian airplane manufacturer, as of January 31, 2007, and January 31, 2008, appear in the following display, based on Bombardier’s financial reports as of January 31, 2008. Bombardier applies Canadian accounting standards and reports in millions of U.S. dollars. In answering these questions, assume Bombardier uses either U.S. GAAP or IFRS; for the purposes of this problem, this choice will not matter.

Bombardier Corporation Balance Sheet Data January 31, 2007 and 2008

January 31

2008

2007

Total Assets

20,562

$18,577

Liabilities

17,444

15,844

Common Stock

2,078

1,968

Retained Earnings

1,040

765

Bombardier declared and paid dividends of $30 million during the year ended January 31, 2008. During the same year, the firm also reported a positive adjustment to Retained Earnings of $12 million. Net income for 2008 was $293 million.

a. Compute net income for the year ended January 31, 2008, by analyzing the change in retained earnings.

b. Demonstrate that the following relation holds: Net Income _ Increase in Assets _ Increase in Liabilities _ Increase in Contributed Capital _ Dividends and Adjustments

which increased retained earnings by huf307 million 564040

Relating net income to balance sheet changes. Magyar Telekom (Magyar), a Hungarian telecommunications company, reported the following balance sheet information for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2007. Magyar applies IFRS and reports in millions of Hungarian forints (HUF).

Magyar Telekom Balance Sheet Data December 31, 2006 and 2007

2007

2006

Total Assets

HUF 1,135,578

HUF 1,131,595

Total Liabilities

553,885

538,428

Contributed Capital

129,954

128,728

Minority Interest

66,695

67,128

Retained Earnings

385,044

?

During 2007, Magyar declared and paid dividends of HUF72,729 million and made other adjustments, which increased retained earnings by HUF307 million.

a. Compute Magyar’s balance in Retained Earnings for 2006.

b. Compute Magyar’s net income for 2007.

compute the missing amounts for 2007 and 2008 564041

Income statement relations. Selected income statement information for Lenovo Group Limited (Lenovo), a Hong Kong personal computer manufacturer, for two recent years appears in the following display, based on Lenovo’s financial statements for the year ended March 31, 2008. Lenovo applies Hong Kong financial reporting standards and reports its results in thousands of U.S. dollars. In answering this question, assume Lenovo uses either U.S. GAAP or IFRS; for purposes of this problem, this choice will not matter.

2008

2007

Sales

$16,351,503

$13,978,309

Cost of Goods Sold

13,901,523

12,091,433

Selling and Administrative Expenses

1,103,713

1,033,296

Gross Profit

?

?

Profit Before Taxes

?

?

Advertising Expenses

595,902

488,150

Research and Development Expense

229,759

196,225

Other Income (Expense)

?

18,130

Income Tax Expense

47,613

26,197

Net Income

484,708

?

Compute the missing amounts for 2007 and 2008.

compute the missing amounts for each of the three years 564042

Income statement relations. Selected income statement information for three recent years appears next for ABB, the Swiss engineering firm, based on ABB’s financial reports for fiscal 2007. ABB applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

2007

2006

2005

Sales of Products

$24,816

?

$17,622

Income Tax Expense

595

?

464

Earnings Before Interest and Taxes

4,023

$2,557

?

Sales of Services

4,367

3,778

3,342

Selling and Administrative Expenses

4,975

?

3,780

Cost of Services Sold

?

2,570

2,305

Income Before Taxes

?

2,076

1,199

Other Operating Income (Expense)

?

139

37

Interest and Other Financial Expense

286

?

407

Gross Profit

8,968

6,744

?

Cost of Products Sold

17,292

13,967

13,205

Other Nonoperating Income (Expense)

?

(321)

(258)

Interest and Dividend Income

273

147

?

Net Income

3,757

1,390

?

Compute the missing amounts for each of the three years.

income and equity relations selected information based on the comparative balance sh 564044

Income and equity relations. Selected information based on the comparative balance sheets and income statements of Colgate Palmolive Company (Colgate), a U.S. manufacturer of consumer products, for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006, and 2005, appears in the following display, based on Colgate’s financial reports for fiscal 2007. Colgate applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

Colgate Palmolive Company Selected Financial Statement Information

Year Ended December 31

2007

2006

2005

Income Statement Information:

Net Income

$ 1,737.4

$ 1,353.4

$ 1,351.4

Other Comprehensive Income

414.4

?

1.5

Balance Sheet Information:

Common Stock

?

?

732.9

Accumulated Other

Comprehensive Income

?

(2,081.2)

(1,804.7)

Unearned Compensation

(218.9)

(251.4)

(283.3)

Preferred Stock

197.5

222.7

253.7

Retained Earnings

10,627.5

?

8,968.1

Treasury Stock

?

?

(7,581.0)

Additional Paid In Capital

1,517.7

1,218.1

?

Total Shareholders’ Equity

?

?

1,350.1

Other Information:

Dividends Declared and Paid

?

677.8

607.2

Share Repurchases

829.8

492.9

615.6

Common Shares Issued

0

0

0

compute the missing amounts for each of the three years 564045

Income and equity relations. Selected information based on the comparative balance sheets and income statements of Colgate Palmolive Company (Colgate), a U.S. manufacturer of consumer products, for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006, and 2005, appears in the following display, based on Colgate’s financial reports for fiscal 2007. Colgate applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

Colgate Palmolive Company Selected Financial Statement Information

Year Ended December 31

2007

2006

2005

Income Statement Information:

Net Income

$ 1,737.4

$ 1,353.4

$ 1,351.4

Other Comprehensive Income

414.4

?

1.5

Balance Sheet Information:

Common Stock

?

?

732.9

Accumulated Other

Comprehensive Income

?

(2,081.2)

(1,804.7)

Unearned Compensation

218.9)

(251.4)

(283.3)

Preferred Stock

197.5

222.7

253.7

Retained Earnings

10,627.5

?

8,968.1

Treasury Stock

?

?

(7,581.0)

Additional Paid In Capital

1,517.7

1,218.1

?

Total Shareholders’ Equity

?

?

1,350.1

Other Information:

Dividends Declared and Paid

?

677.8

607.2

Share Repurchases

829.8

492.9

615.6

Common Shares Issued

0

0

0

Compute the missing amounts for each of the three years.

accumulated other comprehensive income relations 564046

Accumulated other comprehensive income relations. Selected information based on the comparative balance sheets for MosTechi Corporation (MosTechi), a Japanese electronics manufacturer, appear next for the years ended March 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006. MosTechi applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of yen (¥).

MosTechi Corporation Balance Sheet Data March 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006

March 31

2008

2007

2006

Common Stock

¥ 626,907

¥ 624,124

¥ 621,709

Accumulated Other

Comprehensive Income

?

?

?

Retained Earnings

?

1,602,654

1,506,082

Treasury Stock

?

(3,127)

(6,000)

Additional Paid In Capital

1,143,423

1,136,638

1,134,222

Total Shareholders’ Equity

3,351,500

?

2,870,338

MosTechi’s Other Comprehensive Income for 2007 was ¥229,238; in 2008 it was ¥40,944. During 2008 MosTechi had Net Income of ¥126,328 and declared and paid dividends of ¥25,042. During 2008 MosTechi reported a ¥3,807 decrease to Retained Earnings to adjust for the cumulative effect of an accounting change.

Compute the missing amounts for each of the three years.

solaronx rsquo s other comprehensive income for 2008 was 774 compared to 31 in 2007 564047

Accumulated other comprehensive income relations. Selected information based on the comparative balance sheets for Solaronx Company (Solaronx), a U.S. defense manufacturer, appears in the following display for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006. Solaronx applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of dollars.

Solaronx Company Balance Sheet Data December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006

December 31

2008

2007

2006

Common Stock

$ 5

$ 5

$ 5

Accumulated Other

Comprehensive Income

?

?

(1,919)

Retained Earnings

?

?

2,998

Treasury Stock

(816)

(543)

(73)

Additional Paid In Capital

10,097

9,722

9,540

Total Shareholders’ Equity

?

?

?

Solaronx’s Other Comprehensive Income for 2008 was $774, compared to ($31) in 2007 and $275 in 2006. In addition, in 2008 Solaronx made a one time adjustment of ($1,338) to Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income. Comprehensive Income for 2008 was $2,057, compared to $840 in 2007 and $692 in 2006. Dividends declared and paid increased from $356 in 2006, to $394 in 2007, to $429 in 2008.

Compute the missing amounts for each of the three years.

what portion of bayer rsquo s total net income in 2007 came from discontinued operat 564048

Discontinued operations. Selected information from Bayer Group’s financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2007, appear below. Bayer Group (Bayer) is a German pharmaceutical company that applies IFRS and reports its results in millions of euros (€).

a. What portion of Bayer’s total net income in 2007 came from discontinued operations? How does this compare to 2006?

b. What portion of Bayer’s total assets in 2007 is associated with discontinued operations? How does this compare to 2006?

c. What explains the large decline in Bayer’s assets held for discontinued operations in 2007?

Bayer Group Balance Sheet and Income Statement Data December 31, 2006 and 2007

December 31

2007

2006

€ 2,306

€ 1,526

Income from Continuing Operations (after taxes)

2,410

169

Income from Discontinued Operations (after taxes)

84

2,925

Assets Held for Discontinued Operations

51,378

55,891

Total Assets

compute the missing amounts for each of the two years 564049

Discontinued operations. Selected financial information for Orascom Telecom Holding S.A.E. (Orascom), an Egyptian telecommunications firm, is shown in the following display for the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2006, based on Orascom’s financial reports for fiscal 2007. Orascom applies Egyptian accounting standards and reports its results in thousands of Egyptian pounds (£). In answering this question, assume that Orascom uses either U.S. GAAP or IFRS; for the purposes of this problem, this choice will not matter.

Orascom Telecom Holding S.A.E. Balance Sheet and Income Statement Data December 31, 2006 and 2007

December 31

2007

2006

Income from Continuing Operations

(before taxes)

£ 9,293,448

£ 4,456,900

Assets Held for Discontinued Operations

?

7,327,709

Taxes on Income from Continuing Operations

2,571,426

?

Income from Discontinued Operations (net of tax)

?

1,020,213

Income from Continuing Operations (after tax)

?

3,595,713

Net Income

11,935,088

?

Assets Used in Continuing Operations

34,348,838

?

Total Assets

39,492,853

34,209,746

Compute the missing amounts for each of the two years.

prepare in good format an income statement for cemex for 2006 and 2007 assuming the 564050

Income statement formats. Information from Cemex, S.A.B.’s income statements for the years ended December 31, 2006 and 2007, is shown in the following display. Cemex is a Mexican construction firm that applies Mexican accounting standards and reports its results in millions of pesos ($).

Cemex, S.A.B. Income Statement Data December 31, 2006 and 2007

December 31

2007

2006

Net Sales

$236,669

$213,767

Cost of Sales

157,696

?

Gross Profit

?

77,320

Administrative and Selling Expenses

33,120

28,588

Distribution Expenses

13,405

?

Other Expenses, net

3,281

580

Operating Income

?

33,925

Financial Expenses

8,809

?

Financial Income

862

536

Income (Expense) from Financial Instruments

2,387

(161)

Other Financial Income (Expense)

6,647

4,905

Equity in Income of Associates

1,487

1,425

Profit Before Income Tax

?

34,845

Income Tax

?

?

Consolidated Profit

?

?

Portion of Profit Attributable to Minority Interest

837

?

Portion of Profit Attributable to Cemex Shareholders

?

27,855

Assume Cemex had an effective tax rate of 15.11% in 2007, and 16.35% in 2006.

a. Compute the missing amounts for each of the two years.

b. Prepare, in good format, an income statement for Cemex for 2006 and 2007 assuming the firm applies IFRS.

the company applies u s gaap and reports its results in millions of u s dollars 564051

Income statement formats. Information from GoodLuck Brands’s income statements for the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, is shown next. GoodLuck Brands is a U.S. based manufacturer and distributor. The company applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

2008

2007

2006

Net Sales

$8,769.0

$7,061.2

$6,145.2

Cost of Products Sold

4,618.9

3,843.0

3,342.1

Excise Taxes on Spirits and Wine

514.0

326.5

299.7

Advertising, Selling,

and Administrative

2,070.1

1,694.4

1,694.4

Amortization of Intangibles

43.5

33.4

33.4

Restructuring Charges

21.2

Operating Income

$1,501.3

$1,163.9

$1,163.9

Interest Expense

332.4

158.9

158.9

Other Financial Expense (Income)

(40.2)

78.9

78.9

Income Before Minority Interest and Taxes

$1,209.1

$ 926.1

$ 926.1

Income Taxes

311.1

324.5

324.5

Minority Interests

67.9

20.0

20.0

Income from Continuing Operations

$ 830.1

$ 581.6

$ 581.6

Income from Discontinued Operations,

net tax

39.5

67.8

Net Income

$ 830.1

$ 621.1

$ 783.8

Prepare, in good format, income statements for Good Luck Brands for 2006, 2007, and 2008, assuming the firm applies IFRS.

classification and interpreting income statements 564054

Classification and interpreting income statements. SeaBreeze Inc., a Taiwan based semiconductor manufacturer, reported the following information for 2008. SeaBreeze Inc. applies IFRS and reports in millions of yuan (¥).

2008

Sales

¥ 1,891,466

Cost of Sales

(1,737,427)

Gross Profit

¥ 154,039

Selling, General and Administrative

(98,524)

Profit Before Tax

¥ 55,515

Income Taxes

(23,594)

Profit

¥ 31,921

Further information available to you reveals the following five items (all financial figures reported in millions of yuan).

a. During 2008 SeaBreeze had ¥$10,000 in gains on sales of assets. The firm included the gains as part of Revenues.

b. SeaBreeze included financial income of ¥$25,800 as part of Revenues, and financial expenses of ¥$12,000 as part of Cost of Sales.

c. The firm included a ¥$6,000 write down of inventory in Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses. Normally in this industry, such a write down is included in Cost of Sales.

d. The firm included research and development expenditures of ¥$34,000 in Cost of Sales. None of the expenditures related to proven technologies (and so were correctly not capitalized).

e. During 2008 the firm committed to a plan to discontinue part of its operations. The discontinued operations accounted for ¥$22,000 of gross profit.

Evaluate the way SeaBreeze classified each of the five items on its income statement. If you disagree with the classification, state your reasoning and determine the effect on the firm’s gross margin and net income from the alternative classification that you would recommend.

compute the ratio of net income divided by revenues for each year 564055

Calculation of tax rates. A multinational computer equipment manufacturer reported the following amounts for two recent years (in millions of U.S. dollars). The firm applies U.S. GAAP.

2008

2007

Revenues

$ 88,396

$ 87,548

Expenses

(76,862)

(75,791)

Income Before Income Taxes

$ 11,534

$ 11,757

Income Tax Expense

(3,441)

(4,045)

Net Income

$ 8,093

$ 7,712

a. Compute the ratio of net income divided by revenues for each year.

b. Compute the ratio of income before taxes divided by revenues for each year.

c. Compute the ratio of income tax expense divided by income before taxes, a ratio called the effective tax rate.

d. What do these ratios suggest as to the principal reason for the change in profitability between 2007 and 2008?

disbursement of 96 900 to merchandise suppliers 564056

Classifying cash flows by type of activity. Indicate whether each of the following transactions of the current period would appear as an operating, investing, or financing activity in the statement of cash flows. If any transaction would not appear in the statement of cash flows, suggest the reason.

a. Disbursement of $96,900 to merchandise suppliers.

b. Receipt of $200,000 from issuing common shares.

c. Receipt of $49,200 from customers for sales made this period.

d. Receipt of $22,700 from customers this period for sales made last period.

e. Receipt of $1,800 from a customer for goods the firm will deliver next period.

f. Disbursement of $16,000 for interest expense on debt.

g. Disbursement of $40,000 to acquire land.

h. Issue of common shares with market value of $60,000 to acquire land.

i. Disbursement of $25,300 as compensation to employees for services rendered this period.

j. Disbursement of $7,900 to employees for services rendered last period but not paid for last period.

k. Disbursement of $53,800 for a patent purchased from its inventor.

l. Acquisition of a building by issuing a note payable to a bank.

m. Disbursement of $19,300 as a dividend to shareholders.

n. Receipt of $12,000 from the sale of equipment that originally cost $20,000 and had $8,000 of accumulated depreciation at the time of sale.

o. Disbursement of $100,000 to redeem bonds at maturity.

p. Disbursement of $40,000 to acquire shares of IBM common stock.

q. Receipt of $200 in dividends from IBM relating to the shares of common stock acquired in transaction p above.

is used to reduce the cost of main products when by products are produced 563436

(Net realizable value versus realized value) Indicate whether each item listed below is associated with the (1) realized value approach or (2) the net realizable value approach.

a. Has the advantage of better timing

b. Ignores value of by product/scrap until it is sold

c. Is simpler

d. Is used to reduce the cost of main products when by products are produced

e. Credits either cost of goods sold of main products or the joint cost when the by product inventory is recorded

f. Presents proceeds from sale of by products as other revenue or other income

g. Is appropriate if the by product’s net realizable value is small

h. Is less conservative

i. Is the most clerically efficient

j. Should be used when the by product’s net realizable value is large

if space is used as the allocation measure how much of the pamphlet rsquo s cost sho 563437

(Not for profit, program, and support cost allocation) The Grand Rapids Opera Company is preparing a small pamphlet that will provide information on the types of opera, opera terminology, and storylines of some of the more well known operas. In addition, there will be a request for funds to support the opera company at the end of the brochure. The company has tax exempt status and operates on a not for profit basis. The cost of designing and printing 100,000 copies of the pamphlet is $360,000. One page out of ten is devoted to soliciting funding; however, 98% of the time spent in the design stage was on developing and writing the opera information.

a. If space is used as the allocation measure, how much of the pamphlet’s cost should be assigned to program activities? To fundraising activities?

b. If design time is used as the allocation measure, how much of the pamphlet’s cost should be assigned to program activities? To fundraising activities?

after cooking the perfume is removed from the vats and bottled without further proce 563438

(Journal entries) Madeleine Products uses a joint process to make two main products: Elegance (a perfume) and Sooosoft (a skin lotion). Two departments, Mixing and Cooking, are used, but the products do not become separable until they have been through the cooking process. After cooking, the perfume is removed from the vats and bottled without further processing. The residue remaining in the vats is then blended with aloe and lanolin to become the lotion. In the Mixing Department, these costs were incurred during October 2000:

Direct material

$28,000

Direct labor

7,560

Manufacturing overhead applied

4,250

In the Cooking Department, costs incurred during October 2000, before separation of the joint products, were

Elegance perfume (bottles only)

$2,120

Sooosoft lotion:

Direct material

1,960

Direct labor

3,120

Manufacturing overhead applied

4,130

Neither department had beginning Work in Process Inventory balances, and all work started in October was completed in that month. The joint costs are allocated to perfume and lotion on the basis of approximated net realizable values at split off. For October, the approximated net realizable values at split offwere $158,910 for perfume and $52,970 for lotion.

a. Prepare journal entries for the Mixing and Cooking Departments for October 2000.

b. Determine the joint cost allocated to, and the total cost of, Elegance and Sooosoft

c. Diagram the flow of costs for Madeleine Products for these two products.

determine the income for each main service and the company rsquo s overall gross mar 563439

(Joint cost allocation; by product; income determination) St. Louis Bank & Trust has two main service lines: commercial checking and credit cards. As a byproduct of these two main services, the firm also generates some revenue from selling antitheft and embezzlement insurance. Joint costs for producing the two main services include expenses for facilities, legal support, equipment, record keeping, and administration. The joint service cost incurred during June 2000 was $800,000. These costs are to be allocated on the basis of total revenues generated from each main service. The following table presents the results of operations and revenues for June:

Service

Number of Accounts

Total Revenues

Commercial checking

3,000

$1,897,500

Credit cards

7,000

1,402,500

Theft insurance

6,500

65,000

Management accounts for the theft insurance on a realized value basis. When commissions on theft insurance are received, management has elected to present the proceeds as a reduction in the Cost of Services Rendered for the main services. Separate costs for the two main services for June were $250,000 and $180,000, respectively, for checking accounts and credit cards.

a. Allocate the joint cost.

b. Determine the income for each main service and the company’s overall gross margin for June 2000.

what amount of cost for robes is transferred to finished goods inventory for july wh 563440

(Joint cost allocation; scrap) Washington Filaments produces cloth products for hotels. The company buys the fabric in 60 inch wide bolts. In the first process, the fabric is set up, cut, and separated into pieces. Setup can either be for robes and bath towels or for hand towels and washcloths. During July, the company set up and cut 3,000 robes and 6,000 bath towels. Because of the irregular pattern of the robes, scrap is produced in the process and is sold to various institutions (prisons, hospitals, etc.) for rags at $1.25 per pound. July production and cost data for Washington Filaments are as follows

Fabric used, 12,500 feet at $1.91 per foot

$23,875

Labor, joint process

$6,000

Overhead, joint process

$5,900

Pounds of scrap produced

1,800

Washington Filaments assigns the joint processing cost to the robes and towels based on approximated net realizable value at split off. The final selling prices for robes and bath towels are $20 and $11 per unit, respectively. Costs after split off are $8.40 and $2.30, respectively, for the robes and the towels. The selling price of the scrap is treated as a reduction of joint cost.

a. Determine the joint cost to be allocated to the joint products for July.

b. How much joint cost is allocated to the robes in July? To the bath towels? Prepare the journal entry necessary at the point of split off.

c. What amount of cost for robes is transferred to Finished Goods Inventory for July? What amount of cost for towels is transferred to Finished Goods Inventory for July?

determine the sum of the material labor and overhead costs associated with the joint 563441

(Joint products; by product) Valley Mangoes runs a fruit packing business in southern California. The firm buys mangoes by the truckload in season. The fruit is then separated into three categories according to its condition. Group 1 is suitable for selling as is to supermarket chains and specialty gift stores. Group 2 is suitable for slicing and bottling in light syrup to be sold to supermarkets. Group 3 is considered a by product and is sold to another company that processes it into jelly. The firm has two processing departments: (1) Receiving and Separating and (2) Slicing and Bottling.

A particular truckload cost the company $1,500 and yielded 1,500 mangoes in Group 1, 2,000 mangoes in Group 2, and 500 mangoes in Group 3. The labor to separate the fruit into categories was $300, and the company uses a predetermined overhead application rate of 50 percent of direct labor cost. Only Group 2 has any significant additional processing cost, estimated at $220, but each group has boxing and delivery costs as follows:

Group 1

$150

Group 2

220

Group 3

50

The final sales revenue of Group 1 is $3,000, of Group 2 is $1,500, and of Group 3 is $450.

a. Determine the sum of the material, labor, and overhead costs associated with the joint process.

b. Allocate the total joint cost using the approximated net realizable value at split off method, assuming that the by product is recorded when realized and is shown as other income on the income statement.

c. Prepare the entries for parts (a) and (b) assuming that the by product is sold for $450 and that all costs were incurred as estimated.

d. Allocate the total joint cost using the approximated net realizable value at split off method, assuming that the by product is recorded using the net realizable value approach and that the joint cost is reduced by the net realizable value of the by product.

e. Prepare the entries for parts (a) and (d), assuming that the estimated realizable value of the by product is $400.

beverly crusher a new staff accountant is confused because of the complexities invol 563573

Financial Reporting Problem

Beverly Crusher, a new staff accountant, is confused because of the complexities involving accounting standard setting. Specifically, she is confused by the number of bodies issuing financial reporting standards of one kind or another and the level of authoritative support that can be attached to these reporting standards. Beverly decides that she must review the environment in which accounting standards are set, if she is to increase her understanding of the accounting profession. Beverly recalls that during her accounting education there was a chapter or two regarding the environment of financial accounting and the development of GAAP. However, she remembers that her instructor placed little emphasis on these chapters.

Instructions

(a) Help Beverly by identifying key organizations involved in accounting rule making.

(b) Beverly asks for guidance regarding authoritative support. Please assist her by explaining what is meant by authoritative support.

(c) Give Beverly a historical overview of how rule making has evolved so that she will not feel that she is the only one to be confused.

(d) What authority for compliance with GAAP has existed throughout the history of rulemaking?

as a newly enrolled accounting major you are anxious to better understand accounting 563574

Professional Research

As a newly enrolled accounting major, you are anxious to better understand accounting institutions and sources of accounting literature. As a first step, you decide to explore the FASB Conceptual Framework.

Instructions

If your school has a subscription to the FASB Codification, go to access the FASB conceptual framework. When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser to respond to the following items. (Provide paragraph citations.)

(a) What is the objective of financial reporting?

(b) What other means are there of communicating information, besides financial statements?

(c) Indicate some of the users and the information they are most directly concerned with in economic decision making.

match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements 563594

BE 1 Match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements.

1. Relevance 5. Comparability

2. Faithful representation 6. Completeness

3. Predictive value 7. Neutrality

4. Confirmatory value 8. Timeliness

(a) Quality of information that permits users to identify similarities in and differences between two sets of economic phenomena.

(b) Having information available to users before it loses its capacity to influence decisions.

(c) Information about an economic phenomenon that has value as an input to the processes used by capital providers to form their own expectations about the future.

(d) Information that is capable of making a difference in the decisions of users in their capacity as capital providers.

(e) Absence of bias intended to attain a predetermined result or to induce a particular behavior.

what are the differences between an operating lease and a financial lease 563939

Sale and Leaseback Agreements

A sale and leaseback occurs when a company sells an asset it owns to another party and simultaneously leases it back. In a sale and leaseback, two things happen:

1. The lessee receives cash from the sale of the asset.

2. The lessee continues to use the asset. Often, with a sale and leaseback, the lessee may have the option to repurchase the leased asset at the end of the lease.

An example of a sale and leaseback occurred in August of 2001 when the Malaysian government announced that it was setting up a company to buy aircraft owned by Malaysian Airlines and lease them back. The goal was to strengthen Malaysian Airlines’ financial position by providing it with needed cash. In fact, sale and leaseback agreements often are arranged for this purpose.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a What are the differences between an operating lease and a financial lease?

b What is a tax oriented lease?

c What is a sale and leaseback agreement?

financial managers who devote substantial effort to keeping leases off the balance s 563940

ACCOUNTING AND LEASING

Before November 1976, leasing was frequently called off–balance sheet financing. As the name implies, a firm could arrange to use an asset through a lease and not necessarily

A. Balance Sheet with Purchase

(the company finances a $100,000 truck with debt)

Truck

$100,000

Debt

$100,000

Other assets

100,000

Equity

100,000

Total assets

$200,000

Total debt plus equity

$200,000

B. Balance Sheet with Operating Lease

(the company finances the truck with an operating lease)

Truck

$ 0

Debt

$ 0

Other assets

100,000

Equity

100,000

Total assets

$100,000

Total debt plus equity

$100,000

C. Balance Sheet with Capital Lease

(the company finances the truck with a capital lease)

Assets under

$100,000

Obligations under

$100,000

capital lease

capital lease

Other assets

100,000

Equity

100,000

Total assets

$200,000

Total debt plus equity

$200,000

disclose the existence of the lease contract on the balance sheet. Lessees had to report information on leasing activity only in the footnotes to their financial statements. In November 1976, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued its Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 13 (FASB 13), “Accounting for Leases.” The basic idea of FASB 13 is that certain financial leases must be “capitalized.”

Essentially, this requirement means that the present value of the lease payments must be calculated and reported along with debt and other liabilities on the right hand side of the lessee’s balance sheet. The same amount must be shown as the capitalized value of leased assets on the left hand side of the balance sheet. Operating leases are not disclosed on the balance sheet. Exactly what constitutes a financial or operating lease for accounting purposes will be discussed in just a moment.

The accounting implications of FASB 13 are illustrated in Table 26.1. Imagine a firm that has $100,000 in assets and no debt, which implies that the equity is also $100,000. The firm needs a truck costing $100,000 (it’s a big truck) that it can lease or buy. The top of the table shows the balance sheet assuming that the firm borrows the money and buys the truck.

If the firm leases the truck, then one of two things will happen. If the lease is an operating lease, then the balance sheet will look like the one in Part B of the table. In this case, neither the asset (the truck) nor the liability (the present value of the lease payments) appears. If the lease is a capital lease, then the balance sheet will look more like the one in Part C of the table, where the truck is shown as an asset and the present value of the lease payments is shown as a liability.

As we discussed earlier, it is difficult, if not impossible, to give a precise definition of what constitutes a financial lease or an operating lease. For accounting purposes, a lease is declared to be a capital lease, and must therefore be disclosed on the balance sheet, if at least one of the following criteria is met:

1. The lease transfers ownership of the property to the lessee by the end of the term of the lease.

2. The lessee can purchase the asset at a price below fair market value (bargain purchase price option) when the lease expires.

3. The lease term is 75 percent or more of the estimated economic life of the asset.

4. The present value of the lease payments is at least 90 percent of the fair market value of the asset at the start of the lease.

If one or more of the four criteria are met, the lease is a capital lease; otherwise, it is an operating lease for accounting purposes.

A firm might be tempted to try and “cook the books” by taking advantage of the somewhat arbitrary distinction between operating leases and capital leases. Suppose a trucking firm wants to lease a $100,000 truck. The truck is expected to last for 15 years. A (perhaps unethical) financial manager could try to negotiate a lease contract for 10 years with lease payments having a present value of $89,000. These terms would get around Criteria 3 and 4. If Criteria 1 and 2 were similarly circumvented, the arrangement would be an operating lease and would not show up on the balance sheet. There are several alleged benefits from “hiding” financial leases. One of the advantages of keeping leases off the balance sheet has to do with fooling financial analysts, creditors, and investors. The idea is that if leases are not on the balance sheet, they will not be noticed.

Financial managers who devote substantial effort to keeping leases off the balance sheet are probably wasting time. Of course, if leases are not on the balance sheet, traditional measures of financial leverage, such as the ratio of total debt to total assets, will understate the true degree of financial leverage. As a consequence, the balance sheet will appear “stronger” than it really is. But it seems unlikely that this type of manipulation would mislead many people.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a For accounting purposes, what constitutes a capital lease?

b How are capital leases reported?

what are some of the standards the irs uses in evaluating a lease 563941

TAXES, THE IRS, AND LEASES

The lessee can deduct lease payments for income tax purposes if the lease is deemed to be a true lease by the Internal Revenue Service. The tax shields associated with lease payments are critical to the economic viability of a lease, so IRS guidelines are an important consideration. Essentially, the IRS requires that a lease be primarily for business purposes and not merely for purposes of tax avoidance.

In broad terms, a lease that is valid from the IRS’s perspective will meet the following standards:

1. The term of the lease must be less than 80 percent of the economic life of the asset. If the term is greater than this, the transaction will be regarded as a conditional sale.

2. The lease should not include an option to acquire the asset at the end of the lease term at a price below the asset’s then–fair market value. This type of bargain option would give the lessee the asset’s residual scrap value, implying an equity interest.

3. The lease should not have a schedule of payments that are very high at the start of the lease term and thereafter very low. If the lease requires early “balloon” payments, this will be considered evidence that the lease is being used to avoid taxes and not for a legitimate business purpose. The IRS may require an adjustment in the payments for tax purposes in such cases.

4. The lease must survive a profits test, meaning that the lessor must have the reasonable expectation of making a profit without considering income taxes.

5. Renewal options must be reasonable and reflect the fair market value of the asset at the time of renewal. This requirement can be met by, for example, granting the lessee the first option to meet a competing outside offer.

The IRS is concerned about lease contracts because leases sometimes appear to be set up solely to defer taxes. To see how this could happen, suppose that a firm plans to purchase a $1 million bus that has a five year life for depreciation purposes. Assume that straight line depreciation to a zero salvage value is used. The depreciation expense would be $200,000 per year. Now suppose the firm can lease the bus for $500,000 per year for two years and buy the bus for $1 at the end of the two year term. The present value of the tax benefits is clearly less if the bus is bought than if the bus is leased. The speedup of lease payments greatly benefits the firm and basically gives it a form of accelerated depreciation. In this case, the IRS might decide that the primary purpose of the lease was to defer taxes.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a Why is the IRS concerned about leasing?

b What are some of the standards the IRS uses in evaluating a lease?

what payment would leave tasha indifferent between leasing and not leasing tasha wil 563944

It’s the Lease We Can Do

In our Tasha example, a lease payment of $2,500 makes the lease unattractive to Tasha, and a lease payment of $2,000 makes the lease very attractive. What payment would leave Tasha indifferent between leasing and not leasing? Tasha will be indifferent when the NPV from leasing is zero. For this to happen, the present value of the cash flows from leasing instead of buying will have to be $10,000. From our previous efforts, we know that the lease payment must be somewhere between $2,500 and $2,000. To find the exact payment, we note that there are five payments and the relevant rate is 5 percent per year, so the cash flow from leasing instead of borrowing must be $2,309.75 per year.

Now that we have the cash flow from leasing instead of borrowing, we have to work backwards to find the lease payment that produces this cash flow. Suppose we let LP stand for the lease payment. Referring back to Table 26.2, we see that we must have that LP ×(1 .34) $680 =$2,309.75. With a little algebra, we see that the zero NPV lease payment is $2,469.32.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a Why do we say that leasing is a zero sum game?

b What paradox does the previous question create?

explain why the existence of differential tax rates may be a good reason for leasing 563945

There are, of course, many special reasons for some companies to find advantages in leasing. In one celebrated case, the U.S. Navy leased a fleet of tankers instead of asking Congress for appropriations. Thus, leasing may be used to circumvent capital expenditure control systems set up by bureaucratic firms. This is alleged to be a relatively common occurrence in hospitals, for example. Many school districts lease buses and modular classrooms and pay for them out of their operating budgets when they are unable to gain approval for a bond issue to raise funds.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a Explain why the existence of differential tax rates may be a good reason for leasing.

b If leasing is tax motivated, who will have the higher tax bracket, lessee or lessor?

assume the shoes are marked down and the customer cannot return or exchange them 564020

Nordstrom sold a pair of shoes for $100 to a customer who pays with cash. Assume the shoes are marked down and the customer cannot return or exchange them. Nordstrom received cash, so the transaction meets the second criterion. The transaction also meets the first criterion because Nordstrom has no additional obligations after the customer has received the shoes. Nordstrom would, therefore, recognize revenue on this transaction and make the following journal entry:

Cash

100

Sales Revenue

100

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

+100

+100

IncStaRE

nordstrom sold a pair of shoes for 100 to a customer who paid with a nordstrom credi 564021

Nordstrom sold a pair of shoes for $100 to a customer who paid with a Nordstrom credit card. Again, assume the shoes are marked down and the customer cannot return or exchange them. Nordstrom has received a promise of cash payment (an account receivable), so the transaction meets the second criterion. (We revisit the measurement of accounts receivable in Chapter 7 when we take up the issue of customers who do not pay.) The transaction also meets the first criterion because Nordstrom has no additional obligations. Nordstrom would, therefore, recognize revenue on this transaction and make the following journal entry:

Accounts Receivable

100

Sales Revenue

100

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

+100

+100

IncStaRE

nordstrom sells gift cards for cash nordstrom has promised to provide merchandise to 564022

Nordstrom sells gift cards for cash. Nordstrom has promised to provide merchandise to the holder of the gift card up to the amount stated on the card, so Nordstrom has an obligation. Assume that gift cards expire five years after the issue date so that Nordstrom has no obligation to provide merchandise to the cardholder after the expiration date. If Nordstrom sells a gift card for $100 on the first day of its fiscal year, Nordstrom expects to deliver on its promise of providing merchandise to the cardholder sometime during the next 60 months. Nordstrom has received $100 cash, so the transaction meets criterion 2. However, Nordstrom has not met criterion 1. It has incurred an obligation to perform in the future, equal to the amount of cash received, $100; this is an example of a deferred performance obligation. At the time of the gift card purchase, Nordstrom would record the following journal entry:

Cash

100

Advances from Customers

100

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

+100

+100

At the time of the gift card purchase, to record the sale of the gift card for cash.

Nordstrom recognizes revenue as it performs by delivering merchandise to the cardholder. If the cardholder fails to use the entire $100 amount by the expiration date, Nordstrom will recognize as revenue any remaining amount on the card.12 If the cardholder uses the card twice, to purchase a $55 sweater and a $10 pair of socks, Nordstrom would make the following journal entries to recognize revenues.13

Advances from Customers

10

Sales Revenue

10

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

10

+10

IncStaRE

At the time of the sweater sale, to recognize the revenue on the sale of the sweater.

Advances from Customers

55

Sales Revenue

55

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

55

+55

IncStaRE

At the time of the sock sale, to recognize the revenue on the sale of the socks.

At the expiration date, Nordstrom would recognize the remaining amount on the card as revenue with the following journal entry:

Advances from Customers

35

Sales Revenue

35

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

35

+35

IncStaRE

To recognize revenue on the unused portion of the gift card at the end of 60 months when the card has expired.

which it bases on total sales of that period 564023

Based on historical data, Nordstrom estimates that customers will return goods amounting to 1% of its sales. The customers will receive full refunds or store credit. If total sales in an accounting period are $600 million, Nordstrom will recognize an estimated liability for sales returns of $6 (=.01x $600) million, recorded as follows:

Sales Revenue

6,000,000

Estimated Liability for Sales Returns

6,000,000

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

+6,000,000

6,000,000

IncStaRE

To recognize the estimate of sales that customers will return.

The firm does not record sales returns, allowances, and discounts for individual sales of merchandise. Instead, it records adjustments to sales revenue in adjusting entries at the end of each reporting period, which it bases on total sales of that period.

if nordstrom originally purchased the shoes from its shoe vendor for 70 564025

Nordstrom must also show the consumption of the asset sold—the shoes in inventory. If Nordstrom originally purchased the shoes from its shoe vendor for $70, Nordstrom would record the following journal entry to recognize as an expense the product costs associated with the sale of the shoes:

Cost of Goods Sold

70

Inventory

70

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

70

+70

IncStaRE

To record the reduction of inventory associated with the sale of merchandise.

This transaction affects Nordstrom’s income statement; it also affects Nordstrom’s balance sheet when revenue and expense accounts are closed to the Retained Earnings account. The revenue part of the transaction increases Retained Earnings by $100, and the expense part of the transaction decreases Retained Earnings by $70. The net effect increases Retained Earnings by $30 (before taxes).

assume that you are in charge of a social service agency that provides counseling se 563393

Assume that you are in charge of a social service agency that provides counseling services to welfare families. The agency’s costs have been increasing with no corresponding increase in funding. In an effort to implement some cost reductions, you implement the following ideas:

1. Counselors are empowered to make their own decisions about the legitimacy of all welfare claims.

2. To emphasize the concept of “do it right the first time,” counselors are told not to review processed claims at a later date.

3. To discourage “out of control” conditions, an upper and lower control limit of 5 minutes is set on a standard 15 minute time for consultations. Discuss the ethics as well as the positive and negative effects of each of the ideas listed.

why would the fact that a supplier rsquo s industry is moving toward iso 9000 motiva 563395

Increasing numbers of U.S. businesses have been seeking to comply with the ISO 9000 standards simply because of real or perceived market forces. Some of the most commonly given reasons for seeking ISO 9000 registration or compliance follow:

• “Our customers are demanding it, often by putting ISO 9000 into contracts.”

• “Our customers say they will treat ISO 9000 registered suppliers preferentially.”

• “Our competitors are achieving registration, so we must also.”

• “We need to improve quality; ISO 9000 seems like a practical, no nonsense, and internationally accepted approach.”

• “Our customers demand quality; ISO 9000 registration makes a statement about our commitment to quality.”

• “Our European divisions already have ISO 9000 registration, and they are putting pressure on us to conform.”

• “Our industry seems to be moving toward ISO 9000.”The rapid growth of ISO 9000 implementation shows that the forces of the marketplace (whether the direct forces at work in regulated industries or the indirect ones that govern the free markets) are an effective influence in getting companies to adopt standards and, more importantly, to use them to improve their processes.

a. Why do you think customers are insisting that suppliers meet ISO 9000 standards?

b. Does meeting ISO 9000 standards mean that a supplier’s products or services are superior to those of competitors? Elaborate on what such conformance means.

c. Why would the fact that a supplier’s industry is moving toward ISO 9000 motivate the supplier to seek registration?

d. How would complying with ISO 9000 help a company improve quality?

just how tired were delta air lines capt roscoe mcmillan and his crew last wednesday 563398

Just how tired were Delta Air Lines Capt. Roscoe McMillan and his crew last Wednesday when he diverted his Atlanta to Tokyo flight to Portland, Oregon, and called it a day? Too tired, in his judgment, based on more than 30 years as a Delta pilot, to continue safely with the 14 hour journey to Narita International Airport, according to what the captain told Delta officials. The problem: Two of the other pilots couldn’t sleep in the aircraft’s controversial new berths, and based on earlier experience, Capt. McMillian figured he couldn’t either. Capt. McMillan, who has a perfect flying record and a reputation for being= outspoken, has been campaigning against the bunks from the start. In a recent posting on the pilots’ union private Web site, he wrote of the new setup: “I think it stinks.” Delta adopted the new berths as part of a redesign of its international service. Among other things, the new bunks allow for more seats, which Delta says will translate into $40 million in additional revenue from the five altered planes over the next five years. Shortly after the incident, the Air Line Pilots Association filed a grievance and lodged a complaint over the issue of the berths with the

a. Who are the stakeholders in this situation? What do you think are the ethical issues?

b. If you were asked by Delta and the pilots union to mediate this issue, what are the facts you might need to determine?

c. What are the economic benefits and risks that should concern an airline in such a case?

d. What are the issues that should concern the pilots and the union?

what are some advantages to an automaker of having a single industry quality standar 563399

In a move that clears the way for a wave of high tech interactive gadgets in cars and trucks, five of the world’s biggest automakers announced they are pursuing a common wiring standard for new vehicles. General Motors Corp., Ford Motor Co., DaimlerChrysler AG, Toyota Motor Corp., and Renault SA said they signed a memorandum of agreement to develop an industrywide standard so their new vehicles can accommodate the array of communications and entertainment equipment being developed for the auto industry. Additional automakers are expected to sign onto the agreement in coming months, industry executives said.

a. What are some advantages to an automaker of having a single industry quality standard?

b. What are some advantages to automaker customers of having a single industry quality standard?

c. How would a nation benefit if all major companies in an industry were to subscribe to a single quality standard?

go to the internet and find a discussion about the number of potential outputs of a 563414

(Terminology) Go to the Internet and find a discussion about the number of potential outputs of a peanut crop. Report your findings along with examples. Examine the relationship of your findings to accounting for joint products, by products, and scrap..

a. Approximated sales value at split off method

1. Proration of joint cost on nonmonetary basis

b. By product

2. Proration of joint cost on basis of dollar values

c. Incremental separate costs

3. Calculation employed by all commonly used allocation methods

d. Joint cost

4. Cost incurred to produce several products at the same time in one process

e. Joint process

5. Residual output with no sales value

f. Joint product

6. Production process yielding more than one product

g. Monetary measure allocation

7. Output that has sales value less than that of a by product

h. Net realizable value

8. Proration of joint cost on the basis of relative sales values of joint products at split of

i. Physical measure allocation

9. Material, labor, and overhead incurred in a joint process

j. Proration

10. Additional costs incurred between split off point and sale

k. Realized value approach

11. A cost that cannot change, no matter what course of future action is taken

l. Sales value at split off method

12. Incidental output with value greater than scrap

m. Scrap

13. Primary output of a joint process

n. Split off point

14. Point at which outputs first become identifiable as individual products

o. Sunk cost

15. A method that does not recognize by product value until sale

p. Waste

16. Selling price less costs to complete and dispose

explain in nontechnical terms what questions about joint processes someone who manag 563415

(Joint process decision making) Andrew Berwick has been asked by his aged aunt to take over the family butcher shop. Andrew has learned that you are majoring in accounting—he majored in art—and asks you to help him understand the butcher shop business. He wants you to do the following:

a. Explain, in nontechnical terms, what questions about joint processes someone who manages a butcher shop must answer. Also, indicate the points in a joint process at which these questions should be addressed.

b. Describe, in your own words, the proper managerial use of a joint cost; also, describe whether a joint cost may be used inappropriately and the basis on which you think a particular use is inappropriate.

c. Compare and contrast the various categories of outputs generated by a joint process.

scott community college runs two noncredit evening programs 563416

(Physical and sales value allocations) Scott Community College runs two noncredit evening programs. During 2000, the following operating data were generated:

Small Business Management

Introduction to Internet

Class hours taught

4,000

2,000

Hourly tuition

$5

$15

The general ledger accounts show $37,000 for direct instructional costs and $5,000 for overhead associated with these two programs. The Board of Trustees wants to know the cost of each program.

a. Determine the cost of each program using a physical measurement base.

b. Determine the cost of each program using the sales value at split off method.

c. Make a case for each allocation method from parts (a) and (b).

physical measure allocation patterson chemical company uses a joint process to manu 563417

(Physical measure allocation) Patterson Chemical Company uses a joint process to manufacture two chemicals. During October 2000, the company incurred $12,000,000 of joint production cost in producing 12,000 tons of Chemical A and 8,000 tons of Chemical B (a ton is equal to 2,000 pounds). Joint cost incurred by the company is allocated on the basis of tons of chemicals produced. Patterson Chemical is able to sell Chemical A at the split off point for $0.50 per pound, or the chemical can be processed further at a cost of $1,500 perton and then sold for $1.50 per pound. There is no opportunity for the companyto further process Chemical B.

a. What amount of joint cost is allocated to Chemical A and to Chemical B?

b. If Chemical A is processed further and then sold, what is the incremental effect on Patterson Chemical Company’s net income? Should the additional processing be performed?

what amounts of joint cost are allocated to each service group using the net realiza 563420

(Net realizable value allocation) Galaxy Communications is a broadband network and television company. The firm has three service groups: Communications, News, and Entertainment. Joint production costs (costs incurred for facilities, administration, and other) for May 2000 were $12,000,000. The revenues and separate production costs of each group for May follow:

Communications

News

Entertainment

Revenues

$18,000,000

$15,000,000

$95,000,000

Separate costs

17,000,000

8,000,000

55,000,000

a. What amounts of joint cost are allocated to each service group using the net realizable value approach? Compute the profit for each group after the allocation.

b. What amount of joint cost is allocated to each service group if the allocation is based on revenues? Compute the profit for each group after the allocation.

c. Assume you are head of the Communications Group. Would the difference in allocation bases create significant problems for you when you reportto Galaxy Communications’ board of directors? Develop a short presentation to make to the board if the allocation base in part (b) is used to determine group relative profitability. Be certain to discuss important differences in revenues and cost figures between the Communications and Entertainment groups.

determine whether mars should be treated as a by product allocate the joint processi 563422

(Processing beyond split off and cost allocations) Planetary Products has a joint process that makes three products. Joint cost for the process is $30,000.

Per Unit

Incremental

Final

Units of

Selling Price

Processing

Sales

Product

Output

at Split Off

Costs

Price

Sun

5,000

$2.00

$1.50

$3.00

Moon

10,000

1.00

2.00

6.00

Mars

250

1.50

0.20

1.80

Sun, Moon, and Mars weigh 10 pounds, 6 pounds, and 2 pounds, respectively.

a. Determine which products should be processed beyond the split off point.

b. Determine whether Mars should be treated as a by product. Allocate the joint processing cost based on units produced, weight, and approximated net realizable value at split off. Use the net realizable value method in accounting for any by products.

analysis of 2000 market data reveals that these three products could have been sold 563424

(Processing beyond split off) Crews Cannery makes three products in a single joint process. For 2000, the firm processed all three products beyond the split off point. The following data are generated for the year:

Joint

Product

Final Revenues

Incremental Separate Costs

Candied peaches

$62,000

$26,000

Peach jelly

74,000

38,000

Peach jam

27,000

15,000

Analysis of 2000 market data reveals that these three products could have been sold at split off for $40,000, $40,000, and $10,000, respectively.

a. Evaluate, based on hindsight, management’s production decisions in 2000.

b. How much additional profit could the company have generated in 2000 with a better ability to forecast prices?

ankara processing produces three seafood products in a single process the joint cost 563425

(Net realizable value method) Ankara Processing produces three seafood products in a single process. The joint cost is $32,000.

Product

Units Produced

Unit Costs at Split Off

Selling Price

X

9,000

$0.75

$4.00

Y

10,000

1.00

4.25

Z

1,000

0.10

0.50

a. Allocate the joint cost based on net realizable value at split off. If necessary, use the net realizable value method for accounting for any by products.

b. Determine the value of the inventory, assuming the following finished goods inventories:

Product

Units

X

600

Y

900

Z

54

marianna realty has two operating divisions leasing and sales in march 2001 the firm 563427

(Monetary measure allocation) Marianna Realty has two operating divisions: Leasing and Sales. In March 2001, the firm spent $100,000 for general company promotions (as opposed to advertisements promoting specific properties). Sally Savoie, the corporate controller, is now faced with the task of fairly allocating the promotion costs to the two operating divisions. Sally has reduced the potential bases for allocating the promotion costs to two alternatives: the expected revenue to be generated from the promotions for each division, or the expected profit to be generated from the promotions in each division. The promotions are expected to have the following effects on the two divisions:

Leasing

Sales

Increase in revenue

$800,000

$1,600,000

Increase in net income before allocated promotion costs

150,000

100,000

a. Allocate the total promotion costs to the two divisions using change in revenue.

b. Allocate the total promotion costs to the two divisions using change in net income before joint cost allocation.

c. Which of the two approaches is most appropriate? Explain.

bay shore manufacturing has a joint process that yields three products m n and o 563428

(By products and cost allocation) Bay shore Manufacturing has a joint process that yields three products: M, N, and O. The company allocates the joint cost to the products on the basis of pounds of output. A particular joint process run cost $115,000 and yielded the following output by weight:

Product

Weight in Pounds

M

4,800

N

13,000

O

4,200

The run also produced by products having a total net realizable value of $15,000. The company records by product inventory at the time of production. Allocate the joint cost to the joint products.

midwest clothing produces three products precut fabrics for hats shirts and pants fr 563429

(Sell or process further) Midwest Clothing produces three products (precut fabrics for hats, shirts, and pants) from a joint process. Joint cost is allocated on the basis of relative sales value at split off. Rather than sell the products at split off, the company has the option to complete each of the products. Information related to these products is shown below:

Hats

Shirts

Pants

Total

Number of units produced

5,000

8,000

3,000

16,000

Joint cost allocated

$87,000

?

?

$180,000

Sales values at split off point

?

?

$40,000

$300,000

Additional costs of processing further

$13,000

$10,000

$39,000

$62,000

Sales values after all processing

150,000

$134,000

$105,000

$389,000

a. What amount of joint cost should be allocated to the Shirts and Pants products?

b. What are the sales values at split off for Hats and Shirts?

c. Which products should be processed further? Show computations.

d. If 4,000 Shirts are processed further and sold for $67,000, what is gross profit on the sale?

bergen productions produced two different movies from the same original footage join 563430

(By products and cost allocation) Bergen Productions produced two different movies from the same original footage (joint products). The company also generated revenue from admissions paid by fans touring the movie production set. Bergen regards the net income from tours as a by product of movie production.The firm accounts for this income as a reduction in the joint cost before that joint cost is allocated to movies. The following information pertains to the two movies:

Products

Total Receipts

Separate Costs

Movie 1

$ 4,000,000

$ 2,400,000

Movie 2

27,000,000

18,600,000

Tours

300,000

140,000

The joint cost incurred to produce the two movies was $8,000,000. Joint cost is allocated based on net realizable value.

a. How much of the joint cost is allocated to each movie?

b. How much profit was generated by each movie?

a by product produced from processing potatoes into the joint products of frozen pot 563432

. (Accounting for by products) A by product produced from processing potatoes into the joint products of frozen potato patties and potatoes for dehydration is potato skins. Potato skins can be sold to restaurants for use in preparing appetizers. The additional processing and disposal costs associated with such by product sales are $0.30 per pound of skins. During May 2001, Homestead Potato Processors produced and sold 45,000 pounds of potato skins for $23,850. In addition, joint cost for its dehydrated potatoes and frozen potato patties totaled $60,000, and 80 percent of all joint production was sold for $79,000.Nonfactory operating expenses for May were $7,600.

a. Prepare an income statement for Homestead Potato Processors if sales of thby product are shown as other revenue and its additional processing and disposalcosts are shown as additional cost of goods sold of the joint products.

b. Prepare an income statement for Homestead Potato Processors if the net realizable value of the by product is shown as other income.

c. Prepare an income statement for Homestead Potato Processors if the net realizable value of the by product is subtracted from the joint cost of the main products.

d. Which of the above presentations do you think would be most helpful to managers and why?

what was the company rsquo s estimated predetermined overhead rate 563433

(Accounting for by products) Thompson EDP provides computing services for its commercial clients. Records for clients are maintained on both computer files and paper files. After 7 years, the paper records are sold for recycling material. The net realizable value of the recycled paper is treated as a reduction to operating overhead. Data pertaining to operations for 2000 follow:

Estimated operating overhead

$400,500

Estimated CPU time (hours)

35,000

Estimated net realizable value of recycled paper

$20,400

Actual operating overhead

$399,500

Actual CPU time

34,200

Actual net realizable value of recycled paper

$19,588

a. What was the company’s estimated predetermined overhead rate?

b. What journal entry should the company make to record the sale of the recycled paper?

c. What was the company’s underapplied or overapplied overhead for 2000?

what journal entry is made to record the cost and selling value of the scrap from th 563434

(Accounting for scrap) Elegant Mosaics restores antique stained glass windows. Regardless of the job, there is always some breakage or improper cuts. This scrap can be sold to amateur stained glass hobbyists. The following estimates are made in setting the predetermined overhead rate for 2001:

Overhead costs other than breakage

$128,600

Estimated cost of scrap

$8,800

Estimated sales value of scrap

(2,400)

6,400

Total estimated overhead

$135,000

Elegant Mosaics expects to incur approximately 15,000 direct labor hours during 2001. One job that Elegant Mosaics worked on during 2001 was a stained glass window of a family crest; the job took 63 hours. Direct materials cost $420; direct labor is invoiced at $20 per hour. The actual cost of the scrap on this job was $55; this scrap was sold for $18.

a. What predetermined overhead rate was set for 2001?

b. What was the cost of the family crest stained glass window?

c. What journal entry is made to record the cost and selling value of the scrap from the family crest stained glass window?

independent of your answer to part a assume instead that the sales value of the mode 563435

(Scrap, job order costing) Escambia Architects offers a variety of architectural services for its commercial construction clients. For each major job, architectural models of the completed structures are built for use in presentations to clients. The firm tracks all costs using a job order costing system. At the completion of the job, the architectural models can be sold to an arts and crafts retailer. The firm uses the realized value method of accounting for the sale of the models. The sales value of each model is credited to the cost of the specific job for which the model was built. During 2001, the model for the Barney Building was sold for $4,500.

a. Using the realized value approach, give the entry to record the sale.

b. Independent of your answer to part (a), assume instead that the sales value of the models is not credited to specific jobs. Give the entry to account for the sale of the Barney Building model.

data below summarize operations for greenergrass companyfor march 2001 563337

(Cost assignment) Data below summarize operations for GreenerGrass Companyfor March 2001. The company makes five gallon containers of weed killer/fertilizer. All material is added at the beginning of the process.

COSTS

Material

Conversion

Total

Beginning inventory

$ 30,000

$ 3,600

$33,600

Current period

885,120

335,088

1,220,208

Total costs

$915,120

$338,688

$1,253,808

UNITS

Beginning inventory (30% complete conversion)

6,000 units

Started

180,000 units

Completed

152,000 units

Ending inventory (70% complete conversion)

20,000 units

Normal spoilage

4,800 units

Spoilage is detected at inspection when the units are 60 percent complete.

a. Prepare an EUP schedule using the weighted average method.

b. Determine the cost of goods transferred out, ending inventory, and abnormalspoilage.

determine the cost associated with abnormal spoilage for the month how would this am 563338

(Cost assignment) Patio Products employs a weighted average process costing system for its products. One product passes through three departments (Molding, Assembly, and Finishing) during production. The following activity tookplace in the Finishing Department during May 2001:

Units in beginning inventory

4,200

Units transferred in from Assembly

42,000

Units spoiled

2,100

Good units transferred out

33,600

The equivalent units and the costs per equivalent unit of production for each cost factor are as follows:

Cost of prior departments

$5.00

Raw material

1.00

Conversion

3.00

Total cost per EUP

$9.00

Raw material is added at the beginning of processing in Finishing withoutchanging the number of units being processed. Work in Process Inventory was70 percent complete as to conversion on May 1 and 40 percent complete as to conversion on May 31. All spoilage was discovered at final inspection. Ofthe total units spoiled, 1,680 were within normal limits.

a. Calculate the equivalent units of production.

b. Determine the cost of units transferred out of Finishing.

c. Determine the cost of ending Work in Process Inventory.

d. The portion of the total transferred in cost associated with beginning Work in Process Inventory amounted to $18,900. What is the current period costthat was transferred in from Assembly to Finishing?

e. Determine the cost associated with abnormal spoilage for the month. How would this amount be accounted for?

where the broom head is bound and attached to a handle straw is added at the beginni 563339

(Comprehensive; weighted average) Harper Company produces brooms. Department

1 winds and cuts straw into broom heads and transfers these to Department 2 where the broom head is bound and attached to a handle. Straw is added at the beginning of the first process, and the handle is added at the endof the second process.Normal losses in Department 1 should not exceed 5 percent of the units

started; losses are determined at an inspection point at the end of the productionprocess. The AQL in Department 2 is 10 percent of the broom headstransferred in; losses are found at an inspection point located 70 percent ofthe way through the production process.The following production and cost data are available for October 2001.

PRODUCTION RECORD

(IN UNITS)

Dept. 2

Beginning inventory

6,000

3,000

Started or transferred in

150,000

?

Ending inventory

18,000

15,000

Spoiled units

9,000

6,000

Transferred out

?

111,000

COST RECORD

Beginning inventory:

Preceding department

n/a

$ 6,690

Material

$ 3,000

0

Conversion

2,334

504

Current period:

Preceding department

n/a

230,910*

Material

36,000

740

Conversion

208,962

52,920

The beginning and ending inventory units in Department 1 are, respectively, 10 percent and 60 percent complete as to conversion. In Department 2, the beginning and ending units are, respectively, 40 percent and 80 percent complete as to conversion. Using the weighted average method, create a cost of production report for each department for October 2001.

assume that the rework is normal and those units can be sold for the regular selling 563341

(Defective units and rework) Hoffus Corporation produces plastic pipe andaccounts for its production process using weighted average process costing.Material is added at thebeginning of production. The company applies overhead to products using machine hours. Hoffus Corporation used the followinginformation in setting its predetermined overhead rate for 2000:

Expected overhead other than rework

$425,000

Expected rework costs

37,500

Total expected overhead

$462,500

Expected machine hours for 2000

50,000

During 2000, the following production and cost data were accumulated:

Total good production completed

2,000,000 feet of pipe

Total defects

40,000 feet of pipe

Ending inventory (35% complete)

75,000 feet of pipe

Total (beginning inventory and current period) cost of direct material

$3,750,000

Total (beginning inventory and current period) cost of conversion

$5,650,000

Cost of reworking defects

$ 37,750

Hoffus Corporation sells pipe for $3.50 per foot.

a. Determine the overhead application rate for 2000.

b. Determine the cost per pipe foot for production in 2000.

c. Assume that the rework is normal and those units can be sold for the regular selling price. How will Hoffus Corporation account for the $37,750 ofrework cost?

d. Assume that the rework is normal, but the reworked pipe is irregular and can only be sold for $2.50 per foot. Prepare the journal entry to establish the inventory account for the reworked pipe. What is the total cost perunit for the good output completed?

e. Assume that 20 percent of the rework is abnormal and that all reworked output is irregular and can be sold for only $2.50 per foot. Prepare thejournal entry to establish the inventory account for the reworked pipe.What is the total cost per foot for the good output completed during 2000?

final inspection of the 10 000 pulleys revealed that 230 of the pulleys were defecti 563342

(Job order costing; rework) Argonne Rigging manufactures pulley systems to customer specifications and uses a job order system. A recent order fromMichaels Company was for 10,000 pulleys, and the job was assigned numberBA468. The job cost sheet for #BA468 revealed the following:

WIP—JOB #BA468

Direct material

$20,400

Direct labor

24,600

Overhead

18,400

Total

$63,400

Final inspection of the 10,000 pulleys revealed that 230 of the pulleys were defective. In correcting the defects, an additional $950 of cost was incurred ($250 for direct material and $700 for direct labor). After the defects were cured, the pulleys were included with the other good units and shipped to the customer.

a. Assuming the rework costs are normal but specific to this job, show the journal entry to record incurrence of the rework costs.

b. Assuming the company has a predetermined overhead rate that includes normal rework costs, show the journal entry to record incurrence of the rework costs.

c. Assuming the rework costs are abnormal, show the journal entry to record incurrence of the rework costs.

normal and abnormal spoilage wa grand monde company manufactures various lines of b 563343

(Normal and abnormal spoilage; WA) Grand Monde Company manufactures various lines of bicycles. Because of the high volume of each type of product, the company employs a process cost system using the weighted average method to determine unit costs. Bicycle parts are manufactured in the Molding Department and transferred to the Assembly Department where they are partially assembled. After assembly, the bicycle is sent to the Packing Department. Cost per unit data for the 20 inch dirt bike has been completed through the Molding Department. Annual cost and production figures for the Assembly Department are presented at the top of the next page.

PRODUCTION DATA

Beginning inventory (100% complete as to transferred in; 100% complete

as to assembly material; 80% complete as to conversion)

3,000 units

Transferred in during the year (100% complete as to transferred in)

45,000 units

Transferred to Packing

40,000 units

Ending inventory (100% complete as to transferred in; 50% complete

as to assembly material; 20% complete as to conversion)

4,000 units

COST DATA

Transferred In

Direct Material

Conversion

Beginning inventory

$ 82,200

$ 6,660

$ 11,930

Current period

1,237,800

96,840

236,590

Totals

$1,320,000

$103,500

$248,520

Damaged bicycles are identified on inspection when the assembly process is 70 percent complete; all assembly material has been added at this point of the process. The normal rejection rate for damaged bicycles is 5 percent of the bicycles reaching the inspection point. Any damaged bicycles above the 5 percent quota are considered to be abnormal. All damaged bikes are removed from the production process and destroyed.a. Compute the number of damaged bikes that are considered to be

1. a normal quantity of damaged bikes.

2. an abnormal quantity of damaged bikes.

b. Compute the weighted average equivalent units of production for the year for

1. bicycles transferred in from the Molding Department.

2. bicycles produced with regard to assembly material.

3. bicycles produced with regard to assembly conversion.

c. Compute the cost per equivalent unit for the fully assembled dirt bike.

d. Compute the amount of the total production cost of $1,672,020 that will be associated with the following items:

1. Normal damaged units

2. Abnormal damaged units

3. Good units completed in the Assembly Department

4. Ending Work in Process Inventory in the Assembly Department

e. Describe how the applicable dollar amounts for the following items would be presented in the financial statements:

1. Normal damaged units

2. Abnormal damaged units

3. Completed units transferred to the Packing Department

4. Ending Work in Process Inventory in the Assembly Department

f. Determine the cost to Grand Monde Company of normal spoilage. Discuss some potential reasons for spoilage to occur in this company. Which of these reasons would you consider important enough to correct and why? How might you attempt to correct these problems? (CMA adapted)

match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered descrip 563370

(Terminology) Match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered description on the right.

a. Appraisal cost

1. Method to rank causes of variation in a process

b. Benchmarking

2. Review of product design, manufacturing processes and controls, quality documentation, and records

c. Control chart

3. Technique to identify uncommon variations or errors in a process

d. Grade

4. Cost incurred for monitoring and compensating for mistakes

e. Pareto analysis

5. Graphical method of documenting when a process is in or out of control

f. Quality

6. One combination of different product or service characteristics included to satisfy different customer needs

g. Quality audit

7. Process of investigating how other firms conduct business

h. Quality control

8. Effect of meeting or exceeding customer needs

i. Statistical process control

9. Product or service characteristic relating to meeting the most customer needs at the lowest price

j. Value

10. Policy and/or practice designed to eliminate poor quality

mark each of the following statements as true or false and explain why the false sta 563371

(True/false) Mark each of the following statements as true or false and explain why the false statements are incorrect.

a. The total quality cost is the sum of prevention cost plus failure cost.

b. Traditional accounting systems have separate accounts to capture quality costs.

c. Pareto analysis is used to help managers identify areas in which to focus quality improvement efforts.

d. As the number of defective products manufactured rises, internal failure

costs also rise, but external failure costs are expected to decline.

e. Higher quality yields lower profits but higher productivity.

f. Total quality management focuses on production processes rather than customer satisfaction.

g. Results benchmarking relies only on comparisons to firms within the same industry.

h. SPC control charts are used to plot the costs of quality over time.

i. Appraisal cost is used to monitor and correct mistakes.

j. Quality is free.

bronson rsquo s bronze works has gathered the following data onits quality costs for 563375

(Cost of quality) Bronson’s Bronze Works has gathered the following data onits quality costs for 1999 and 2000:

Defect Prevention Costs

1999

2000

Quality training

$8,000

$9,500

Quality technology

6,000

8,000

Quality production design

4,000

9,000

External Failure Costs

Warranty handling

$15,000

$10,000

Customer reimbursements

11,000

7,200

Customer returns handling

7,000

4,000

a. Compute the percentage change in the two quality cost categories from 1999 to 2000.

b. Write a brief explanation for the pattern of change in the two categories.

sparticus electronics rsquo accounting system reflected the following costs related 563376

(Cost of quality) Sparticus Electronics’ accounting system reflected the following costs related to quality for 1999 and 2000:

1999

2000

Customer refunds for poor product quality

$24,000

$18,000

Fitting machines for mistake proof operations

8,400

12,800

Supply line management

8,000

10,000

Disposal of waste

44,000

36,000

Quality training

28,000

30,000

Litigation claims

72,000

56,000

a. Which of these are costs of compliance and which are costs of noncompliance?

b. Calculate the percentage change in each cost and for each category.

c. Discuss the pattern of the changes in the two categories.

cost of quality mathes company wants to determine its cost of quality the company h 563377

(Cost of quality) Mathes Company wants to determine its cost of quality. The company has gathered the following information from records pertaining to August 2000

Defective units

2,500

Units reworked

600

Defective units returned

200

Appraisal costs

$6,800

Cost per unit for rework

$6

Prevention costs

$25,000

Profit per good unit produced and sold

$30

Profit per defective unit sold

$20

Cost per unit for customer returns

$5

Cost of warranty work

$2,500

Compute the following:

a. Lost profits from selling defective work

b. Total costs of failure

c. Total quality cost

alpine sunglasses company has gathered the following information pertaining to quali 563378

(Cost of quality) Alpine Sunglasses Company has gathered the following information pertaining to quality costs of production for June 2000 of heavy duty sunglasses for skiing:

Total defective units

300

Number of units reworked

190

Number of units returned

50

Total prevention cost

$12,000

Total appraisal cost

$6,000

Per unit profit for defective units

$10

Per unit profit for good units

$28

Cost to rework defective units

$8

Cost to handle returned units

$5

Total cost to rework

b. Profit lost from not reworking all defective units

c. Cost of processing customer returns

d. Total failure costs

e. Total quality cost

klein computers is evaluating its quality control costs for 2000and preparing plans 563379

(Cost of quality) Klein Computers is evaluating its quality control costs for 2000and preparing plans and budgets for 2001. The 2000 quality costs incurred in the CPU Division follow

Prevention costs

$150,000

Appraisal costs

50,000

Internal failure costs

175,000

External failure costs

50,000

Total

$425,000

Prepare a memo to the company president on the following issues:

a. Which categories of quality costs would be affected by the decision to spend $750,000 on new computer chip making equipment (to replace an older model)? Why?

b. If projected external failure costs for 2001 can be reduced 60 percent (relative to 2000 levels) by either spending $25,000 more on appraisal or $40,000 more on prevention, why would the firm opt to spend the $40,000 on prevention rather than the $25,000 on appraisal?

the firm manufactures a variety of early american furniture produ 563380

(Control of quality costs; team activity) The following summary numbers have been taken from a quality cost report of North Carolina Fine Furniture Inc., for 2000. The firm manufactures a variety of Early American furniture produ

Prevention costs

$2,500,000

Appraisal costs

1,500,000

Internal failure costs

1,500,000

External failure costs

500,000

Total quality costs

$6,000,000

The company is actively seeking to identify ways to reduce total quality costs. The company’s current strategy is to increase spending in one or more quality cost categories in hopes of achieving greater spending cuts in other quality cost categories. In a team of three or four individuals, prepare an oral presentation to answer the following questions:

a. Which spending categories are most susceptible to control by managers? Why?

b. Why is it more logical for the company to increase spending in the prevention cost and appraisal cost categories than in the failure cost categories?

c. Which cost category is the most likely target for spending reductions? Explain.

d. How would the adoption of a TQM philosophy affect the focus in reducing quality costs?

describe the problem areas for which to seek preventive measures first how if at all 563384

(Pareto analysis) Leading Edge Computers has identified the following failure costs during 2000:

COST OF TYPE OF FAILURE

Model

CPU

Internal Drive

External Drive

All Other

Total

Laptop

$ 8,000

$ 7,000

$ 5,000

$ 3,000

$23,000

Desktop

7,000

6,000

12,000

5,000

30,000

Mini

3,000

1,000

8,000

3,000

15,000

Total

$18,000

$14,000

$25,000

$11,000

$68,000

a. Rearrange the rows in descending order of magnitude based on the total dollars column and prepare a table using Pareto analysis with the following

b. Which models account for almost 80 percent of all failure costs?

c. Focusing on the models identified in part (b), prepare a table using Pareto analysis to identify the types of failure causing the majority of failure costs. (Hint: Rearrange the cost of failure types in descending order of magnitude.) Use the following headings for your table:

d. Describe the problem areas for which to seek preventive measures first. How, if at all, does this answer reflect the concept of leverage?

devise a plan to address prioritizing projects regarding development of preventive m 563385

(Pareto analysis) Select Refrigerators has identified the following warranty costs during 2000 according to the type of product failure as follows:

Model

Electrical

Motor

Structural

Mechanical

Dollars

Chic

$25,000

$27,000

$15,000

$ 5,000

$ 72,000

Elegant

28,000

32,000

26,000

6,000

92,000

All others

8,000

15,000

6,000

9,000

38,000

Total

$61,000

$74,000

$47,000

$20,000

$202,000

a. Rearrange the rows in descending order of magnitude based on the total dollars column and prepare a table using Pareto analysis with the following headings:

b. Which model(s) account for the vast proportion of all failure costs? Discuss.

c. Devise a plan to address prioritizing projects regarding development of preventive measures based on the findings in the Pareto analysis you just conducted for Select Refrigerators.

compute the total profits lost by the company in its first year of operations by sel 563386

(Cost of quality) Lampposts R Us, Ltd., manufactures hardwood lampposts for the discriminating homeowner. The firm produced 3,000 lampposts during its first year of operations. At year end, there was no inventory of finished goods. The company sold 2,700 through regular market channels (some after rework), but 300 units were so defective that they had to be sold as scrap. For this first year, the firm spent $30,000 on prevention costs and $15,000 on quality appraisal. There were no customer returns. An income statement for the year follows.

Sales: Regular channel

$270,000

Scrap

12,000

$282,000

Cost of goods sold:

Original production costs

$150,000

Rework costs

22,000

Quality prevention and appraisal

45,000

(217,000)

Gross margin

$ 65,000

Selling and administrative expenses (all fixed)

(90,000)

Net loss

$ (25,000)

a. Compute the total profits lost by the company in its first year of operations by selling defective units as scrap rather than selling the units through regular channels.

b. Compute the total failure costs for the company in its first year.

c. Compute total quality costs incurred by the company in its first year.

d. What evidence indicates the firm is dedicated to manufacturing and selling high quality products?

compute the total revenue lost by clear tone in its first year of operations by sell 563387

(Cost of quality) ClearTone makes portable telephones, and produced 20,000 phones during 2000, its first year of operations. It sold all it produced that first year but 500 phones had a particular defect. Of these, 200 were reworked and sold through regular channels at the original price while the rest were sold as “seconds” without rework. In 2000, ClearTone spent $25,000 for prevention measures and $18,000 on appraisal. Following is ClearTone’s 2000 income statement. ClearTone is a partnership; thus, no income taxes are presented on the income statement.

Regular sales (19,700 units)

$1,970,000

Sales of seconds (300 units)

21,000

$1,991,000

Cost of goods sold:

Original production costs

$ 800,000

Rework costs (200 units)

2,000

Prevention and appraisal costs

43,000

(845,000)

Gross margin

$1,146,000

Selling and administrative expenses (all fixed)

(600,000)

Net income

$ 546,000

a. Compute the total revenue lost by Clear Tone in its first year of operations by selling defective units as seconds rather than reworking the units and selling them at the regular price.

b. Compute the total failure costs for the company in 2000.

c. Compute total quality costs incurred by the company in 2000.

d. What evidence indicates the firm is dedicated to manufacturing and selling high quality products?

assume that the company is considering expanding its existing full 5 year warranty t 563388

(Cost of quality) Golf courses are demanding in their quest for high quality carts because of the critical need for lawn maintenance. Ride in Style manufactures golf carts and is a recognized leader in the industry for quality products. In recent months, company managers have become more interested in trying to quantify the costs of quality in the company. As an initial effort, the company was able to identify the following 2000 costs, by categories that are associated with quality

Prevention Costs

Quality training

$15,000

Quality technology

50,000

Quality circles

32,000

Appraisal Costs

Quality inspections

$18,000

Test equipment

14,000

Procedure verifications

9,000

Internal Failure Costs

Scrap and waste

$ 6,500

Waste disposal

2,100

External Failure Costs

Warranty handling

$ 9,500

Customer reimbursements/returns

7,600

Managers were also aware that in 2000, 250 of the 8,000 carts that were produced had to be sold as scrap. These 250 carts were sold for $80 less profit per unit than “good” carts. Also, the company incurred rework costs amounting to $6,000 to sell 200 other carts through regular market channels.

a. Using these data, find Ride in Style’s 2000 expense for the following:

1. Lost profits from scrapping the 250 units

2. Total failure costs

3. Total quality costs

b. Assume that the company is considering expanding its existing full 5 year warranty to a full 7 year warranty in 2001. How would such a change be reflected in quality costs?

tanks a lot ltd is very aware that its scuba diving tanks must be of high quality to 563389

(Cost of quality) Tanks a Lot Ltd. is very aware that its scuba diving tanks must be of high quality to maintain its reputation of excellence and safety. You have been retained as a consultant by the company and have suggested that quantifying the costs of quality would be important to an understanding of and management of quality. Your experience as a cost accountant helped you determine the following year 2000 costs of quality from the company’s accountingrecords:

Prevention Costs

Foolproofing machinery

$10,000

Quality training

30,000

Educating suppliers

22,000

Appraisal Costs

Quality inspections

$12,000

Recording defects

9,000

Procedure verifications

6,000

Internal Failure Costs

Waste disposal

$ 4,500

Unplanned downtime

1,400

External Failure Costs

Warranty handling

$ 6,400

Customer reimbursements/returns

5,100

You also determined that 1,200 of the 100,000 tanks made in 2000 had to be sold as scrap for $70 less profit per tank than the nondefective tanks. Tanksa Lot also incurred $4,000 of rework costs that had been buried in overhead (in addition to the failure costs presented above) in producing the tanks sold at the regular price.

a. Tanks a Lot management has asked you to determine the year 2000 “costs” of the following:

1. Lost profits from scrapping the 1,200 units

2. Total failure costs

3. Total quality costs

b. Assume that the company is considering expanding its existing full 2 year warranty to a full 3 year warranty in 2001. How would such a change be reflected in quality costs?

weighted average amp fifo in a single process production system the cleopatra corpo 563296

(Weighted average & FIFO) In a single process production system, the Cleopatra Corporation produces press on fingernails. For October 2000, the company’s accounting records reflected the following:

Beginning Work in Process Inventory

(100% complete as to material; 30% complete as to direct labor;

60% complete as to overhead)

6,000 units

Units started during the month

Ending Work in Process Inventory

45,000 units

(100% complete as to material; 40% complete as to direct labor;

10,000 units

70% complete as to overhead)

Cost Component

Beginning Inventory

October

Material

$4,980

$45,000

Direct labor

450

21,600

Overhead

3,180

33,300

prepare in good form a cost of production report for the curing department for may 2 563297

>(FIFO; second department) Bixby Company makes porcelain kitchen sinks in a process requiring operations in three separate departments: Molding, Curing, and Finishing. Materials are first introduced in the molding operation and additional material is added during the curing process. The following information is available for the Curing Department for May 2001:

Beginning WIP Inventory (degree of completion: transferred in, 100%;

direct material, 80%; direct labor, 40%; overhead, 30%)

8,000 units

Transferred in from Molding

40,000 units

Ending WIP Inventory (degree of completion: transferred in, 100%;

direct material, 70%; direct labor, 50%; overhead, 40%)

4,000 units

Transferred to Finishing

? units

Cost Component

Beginning Inventory

Current Period

Transferred

$66,000

$320,000

Direct material

24,960

161,600

Direct labor

6,720

85,600

Overhead

3,580

43,200

Prepare, in good form, a cost of production report for the Curing Department for May 2001. (CPA adapted)

the best of the season corporation makes plastic christmas trees in two departments 563298

(Two departments; weighted average)The Best of the Season Corporation makes plastic Christmas trees in two departments: Cutting and Boxing. In the Cutting Department, wire wrapped with green “needles” is placed into production at the beginning of the process and is cut to various lengths depending on the size of the trees being made at that time. The “branches” are then transferred to the Boxing Department where the lengths are separated into the necessary groups to make a tree. These are then placed in boxes and immediately sent to Finished Goods. The following data are available related to the October 2000 production in each of the

Units

Transferred in

Material

Conversion

Cutting Department

Beginning inventory

9,000

N/A

100

Started in process

35,000

30

Ending inventory

3,600

N/A

100

70

Boxing Department

Beginning inventory

2,500

100

0

55

Transferred in

?

Ending inventory

1,200

100

0

60

two departments:

COSTS

Transferred

Material

Conversion

Cutting Department

Beginning inventory

N/A

$13,250

$ 5,550

Current period

52,750

80,290

Boxing Department

Beginning inventory

9,608

$ 0

$ 550

Current period

?

12,510

20,660

a.Prepare a cost of production report for the Cutting Department assuming a weighted average method.

b.Using the data developed from part (a), prepare a cost of production report for the Boxing Department, also using the weighted average method.

what was the cost of goods transferred from the striping department to the adhesion 563299

(Cost flows: multiple departments)Sharp Corporation produces accent stripes for automobiles in 50 inch rolls. Each roll passes through three departments (Striping, Adhesion, and Packaging) before it is ready for shipment to automobile dealers and detailing shops. Product costs are tracked by department and assigned using a process costing system. Overhead is applied to production in each department at a rate of 60 percent of the department’s direct labor cost. The following information pertains to departmental operations for June 2001:

Work in Process—Striping

Work in Process—Adhesion

Beginning

$20,000

Beginning

$70,000

DM

90,000

Transferred

?

DL

80,000

DM

60,000

$480,000

Overhead

?

DL

?

Ending

$17,000

Overhead

?

Ending

$20,000

Beginning

$150,000

Beginning

$185,000

Transferred

?

CGM

830,000

$720,000

DM

?

DL

?

Overhead

90,000

Ending

$ 90,000

Ending

?

a.What was the cost of goods transferred from the Striping Department to the Adhesion Department for the month?

b.How much direct labor cost was incurred in the Adhesion Department? How much overhead was assigned to production in the Adhesion Department for the month?

c.How much direct material cost was charged to products passing through the Packaging Department?

d.Prepare the journal entries for all interdepartmental transfers of products and the cost of the units sold during June 2001.

prepare a cost of production report and assign costs to goods transferred and to inv 563301

>(Standard process costing) HealthySight is a manufacturer of high quality lenses for sunglasses and ski goggles. HealthySight uses a standard process costing system and carries inventories at standard. In May 2001, the following data were available:

Standard Cost

of 1 Unit

Direct material

$ 4.50

Conversion

12.50

Total manufacturing cost

$17.00

Beginning WIP Inventory

10,000 units (100% DM; 70% conversion)

Started in May

180,000 units

Completed in May

160,000 units

Ending WIP Inventory

? units (100% DM; 60% conversion)

Actual costs for May

Direct material

$ 781,000

Conversion

2,045,000

Total actual cost

$2,826,000

a.Prepare an equivalent units of production schedule.

b.Prepare a cost of production report and assign costs to goods transferred and to inventory.

c.Calculate and label the variances and charge them to Cost of Goods Sold.

discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using the weighted average method versus 563303

(WA and FIFO) Rainbow Paints makes quality paint sold at premium prices in one production department. Production begins with the blending of various chemicals, which are added at the beginning of the process, and ends with the canning of the paint. Canning occurs when the mixture reaches the 90 percent stage of completion. The gallon cans are then transferred to the Shipping Department for crating and shipment. Labor and overhead are added continuously throughout the process. Factory overhead is applied at the rate of $3 per direct labor hour. Prior to May, when a change in the process was implemented, work in process inventories were insignificant. The change in process enables greater production but results in large amounts of work in process. The company has always used the weighted average method to determine equivalent production and unit costs. Now, production management is considering changing from the weighted average method to the first in, first out method. The following data relate to actual production during May:

Costs for May

Work in process inventory, May 1

Direct material—chemicals

$ 45,600

Direct labor ($10 per hour)

6,250

Factory overhead

1,875

Current month

Direct material—chemicals

$228,400

Direct material—cans

7,000

Direct labor ($10 per hour)

35,000

Factory overhead

10,500

Units for May (Gallons)

Work in process inventory, May 1 (25% complete)

4,000

Sent to Shipping Department

20,000

Started in May

21,000

Work in process inventory, May 31 (80% complete)

5,000

a.Prepare a cost of production report for each cost element for May using the weighted average method.

b.Prepare a cost of production report for each cost element for May using the FIFO method.

c.Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using the weighted average method versus the FIFO method, and explain under what circumstances each method should be used. (CMA adapted)

n a team of three or four people choose a company whose mass production process you 563308

In a team of three or four people, choose a company whose mass production process you would like to learn. Use the library, the Internet, and (if possible) personal resources to gather information. Prepare a visual representation (similar to Exhibit 6–2) of that production process. In this illustration, indicate the approximate percentage of completion points at which various materials are added and where/how labor and overhead flow into and through the process. Assume that 1,000 units of product are flowing through your production process and are now at the 60 percent completion point as to labor. Prepare a written explanation about the quantity of direct material equivalent units that are included in the 1,000 units. Also explain how much overhead activity and cost have occurred and why the overhead percentage is the same as or different from the percentage of completion for labor.

terminology match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate num 563320

(Terminology) Match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered definition on the right.

a. Abnormal loss

1. Allowing the production of spoiled units to increase the cost of good production

b. Acceptable quality level

2. Decreases the transferred in cost per unit

c. Accretion

3. Results from having defective production greater than the AQL

d. Defective unit

4. A unit that is discarded on inspection

e. Economically reworked

5. A unit that can be reworked

f. Method of neglect

6. An expected decline in units in the production process

g. Normal loss

7. Additional processing that results in net incremental revenue

h. Spoiled unit

8. Maximum limit below which the frequency of defects in a process is accepted as normal

if each setup produces an average of 500 boxes what is the increased cost per good b 563321

(Cost benefit analysis) Alfred Carlson, plant manager at WEBOXALL Company, is investigating spoilage created by a machine that prints packing boxes for TVs and other large, fragile items. At the beginning of each production run, 50 boxes are misprinted either because of miscoloration or misalignment. These boxes must be destroyed. The variable production cost per box is $6.00. The machine averages 200 setups for production runs each year. A regulator is available that will correct the problem. Alfred is trying to decide whether to purchase the regulator.

a. At what cost for the regulator would the benefit of acquisition not exceed the cost? What other factors should Alfred consider in addition to the purchase price of the regulator?

b. If each setup produces an average of 500 boxes, what is the increased cost per good box that is caused by the spoiled units?

c. WEBOXALL Company runs 12 batches per year for Springtime Corporation, which makes very specialized equipment in limited quantities. Thus, each batch contains only 20 boxes. If WEBOXALL Company is passing its spoilage cost on to customers based on batch costs, might Springtime Corporation be willing to buy the regulator for WEBOXALL Company if the regulator costs $3,300? Justify your answer.

d. Why are the cost per box answers in parts (b) and (c) so different?

what are the equivalent units of production for direct material for conversion 563322

(Normal vs. abnormal spoilage; WA) Jacksonville Plastics uses a weighted average process costing system for its production process in which all material is added at the beginning of production. Company management has specified that the normal loss cannot exceed 7 percent of the units started in a period. All losses are caused by shrinkage. March processing information follows:

Beginning inventory (10% complete—conversion)

8,000 units

Started during March

60,000 units

Completed during March

53,000 units

Ending inventory (60% complete—conversion)

10,000 units

a. How many total units are there to account for?

b. How many units should be treated as normal loss?

c. How many units should be treated as abnormal loss?

d. What are the equivalent units of production for direct material? For conversion?

what are the fifo equivalent units of production for materials for conversion costs 563323

(EUP computations; normal and abnormal loss) The Atlanta Division of Southeastern Paint produces environmental paints in processes in which spoilage takes place on a continual basis. Management considers normal spoilage to be 0.5 percent or less of gallons of material placed into production. The following operating statistics are available for June 2000 for the paint BMZ:

Beginning inventory (20% complete as to material; 30% complete

8,000 gallons

as to conversion)

180,000 gallons

Started during June

Ending inventory (60% complete as to material; 70% complete

as to conversion)

4,000 gallons

Spoiled

1,400 gallons

a. How many gallons were transferred out?

b. How much normal spoilage occurred?

c. How much abnormal spoilage occurred?

d. What are the FIFO equivalent units of production for materials? For conversion costs?

e. How are costs associated with the normal spoilage handled?

f. How are costs associated with the abnormal spoilage handled?

determine the number of equivalent units for direct material and for conversion assu 563324

(EUP computation; normal and abnormal loss; FIFO) Arkansas Foods manufactures corn meal in a continuous, mass production process. Corn is addedat the beginning of the process. Losses are few and occur only when foreign materials are found in the corn meal. Inspection occurs at the 95 percent completion point as to conversion. During May, a machine malfunctioned and dumped salt into 18,000 pounds of corn meal. This abnormal loss occurred when conversion was 70 percent complete on those pounds of product. The error was immediately noticed, and those pounds of corn meal were pulled from the production process. An additional 1,000 pounds of meal were detected as unsuitable at the inspection point. These lost units were considered well within reasonable limits. May production data are shown below:

Beginning work in process (85% complete)

50,000 pounds

Started during the month

425,000 pounds

Ending work in process (25% complete)

10,000 pounds

a. Determine the number of equivalent units for direct material and for conversion assuming a FIFO cost flow.

b. If the costs per equivalent unit are $2.50 and $4.50 for direct material and conversion, respectively, what is the cost of ending inventory?

c. What is the cost of abnormal loss? How is this cost treated in May?

determine the cost of the normal spoilage and allocate that cost to the appropriate 563326

(Cost assignment; WA) CushionRide manufactures automobile springs. Its production equipment is fairly old, and one bad unit is typically produced for every 20 good units. The bad units cannot be reworked and must be discarded. Spoilage is determined at an end of process inspection point. CushionRide uses a weighted average process costing system and adds all material at the beginning of the process. The following data have been gathered from the accounting records for January 2001:

Beginning inventory (60% complete as to conversion)

4,000 units

Units started

20,000 units

Ending inventory (30% complete as to conversion)

3,000 units

Good units completed

20,000 units

Material

Conversion

Total

Beginning inventory

$ 12,492

$ 9,927

$ 22,419

Current period

112,548

63,000

175,548

Total costs

$125,040

$72,927

$197,967

a. Prepare an EUP schedule.

b. Determine the cost of the normal spoilage and allocate that cost to the appropriate inventory.

compute the equivalent units of production assuming the weighted average method is u 563327

(Normal discrete spoilage; WA) The Potato Division of Global Foods Company

processes potatoes. In the process, raw potatoes are sequentially cleaned, skinned, cooked, and canned. Spoilage amounting to less than 12 percent of the total pounds of potatoes that are introduced to the cleaning operation is considered normal (in this case, normal spoilage is to include the weight of the potato peels). Inspection occurs when the products are 50 percent complete. Information that follows pertains to operations in the Potato Division for January 2000:

Beginning WIP inventory (30% complete)

500,000 pounds

Started

13,500,000 pounds

Transferred

11,400,000 pounds

Ending WIP inventory (40% complete)

750,000 pounds

a. Compute the amount of spoilage in January. How much of the spoilage was normal?

b. Compute the equivalent units of production assuming the weighted average method is used.

c. Prepare a memo explaining why you might expect some (1) accretion in the canning operation and (2) some shrinkage other than the weight of the peels in one or more of the operations.

determine the equivalent units of production using the weighted average method 563328

(Rework) Auto Luster Inc. manufactures two gallon tubs of car polish for body shops. The company uses an actual cost, process costing system. All material is added at the beginning of production; labor and overhead are incurred evenly through the process. Defective units are identified through inspection at the end of the production process. The following information is available for August 2001:

Beginning inventory (30% complete as to conversion)

750 units

Started during month

17,250 units

Completed during month

15,000 units

Defective units (100% complete as to conversion)

1,800 units

Ending inventory (70% complete as to conversion)

1,200 units

Actual August production costs (including those for beginning inventory) were $126,000 for direct material and $40,572 for conversion. In addition, the rework cost to bring the 1,800 units up to specifications was $3,150 for material and $1,323 for conversion.

a. Determine the equivalent units of production using the weighted average method.

b. Assume that the rework is normal. Determine the cost per good unit for direct material and conversion.

c. Assume that the rework is normal. How would the rework cost be handled in a normal (rather than actual) costing system?

d. Assume that the rework is abnormal. Determine the cost per good unit for direct material and conversion. How is the rework cost recorded for financial statement purposes?

how much of the shrinkage is classified as normal how is it treated for accounting p 563330

(Shrinkage; WA) Department 1 of Super Patties cooks ground beef for hamburger patties. The patties are then transferred to Department 2 where they are placed on buns, boxed, and frozen. The accepted level of shrinkage in Department 1 is 10 percent of the pounds started. Super Patties uses a weighted average process costing system and has the following production and cost datafor Department 1 for May 2001:

Beginning inventory (80% complete as to conversion)

1,000 pounds

Started

125,000 pounds

Transferred to Department 2 (550,000 patties)

110,000 pounds

Ending inventory (30% complete as to conversion)

3,000 pounds

Beginning inventory cost of ground beef

$ 1,020

May cost of ground beef

$106,710

Beginning inventory conversion cost

$ 195

May conversion cost

$ 27,630

a. What is the total shrinkage (in pounds)?

b. How much of the shrinkage is classified as normal? How is it treated for accounting purposes?

c. How much of the shrinkage is classified as abnormal? How is it treated for accounting purposes?

d. What is the total cost of the patties transferred to Department 2? Cost of

ending inventory? Cost of abnormal spoilage?

e. How might Super Patties reduce its shrinkage loss? How, if at all, would your solution(s) affect costs?

what is the per unit cost of the completed units what would the per unit cost of the 563331

(Discrete spoilage; WA) Angelique Inc. makes stuffed angels in a mass production process. Cloth and stuffing are added at the beginning of the production process; the angels are packaged in sky blue boxes at the end of production. Conversion costs for the highly automated process are incurred evenly throughout processing. The angels are inspected at the 95 percent completion point prior to being boxed. Defective units of more than 1 percent of the units started is considered abnormal. The company uses a weighted average process costing system. June 2001 production and cost data for Angelique Inc. follow:

Beginning inventory (40% complete as to conversion)

5,000

Started

70,000

Ending inventory (70% complete as to conversion)

6,000

Total defective units

400

Beginning inventory cloth and stuffing cost

$ 21,900

Beginning inventory conversion cost

$ 7,680

June cloth and stuffing cost

$315,600

June box cost

$ 75,460

June conversion cost

$270,404

a. How many units were completed in June?

b. How many of the defective units are considered a normal loss? An abnormal loss?

c. What is the per unit cost of the completed units? What would the per unit cost of the completed units have been if the 400 units had been good unitsat their same stagesofcompletion at the end of the period?

d. What is the total cost of ending inventory?

normal and abnormal discrete spoilage wa brendan tools manufactures oneof its produ 563332

(Normal and abnormal discrete spoilage; WA) Brendan Tools manufactures oneof its products in a two department process. A separate Work in Process accountis maintained for each department, and Brendan Tools uses a weighted average process costing system. The first department is Molding; the second is GrindingAt the end of production in Grinding, a quality inspection is made and thenpackaging is added. Overhead is applied in the Grinding Department on machine hour basis. Production and cost data for the Grinding Department forAugust 2000 follow:

Production Data

Beginning inventory (complete: labor, 30%; overhead, 40%)

2,000 units

Transferred in from Molding

49,800 units

Normal spoilage (discrete—found at the end of processing during quality control)

650 units

Abnormal spoilage (found at end of processing during quality control)

350 units

Ending inventory (complete: labor, 40%; overhead, 65%)

1,800 units

Transferred to finished goods

? units

Cost Data

Beginning inventory:

Transferred in

$ 6,050

Material (label and package)

0

Direct labor

325

Overhead

750

$ 7,125

Current period:

Transferred in

$149,350

Material (label and package)

11,760

Direct labor

23,767

Overhead

50,932

235,809

Total cost to account for

$242,934

a. Prepare a cost of production report for the Grinding Department for August.

b. Prepare the journal entry to dispose of the cost of abnormal spoilage.

determine the proper disposition of the april costs for the lamination departmentusi 563333

(Normal and abnormal spoilage; WA) Big Stone Furniture produces breakfast tables in a two department process: Cutting/Assembly and Lamination. Varnish isadded in the Lamination Department when the goods are 60 percent completeas to overhead. Spoiled units are found on inspection at the end of production.Spoilage is considered discrete.

PRODUCTION DATA FOR APRIL 2000

Beginning inventory (80% complete as to labor, 70% complete as to overhead)

2,000 units

Transferred in during month

14,900 units

Ending inventory (40% complete as to labor, 20% complete as to overhead)

3,000 units

Normal spoilage (found at final quality inspection)

200 units

Abnormal spoilage (found at 30% completion as to labor and 15% as to

overhead; the sanding machine was misaligned and scarred the tables)

400 units

The remaining units were transferred to finished goods.

COST DATA FOR APRIL 2000

Beginning Work in Process Inventory:

$ 15,020

Prior department costs

1,900

Varnish

4,388

Direct labor

11,044

$ 32,352

Overhead

$137,080

Current period costs:

Prior department costs

14,030

Varnish

46,000

Direct labor

113,564

Overhead

310,674

Total costs to account for

$343,026

Determine the proper disposition of the April costs for the Lamination Departmentusing the weighted average method; include journal entries.

reagan company produces hinges completed hinges are inspected at the end of producti 563335

(Normal and abnormal discrete spoilage; FIFO) Reagan Company produces hinges. Completed hinges are inspected at the end of production. Any spoilage in excess of 2 percent of the completed units is considered abnormal. Material is added at the start of production. Labor and overhead are incurred evenly throughout production.Reagan’s May 2001 production and cost data follow:

Beginning inventory (50% complete)

5,600

Units started

74,400

Good units completed

70,000

Ending inventory (1/3 complete)

7,500

Material

Conversion

Total

Beginning inventory

$ 6,400

$ 1,232

$ 7,632

Current period

74,400

31,768

106,168

Total

$80,800

$33,000

$113,800

Calculate the equivalent units schedule, prepare a FIFO cost of production report, and assign all costs.

the following are the details of ldquo x rdquo ltd 563255

The following are the details of “X” Ltd

1.1.2009

Opening stock: “nil”

1.1.2009

Purchases

200 units @ Rs 15 per unit

15.1.2009

Issues

100 units

1.2.2009

Issues

400 units @ Rs 20 per unit

15.2.2009

Issues

200 units

20.2.2009

Issues

200 units

1.3.2009

Purchases

300 units @ Rs 25 per unit

15.3.2009

Issues

200 units

Required

Find out the value of stock as on 31.3.2009 if the company follows:

FIFO, LIFO and WAP, Basis

x ltd purchased a mini van on jan 1 2006 from sun and co on hire purchase system it 563266

X Ltd purchased a mini van on Jan 1, 2006 from Sun and Co on Hire Purchase System. It was agreed upon to make payment as under:

Rs

Jan 1, 2006

On signing agreement

20,700

Dec 31, 2006

At the end of first year

39,930

Dec 31, 2007

At the end of second year

39,930

Dec 31, 2008

At the end of third year

39,930

Total Hire Purchase Price

1,40,490

Nothing more was payable after 3rd installment. All the installments are duly paid by X Ltd. Interest was reckoned @ 10% p.a.

Depreciation was charged at the rate of 10% p.a.

X Ltd closes its books on 31st Dec every year.

Prepare the following accounts in the books of X Ltd upto Dec 31, 2008

  1. Sun and Co. Account
  2. Mini Van Account
  3. Interest Account

prepare necessary ledger accounts in the books of dev agencies for the year 2007 to 563273

India Scooters Ltd sold 3 scooters for a total cash sale price of Rs 1,50,000 or hire purchase basis to Dev Agencies on Jan 1, 2007. The terms of agreement provided for Rs 45,000 as cash down and the balance of cash price in three equal installments together with interest @ 10% p.a. compounded annually. The installment on were payable as per the following schedule: 1st installment on Dec 31, 2008; 2nd installment on Dec 31, 2009 and 3rd installment on Dec 31, 2010. Dev Agencies paid 1st installment on time but failed to pay thereafter (on his failure to pay the second installment, India Scooters Ltd repossessed 2 scooters and valued them at 50% of cash price). Dev Agencies charged 10% p.a. depreciation on Straight Line Method. Prepare necessary Ledger Accounts in the Books of Dev Agencies for the year 2007 to 2009.

the following details relate to a dealer in pressure cooker who disposes off them on 563274

The following details relate to a dealer in pressure cooker who disposes off them on Hire Purchase System. Assuming his gross profit on sales to be 20% and there were no opening or closing creditors for goods or expenses, prepare H.P. Trading Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009:

Rs

Apr 1, 2008:

Stock out on hire at H.P. Price

80,000

Stock on hand at shop at cost

10,000

Installments over due, customers still paying

6,000

Mar 31, 2009:

Stock out on hire at H.P. Price

92,000

Stock on hand at Cost

14,000

Installments over due, customers still paying

10,000

Cash purchases during the year

1,20,000

Credit purchase during the year

16,000

Cash (installments) received during the year

1,60,000

Hire Purchase expenses paid during the year

14,800

prepare the hire purchase trading account the profit earned for 2008 563275

Renu sells goods on hire purchase basis at a profit of 50% on Cost. Following particulars are relating to the business during the year 2008

Rs

Hire Purchase Stock at (selling price) as Jan 1, 2008

18,000

Installments Due on Jan 1, 2008

10,000

Goods sold on H.P. during the year (at selling price)

1,74,000

Cash received from H.P. Customers during the year

1,20,000

Goods repossessed (installments due Rs 4,000) as valued

1,000

Hire purchase stock (at selling price) as on Dec 31, 208

60,000

Installments Due on Dec 31, 2008

18,000

Prepare the Hire Purchase Trading Account, the Profit earned for 2008

if goods purchased during the year amounted to rs 4 00 000 563276

PVR Ltd sells product on hire purchase terms, the price being cost plus 33?% and provides you the following particulars for the year ended Mar 31, 2009:

Apr 1, 2008

Mar 31,2009

Rs

Rs

Stock out on Hire

2,00,000

2,30,000

Stock out shop

25,000

35,000

Installments due but customers still paying

15,000

25,000

Prepare Hire Purchase Trading Account

If Goods sold on hire purchases amounted to Rs 4,00,000

If Goods purchased during the year amounted to Rs 4,00,000

shweta traders sells some kitchen ware on hire purchase at cost plus 50 find out the 563277

Shweta Traders sells some kitchen ware on hire purchase at cost plus 50%. Find out the profit for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 from the following particulars:

Apr 1, 2008

Mar 31, 2009

Rs

Rs

Stock with hire purchase customers at selling price

13,500

Stock at shop at cost

27,000

Installments Due

7,500

Cash received from customers

90,000

Goods repossessed (installments due Rs 3,000) value at

750

Installments due, customers still paying

13,500

Stock at shop at cost (excluding repossessed goods)

30,000

Goods purchased during the year

90,000

mr x sells goods at hire purchase price hire purchase is made of profit at 50 on hir 563278

Mr. X sells goods at hire purchase price. Hire purchase is made of profit at 50% on hire purchase price (cost). Calculate profit from the information given below for the year 2008:

2008

Rs

Jan 1

Installments due in the beginning

16,000

Dec 31

Installments due during the year

50,000

Cash received during the year

60,000

Goods sold during the year

48,000

Installments unpaid (not due) on 31 Dec

12,000

Goods repossessed during the year (Amount Due Rs 1,000)

100

prepare h p trading a c for the year ended mar 31 2009 at cost price 563280

Krishna Traders sell on H.P. terms consumable durables. Details of its activities during 2008–2009 are as shown below:

Particulars

TV

Washing Machine

AC

No. of Units sold

50

40

20

Cost per unit

Rs 10,000

Rs 12,000

Rs 18,000

Price per unit on delivery

Rs 2,500

Rs 4,000

Rs 6,000

Balance in

10 months

32 bi monthly

12 Quarterly

Installment of

Installment of Rs 500

Installments of

Rs 1,250 each

Each

Rs 2,200 each

No. of Installments received

490

800

55

Two washing machines on which only 6 installments in all and one air conditioner on which 3 installments were received, were repossessed as the customers defaulted in payment of subsequent installments. These were taken back at original cost less 30%.

Prepare H.P. Trading A/c for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 at Cost Price.

You are required to prepare

  1. Hire Purchase Trading Account
  2. General Trading Account

m s sona amp co sells goods on hire purchase system at cost plus 50 prepare h p debt 563281

M/s Sona & Co sells goods on Hire Purchase System at cost plus 50%. Prepare H.P. Debto Account, Shop Stock Account, Stock Account and H.P. Adjustment Account from the year ending Mar 31, 2009.

Rs

Apr1, 2008

Stock with H.P. customers at selling price

54,000

Stock at shop at cost

1,08,000

Installments Overdue

30,000

Mar 31, 2009

Cash received from customers

3,60,000

Goods Repossessed (Installments due Rs 16,000)

3,000

valued at Rs 3,000 which was included in the stock at the end;

Goods purchased during the year

3,60,000

Stock at shop at cost

1,23,000

Installments Due

54,000

prepare the necessary ledger account to record the above transactions and compute th 563283

Thomas sells goods on hire purchase at cost Plus 60%. He provides the following information for the period ending Mar 31, 2009:

Apr 1, 2008

Rs

Stock with hire purchase customers at selling price

6,000

Stock at the shop at cost

2,500

Installments overdue

4,000

Mar 31, 2009

Total Installments that feel due during the year

94,720

Cash received from customers (including down payments of Rs 7,720)

87,720

Goods Repossessed (Installments due Rs 250)

200

Stock at that shop at cost (Including goods repossessed Rs 200)

1,000

Purchases

60,000

Hire expenses

1,700

Prepare the necessary Ledger Account to record the above transactions and compute the profits.

prepare necessary ledger accounts to record the above transactions and calculate the 563284

Chennai Kitchen Mart sells goods both on cash and hire purchase basis and records hire purchase transactions on Stock and Debtors System, and closes its Books on Dec 31, every year.

On Apr 1, 2008, it sold a mixie and microwave oven to Sheela: the other particulars are provided as:

Particulars

Mixie

Micro Oven

Cost Price

Rs 4,500

Rs 8,000

Down Payment

Rs 1,000

Rs 2,000

No. of Installments Payable

10

8

Amount in each Installment

Rs 500

Rs 1,000

Mode of Payment

Monthly

Bi Monthly

First Installment Due on

May 1, 2008

June 1, 2008

Sheela paid all the installments due except for those due on Dec 1, 2008. It was decided that the Kitchen Mart would take back Micro Oven at an agreed price of Rs 5,500 and excess amount, if any, will be adjusted against the installment due on mixie. Oven repossessed was sold for Rs 6,000 after repair charges for which amounted to Rs 250.

Prepare necessary ledger accounts to record the above transactions and calculate the profits.

prepare installment debtors account and interest suspense account as they would appe 563286

Joseph & Co. sells consumer durables under installment payment system under which 20% of the total dues are to be paid on delivery and the balance in eight equal quarterly installments commencing from the last date of the quarter in which the goods have been delivered. 15% of the total dues are attributed towards interest of which credit to revenue is taken as:

In the year of sale

30%

Next year

50%

The year after Next

20%

Total dues for goods sold and delivered during the last three years had been:

Rs

2006

4,00,000

2007

5,00,000

2008

6,00,000

On Jan 1, 2008, Installment Debtors Account and Interest Suspense Account showed balances of Rs 3,35,000 (Dr.) Rs 64,500, respectively. The deliveries have been even throughout the year and all the installments have been collected on due date.

Prepare Installment Debtors Account, and Interest Suspense Account as they would appear in 2008.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 563288

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. The hire purchaser acquires the property immediately on signing the ________
  2. Under Hire Purchase System, the ownership or the title of the property is transferred only when the ________ is paid.
  3. The Hire Purchase System is regulated by ________ Act, 1972.
  4. The hire purchase price is always higher than the ________.
  5. The money payable immediately on signing the Hire Purchase Agreement is technically known as ________.
  6. Asset is always recorded by the hire purchaser as ________.
  7. Under Hire Purchase System, interest is always calculated on the outstanding total – and not on the outstanding total installments.
  8. ________ a series or one of a series of equal payments at fixed intervals.
  9. As the figure of 78 is commonly used, it is often quoted as ________.
  10. The asset on Hire Purchase Account would appear in the ________ at its original cash price or historical cost.
  11. ________ Account would be shown as a deduction from the historical cost of asset, purchased under this system.
  12. The Vendor ________ Hire Purchase Sales Account, because the items sold by him are treated as goods.
  13. Hire Purchase Sales Account is closed by transferring to ________.
  14. ________ Account is opened only when the goods are taken back from the defaulting hire purchaser.
  15. Under the Installment System, the title of goods is ________ to the purchaser immediately, though the price will be paid in installments.

state whether the following statements are true or false 563289

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Under Hire Purchase System the title or ownership of goods is transferred immediately on signing the Hire Purchase Agreement.
  2. The hirer has a right to terminate the agreement at any time before the property so passes.
  3. The property in goods is to pass to hirer on the payment of last installment under Hire Purchase System.
  4. Hire Purchase Price = Cost Price + Profit Margin – Interest.
  5. The amount of cash price and interest is not the same even in between equal installments.
  6. Under Hire Purchase System, interest is charged on the unpaid cash price.
  7. Asset is always recorded by the hire purchaser as Cash Price plus Interest.
  8. In the last year, interest represents the difference between the last installment to be paid and cash price unpaid.
  9. Interest is calculated only on outstanding installments.
  10. Interest is allowed on the down payment made.
  11. Depreciation is not written off in Hire Purchase System.
  12. Hire Purchase System of sale is similar to a method of financing the purchase of fixed assets.
  13. Normally, the asset on Hire Purchase Account will not be shown in the Balance Sheet.
  14. Any balance left in Goods Repossessed Account is transferred and shown in the Balance Sheet.
  15. Under Installment System, the seller cannot repossess the goods, even if there is default in installment.

the midwest coal company mines and processes coal that is sold to four power plants 563290

(EUP; weighted average & FIFO)The Midwest Coal Company mines and processes coal that is sold to four power plants in central Pennsylvania. The company employs a process costing system to assign production costs to the coal it processes. For the third week in March 2001, the firm had a beginning Work in Process Inventory of 50,000 tons of ore that were 100 percent complete as to material and 30 percent complete as to conversion. During the week, an additional 200,000 tons of ore were started in process. At the end of the week, 35,000 tons remained in Work in Process Inventory and were 70percent complete as to material and 60 percent complete as to conversion.For the third week in March:

a. Compute the total units to account for.

b.Determine how many units were started and completed.

c.Determine the equivalent units of production using the weighted average method.

d.Determine the equivalent units of production using the FIFO method.

prepare t accounts to represent the flow of costs for frankfurt products for februar 563291

(Weighted average)Frankfurt Products manufactures an electronic language translator. The device can translate seven languages in either direction. Analysis of beginning Work in Process Inventory for February 2001 revealed the following:

800 Units

Percent Complete

Cost Incurred

Material

45

$ 8,700

Direct labor

65

3,800

Overhead

40

6,600

Total beginning WIP

$19,100

During February, Frankfurt Products started production of another 3,800 translators and incurred $85,380 for material, $23,560 for direct labor, and $65,720for overhead. On February 28, the company had 400 units in process (70 percentcomplete as to material, 90 percent complete as to direct labor, and 80 percent complete as to overhead).

a.Prepare a cost of production report for February using the weighted average method.

b.Journalize the February transactions.

c.Prepare T accounts to represent the flow of costs for Frankfurt Products for February. Use “XXX” where amounts are unknown and identify what each unknown amount represents.

prepare a schedule to compute equivalent units of production by cost componentassumi 563292

(Weighted average)Alt Enterprises manufactures belt buckles in a single stepproduction process. To determine the proper valuations for inventory balances and Cost of Goods Sold, you have obtained the following information forAugust 2001:

Whole

Cost of

Cost of

Beginning work in process

Units

Material

Labor

Units started during period

400,000

$ 400,000

$ 630,000

Units transferred to finished goods

2,000,000

2,600,000

3,990,000

1,800,000

Beginning inventory units were 100 percent complete as to material, but only 80 percent complete as to labor and overhead. The ending inventory units were 100 percent complete as to material and 50 percent complete as to conversion.Overhead is applied to production at the rate of 60 percent of direct labor cost.

a.Prepare a schedule to compute equivalent units of production by cost componentassuming the weighted average method.

b.Determine the unit production costs for material and conversion.

c.Calculate the costs assigned to completed units and ending inventory for August 2000.

prepare the journal entries to record the july transfer of completed goods and the j 563293

(Weighted average)You have just been hired as the cost accountant for Sun Valley Micro, a producer of personal computer cases. This position has been vacant for one month. John Amos, manager of the firm’s tax department, has performed some computations for last month’s information; however, he confesses to you that he doesn’t remember a great deal about cost accounting. In the production process, materials are added at the beginning of production and overhead is applied to each product at the rate of 70 percent of direct labor cost. There was no Finished Goods Inventory at the beginning of July. A review of the firm’s inventory cost records provides you with the following information:

Work in Process 7/1/00

Units

DM Cost

DL Cost

(70% complete as to labor and overhead)

Units started in production

100,000

$ 750,000

$ 215,000

Costs for July

1,300,000

Work in Process 7/31/00

4,850,000

3,265,000

(40% complete as to labor and overhead)

400,000

At the end of July, the cost of Finished Goods Inventory was determined to be $124,033.

a.Prepare schedules for July 2000, to compute the following:

1.Equivalent units of production using the weighted average method.

2.Unit production costs for material, labor, and overhead.

3.Cost of Goods Sold.

b.Prepare the journal entries to record the July transfer of completed goods and the July cost of goods sold. (CPA adapted)

fifo cost per eup the following information has been gathered from the records of j 563294

(FIFO cost per EUP)The following information has been gathered from the records of Jack’s Snacks for August 2001. The firm makes a variety of snacks; the information presented here is for a cashew and dried mango mix. Materials are added at the beginning of processing; overhead is applied on a direct labor basis. The mix is transferred to a second department for packaging. Jack’ uses a FIFO process costing system.

Beginning WIP inventory (40% complete as to conversion)

5,000 pounds

Mix started in August

90,400 pounds

Ending WIP inventory (70% complete as to conversion)

4,000 pounds

Materials cost incurred in August

$415,840

Conversion costs incurred in August

$106,030

Beginning inventory cost totaled $13,875. For August 2001, compute the following:

a.Equivalent units of production by cost component.

b.Cost per equivalent unit by cost component.

c.Cost of mix transferred to the packaging department in August.

d.Cost of August’s ending inventory.

the stock was physically verified on mar 24 2009 and was valued at rs 5 00 000 goods 563225

The stock was physically verified on Mar 24, 2009 and was valued at Rs 5,00,000. Goods are normally sold by the trader at a profit of 25% on cost.

You are required to compute the value of stock to be taken to Balance Sheet of VRV Ltd as on Mar 31, 2009 in each of the following alternative cases.

Case (a):

On Mar 28, goods of sale value of Rs 2,00,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks.

Case (b):

On Mar 28, goods of the sale value of Rs 2,00,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of goods on Mar 31.

Case (c):

On Mar 28, goods of the sale value of Rs 2,00,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of the goods and approved the remaining on Mar 31.

Case (d):

On Mar 28, goods of the sale value of Rs 2,00,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of goods and approved 80% of the remaining on Mar 31.

the stock was physically verified on apr 9 2009 and was valued at rs 3 20 000 goods 563226

The stock was physically verified on Apr 9, 2009 and was valued at Rs 3,20,000. Goods are normally sold by the trader at a profit of 25% on cost.

You are required to compute the value of stock to be taken to the Balance Sheet of Vasant Ltd as on Mar 31, 2009 in each of the following alternative cases.

Case (a):

On Mar 29, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks.

Case (b):

On Mar 29, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of the goods on Apr 8, 2009.

Case (c):

On Mar 29, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He approved 80% of the goods on Apr 8.

Case (d):

On Mar 29, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of the goods and approved the remaining on Apr 8.

Case (e):

On Mar 29, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of goods and approved 80% of the remaining on Apr 8.

you are required to compute the value of closing stock as on dec 31 2008 and adjuste 563227

The Profit and Loss of Account of Renu for the year ended on Dec 31, 2008 showed a net profit of Rs 3,360 after taking into account the physical closing stock of Rs 5,664. On a scrutiny of the books, the information was extracted and furnished as:

  1. Renu took goods valued Rs 1,800 for her personal use without making entry in the books.
  2. Purchases of the year included Rs 720 spent on purchase of a fan for her shop.
  3. Invoices for goods amounting to Rs 4800 have been entered on Dec 20, but such goods were not included in stock.
  4. Rs 600 was included in closing stock in respect of goods purchased and invoiced on Dec 18, but included in purchases of Jan.
  5. Sales of goods amounting to Rs 732 and delivered in Dec had been entered in Jan sales.

You are required to compute the value of closing stock as on Dec 31, 2008 and adjusted net profit for the year ended on that date.

you are required to prepare a statement showing the actual value of stock as on dec 563228

A firm could do physical stock taking on Jan 9, 2009. The accounts of the firm are closed on Dec 31, every year. The stock on Jan 7, 2009, as disclosed by the store keeper was valued at Rs 91,500. You are required to compute the value of stock as on Dec 31, 2008 taking into consideration the following:

  1. Purchases from Jan 1, 2009 to Jan 7, 2009 as per invoice book amounted to Rs 17,800. On a careful analysis it was found that a fan purchased for Rs 1,600 was passed through invoice book; purchase book was carried forward Rs 20 less on page 15, and purchase of Rs 2,400 duly recorded in the book is still in transit.
  2. Goods of Rs 2,700 received on consignment were lying in the store room and were included in stock taking.
  3. Sales from Jan 1, to Jan 7, 2009 amounted to Rs 20,800. This, however, included the following:
    1. Goods sent on consignment Rs 2,000, at invoice price is made of cost + 25%.
    2. Goods sent to branch at invoice price of Rs 840. Invoice price is made at a profit of 1/6th of sale.
    3. Goods sold at Rs 1,600, loss being 20% on cost.

Sales in the business are made at a profit of 1/3rd of cost.

You are required to prepare a statement showing the actual value of stock as on Dec 31, 2008.

you are required to calculate the value of closing stock at cost as on mar 31 2009 f 563229

The financial year of Bhagya ends on Dec 31, 2009, but the stock in hand was physically verified only on Apr 9, 2009.

You are required to calculate the value of Closing Stock at cost as on Mar 31, 2009 from the following information:

  1. The stock at cost as verified on Apr 9, 2009 was Rs 30,000.
  2. Sales have been entered in the sales day book only after the despatch of goods and sales return only on receipt of goods.
  3. Purchases have been entered in the purchases day book only on receipt of the purchase invoice irrespective of the date of receipt of goods.
  4. Sales as per sales day book for the period from Apr 1 to Apr 9, 2009 (before actual verification) amounted to Rs 12,000 of which goods of the value of Rs 2,000 had not been delivered at the time of verification.
  5. Purchases as per the purchases day book for the period from Apr 1 to 9, Apr 2009 (before the actual verification) amounted to Rs 12,000 of which goods for purchases of Rs 3,000 had not been received at the date of verification and goods for purchases Rs 10,000 has been received prior to Mar 31, 2009.
  6. In respect of goods costing of Rs 10,000 received prior to Mar 31, 2009, invoices had not been received upto date of verification of stocks.
  7. Gross profit is 20% on sales.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 563231

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. Inventories are only __________.
  2. For inventory valuation, cost may mean historical, current or __________.
  3. Historical cost represents the cost actually incurred at the date of __________.
  4. Current replacement cost represents the replacement price on the date of __________.
  5. Standard cost represents the __________ cost.
  6. Storage costs are __________ while determining cost of inventories.
  7. Opening Inventory + Purchases – Closing Inventory = __________.
  8. Opening Inventory + Purchases – Cost of Goods Sold = __________.
  9. Under Periodic System, inventory is ascertained by taking an actual __________.
  10. Under Perpetual Inventory System, inventory is ascertained on the basis of __________.
  11. Cost of goods sold includes cost of __________ goods, if any.
  12. Under Perpetual Inventory System, the method of valuation is applied __________ during an accounting period to ascertain the Cost of Goods Sold.
  13. Under Periodic Inventory System, the method of valuation is applied __________ at the end of the accounting period to ascertain the cost of Closing Stock.
  14. The residual factor under Periodic Inventory System is __________.
  15. The residual factor under Perpetual Inventory System is __________.
  16. Under FIFO Method, the goods which are received __________ are to be issued first.
  17. Under LIFO, the goods which are received __________ are to be issued first.
  18. Weighted Average Price Method is used in __________ industries, advantageously.
  19. Goods are sold at a profit of 25% on cost is equal to __________ % on sales.
  20. All inventories should be valued at __________ of historical cost or net realisable value subject to certain conditions.

calculate by fifo method of inventory valuation the cost of goods sold and value of 563238

Calculate by FIFO Method of inventory valuation, the Cost of Goods Sold and value of Ending Inventory from the following data:

Date

Transaction

Units

Price per Unit (Rs)

June 1

Opening Stock

3,000

20

June 15

Purchases

1,500

25

July 10

Purchases

1,200

22

July 15

Sold

3,600

Aug 1

Sold

1,500

Aug 10

Purchases

1,200

25

Aug 31

Sold

1.500

from the following particulars for the months of dec 2009 find out the cost of inven 563239

From the following particulars for the months of Dec 2009, find out the cost of inventory on Dec 31, 2009 under Perpetual Inventory System using FIFO Method of pricing issue of materials:

Date

Particulars

Quantity (Kg)

Rate per Kg (Rs)

Dec 1

Opening Inventory

600

100

Dec 3

Purchase of material

3.000

140

Dec 10

Issue of material

2.400

Dec 12

Purchase of material

1,500

160

Dec 20

Issue of material

300

Dec 22

Purchase of material

450

180

Dec 27

Issue of material

540

a trader has the following transactions in a certain product in the month of may 200 563240

A trader has the following transactions in a certain product in the month of May 2009. Calculate the Cost of Goods Sold and the Closing Inventory using FIFO, LIFO and WAP methods.

Date

Transaction

Units

Rate per Unit (Rs)

May 1

Opening Stock

100

2

May 4

Purchases

400

3

May 7

Sells

450

16

May 15

Purchases

500

4 12

May 25

Sells

300

5

compute the value of the closing stock at apr 30 2009 using each of the following al 563241

A trader has the following transactions in a certain product for three months from Feb 2009:

Date

Transaction

Feb 3

Purchases

300 items at Rs 20 each

Feb 20

Purchases

100 items at Rs 24 each

Mar 1

Sells

100 items at Rs 30 each

Mar 20

Purchases

150 items at Rs 30 each

Mar 30

Sells

200 items at Rs 40 each

Apr 2

Purchases

150 items at Rs 40 each

Apr 15

Sells

175 items at Rs 50 each

Required

  1. Compute the Gross Profit earned during the period,
  2. Compute the value of the Closing Stock at Apr 30, 2009 using each of the following alternative bases of 2009 valuation: (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) WAP methods.

with the help of the following particulars prepare stores account showing issue of m 563242

With the help of the following particulars, prepare Stores Account, showing issue of materials on the basis of LIFO Method:

Purchases

June 1

(250 kg @ Rs 2.00 per kg)

June 8

(175 kg @ Rs 2.10 per kg)

June 18

(300 kg @ Rs 2.20 per kg)

June 25

(250 kg @ Rs 2.30 per kg)

Issues

June 9

(300 kg on requisition No. 1)

June 19

(225 kg on requisition No. 2)

June 28

(255 kg on requisition No. 3)

June 30

(75 kg on requisition No. 4)

Assume that there was no opening stock

from the following data compute the cost of goods sold and closing inventory under f 563243

From the following data compute the Cost of Goods Sold and Closing Inventory under FIFO, LIFO and WAC methods of inventory valuation:

Nov 1: Stock in hand 250 units @ Rs9 each

Purchases

Nov 2

(250 units @ Rs 11 each)

Nov 9

(500 units @ Rs 12 each)

Nov 17

(300 units @ Rs 10 each)

Nov 22

(250 units @ Rs 12 each)

Nov 29

(200 units @ Rs 13 each)

Issues

Nov 4

(200 units)

Nov 7

(250 units)

Nov 15

(450 units)

Nov 20

(250 units)

Nov 30

(300 units)

green ltd was following lifo method of valuation of stock due to promulgation of rev 563244

Green Ltd was following LIFO Method of valuation of stock. Due to promulgation of revised accounting standard they want to switch over to FIFO Method. From the following

  1. Draw up stock ledgers under FIFO and LIFO Methods of valuation of stocks,
  2. Find out the Closing Stock and cost of materials consumed under each of the above two methods.

Opening Stock 2,500 metric tonnes @ Rs 22 per MT = Rs 55,000

Purchases

1.9.2009

(500 MT @ Rs 30 per MT)

6.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

10.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 38 per MT)

16.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

21.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 32 per MT)

27.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

30.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 30 per MT)

Issues

1.9 to 6.9.2009

(1,000 MT)

7.9 to 10.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

11.9 to 21.9.2009

(2,000 MT)

22.9 to 26.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

27.9 to 30.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

you are requested to calculate the value of closing stock of raw materials according 563247

Bisma purchased raw materials during the month of Mar 2009 as stated below:

Mar 3

800 units @ Rs 60 per unit

Mar 7

1,200 units @ Rs 55 per unit

Mar 10

2,500 units @ Rs 57 per unit

Mar 17

3,000 units @ Rs 54 per unit

Mar 26

1,500 units @ Rs 58 per unit

Mar 30

1,000 units @ Rs 63 per unit

While preparing the final accounts on Mar 31, 2009, Bisma had 1,300 units of raw materials in his godown. You are requested to calculate the value of Closing Stock of raw materials according to FIFO and WAP methods.

compute the value of ending stock on the base of fifo lifo and wap methods 563248

Red Ltd recorded the following data in May 2009:

May 1

Opening Stock

100 units

@ Rs 40 each

May 5

Purchases

200 units

@ Rs 44 each

May 15

Purchases

200 units

@ Rs 48 each

May 25

Purchases

100 units

@ Rs 52 each

May 30

Purchases

200 units

@ Rs 60 each

Sales during the month were 300 units.

Compute the value of ending stock on the base of FIFO, LIFO and WAP methods.

stock at dec 31 2009 ndash 1 750 units assuming that the sale price was uniform at r 563249

Calculate the value of Closing Inventory and cost of sale according to FIFO, LIFO and WAP methods on Dec 31, 2009.

Dec 1

(Stock in hand)

250 units

@Rs 16 per unit

Dec 5

Purchases

3,750 units

@Rs 20 per unit

Dec 10

Purchases

4.250 units

@Rs 24 per unit

Dec 15

Purchases

4.500 units

@Rs 30 per unit

Dec 25

Purchases

6.000 units

@Rs 22 per unit

Stock at Dec 31, 2009 – 1,750 units. Assuming that the sale price was uniform at Rs 30 per unit throughout the month, compute the gross profit.

from the records of an oil distributing company the following summarised information 563250

From the records of an oil distributing company, the following summarised information is available for the month of Mar 2010.

Rs

Sales

4,72,500

General administrative expenses

12,500

Opening Stock: 5,000 ltrs @ Rs 30 per litre = 1,50,000

5.3.2010 – Purchases: 10,000 ltrs @ Rs 28.50 per litre

17.3.2010 – Purchases: 5,000 ltrs @ Rs 30.30 per litre

Closing Stock: 6,500 ltrs

Compute

  1. Value of Inventory as on Mar 31, 2010
  2. Cost of Goods Sold during Mar 2010
  3. Profit or loss for the month of Mar 2010

using FIFO method of inventory valuation.

the periodic inventory method is used compute the cost of the closing stock under a 563251

At the beginning of the year 2009, Vel Ltd had 1,500 items in stock which had cost Rs 1,680. At the end of the year, 3,800 items were held.

Purchases during the year:

Date

Quantity

Total Cost

Feb 15

(2,000)

(Rs 2,280)

May 15

(2,400)

(Rs 2,784)

Oct 15

(2,700)

(Rs 3,267)

Dec 15

(2,500)

(Rs 3,075)

The Periodic Inventory Method is used. Compute the cost of the Closing Stock under: (a) FIFO; (b) LIFO and (c) WAP methods.

from the following data calculate the value of closing inventory according to fifo a 563252

From the following data, calculate the value of Closing Inventory according to FIFO and LIFO on Mar 31, 2010 using (i) Periodic Inventory System and (ii) Perpetual Inventory System.

Mar 1: Stock in hand 400 units @ Rs 7.50 each

Purchases

Mar 5

600 units @ Rs 8 each

Mar 15

500 units @ Rs 9 each

Mar 25

400 units @ Rs 8.50 each

Mar 30

300 units @ Rs 9.50 each

Issues

Mar 3

300 units

Mar 10

500 units

Mar 17

400 units

Mar 26

500 units

Mar 31

200 units

calculate the value of closing stock of raw materials according to fifo lifo and wap 563253

A company, started on Jan 1, 2009 purchased raw material during 2009 as stated below:

Jan 2

( 800 kg @ Rs 62 per kg)

Feb 26

(1,200 kg @ Rs 57 per kg)

Apr 13

(2,500 kg @ Rs 59 per kg)

July 10

(3,000 kg @ Rs 56 per kg)

Sep 18

(1,500 kg @ Rs 60 per kg)

Nov 29

(1,000 kg @ Rs 65 per kg)

While preparing the final accounts on Dec 2009, the company had 1,300 kg of raw materials in its godown.

Required

Calculate the value of Closing Stock of raw materials according to FIFO, LIFO and WAP basis.

what is the company rsquo s internal control over financial reporting designed to do 563125

The Coca Cola Company Disclosures Review the financial statements and related notes of The Coca Cola Company in Appendix A.

Required

1. What was the gross profit for 2004? The operating income?

2. What was the net income for 2004? What were the related earnings per share amounts?

3. What were the total assets on December 31, 2004? How much of this total were current assets?

4. What were the total liabilities on December 31, 2004?

5. What was the total shareowners’ equity on December 31, 2004? How much was deducted from this shareowners’ equity for treasury stock? What method does the company use to account for its treasury stock?

6. What was the net increase in cash and cash equivalents in 2004? How much of this was from net cash provided by operating activities?

7. Where does the company summarize its accounting policies? How are inventories valued and what costing methods are used? How are property, plant, and equipment depreciated?

8. What is the total of the lines of credit and other short term credit facilities available, and how much was outstanding on December 31, 2004?

9. What was the net cash used in financing activities in 2004? What was the net cash used in investing activities in 2004?

10. How many stock options were outstanding at December 31, 2004? What was the weighted average price per share for exercised stock options in 2004?

11. What was the net periodic pension cost of the company’s pension plan in 2004? What was the fair value of the company’s pension benefit plan assets on December 31, 2004?

12. For the third quarter of 2004, what were the (a) net operating revenues, (b) gross profit, and (c) net income? What were the related earnings per share for (c)?

13. What were the net operating revenues in Africa for 2004? What were the identifiable operating assets held in Latin America at December 31, 2004?

14. Who are the auditors of the company? On what date was the audit report issued?

15. What is the company’s internal control over financial reporting designed to do, and how is it supported?

the following are comparative financial statements of the cohen company for 2006 200 563127

Horizontal Analysis and Ratios The following are comparative financial statements of the Cohen Company for 2006, 2007, and 2008:

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,

2008

2007

2006

Sales (net)

$102,200

$91,500

$81,700

Cost of goods sold

61,100

52,800

47,150

Gross profit

$41,100

$38,700

$34,550

Selling expenses

11,400

10,000

8,900

Administrative expenses

8,700

7,843

6,950

Interest expense

3,000

4,000

4,000

Total expenses

23,100

21,843

19,850

Income before income taxes

$18,000

$16,857

$14,700

Income tax expense

5,400

5,057

4,410

Net income

$12,600

$11,800

$10,290

Earnings per share

?

?

?

Comparative Retained Earnings Statements

Comparative Retained Earnings Statements

2008

2007

2006

Beginning retained earnings

$28,800

$20,800

$14,310

Add: Net income

12,600

11,800

10,290

$41,400

$32,600

$24,600

Less: Dividends distributed

4,410

3,800

3,800

Ending retained earnings

$36,990

$28,800

$20,800

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,

2008

2007

2006

Cash

$4,200

$4,000

$4,100

Receivables (net)

7,600

7,000

6,200

Inventories

9,800

9,000

8,600

Noncurrent assets

119,390

112,000

107,100

Total Assets

$140,990

$132,000

$126,000

Current liabilities

$12,000

$10,000

$12,000

Bonds payable, 10%

30,000

40,000

40,000

Common stock, $2 par

8,400

7,600

7,600

Premium on common stock

53,600

45,600

45,600

Retained earnings

36,990

28,800

20,800

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$140,990

$132,000

$126,000

Additional information: Credit sales were 65% of net sales in 2007 and 60% in 2008. At the beginning of 2008, 400 shares of common stock were issued, the first sale of stock in several years. The Cohen Company is concerned. Although it increased the dividends paid per share by 5% in 2008 and its 2008 net income is higher than 2007 net income, the market price of its common stock dropped from $22 per share at the beginning of 2008 to $21 per share at year end.

Required

1. For 2006, 2007, and 2008, prepare horizontal analyses for the Cohen Company using a year to year approach.

2. For 2007 and 2008, compute the following ratios:

a. Current

b. Acid test

c. Inventory turnover

d. Receivables turnover

e. Earnings per share

f. Dividend yield

g. Return on total assets

h. Return on stockholders’ equity

i. Debt

3. Based on your results, discuss the possible reasons for the decrease in the market price per share in 2008.

the pierce company operates a high volume retail outlet the following are comparativ 563128

Vertical Analysis, Ratios The Pierce Company operates a high volume retail outlet. The following are comparative financial statements for the company:

Comparative Income Statements

Comparative Income Statements

2008

2007

Sales (net)

$180,000

$150,000

Cost of goods sold

108,000

85,500

Gross profit

$72,000

$64,500

Selling expenses

21,600

15,000

Administrative expenses

23,770

23,410

Interest expense

3,200

2,800

Income before taxes

$23,430

$23,290

Income tax expense

7,030

6,990

Net income

$16,400

$16,300

Earnings per share (6,000 shares)

$2.73

$2.72

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,

2008

2007

Cash

$4,200

$3,000

Investments (short term)

2,000

2,100

Receivables (net)

8,600

6,400

Inventory

11,300

9,700

Noncurrent assets (net)

129,900

118,800

Total Assets

$156,000

$140,000

Accounts payable

$12,000

$10,000

Other current liabilities

1,000

2,400

Bonds payable

40,000

35,000

Common stock, $3 par

18,000

18,000

Additional paid in capital

30,000

30,000

Retained earnings

54,100

43,600

Accumulated other comprehensive income

900

1,000

Total Liabilities and

Stockholders’ Equity

$156,000

$140,000

Additional data: The company has not issued any common stock for several years and the price of its common stock has remained relatively constant over that time. At the beginning of 2007, it had outstanding accounts receivable (net) of $7,600, an inventory of $11,000, accounts payable of $7,400, total liabilities of $44,600, and stockholders’ equity of $85,400. The company typically makes 50% of its sales on credit. Pierce Company management has become concerned. Although it feels that progress has been made in “tightening up” the company’s operating cycle, this has caused only a modest increase in profits and no increase in the company’s stock market price. Management has asked for your assistance in identifying problem areas as well as strong points.

Required

1. Prepare a vertical analysis for the 2007 and 2008 financial statements of Pierce.

2. Compute the following ratios for 2007 and 2008:

a. Current

b. Acid test

c. Inventory turnover

d. Receivables turnover

e. Payables turnover

f. Return on total assets

g. Return on stockholders’ equity

h. Debt

i. Interest coverage

3. Briefly discuss any findings that your analyses reveal.

the following are comparative financial statements of the perez company for 2006 200 563129

Horizontal and Vertical Analyses The following are comparative financial statements of the Perez Company for 2006, 2007, and 2008:

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,

2008

2007

2006

Sales

$407,000

$361,500

$332,000

Sales returns

7,000

11,500

12,000

Net sales

$400,000

$350,000

$320,000

Cost of goods sold

244,000

222,000

205,000

Gross profit

$156,000

$128,000

$115,000

Selling expenses

45,825

39,550

35,690

Administrative expenses

60,232

46,664

44,213

Interest expense

4,150

4,200

3,580

Total expense

$110,207

$90,414

$83,483

Income before income taxes

$45,793

$37,586

$31,517

Income tax expense

13,738

11,276

9,455

Net income

$32,055

$26,310

$22,062

Number of common shares

10,000

9,000

8,000

Earnings per share

$3.21

$2.92

$2.76

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,

2008

2007

2006

Cash

$15,500

$12,650

$9,300

Receivables (net)

11,000

9,350

6,600

Inventories

38,000

30,000

22,250

Noncurrent assets

286,500

250,000

220,350

Total Assets

$351,000

$302,000

$258,500

Accounts payable

$11,800

$9,500

$9,300

Notes payable

16,200

13,500

11,700

Bonds payable

38,000

39,000

36,500

Common stock, $5 par

50,000

45,000

40,000

Premium on common stock

90,000

72,000

56,000

Retained earnings

145,000

123,000

105,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$351,000

$302,000

$258,500

Required

On the basis of the given information:

1. Prepare horizontal analyses for Perez Company using a base year to date approach for 2006 through 2007, and 2006 through 2008.

2. Prepare vertical analyses for the 2007 and 2008 financial statements.

comparative financial statements of the boeckman company for 2006 and 2007 are as fo 563130

Ratio Analysis Comparative financial statements of the Boeckman Company for 2006 and 2007 are as follows:

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,

2007

2006

Assets

Current assets

Cash

$7,940

$5,760

Temporary investments (at market)

10,060

4,240

Accounts receivable

18,000

19,500

Inventories

32,000

27,000

Prepaid insurance

15,000

14,000

Total current assets

$83,000

$70,500

Property and plant (net)

64,000

46,000

Investments

36,000

32,000

Long term receivables

38,600

31,000

Patents, net

13,000

9,000

Other assets

30,000

27,500

Total Assets

$264,600

$216,000

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$17,800

$16,500

Income taxes payable

7,500

6,800

Accrued payables

1,500

1,400

Current portion of long term debt

3,200

3,200

Total current liabilities

$30,000

$27,900

Long term debt

$56,300

$48,000

Deferred income taxes

12,500

11,800

Total other liabilities

7,200

8,300

Total liabilities

$106,000

$96,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Common stock, $5 par

$35,000

$30,000

Premium on common stock

36,000

24,600

Retained earnings

86,600

$64,800

Accumulated other

comprehensive income

1,000

600

Total stockholders’ equity

$158,600

$120,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$264,600

$216,000

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,

2007

2006

Sales

$278,000

$256,000

Sales returns

8,000

6,000

Net sales (68% on credit)

$270,000

$250,000

Cost of goods sold

175,500

170,000

Gross profit

$94,500

$80,000

Selling expenses

21,500

18,200

General expenses

27,560

23,550

Interest expense

4,300

3,100

Total expenses

$53,360

$44,850

For Years Ended December 31,

2007

2006

Income before income taxes

$41,140

$35,150

Income tax expense

12,340

10,550

Net income

$28,800

$24,600

Beginning retained earnings

64,800

43,200

Common stock dividends

7,000

3,000

Ending retained earnings

$86,600

$64,800

Additional information: The Boeckman Company is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. It issued 1,000 additional shares of common stock at the beginning of 2007. The market value of its common stock was quoted at $17 per share at December 31, 2007. The company uses a 365 day business year in its ratio analysis.

Required

1. Based on the preceding information, compute (for the year 2007 only) the following ratios for Boeckman:

a. Dividend yield

b. Price/earnings

c. Profit margin

d. Return on total assets

e. Return on stockholders’ equity

f. Current

g. Acid test

h. Inventory turnover (in days)

i. Receivables turnover (in days)

j. Payables turnover (in days)

k. Average operating cycle (in days)

l. Debt

m. Interest coverage

n. Book value per common share

2. Briefly discuss what a potential investor might do to evaluate the results of these ratios.

the market value of its common stock was quoted at 10 per share at december 31 2007 563131

Ratio Analysis The Printing Company is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The market value of its common stock was quoted at $10 per share at December 31, 2007 and 2006. Printing’s balance sheet at December 31, 2007 and 2006, and statement of income and retained earnings for the years then ended are as follows:

Balance Sheet

December 31,

2007

2006

Assets

Current Assets

Cash

$3,500,000

$3,600,000

Marketable securities, at market

13,000,000

11,000,000

Accounts receivable (net)

105,000,000

95,000,000

Inventories, lower of cost or market

126,000,000

154,000,000

Prepaid expenses

2,500,000

2,400,000

Total current assets

$250,000,000

$266,000,000

Property and plant (net)

311,000,000

308,000,000

Investments, at equity

2,000,000

3,000,000

Long term receivables

14,000,000

16,000,000

Goodwill and patents (net)

6,000,000

6,500,000

Other assets

6,000,000

7,600,000

Total Assets

$589,000,000

$607,100,000

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Notes payable

$5,000,000

$15,000,000

Accounts payable

38,000,000

48,000,000

Accrued expenses

24,500,000

27,000,000

Income taxes payable

1,000,000

1,000,000

Current portion of long term debt

6,500,000

7,000,000

Total current liabilities

75,000,000

98,000,000

Long term debt

169,000,000

180,000,000

Deferred income taxes

74,000,000

67,000,000

Other liabilities

9,000,000

8,000,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Common stock, $1 par value

10,000,000

10,000,000

5% cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value; $100 liquidating value

4,000,000

4,000,000

Additional paid in capital

107,000,000

107,000,000

Retained earnings

142,000,000

134,000,000

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

Unrealized decrease in value of marketable securities

1,000,000

900,000

Total stockholders’ equity

262,000,000

254,100,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$589,000,000

$607,100,000

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

Year Ended December 31,

2007

2006

Net sales

$600,000,000

$500,000,000

Costs and expenses

Cost of goods sold

$490,000,000

$400,000,000

Selling and general expenses

71,900,000

66,000,000

Other, net

7,000,000

6,000,000

Total costs and expenses

568,900,000

472,000,000

Income before taxes

$31,100,000

$28,000,000

Income tax expense

10,900,000

9,800,000

Net income

$20,200,000

$18,200,000

Beginning retained earnings

134,000,000

126,000,000

Dividends on common stock

12,000,000

10,000,000

Dividends on preferred stock

200,000

200,000

Ending retained earnings

$142,000,000

$134,000,000

Required

Based on the preceding information, compute (for the year 2007 only) the following:

1. Current (working capital) ratio

2. Quick (acid test) ratio

3. Number of days’ sales in average receivables, assuming a business year consists of 300 days and all sales are on account

4. Inventory turnover

5. Book value per share of common stock

6. Earnings per share on common stock

7. Price/earnings ratio on common stock

8. Dividend yield ratio on common stock

explain why the content of the management report influences the activities of the ex 563133

Management’s Report The subject of management reports has been prominent the past few years. A management report is included in the annual report to shareholders. This report should not be confused with management’s discussion and analysis of operations and financial condition that also is relatively new to the annual report. The management report is included in the annual report to shareholders as a result of the urging of a number of groups and organizations. Consequently, the form and content of the annual report to shareholders continues to evolve as management attempts to present additional information that will be useful to the readers.

Required

1. Explain the general purposes of the management report.

2. Identify five subject areas or topics which have been recommended for inclusion in the management report.

3. Explain why the content of the management report influences the activities of the external auditor during the audit engagement?

the sec must have some ldquo license rdquo to exercise power explain where the sec r 563134

Securities and Exchange Commission The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) was created in 1934 and consists of five commissioners and a staff of approximately 1,900. The SEC professional staff is organized into four divisions and several principal offices. The primary objectives of the SEC are to support fair securities markets and to foster enlightened shareholder participation in major corporate decisions. The SEC has a significant presence in financial markets and corporation shareholder relations and has the authority to exert significant influence on entities whose actions lie within the scope of its authority. The SEC chairman has identified enforcement cases and full disclosure filings as major activities of the SEC.

Required

1. The SEC must have some “license” to exercise power. Explain where the SEC receives its authority.

2. Explain, in general, the major ways in which the SEC:

a. Supports fair securities markets.

b. Fosters enlightened shareholder participation in major corporate decisions.

3. The major responsibilities of the SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance include full disclosure filings. Describe the means by which the SEC attempts to assure the material accuracy and completeness of registrants’ financial disclosure filings.

explain how the provision for income taxes is computed and reflected in interim fina 563136

Interim Reporting Interim financial reporting has become an important topic in accounting. There has been considerable discussion as to the proper method of reflecting results of operations at interim dates. Accordingly, the Accounting Principles Board issued an opinion clarifying some aspects of interim financial reporting.

Required

1. Explain generally how revenue should be recognized at interim dates and specifically how revenue should be recognized for industries subject to large seasonal fluctuations in revenue and for long term contracts using the percentage

of completion method at annual reporting dates.

2. Explain generally how product and period costs should be recognized at interim dates. Also discuss how inventory and cost of goods sold may be afforded special accounting treatment at interim dates.

3. Explain how the provision for income taxes is computed and reflected in interim financial statements.

what was the company rsquo s basic net income per share for the third quarter of 200 563139

Analyzing Coca Cola’s Segment and Interim Reporting Refer to the financial statements and related notes of The Coca Cola Company in Appendix A of this book.

Required

1. What are the companies’s operating segments?

2. What items are subtracted from an operating segment’s net operating revenues to determine its profit or loss?

3. What does the North America operating segment include and what was its operating income for 2004?

4. What were the net operating revenues of the Latin America operating segment for 2004? What was the total amount of the net operating revenues of the various operating segments for 2004? How does this amount compare to the net operating revenues reported on the company’s consolidated statement of income for 2004?

5. What was the depreciation and amortization of the Asia operating segment for 2004? What was the total amount of the depreciation and amortization of the various operating segments for 2004? How does this amount compare to the depreciation and amortization reported on the company’s consolidated statement of cash flows for 2004?

6. What were the company’s net operating revenues for the first quarter of 2004? How does this amount compare to the third quarter of 2004?

7. What was the company’s gross profit for the second quarter of 2004? How does this amount compare to the second quarter of 2003?

8. What was the company’s basic net income per share for the third quarter of 2004? What was the company’s fullyear net income per share for 2004? How does this amount compare to the basic net income per share reported on the company’s consolidated statement of income for 2004?

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives when do you think tallas company s 563140

Ethics and Quarterly Expenses It is March 2008, and you have just been hired by the Tallas Company to be its accountant. Tallas is a small corporation that does a seasonal business of selling snow removal equipment, with most of its sales to retailers occurring in the last two quarters of the calendar year. Production is particularly heavy during the second quarter, in preparation for these sales. During the first quarter production is slowest, so this is when Tallas does the majority of its repairs and maintenance on its production equipment. You are in the process of preparing Tallas Company’s 2008 first quarter interim report. After preparing a preliminary income statement, which shows a modest $30,000 profit, you begin to prepare a preliminary balance sheet. In reviewing the asset accounts in the general ledger, you notice an account entitled Miscellaneous Factory Assets in the amount of $140,000. Since this is a large amount relative to the other assets and you are unclear how to classify this asset, you ask the controller for an explanation. The controller replies, “Oh that. Just include it under Property, Plant, and Equipment. That is the amount we spent on repairs and maintenance during the first quarter. If we expensed all of it now, we would show a loss for the first quarter. Instead, we record the amount as an asset, wait to see how the second quarter results are, and then expense some of it so we can show a reasonable profit. The remainder we expense during our busy season of the third and fourth quarters. We have been doing this for years. It makes all of our quarterly income statements look better. Besides, it makes no difference, since our total yearly income is the same regardless of when we report repairs and maintenance expense during the four quarters.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, when do you think Tallas Company should report its quarterly repairs and maintenance expense?

on apr 1 2004 a new plant was purchased for rs 40 000 and a further sum of rs 2 000 563178

On Apr 1, 2004, a new plant was purchased for Rs 40,000 and a further sum of Rs 2,000 was spent on its installation. On Oct 1, 2006 another plant was acquired for Rs 25,000. Due to fire on Jan 5, 2007 the first plant was totally destroyed and was sold for Rs 1,000 only. On Jan 20, 2008 a second hand plant was purchased for Rs 30,000 and a further sum of Rs 5,000 was spent for bringing the same to use on Mar 15, 2008. Depreciation has been provided @ 10% p.a. on straight line basis. It was a practice to provide depreciation for full year on all acquisitions made at any time during any year and to ignore depreciation on any item sold or disposed of during the year. None of the assets were measured. The accounts are closed annually to Mar 31. It is now decided to follow the rate at 20% p.a. on Diminishing Balance Method with retrospective effect in respect of the existing items of plant and to make necessary adjustment entry on Apr 1, 2008.

You are required to prepare

1.

A Plant Account

2.

Provision for Depreciation A/c

state whether the following statements are true or false 563186

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Depreciation is related to Depreciable Fixed Assets only.
  2. Depreciation is the result of fluctuations in the value of fixed assets.
  3. Depreciation is only a temporary decrease in the book value of the asset.
  4. Depreciation covers depletion, amortization, and obsolescence.
  5. In case of companies, it is compulsory to charge depreciation.
  6. When the rate of depreciation is given as 10% p.a. along with the date of acquisition, depreciation amount is computed for the entire accounting period.
  7. Depreciation is an amortized expenditure.
  8. The expressions – depreciation is to be charged at 20% and 20% p.a. denote then same thing.
  9. Historical cost of a depreciable asset affects the amount of depreciation.
  10. Estimated residual value of a depreciable asset affects the amount of depreciation.
  11. Straight Line Method is applied to have a uniform charge for depreciation and for repairs and maintenance together.
  12. The interest on the capital invested in the asset is taken into consideration under Straight Line Method.
  13. Under Straight Line Method, the book value of assets become zero or equal to its scrap value at the end of its useful life.
  14. The items of transaction relating to revenue nature are usually debited to respective assets account.
  15. Under Written Down Value Method of depreciation, the rate of depreciation remains constant, whereas the amount of depreciation goes on decreasing.
  16. WDV method takes into consideration the interest on capital invested in the asset.
  17. It takes a lengthy period to write as asset down to its break up value, under WDV method of depreciation.
  18. Depreciation is charged at a fixed percentage on the original cost in all subsequent years.
  19. The book value of the assets does not become zero under WDV method of depreciation.
  20. Change in the Method of depreciation is made from the next accounting period.
  21. Sinking Fund Method of depreciation provides a definite amount at a certain future for replacement of assets at the end of their useful life.
  22. Depreciation Fund will appear under the head “Reserves and Surplus” on the Liabilities side of the Balance Sheet.
  23. Depreciation Fund Investment Account shall appear on the Liabilities side of the Balance Sheet.
  24. Depreciation is not provided in case of loss in an accounting year.
  25. Providing depreciation in accounts reduces the amount of profits available for dividend distribution.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 563187

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. Depreciation is a term used to denote decrease in the book value of _______.
  2. Depreciation is a permanent ________ in the book value of an asset.
  3. “Depletion” refers to _______ deterioration by exhaustion of natural resources.
  4. The term “Amortization” refers to _______ deterioration of intangible assets.
  5. Book value (as on date of sale) = original cost _______.
  6. Under Straight Line Method, the book value of the asset becomes _______ or to its _______ value at the end of its useful life.
  7. Under Written Down Value Method, the rate of depreciation remains ________ year after year, whereas the amount of depreciation goes on ________.
  8. Under Written Down Value Method, depreciation is charged at a fixed percentage on ________ in the first year and on ________ in subsequent years.
  9. Under Straight Line Method depreciation remains _______.
  10. Depreciation Fund Account shall appear on _______ side of Balance Sheet.
  11. Depreciation Redemption Fund Investment Account shall appear on the ________ side of the Balance Sheet.
  12. Revenue Reserves are created out of ________ available for distribution by way of dividend.
  13. Provision is a _______ against profit.
  14. Reserve is an _______ out of profit.
  15. The amount of depreciation remains constant year after year under _______.

calculate the rate of depreciation under slm 563196

Model: Computation of depreciation under Straight Line Method.
Calculate the Rate of Depreciation under SLM.

Purchase Price

Expenses to

Estimated

Expected

of Machine

be Capitalised

Residual Value

Useful Life

Rs

Rs

Rs

Years

(i)

24,000

6,000

12,000

4

(ii)

5,100

900

600

10

(iii)

13,500

1,500

3,000

10

(iv)

60,000

15,000

7,500

5

from the following information you are required to calculate the value of ending inv 563214

From the following information, you are required to calculate the value of Ending Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold assuming (a) Perpetual System and (b) Periodic Inventory System under FIFO method.

Date

Transactions

Units

Price per Unit Rs

Jan 2,2009

Opening Balance brought forward

100

10

Jan 9,2009

Purchases

400

15

Jan 14, 2009

Sold

300

Jan 25, 2009

Purchases

500

20

Jan 29, 2009

Sold

400

while preparing final accounts on dec 31 2008 the company had 1 200 kg of raw materi 563218

Renu Ltd started on Jan 1, 2008, purchased raw materials during 2008 as stated below:

Rate per kg Rs

Jan 5

750 kg

51

Jan 25

1,200 kg

49

Feb 20

2,300 kg

47

Mar 15

2,500 kg

48

Oct 2

1,250 kg

50

Dec 10

1,000 kg

55

While preparing final accounts on Dec 31, 2008, the company had 1,200 kg of raw materials in its godown. You are required to compute the values of Closing Stock of raw materials and the Cost of Sales according to:

  1. First In First Out (FIFO) Basis,
  2. Last In First Out (LIFO) Basis, and
  3. Weighted Average Price (WAP) Basis.

a retail shop dealing in knitwear has the following transactions during june 2008 563219

A retail shop dealing in knitwear has the following transactions during June 2008.

Date

Purchase/Sale

Units/Knitwear

Rate per unit Rs

June 2

Purchase

1,000

SO

June 8

Purchase

500

60

June 12

Sale

500

70

June 15

Purchase

800

70

June 18

Sale

1,000

85

June 24

Purchase

500

85

June 28

Sale

800

100

You are required to compute

  1. The gross profit earned during June,
  2. The value of stock held on June 30, 2008 using each of the following alternative basis of valuation:
    1. FIFO,
    2. LIFO,
    3. Weighed Average Cost.

determine the value of stock as per books of vas ltd on mar 31 2009 from the followi 563220

Determine the value of stock as per books of Vas Ltd on Mar 31, 2009 from the following information:

  1. The cost of stock as per physical verification as on Mar 20, 2009 amounted to Rs 5,00,000.
  2. Purchases as per Purchase Book after stock taking till Mar 31, 2009 amounted to Rs 5,00,000 and included the following:
    1. Rs 20,000 for goods received till Mar 19
    2. Rs 40,000 for goods received on Apr 1
  3. Sales as per Sales Book after stock taking, till Mar 31, amounted to Rs 5,00,000 and include the following:
    1. Rs 20,000 for goods delivered till Mar 19
    2. Rs 40,000 for goods delivered on Apr 1
  4. Goods are sold by the trader at a profit of 25% on cost.

the stock was physically verified on mar 24 2009 and was valued at rs 2 75 000 goods 563224

The stock was physically verified on Mar 24, 2009 and was valued at Rs 2,75,000. Goods are normally sold by the trader at a profit of 25% on cost.

You are required to compute the value of stock to be taken to the Balance Sheet of VRS Ltd as on Mar 31, 2009 in each of the following alternative cases:

Case (a):

On Mar 21, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to customer, the period of approval being two weeks.

Case (b):

On Mar 21, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of the goods on Mar 31.

Case (c):

On Mar 21, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent to on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He approved 80% of the goods on Mar 31.

Case (d):

On Mar 21, goods of the sale value of Rs 50,000 were sent on sale or return basis to a customer, the period of approval being two weeks. He returned 20% of the goods and approved 80% of the remaining on Mar 31.

the terms ldquo period cost rdquo and ldquo product cost rdquo are sometimes used to 563075

Cost, Expense, and Loss You were requested to personally deliver your auditor’s report to the board of directors of Sebal Manufacturing Corporation and answer questions posed about the financial statements. While reading the statements, one director asked, “What are the precise meanings of the terms ‘cost,’ ‘expense,’ and ‘loss’? These terms seem sometimes to identify similar items and other times dissimilar items.”

Required

1. Explain the meanings of the terms (a) “cost,” (b) “expense,” and (c) “loss” as used for financial reporting in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles. In your explanation discuss the distinguishing characteristics of the terms and their similarities and interrelationships.

2. Classify each of the following items as a cost, expense, loss, or other category, and explain how the classification of each item may change:

a. Cost of goods sold

b. Bad debts expense

c. Depreciation expense for plant machinery

d. Spoiled goods

3. The terms “period cost” and “product cost” are sometimes used to describe certain items in financial statements. Define these terms and distinguish between them. To what types of items does each apply?

explain how lynn should report the extraordinary loss from the earthquake on its inc 563079

Nonrecurring Items Lynn Company sells a component of its business in the middle of the year. On the date of sale, the net proceeds received were less than the aggregate book value of the component’s net assets. The component was operating at a loss from the beginning of the year. In addition, Lynn had one of its manufacturing plants destroyed by an earthquake during the year. The loss is properly reported as an extraordinary item.

Required

1. Explain how Lynn should report discontinued operations of a component of its business on its income statement for this year. Do not discuss earnings per share requirements.

2. What are the criteria for classification as an extraordinary item?

3. Explain how Lynn should report the extraordinary loss from the earthquake on its income statement for this year. Do not discuss earnings per share requirements.

compute the lifetime income of the hill corporation and comment upon what additional 563081

Capital Maintenance At the beginning of 1995, the Hill family organized the Hill Corporation and issued 8,000 shares of stock to family members for $20 per share. During 1998, it issued an additional 1,600 shares of stock for $25 per share to family members. The 9,600 shares were held by the family until the corporation was liquidated at the end of 2007. At that time the corporate assets were sold for $600,000 and the $50,000 of corporate liabilities were paid off. The remainder was returned to stockholders. During the 13 years of operation the corporation had a volatile operating life. It started out slowly but then increased its activities in later years. It had operated in several industry segments, being quite successful in some, not so successful in others. It had survived a major earthquake, but not without incurring significant losses. The corporation paid out dividends of $100,000 during its lifetime. You are a member of the Hill family who has just inherited a sizable fortune from one of your relatives. Although you were quite young during the operating life of the Hill Corporation, you are considering establishing and investing in a new corporation that operates in some of the same lines of business, provided that the corporation would be profitable. You have just received your undergraduate accounting degree and upon investigation find that, with the exception of the preceding information, all the corporate accounting records were destroyed in a recent fire. You have been told that these records were sketchy at best, but that a capital maintenance approach to income measurement might yield some useful information.

Required

Compute the lifetime income of the Hill Corporation and comment upon what additional information you would desire before making your investment decision.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives what information if any will you i 563083

Ethics and Sale of Operating Component It is the end of 2007, and, as an accountant for Newell Company, you are preparing its 2007 financial statements. On December 29, 2007, the management of Newell decided to sell one of its major divisions, subject to some legal work that is expected to be completed during the first week in April 2008 (after the 2007 financial statements have been issued). During 2007, the division earned a small operating income that is just enough for the company to report “record earnings” for the year. However, the estimated fair value of the division at the end of 2007 is less than its net book value, so that management anticipates the component will be sold at a loss. The president of Newell stops by your office and says to you, “You have been doing a fine job. Keep up the good work, because you are heading for a promotion in early 2009. Once we report the record earnings for 2007, our stockholders and creditors will be happy. Then I think our earnings for 2008 will be high enough so that the loss we expect to report in 2008 on the sale of the division will not look so bad.” After the president leaves your office, you continue preparing the 2007 financial statements.

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, what information, if any, will you include about the upcoming sale of the division in the 2007 financial statements?

research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short me 563084

Researching GAAP Situation During 2007, one of the customers of Klote Company declared bankruptcy. This customer had been a major purchaser of Klote’s products and had owed $40,000 on account to Klote (a material portion of its receivables) at the time of bankruptcy. As a result of the bankruptcy, Klote had to write off the entire $40,000 account receivable of the customer as a loss. The president of Klote is concerned about how to report this loss on the company’s 2007 income statement. The president says, “Since this company that went bankrupt was a major customer, surely that is an unusual and infrequent event, and the $40,000 should be reported as an extraordinary loss. What do you think?”

Directions

Research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo to the president that summarizes how to report the $40,000 loss on Klote’s 2007 income statement. Cite your reference and applicable paragraph numbers.

prepare a schedule that reports on the revenues profit and assets of segments 1 and 563107

Segment Reporting The Wilson Diversified Company has total assets of $130,000 at the end of 2007 and the following condensed income statement for 2007:

Sales

$90,000

Operating expenses

66,600

Income before income taxes

$23,400

Income tax expense

7,020

Net income

$16,380

The company has two reportable operating segments and has developed the following related information:

1

2

Other

Total

Sales

$51,700

$24,400

$13,900

$90,000

Operating expenses

36,780

15,400

10,420

66,600a

Segment assets

70,300

28,740

21,960

130,000b

a. Of the $66,600 total operating expenses, $4,000 are general corporate expenses.

b. Of the $130,000 total assets, $9,000 are general corporate assets.

Required

Prepare a schedule that reports on the revenues, profit, and assets of Segments 1 and 2 and the other operating segments of the Wilson Diversified Company for 2007. Be sure to include the appropriate reconciliations.

prepare a schedule that reports on the revenues and profit of segments a and b and t 563108

Segment Reporting Parks Conglomerate Company does business in several different industries. The following is a 2007 condensed income statement for the entire company:

Sales

$300,000

Less:

Cost of goods sold

$140,000

Depreciation expense

30,000

Other operating expenses

60,000

Total expenses

230,000

Pretax income

$70,000

Income tax expense

21,000

Net income

$49,000

Earnings per share (20,000 shares)

$2.45

Parks has two major operating segments, A and B. No other operating segment contributes 10% or more of the company’s activities. Segments A and B make no sales to each other or to the other segments of the company. An analysis reveals that $2,000 of the total depreciation expense and $6,000 of the total other operating expenses are related to general corporate activities. The remaining expenses and total revenues are directly allocable to segment activities according to the following percentages:

Percent Identified with

Segment A

Segment B

Other Segments

Sales

40%

46%

14%

Cost of goods sold

35

50

15

Depreciation expense

40

45

15

Other operating expenses

42

40

18

Required

Prepare a schedule that reports on the revenues and profit of Segments A and B and the other operating segments of the Parks Conglomerate Company for 2007. Be sure to reconcile these amounts with the related totals on the preceding income statement. Include notes summarizing the depreciation related to each operating segment and the computation of segment profits.

determine which segments are reportable operating segments justify your conclusions 563109

Determination of Reportable Segments Straub Diversified Company has five different operating segments. None of these segments makes sales to the other segments. The company has total assets of $155,000 at the end of 2007 and lists the following condensed income statement for 2007:

Sales

$100,000

Operating expenses

72,000

Pretax income

$28,000

Income taxes

8,400

Net income

$19,600

In preparing its segmental reporting schedule, the company determined that it has $7,000 of general corporate expenses and $10,000 of general corporate assets. It also developed the following information for each of its five segments:

Segment

1

2

3

4

5

Sales

$9,200

$8,800

$9,000

$63,900

$9,100

Segment profit

3,300

3,200

3,400

21,500

3,600

Segment assets

15,100

13,900

14,300

87,900

13,800

Required

On the basis of the preceding information:

1. Determine which segments are reportable operating segments (justify your conclusions).

2. Prepare a schedule that reports on the revenues, profit, and assets of the reportable operating segments and the remaining segments of the Straub Diversified Company for 2007. Reconcile these amounts to the related totals on the income statement and to total assets. Notes to the schedule are not necessary.

on the basis of the preceding information prepare the howard corporation income stat 563111

Interim Reporting The Howard Corporation presented the following trial balance for the quarter ended March 31, 2007:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$9,800

Accounts receivable

13,000

Inventory (1/1/07)

10,000

Prepaid insurance

9,600

Land

16,000

Buildings and equipment

108,000

Accumulated depreciation

$36,000

Accounts payable

28,200

Common stock, $1 par

13,200

Additional paid in capital

24,800

Retained earnings (1/1/07)

44,900

Sales (net)

100,000

Purchases (net)

59,000

Selling expenses

12,000

General and administrative expenses

9,700

Totals

$247,100

$247,100

Additional information:

1. The company uses control accounts for selling expenses and for general and administrative expenses.

2. The company makes formal adjusting entries at year end and enters the amounts in the appropriate accounts at that time.

3. The company uses a periodic inventory system. It uses the gross profit method to determine interim inventory. Historical gross profit has averaged 43% of net sales.

4. On January 1, 2007, the company purchased a 4 year insurance policy for $9,600.

5. No common stock has been issued or retired in 2007.

6. The buildings and equipment have an estimated life of 15 years with no residual value. The company uses straight line depreciation; it records one fourth of the depreciation as a selling expense and the remainder as a general and administrative expense.

7. The company expects its annual effective income tax rate to be 30%; income taxes will be paid at the beginning of the next year.

Required

On the basis of the preceding information, prepare the Howard Corporation income statement for the first quarter of 2007 and a March 31, 2007 balance sheet. A worksheet is not required, but you should be prepared to substantiate any adjustments you make to the preceding accounts.

based on the given information and assuming 20 000 shares of common stock have been 563112

Interim Reporting The Hill Company prepares quarterly and year to date interim reports. The following is its interim income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2007:

Sales (net)

$150,000

Cost of goods sold

90,000

Gross profit

$60,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

$18,000

General expenses

10,600

Depreciation expense

8,000

36,600

Pretax operating income

$23,400

Other items

Dividend revenue

$600

Interest expense

1,000

400

Income before income taxes

$23,000

Income tax expense

7,000

Net income

$16,000

Earnings per share (20,000 shares)

$0.80

On June 30, 2007, the company accountant completed a worksheet in preparation for developing the year to date interim income statement. The following are the accounts and amounts listed in the income statement debit and credit columns of this worksheet:

Debit

Credit

Sales (net)

$340,000

Interest revenue

500

Dividend revenue

1,000

Cost of goods sold

$190,000

Selling expenses

50,000

General expenses

20,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

Interest expense

2,100

Income tax expense

19,200

Required

Based on the given information, and assuming 20,000 shares of common stock have been outstanding for the entire 6 months, for the Hill Company prepare:

1. A year to date interim income statement for the first 6 months of 2007.

2. An interim income statement for the second quarter of 2007.

based on the preceding information for slusher company prepare horizontal analyses f 563114

Horizontal Analyses Slusher Company presents the following condensed comparative income statements for 2006, 2007, and 2008:

2008

2007

2006

Sales (net)

$120,000

$100,000

$85,000

Cost of goods sold

72,000

55,000

45,000

Gross profit

$48,000

45,000

$40,000

Operating expenses

22,000

20,000

18,000

Operating income

$26,000

25,000

$22,000

Other items

Dividend revenue

400

500

200

Interest expense

1,200

1,000

500

Income before income taxes

$25,200

$24,500

$21,700

Income tax expense

8,200

8,000

6,000

Net income

$17,000

$16,500

$15,700

Number of common shares

6,000

6,000

5,000

Earnings per share

$2.83

$2.75

$3.14

Required

Based on the preceding information for Slusher Company, prepare horizontal analyses for the years 2006, 2007, and 2008 using (1) a year to year approach and (2) a base year to date approach. Do your analyses reveal any favorable or unfavorable trends?

the samuels company presents the following condensed income statement and balance sh 563115

Vertical Analyses The Samuels Company presents the following condensed income statement and balance sheet information for 2007 and 2008.

Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,

2008

2007

Sales (net)

$100,000

$90,000

Cost of goods sold

60,000

51,000

Gross profit

$40,000

$39,000

Operating expenses

21,300

21,900

Interest revenue

1,500

1,400

Interest expense

3,700

2,500

Income before income taxes

$16,500

$16,000

Income tax expense

5,000

4,700

Net income

$11,500

$11,300

Earnings per share

$1.92

$1.95

December 31,

2008

2007

Cash

$3,000

$2,000

Receivables (net)

7,000

8,000

Inventories

11,000

12,000

Long term investments (bonds)

20,000

15,000

Property and equipment (net)

79,000

63,000

Total Assets

$120,000

$100,000

2008

2007

Current liabilities

$10,000

$11,400

Bonds payable, 10%

37,000

25,000

Common stock, $2 par

12,000

11,600

Premium on common stock

21,000

19,500

Retained earnings

40,000

32,500

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$120,000

$100,000

Required

Based on the preceding information for Samuels Company, prepare vertical analyses of the income statements and balance sheets for 2008 and 2007. Do your analyses reveal any trends in the company’s operations and financial position?

is the company favorably ldquo trading on its equity rdquo explain 563116

Ratios The following are a condensed income statement for 2007 and a December 31, 2007 balance sheet for the Allen Company:

Income Statement

Sales (net)

$304,400

Cost of goods sold

183,600

Gross profit

$120,800

Operating expenses

82,000

Interest expense

7,000

Income before income taxes

$31,800

Income taxes

10,000

Net income

$21,800

Balance Sheet

Cash

$8,200

Accounts payable

$18,000

Receivables (net)

14,700

Other current liabilities

6,800

Inventory

19,300

Bonds payable, 10%

70,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

195,800

Common stock, $10 par

80,500

Premium on common stock

24,000

Retained earnings

38,700

Total Assets

$238,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$238,000

Additional information: The corporate common stock was outstanding the entire year and is selling for $16 per share at yearend. On January 1, 2007, the inventory was $21,500, the total assets were $224,000, the accounts payable were $18,800, and the total stockholders’ equity was $130,800. The company operates on a 300 day business year.

Required

For the Allen Company, compute the following ratios:

1. Price/earnings

2. Profit margin

3. Return on total assets

4. Return on stockholders’ equity

5. Current

6. Inventory turnover (in days)

7. Payables turnover (in days)

8. Debt

Is the company favorably “trading on its equity”? Explain.

early in 2007 daley increased the selling price of one of its products that had a de 563118

Ratios Daley, Inc. is consistently profitable. Daley’s normal financial statement relationships are as follows:

I. Current ratio:

3 to 1

II. Inventory turnover:

4 times

III. Total debt/total assets ratio:

0.5 to 1

In 2007, Daley was involved in the following transactions and events:

1. Daley issued a stock dividend.

2. Daley declared, but did not pay, a cash dividend.

3. Customers returned invoiced goods for which they had not paid.

4. Accounts payable were paid on December 31, 2007.

5. Daley recorded both a receivable from its insurance company and a loss from fire damage to a factory building.

6. Early in 2007, Daley increased the selling price of one of its products that had a demand in excess of capacity. The number of units sold in 2006 and 2007 was the same.

Required

For items 1 through 6, determine whether each 2007 transaction or event increased (I), decreased (D), or had no effect (N) on each of the 2007 ratios.

compute the profit margin before income taxes for divisions b and c and for the othe 563119

Income Statement and Segment Reporting Frahm Corporation presents the following account balances, after adjustments, on December 31, 2007:

Administrative and office salaries

$43,000

Sales salaries and commissions

$59,000

Interest expense

8,800

Property taxes

7,000

Bad debts expense

6,000

Depreciation expense: buildings, sales equipment, and office equipment

31,000

Sales (net)

600,000

Cost of goods sold

323,700

Loss due to tornado (pretax)

12,000

Delivery expense

25,000

Advertising expense

40,000

Interest revenue

3,000

Miscellaneous office expenses

2,300

The following information is also available:

1. The income tax rate on all items is 30%.

2. 10,000 shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year.

3. Frahm Corporation operates several divisions, two of which, Divisions B and C, are considered reportable operating segments.

4. Sales (net) are made as follows: Division B, 60%; Division C, 25%; other divisions, 15% of the total. No intersegment sales are made.

5. The cost of goods sold as a percentage of net sales in each division is as follows: Division B, 55%; Division C, 52%; other divisions, 53%.

6. Operating expenses are traceable to divisions as follows:

a. Sales salaries directly traceable to Division B total $27,000; Division C, $12,000; other divisions, $8,000.

b. Sales commissions in each division are 2% of net sales.

c. Bad debts average 1% of net sales in each division.

d. Of the total delivery expense, 64% was spent in Division B, 20% was spent in Division C, and 16% was spent in the other divisions.

e. Of the total advertising expense, $5,000 was spent on general advertising. Of the remainder, 52% was spent in Division B, 28% in Division C, and 20% in the other divisions.

f. Administrative and office salaries are considered general corporate expenses, except for $17,000 allocated for the management of Division B, $12,000 for the management of Division C, and $10,000 for the management of the other divisions.

g. Property taxes paid are $4,000 in Division B, $2,000 in Division C, and $1,000 in other divisions.

h. Miscellaneous office expenses are not directly traced to divisions.

7. The depreciation expense is listed as a separate component on the corporate income statement. Of the total listed, $6,000 is due to depreciation on the corporate headquarters building and is not allocated. Of the remainder, $15,000 is traceable to Division B, $6,000 is traceable to Division C, and $4,000 is traceable to the other divisions.

8. Interest expense is for corporate bonds used to finance overall operating activities. Interest revenue is from corporate investments in marketable securities.

9. An infrequent and unusual tornado caused a warehouse used in Division B to be severely damaged, resulting in the material pretax loss shown earlier.

10. Of the $1,600,000 total company assets at year end, $910,000 are assets of Division B, $420,000 are assets of Division C, $140,000 are assets of the remaining divisions, and $130,000 are assets related to corporate headquarters.

11. Capital expenditures of Divisions B and C amounted to $50,000 and $27,000, respectively, in 2007 and are included in the total company assets at year end.

Required

1. Prepare a single step 2007 income statement for the Frahm Corporation.

2. Prepare a separate schedule that shows the revenues, profit, and assets of Divisions B and C and the remaining operating divisions.

3. Prepare appropriate segment notes relating to depreciation, profits, and capital expenditures.

4. Compute the profit margin before income taxes for Divisions B and C, and for the other divisions. What do these ratios reveal?

compute the pretax return on identifiable assets for divisions 1 and 2 and for the o 563120

Income Statement and Segment Reporting The following accounts are taken from the December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance of the Reed Company:

Cost of goods sold

$121,120

Loss due to flood (pretax)

$8,000

Interest expense

4,880

Sales (net)

200,000

Depreciation expense

7,000

Administrative expenses

16,000

Selling expenses

26,000

Interest revenue

1,000

Additional information:

1. The company had 5,000 shares of common stock outstanding the entire year.

2. The income tax rate is 30% on all items.

3. The Reed Company operates several divisions, two of which, Divisions 1 and 2, are reportable operating segments.

4. No intersegment sales are made by any division. Of the total sales (net), Division 1 made 49%; Division 2, 30%; and the remaining segments, 21%.

5. Cost of goods sold as a percentage of net sales in each division was: Division 1, 62%; Division 2, 60%; other segments, 58%.

6. Selling expenses consist of sales salaries, sales commissions, delivery costs, advertising, and miscellaneous expenses. These are traceable to the segments as follows:

a. Sales salaries ($6,000): $3,000 to Division 1, $2,000 to Division 2, and $1,000 to the remaining segments.

b. Sales commissions ($4,000): 2% of net sales in all segments.

c. Delivery costs ($5,000): 60% to Division 1, 30% to Division 2, and 10% to the remaining segments.

d. Advertising ($10,500): Of the total, $1,200 was spent on general advertising. The remainder was spent as follows: $4,600 in Division 1, $3,200 in Division 2, and $1,500 in the other segments.

e. The miscellaneous selling expenses of $500 are considered common costs and are not allocated to any segments.

7. Administrative expenses consist of bad debts, administrative salaries, property taxes, and miscellaneous expenses. These are allocable to the segments as follows:

a. Bad debts ($2,000): 1% of net sales in all segments.

b. Administrative salaries ($10,000): Of the total, $2,100 are considered general corporate salaries. The remainder is allocated $3,800 to Division 1, $2,500 to Division 2, and $1,600 to the other segments.

c. Property taxes ($3,000): Of the total, $1,600 are general corporate expenses. Of the remainder, 40% is allocable to Division 1, 35% to Division 2, and 25% to the remaining segments.

d. The miscellaneous administrative expenses of $1,000 are considered common costs and are not allocated to any segments.

8. Depreciation expense is listed as a separate item on the income statement. Of the total, $1,400 is a general corporate expense. Of the remainder, 40% is allocable to Division 1, 30% to Division 2, and 30% to the remaining segments.

9. Interest revenue is from corporate investments in marketable securities. Interest expense is related to corporate bonds used to finance general operating activities.

10. An unusual and infrequent flood causing the material pretax loss occurred in Division 1.

11. Of the $300,000 total assets on December 31, 2007, 45% are assets of Division 1, 29% are assets of Division 2, 18% are assets of the remaining segments, and 8% are assets related to corporate headquarters.

12. Capital expenditures amounted to $25,000 in Division 1 and $6,000 in Division 2 during 2007 and are included in the total assets on December 31, 2007.

Required

1. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement for the Reed Company.

2. Prepare a separate schedule that discloses the revenues, profit, and assets of Divisions 1 and 2, and the remaining operating segments.

3. Prepare appropriate segment notes related to depreciation, profit, and capital expenditures.

4. Compute the pretax return on identifiable assets for Divisions 1 and 2, and for the other divisions. What do these ratios reveal?

the income statement presented at the end of the first quarter of 2007 is as follows 563121

Interim Reporting The Schultz Company prepares interim financial statements at the end of each quarter. The income statement presented at the end of the first quarter of 2007 is as follows:

Sales (net)

$40,000

Cost of goods sold

23,000

Gross profit

$17,000

Operating expenses:

Selling expenses

$8,800

Administrative expenses

4,210

Total operating expenses

13,010

Pretax operating income

$3,990

Other items:

Interest revenue

$40

Rent revenue

300

Interest expense

330

10

Income before income taxes

$4,000

Income tax expense

700

Net income

$3,300

Earnings per share (8,000 shares)

$0.41

Shown next is the Schultz Company trial balance as of June 30, 2007:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$7,200

Accounts receivable (net)

10,300

Note receivable (due 9/1/07)

4,000

Inventory

24,400

Prepaid insurance

960

Property and equipment

80,000

Accumulated depreciation

$20,000

Accounts payable

8,000

Dividends payable

3,200

Unearned rent

1,800

Bonds payable, 10% (due 1/1/2012)

12,000

Discount on bonds payable

600

Common stock, $1 par

8,000

Premium on common stock

34,580

Retained earnings

26,400

Sales (net)

90,000

Cost of goods sold

48,600

Selling expenses

19,750

Administrative expenses

8,170

$203,980

$203,980

Additional information:

1. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.

2. The company uses control accounts for selling and administrative expenses.

3. The company journalizes and posts its adjusting entries to its accounts only at year end.

4. Uncollectible accounts average 0.5% of net sales.

5. The $4,000 note receivable was received on March 1, 2007. The 6 month note carries an annual interest rate of 12%, the interest to be collected at the maturity date.

6. The balance in the Prepaid Insurance account represents payment made on January 1, 2007 for a one year comprehensive insurance policy.

7. The Property and Equipment account consists of land, $5,000; buildings, $55,000; and equipment, $20,000. The buildings are being depreciated over a 25 year life; the equipment over an 8 year life. Straight line depreciation is used; residual value is disregarded. No acquisitions have been made in 2007. The depreciation on the buildings is treated as an administrative expense; depreciation on the equipment as a selling expense.

8. On February 1, 2007, the company rented some floor space to another company, receiving one year’s rent of $1,800 in advance.

9. The bonds pay interest semiannually on January 1 and July 1. Straight line amortization of the discount is recorded at the end of each year.

10. The company estimates that its pretax income for the second half of 2007 will total $11,550. All items in income are subject to the same income tax rate schedule. The income tax rate schedule is 15% on the first $20,000 of taxable income and 30% on the excess. There is no difference between the company’s pretax financial income and taxable income, and no tax credits are available. The company rounds its estimated effective income tax rate to the nearest tenth of a percent. Income taxes will be paid during the first quarter of 2008.

11. On June 29, 2007, the company had declared and recorded (directly in Retained Earnings) a semiannual dividend of 40?per share, payable on August 3, 2007.

12. The 8,000 shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire 6 months of 2007.

Required

1. Prepare a 10 column worksheet to develop the Schultz Company financial statements for the first 6 months of 2007 (refer to Chapter 3 for a worksheet illustration, if necessary).

2. Prepare the income statement for (a) the first 6 months of 2007 and (b) the second quarter of 2007.

3. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the first 6 months of 2007.

4. Prepare the June 30, 2007 balance sheet.

identify the weaknesses in form and content of anderson rsquo s interim report witho 563123

Interim Reporting The Anderson Manufacturing Company, a California corporation listed on the Pacific Coast Stock Exchange, budgeted activities for 2007 as follows:

Amount

Units

Net sales

$6,000,000

1,000,000

Cost of goods sold

3,600,000

1,000,000

Gross margin

$2,400,000

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

1,400,000

Operating earnings

$1,000,000

Non operating revenues and expenses

0

Earnings before income taxes

$1,000,000

Estimated income taxes (current and deferred)

350,000

Net earnings

$650,000

Earnings per share

$6.50

Anderson has operated profitably for many years and has experienced a seasonal pattern of sales volume and production similar to the following forecasted for 2007. Sales volume is expected to follow a quarterly pattern of 10%, 20%, 35%, and 35%, respectively, because of the seasonality of the industry. Also, due to production and storage capacity limitations, it is expected that production will follow a pattern of 20%, 25%, 30%, and 25%, respectively. At the conclusion of the first quarter of 2007, the controller of Anderson has prepared and issued the following interim report for public release:

Amount

Units

Net sales

$600,000

100,000

Cost of goods sold

360,000

100,000

Gross margin

$240,000

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

275,000

Operating loss

$35,000

Loss from warehouse fire

175,000

Loss before income taxes

$210,000

Estimated income taxes

0

Net loss

$210,000

Loss per share of common stock

$2.10

The following additional information is available for the first quarter just completed, but was not included in the public information released:

1. The company uses a standard cost system in which standards are set at currently attainable levels on an annual basis. At the end of the first quarter, there was under applied fixed factory overhead (volume variance) of $50,000 that was treated as an asset at the end of the quarter. Production during the quarter was 200,000 units, of which 100,000 were sold.

2. The selling, general, and administrative expenses were budgeted on a basis of $900,000 fixed expenses for the year plus $0.50 variable expenses per unit of sales.

3. Assume that the warehouse fire loss met the conditions of an extraordinary loss. The warehouse had an undepreciated cost of $320,000; $145,000 was recovered from insurance on the warehouse. No other gains or losses are anticipated this year from similar events or transactions, nor has Anderson had any similar losses in preceding years; thus, the full loss will be deductible as an ordinary loss for income tax purposes.

4. The effective income tax rate, for federal and state taxes combined, is expected to average 35% of earnings before income taxes during 2007. There are no permanent differences between pretax financial income and taxable income.

5. Earnings per share were computed on the basis of 100,000 shares of capital stock outstanding. Anderson has only one class of stock issued, no long term debt outstanding, and no stock option plan.

Required

1. Without reference to the specific situation described previously, what are the standards of disclosure for interim financial data (published interim financial reports) for publicly traded companies? Explain.

2. Identify the weaknesses in form and content of Anderson’s interim report without reference to the additional information.

3. For each of the five items of additional information, indicate the preferable treatment for each item for interim reporting purposes and explain why that treatment is preferable.

horizon rsquo s balance sheets at december 31 2007 and december 31 2006 and statemen 563124

Financial Statement Presentation and Ratios The Horizon Company is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The market value of its common stock was quoted at $18 per share at both December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2006. Horizon’s balance sheets at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2006, and statements of income and retained earnings for the years then ended are as follows:

Balance Sheets

December 31,

2007

2006

Assets

Current assets

Cash

$3,500

$3,600

Marketable securities, at market

13,000

11,000

Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts

105,000

95,000

Inventories at lower of cost or market

126,000

154,000

Prepaid expenses

2,500

2,400

Total current assets

$250,000

$266,000

Property, plant and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation

311,000

308,000

Other assets

29,000

34,000

Total Assets

$590,000

$608,000

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Notes payable

$5,000

$15,000

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

62,500

74,500

Income taxes payable

1,000

1,000

Payments due within one year on long term debt

6,500

7,500

Total current liabilities

$75,000

$98,000

Long term debt

169,000

180,000

Deferred income taxes

74,000

67,000

Other liabilities

9,000

8,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Common stock, par value $1.00 per share;

authorized 20,000 shares; issued

and outstanding 10,000 shares

10,000

10,000

Additional paid in capital

110,000

110,000

Retained earnings

142,000

134,000

Accumulated other comprehensive income

Unrealized increase in value of marketable securities

1,000

1,000

Total stockholders’ equity

263,000

255,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$590,000

$608,000

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

Year Ended December 31,

2007

2006

Net sales

$600,000

$500,000

Costs and expenses

Cost of goods sold

480,000

400,000

Selling, general and administrative expenses

74,200

68,000

Other, net

17,000

6,000

Total costs and expenses

571,200

474,000

Income before income taxes

$28,800

$26,000

2007

2006

Income taxes

8,600

7,800

Net income

$20,200

$18,200

Retained earnings at beginning of period, as previously reported

141,000

132,000

Adjustment required for correction of an error

7,000

6,000

Retained earnings at beginning of period, as restated

$134,000

$126,000

Dividends on common stock

12,200

10,200

Retained earnings at end of period

$142,000

$134,000

Additional facts are as follows:

a. “Selling, general and administrative expenses” for 2007 included a usual but infrequently occurring charge of $9,000.

b. “Other, net” for 2007 included an extraordinary item (charge) of $10,000. If the extraordinary item (charge) had not occurred, income taxes for 2007 would have been $11,600, instead of $8,600.

c. “Adjustment required for correction of an error” was a result of a change from an accounting principle that is not generally accepted to one that is generally accepted.

d. Horizon Company has a simple capital structure and has disclosed earnings per common share for net income in the Notes to the Financial Statements.

Required

1. Determine from the preceding additional facts whether or not the presentation of those facts in the Horizon Company statements of income and retained earnings is appropriate. If the presentation is appropriate, discuss the theoretical rationale for the presentation. If the presentation is not appropriate, describe the appropriate presentation and discuss its theoretical rationale. Do not discuss disclosure requirements for the notes to the financial statements.

2. Describe the general significance of the following financial analysis tools:

(a) quick (acid test) ratio, (b) inventory turnover, and (c) return on stockholders” equity.

3. Based on the Horizon Company balance sheets, statements of income and retained earnings, and additional facts, describe how to determine each of the above financial analysis tools (for the year 2007 only).

as a supporting document for requirements 2 and 3 prepare a separate schedule for fa 563046

Cost of Goods Sold and Income Statement The Fanta Company presents you with the following account balances taken from its December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance:

Inventory, January 1, 2007

$43,000

Selling expenses

35,000

Extraordinary gain (pretax)

23,000

Purchases

100,000

Sales

250,000

General and administrative expenses

22,000

Purchases returns

$3,500

Interest expense

4,000

Sales discounts taken

2,000

Gain on sale of property (pretax)

7,000

Freight in

5,000

Additional data:

1. A physical count reveals an ending inventory of $22,500 on December 31, 2007.

2. Twenty five thousand shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year.

3. The income tax rate is 30% on all items of income.

Required

1. As a supporting document for Requirements 2 and 3, prepare a separate schedule for Fanta Company’s cost of goods sold.

2. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement.

3. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement.

as a supporting document for requirements 2 and 3 prepare a separate schedule for en 563047

Cost of Goods Sold, Income Statement, and Statement of Comprehensive Income The Engle Company lists the following accounts on its adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2007.

Sales

$147,100

Purchases returns

5,200

Gain on sale of equipment (pretax)

3,800

Freight in

3,400

Selling expenses

15,600

Unrealized increase in value of available for sale securities

2,400

Interest revenue

$3,300

Purchases discounts taken

2,700

Inventory, January 1, 2007

12,100

Sales returns

8,100

Purchases

89,700

Administrative expenses

24,200

Extraordinary loss (pretax)

6,500

The following additional information is also available. The December 31, 2007, ending inventory is $14,700. During 2007, 4,200 shares of common stock were outstanding the entire year. The income tax rate is 30% on all items of income.

Required

1. As a supporting document for Requirements 2 and 3, prepare a separate schedule for Engle Company’s cost of goods sold.

2. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement.

3. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement.

4. Prepare a 2007 statement of comprehensive income.

compute the 2007 return on stockholders rsquo equity net income xaverage stockholder 563048

Income Statement and Retained Earnings The Senger Company presents the following partial list of account balances taken from its December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance:

Sales (net)

$124,000

Interest expense

3,700

Cost of goods sold

66,200

Operating expenses

$30,400

Common stock, $5 par

22,000

Retained earnings, 1/1/2007

45,800

The following information is also available for 2007 and is not reflected in the preceding accounts:

1. The common stock has been outstanding all year. A cash dividend of $1.28 per share was declared and paid.

2. Land was sold at a pretax gain of $6,300.

3. Division X (a component of the company) was sold at a pretax gain of $4,700. It had incurred a $9,500 pretax operating loss during 2007.

4. A tornado, which is an unusual and infrequent event in the area, caused a $5,400 pretax loss.

5. The income tax rate on all items of income is 30%.

6. The average stockholders’ equity is $90,000.

Required

1. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement for Senger Company.

2. Prepare a 2007 retained earnings statement.

3. Compute the 2007 return on stockholders’ equity (net income Xaverage stockholders’ equity).

compute the 2007 profit margin net income x net sales 563049

Income Statement and Retained Earnings The Cobler Company uses a periodic inventory system and presents the following partial list of account balances taken from its December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance:

Operating expenses

$35,800

Dividend revenue

1,000

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007

68,700

Sales (net)

139,600

Common stock, $15 par

$45,000

Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2007

24,000

Purchases (net)

79,200

The following information is also available for 2007 and is not reflected in the preceding accounts:

1. The common stock has been outstanding for the entire year. A cash dividend of $0.84 per share was declared and paid.

2. The income tax rate on all items of income is 30%.

3. The ending merchandise inventory is $27,300.

4. A pretax $4,000 loss was recognized on the sale of Division X (a component of the company). This division had earned a pretax operating income of $1,900 during 2007.

5. Damaged inventory was written off at a pretax loss of $6,600.

6. An earthquake, which is an unusual and infrequent event in the area, caused a $3,700 pretax loss.

Required

1. Prepare a cost of goods sold schedule for Cobler Company.

2. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement.

3. Prepare a 2007 retained earnings statement.

4. Compute the 2007 profit margin (net income X net sales).

fill in the blanks labeled a through f all the necessary information is listed 563050

Income Statement Calculations The income statement information for 2007 and 2008 of the Caleb Company (a sole proprietorship) is as follows:

2007

2008

Cost of goods sold

$ (a)

$59,300

Interest expense

600

0

Selling expenses

(b)

10,800

Operating income

21,800

(d)

Sales (net)

96,000

(e)

General expenses

7,900

(f)

Net income

(c)

21,600

Interest revenue

0

600

Gross profit

39,000

40,200

Required

Fill in the blanks labeled (a) through (f). All the necessary information is listed. (Hint: It is not necessary to calculate your answers in alphabetical order.)

fill in the blanks labeled a through g all the necessary information is listed 563051

Income Statement Calculations The income statement information for 2007 and 2008 of the Connor Company (a sole proprietorship) is as follows:

2007

2008

Beginning inventory

$ (a)

$ (d)

Sales

210,000

(e)

Purchases

130,000

140,000

Purchases returns and allowances

7,000

6,000

Ending inventory

62,000

(f)

Sales returns and allowances

4,000

9,000

Gross profit

(b)

100,000

Cost of goods sold

114,000

120,000

Selling expenses

35,000

36,000

Transportation in

2,000

5,000

General and administrative expenses

20,000

(g)

Net income

(c)

43,000

Required

Fill in the blanks labeled (a) through (g). All the necessary information is listed.

prepare the results from discontinued operations section of feiner company rsquo s i 563053

Results of Discontinued Operations On November 30, 2007, Feiner Company announced its plans to discontinue the operations of Division P (a component of the company) by selling the division. On December 31, 2007, Division P had not yet been sold and was classified as held for sale. On this date, Division P had assets with a book value of $920,000 and liabilities with a book value of $610,000. Feiner Company estimates that the fair value of Division P on this date is $190,000. During 2007, Division P earned revenues of $920,000 and incurred expenses of $980,000. Feiner Company is subject to a 30% income tax rate.

Required

Prepare the results from discontinued operations section of Feiner Company’s income statement for 2007. Show supporting calculations.

given the following code letters and components of financial statements indicate whe 563060

Account Classifications Given the following code letters and components of financial statements, indicate where each item would most likely be reported in the financial statements by inserting the corresponding code letters. Assume the monetary amount of each item is material.

Code Letter

Component

A

Sales revenues (net)

B

Cost of goods sold

C

Selling expenses

D

General and administrative expenses

E

Other items

F

Results from discontinued operations

G

Extraordinary items

H

Prior period adjustments

I

Additions to retained earnings (other than H)

J

Deductions from retained earnings (other than H)

K

Notes to financial statements

L

Ending balance sheet

1. Purchases

2. Loss on sale of equipment

3. Utilities expense

4. Cash dividends declared on common stock

5. Bad debts expense

6. Sales salaries

7. Sales discounts taken

8. Transportation in

9. Net income

10. Gain on retirement of long term debt

11. Purchases returns and allowances

12. Premium on bonds payable

13. Gain on sale of land

14. Interest expense

15. Delivery expense

16. Expenses incurred as a result of a strike

17. Summary of accounting policies

18. Gain on disposal of Division J

19. Interest revenue

20. Additional paid in capital on common stock

21. Loss from write down of obsolete inventory

22. Administrative salaries

23. Stock dividends declared on common stock

24. Correction of erroneous understatement of last year’s ending inventory

25. Operating loss related to discontinued Division J

26. Additional depreciation on office equipment resulting from decrease in estimated useful life

27. Gain on sale of factory

28. Loss from frost damage in southern Arizona

29. Sales returns

30. Depreciation expense for office equipment

31. Sales commissions

32. Promotion expense

33. Merchandise inventory (beginning)

complete the lower portion of cameron company rsquo s 2007 income statement beginnin 563061

Income Statement, Lower Portion At the beginning of 2007, the retained earnings of the Cameron Company was $212,000. For 2007, the company has calculated its pretax income from continuing operations to be $120,000. During 2007, the following events also occurred:

1. During July the company sold Division M (a component of the company). It has determined that the pretax income from the operations of Division M during 2007 totals $39,000 and that a pretax loss of $40,500 was incurred on the sale of Division M.

2. The company had 21,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all of 2007. It declared and paid a $1 per share cash dividend on this stock.

3. The company experienced an extraordinary event. It recognized a material pretax gain of $26,000 on the event.

4. The company found and corrected a pretax $18,000 understatement of the 2006 ending inventory because of a mathematical error.

Required

Assuming that all the “pretax” items are subject to a 30% income tax rate:

1. Complete the lower portion of Cameron Company’s 2007 income statement, beginning with “Pretax Income from Continuing Operations.”

2. Prepare an accompanying retained earnings statement.

complete the lower portion of cunningham company rsquo s 2007 income statement begin 563062

Income Statement, Lower Portion Cunningham Company reports a retained earnings balance of $365,200 at the beginning of 2007. For the year ended December 31, 2007, the company reports pretax income from continuing operations of $150,500. The following information is also available pertaining to 2007:

1. The company declared and paid a $0.72 cash dividend per share on the 30,000 shares of common stock that were outstanding the entire year.

2. The company found and corrected a pretax $48,000 understatement of 2006 depreciation expense because of a mathematical error.

3. The company incurred a pretax $21,000 loss as a result of an earthquake, which is unusual and infrequent for the area.

4. The company sold Division P (a component of the company) in May. From January through May, Division P had incurred a pretax loss from operations of $33,000. A pretax gain of $15,000 was recognized on the sale of Division P.

5. Because of additional information, the company determined that the estimated useful life of certain depreciable assets had decreased. As a result, the current depreciation expense included in the 2007 pretax income from continuing operations is $7,000 higher than it would have been had the original estimated useful life been used in the calculations.

Required

Assuming that all the “pretax” items are subject to a 30% income tax rate:

1. Complete the lower portion of Cunningham Company’s 2007 income statement beginning with “Pretax Income from Continuing Operations.” Include any related note to the financial statements.

2. Prepare an accompanying retained earnings statement.

what was houston manufacturing company rsquo s return on stockholders rsquo equity f 563063

Comprehensive: Income Statement and Retained Earnings The Houston Manufacturing Company presents the following partial list of account balances, after adjustments, as of December 31, 2007:

Sales salaries expense

$27,400

Miscellaneous administrative expenses

3,000

Sales returns

5,000

Sales

468,200

Interest revenue

3,200

Office and administrative salaries

30,000

Delivery expenses

11,700

Loss on sale of factory equipment (pretax)

4,100

Cost of goods sold

232,200

Sales personnel travel expenses

$8,300

Property taxes and insurance expense

9,000

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007

200,800

Depreciation expense: sales equipment

9,000

Advertising expense

15,700

Miscellaneous rent revenue

5,900

Common stock, $10 par

200,000

Depreciation expense: buildings and office equipment

14,400

The following information is also available but is not reflected in the preceding accounts:

1. The company sold Division E (a component of the company) on August 1, 2007. During 2007, Division E had incurred a pretax loss from operations of $16,000. However, because the acquiring company could vertically integrate Division E into its facilities, the Houston Manufacturing Company was able to recognize a $42,000 pretax gain on the sale.

2. On January 2, 2007, without warning, a foreign country expropriated a factory of Houston Manufacturing Company, which had been operating in that country. As a result of that expropriation, the company has incurred a pretax loss of $30,000.

3. In preparing its 2007 adjusting entries at year end, the company discovered that it had not recorded $10,100 of depreciation on its office building during 2006. This error did not affect the 2007 depreciation expense.

4. The common stock was outstanding for the entire year. A cash dividend of $1.20 per share was declared and paid in 2007.

5. The 2007 income tax expense totals $28,020 and consists of the following:

Tax expense on income from continuing operations

$32,250

Tax credit on Division E operating loss

4,800

Tax expense on gain from sale of Division E

12,600

Tax credit on loss from expropriation

9,000

Tax credit on 2006 depreciation error

3,030

$28,020

Required

1. As supporting documents for Requirement 2, prepare separate supporting schedules for selling expenses and for general and administrative expenses (include depreciation expense where applicable in these schedules).

2. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement for the Houston Manufacturing Company.

3. Prepare a 2007 retained earnings statement.

4. What was Houston Manufacturing Company’s return on stockholders’ equity for 2007 if its average stockholders’ equity during 2007 was $500,000? What is your evaluation of this return on stockholders’ equity if its “target” for 2007 was 15%?

what was crandle corporation rsquo s profit margin for 2007 what is your evaluation 563064

Comprehensive: Income Statement and Retained Earnings The following selected accounts are taken from the Crandle Corporation’s December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance:

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007

$428,900

Interest expense

4,900

Depreciation expense: sales fixtures

8,500

Sales returns and allowances

11,300

Advertising expense

14,100

Common stock, $10 par

110,000

Administrative and office salaries expense

29,500

Dividend revenue

900

Sales

378,000

Property tax expense

7,700

Gain on sale of sales fixtures (pretax)

5,000

Office supplies expense

$1,800

Transportation out (deliveries)

6,000

Cost of goods sold

191,200

Sales discounts taken

5,200

Bad debt expense

1,900

Sales supplies expense

4,600

Sales salaries expense

16,500

Depreciation expense: buildings and office equipment

10,000

Income tax expense

15,870

In addition to the preceding account balances, you have available the following information:

1. In the middle of December 2007 the company incurred a material $5,500 pretax loss as a result of a freak flood of a river that had never flooded before.

2. While making its December 31, 2007 adjusting entries, the company discovered the following:

a. In recording its December 31, 2006 adjusting entries, it had inadvertently recorded depreciation expense twice for the same asset. The amount of the error was $4,000 pretax and is considered material. The error did not have any effect upon the depreciation recorded for 2007.

b. Based on an analysis of the company’s recent favorable experience with uncollectible accounts receivable, the company decided to reduce the percentage used in computing bad debt expense. The use of the new percentage resulted in the $1,900 bad debt expense being $500 less than the amount that would have been calculated using the old percentage.

3. On April 1, 2007 the company sold Division M (a component of the company), which had been unprofitable for several years. For the first 3 months of 2007, Division M had incurred a pretax operating loss of $8,800. Division M was sold at a pretax loss of $7,500.

4. The company paid cash dividends of $0.90 per share on its common stock. All the stock was outstanding for the entire year.

5. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate. The $15,870 Income Tax Expense account balance consists of $21,210 tax on income from continuing operations and $1,200 tax on the depreciation correction, and tax credits of $2,640 on the operating loss of Division M, $2,250 on the loss from sale of Division M, and $1,650 on the loss because of the flood.

Required

1. As supporting documents for Requirement 2, prepare separate schedules for selling expenses and for general and administrative expenses (include each depreciation expense where applicable in these schedules).

2. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement for the Crandle Corporation. Include any related note to the financial statements.

3. Prepare a 2007 retained earnings statement.

4. What was Crandle Corporation’s profit margin for 2007? What is your evaluation of Crandle’s 2007 profit margin if last year it was 8%?

the company is subject to a 30 income tax rate its income tax expense for 2007 total 563065

Comprehensive: Income Statement and Supporting Schedules The following is a partial list of the account balances, after adjustments, of the Silvoso Company on December 31, 2007:

Depreciation expense: buildings and office equipment $ 14,500

$14,500

Sales commissions and salaries 18,200

18,200

Inventory, January 1, 2007 37,800

37,800

Sales supplies used 5,600

5,600

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007 83,700

83,700

Purchases returns and allowances 6,200

6,200

Bad debts expense 2,700

2,700

Transportation in 13,500

13,500

Sales discounts taken 4,900

4,900

Purchases 173,000

173,000

Delivery expense 7,700

7,700

Office supplies expense

$1,400

Common stock, $10 par

80,000

Loss on sale of office equipment (pretax)

5,000

Insurance and property tax expense

8,500

Sales

340,700

Rent revenue

6,900

Office and administrative salaries expense

32,000

Promotion and advertising expense

17,000

Sales returns and allowances

12,100

Purchases discounts taken

4,100

Depreciation expense: sales equipment

9,600

Interest expense

3,700

The following information is also available:

1. The company declared and paid a $0.60 per share cash dividend on its common stock. The stock was outstanding the entire year.

2. A physical count determined that the December 31, 2007 ending inventory is $34,100.

3. A tornado destroyed a warehouse, resulting in a pretax loss of $12,000. The last tornado in this area had occurred 20 years earlier.

4. While making its December 31, 2007 adjusting entries, the company determined that:

a. In 2006, it had inadvertently omitted $11,000 depreciation expense on its buildings and office equipment. The error did not have any effect upon the depreciation recorded in 2007.

b. Because of recently increased obsolescence, its sales equipment should be depreciated over a shorter useful life. The resulting $2,500 of additional depreciation has been included in the 2007 depreciation expense.

5. On May 1, 2007, the company sold an unprofitable division (R). From January through April, Division R (a component of the company) had incurred a pretax operating loss of $8,700. Division R was sold at a pretax gain of $10,000.

6. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate. Its income tax expense for 2007 totals $930. The breakdown is as follows:

Income Tax Expense (Credit) Related to

Amount

Continuing income

$7,440

Operating loss of Division R

2,610

Gain on sale of Division R

3,000

Loss from tornado

3,600

Error in recording 2006 depreciation expense

3,300

$930

7. The company had average stockholders’ equity of $150,000 during 2007.

Required

1. As supporting documents for Requirement 2, prepare separate supporting schedules for cost of goods sold, selling expenses, general and administrative expenses, and depreciation expense.

2. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement for the Silvoso Company. Include any related note to the financial statements.

3. Prepare a 2007 retained earnings statement.

4. What was Silvoso Company’s return on stockholders’ equity for 2007? What is your evaluation of Silvoso Company’s return on stockholders’ equity if last year it was 10%?

for each item indicate in which section of the income statement or retained earnings 563066

Classification of Unusual and / or Infrequent Items The following is a number of unusual and/or infrequent gains or losses that might be disclosed on the income statement or retained earnings statement. All items are considered to be material in amount.

1. A loss from an earthquake that destroyed a chemical plant of a major chemical company. The region where the plant was destroyed had not had an earthquake in 15 years.

2. A gain resulting from the retirement of bonds payable. The bonds payable had been classified as current liabilities on last year’s ending balance sheet because of their expected retirement during the current year.

3. A reduction in the current depletion expense as a result of the discovery of additional mineral deposits.

4. A gain from the sale of land. The land had been purchased for the construction of a new factory. The company has built several new factories over the past several years, and in each instance has acquired more land than necessary for the factory site. After completion of the factory, the excess land is sold at its appreciated value.

5. A loss incurred by a corporation on the sale of an investment in bonds of a publicly held company. The bonds constitute 5% of the net assets of the publicly held company. The corporation has been holding these bonds as an investment for several years. This is the only investment in securities the corporation has ever made.

6. A loss incurred as a result of an earthquake that destroyed a 2 year old storage facility of a large retail chain. The storage facility is located in California. A major earthquake occurred in the same region 2 years ago, just prior to the construction of the facility.

7. A decrease in previous years’ earnings as a result of a change from the first in, first out inventory method to the average cost inventory method at the beginning of the current year.

8. A loss incurred in the spring by a retail store in a shopping center as a result of a flood of a nearby stream. Although the stream has overflowed several times in the past six years, only 3 stores (out of 38) in the shopping center had previously incurred a significant flood loss.

9. A gain recognized as the result of the sale by a food processing company of a 15% interest in a professional baseball team.

10. A reduction in last year’s income as a result of the discovery in the current year of a miscount (overstatement) of last year’s ending inventory.

11. A loss incurred by a diversified citrus grower because of frost damage in southern California. No frost damage has occurred in the region for seven years, although last year the citrus grower had incurred a loss because of frost damage to its Florida operations.

Required

For each item, indicate in which section of the income statement or retained earnings statement it should be disclosed. Justify your disclosure.

show how division j would be reported on woods company rsquo s december 31 2007 bala 563067

Results of Discontinued Operations On November 1, 2007, Woods Company announced its plans to sell Division J (a component of the company). By December 31, 2007, Woods Company had not sold Division J and so it classifies the division as held for sale. During 2007, Woods Company recorded the following revenues and expenses for Division J and the remainder of the company.

Division J

Remainder of Company

Sales revenues

$170,000

$950,000

Cost of goods sold

119,000

560,000

Operating expenses

42,000

190,000

The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate.

On December 31, 2007, the net book value of Division J is $500,000, consisting of assets of $910,000 and liabilities of $410,000. On this date, Woods Company estimates that the fair value of Division J is $420,000. The company had 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all of 2007.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry on December 31, 2007 to record the pretax loss on held for sale Division J. Show supporting calculations.

2. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement for Woods Company.

3. Show how Division J would be reported on Woods Company’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

what was the amount of selling general and administrative expenses in 2004 of this a 563068

Analyzing Coca Cola’s Income Statement and Cash Flow Statement Disclosures Review the financial statements and notes of the Coca Cola Company in Appendix A.

Required (Note: You do not need to make any calculations).

1. Does the company use a multiple step or a single step format on its income statement? Explain.

2. What was the net income for 2004? What was the basic net income (earnings) per common share for 2004?

3. What was the gross profit for 2004? For 2003?

4. How much interest expense was incurred in 2004? In 2003?

5. What was the amount of the income taxes related to income before income taxes for 2004?

6. What was the amount of selling, general, and administrative expenses in 2004? Of this amount, what was the amount for stock based compensation expense?

7. What amount of dividends on common stock were paid per share and in total in 2004?

8. What were the net operating revenues and gross profit, respectively, for the fourth quarter of 2004?

9. What method was used to determine the net cash provided by operating activities in 2004? What was the amount?

10. What was the net cash used in investing activities in 2004?

11. What was the cash provided by the issuances of debt in 2004?

1 prepare a 2007 income statement for jr company which includes comprehensive income 563069

Net Income and Comprehensive Income At the beginning of 2007, JR Company’s stockholders’ equity was as follows:

Common stock, $5 par

$35,000

Additional paid in capital

49,000

Retained earnings

63,000

During 2007, the following events and transactions occurred:

1. The company earned sales revenues of $108,000. It incurred cost of goods sold of $62,000 and operating expenses of $12,000.

2. The company issued 1,000 shares of its $5 par common stock for $14 per share.

3. The company invested $30,000 in available for sale securities. At the end of the year, the securities had a market value of $35,000.

4. The company paid dividends of $6,000. The income tax rate on all items of income is 30%.

Required

1. Prepare a 2007 income statement for JR Company which includes comprehensive income (ignore earnings per share).

2. Instead, prepare (a) a 2007 income statement (ignore earnings per share), and (b) a 2007 statement of comprehensive income.

3. Instead, prepare (a) a 2007 income statement (ignore earnings per share), and (b) a 2007 statement of changes in stockholders’ equity that includes comprehensive income.

prepare the statement of cash flows of the topps company for 2007 563070

Statement of Cash Flows A list of selected items involving the cash flow activities of the Topps Company for 2007 is presented here:

a. Patent amortization expense, $3,500

b. Machinery was purchased for $39,500

c. At year end, bonds payable with a face value of $20,000 were issued for $17,000

d. Net income, $47,200

e. Dividends paid, $16,000

f. Depreciation expense, $12,900

g. Preferred stock was issued for $13,600

h. Investments were acquired for $21,000

i. Accounts receivable increased by $4,300

j. Land was sold at cost, $11,000

k. Inventories increased by $15,400

l. Accounts payable increased by $2,700

m. Beginning cash balance, $19,400.

Required

Prepare the statement of cash flows of the Topps Company for 2007.

prepare the statement of cash flows of the mueller company for 2007 563071

Statement of Cash Flows The following are several items involving the cash flow activities of the Mueller Company for 2007:

a. Net income, $68,000

b. Increase in accounts receivable, $4,400

c. Receipt from sale of common stock, $12,300

d. Depreciation expense, $11,300

e. Dividends paid, $24,500

f. Payment for purchase of building, $65,000

g. Bond discount amortization, $2,700

h. Receipt from sale of long term investments at cost, $10,600

i. Payment for purchase of equipment, $8,000

j. Receipt from sale of preferred stock, $20,000

k. Increase in income taxes payable, $3,500

l. Payment for purchase of land, $9,700

m. Decrease in accounts payable, $2,900

n. Increase in inventories, $10,300

o. Beginning cash balance, $18,000

Required

Prepare the statement of cash flows of the Mueller Company for 2007.

using the direct method for operating cash flows prepare the trainer company rsquo s 563072

Statement of Cash Flows: Direct Method The following are various cash flows and other information of the Trainer Company for 2007:

a. Payments of interest, $5,000

b. Depreciation expense, $22,700

c. Receipt from sale of land, $3,100

d. Payments of income taxes, $6,200

e. Beginning cash balance, $16,500

f. Decrease in receivables, $7,400

g. Interest and dividends collected, $6,300

h. Payments of dividends, $5,200

i. Decrease in accounts payable, $8,600

j. Payments to suppliers and employees, $50,300

k. Receipt from issuance of common stock, $11,000

l. Collections from customers, $61,700

m. Payment for purchase of investments, $17,800

n. Net income, $73,400

Required

Using the direct method for operating cash flows, prepare the Trainer Company’s 2007 statement of cash flows.

why should wealthy nations be concerned about seeing that poor ones collect their ld 562915

The Shirts off Their Backs

Do accountants share the blame for Third World poverty? A report by the U.K. based Christian Aid says so.31 It attacks accounting firms for helping to perpetuate poverty in the developing

world through their aggressive marketing of tax avoidance schemes: “The tax avoidance industry [including accounting firms] has a very negative impact on developing countries and their ability to raise taxation—which is . . . critical for their escape from poverty.”32

According to the report, the debate over how poor countries fund their escape from poverty has up to this point focused mainly on calls for debt cancellation and increases in aid.33 while these factors are important, they are only pieces in a larger and more complicated

Puzzle. Solving this puzzle involves looking not only at the money that flows into poor countries, but also at money they can’t get their hands on and the money that leaks away.

Taxation is facing a crisis in poorer countries. In the rich world, government revenue from taxation between 1990 and 2000 averaged 30 percent of gross domestic product (GDP). In sub Saharan Africa, the average over the same period was 17.9 percent, in Latin America it was 15.1 percent, and in south Asia it was 10.5 percent. The low tax yield in poorer regions of the world limits the amount of domestically generated resources that are available to governments for essential public services, such as healthcare and education.

To quote the report:

It is not by accident that poor countries have been unable to increase the amount of revenue they raise through taxation. There are three specific tax strategies that have hindered them:

1. Tax competition between countries means poorer nations have been forced to lower corporate tax rates, often dramatically, in order to attract foreign investment.

2. Trade liberalization has deprived poorer countries of taxes on imports. In some cases, these had yielded up to one third of their tax revenue.

3. Tolerance of tax havens has helped wealthy individuals and multinational companies (as well as criminals, corrupt leaders and terrorists) move their wealth and profits offshore to avoid paying taxes.34

Tax havens affect developing countries in a number of ways:

• Secret bank accounts and offshore trusts encourage wealthy individuals and companies to escape paying taxes by providing a place for untaxed earnings and profits to be banked.

• Many multinational corporations launder profits earned in developing countries by importing goods at hugely inflated prices and exporting commodities at a fraction of their true value.35 they do this through paper subsidiaries in tax havens, providing them with a significant tax advantage over their nationally based competitors and fleecing governments of tax revenue.

• Banking secrecy and trust services provided by globalized financial institutions operating offshore provide a secure cover for laundering the proceeds of political corruption, fraud, embezzlement, illicit arms trading, and the global drugs trade.36

Who is to blame for this crisis? The study points the finger at international institutions like the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank, multinational corporations, banks, and accountants.

Accountancy firms . . . are champions of ‘tax planning’ whereby, along with their clients they organize networks of offshore subsidiaries to avoid paying tax. The collapse of

Enron provided a rare insight into precisely how this works. The U.S. Senate report into the Enron case shows how accountants Andersen facilitated Enron’s massive tax avoidance. The company paid no tax at all between 1995 and 1999.37 Tax planning by accountants made this possible and involved setting up a global network of 3,500 companies, more than 440 of which were in the Cayman Islands. The subsequent Sarbanes Oxley legislation in the United States is intended to act as a deterrent, by making directors and shareholders more responsible for the consequences of such strategies. But it does little to lift the veil of secrecy surrounding tax havens.38

Required

1. Why should wealthy nations be concerned about seeing that poor ones collect their “fair share” of taxes?

2. Do you agree that accountants and accounting firms share the blame for perpetuating poverty in the developing world? Why or why not?

3. Is tax planning wrong?

4. Assume that you agree that new policies are needed to improve the ability of Third World countries to increase their tax yields. List policy recommendations that will achieve this result, and explain why you think these policies are needed.

what courses of action would you recommend to resolve the issues you have identified 562916

Muscle Max: Your Very Own Personal Trainer

Muscle Max–Asia, a wholly owned affiliate of a French parent company, functions as a regional headquarters for operating activities in the Pacific Rim. It enjoys great autonomy from its French parent in conducting its primary line of business, the manufacture and sale of Muscle Max, a commercial grade weight lifting machine that can be used in athletic clubs or in the home. Muscle Max–Asia has manufacturing affiliates in Malaysia and Canton (China) and distribution outlets in Australia, Japan, New Zealand, South Korea, and Singapore. It plans to expand its operations to other Pacific Rim countries in the next several years.

Given the demand for weightlifting equipment in Australia, the company’s distribution affiliate there, Muscle Max–Australia, has been importing its equipment from both Canton and

Malaysia, paying a customs duty of 5 percent. Competing suppliers of similar equipment have approached the Australian affiliate for orders. Prices quoted on such machinery have ranged between 650 to 750 Australian dollars (A$). Muscle Max–Australia, which currently retails the machine for A$1,349, recently complained to Muscle Max– Asia because of the differences in the prices it is being charged by its sister affiliates in Canton and Malaysia. Specifically, while the Malaysian affiliate charges a per unit price of A$675, the Canton supplier’s price is 26 percent higher. Muscle Max–Asia explains that the transfer price, based on a cost plus formula (production costs total A$540 per unit), reflects several considerations, including higher margins to compensate for credit risk, operating risk, and taxes. As for taxes, Muscle Max–Asia explains that the People’s Republic of China provides fiscal incentives to enterprises that promote exports. Although normal corporate income tax rates are 33 percent,

Cantonese tax authorities have agreed to a rate of 10 percent on all export related earnings.

The manager of Muscle Max– Australia remains skeptical and believes that he is paying for the Cantonese manager’s inefficiency. In his latest communication, he asks if he can consider alternative suppliers of weight lifting equipment to preserve local market share.

Required

1. What issues does this case raise?

2. What courses of action would you recommend to resolve the issues you have identified?

fill in the blanks lettered a through p all of the necessary information is provided 562992

Balance Sheet Calculations The balance sheet information of the John Company at the end of 2007 and 2008 is as follows:

2007

2008

Long term liabilities

$ (a)

$33,100

Accumulated other comprehensive income

8,000

8,900

Working capital

17,900

19,800

Intangible assets

19,100

18,600

Common stock, $10 par

(b)

(i)

Total stockholders’ equity

(c)

$179,000

Accumulated depreciation

($37,500)

48,600

Total liabilities

51,900

(j)

Current assets

(d)

39,800

Retained earnings

83,300

(k)

Total contributed capital

66,700

(l)

Total assets

(e)

(m)

Additional paid in capital

(f)

(n)

Long term investments

40,100

(o)

Current liabilities

(g)

(p)

Property, plant, and equipment

(h)

180,000

Additional information: At the end of 2007, (a) the amount of long term liabilities is twice the amount of current liabilities, and (b) there are 2,900 shares of common stock outstanding. During 2008, the company (a) issued 100 shares of common stock for $25 per share, (b) earned net income of $20,600, and (c) paid dividends of $1 per share on the common stock outstanding at year end.

Required

Fill in the blanks lettered (a) through (p). All of the necessary information is provided. (Hint: It is not necessary to calculate your answers in alphabetical order.)

prepare a corrected properly classified balance sheet 562993

Erroneous Balance Sheet The Cutler Corporation prepared the following balance sheet:

CUTLER CORPORATION
Balance Report For Year Ended December 31, 2007

Current Assets

Current Liabilities

Cash

$6,300

Accounts payable

$13,000

Accounts receivable

15,900

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

17,100

Inventory, at higher of cost or market (cost $27,200)

28,000

Wages payable

3,000

Long Term Investments

Additional paid in capital on common stock

23,200

Treasury stock (at cost)

1,400

Long Term Liabilities

Investment in D Company bonds (at book value)

7,300

Bonds payable

$46,000

Marketable securities, short term at market value

10,000

Less: Sinking fund to retire bonds

6,000

40,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment

Preferred stock, $50 par

15,000

Land

Premium on preferred stock

5,100

Patents

$8,000

Accumulated depreciation: equipment

7,000

Less: Accumulated amortization

2,800

5,200

Current taxes payable

9,600

Buildings

40,800

Owners’ Equity:

Equipment

19,000

Common stock, $2 par

8,000

Intangibles

Unrealized gain on write up of marketable securities to market value

1,300

Trademarks

5,700

Unrealized gain on write up of marketable securities to market value

800

Other Assets

Retained earnings

16,000

Cash surrender value of life insurance

5,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

700

Discount on bonds payable

3,900

Total Equities

$159,800

Total Assets

$159,800

Required

1. Identify the errors made in the Cutler balance sheet.

2. Prepare a corrected, properly classified balance sheet.

prepare a corrected classified balance sheet as of december 31 2007 this financial s 562994

Complex Balance Sheet Presented below is the unaudited balance sheet as of December 31, 2007, prepared by the bookkeeper of Zues Manufacturing Corporation.

ZUES MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
Balance Sheet For the Year Ended December 31, 2007

Assets

Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

$225,000

Accounts payable

$133,800

Accounts receivable (net)

345,700

Mortgage payable

900,000

Inventories

560,000

Notes payable

500,000

Prepaid income taxes

40,000

Lawsuit liability

80,000

Investments

57,700

Income taxes payable

61,200

Land

450,000

Deferred tax liability

28,000

Building

1,750,000

Accumulated depreciation

420,000

Machinery and equipment

1,964,000

Total Liabilities

$2,123,000

Goodwill

37,000

Common stock, $50 par; 40,000 shares issued

2,231,000

Total Assets

$5,429,400

Retained earnings

1,075,400

Total Stockholders’ Equity

$3,306,400

Total Liabilities and

Stockholders’ Equity

$5,429,400

Your firm has been engaged to perform an audit, during which the following data are found:

1. Checks totaling $14,000 in payment of accounts payable were mailed on December 31, 2007 but were not recorded until 2008. Late in December 2007, the bank returned a customer’s $2,000 check, marked “NSF,” but no entry was made. Cash includes $100,000 restricted for building purposes.

2. Included in accounts receivable is a $30,000 note due on December 31, 2010 from Zues’ president.

3. During 2007, Zues purchased 500 shares of common stock of a major corporation that supplies Zues with raw materials. Total cost of this stock was $51,300, and market value on December 31, 2007 was $47,000. The decline in market value is considered temporary. Zues plans to hold these shares indefinitely.

4. Treasury stock was recorded at cost when Zues purchased 200 of its own shares for $32 per share in May 2007. This amount is included in investments.

5. On December 31, 2007, Zues borrowed $500,000 from a bank in exchange for a 10% note payable, maturing December 31, 2012. Equal principal payments are due December 31 of each year, beginning in 2008. This note is collateralized by a $250,000 tract of land acquired as a potential future building site, which is included in land.

6. The mortgage payable requires $50,000 principal payments, plus interest, at the end of each month. Payments were made on January 31 and February 28, 2008. The balance of this mortgage was due June 30, 2008. On March 1, 2008, prior to issuance of the audited financial statements, Zues consummated a noncancelable agreement with the lender to refinance this mortgage. The new terms require $100,000 annual principal payments, plus interest, on February 28 of each year, beginning in 2009. The final payment is due February 28, 2016.

7. The lawsuit liability will be paid in 2008.

8. Of the total deferred tax liability, $5,000 is considered a current liability.

9. The current income tax expense reported in Zues’ 2007 income statement was $61,200.

10. The company was authorized to issue 100,000 shares of $50 par value common stock.

Required

Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2007. This financial statement should include a proper heading, format, and necessary descriptions.

prepare a statement of changes in stockholders rsquo equity for 2007 include retaine 562995

Changes in Stockholders’ Equity On January 1, 2007 the Knox Company showed the following alphabetical list of stockholders’ equity balances:

Additional paid in capital on common stock

$130,000

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

6,000

Common stock, $10 par

100,000

Preferred stock, $100 par

50,000

Retained earnings

224,000

During 2007, the following events occurred and were properly recorded by the company:

1. The company purchased an investment in available for sale securities. At year end the market value of the securities had increased by $9,000.

2. The company issued 2,000 shares of common stock for $25 per share.

3. The company issued 110 shares of preferred stock for $116 per share.

4. The company reaccquired 400 shares of its common stock as treasury stock at a cost of $26 per share. (Hint: Record the reacquisition cost in a Treasury Stock account.)

5. The company earned net income of $57,000.

6. The company paid a $7 per share dividend on the preferred stock and a $1.25 per share dividend on the common stock outstanding at the end of 2007 (treasury stock is not entitled to dividends).

Required

Prepare a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity for 2007. (Include retained earnings.)

how much was the company contingently liable for guarantees of indebtedness owed by 562996

Analyzing Coca Cola’s Balance Sheet Disclosures Review the financial statements and related notes of the Coca Cola Company in Appendix A.

Required

Answer the following questions. (Note: You do not need to make any calculations. All answers may be found in the financial report.) Indicate on what page of the annual report you located the answer.

1. What was the amount of the current assets on December 31, 2004?

2. What was the amount in the allowance for doubtful accounts on December 31, 2004?

3. What is the par value of the company’s common stock? How many shares had been issued at the end of 2004?

4. What was the total amount of inventories on December 31, 2004? What were the principal categories of inventory on this date?

5. What was the long term debt on December 31, 2004? Of this total, how much was for the 53/4%, U.S. dollar notes due 2011?

6. What was the allowance for depreciation on December 31, 2004? What method does the company use to depreciate its property, plant, and equipment?

7. What was the amount of accounts payable and accrued expenses on December 31, 2004? How much was for accrued marketing expenses?

8. What inventory costing method was used for most inventories in 2004?

9. What was the reinvested (retained) earnings on December 31, 2004?

10. What was the total property, plant, and equipment before and after allowance for depreciation on December 31, 2004?

11. What were the total assets on December 31, 2004?

12. What were the current liabilities on December 31, 2004?

13. What were the number of shares and cost of the treasury stock held by the company on December 31, 2004?

14. What was the amount of marketable securities on December 31, 2004? What was the unrealized gain (loss) on available for sale securities on December 31, 2004?

15. How much was the company contingently liable for guarantees of indebtedness owed by third parties on December 31, 2004?

write a short memo that identifies and briefly explains the valuation methods other 562997

Alternative Valuation Methods A friend of yours who had a bookkeeping course in high school and who is currently a business major says, “I thought that assets were always reported at their historical cost on a company’s balance sheet. Recently, however, I heard several accounting majors discussing ‘alternative valuation methods’ for measuring the value of assets. I know that historical cost is the exchange price paid for an asset, so I cannot understand how there can be any other ‘value’ for the asset.”

Required

Write a short memo that identifies and briefly explains the valuation methods (other than historical cost) that a company could use to measure the value of an asset. For each valuation method, include in your discussion examples of assets whose values are often reported based on the use of that method.

identify and explain potential problems the integrated disclosure system could have 562999

Securities and Exchange Commission Disclosures The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has encouraged managements of public companies to disclose more information in the shareholders’ annual report. As a consequence, a significant amount of the information required in the SEC’s Form 10 K now appears in published annual reports. At the same time, the SEC has made the annual financial reporting process simpler and more efficient by approving an integrated disclosure system.

Required

1. Identify the major classes of information that must be included in both the annual report to shareholders and Form 10 K filed with the SEC.

2. The integrated disclosure system is intended to simplify the annual reporting process with the SEC by expanding the ability to incorporate by reference.

a. Define what is meant by incorporating by reference and identify the documents that are involved when incorporating by reference.

b. Explain how the integrated disclosure system reduces managements’ efforts in filing annual reports with the SEC.

c. Explain the SEC’s principal reasons for making the changes in the annual reporting process.

d. Identify and explain potential problems the integrated disclosure system could have on the annual reporting process from the aspect of users of financial information.

prepare a written response to the president 563000

Asset Valuation It is the end of 2007 and you are an accountant for the Stone Company. During 2007, sales of the company’s products slumped and the company’s earnings are expected to be much less than those of 2006. The president comes to you with an idea. He says, ‘Our company’s property, plant, and equipment cost $300,000, and that is the amount we usually report on our balance sheet. However, I just had these assets appraised by an independent appraiser, and she says they are worth $400,000. I think that the company should report the property, plant, and equipment at this amount on its December 31, 2007 balance sheet, and should report the $100,000 increase in value as a gain on the 2007 income statement. If we use this approach, it will show how much our company is really worth and increase our earnings. This will make our stockholders happy. What do you think?”

Required

Prepare a written response to the president.

explain to your friend how the ldquo values rdquo of the various assets of the corpo 563001

Valuation of Assets and Stock A friend has come to you for advice. He states that he owns several shares of stock in a corporation. He has examined the most recent balance sheet of the corporation and has found that the common stock issued and outstanding totals 40,000 shares, and the market price per share is $25 on the balance sheet date. He is sure that the balance sheet must be in error because, in his words, “the total assets are $1,100,000 and this current value should be the same as the $1,000,000 total value of the outstanding common stock.”

Required

Explain to your friend how the “values” of the various assets of the corporation typically are measured and reported on its balance sheet, and how the “value” of the $1,100,000 total assets is determined. Continue the discussion by explaining to your friend why the “values” of the assets and the stock are not the same.

how does the company account for production costs of print radio television and othe 563003

Analyzing Coca Cola’s Accounting Policies A company must include a summary of its accounting policies in the notes to its financial statements. The Coca Cola Company includes this summary as the first of its notes to the consolidated financial statements shown in Appendix A.

Required

1. Explain what is required to be disclosed about the accounting policies of a company.

2. Review the Coca Cola Company’s note on its accounting policies and answer the following questions:

a. When does the company recognize revenue?

b. What items are classified as cash equivalents?

c. How are inventories valued, and generally what inventory costing method(s) is used?

d. How are property, plant, and equipment stated, and what depreciation method is used?

e. How are trademarks and other intangible assets amortized?

f. How does the company account for production costs of print, radio, television, and other advertisements? What was the amount of advertising and production costs included in prepaid expenses and other assets and noncurrent other assets as of December 31, 2004?

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives prepare a response to jim davenpor 563004

Ethics and Accounts Receivable Adjustment It is February 16, 2008 and you are auditing the Davenport Corporation’s financial statements for 2007 (which will be issued in March, 2008). You read in the newspaper that Travis Corporation, a major customer of Davenport, is in financial difficulty. Included in Davenport’s accounts receivable is $50,000 (a material amount) owed to it by Travis. You approach Jim Davenport, president, with this information and suggest that a reduction of accounts receivable and recognition of a loss for 2007 might be appropriate. Jim replies,

“Why should we make an adjustment? Ted Travis, the president of Travis Corporation, is a friend of mine; he will find a way to pay us, one way or another. Furthermore, this occurred in 2008, so let’s wait and see what happens; we can always make an adjustment later this year. Our 2007 income and year end working capital are not that high; our creditors and stockholders wouldn’t stand for lower amounts than they already are.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, prepare a response to Jim Davenport regarding this issue.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives what do you think of the president 563005

Ethics and Note Due from President You are the accountant for Spaedy Company and are preparing the financial statements for 2007. Near the end of 2007, Spaedy Company loaned its president $100,000 (a material amount) because she was having financial difficulties. The note was properly recorded as a note receivable by Spaedy Company. You are unsure of how to classify this note on the 2007 ending balance sheet and ask the president when the note is due. She replies, “We never really set a due date; I might repay it in 2008 or maybe in a couple of years when I get more financially secure. It would be best to classify this note as a current asset in the usual manner because that will increase our working capital and current ratio, which will make our creditors and stockholders happy.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, what do you think of the president’s suggestion?

research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short me 563006

Researching GAAP Situation You are the assistant accountant for Tyler Corporation. It is mid January, 2008 and you are helping to prepare the Tyler Corporation’s balance sheet for December 31, 2007. Tyler will publish this balance sheet on March 1, 2008, after the auditors have completed their work. Tyler has a $100,000 note payable that was issued in 2006 and that is due March 6, 2008. On January 5, 2008, Tyler sold 2,000 shares of its $10 par common stock for $80,000. Its intent is to use these proceeds (plus $20,000 cash it already has on hand) to repay the note payable on March 6. The head accountant says ‘I’m not sure how to classify the $100,000 note payable on the December 31, 2007 balance sheet. Check this out for me.”

Directions

Research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo to the head accountant that explains how Tyler Corporation should report the $100,000 note payable on its December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

assuming a 30 income tax rate on all items of income prepare a 2007 income statement 563040

Simple Income Statement The following are selected accounts taken from the adjusted trial balance of the Dibb Company on December 31, 2007:

Loss on sale of land

$5,000

Sales (net)

$198,000

Cost of goods sold

130,000

Operating expenses

45,000

Extraordinary gain (pretax)

6,000

Twelve thousand shares of common stock were outstanding the entire year.

Required

Assuming a 30% income tax rate on all items of income, prepare a 2007 income statement for Dibb Company using (1) a multiple step format and (2) a single step format.

assuming a 30 income tax rate on all items of income prepare a 2007 income statement 563041

Simple Income Statement The following are selected account balances of the Albertson Company as of December 31, 2007:

Purchases (net)

$63,000

Sales (net)

$100,000

Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2007

20,000

Operating expenses

22,000

Gain on sale of equipment

5,000

Extraordinary loss (pretax)

8,000

The merchandise inventory on December 31, 2007 is $31,000. Ten thousand shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year. The company uses a periodic inventory system.

Required

Assuming a 30% income tax rate on all items of income, prepare a 2007 income statement for Albertson Company using (1) a multiple step format, and (2) a single step format.

where would each of the following items most likely be reported in a company rsquo s 563042

Classifications Where would each of the following items most likely be reported in a company’s financial statements? Assume the monetary amount of each item is material.

1. Bad debts expense

2. Sales discounts taken

3. Depreciation expense on sales equipment

4. Loss from operations of discontinued Division B

5. Earnings per share

6. Gain on sale of land

7. Administrative salaries

8. Cash dividends declared on common stock

9. Correction of an error made in a prior period.

10. Gain from sale of discontinued Division B

11. Cumulative effect on prior years’ income of change in accounting principle

12. Advertising expense

13. Merchandise inventory (ending)

14. Loss from write off of obsolete inventory

15. Net income

16. Unrealized increase in market value of available for sale securities

prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement 563044

Multiple Step and Single Step Income Statements Included in the December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance of the Gold Company are the following accounts:

Cost of goods sold

$101,000

Sales

200,000

General and administrative expenses

20,000

Loss from strike (pretax)

9,000

Selling expenses

$28,000

Sales returns and allowances

5,000

Interest revenue

4,000

Extraordinary loss (pretax)

17,000

Additional data:

1. Seven thousand shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year.

2. The income tax rate is 30% on all items of income.

Required

1. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement.

2. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement.

seven thousand shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year 563045

Multiple Step and Single Step Income Statements, and Statement of Comprehensive Income On December 31, 2007 the Adandt Company listed the following items in its adjusted trial balance:

Extraordinary loss (pretax)

$8,000

Interest revenue

2,500

Sales returns and allowances

3,000

Selling expenses

14,000

Cost of goods sold

95,000

Loss on sale of equipment (pretax)

$2,000

General and administrative expenses

17,000

Sales

163,000

Unrealized decrease in value of available for sale securities

1,800

Additional data:

1. Seven thousand shares of common stock have been outstanding the entire year.

2. The income tax rate is 30% on all items of income.

Required

1. Prepare a 2007 multiple step income statement.

2. Prepare a 2007 single step income statement.

3. Prepare a 2007 statement of comprehensive income.

will it increase shareholder wealth discuss the advantages and disadvantages involve 562822

Dividend Reinvestment Plans

The DRK Corporation has recently developed a dividend reinvestment plan, or DRIP. The plan allows investors to reinvest cash dividends automatically in DRK in exchange for new shares of stock. Over time, investors in DRK will be able to build their holdings by reinvesting dividends to purchase additional shares of the company. Over 1,000 companies offer dividend reinvestment plans. Most companies with DRIPs charge no brokerage or service fees. In fact, the shares of DRK will be purchased at a 10 percent discount from the market price. A consultant for DRK estimates that about 75 percent of DRK’s shareholders will take part in this plan. This is somewhat higher than the average. Evaluate DRK’s dividend reinvestment plan. Will it increase shareholder wealth? Discuss the advantages and disadvantages involved here.

if octagon stock currently sells for 20 per share and a 10 percent stock dividend is 562826

Stock Dividends

The owners’ equity accounts for Octagon International are shown here:

Common stock ($1 par value)

$ 10,000

Capital surplus

150,000

Retained earnings

552,500

Total owners’ equity

$712,500

a. If Octagon stock currently sells for $20 per share and a 10 percent stock dividend is declared, how many new shares will be distributed? Show how the equity accounts would change.

b. If Octagon declared a 25 percent stock dividend, how would the accounts change?

ignoring any tax effects what is the stock selling for today what will it sell for t 562829

Regular Dividends

The balance sheet for Apple Pie Corp. is shown here in market value terms. There are 4,000 shares of stock outstanding.

Market Value Balance Sheet

Cash

$ 15,000

Equity

$150,000

Fixed assets

135,000

Total

$150,000

Total

$150,000

The company has declared a dividend of $1.25 per share. The stock goes ex dividend tomorrow. Ignoring any tax effects, what is the stock selling for today? What will it sell for tomorrow? What will the balance sheet look like after the dividends are paid?

what does this problem tell you about real world tax considerations and the dividend 562842

Dividends and Taxes

As discussed in the text, in the absence of market imperfections and tax effects, we would expect the share price to decline by the amount of the dividend payment when the stock goes ex dividend. Once we consider the role of taxes, however, this is not necessarily true. One model has been proposed that incorporates tax effects into determining the ex dividend price

(P0 PX)/D=(1 TP)/(1 TG)

where P0 is the price just before the stock goes ex, PX is the ex dividend share price, D is the amount of the dividend per share, TP is the relevant marginal personal tax rate, and TG is the effective marginal tax rate on capital gains.

a. If TP =TG =0, how much will the share price fall when the stock goes ex?

b. If TP=28 percent and TG =0, how much will the share price fall?

c. If TP =35 percent and TG =28 percent, how much will the share price fall?

d. Suppose the only owners of stock are corporations. Recall that corporations get at least a 70 percent exemption from taxation on the dividend income they receive, but they do not get such an exemption on capital gains. If the corporation”s income and capital gains tax rates are both 35 percent, what does this model predict the ex dividend share price will be?

e. What does this problem tell you about real world tax considerations and the dividend policy of the firm?

discuss how the reinsurance contract should be accounted for in the financial statem 562642

Facts

Entity A has a reinsurance contract that has these elements to it: A policyholder under a insurance contract pays premiums of $200 every year for 10 years. The entity sets up an experience account equal to 80% of the cumulative premiums less 80% of the cumulative claims under the policy. If the balance in the experience account ever becomes negative, the policyholder has to pay an additional premium based on the balance on the experience account divided by the number of years the policy has left to run. At the end of the contract, if the balance on the experience account is positive, it is refunded to the policyholder. If the balance is negative, the policyholder has to pay the amount as an additional premium. The policy is not able to be cancelled before the end of the contract, and the maximum loss that the policyholder is required to pay in any year is $300.

Required

Discuss how the reinsurance contract should be accounted for in the financial statements of the insurer.

entity a writes a single policy for a 1 000 premium and expects claims to be made of 562643

Facts

Entity A writes a single policy for a $1,000 premium and expects claims to be made of $600 in year 4.

At the time of writing the policy, there are commission costs paid of $200. Assume a discount rate of 3% risk free. The entity says that if a provision for risk and uncertainty were to be made, it would amount to $250, and that this risk would expire evenly over years 2, 3, and 4. Under existing policies, the entity would spread the net premiums, the claims expense, and the commissioning costs over the first two years of the policy. Investment returns in years 1 and 2 are $20 and $40 respectively.

Required

Show the treatment of this policy using a deferral and matching approach in years 1 and 2 that would be acceptable under IFRS 4. How would the treatment differ if a “fair value” approach were used?

how will the piece of equipment and the closure of the manufacturing units be treate 562655

Facts

An entity is reorganizing its business activities. In one location, it is stopping the usage of certain equipment because the demand for the product produced by that equipment has reduced significantly.

The equipment is to be maintained in good working order, and it is expected that it will be brought back into use if the demand increases. Additionally, the entity intends to close three out of five manufacturing units. The manufacturing units constitute a major activity of the entity. All the work within the three units will end during the current year, and as of the year end all work will have ceased.

Required

How will the piece of equipment and the closure of the manufacturing units be treated in the financial statements for the current year?

discuss the treatment of the above elements in the financial statements as of july 3 562656

Facts

Lynch, a parent entity, approved on June 30, 20X5, a plan to sell its subsidiary, Pin. The sale is expected to be completed on September 1, 20X5. The year end of Lynch is July 31, 20X5, and the financial statements were approved on August 16, 20X5. The subsidiary had net assets of $15 million (including goodwill of $2 million) at carrying value at year end. Pin made a loss of $3 million from August 1 to August 16, 20X5, and is expected to make a further loss of $2 million up to the date of sale. At the date of approval of the financial statements, Lynch was in negotiation for the sale of Pin, but no contract had been signed. Lynch expects to sell Pin for $9 million and to incur costs of selling of $1 million. The value in use of Pin at August 16, 20X5, was estimated at $8 million.

Lynch had approved the relocation of the administrative headquarters of the group. Lynch does not intend to sell the property until it has renovated it. The renovations were completed on June 30, 20X5. However, on July 30, 20X5, environmental contamination was found within the headquarters that necessitated the transfer of the staff to temporary premises. The hazard was removed at a cost of $50,000 and the building declared safe on November 1, 20X5. At July 31, 20X5, the carrying value of the building was $3 million and its market value (assuming no contamination) was $4 million before estimated selling costs of $500,000.

The administrative headquarters were moved on December 1, 20X5, and the property was offered for sale at a price of $4 million. The market for such property was in decline, and a buyer had not been found by July 31, 20X6. The market price at that date was around $3.5 million, but the entity refused to reduce the sale price of the property. On September 1, 20X6, a bid of $3.3 million was accepted for the property and costs of $600,000 were incurred in its sale. The carrying value of the property at cost was $2.8 million as of July 31, 20X6. Lynch also has equipment that it recently had leased to third parties. At July 31, 20X5, there was $5 million (carrying value) of this equipment, and at July 31, 20X6, there was an additional $8 million (carrying value) of this equipment. The leases had expired at the respective dates but no decision had been made as to whether to refurbish and sell the equipment or to abandon it. The entity subsequently refurbished both sets of equipment and sold them on December 1, 20X5, for $10 million and on December 15, 20X6, for $16 million. The refurbishment costs were $2 million and $3 million respectively for the two sets of assets.

Required

Discuss the treatment of the above elements in the financial statements as of July 31, 20X5, and July 31, 20X6.

describe how the disposal group would be shown in the financial statements for the y 562657

Facts

Z plans to dispose of a group of net assets that form a disposal group. The net assets at December 31, 20X5, are

Carrying value at

December 31, 20X5

$m

Goodwill

6

Property, plant, and equipment

18

Inventory

10

Financial assets (profit of $2 million recognized in equity)

7

Financial liabilities

(4)

On moving to accounting under IFRS, some of the assets had been transferred at deemed cost and had not been remeasured under IFRS. These assets were property, plant, and equipment, and inventory. Under IFRS, property, plant, and equipment would be stated at $16 million and inventory stated at $9 million.

The fair value less costs to sell of the disposal group is $25 million. Assume that the disposal group qualifies as held for sale. Therefore, under IAS 36, any impairment loss will be allocated to goodwill and PPE.

Required

Describe how the disposal group would be shown in the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X5.

how would the reduction in the value of the assets on classification as held for sal 562661

An entity is planning to dispose of a collection of assets. The entity designates these assets as a disposal group, and the carrying amount of these assets immediately before classification as held for sale was $20 million. Upon being classified as held for sale, the assets were revalued to $18 million. The entity feels that the fair value less cost to sell would be $17 million. How would the reduction in the value of the assets on classification as held for sale be treated in the financial statements?

(a) The entity recognizes a loss of $2 million immediately before classification as held for sale and then recognizes an impairment loss of $1 million.

(b) The entity recognizes an impairment loss of $3 million.

(c) The entity recognizes an impairment loss of $2 million.

(d) The entity recognizes a loss of $3 million immediately before classifying the disposal group as held for sale.

an entity has an asset that was classified as held for sale however the criteria for 562665

An entity has an asset that was classified as held for sale. However, the criteria for it to remain as held for sale no longer apply. The entity should therefore

(a) Leave the noncurrent asset in the financial statements at its current carrying value.

(b) Remeasure the noncurrent asset at fair value.

(c) Measure the noncurrent asset at the lower of its carrying amount before the asset was classified as held for sale (as adjusted for subsequent depreciation, amortization, or revaluations) and its recoverable amount at the date of the decision not to sell.

(d) Recognize the noncurrent asset at its carrying amount prior to its classification as held for sale as adjusted for subsequent depreciation, amortization, or revaluations.

is an entity ever required or permitted to change its accounting policy for explorat 562671

Is an entity ever required or permitted to change its accounting policy for exploration and evaluation expenditures?

(a) Yes, entities are required to change their accounting policy for these expenditures if the change would result in more useful information for users of financial statements.

(b) Yes, entities are free to change accounting policy for these expenditures as long as the selected policy results in information that is relevant and reliable.

(c) Yes, but only if the change makes the financial statements more relevant to the economic decision making needs of users and no less reliable, or more reliable and no less relevant to those needs.

(d) No, entities would be permitted to change accounting policy only on adoption of a new or revised Standard that replaces the existing requirements in IFRS 6.

which of the following facts or circumstances would not trigger a need to test an ev 562674

Which of the following facts or circumstances would not trigger a need to test an evaluation and exploration asset for impairment?

(a) The expiration—or expected expiration in the near future—of the period for which the entity has the right to explore in the specific area, unless the right is expected to be renewed.

(b) The absence of budgeted or planned substantive expenditure on further exploration and evaluation activities in the specific area.

(c) A decision to discontinue exploration and evaluation activities in the specific area when those activities have not led to the discovery of commercially viable quantities of mineral resources.

(d) Lack of sufficient data to determine whether the carrying amount of the exploration and evaluation asset is likely to be recovered in full from successful development or by sale.

how should the price of a stock change when it goes ex dividend 562806

“Ex” Marks the Day

The board of directors of Divided Airlines has declared a dividend of $2.50 per share payable on Tuesday, May 30, to shareholders of record as of Tuesday, May 9. Cal Icon buys 100 shares of Divided on Tuesday, May 2, for $150 per share. What is the ex date? Describe the events that will occur with regard to the cash dividend and the stock price. The ex date is two business days before the date of record, Tuesday, May 9, so the stock will go ex on Friday, May 5. Cal buys the stock on Tuesday, May 2, so Cal purchases the stock cum dividend. In other words, Cal will get $2.50 ×100 =$250 in dividends. The check will be mailed on Tuesday, May 30. Just before the stock does go ex on Friday, its value will drop overnight by about $2.50 per share.

As a more concrete example, in the first quarter of 2001, McGraw Hill, which we feel compelled to note is a very fine company,1 boosted its dividend by 4.3 percent. In fact, dividends have been paid by the company since 1937 and have increased without fail since 1974, growing at a compound rate of 10.9 percent over the following 27 year period. The dividend record date was February 26, with payment to be made on March 12. The new quarterly dividend was $.245 a share. The record date was February 26, a Monday, so the ex date was Thursday, the 22nd.

When the market opened, McGraw Hill’s stock price dropped by $0.11, or only about half of the dividend. However, the market was very active that day, so the dividend wasn’t the only influence on the price. On May 24, the ex date of McGraw Hill’s next dividend, the stock dropped by $0.25 at the opening, exactly the amount of the dividend.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a What are the different types of cash dividends?

b What are the mechanics of the cash dividend payment?

c How should the price of a stock change when it goes ex dividend?

however we have ignored several real world factors that might lead us to change our 562807

A Test

Our discussion to this point can be summarized by considering the following true false test questions:

1. True or false: Dividends are irrelevant.

2. True or false: Dividend policy is irrelevant.

The first statement is surely false, and the reason follows from common sense. Clearly, investors prefer higher dividends to lower dividends at any single date if the dividend level is held constant at every other date. To be more precise regarding the first question, if the dividend per share at a given date is raised while the dividend per share at every other date is held constant, the stock price will rise. The reason is that the present value of the future dividends must go up if this occurs. This action can be accomplished by management decisions that improve productivity, increase tax savings, strengthen product marketing, or otherwise improve cash flow. The second statement is true, at least in the simple case we have been examining. Dividend policy by itself cannot raise the dividend at one date while keeping it the same at all other dates. Rather, dividend policy merely establishes the trade off between dividends at one date and dividends at another date. Once we allow for time value, the present value of the dividend stream is unchanged. Thus, in this simple world, dividend policy does not matter, because managers choosing either to raise or to lower the current dividend do not affect the current value of their firm. However, we have ignored several real world factors that might lead us to change our minds; we pursue some of these in subsequent sections.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a How can an investor create a homemade dividend?

b Are dividends irrelevant?

what is a dividend clientele all things considered would you expect a risky firm wit 562810

The Clientele Effect

In our earlier discussion, we saw that some groups (wealthy individuals, for example) have an incentive to pursue low payout (or zero payout) stocks. Other groups (corporations, for example) have an incentive to pursue high payout stocks. Companies with high payouts will thus attract one group, and low payout companies will attract another. These different groups are called clienteles, and what we have described is a clientele effect. The clientele effect argument states that different groups of investors desire different levels of dividends. When a firm chooses a particular dividend policy, the only effect is to attract a particular clientele. If a firm changes its dividend policy, then it just attracts a different clientele.

What we are left with is a simple supply and demand argument. Suppose 40 percent of all investors prefer high dividends, but only 20 percent of the firms pay high dividends. Here the high dividend firms will be in short supply; thus, their stock prices will rise. Consequently, low dividend firms will find it advantageous to switch policies until 40 percent of all firms have high payouts. At this point, the dividend market is in equilibrium. Further changes in dividend policy are pointless because all of the clienteles are satisfied. The dividend policy for any individual firm is now irrelevant.

To see if you understand the clientele effect, consider the following statement: In spite of the theoretical argument that dividend policy is irrelevant or that firms should not pay dividends, many investors like high dividends; because of this fact, a firm can boost its share price by having a higher dividend payout ratio. True or false? The answer is “false” if clienteles exist. As long as enough high dividend firms satisfy the dividend loving investors, a firm won’t be able to boost its share price by paying high dividends. An unsatisfied clientele must exist for this to happen, and there is no evidence that this is the case.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a How does the market react to unexpected dividend changes? What does this tell us about dividends? About dividend policy?

b What is a dividend clientele? All things considered, would you expect a risky firm with significant but highly uncertain growth prospects to have a low or high dividend payout?

what is the chief drawback to a strict residual policy what do many firms do in prac 562811

A Compromise Dividend Policy

In practice, many firms appear to follow what amounts to a compromise dividend policy. Such a policy is based on five main goals:

1. Avoid cutting back on positive NPV projects to pay a dividend.

2. Avoid dividend cuts.

3. Avoid the need to sell equity.

4. Maintain a target debt equity ratio.

5. Maintain a target dividend payout ratio.

These goals are ranked more or less in order of their importance. In our strict residual approach, we assume that the firm maintains a fixed debt equity ratio. Under the compromise approach, the debt equity ratio is viewed as a long range goal. It is allowed to vary in the short run if necessary to avoid a dividend cut or the need to sell new equity. In addition to having a strong reluctance to cut dividends, financial managers tend to think of dividend payments in terms of a proportion of income, and they also tend to think investors are entitled to a “fair” share of corporate income. This share is the long run target payout ratio, and it is the fraction of the earnings the firm expects to pay as dividends under ordinary circumstances. Again, this ratio is viewed as a long range goal, so it might vary in the short run if this is necessary. As a result, in the long run, earnings growth is followed by dividend increases, but only with a lag. One can minimize the problems of dividend instability by creating two types of dividends: regular and extra. For companies using this approach, the regular dividend would most likely be a relatively small fraction of permanent earnings, so that it could be sustained easily. Extra dividends would be granted when an increase in earnings was expected to be temporary. Because investors look on an extra dividend as a bonus, there is relatively little disappointment when an extra dividend is not repeated. Although the extra dividend approach appears quite sensible, few companies use it in practice. One reason is that a share repurchase, which we discuss next, does much the same thing with some extra advantages.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a What is a residual dividend policy?

b What is the chief drawback to a strict residual policy? What do many firms do in practice?

why might a stock repurchase make more sense than an extra cash dividend 562812

You may read in the popular financial press that a share repurchase is beneficial because it causes earnings per share to increase. As we have seen, this will happen. The reason is simply that a share repurchase reduces the number of outstanding shares, but it has no effect on total earnings. As a result, EPS rises.

However, the financial press may place undue emphasis on EPS figures in a repurchase agreement. In our preceding example, we saw that the value of the stock wasn’t affected by the EPS change. In fact, the price earnings ratio was exactly the same when we compared a cash dividend to a repurchase.

Because the increase in earnings per share is exactly tracked by the increase in the price per share, there is no net effect. Put another way, the increase in EPS is just an accounting adjustment that reflects (correctly) the change in the number of shares outstanding.

In the real world, to the extent that repurchases benefit the firm, we would argue that they do so primarily because of the tax considerations we discussed before.

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a Why might a stock repurchase make more sense than an extra cash dividend?

b Why don’t all firms use stock repurchases instead of cash dividends?

how does the accounting treatment of a stock split differ from that used with a smal 562813

Reverse Splits

A less frequently encountered financial maneuver is the reverse split. In 1999, for example, 79 Nasdaq firms executed reverse splits. In 2000, only 36 did. Reverse splits generally range from 1 for 2 to 1 for 10. In a one for three reverse split, each investor exchanges three old shares for one new share. The par value is tripled in the process.

As with stock splits and stock dividends, a case can be made that a reverse split has no real effect. Given real world imperfections, three related reasons are cited for reverse splits. First, transaction costs to shareholders may be less after the reverse split. Second, the liquidity and marketability of a company’s stock might be improved when its price is raised to the popular trading range. Third, stocks selling at prices below a certain level are not considered respectable, meaning that investors underestimate these firms’ earnings, cash flow, growth, and stability. Some financial analysts argue that a reverse split can achieve instant respectability. As was the case with stock splits, none of these reasons is particularly compelling, especially not the third one.

There are two other reasons for reverse splits. First, stock exchanges have minimum price per share requirements. A reverse split may bring the stock price up to such a minimum. In 2001, this motive became an increasingly important one. By July of 2001, 86 companies had asked their shareholders to approve reverse splits. The most common reason is that Nasdaq delists companies whose stock price drops below $1 per share for 30 days. A large number of companies, particularly Internet related technology companies, found themselves in danger of being delisted and used reverse splits to boost their stock prices. Second, companies sometimes perform reverse splits and, at the same time, buy out any stockholders who end up with less than a certain number of shares. For example, after it was spun off from AT&T, NCR had 600,000 stockholders (out of 1 million total) with fewer than 10 shares. In early 1999, NCR planned a 1 for 10 reverse split, followed by a cash purchase of all holdings of less than one share, to buy out these small stockholders and save millions in mailing and other costs. What made the proposal especially imaginative was that exactly 1 minute after the reverse split, NCR proposed to do a 10 for 1 split to restore the stock to its original cost!

CONCEPT QUESTIONS

a What is the effect of a stock split on stockholder wealth?

b How does the accounting treatment of a stock split differ from that used with a small stock dividend?

what is the maximum amount of capital spending possible without selling new equity s 562814

Residual Dividend Policy

The Re a data Corporation practices a strict residual dividend policy and maintains a capital structure of 60 percent debt, 40 percent equity. Earnings for the year are $5,000. What is the maximum amount of capital spending possible without selling new equity? Suppose that planned investment outlays for the coming year are $12,000. Will Re a data be paying a dividend? If so, how much?

Market Value Balance Sheet

before paying out excess cash)

Excess cash

$ 500

Debt

$ 500

Other assets

2,500

Equity

2,500

Total

$3,000

Total

$3,000

Evaluate the two alternatives in terms of the effect on the price per share of the stock, the EPS, and the PE ratio.

fill in the blanks labeled a through l all the necessary information is provided 562597

Balance Sheet Calculations The balance sheet information at the end of 2007 and 2008 for the Dawson Company is as follows:

2007

2008

Current assets

$ (a)

$25,000

Long term liabilities

(b)

34,900

Total contributed capital

(c)

(g)

Long term investments

19,200

(h)

Retained earnings

50,000

60,000

Total liabilities

(d)

(i)

Intangible assets

10,400

9,200

Current liabilities

14,500

12,300

Capital stock, $5 par

(e)

20,000

Total assets

142,200

(j)

Additional paid in capital

15,000

(k)

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

85,700

92,800

Accumulated other comprehensive income

6,900

7,000

Total stockholders’ equity

(f)

(l)

Additional information: The company did not issue any common stock during 2008.

Required

Fill in the blanks labeled (a) through (l). All the necessary information is provided. (Hint: It is not necessary to calculate your answers in alphabetical order.)

additional information at the end of 2007 additional paid in capital is twice the am 562598

Balance Sheet Calculations The balance sheet information of the Fermer Company at the end of 2007 and 2008 is as follows:

2007

2008

Total stockholders’ equity

($1)

$100,700

Accumulated other comprehensive income

4,800

5,000

Current liabilities

2

9,800

Intangible assets

12,600

12,000

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

3

87,500

Current assets

19,100

8

Total contributed capital

51,000

9

Long term liabilities

4

30,200

Retained earnings

40,900

10

Total assets

5

11

Common stock, $10 par

6

12

Working capital

9,900

10,200

Additional paid in capital

7

36,000

Long term investments

23,700

13

Total liabilities

38,100

14

Additional information: At the end of 2007, additional paid in capital is twice the amount of capital stock. In 2008, the company issued (sold) 100 shares of common stock.

Required

Fill in the blanks numbered (1) through (14). All the necessary information is provided. (Hint: It is not necessary to calculate your answers in numerical order.)

you determine that the account balances listed on the balance sheet are correct but 562599

Correction of Balance Sheet On December 31, 2007, the Stevens Company bookkeeper prepared the following erroneously classified balance sheet:

STEVENS COMPANY
Balance Sheet
For Year Ended December 31, 2007

Current Assets

Current Liabilities

Inventory

$6,000

Accounts payable

$9,900

Accounts receivable

5,900

Allowance for doubtful accounts

800

Cash

2,300

Salaries payable

1,500

Treasury stock (at cost)

3,300

Taxes payable

2,500

Long Term Investments

Long Term Liabilities

Temporary investments in marketable

Bonds payable (due 2014)

11,000

securities

3,200

Unearned rent (for 3 months)

900

Investment in held to maturity bonds

10,000

Plant and Equipment

Land

8,100

Office supplies

800

Owners’ Equity

Buildings and equipment

35,600

Retained earnings

24,200

Intangibles

Accumulated depreciation on buildings and equipment

9,200

Patents (net)

5,000

Premium on common stock

10,400

Prepaid insurance (for 6 months)

1,200

Common stock, $10 par

12,000

Discount on bonds payable

1,000

Total Assets

$82,400

Total Credits

$82,400

Required

You determine that the account balances listed on the balance sheet are correct but, in certain cases, incorrectly classified. Prepare a properly classified balance sheet for the Stevens Company as of December 31, 2007.

prepare a statement of changes in stockholders rsquo equity of the powder company fo 562600

Changes in Stockholders’ Equity On January 1, 2007 the Powder Company listed the following stockholders’ equity section of its balance sheet:

Contributed Capital

Preferred stock, $100 par

$92,800

Common stock, $5 par

37,400

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

21,500

Additional paid in capital on common stock

58,700

Total contributed capital

$210,400

Retained Earnings

185,700

Total Stockholders’ Equity

$396,100

During 2007, the following transactions and events occurred and were properly recorded:

1. The company issued 1,800 shares of common stock at $13 per share.

2. The company issued 340 shares of preferred stock at $130 per share.

3. The company earned net income of $38,950.

4. The company paid a $7 per share dividend on the preferred stock and a $1 per share dividend on the common stock outstanding at the end of 2007.

Required

Prepare a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity of the Powder Company for 2007. (Include retained earnings.)

prepare a statement of changes in stockholders rsquo equity of the osborne company f 562601

Changes in Stockholders’ Equity On January 1, 2007 the Osborne Company reported the following alphabetical list of stockholders’ equity items:

Additional paid in capital on common stock

$170,000

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

12,000

Common stock, $2 par

80,000

Preferred stock, $100 par

60,000

Retained earnings

209,000

During 2007, the company sold 3,000 shares of common stock for $10 per share and 500 shares of preferred stock for $125 per share. It also earned income of $99,000 and paid dividends of $8 per share on the preferred stock and $1.50 per share on the common stock outstanding at the end of 2007.

Required

Prepare a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity of the Osborne Company for 2007. (Include retained earnings.)

the current balance sheet of day company contains the following major sections 562602

Classifications on Balance Sheet The current balance sheet of Day Company contains the following major sections:

A. Current assets

B. Long term investments

C. Property, plant, and equipment

D. Intangible assets

E. Other assets

F. Current liabilities

G. Long term liabilities

H. Other liabilities

I. Contributed capital

J. Retained earnings

K. Accumulated other comprehensive income

The following is a list of 37 accounts. Using the letters A through K, indicate in which section each account would most likely be classified. Place a check mark (Right mark) beside each item that is a contra account. If an account cannot be classified in any of the preceding sections, indicate with an X and explain.

1

Patents (net)

2

Income taxes payable

3

Notes receivable (due in 5 months)

4

Unearned rent

5

Discount on bonds payable (long term bonds)

6

Data processing center

7

Furniture

8

Land held for future expansion

9

Timberland (net)

10

Treasury stock, at cost

11

Advances to sales personnel

12

Idle machinery

13

Deferred taxes payable

14

Raw materials

15

Investment in held to maturity bonds

16

Pollution control facilities

17

Cash from security deposits of customers on returnable containers

18

Donated capital for industrial park building site from Toma City

19

Trademarks

20

Finished goods

21

Cash dividends payable

22

Bond sinking fund

23

Temporary investments

24

Retained earnings

25

Advances to affiliated company long term)

26

Cash surrender value of life insurance

27

Leased equipment under capital lease

28

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

29

Interest receivable (due in 5 months)

30

Office supplies

31

Accrued pension cost

32

Capital lease obligation

33

Investment in 8 year certificates of deposit

34

Unearned ticket sales

35

Estimated warranty (6 months) obligations

36

Unrealized decrease in value of available for sale securities

37

Cash

prepare a balance sheet without amounts in proper format for the oliver manufacturin 562603

Balance Sheet without Amounts The following is an alphabetical list of the accounts of the Oliver Manufacturing Company as of December 31, 2007:

Accounts payable

Interest payable

Accounts receivable

Interest receivable

Accrued pension cost

Interest revenue

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

Investment in available for sale securities

Accumulated depreciation: equipment

Land

Accumulated depreciation: machinery

Land for future plant site

Additional paid in capital on common stock

Loss on sale of equipment

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

Machinery

Administrative expenses

Mortgage payable (20 equal annual payments)

Allowance for doubtful accounts

Notes payable (short term)

Bond sinking fund

Notes receivable (short term)

Bonds payable (due 2019)

Office supplies

Buildings

Patents (net)

Cash in bank

Preferred stock

Cash on hand

Premium on bonds payable

Cash surrender value of life insurance

Prepaid insurance

Common stock

Raw materials

Cost of goods sold

Retained earnings

Deferred taxes payable

Salaries payable

Dividends payable

Sales

Equipment

Sales discounts taken

Estimated warranty (1 year) obligations

Sales returns

Finished goods

Selling expenses

General expenses

Temporary investments in marketable securities Trademarks

Income tax expense

Treasury stock, at cost

Income taxes payable

Unearned rent

Interest expense

Unrealized increase in value of available for sale securitie

Work in process

Required

Prepare a balance sheet (without amounts) in proper format for the Oliver Manufacturing Company.

prepare a properly classified balance sheet for the green manufacturing company on d 562604

Balance Sheet The following is an alphabetical list of the December 31, 2007 balance sheet accounts and amounts for the Green Manufacturing Company:

Accounts payable

$20,900

Accumulated depreciation: machinery

Accounts receivable

15,300

and equipment

30,000

Accrued pension cost

13,300

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,000

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

32,400

Bond sinking fund

7,700

Bonds payable (due 2021)

29,000

Marketable securities (short term)

8,400

Buildings

92,500

Notes payable (short term)

5,000

Cash

7,200

Patents (net)

8,600

Common stock, $10 par

44,100

Preferred stock, $100 par

30,000

Deferred taxes payable

2,800

Premium on common stock

16,300

Discount on bonds payable

2,500

Premium on preferred stock

7,000

Dividends payable

5,600

Prepaid insurance

2,600

Finished goods

23,800

Raw materials

10,100

Income taxes payable

8,900

Retained earnings

28,100

Interest payable

500

Unearned rent

5,000

Investment in available for sale stock

16,400

Unrealized increase in value of available for sale stock

2,000

Land

17,000

Wages payable

2,700

Machinery and equipment

57,800

Work in process

14,700

Required

Prepare a properly classified balance sheet for the Green Manufacturing Company on December 31, 2007. List the additional parenthetical or note disclosures (if any) that should be made for each item. Compute the working capital and the current ratio.

prepare a properly classified balance sheet for the midwest company on december 31 2 562605

Balance Sheet The following is a list (in random order) of the December 31, 2007 balance sheet accounts of the Midwest Company:

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

$1,600

Accounts payable

$16,500

Accounts receivable

13,800

Prepaid insurance

900

Dividends payable

1,800

Discount on bonds payable

2,000

Buildings

50,000

Common stock, $10 par

15,000

Bonds payable (due 2013)

29,000

Equipment

29,000

Retained earnings

25,800

Allowance for doubtful accounts

700

Office supplies

1,900

Preferred stock, $50 par

10,000

Current income taxes payable

4,200

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

12,400

Accumulated depreciation: equipment

8,300

Current interest payable

2,900

Patents (net)

2,400

Investment in held to maturity bonds

9,000

Notes payable (due January 1, 2010)

17,000

Cash

8,200

Inventory

24,400

Treasury stock (at cost)

1,500

Additional paid in capital on common stock

7,700

Accrued wages

3,700

Sinking fund for bond retirement

4,000

Land

9,500

Required

Prepare a properly classified balance sheet for the Midwest Company on December 31, 2007.

the following is the alphabetical adjusted trial balance of the meadows company on d 562606

Balance Sheet from Adjusted Trial Balance The following is the alphabetical adjusted trial balance of the Meadows Company on December 31, 2007:

Debits

Credits

Accounts payable

$9,800

Accounts receivable

$18,000

Accrued payables

6,500

Accumulated depreciation

44,000

Additional paid in capital

50,600

Cash

7,900

Common stock, $5 par

29,600

Cost of goods sold

175,500

Current portion of long term debt

6,200

Deferred taxes payable

12,500

Dividends distributed

7,000

General expenses

27,560

Income tax expense

12,340

Debits

Credits

Income taxes payable

7,500

Interest expense

4,300

Inventories

32,000

Investment in held to maturity bonds

36,000

Long term debt

56,300

Long term receivables

38,600

Marketable securities (short term)

10,100

Patents (net)

13,000

Prepaid insurance

5,000

Property, plant, and equipment

148,000

Retained earnings, 1/1/07

64,800

Sales

278,000

Sales returns

8,000

Selling expenses

21,500

Unrealized decrease in value of availablefor sale securities

1,000

$565,800

$565,800

Required

Prepare the December 31, 2007 balance sheet of the Meadows Company. Compute the debt ratio.

compute the current ratio which current assets would you classify as liquid and whic 562607

Balance Sheet and Notes Listed here in random order are the balance sheet accounts and related ending balances of the Eubanks Company as of December 31, 2007:

Income taxes payable

$24,700

Temporary investments

$19,100

Cash surrender value of life insurance

8,900

Bonds payable

80,000

Preferred stock

40,000

Additional paid in capital on common stock

30,300

Premium on bonds payable

4,800

Inventories

98,500

Cash

11,600

Accounts receivable

32,300

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

229,300

Patents (net)

18,200

Accounts payable

58,000

Investment in bonds

25,000

Common stock

62,800

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

23,400

Retained earnings

123,400

Miscellaneous current payables

6,200

Land held for building site

19,500

Estimated liability for product warranties

7,300

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,500

Additional information:

1. The company uses control accounts for inventories and property, plant, and equipment and lists the latter at its book value.

2. The straight line method is used to depreciate buildings, machinery, and equipment, based upon their cost and estimated residual values and lives. A breakdown of property, plant, and equipment shows the following: land at a cost of $32,000, buildings at a cost of $182,400 and a book value of $120,200, machinery at a cost of $63,900 and related accumulated depreciation of $18,600, and equipment (40% depreciated) at a cost of $53,000.

3. Patents are amortized on a straight line basis directly to the patent account.

4. Inventories are listed at the lower of cost or market value using an average cost. The inventories include raw materials $22,200, work in process $34,700, and finished goods $41,600.

5. Common stock has a $10 par value per share, 12,000 shares are authorized, 6,280 shares have been issued.

6. Preferred stock has a $100 par value per share, 1,000 shares are authorized, 400 shares have been issued.

7. The investment in bonds is carried at the original cost, which is the face value, and is being held to maturity.

8. Temporary investments in marketable securities were purchased at year end.

9. The bonds payable mature on December 31, 2012.

10. The company attaches a one year warranty on all the products it sells.

Required

1. Prepare the December 31, 2007 balance sheet of the Eubanks Company (including appropriate parenthetical notations).

2. Prepare notes to accompany the balance sheet that itemize company accounting policies, inventories, and property, plant, and equipment.

3. Compute the current ratio. Which current assets would you classify as liquid and which as separable according to the FASB’s conceptual guidelines? Why might these classifications be useful?

compute the debt ratio at the end of 2007 what is your evaluation of this ratio if i 562608

Comprehensive: Balance Sheet, Schedules, and Notes The following is an alphabetical listing of the balance sheet accounts and account balances of the Blazer Company on December 31, 2007:

Accounts payable

$44,200

Income taxes payable

$19,700

Accounts receivable

37,100

Inventory

85,300

Accumulated depreciation

109,300

Investment in affiliate

30,000

Additional paid in capital on common stock

20,000

Long term liabilities (book value)

91,000

Additional paid in capital on preferred stock

3,200

Miscellaneous current payables

6,800

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,600

Notes receivable

17,000

Bond sinking fund

12,500

Preferred stock

32,000

Cash

13,800

Property and equipment

296,700

Common stock

80,000

Retained earnings

84,600

Additional information:

1. The company uses a control account for property and equipment, accumulated depreciation, and for long term liabilities. The latter account is listed at its book value.

2. The straight line method is used to depreciate property and equipment based upon cost, estimated residual value, and estimated life. The costs of the assets in this account are: land $29,500, buildings $164,600, store fixtures $72,600, and office equipment $30,000.

3. The accumulated depreciation breakdown is as follows: buildings $54,600, store fixtures $37,400, and office equipment $17,300.

4. The long term debt includes 12%, $36,000 face value bonds that mature on December 31, 2012 and have an unamortized bond discount of $1,000; 11%, $48,000 face value bonds that mature on December 31, 2016, have a premium on bonds payable of $1,800, and whose retirement is being funded by a bond sinking fund; and a 13% note payable that has a face value of $6,200 and matures on January 1, 2010.

5. The noninterest bearing note receivable matures on June 1, 2008.

6. Inventory is listed at lower of cost or market; cost is determined on the basis of average cost.

7. The investment in affiliate is carried at cost. The company has guaranteed the interest on 12%, $50,000, 15 year bonds issued by this affiliate, the Jay Company.

8. Common stock has a $10 par value per share, 10,000 shares are authorized, and 1,000 shares were issued during 2007 at a price of $13 per share, resulting in 8,000 shares issued at year end.

9. Preferred stock has a $50 par value per share, 2,000 shares are authorized, and 140 shares were issued during 2007 at a price of $55 per share, resulting in 640 shares issued at year end.

10. On January 15, 2008, before the December 31, 2007 balance sheet was issued, a building with a cost of $20,000 and a book value of $7,000 was totally destroyed. Insurance proceeds will amount to only $5,000.

11. Net income and dividends paid during the year were $50,500 and $21,000, respectively.

Required

1. Prepare the December 31, 2007 balance sheet (including appropriate parenthetical notations) of the Blazer Company.

2. Prepare a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity for 2007. (Hint: Work back from the ending account balances.)

3. Prepare notes that itemize the balance sheet control accounts and those necessary to disclose any company accounting policies, contingent liabilities, and subsequent events.

4. Compute the debt ratio at the end of 2007. What is your evaluation of this ratio if it was 39% at the end of 2006?

based on your analysis prepare a properly classified december 31 2007 balance sheet 562609

Corrections to Balance Sheet The Cable Company prepared the following balance sheet:

CABLE COMPANY
Balance Sheet For Year Ended December 31, 2007

Working capital

$22,800

Noncurrent liabilities

$62,000

Other assets

152,000

Stockholders’ equity

112,800

Total

$174,800

Total

$174,800

Your analysis of these accounts reveals the following information:

1. Working capital consists of:

Land

$12,000

Accounts due from customers

18,000

Accounts due to suppliers

22,700

Inventories, including office supplies of $3,500

35,500

Income taxes owed

16,400

Wages owed

3,600

Note owed to bank (due December 31, 2009)

17,000

Securities held as a temporary investment

17,000

$22,800

2. Other assets include:

Cash

$12,300

Prepaid insurance

2,400

Buildings and equipment

100,000

Discount on bonds payable

3,000

Investment in available for sale stock

29,000

Treasury stock (at cost)

5,300

$152,000

3. Noncurrent liabilities consist of: 4. Stockholders’ equity includes:

Bonds payable (due 2017)

$33,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,400

Premium on preferred stock

2,600

Common stock, $5 par

25,000

$62,000

4. Stockholders’ equity includes:

Accumulated depreciation:

$40,000

buildings and equipment

12,000

Preferred stock, $100 par

15,600

Premium on common stock

40,000

Retained earnings

6,500

Accrued pension cost

1,300

Unrealized decrease in value of available for sale securities

$112,800

Required

Based on your analysis, prepare a properly classified December 31, 2007 balance sheet for the Cable Company.

based on the preceding information prepare a properly classified december 31 2007 ba 562610

Corrections to Balance Sheet The Brandt Company presents the following December 31, 2007 balance sheet:

BRANDT COMPANY
Sheet of Balances
For Year Ended December 31, 2007

Current assets

$44,300

Current liabilities

$66,600

Long term investments

13,600

Long term liabilities

24,100

Property and equipment

123,500

Contributed capital

17,000

Intangible assets

7,700

Unrealized capital

22,500

Other assets

13,600

Retained earnings

72,500

Total assets

$202,700

Total equities

$202,700

The following information is also available:

1. Current assets include cash $3,800, accounts receivable $18,500, notes receivable (maturity date July 1, 2009) $10,000, and land $12,000.

2. Long term investments include a $4,600 investment in available for sale securities that is expected to be sold in 2008 and a $9,000 investment in Dray Company bonds that are expected to be held until their December 31, 2016 maturity date.

3. Property and equipment include buildings costing $63,400, inventory costing $30,500, and equipment costing $29,600.

4. Intangible assets include patents that cost $8,200 and on which $2,300 amortization has accumulated, and treasury stock that cost $1,800.

5. Other assets include prepaid insurance (which expires on November 30, 2008) $2,900, sinking fund for bond retirement $7,000, and trademarks that cost $3,700 and are not impaired.

6. Current liabilities include accounts payable $19,400, bonds payable (maturity date December 31, 2018) $40,000, and accrued income taxes payable $7,200.

7. Long term liabilities include accrued wages $4,100 and mortgage payable (which is due in five equal annual payments starting December 31, 2008) $20,000.

8. Contributed capital includes common stock ($5 par) $11,000 and preferred stock ($100 par) $6,000.

9. Unrealized capital includes premium on bonds payable $4,300, premium on preferred stock $2,400, premium on common stock $14,700, and unrealized increase in value of securities available for sale $1,100.

10. Retained earnings includes unrestricted retained earnings, $37,800, allowance for doubtful accounts $700, and accumulated depreciation on buildings and equipment of $21,000 and $13,000, respectively.

Required

Based on the preceding information, prepare a properly classified December 31, 2007 balance sheet for the Brandt Company.

what would be the expense charged in the income statement in year to december 31 20x 562611

Ashleigh, a public limited company, has granted share options to its employees with a fair value of $6 million. The options vest in three years’ time. The Monte Carlo model was used to value the options, and these estimates had been made:

• Grant date (January 1, 20X4): estimate of employees leaving the entity during the vesting period—5%

• January 1, 20X5: revision of estimate of employees leaving to 6% before vesting date

• December 31, 20X6: actual employees leaving 5%

A. What would be the expense charged in the income statement in Year to December 31, 20X4?

(a) $6 million.

(b) $2 million.

(c) $1.90 million.

(d) $5.70 million.

B. Year to December 31, 20X5?

(a) $1.90 million.

(b) $1.88 million.

(c) $2 million.

(d) $3.78 million. million)

C. Year to December 31, 20X6?

(a) $1.90 million.

(b) $1.88 million.

(c) $2 million.

(d) $1.92 million.

in the tax jurisdiction of mack a public limited company a tax deduction is allowed 562618

A. In the tax jurisdiction of Mack, a public limited company, a tax deduction is allowed for the intrinsic value of the share options issued to employees. The company issued options on January 1, 20X4, worth $15 million to employees. They vest in three years. The share options’ intrinsic value at December 31, 20X4, was $12 million. The tax rate in the jurisdiction is 30%. What is the tax effect of the above issue of share options at December 31, 20X4?

(a) $1.5 million benefit to income statement.

(b) $1.2 million benefit to income statement.

(c) $1.5 million benefit recognized in equity.

(d) $1.2 million benefit recognized in equity.

B. In the above example, what would be the tax effect if the intrinsic value at December 31, 20X4, was $21 million?

(a) $2.1 million tax benefit to income.

(b) $2.1 million recognized in equity.

(c) $1.5 million tax benefit to income, $0.6 million recognized in equity.

(d) $1.5 million recognized in equity, $0.6 million tax benefit to income.

how would the acquisition be accounted for under ifrs 3 562621

Facts

X plc

$m

Cost of acquisition

700

less fair value of net assets

300

less restructuring provision

(70)

Goodwill

470

Income statement at year end

Profit before amortization

140

Amortization of goodwill

(47)

93

Interest

(13)

Profit before tax

80

This information relates to the acquisition of X, a public limited company, by Z, a public limited company.

At the date of acquisition, the fair value of the intangible assets and the contingent liabilities of X were $100 million and $30 million respectively. At the date of the preparation of the financial statements, the value of the net assets of X had increased significantly. The intangible assets have a life of 10 years.

Required

How would the acquisition be accounted for under IFRS 3?

describe the implications of the preceding information for accounting for the acquis 562623

Facts

JCE, a public limited company, acquired LZE, a public limited company, on December 31, 20X5. LZE has among its net assets customer lists of information in the form of a database. LZE has two such databases: one where the nature of the information is subject to national laws regarding confidentiality and another where the information can be sold or leased. LZE also has contracts for the supply of maintenance services for computer systems. These contracts have another five years left to run. The company insures computer systems against potential disasters, and these contracts are renewable every year. Additionally, JCE requested an official valuation of the computer equipment of LZE. By the time of the 20X5 annual financial statements, the valuation had not been completed and a provisional value for the assets was included in the financial statements. The final valuation was received on June 30, 20X6. On March 1, 20X7, the auditors discover an error in the valuation of property, plant, and equipment as at December 31, 20X5. A piece of equipment had been omitted from the valuation listing.

Required

Describe the implications of the preceding information for accounting for the acquisition of LZE.

if the combined organization has cash generating units significantly below the level 562632

On acquisition, all identifiable assets and liabilities, including goodwill, will be allocated to cash generating units within the business combination. Goodwill impairment is assessed within the cash generating units. If the combined organization has cash generating units significantly below the level of an operating segment, then the risk of an impairment charge against goodwill as a result of IFRS 3 is

(a) Significantly decreased because goodwill will be spread across many cash generating units.

(b) Significantly increased because poorly performing units can no longer be supported by those that are performing well.

(c) Likely to be unchanged from previous accounting practice.

(d) Likely to be decreased because goodwill will be a smaller amount due to the greater recognition of other intangible assets.

corin a private limited company has acquired 100 of coal a private limited company o 562640

Corin, a private limited company, has acquired 100% of Coal, a private limited company, on January 1, 2005. The fair value of the purchase consideration was $10 million ordinary shares of $1 of Corin, and the fair value of the net assets acquired was $7 million. At the time of the acquisition, the value of the ordinary shares of Corin and the net assets of Coal were only provisionally determined. The value of the shares of Corin ($11 million) and the net assets of Coal ($7.5 million) on January 1, 2005, were finally determined on November 30, 2005. However, the directors of Corin have seen the value of the company decline since January 1, 2005, and as of February 1, 2006, wish to change the value of the purchase consideration to $9 million. What value should be placed on the purchase consideration and net assets of Coal as at the date of acquisition?

(a) Purchase consideration $10 million, net asset value $7 million.

(b) Purchase consideration $11 million, net asset value $7.5 million.

(c) Purchase consideration $9 million, net asset value $7.5 million.

(d) Purchase consideration $11 million, net asset value $7 million.

prepare the adjusting entries to record the preceding information 562553

Adjusting Entries Your examination of the records of the Sullivan Company provides the following information for the December 31, 2007 year end adjustments:

1. Bad debts are to be recorded at 2% of sales. Sales totaled $25,000 for the year.

2. Salaries at year end that have accumulated but have not been paid total $1,400.

3. Annual straight line depreciation for the company’s equipment is based on a cost of $30,000, an estimated life of eight years, and an estimated residual value of $2,000.

4. Prepaid insurance in the amount of $800 has expired.

5. Interest that has been earned but not collected totals $500.

6. Unearned rent in the amount of $1,000 has become earned.

7. Interest on a note payable that has accumulated but has not been paid totals $600.

8. The income tax rate is 30% on current income and is payable in the first quarter of 2008. The pretax income before the preceding adjusting entries is $6,800.

Required

Prepare the adjusting entries to record the preceding information.

on the basis of the above information prepare journal entries to record whatever adj 562554

Adjusting Entries The following are several transactions of the Pruitt Company that occurred during the current year and were recorded in real (that is, balance sheet) accounts unless indicated otherwise:

Date

Transaction

Apr. 1

Purchased a delivery van for $10,000, paying $1,000 down, and issuing a one year, 12% note payable for the $9,000 balance. It is estimated that the van has a four year life and an $800 residual value; the company uses straight line depreciation. The interest on the note will be paid on the maturity date.

15 May

Purchased $830 of office supplies.

2 Jun

Purchased a two year comprehensive insurance policy for $960.

Aug. 1

Received six months’ rent in advance at $260 per month and recorded the $1,560 receipt as Rent Earned.

Sept.15

Advanced $600 to sales personnel to cover their future travel costs.

Nov. 1

Accepted a $6,000, six month, 12% (annual rate) note receivable from a customer, the interest to be collected when the note is collected.

The following information also is available:

1. On January 1, the Office Supplies account had a $250 balance. On December 31, an inventory count showed $190 of office supplies on hand.

2. The weekly (five day) payroll of Pruitt Company amounts to $2,000. All employees are paid at the close of business each Wednesday. A two day accrual is required for the current year.

3. Sales personnel travel cost reports indicate that $490 of advances had been used to pay travel expenses.

4. The income tax rate is 30% on current income and is payable in the first quarter of next year. The pretax income before the adjusting entries is $8,655.

Required

On the basis of the above information, prepare journal entries to record whatever adjustments are necessary to bring the accounts up to date on December 31. Each journal entry explanation should show any related computations.

prepare the adjusting entry that caused the change in each account balance 562555

Adjusting Entries The following partial list of accounts and account balances has been taken from the trial balance and the adjusted trial balance of the Barker Company:

Trial Balance

Adjusted Trial Balance

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Accumulated depreciation

$5,200

$6,600

Allowance for doubtful accounts

380

650

Income taxes payable

0

2,250

Interest payable

0

320

Prepaid insurance

$350

$90

Salaries payable

0

720

Unearned rent

900

300

Required

Prepare the adjusting entry that caused the change in each account balance.

the collins corporation shows the following inventory dividends revenue and expense 562556

Closing Entries The Collins Corporation shows the following inventory, dividends, revenue, and expense account balances before closing:

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Dividends distributed

$250

Gain on sale of land

$300

Sales revenue

$2,400

Salaries expense

$300

Sales returns

200

Utilities expense

130

Cost of goods sold

1,350

Miscellaneous expenses

120

Income tax expense

180

Required

Prepare closing entries.

prepare whatever reversing entries are appropriate 562557

Reversing Entries On December 31, 2007 Adams Company made the following adjusting entries for its annual accounting period:

Depreciation Expense

2,400

Accumulated Depreciation

2,400

To record depreciation on buildings.

Interest Receivable

500

Interest Revenue

500

To record interest on note receivable due January 28, 2008.

Rent Expense

400

Prepaid Rent

400

To record expired prepaid rent.

Interest Expense

620

Interest Payable

620

To record interest on note payable due March 16, 2008.

Required

Prepare whatever reversing entries are appropriate.

in the space provided indicate in which journal the transaction would be recorded us 562558

Special Journals The following are several transactions of a company that uses special journals:

Transaction

Journal

1. Purchase of inventory for cash.

2. Sale of inventory on credit.

3. Payment of sales salaries.

4. Purchase of inventory on credit.

5. Sale of merchandise for cash.

6. Purchase of land by issuing note payable.

7. Collection of short term note receivable and related interest.

8. Return of defective inventory to supplier for credit to account.

9. Preparation of adjusting entries.

10. Purchase of equipment for cash.

Required

In the space provided, indicate in which journal the transaction would be recorded using the codes: G for general journal, S for sales journal, P for purchases journal, CR for cash receipts journal, and CP for cash payments journal.

ellis company keeps its accounting records on a cash basis during the year at year e 562559

Cash Basis Accounting Ellis Company keeps its accounting records on a cash basis during the year. At year end, it adjusts its books to the accrual basis for preparing its financial statements. At the end of 2006, Ellis Company reported the following balance sheet items:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,700

Accounts receivable

4,200

Inventory

5,600

Equipment

12,000

Accumulated depreciation

$4,800

Accounts payable

6,100

M. Ellis, capital

13,600

Totals

$24,500

$24,500

It is now the end of 2007. The company’s checkbook shows a balance of $4,700, which includes cash receipts from customers of $51,300 and cash payments of $49,300. An examination of the cash payments show that: (1)$30,600 was paid to suppliers, (2) $12,700 was paid for other operating costs (including $7,200 paid on January 1 for two years’ annual rent), and (3) $6,000 was withdrawn by M. Ellis. On December 31, 2007, (1) customers owed Ellis Company $5,900, (2)Ellis Company owed suppliers and employees $7,000 and $900, respectively, and (3) the ending inventory was $6,300. Ellis is depreciating the equipment using straightline depreciation over a 10 year life (no residual value).

Required

Using accrual based accounting, prepare (1) a 2007 income statement and (2) a December 31, 2007 balance sheet (show supporting calculations).

prepare in proper form for 2007 the company rsquo s 1 income statement 2 retained ea 562560

Financial Statements The Stern Company uses a perpetual inventory system and has prepared the following adjusted trial balance on December 31, 2007:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,000

Accounts receivable

2,700

Allowance for doubtful accounts

$250

Inventory

6,500

Prepaid insurance

800

Land

5,200

Buildings and equipment

31,000

Accumulated depreciation

15,000

Accounts payable

3,100

Salaries payable

420

Unearned rent

360

Income taxes payable

2,625

Note payable (due July 1, 2011)

5,000

Interest payable (due July 1, 2011)

750

Capital stock (1,500 shares)

9,000

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007

6,770

Dividends distributed

1,200

Sales revenue

33,000

Sales returns

2,100

Rent revenue

1,440

Cost of goods sold

15,040

Selling expenses

4,800

Administrative expenses

3,000

Interest expense

750

Income tax expense

2,625

Totals

$77,715

$77,715

Required

Prepare in proper form for 2007 the company’s: (1) income statement, (2) retained earnings statement, (3) ending balance sheet, and (4) closing entries in its general journal.

additional paid in capital and retained earnings accounts are summed to determine th 562561

Financial Statements The Nealy Company has prepared the following alphabetical adjusted trial balance on December 31, 2007:

Debit

Credit

Income tax expense

4,035

Interest expense

650

Interest payable (due July 1, 2008)

650

Inventory

10,800

Land

6,800

Notes payable (due July 1, 2011)

10,000

Rent revenue

2,800

Retained earnings, January 1, 2007

14,500

Sales returns

4,900

Sales revenue

59,800

Selling expenses

9,700

Unearned rent

700

Unexpired insurance

1,600

Wages payable

1,000

$149,485

$149,485

Required

Prepare the following 2007 items in proper form for the Nealy Company: (1) the income statement, (2) the retained earnings statement, (3) the ending balance sheet, and (4) the closing entries in the general journal. (Hint: For the ending balance sheet, the Capital Stock, Additional Paid in Capital, and Retained Earnings accounts are summed to determine the total stockholders’ equity.)

journalize the necessary adjusting entries for the company at the end of 2007 show s 562562

Adjusting Entries The following 2007 information is available concerning the Drake Company, which adjusts and closes its accounts every December 31:

1. Salaries accrued but unpaid total $2,840 on December 31, 2007.

2. The $247 December utility bill arrived on December 31, 2007 and has not been paid or recorded.

3. Buildings with a cost of $78,000, 25 year life, and $9,000 residual value are to be depreciated; equipment with a cost of $44,000, eight year life, and $2,000 residual value is also to be depreciated. The straight line method is to be used.

4. A count of supplies indicates that the Store Supplies account should be reduced by $128 and the Office Supplies account reduced by $397 for supplies used during the year.

5. The company holds a $6,000, 12% (annual rate), six month note receivable dated September 30, 2007 from a customer. The interest is to be collected on the maturity date.

6. Bad debts expense is estimated to be 1% of annual sales. 2007 sales total $65,000.

7. An analysis of the company insurance policies indicates that the Prepaid Insurance account is to be reduced for the $528 of expired insurance.

8. A review of travel expense reports indicates that $310 advanced to sales personnel (and recorded as Travel Expenses) has not yet been used by these personnel.

9. The income tax rate is 30% on current income and will be paid in the first quarter of 2008. The pretax income of the company before adjustments is $18,270.

Required

Journalize the necessary adjusting entries for the company at the end of 2007. Show supporting calculations in your journal entry explanations.

prepare the adjusting entries that are necessary to bring the trishia company accoun 562563

Adjusting Entries The trial balance of the Trishia Company on December 31, 2007 (the end of its annual accounting period) included the following account balances before adjustments:

Notes receivable

$10,000 debit

Insurance expense

3,000 debit

Delivery equipment

14,000 debit

Building

60,000 debit

Unearned rent

4,320 credit

Notes payable

7,200 credit

Office supplies expense

1,000 debit

Reviewing the company’s recorded transactions and accounting records for 2007, you find the following data pertaining to the December 31, 2007 adjustments:

1. On July 2, 2007 the company had accepted a $10,000, nine month, 10% (annual rate) note receivable from a customer. The interest is to be collected when the note is collected.

2. On August 2, 2007 the company had paid $3,000 for a two year insurance policy.

3. The building was acquired in 1995 and is being depreciated using the straight line method over a 25 year life. It has an estimated residual value of $8,000.

4. The delivery equipment was purchased on April 2, 2007. It is to be depreciated using the straight line method over a 10 year life, with an estimated residual value of $2,000.

5. On September 1, 2007 the company had received two years’ rent in advance ($4,320) for a portion of a building it is renting to Oscar Company.

6. On December 1, 2007 the company had issued a $7,200, three month, 12% (annual rate) note payable to a supplier. The interest is to be paid when the note is paid.

7. On January 2, 2007 the company purchased $1,000 of office supplies. A physical count on December 31, 2007 revealed that there are $400 of office supplies still on hand. No supplies were on hand at the beginning of the year. Required

Prepare the adjusting entries that are necessary to bring the Trishia Company accounts up to date on December 31, 2007. Each journal entry explanation should summarize your calculations.

fill in the blanks numbered 1 through 6 hint it probably is easiest to work through 562564

Income Statement Calculations The Ferdon Company uses a periodic inventory system. The following is partial information from its income statements for 2007 and 2008:

2007

2008

Beginning inventory

($2)

($4)

Sales

220,000

6

Purchases

118,000

140,000

Purchases returns

2,000

3,000

Ending inventory

48,000

74,000

Sales returns

1,000

3,000

Gross profit

1

77,000

Cost of goods sold

106,000

5

Expenses

65,000

62,000

Net income

3

15,000

Required

Fill in the blanks numbered 1 through 6. (Hint: It probably is easiest to work through the blanks according to the sequential numbers.)

indicate the effect of the errors on the net income total assets total liabilities a 562565

Effects of Errors During the current accounting period Page Company makes the following errors. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.

Error

Net
Income

Total
Assets

Total
Liabilities

Total
Stockholders’
Equity

Example: Failed to record a cash sale.

U

U

U

U

1. The purchase of equipment for cash is recorded as
a debit to Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.

2. Failed to record the purchase of inventory on credit.

3. Cash received from a customer in payment of its account
is recorded as if the receipt were for a current period sale.

4. Failed to record a credit sale.

5. At the end of the year the receipt of money from a 60 day,
12% bank loan is recorded as a debit to Cash and a credit
to Sales Revenue.

6. Failed to record depreciation at the end of the current
period.

Required

Indicate the effect of the errors on the net income, total assets, total liabilities, and total stockholders’ equity at the end of the accounting period by using the following code: O =overstated, U =understated, N =no effect. Disregard income taxes.

for each of the preceding items indicate the effect on net income assets liabilities 562566

Errors in Financial Statements At the end of the current year, the controller of the Jodi Corporation discovers the following items of information:

1. Salaries are paid every Friday for a five day work week. The normal weekly payroll is $40,000. The year end falls on a Tuesday this year.

2. The company has a $20,000, nine month, 12% (annual rate) note payable outstanding at the end of the year. The note was issued on October 1; the interest is to be paid when the note is paid.

3. Examining the Rent Expense account, the controller finds that it includes a $4,800 advance payment for three months’ rent. The payment was made on November 1.

4. There are $500 of office supplies left in the storeroom. At the beginning of the year there were no office supplies. During a year the company purchased $3,500 of office supplies, which were debited to the Office Supplies account.

5. The company received a large order in May with a $13,000 advance payment. The advance payment was credited to Unearned Revenue. In November, the last of the order was received by the customer.

Required

For each of the preceding items, indicate the effect on net income, assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity in the financial statements of the company for the year if the controller fails to make an adjusting entry for the item (ignore income taxes).

prepare the current asset section of jenkins rsquo balance sheet 562590

Current Assets Listed here are certain accounts of the Jenkins Company at the end of 2007:

Account

Debit (Credit)

Land

$12,000

Prepaid insurance

1,530

Cash on hand

1,120

Notes receivable (due 2010)

4,300

Cash in bank

5,400

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,100

Marketable securities (short term)

3,380

Accumulated depreciation

8,700

Accounts receivable

15,600

Office supplies

970

Buildings

27,200

Inventory

19,700

Required

Prepare the current asset section of Jenkins’ balance sheet.

prepare the property plant and equipment section of moen rsquo s 2007 ending balance 562591

Plant and Equipment Your analysis of the fixed asset accounts at the end of 2007 for the Moen Corporation reveals the following information:

1. The company owns two tracts of land. The first, which cost $18,000, is being held as a future building site. It has a current market value of $20,000. The second, which cost $19,000, was purchased 10 years ago. On this site were built the current office and factory buildings. The land has a current market value of $56,000.

2. The company owns two buildings. The office building and the factory building were both built 10 years ago at a cost of $50,000 and $120,000, respectively. At that time each was expected to have a life of 30 years, and a residual value of 10% of original cost. They are being depreciated on a straight line basis.

3. The company owns factory machinery with a total cost of $51,000 and accumulated depreciation of $35,300. Included in factory machinery is one machine that cost $7,000 and has accumulated depreciation of $4,200. This machine is being held for resale and is not being used in operations.

4. The company owns office equipment that cost $14,500 and has a book value of $6,300. It owns office furniture that cost $17,900 and has a book value of $11,400.

Required

Prepare the property, plant, and equipment section of Moen’s 2007 ending balance sheet.

classifications on balance sheet a balance sheet may contain the following major sec 562593

Classifications on Balance Sheet A balance sheet may contain the following major sections:

A. Current assets

B. Long term investments

C. Property, plant, and equipment

D. Intangible assets

E. Other assets

F. Current liabilities

G. Long term liabilities

H. Other liabilities

I. Contributed capital

J. Retained earnings

K. Accumulated other comprehensive income

Required

The following is a list of fifteen accounts. Using the letters A through K, indicate in which section of the balance sheet each account would most likely be classified. Place a check mark (_) beside each item that is a contra account. If an account cannot be classified in any of the preceding sections, indicate with an X and explain.

1. Temporary investments in marketable securities

2. Discount on bonds payable (bonds due in 5 years)

3. Additional paid in capital on common stock

4. Accounts receivable

5. Notes payable (due in 5 years)

6. Patents (net)

7. Unrealized decrease in value of available for sale securities

8. Preferred stock

9. Unearned rent (to be earned within next 6 months)

10. Accrued pension cost

11. Trademarks

12. Deficit

13. Salaries payable

14. Land

15. Investment in Ace Company preferred stock (to be held for 3 years)

if an account can not be classified in any of the preceding sections indicate with a 562594

Classifications on Balance Sheet The balance sheet contain the following major sections:

A. Current assets

B. Long term investments

C. Property, plant, and equipment

D. Intangible assets

E. Other assets

F. Current liabilities

G. Long term liabilities

H. Other liabilities

I. Contributed capital

J. Retained earnings

K. Accumulated other comprehensive income

Required

The following is a list of several accounts. Using the letters A through K, indicate in which section of the balance sheet each of the accounts would be classified. Place a check mark (Right Mark ) beside each item that is a contra account. If an account can not be classified in any of the preceding sections, indicate with an X and explain.

1

Cash

2

Bonds payable (due in 8 years)

3

Machinery

4

Deficit

5

Unexpired insurance

6

Franchise (net)

7

Fund to retire preferred stock

8

Current portion of mortgage payable

9

Accumulated depreciation

10

Copyrights

11

Investment in held to maturity bonds

12

Allowance for doubtful accounts

13

Notes receivable (due in 3 years)

14

Property taxes payable

15

Deferred taxes payable

16

Premium on preferred stock

17

Premium on bonds payable (due in 8 years)

18

Work in process

19

Common stock, $1 par

20

Land

21

Treasury stock (at cost)

22

Unrealized increase in value of available forsale securities

prepare a december 31 2007 balance sheet for the baggett company 562595

Balance Sheet The balance sheet accounts and amounts of the Baggett Company as of December 31, 2007 are shown in random order as follows:

Account

Debit (Credit)

Account

Debit (Credit)

Income taxes payable

$3,800

Premium on preferred stock

$7,900

Prepaid items

1,800

Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,600

Premium on common stock

9,300

Bonds payable (due 2017)

23,000

Land

12,200

Buildings

57,400

Notes payable (due 2010)

6,000

Sinking fund to retire bonds payable

5,000

Notes receivable (due 2009)

16,400

Advances from customers (long term)

2,600

Accounts receivable

12,600

Cash

4,300

Premium on bonds payable

1,400

Accumulated depreciation: equipment

9,700

Account

Debit (Credit)

Account

Debit
(Credit)

Accounts payable

13,100

Retained earnings

18,300

Inventory

7,400

Preferred stock, $100 par

18,600

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

21,000

Wages payable

1,400

Patents (net)

4,600

Common stock, $10 par

12,700

Equipment

28,700

Required

1. Prepare a December 31, 2007 balance sheet for the Baggett Company.

2. Compute the debt ratio.

compute the working capital and the current ratio 562596

Balance Sheet The December 31, 2007 balance sheet accounts of the Hitt Company are shown here in alphabetical order:

Accounts payable

$22,400

Current taxes payable

$10,400

Accounts receivable

21,500

Discount on bonds payable

6,900

Accumulated depreciation: buildings

53,000

Equipment

72,400

Accumulated depreciation: equipment

35,100

Inventory

37,200

Additional paid in capital on

Land

30,000

common stock

24,000

Marketable securities (short term)

6,100

Additional paid in capital on

Patents (net)

9,800

preferred stock

11,500

Preferred stock, $100 par

21,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

800

Retained earnings

46,200

Bonds payable (due 2021)

77,000

Salaries payable

2,000

Buildings

144,000

Trademarks

3,700

Cash

2,900

Unrealized increase in value of

Common stock, $10 par

30,000

marketable securities

1,100

Required

1. Prepare the December 31, 2007 balance sheet of the Hitt Company.

2. Compute the working capital and the current ratio.

place the appropriate letter a ndash g identifying each pronouncement on the line in 562483

Pronouncements Several accounting groups have issued various pronouncements establishing or relating to generally accepted accounting principles. The following is a list of six pronouncements, as well as a list of statements describing each pronouncement.

A. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards

B. Opinions

C. Technical Bulletins

D. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts

E. Interpretations

F. Staff Positions

G. Accounting Research Bulletins

1. Pronouncements that provide clarification of conflicting or unclear issues relating to previously issued FASB Statements of Standards, APB Opinions, or Accounting Research Bulletins.

2. Issued by the FASB to provide guidance on accounting and reporting problems related to Statements of Standards or Interpretations.

3. Pronouncements of the APB that constitute generally accepted accounting principles unless specifically amended or rescinded, many of which were based on Accounting Research Studies.

4. Issued by the FASB as a series establishing a theoretical foundation upon which to base financial accounting and reporting standards.

5. Pronouncements of the Committee on Accounting Procedure (CAP) that constitute generally accepted accounting principles unless superseded or amended by other authoritative bodies.

6. Pronouncements issued by the FASB that establish generally accepted accounting principles and indicate the methods and procedures required on specific accounting issues.

7. Pronouncements issued to provide more timely and consistent application guidance in regard to FASB literature.

Required

Place the appropriate letter (A–G) identifying each pronouncement on the line in front of the statement describing the pronouncement.

develops consensus positions on the implementation issues involving the application 562484

Organizations Certain organizations have been influential in the establishment of accounting principles. The following is a list of abbreviations for several of these organizations, as well as a list of statements describing the organizations.

A. IRS

B. APB

C. CAP

D. IASB

E. SEC

F. FASAC

G. CASB

H. FASB

I. PCAOB

J. GASB

K. AICPA

L. EITF

1. First organization in United States to be given authority to issue pronouncements on accounting procedures and practice. Issued Accounting Research Bulletins.

2. Establishes cost accounting standards for U.S. government contracts.

3. Administers the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code.

4. Helps establish internationally comparable accounting principles.

5. Establishes accounting standards for state and local governmental entities.

6. Establishes generally accepted accounting principles in the private sector of the United States.

7. Created by Congress in response to fraudulent accounting practices.

8. Responsible for advising the FASB about technical areas, task forces, and other matters.

9. Established 31 Opinions, many of which still constitute generally accepted accounting principles.

10. Has legal authority to prescribe accounting principles and reporting practices for all corporations issuing publicly traded securities.

11. Professional organization for all CPAs in the United States.

12. Develops consensus positions on the implementation issues involving the application of standards.

Required

Place the appropriate letter (A–L) for each organization in front of the statement describing the organization. In addition, write out the full name of the organization.

discuss the sources of evidence for determining whether an accounting principle has 562486

Accounting Principles At the completion of the Darby Department Store audit, the president asks about the meaning of the phrase “in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles” that appears in your audit report on the management’s financial statements. He observes that the meaning of the phrase must include more than what he thinks of as “principles.”

Required

1. Explain the meaning of the term “accounting principles” as used in the audit report. (Do not discuss in this part the significance of “generally accepted.”)

2. The president wants to know how you determine whether or not an accounting principle is generally accepted. Discuss the sources of evidence for determining whether an accounting principle has substantial authoritative support. Do not merely list the titles of publications.

write a brief report that describes why financial accounting standards inspire or en 562487

Standard Setting When the Accounting Principles Board was founded in 1959, it planned to establish financial accounting standards using empirical research and logical reasoning only; the role of political action was little recognized at that time. Today, there is wide acceptance of the view that political action is as much an ingredient of the standard setting process as is research evidence. Considerable political and social influence is wielded by user groups—those parties who are most interested in or affected by accounting standards. Two basic premises of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) are (1) that it should be responsive to the needs and viewpoints of the entire economic community, and (2) that it should operate in full view of the public, affording interested parties ample opportunity to make their views known. The extensive procedural steps employed by the FASB in the standard setting process support these premises.

Required

Write a brief report that describes why financial accounting standards inspire or encourage political action and social involvement during the standard setting process.

place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the st 562515

Qualitative Characteristics In FASB Statement of Concepts No. 2, several qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information were identified. The following is a list of these qualities as well as a list of statements describing the qualities.

A. Comparability

B. Decision usefulness

C. Relevance

D. Reliability

E. Predictive value

F. Feedback value

G. Timeliness faithfulness

H. Verifiability

I. Neutrality

J. Representational

K. Consistency

L. Materiality

1. Ability of measurers to form a consensus that the selected accounting method has been used without error or bias.

2. Making information available to decision makers before it loses its capacity to influence decisions.

3. Capacity to make a difference in a decision.

4. Overall qualitative characteristic.

5. Absence of bias intended to influence behavior in a particular direction.

6. Reasonably free from error and bias.

7. Helps decision makers forecast correctly.

8. Validity.

9. Interactive quality; helps explain similarities and differences between two sets of facts.

10. Quantitative “threshold” constraint.

11. Conformity from period to period.

12. Helps decision makers confirm or correct prior expectations.

Required

Place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement describing the quality.

select the accounting assumption or principle that justifies each accounting practic 562516

Accounting Assumptions and Principles Certain accounting assumptions and principles have had an important impact on the development of generally accepted accounting principles. The following is a list of these assumptions and principles as well as a list of statements describing certain accounting practices.

A. Entity

B. Continuity

C. Period of time

D. Historical cost

E. Monetary unit

F. Realization

G. Matching

H. Conservatism

1. The business, rather than its owners, is the reporting unit.

2. Depreciation costs are expensed in the periods of use rather than at the time the asset is acquired.

3. Accounting measurements are reported in dollars.

4. The year is the normal reporting unit.

5. In the absence of evidence to the contrary, the business will operate long enough to carry out its existing commitments.

6. Revenue is usually recognized at the time of sale.

7. Exchange price is retained in the accounting records.

8. An accounting alternative is selected that is least likely to overstate assets and income.

Required

Select the accounting assumption or principle that justifies each accounting practice and place the appropriate letter on the line preceding the statement.

what is the rationale underlying the appropriateness of treating costs as expenses o 562519

Cost and Expense Recognition An accountant must be familiar with the concepts involved in determining earnings of a company. The amount of earnings reported for a company is dependent on the proper recognition, in general, of revenue and expense for a given time period. In some situations costs are recognized as expenses at the time of product sale; in other situations guidelines have been developed for recognizing costs as expenses or losses by other criteria.

Required

1. Explain the rationale for recognizing costs as expenses at the time of product sale.

2. What is the rationale underlying the appropriateness of treating costs as expenses of a period instead of assigning the costs to an asset? Explain.

3. Some expenses are assigned to specific accounting periods on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost. Explain the underlying rationale for recognizing expenses on this basis.

explain the meaning and importance of each of the three ingredients of reliability 562520

Characteristics of Useful Information Financial accounting and reporting provide information that is used in decision making regarding the allocation of resources. In Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 1, “Objectives of Financial Reporting by Business Enterprises,” the FASB defined the following basic objectives of financial reporting:

Financial reporting should provide understandable information to present and potential users:

  • That is useful in making rational decisions.
  • That facilitates assessing the amounts, timing, and uncertainty related to the company’s cash flows.
  • About the company’s economic resources, its claims to those resources, and the changes in its resources and obligations occurring from earnings and other operating activities. The qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information were identified in the FASB’s Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2, “Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information” These characteristics distinguish better information (more useful) from inferior information (less useful).

Required

1. For the primary quality relevance,

a. define relevance

b. explain the meaning and importance of each of the three ingredients of relevance

2. For the primary quality reliability,

a. define reliability

b. explain the meaning and importance of each of the three ingredients of reliability

3. Explain the concepts of

a. comparability

b. consistency

c. materiality

describe the level of sophistication that can be expected of the users of financial 562521

Objectives,Users, and Stewardship The owners of CSC Inc., a privately held company, are considering a public offering of the company’s common stock as a means of acquiring additional funds. Prior to making a decision about a public offering, the owners had a lengthy conversation with John Duncan, CSC’s chief financial officer. Duncan informed the owners of the reporting requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission, including the necessity for audited financial statements. At the request of the owners, Duncan also discussed the objectives of financial reporting, the sophistication of users of financial information, and the stewardship responsibilities of management, all of which are addressed in Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 1, “Objectives of Financial Reporting by Business Enterprises.”

Required

1. Discuss the primary objectives of financial reporting.

2. Describe the level of sophistication that can be expected of the users of financial information.

3. Explain the stewardship responsibilities of management.

explain by what authority and or on what basis each item listed in 1 can be consider 562524

Inconsistent Statements on Accounting Principles The following two statements have been taken directly or with some modification from the accounting literature. Each of them is either taken out of context, involves circular reasoning, and/or contains one or more fallacies, half truths, erroneous comments, conclusions, or inconsistencies (internally or with generally accepted principles or practices).

Statement 1 Accounting is a service activity. Its function is to provide quantitative financial information that is intended to be useful in making economic decisions about and for economic entities. Thus the accounting function might be viewed primarily as being a tool or device for providing quantitative financial information to management to facilitate decision making.

Statement 2 Financial statements that were developed in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, which apply the conservatism convention, can be free from bias (or can give a presentation that is fair with respect to continuing and prospective stockholders as well as to retiring stockholders).

Required

Evaluate each of the preceding numbered statements as follows:

1. List the fallacies, half truths, circular reasoning, erroneous comments or conclusions, and/or inconsistencies.

2. Explain by what authority and/or on what basis each item listed in (1) can be considered to be fallacious, circular, inconsistent, a half truth, or an erroneous comment or conclusion. If the statement or a portion of it is merely out of context, indicate the context(s) in which the statement would be correct.

explain why the accounting entity concept is so fundamental that it pervades all of 562525

Accounting Entity The concept of the accounting entity often is considered to be the most fundamental of accounting concepts, one that pervades all of accounting.

Required

1. a. What is an accounting entity? Explain.

b. Explain why the accounting entity concept is so fundamental that it pervades all of accounting.

2. For each of the following indicate whether the accounting concept of entity is applicable; discuss and give illustrations.

a. A unit created by or under law

b. The product line operating segment of an enterprise

c. A combination of legal units and/or product line operating segments

d. All of the activities of an owner or a group of owners

e. An industry

f. The economy of the United States

revenue may also be recognized a during production and b when cash is received for e 562526

Timing of Revenue Recognition Revenue usually is recognized at the point of sale. Under special circumstances, however, bases other than the point of sale are used for the timing of revenue recognition.

Required

1. Why is the point of sale usually used as the basis for the timing of revenue recognition?

2. Disregarding the special circumstances when bases other than the point of sale are used, discuss the merits of each of the following objections to the sales basis of revenue recognition:

a. It is too conservative because revenue is earned throughout the entire process of production.

b. It is not conservative enough because accounts receivable do not represent disposable funds; sales returns and allowances may be made; and collection and bad debt expenses may be incurred in a later period.

3. Revenue may also be recognized (a) during production and (b) when cash is received. For each of these two bases of timing revenue recognition, give an example of the circumstances in which it is properly used and discuss the accounting merits of its use in lieu of the sales basis.

describe when revenue should be recognized by each company if revenue should not be 562528

Revenue Recognition The following are brief descriptions of several companies in different lines of business.

A. Company A is a construction company. It has recently signed a contract to build a highway over a three year period. A down payment was collected; the remaining collections will occur periodically over the construction period based upon the degree of completion.

B. Company B is a retailer. It makes sales on a daily basis for cash and on credit cards.

C. Company C is a health spa. It has recently signed contracts with numerous individuals to use its facilities over a two year period. The contract price was collected in advance.

D. Company D is a land development company. It has recently begun developing a “retirement community” and has sold lots to senior citizens. The sales contract requires a small down payment and periodic payments until completion of the roads and a clubhouse, after which the remainder of the purchase price is due. Prior to this point, a purchaser may cancel the contract and receive a refund of all payments.

Required

Describe when revenue should be recognized by each company. If revenue should not be recognized at the time of sale, indicate what method should be used to recognize the revenue. Justify your decision.

identify what accounting assumption or principle each procedure or practice violates 562529

Violations of Assumptions and Principles The following are accounting procedures and practices used by several companies.

A. As soon as it purchases inventory, Sokolich Company records the purchase price as cost of goods sold to simplify its accounting procedures.

B. At the end of each year Sloan Company records and reports its economic resources based on appraisal values.

C. Ebert Company prepares financial statements only every two years to reduce its costs of preparing the statements.

D. Guthrie Company sells on credit and records revenue at that time, even though it knows that collection is highly uncertain and very significant efforts have to be made to collect the accounts.

E. Because of inflation, Cross Company adjusts its financial statements each year to show the current purchasing power for all items.

F. David Thomas combines his personal transactions and business transactions when he prepares his company’s financial statements so that he can tell how well he is doing on an “overall” basis.

G. At the end of each year Vann Company reports its economic resources on a liquidation basis even though it is likely to operate in the future.

Required

Identify what accounting assumption or principle each procedure or practice violates, and indicate what should be done to rectify the violation.

what is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in state 562530

Conceptual Framework The Financial Accounting Standards Board has developed a conceptual framework for financial accounting and reporting. The FASB has issued 7 Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts. These statements set forth objectives and fundamentals that will be the basis for developing financial accounting and reporting standards. The objectives identify the goals and purposes of financial reporting. The fundamentals are the underlying concepts of financial accounting concepts that guide the selection of transactions, events, and circumstances to be accounted for; their recognition and measurement; and the means of summarizing and communicating them to interested parties.

The purpose of Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2, “Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information,” is to examine the characteristics that make accounting information useful. The characteristics or qualities of information discussed in Concepts No. 2 are the ingredients that make information useful and are the qualities to be sought when accounting choices are made.

Required

1. Identify and discuss the benefits which can be expected to be derived from the FASB’s conceptual framework study.

2. What is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2? Explain why it is the most important.

3. Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2 describes a number of key characteristics or qualities for accounting information. Briefly discuss the importance of understandability, relevance, and reliability for financial reporting purposes.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives how would you reply to chris 562531

Ethics and Income Reporting You have been hired as an “accounting consultant” by Watson Company to evaluate its financial reporting policies. Watson is a small corporation with a few stockholders owning stock that is not publicly traded. In a discussion with you, Chris Watson, the company president, says “For the Watson Company’s annual income statement, it is our policy to always record and report revenues when we collect the cash and to record and report expenses when we pay the cash. I like this approach and I think our stockholders and creditors do too. This policy results in income that is reliable and conservative, which is the way accounting should be. Besides, it is easy to keep track of our income. All I need are the receipts and payments recorded in the company’s checkbook.

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, how would you reply to Chris?

record the preceding transactions in a general journal 562548

Journal Entries The Mead Company uses a perpetual inventory system and engaged in the following transactions during the month of May:

Date

Transaction

1 May

Made cash sales of $6,300; the cost of the inventory was $3,700.

5

Purchased $2,000 of inventory on credit.

9

Made credit sales of $3,300; the cost of the inventory sold was $1,900.

13

Paid sales salaries of $900 and office salaries of $600.

14

Paid for the May 5 purchases.

18

Purchased sales equipment costing $8,000; made a down payment of $2,000 and agreed to pay the balance in 60 days.

21

Purchased $600 of inventory for cash.

27

Sold land that had originally cost $1,900 for $2,600.

Required

Record the preceding transactions in a general journal.

record the preceding transactions in a general journal 562549

Journal Entries The following are selected accounts and account balances of the Sawyer Company on May 31:

Debit (Credit)

Cash

$12,523

Accounts receivable

23,052

Inventory

16,300

Office equipment

35,860

Accumulated depreciation

10,540

Notes payable

3,400

Accounts payable

3,500

Sales revenue

47,872

Gain on sale of office equipment

400

Cost of goods sold

22,354

Utility expense

1,124

The Sawyer Company entered into the following transactions during June:

Date

Transaction

3 Jun

Sold for $700 office equipment that had cost $2,000 and has associated accumulated depreciation of $1,500.

7

Made sales of $2,000 on credit; the cost of the inventory sold was $1,200.

10

Purchased $1,000 of inventory for cash.

15

Purchased new office equipment costing $4,000, paying $1,500 and signing a 90 day note for the balance.

16

Received check for June 7 credit sale.

17

Made cash sales of $4,200; the cost of the inventory sold was $2,300.

20

Purchased $2,600 of inventory on credit.

24

Returned $200 of defective inventory from the June 20 purchase for a credit to its account.

29

Paid for the June 20 purchase less the return.

30

Paid the monthly utility bill, $210.

Required

1. Record the preceding transactions in a general journal.

2. Post to the accounts.

prepare a 2007 income statement for rule corporation 562550

Basic Income Statement The following are selected account balances of the Rule Corporation at the end of 2007:

Debit

Credit

Operating expenses

$3,800

Sales returns

600

Sales revenue

$16,200

Cost of goods sold

8,300

Interest expense

800

Gain on sale of land

500

The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate and stockholders own 800 shares of its capital stock.

Required

Prepare a 2007 income statement for Rule Corporation.

prepare for 2007 in proper form 1 an income statement 2 a retained earnings statemen 562552

Financial Statements The Turtle Company has prepared the following adjusted trial balance for the year ended December 31, 2007:

Debit

Credit

Cash

$1,700

Accounts receivable (net)

2,100

Inventory

1,800

Equipment

5,400

Accumulated depreciation

$1,700

Accounts payable

2,300

Salaries payable

300

Income taxes payable

360

Capital stock (400 shares)

3,200

Retained earnings

2,500

Dividends distributed

200

Sales revenue

Cost of goods sold

4,300

Selling expenses

1,800

Administrative expenses

600

Income tax expense

360

Totals

$18,260

$18,260

Required

Prepare for 2007 in proper form: (1) an income statement, (2) a retained earnings statement, (3) an ending balance sheet, and (4) closing entries.

the following are the items of receipts and payment of the bengal club as summarised 562171

The following are the items of Receipts and Payment of the Bengal Club as summarised from the books of account maintained by the secretary.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Opening Balance (Jan 1, 2008)

4,200

Manager’s Salary

1,000

Entrance Fees (2007)

1,000

Printing and Stationery

2,600

Entrance Fees (2008)

10,000

Advertising

1,800

Subscriptions (2007)

600

Fire Insurance

1,200

Subscriptions (2008)

15,000

Investments Purchased

20,000

Interest Received on Investments

3,000

Closing Balance Dec 31. 2008

7,600

Subscriptions (2009)

400

34,200

34,200

It was ascertained from enquiry that the following represented a fair picture of Income and Expenditure of the club for the year 2008 for audit purpose.

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

income

Rs

Manager’s Salary

1,500

Entrance Fees

10,500

Printing and Stationery

Subscription

I5,600

2,000

Add: Accrued

400

2,400

Advertising

1,600

Interest on Investments

4,000

Audit Fees

500

Fire Insurance

1,000

Depreciation

4,940

Excess of Income over Expenditure

18,160

30,100

30,100

Value of fixed assets as on Dec 31, 2007 were building Rs 44,000; cricket equipments Rs 25,000 and furniture Rs 4,000. The rates of depreciation are on building 5%, cricket equipments 10% and furniture 6%. You are required to prepare the Balance Sheets of the club as on Dec 31, 2007 and Dec 31, 2008.

prepare receipts and payments account for the year ending mar 31 2009 and the balanc 562172

Prepare Receipts and Payments Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet on that date from the following:

Income and Expenditure Account for the Year Ending Mar 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

income

Rs

Salaries

14,750

Interest

5,000

Stationery

2,500

Donations

7,500

Taxes and Rent

1,250

Subscriptions

12,500

Insurance

600

Miscellaneous Receipts

150

Other Expenses

900

Depreciations

R

Properties

1,875

Furniture

60

Books

50

1,985

Surplus

3,165

25,150

25,150

Dr.

Cr.

Other Information

Mar 31, 2008 (Rs)

Mar 31, 2009 (Rs)

Cash in Hand and at Bank

11,850

Shares and Debentures (Face value of Rs 1,50,000)

1,40,000

1,40,000

Subscription Outstanding

3,500

5,000

Subscription Received in Advance

600

800

Salaries Outstanding

250

500

Furniture

1,000

990

Investments

500

500

Properties

1,50,000

1,48,125

Books

1,750

1,950

Stationery Expenses Due

100

150

Stock of Stationery

500

400

the following is the income and expenditure account of the pals tennis club for the 562173

The following is the Income and Expenditure Account of the Pals Tennis Club for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

To Salaries

48,000

By Subscriptions

1,40,000

To Rent

21,600

By Entrance Fees

16,000

To Rates and Taxes

1,200

By Surplus on Publication

9,000

To Postage and Telephone

1,440

of Brochures

To Affiliation Fees to all India Lawn

2,400

By Profit on Sale of Old

2,400

Tennis Association

Sports as Sets

To Sports Materials

31,500

By Interest on 496 Investment

1,200

To Electricity Charge

2,400

By Miscellaneous Income

450

To Repairs and Maintenance of Court

19,200

To Depreciation on Assets e 10% of gross book value at the end of the year

9,600

To Surplus

35,710

1,73,050

1,73,050

The following further information is made available:

Balances

Balances

As on Mar 31, 2008

As on Mar 31, 2009

Rs

Rs

(i)

Sundry Assets

88,000

Bank Balance

9,600

Subscriptions in arrear

9,500

7,000

Subscription received in advance

2,800

5,200

4% Investments (Face value Rs 30,000)

24,000

24,000

(ii)

Expenses Outstanding

Salaries

1,200

2,400

Rent

1,800

3,600

Rates and Taxes

Nil

1,200

Tennis Court Maintenance

1,560

640

(iii)

Outstanding for Purchase of Sports Materials

2,800

5,900

(iv)

Prize Fund

9,200

6,500

(v)

The book value, as on Apr 1, 2008 of Sports Goods sold in the year was

8,000

(vi)

Prize fund is separately maintained.

5,600

All receipts are credited to it directly and expenditure is met out of the fund directly.

During the year, credits to the account amounted to

(vii)

Interest received in the year was only for two quarters

(viii)

The club was admitted as a member of all India Lawn

Tennis Federation on Oct 1, 2008 when it paid subscription fi ll Sep 30, 2009.

(ix)

Advertisement charges on brochure yet to be collected

900

(x)

A fi xed deposit was made on Mar 31, 2009 for

50,000

You are required to prepare the Receipts and Payments A/c for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet as on that date.

from the following receipts and payments account of bangalore club prepare income an 562174

From the following Receipts and Payments Account of Bangalore Club, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 and its Balance Sheet on that date.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Cash In Hand

8,000

Salary

4,000

Cash at Bank

20,000

Repair Expenses

1,000

Donations

10,000

Purchase of Furniture

12,000

Subscriptions

24,000

Miscellaneous Expenses

1,000

Entrance Fees

2,000

Purchase of Investments

12,000

Interest on Investments

200

Insurance Premium

400

Interest Received from Bank

800

Billiard Table

16,000

Sale of Old Newspaper

300

Paper, etc.

300

Sale of Drama Tickets

2,100

Drama Expenses

1,000

Cash In Hand (closing)

5,300

Cash at Bank (closing)

14,400

67,400

67,400

Information

  1. Subscriptions in arrears for 2008 Rs 1,800 and subscription in advance for 2009 Rs 700.
  2. Insurance premium outstanding Rs 80.
  3. Miscellaneous expenses pre paid Rs 180.
  4. 50% of Donation is to be capitals.
  5. Entrance Fees are to be treated as revenue income.
  6. 8% interest has accrued on investment for five months.
  7. Billiard Table costing Rs 60,000 was purchased during last year and Rs 44,000 were paid for it.

the following information was obtained from the books of chennai club as on mar 31 2 562175

The following information was obtained from the books of Chennai Club as on Mar 31, 2009 at the end of the first year of the club. You are required to prepare

  1. Receipts and Payments Account.
  2. Income and Expenditure A/c for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.
  3. The Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2009 on mercantile basis.
  1. Donations received for Building and Library Room.
  2. Other revenue income and actual receipts.

Revenue Income Rs.

Actual Receipts Rs.

Entrance Fees

8,500

8,500

Subscription

10,000

9,500

Locker Rents

300

300

Sundry Income

800

530

Refreshment Account

8,000

Other Revenue Expenditure and Actual Payments: Land (Cost Rs 5,000)

5,000

Furniture (Cost Rs 73,000)

65,000

Salaries

2,500

2,400

Maintenance of Play Grounds

1,000

500

Rent

4,000

4,000

Refreshment Account

4,000

Donations to the extent of Rs 12,500 were utilised for the purchase of library books, balance was still to be utilised. In order to keep it saber, 9% Govt. Bonds were purchased on Mar 31, 2009 for Rs 80,000. Remaining amount was put in the bank on Mar 31, 2009 under the term deposit. Depreciation @10% p.a. was to be provided for the whole year on furniture and library books.

from the following prepare the income and expenditure for the year ended dec 31 2008 562176

From the following prepare the Income and Expenditure for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 and a balance sheet as on that date:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance b/d

15,000

By Salaries

15,000

To Subscriptions

By Entertainment Expenses

6.000

2007

1,000

2008

20,000

2009

2,000

To Entertainment Receipts

10,000

By Electric Charges

2,000

To Sale of Old Furniture (cost Ps 1,000)

600

By General Expenses

3,000

To Sale of Newspapers

400

By Investments

10,000

By Stationery and Printing

2,000

By Newspapers

3,000

By Garden Expenses

2,000

By Furniture

3,000

By Balance c/d

3,000

49,000

49,000

The club has 250 members each paying an annual subscription of Rs 100. Rs 500 is still in arrears for subscriptions for 2007. Ten members had paid their subscriptions for 2008 as well.

Salaries paid included Rs 1,000 for 2007 and Rs 1,500 for 2009. Outstanding salaries for 2008 amounted to Rs 2,000.

On Jan 1, 2008, the club owned land and building valued at Rs 1,00,000 and furniture valued at Rs 11,000.

Interest for 3 months @6% p.a. as accrued on investments.

the receipts and payments account and the income and expenditure account of a recrea 562177

The Receipts and Payments Account and the Income and Expenditure Account of a recreation club for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 were as follows:

Receipts and Payments Account

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance b/d

15,000

By Book Purchased

10,000

To Subscription

By Printing and Stationery

2,000

6,000

43,000

49,000

To Interest

5,000

By Salary

15,000

To Donation for Special Fund

3,000

By Advertisement

2,000

To Rent

By Electricity Charges

4,000

1,500

3,000

4,500

By Balance c/d

43,500

76,500

76,500

Income and Expenditure Account

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Salary

18,000

By Interest

4,000

To Tent Hire

2,000

By Subscriptions

48,000

To Electricity Charges

4,000

By Rent

3,000

To Depreciation on Building

7,500

To Printing and Stationery

2,000

To Advertisement

1,500

To Surplus

20,000

55,000

55,000

The club’ assets as on Jan 1, 2008 were as follows:

Building Rs 1,50,000, Books Rs 1,00,000

Furniture Rs 10,000, Investments Rs 1,00,000

Literalities as on the date were Rs 500 for advertisement and Rs 1,000 for salary

You are required to prepare the Balance Sheets

  1. As on Dec 31, 2007
  2. As on Dec 31, 2008

the accounts set out below are submitted to you for audit pass comments and prepare 562178

The accounts set out below are submitted to you for audit. Pass comments and prepare corrected and proper final accounts for the year ending Dec 31, 2008.

Income and Expenditure Account as on Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Entrance fees (21 @ 100)

2,100

Salary and Wages

6,700

Fees for Life Membership

2,600

Secretary’s Salary

3,500

(5 @ Rs 520)

Annual Subscription

16,300

Rent, Wages, etc.

12,650

15,650.

Add: Paid in Advance 650

700

Printing and Postage

420

Interest on G.P Notes

Sundry Receipts

600

Repairs to Premises

1,240

Balance from last year

12,380

Interest on Bank Loan

570

Balance c/d

9,600

34.680

34,680

Treasurers Note

Subscriptions in arrears amount to Rs 1,200. Sundry traduces bills Rs 420 were outstanding on Dec 31 but have since been paid. The secretary’s salary has not yet been paid. The 3½12; % G.P. notes of the face value of Rs 20,000 were purchased at Rs 960 the lease of the club premises costs Rs 21,240, the balance of the bank loan now outstanding is Rs 10,000, secured by mortgage on the leasehold premises.

mrs parul vasanth is an advocate by profession and her receipts and payments for the 562180

Mrs Parul Vasanth is an advocate by Profession and her receipts and payments for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 are as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance b/d

33,050

By Rent (for 18 months to July 30, 2009)

22,500

To Fees

1,07,100

By Mobile Phone Charges

2,250

To Miscellaneous Receipts

100

By Salaries to Clerk

16,500

To Sale of Old Equipment

2,000

By journals

500

By Law Books (purchased on

2,500

July 1, 2008)

By Software Equipments

4,000

By Furniture (purchased on

3,500

Oct 1, 2008)

By Purchase of Stationeries

21,500

By Conveyance Expenses

25,000

By Drawings

30,000

By Miscellaneous Expenses

500

By Balance c/d

13,500

1,42,500

1,42,250

  1. Fees outstanding: on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 1,000, on Mar 31, 2009: Rs 2,500
  2. Stock of stationeries: on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 5,000, on Mar 31, 2009: Rs 9,300
  3. Creditors for stationeries: on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 50, on Mar 31, 2009: Rs 150
  4. Software equipment on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 25,000. Software equipment was sold as well as purchased on Jan 1, 2009 the cost of equipment sold benign Rs 3,000. Equipment is subject to depreciation of 20%. p.a.
  5. Furniture on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 2,500, library books on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 500. Depreciates Furniture by 10% and library books by 20%.
  6. Salary to clerk still payable is Rs 1,500
  7. 60% of conveyance is for professional purpose

You are required to prepare the Receipts and Expenditure of MRs Parul Vasanth for the year 2008–2009 and the Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2009.

you are required to prepare receipts and expenditure account of dr renu for the year 562181

Dr. Renu is a practicing surgeon. The Receipts and Payments Account for the year 2008 is as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

20,000

Salaries to Nurses

30,000

Fees

30,00,000

Rent

10,000

Miscellaneous Receipts

5,000

Journals

4,000

Sale of Old Equipment

20,000

Books for Library

16,000

(cost of Rs 30,000)

Purchases of Instruments

40,000

Stationery

400

Conveyance

3,000

Purchases of Medicines

50,000

Furniture

5,000

Drawings

1,50,000

Cash in Hand

36,600

3,45,000

3,45,000

Her position stood on Jan 1, 2008 as:

Equipment Rs 1,50,000; medicines Rs 20,000; fees outstanding Rs 4,000; books Rs 20,000.

Fees still outstanding Rs 10,000, salaries to nurses still payable Rs 4,000; stock of medicines Rs 4,000.

Depreciate Equipment by 10% and Books @ 20.

You are required to prepare Receipts and Expenditure Account of Dr Renu for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet on that date.

shree amp co is a firm of solicitors whose partners vasanth and sekar share profits 562182

Shree & Co is a firm of solicitors whose partners Vasanth and Sekar share profits equally after charging a management fee of 5% from the Vasanth for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009, the books maintained by the firm reveal the following particulars.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Capital

66,000

Salary Debts owing by the RIM

6,800

Drawings Vasanth Sekar

36,000

Office Rent

24,000

LI.C. Premium Paid

12,000

Office Expenses

7,200

Vasanth

24,000

Furniture and Library Docks

49,200

Sekar

92,000

Clients Disbursements

5,200

Salaries to Juniors and Clerks

64,000

Amount owing by clients for bills

34,400

Amount received from

10,000

of cost rendered

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Pending Matters

Profit Costs

2,84,000

Reserve against bills of cost

Fixed Deposits with Bank

30,000

not collected with work in progress

Bank Accounts Clients

63,600

as on Apr 1,2008

Office

13,260

Work in progress on Mar 31, 2009

I6,400

Information

  1. Capital accounts of partners at the beginning of the year were of equal amounts.
  2. Included in the bills of costs sent to clients are sundry disbursements like postage, telephone, etc. defied in the books of office expenses account. At the end of the year, items on the debit side of clients disbursements account, amounting to Rs 6,400, had not been charged to clients in bills of costs of these Rs 400 was received and credited to their accounts in the year.

You are required to prepare the Receipts and Expenditure Account for the year ended on Mar 2009 and a Balance Sheet of the firm on that date.

from the following trial balance and accompanying notes for adjustments prepare inco 562183

From the following trial balance and accompanying notes for adjustments, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet as on that date of a club:

Debit Balance

Rs

Credit Balance

Rs

Building

86,400

Rent

7,340

Crockery Jan 1, 2008

4,000

Sate of Tickets

13,400

Crockery purchased

2,000

Subscriptions

24,300

Printing and Stationery

1,140

Billiard Room Receipts

7,690

Billiard Board

20,800

Profit on Sale of Wire

2,400

Billiard Expenses

4,270

Entertainment Receipts

3,200

Arrear subscriptions Jan 1, 2008

2,250

Donations

17,000

Honorarium

6,750

Entrance Fees

450

Administration Expenses

13,690

Newspapers

240

Stock of Wire (Dec 31, 2008)

600

Creditors

6,270

Cash in Hand and at Bank

6,270

Capital Fund

65,880

Note for adjustments

  1. Stock of Stationery and Printing on Dec 31, 2008 Rs 70.
  2. Out of the total subscription Rs 2,250 represented arrears collected and Rs 1,520 paid in advance.
  3. Entrance fees to be capitalised.
  4. Out of the donations, Rs 7,200 represented donation to election fund and of the balance 50% shall be capitalised.
  5. Depreciate crockery on the following basis: 1/5 15 of their value is to be written off in the year of purchase 2/5 the in each of the next two yeaRs Of the stock of crockery as on Jan 1, 2008 (Rs 4,000) one half was one year old and the other half, two year old.

compute ex ante income of mr raj 562266

On Jan 1, 2008, Raj purchased an asset for Rs 3,50,000 and anticipated an annual cash flow of Rs 1,00,000 at the end of each year for the next 5 years. On Dec 31, 2008, he actually earned Rs 1,20,000 during 2008 (it was ascertained from his financial records) and anticipated an annual cash flow of Rs 1,50,000 at the end of each year for the next 4 years. The discount factors at 12% discount rate are given as follows:

Year

1

2

3

4

5

Discount factor

.893

.797

.712

.636

.567

Compute ex ante income of Mr Raj.

you are requested to compute the accounting income of mr vas 562267

Mr Vas started a business with a capital of Rs 5,00,000. The following information is extracted from his books of account for the year 2009:

Purchases

Cash:

Rs 1,50,000

Credit:

Rs 2,50,000

Sales

Cash:

Rs 4,00,000

Credit:

Rs 6,00,000

Payment to Suppliers

Rs 1,50,000

Expenses

Paid

Rs 40,000

Outstanding

Rs 60,000

Closing Stock

Rs 50,000

Fixed Assets

Rs 1,50,000

Depreciation on Fixed Assets : 10%

Collection from Customers

Rs 4,00,000

You are requested to compute the accounting income of Mr Vas.

state whether the following statements are true or false 562268

State whether the following statements are true or false:

  1. Revenues are a measure of inflow of assets.
  2. Business income is the net increase in the owner’s capital.
  3. Accounting income is not necessarily a business income.
  4. The terms net profit and net income are synonyms in the measurement of business income.
  5. Business income is based on the actual transactions.
  6. Business income need not be based on the revenue principle.
  7. Business income is an ex post income.
  8. Business income ignores the unrelated profits and losses resulting from the holding of fixed assets.
  9. Business income ignores historical cost concept.
  10. No standardised procedure exists for the measurement of business income.
  11. The doctrine of going concern (entity) is essential for the measurement of business income.
  12. Accounting period is not very essential for measurement of business income.
  13. The matching concept is an important basis for the computation of business income.
  14. Business income is based on purchasing power of the rupee.
  15. Economic income is consumption in the given period plus changes in the value of capital

fill in the blanks with appropriate word s 562269

Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s):

  1. Business income is defined as the increase in _______ measured by the excess of revenue over expenses.
  2. Revenues are a measure of _______ of assets.
  3. Expenses are a measure of _______ of assets.
  4. Net income is measured by comparing _______ _______ and _______.
  5. Business income is the net increase in _______.
  6. Revenue recognition is possible with the help of _______ concept.
  7. Unexpired costs are treated as _________.
  8. Business income also means _______ income.
  9. According to matching concept, all revenues and expenses (incurred to earn revenue) must belong to the same _______ period.
  10. Business income requires the measurement of expenses in terms of _______ cost.
  11. Business income is an _______ income.
  12. Business income is based on _______ transaction.
  13. Business income ignores unrealised _______ and _______.
  14. The doctrine of _______ states that the business will continue its operations for the foreseeable future.
  15. The accrual process aims to match _______ and _______ with a definite accounting period.

state whether the following statements are true or false 562270

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Revenue is the gross inflow of cash.
  2. Net receipts are recognised as revenue.
  3. Flow of revenue must be related to a particular specific period only.
  4. Revenue includes capital introduced by the owner.
  5. Professionals follow accrual accounting basis only.
  6. Revenue is recognised only at the time of sale of products or performance of services.
  7. AS–9 deals with valuation of inventories.
  8. Appreciation in the value of fixed assets is an important item for revenue recognition.
  9. Revenue recognition is mainly concerned with the timing of recognition of revenue in the profit and loss account.
  10. Revenue should be recognised when the equipment is installed and accepted by the customer.
  11. Realisation principle is applicable to the recognition of expenses also.
  12. Direct identification of expenses with revenues is essential in recognition of expenses.

from the following information of vas ltd prepare machinery account for three years 562279

From the following information of Vas Ltd prepare Machinery Account for three years ending Mar 31, 2009, by providing depreciation @ 20% p.a. under Straight Line Method

Date

Transactions

Rs

Apr 1, 2006

Purchased a second hand machinery I

1,20,000

Apr 1, 2006

Repairs on it

30,000

Oct 1, 2006

Purchased a new machinery II

3,00,000

Apr 1, 2007

Spent repairs on machine II

3,000

Sep 30, 2008

Sold machinery I

67,500

Sep 30, 2008

Purchased a new machinery III

4,50,000

from the following information of ra amp co ltd prepare machinery account for three 562280

From the following information of Ra & Co Ltd, prepare Machinery Account for three years ending Mar 31, 2009 by charging depreciation @ 20% p.a. applying WDV Method.

Date

Transactions

Rs

Apr 1, 2006

Purchased a second hand machinery I

1,20,000

Apr 1, 2006

Spent for repairs

30,000

Oct 1, 2006

Purchased a new machine II

3,00,000

Apr 1, 2007

Spent for repairs on new machine II

3,000

Sep 30, 2008

Sold machine I

67,500

Sep 30, 2008

Purchased a new machine III

4,50,000

Illustration figures are the same as that of the previous illustration but the Method of Deprecation differs here.

on july 1 2005 shree ltd purchased a second hand machinery for rs 40 000 and spent r 562281

On July 1, 2005, Shree Ltd purchased a second hand machinery for Rs 40,000 and spent Rs 6,000 on re conditioning and installing it. On Jan 1, 2006, the firm purchased machinery worth Rs 24,000. On June 30, 2007, (the machinery purchased on Jan 1, 2006) was sold for Rs 16,000. On July 1, 2007, another new machinery was purchased on installment basis, payment for which was to be made as follows:

June 30, 2008

Rs 10,000

July 1, 2008

Rs 12,000

June 30, 2009

Rs 11,000

Payments in 2008 and 2009 include interest of Rs 2,000 and Rs 1,000 respectively.

The company writes off depreciation @ 10% on original cost. The accounts are closed every year on Mar 31. Show the Machinery Account for three years ending Mar 31, 2008.

mr prani and mr proper are in partnership as proprietors of a boarding school sharin 562148

Mr. Prani and Mr. Proper are in partnership as proprietors of a boarding school, sharing profits Mr. Praini Rs 3/5 and Mr. Proper Rs 2/5. The Trial Balance extracted from their Books as on Mar 31, 2009 which coincident with the end of the last terms of the year was as follows:

Debits

Rs

Credits

Rs

Furniture and Finings at cost

7,840

Capital Account

Stock as on Apr 1. 2008

1,120

Mr. Pran

21,000

Food

Mr. Proper

16,800

Fuel

560

Reserve for Depreciation on

Salaries, Wages and Medical Attention

33,600

Furniture and Fittings

5,040

Purchases:

Fees and Extras

1,23,760

Food

37,520

Fuel

5,040

Repairs

3,260

Laundry

10,080

Stationery

2,520

Drawings:

Mr. Pran

13,300

Mr. Proper

8,400

Cast at Back

43,260

1,66,600

1,66,600

Additional Information

  1. On Mar 31, 2009 stocks of food and fuel were Rs 1680 and Rs 420.
  2. On Mar 31, 2009, amounts owing for food and laundry Rs 1,260 and Rs 840.
  3. Fees, other than extras are payable in advance and accounts are sent out at the beginning of each farm each account includes extras for the previous terms. At Mar 31, 2009, all amounts due had been received with the exception of Rs 1,176 (not yet accounted, of which Rs 476 was bad). The extras for the last term, not yet filled Rs 4,200.
  4. No interest is to be credited on capital accounts.
  5. Mr Pran who owns the premises is to be credited with Rs 5,600 for the use of the premises.
  6. Repairs include Rs 560 for the purpose of a steel cupboard, which is to be capitalised under furniture and fittings.
  7. Depreciations on furniture and fittings are to be provided at the rate of 5% p.a. on the cost at the end of the year.
  8. Mr. Sweet, the senior Master is entitled to 5% of the profit after charging such commission.

Prepare the revenue account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance sheet on that date:

from the following trial balance of the people rsquo s education society as at mar 3 562149

From the following Trial Balance of the People’s Education Society as at Mar 31, 2009, prepare an Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending at Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

Buildings

1,90,000

Scholarship fund investment

50,000

Furniture and Fixtures

52,500

Capital Fund

4,60,000

Additions to Furniture and Fixtures

10,000

Donations received towards

Capital Fund

42,500

Vehicles

40,000

Entrance Fees

10,000

Additions to Vehicles

10,000

Course Fees

2,40,000

Sundry Debtors

8,000

Examination Fees

15,000

Sundry Creditors

5,000

Ruts received from letting

of auditorium

47,500

Investments

2,50,000

Salaries

2,20,000

Interest received on Investments

30,000

Printing and Stationery

30,000

Interest received on Scholarship

6,000

Scholarships awarded

5,000

Fund Investment

Other Expenses

50,000

Scholarship Fund resave

44,000

Cash at Bank

4,500

Government Grant received

20,000

Additional Information

  1. Depreciation is to be provided at 5% on buildings, 10% on furniture and fixtures and 90% on vehicles.
  2. Additional rent received in advance amounts to Rs 7,500 while there is an amount of Rs 10,000 outstanding under this head.
  3. One month’s salary is outstanding.

the following particulars relate to the cosmopolitan club for the year ended dec 31 562150

The following particulars relate to the cosmopolitan club for the year ended Dec 31, 2008. You are required to prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Rs

Balance from last year

4,700

Salaries

2,400

Entrance Fees

600

Electricity

240

Subscription

Rs

Newspapers and Journals

1,050

2007

100

Utensils

400

2008

7,000

Payments to Creditors

2,000

2009

150

7,250

Balance Carried lanyard

2,300

Profits from Refreshments

200

to next year

locker Rents

400

Sundry Income

240

13,390

13,390

The assets and literalities on Jan 1, 2008 were as follows: Utensils: Rs 1,600, furniture Rs 5,000, consumable stores: Rs 700, Creditors: Rs 2,400.

On Dec 31, 2008 value of consumable stores was Rs 1,400 creditors amounted to Rs 1,100, the subscriptions outstanding were Rs 150; and the interest accrued on fixed deposit was Rs 50.

the following balances is obtained from the books of jaipur cricket as on mar 31 200 562151

The following balances is obtained from the books of Jaipur Cricket as on Mar 31, 2008 and on Mar 31, 2009.

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Building

1,60,000

1,71,000

Furniture

80,000

61,200

Advance Subscription

3,000

2,000

Pre paid Expenses

1,600

2,000

Outstanding Expenses

6,000

2,400

Arrears of Subscriptions

6,000

10,000

Sports Equipments

48,000

43,200

Investments

24,000

Books

30,000

32,400

Cash

32,000

34,200

Consider the following information relevant to the year 2008–2009:

  1. Deprecation provided during the year:

Building:

Rs 9,000

Furniture:

Rs 6,800

Sports Equipment:

Rs 10,800

Books:

Rs 3,600

  1. Some old furniture standing in the books for Rs 12,000 on Mar 31, 2008 was sold for Rs 8,000.
  2. The club had 300 members on Mar 31, 2009. No fresh member was admitted during the year but 10 members left the club on Oct 1, 2008.
  3. Subscription payable: Rs 30 per month.
  4. Entrance fees received Rs 10,000 has been capitalised and you are required to prepare the Receipts and Payments Account and Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

from the following trial balance and other information given below prepare income an 562152

From the following trial balance and other information given below, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2008.

Debit Balances

Rs

Credit Balances

Rs

Building

1,25,000

Admission Fees

2,500

Furniture

20,000

Tuition Fees Received

1,00,000

Library Books

30,000

Creditors for Supplies

3,000

Investments@ 9%

1,00,000

Rent for the School Hall

2,000

Salaries

1,00,000

Miscellaneous Receipts

6,000

Stationery

7.500

Government Grant

70,000

General Expenses

4,000

General Fund

2,00,000

Sports Expenses

3,000

Donation for Library Books

12,500

Cash at Bank

10,000

Sales of Old Furniture

4,000

Cash in Hand

500

4,00,000

4,00,000

Fees yet to be received for the year are Rs 5,000; Salaries yet to be paid Rs 6,000, Furniture costing Rs 7,500 was purchased on July 1, 2008. The book value of the furniture sold was Rs 10,000, on Jan 1, 2008. Depreciation is to be charged @10% p.a. on furniture 15% p.a. on library Books and 5% p.a. on building.

the following is the receipts and payments account of an amusement club mumbai recei 562153

The following is the Receipts and Payments Account of an Amusement Club, Mumbai Receipts and Payments NC for the year ended Dec 31, 2008

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

Rs

Salary of Secretary

7,200

Cash

120

Honorarium

900

Bank

6,000

6,120

Wage

4,800

Subscription (including for 2007 Rs 300)

18,000

Charities

4,000

Sale of Old Furniture

1,500

Printing and Stationery

600

(on Jan 1,2008)

Postage

200

Sale of Newspapers

100

Rents and Taxes

2,400

Legacies

6,000

Upkeep of the Land

1,000

Interest on Investments

2,400

Sports Materials

5,000

(Cost of Investments Rs 40,000)

Balance C/d

29,700

Endowment Fund Receipts

20,000

Proceeds of Concerts

1,600

Advertisement in the Year Book

80

55,800

55,800

Current Assets and Liabilities:

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Subscriptions in arrears

400

900

Subscriptions in advance

600

1,200

Furniture

4,000

1,200

Depreciation was 10% p.a on the furniture left after selling a part of it.

50% of legacies may be capitalised. Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

prepare income and expenditure for the year ending mar 31 2009 and a balance sheet o 562154

Prepare Income and Expenditure for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date from the following details of Rock City Tennis Club, Tiruchirapalli.

Receipts and Payments Account for the year ending as at Mar 31, 2009

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Subscription Arrears

1,400

New Equipment

1,800

Subscription Current

22,000

Repair to Nets

1,200

Locker Rents

5,000

New Balls

10,000

Cultural Show Receipts

29,000

Band Fees

3,200

Sale of Old Balls

2,400

Match Expenses

1,600

Donation

2,000

Rates on Club House

4,800

Caters Old Dues

7,000

Caters Current

18,400

Information

  1. The Club has 60 members and the subscription rate is Rs 400 per year.
  2. On Mar 31, 2009, Rs 1,000 owing for tennis ball and the rates paid includes Rs 1,200 relating to the following year.
  3. Equipment is to be depreciated at 10% p.a. on cost including new equipment purchased.
  4. On Apr 1, 2008 the club had the following absents.

Rs

Freehold Club House:

50,000

Cash at Balance:

18,000

Equipment:

27,000

Cash in Hand:

520

prepare receipts and payments account for the year ending mar 31 2009 and the balanc 562155

Prepare Receipts and Payments Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet on that date from the following.

Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

Salaries

14,750

Interest

5,000

Stationery

2,500

Donations

7,500

Taxes and Rent

1,250

Subscriptions

12,500

Insurance

600

Miscellaneous Receipts

150

Other Expenses

900

Depreciation

Rs

Properties

1,875

Furniture

60

Books

50

1,985

Surplus

3,115

25,150

25,150

Other Information

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Cash in Hand and at Bank

11,850

Shares and Debentures

1,40,000

1,40,000

(Face Value of Rs 1,50,000)

Subscription Outstanding

3,500

5,000

Subscription received in advance

600

800

Salaries Outstanding

250

500

Properties

1,50,000

1,48,125

Furniture

1,000

990

Investments

500

500

Books

1,750

1,950

Stationery Expenses Due

100

150

Stock of Stationery

500

400

from the following particulars relating to r m charitable hospital prepare 1 receipt 562156

From the following particulars relating to R.M. Charitable Hospital, prepare (1) Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2008, and the Balance Sheet as on that date.

Income and Expenditure Account for the Year Ended Mar 31, 2008

Expenditure

Rs

income

Rs

To Medicare’s used

59,960

By Subscription

1,12,000

To Honorarium to visiting Doctors

24,000

By Donations

19,000

To Salaries

55,000

By Interest on Investment @ 11%

22,000

To Printing and Stationery

2,200

pa.

To Electricity and Water

950

By Income from Film

To Rent

12,000

Show proceeds 22,900

21,340

To Depreciation In Furniture and

4,200

Less: Expenses 1 560

Fixtures

To Depreciation on Equipments

6,300

To Surplus over Expenditure

9,530

1,74,340

1,74,340

Additional Information

Dec 31, 2007 Rs

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Subscriptions Due

240

320

Subscriptions Received in Advance

128

200

Electricity and Water Bills Unpaid

184

230

Stock of Medicines

15,640

19,500

Estimated Value of Equipment

23,200

27,800

Furniture and Fixtures (Cost less Depreciation)

42,000

37,800

Land

20,000

Interest Accrued on Investment in 11%

Debentures costing Rs 2,05,000 (Face value Rs 1,00,000)

7,500

7,500

Cash in Hand

680

320

Cash at Bank

18,000

the income and expenditure account of chennai club for the year ended mar 31 2009 is 562157

The Income and Expenditure Account of Chennai Club for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 is as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

To Salaries

24,000

By Subscriptions

65,000

To Rent

6,000

By Entrance Fees

10,000

To Printing and Stationery

1,500

By Contribution for Annual Dinner

8,000

To Traveling Expenses

3,000

By Profit on Annual Sports

I,000

To Annual Dinner Expenses

7,000

To Secretary’s Honorarium

6,000

To General Expenses

3,000

To Interest and Bank Charges

900

To Audit Fees

1,000

To Books and Periodicals

1,500

To Depreciation

1,250

To Excess of Income over Expenditure

28,850

84,000

84,000

The Income and Expenditure Account has been prepared after the following adjustments.

Rs

Subscriptions outstanding on Mar 31, 2008

6,000

Subscriptions received in advance on Mar 3, 2008

4,500

Subscription outstanding on Mar 3, 2009

4,000

Subscription received in advance on Mar 31, 2009

7,000

Salaries outstanding at the beginning of the year and at the end of the year were Rs 2,000 and Rs 1,500, respectively.

Audit fees for the year has not been paid. Previous years audit fees Rs 750 was paid during the year.

The clubs assets on Mar 31, 2008 were as follows:

Freehold land Rs 50,000; sports equipments Rs 13,000.

At the end of the year, after the depreciations the equipments amounted to Rs 13,500. Bank loan of Rs 5,000 as on Mar 31, 2008 was still due at the end of current year. On Mar 31, 2009, Cash at Bank amounted to Rs 34,850.

You are required to prepare the Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

following is the income and expenditure account of hyderabad club for the year ended 562158

Following is the Income and Expenditure Account of Hyderabad Club for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009.

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

To Salaries

31,500

By Subscriptions

90,000

To Stationery

2,500

By Donations

15,000

To Postage

1,600

By Sale of Furniture Profit

2,000

To Sundry Expenses

9,400

By Government Grant

8,000

To Repairs and Maintenance Expenses

7,200

By Interest on Fixed Deposit

1,600

To Sport Expenses

3,600

To Swimming Pool Expenses

4,000

To Affiliation Fee

1,000

To Electricity

6,500

To Billiards Room Expenses

2,500

To Periodicals

2,400

To Audit Fees

500

To Depreciation on

2,000

To Sports Equipment Building

5,000

Furniture

900

To Surplus

36,000

1,16,000

1,16,600

The above account is prepared after the adjustments from:

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Building

2,00,000

1,95,000

Sports Ground

2,00,000

2,00,000

Sports Equipment

12,000

18,000

Furniture

10,000

Fixed Deposits

16,000

16,000

Bank A/c – savings

50,000

Subscriptions Outstanding

10,000

4,000

Subscriptions received in advance

6,000

2,000

Stock of Stationery

500

1,000

Audit Fee Outstanding

400

500

Salaries Outstanding

1,000

2,000

Affiliation fee paid in Advance

500

Cash on hand on Mar 31, 2008 was Rs 2,500. New Furniture of Rs 18,000 has been purchased on credit but not entered in books. Depreciate the furniture @ 5%.

Prepare Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

the following is the receipts and payments account of a club for the year ended mar 562159

The following is the Receipts and Payments Account of a club for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Cash in Hand

300

Honorarium to Secretary and Treasurer

9,600

Balance as per

Rents and Taxes

2,520

Bank Pass Book

16,460

16,760

Printing and Stationery

940

Subscriptions

21,420

Other Miscellaneous Expenses

3,060

Receipts from Fees

4,800

Ground Man’s Wages

1,680

Net Proceeds from Variety

8,540

Expenditure on Fees

4,780

Entertainment

Payments for Bar Purchases

11,540

Bank Interest

460

Repairs

640

Bar Takings

14,900

New Two Wheeler (less sale proceeds of old

25,200

Cash Overspent

40

Rs 6,000)

Balance as per Pass Book

6,960

66,920

66,920

Additional Information

Apr 1, 2009 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Subscriptions Due

2,400

1,960

Unperfected Cheque being payment on printing

180

60

Club Premises at cost

58,000

Depreciation on Club Premises

37,600

Two Wheeler at cost

24,380

Depreciation on Two Wheeler

20,580

Value of Bar Stock

1,420

1,740

Amount due for Bar Purchases

1,180

860

Cost overspent represents amount of honorarium to the treasurer not drawn due to shortage of funds. But the total salary payable to him for the year was already included in Rs 9,600.

Depreciation is to be provided @ 5% p.a. on the written down value of the premises and @ 15% p.a. on two wheeler for the whole year.

You are required to adjust Bank Balance according to Cash Book and prepare an Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

information payments made to creditors for provisions rs 52 500 collection from cred 562161

How will you deal with the following items while preparing the Restaurant Trading Account and Income and Expenditure Account of a club for the year ending on Mar 31, 2009.

Apr 1, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Stock of provisions

1,500

19,000

Dues from members for provisions

1,500

2,000

Creditors to provisions

5,000

2,500

Creditors to Provisions

Information: Payments made to creditors for provisions: Rs 52,500; Collection from credit members for Provisions Rs 44,500; cash sales being 10% of total sales. Cash purchases being 1/1 1 of the total purchases, wages, fund, etc. Rs 2,500.

the following is summary of the cash book for the year ending mar 31 2009 562162

The following is summary of the cash book for the year ending Mar 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

9,480

Wages Outdoor Staff

26,760

Subscriptions

59,440

Restaurant Purchase

1,00,800

Entrance Fees

6,400

Rent 18 months (July 30, 2009)

15,000

Restaurant Receipts

1,13,600

Rates

5,400

Games and Competition Receipts

27,280

Secretary’s Salary

6,240

Due to Secretary for Petty Expenses

160

Lighting

14,400

Composition Prizes

8,000

Printing and Postage, etc.

12,000

Fixed Deposit

16,000

Balance C/d

11,760

2,16,360

2,16,360

On Apr 1, 2008 the clubs assets were furniture Rs 96,000; restaurant stock Rs 5,200, stock of prizes Rs 1,600, Rs 10,400 was owing for supplies to the restaurant on Mar 31, 2009, the restaurant stock Rs 6,000, prizes in hand were Rs 1,000, while the club owed Rs 11,200 for restaurant supplies. It was also found that subscriptions unpaid at Mar 31, 2009 amounted to Rs 2,000, and that the figure of Rs 59,440 shown in the cash took included Rs 1,400, in respect of previous year and Rs 800 paid in advance for the following year.

Prepare an account showing the profit or loss made on the restaurant and a General Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009 together with a Balance Sheet as on that date, after writing 10% off the furniture.

vasant sport and social clubs financial year on mar 31 the assets and liabilities of 562163

Vasant sport and social clubs financial year on Mar 31. The assets and liabilities of the club at dates stated as follows:

As on Mar 31, 2008 Rs

As on Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Equipment

50,000

56,000

Subscription in Arrears

4,000

3,600

Subscription in Advance

2,600

2,200

Creditors for Bar Stocks

7,000

8,600

Bar Stocks

16,000

12,000

Electricity Owning

2,010

2,800

Lottery Fund

1,000

Bank Balance

14,460

In the year to Mar 31, 2009 the cash receipts

Subscriptions (including Rs 1,200 of arrears from previous year)

42,000

Bar Trading

82,000

Annual Dinner/Dance Sale of Tickets

48,000

Sale of Lottery Tickets

3,600

In the same period the following payments have been made

Affiliation Fees (for four years)

2,000

Purchase of Equipment

16,000

Bar Stocks

41,000

Barman’s Wages

15,000

Catering (dinner/dance)

28,800

Hair of Baud

6,000

Lottery Prizes

1,200

Rent of Hall

30,000

Printing and Postage

4,000

Electricity

11,620

Honorary Secretary’s Expenses

2,440

Repairs to Equipment

6,000

Note: Subscription arrears of previous year written off Rs 800

Prepare:

(1) Bar Trading Account (2) Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 and (3) Balance Sheet as on that date.

following is the summary of bank transactions of a club during the year 2008 562164

Following is the summary of bank transactions of a club during the year 2008.

Receipts and Payments Account

Dr.

r.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Petty Cash in Hand

300

By Rent

1,200

To Balance as per Pass Book

4,000

By Entertainment

1.600

To Subscriptions

5,000

By Advertisementl

400

To Entertainment

3,800

(For 2007 Rs 100) i

To Legacy

1,600

By Capital Expenditure

4.000

To Donation for Books

1,000

By Upkeep of Grounds

600

To General Donation

1,000

By Bank Charges

60

By Salary

3.000

By Petty Expenses

160

By Balance as per Pass Book

5540

By Petty Cash in Hand

140

16,700

16,700

Additional Information

Jan 1, 2008 Rs

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Unperfected cheque, being payment for rent

200

100

Interest on fixed deposit of Rs 20,000 not entered in the Pass Book

1,200

Entry in respect of bank charges was not passed through the cash book

60

A member deposited subscription for 2009, direct into bank, not passed through cash book

40

Cheque deposited for subscription but not yet cleared by the bank.

1,600

1,200

You are required to prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and Balance Sheet as on that date.

an amusement club in a city prepared the following receipts and payment account for 562165

An amusement club in a city prepared the following Receipts and Payment Account for the year ended on Dec 31, 2008 which showed a deficit of Rs 7,260:

Rs

Rs

Receipts:

Subscriptions

31,065

Fair Receipts

3,600

Variety Show Receipts

6,405

Interest

345

Bar Collections

11,175

Cash Spent more

500

53,090

Payments:

Premises

15,000

Honorarium to Secretary

6,000

Rent

1,200

Rates and Taxes

1,890

Printing and Stationery

705

Sundry Expenses

2,675

Wages

1,260

Fair Expenses

3,585

Bank Purchases and Payments

8,655

Repairs

480

New Moped (Less: Proceeds of old moped of Rs 4,500.00)

18,900

60,350

Deficit

7,260

Jan 1, 2008 Rs

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Cash in Hand

225

Bank Balance as per Pass book

12,345

5,220

Cheque issued not presented for Sundry Expenses

135

45

Subscriptions Due

1,800

1,470

Premises at Cost

43,500

58,500

Accumulated Depreciation on Premises

28,200

Moped at Cost

18,285

23,400

Accumulated Depreciation Moped

15,435

Bar Stock

1,065

1,305

Creditors for Bar Purchases

885

645

  1. Cash overspent represents honorarium to secretary not withdrawn due to cash deficit and his annual honorarium is Rs 6,000.
  2. Depreciations on premises and moped are to be provided at 5% and 20% on written down value.

Prepare the correct Receipts and Payments A/c, Income and Expenditure A/c and Balance Sheet (for Dec 31, 2008).

vasant sport and social clubs financial year on mar 31 the assets and liabilities of 562167

The Income and Expenditure Account of a club is given below (perhaps prepared by one who does not thoroughly knows the accounting principles).

Income and Expenditures as on Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

As

To Balance b/d

Rs

4,100

By Salaries Paid

Rs

8,320

To Subscriptions for 2008,

9,000

By Stationery Spent

1,440

Add: Recd for 2007

160

Add: Stock of Stationery

160

1.600

Add: Recd for 2009

320

9,480

By Telephone Expenses Paid

400

To Interest received on

2,000

(including paid for last year)

5% Rs 80,000

By Balance c/d

5,260

Investments in Hand on Jan 1, 2008

15,580

15,580

Additional Information

  1. On Dec 31, 2007, building stood at Rs 40,000, and it is required to write off depreciation at 5% p.a.
  2. Telephone rent outstanding on Dec 31, 2008: Rs 500.
  3. Subscription in arrears on account of 2008: Rs 400.

You are called upon to give your comments on this. Then you are required to prepare the revised final accounts of the items shown in the problem.

from the following so called balance sheet you are required to correct the mistakes 562168

From the following so called Balance Sheet, you are required to correct the mistakes and make proper final accounts of the social club for the year ending Dec 31, 2008.

Balance Sheet for the year 2008

Receipts

Rs

Expenditure

Rs

Opening Balance

7,500

Rent and Expenses

20,400

Arrears of Subscription

1,100

Clerical Assistance

2,500

Subscription (current year)

16,400

Cost of Dance

1,500

Dance tickets Sold

2,100

Cost of Concrete

2,100

Concert Tickets Sold

1,400

Owing for Dance Tickets

500

Refreshments Sold

23,500

Owing for Concert Tickets

700

Receipts from Games

1,700

Refreshments Bought

17,000

Donations for IntermentsA4

1,900

Stock of Refreshment

1,500

Subscription Owing

800

Cost of Instruments

3,500

Closing Balance

5,100

55,600

55,600

from the figures given below prepare an income and expenditure account for 2008 562169

From the figures given below prepare an Income and Expenditure Account for 2008.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Opening Balance

200

By Salaries

4,800

In Hand

1,600

At Bank

To Subscriptions :

By Rent

500

500

8,300

600

9,400

To Sale of investments

2,000

By Stationery and Postage

200

To Sale of old Furniture (Book Value)

300

By Bicycle Purchase

300

By National Saving Certificate

3,000

By Help to Needy Students

2,000

By Balance

In Hand

300

At Bank

2,400

2,700

13,500

13,500

Subscriptions for 2008 still receivable were Rs 700 interest due on savings certificates Rs 100 and rent unpaid but due was Rs 60.

your analysis should address and include answers to the following questions 561853

Your analysis should address and include answers to the following questions. You MUST use complete sentences. Proper grammar, punctuation and spelling are required. Please list the question above each answer so the Instructor will know which question you are addressing: 1. What is the company’s registered name? 2. What is the company’s standard industrial classification (SIC code)? 3. What is the company’s state or country of incorporation? 4. What is the company’s fiscal year end? 5. Are you reporting on a consolidated entity? 6. In which countries or geographical regions (if any) does the company operate? 7. Which two reporting periods of comparative financial information will you be analyzing? 8. In what currency are the company’s financial statements denominated? 9. On which stock exchange(s) is the company’s stock listed? 10. Summarize the company’s business operations as discussed on the Cover Page in part I of the company’s 10 K or in the footnotes to their annual report. 11. Who are the company’s major competitors? This can be found under competitive position in part I of the SEC filing or in the footnotes to the financial statements. You can also simply “Google” a search for your companies’ competitors.

i need help with city of smithville chapter 4 i downloaded the instructions and the 561886

I need help with City of Smithville Chapter 4.. I downloaded the instructions and the excel worksheet it has to be done on. Ive already got part of the work done, but am stuck right now if you could help?

Document Preview:

Accounting for Governmental and Not for Profit Entities Final Project This is the final project which is 20% of your grade. The information you need to complete this project is found mainly in chapters 3 and 4; the bulk of the information is in chapter 4. Accounting is a large field covering taxes, reporting, governmental, non profit, auditing, etc. and it is important to know where to go to get answers to questions. Everything question can be answered and journal entries can be found in chapters 3 and 4 but it will take some time and a little study to extract the information you need. Please take time for this project as it will bring this class together for you. Begin by putting the following ending balances, which will be your beginning balance, into T accounts on the provided excel spreadsheet. If you do not record these beginning balances your accounts will not be accurate and the closing entries will be incorrect, so please do this first. CITY OF SMITHVILLE Governmental Activities Government wide Level Post Closing Trial Balance As of December 31, 2013 General Ledger Account Title Debits Credits Cash $ 281,410 Taxes Receivable—Delinquent 618,706 Estimated Uncollectible Delinquent Taxes $ 36,890 Interest and Penalties Receivable on Taxes 69,380 Estimated Uncollectible Interest and Penalties 18,226 Due from State Government 500,000 Inventory of Supplies 60,000 Land 4,180,000 Infrastructure 9,862,000 Accumulated Depreciation—Infrastructure 2,595,600 Buildings 6,296,000 Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 1,583,000 Equipment 3,529,000 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment 1,342,000 Vouchers Payable 482,844 Tax Anticipation Notes Payable 375,000 Due to Federal Government 148,600 Due to State Government 27,300 Net Position—Net Investment in Capital Assets 18,346,400 Net Position—Unrestricted 440,636 Totals $25,396,496 $25,396,496 The following budget for the General Fund of the City of Smithville was…

if you are working in a pair email the names of your pair to your cou 561911

  1. If you are working in a pair, email the names of your pair to your Course Coordinator (CC) by the end of Week 3. Remember, both students have to confirm the pair. If you are an internal student and have not done so, your CC will email you with the name and email address of your pair.
  2. Complete Task 1 of the Practice Set, beginning on page 4. This will teach you how to use MYOB. Make sure that you use the sample data file supplied with the purchase of your Prac Set.
  3. Complete Task 2 of the Practice Set, beginning on page 105. Make sure you use the data file provided with the purchase of your Prac Set and NOT the sample data file used in Task 1. Ensure that you print out all of the schedules, etc and check them against the information provided.
  4. Complete Task 3, beginning on page 109.
  5. Complete Task 4, beginning on page 119.
  6. Complete Task 5, beginning on page 123 – up to and including PRINTOUT 17. You do NOT have to complete PRINTOUTS 18 and 19.

Submit ALL reports printed out as requested in the above requirements, saved in PDF format. This means that you will submit 17 printouts in total.
NOTE: If you miss one of these reports, you will not receive marks for it. If you submit the wrong report, you will not receive any marks for it. It is very important that you follow all instructions and examples from the Practice set for the type of reports that you print. Some printouts are worth far more than others and different components of MYOB are graded in each report. Please refer to the marking scheme below for a breakdown of how much each report is worth.

PART B – REFLECTIVE WRITING (all students)

Please note that each student’s reflective piece must be submitted separately for privacy.

REQUIREMENTS FOR THOSE WORKING IN A PAIR

Throughout this assignment you have worked in a partnership with another student. If this student was your partner in Fox Fitness, explain how you would have structured the partnership arrangement, such as distribution of profits etc. Justify your answer by explaining how much work each of you put into the practice set and your working relationship during the course of

Attachments:

martin a and steele f 2010 sustainability in key professions 561915

BUACC 2614 – Management Accounting 2 Semester 1, 2014 Group Assignment According to Martin and Steele (2010, p.13), “The two principal professional associations in Australia – CPA Australia (the CPA) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia (the Institute) have indicated their awareness of the significance of issues of sustainability reporting and development of appropriate skill sets in word and in deed. The commitment of both organisations to sustainability principles has been shown by their adoption of, and support for, sustainability focused reporting approaches and by their opting to take up membership of the Accounting for Sustainability Forum”. Martin A and Steele F (2010) Sustainability in Key Professions: Accounting. A report prepared by the Australian Research Institute in Education for Sustainability for the Australian Government Department of the Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts. In a two part essay: a. Consider the above. Discuss the stance and initiatives of the Australian accounting profession on corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability. Include your views on the role of accounting and the accountant on CSR and sustainability. b. Discuss the way in which BHP Billiton has demonstrated its social and environmental accountability. NOTE: BHP has been publishing Sustainability Reports or alternatively Annual Health, Safety, Environment and Community Reports for over a decade. Please note: good starting points for your research are: the textbook (Chapter 17); the IFAC’s International Guidance Document on Environmental Management Accounting and the websites of the CPA and ICAA. For example, go to: http://www.cpaaustralia.com.au/professionalresources/practice management/toolkit/environmental accounting 2 Also go to: http://www.bhpbilliton.com/home/aboutus/sustainability/reports/D ocuments/2013/BHPBillitonSustainabilityReport2013_Interactive.pdf http://www.smh.com.au/environment/bhp mines set to damagelifegiving swamps 20100217 odzf l http://www.abc.net.au/news/2013 01 07/an radio doco3a oktedi/4455092 You may also choose to refer to other media reports on BHP’s environmental impact. Please note the following: • Format: Essay • Contribution to overall assessment: 25% • Length: 2000 – 2500 words • Due date:29 May 2014 Your work must comply with the University’s General Guide for the Presentation of Academic Work. http://federation.edu.au/faculties and schools/faculty ofbusiness/the business school/current students/?a=42848 • This is a group assignment. Each group needs to have 2 to 3 members in it. Please organise yourselves into groups. • Please make sure that names and ID numbers of all group members are stated on the cover sheet of your submission. As this is a group assignment, each member of a group is awarded the same mark. Working in groups has its pros and cons. I am sure that you will hold constructive and energetic group discussions on the issues at hand. In case of any disagreements, you will be able to resolve them in a democratic and rational way. There will be times when you may have to agree to disagree with each other. Invariably different group members bring different skills to a project; it is up to you to make the best of it. I believe one can learn a lot by discussing the issues with one’s colleagues. If you happen to find your group members are “not pulling their weight” or there are problems with any member’s commitment, then please try to resolve those issues amongst yourselves. Open and honest communication always helps. If you are unable to resolve these issues, you are most welcome to see me and we will try to sort out the problems together. Do this as soon as possible and certainly before the due date 3 • BUACC2614, Management Accounting 2 • Semester 1, 2014 • Group Assignment Bases of assessment HD P F Content Identification of relevant issues. Research Selection of relevant material. A demonstration of critical evaluation of the material. Expression of your viewpoint (and not a catalogue of quotes/ others’ ideas). Expression clarity, style (formal and academic), coherence in writing, grammar, punctuation, spellings and sentence structure. A logical flow of argument at both the paragraph level and the overall text level. Use of supporting arguments. Use of literature to support the argument. Structure – Synopsis (stated the topic, reflected main arguments and identified conclusions reached). Introduction (clearly stated the essay question; outlined the plan for answering the question). Discussion in appropriately linked sections and paragraphs. Conclusion (no new material; reiterated the main line of argument). Referencing procedure (within the text, and at the end of the text). Appropriately styled and punctuated bibliography. Overall Presentation – including cover page, line spacing, page numbering.

Attachments:

prepare an executive summary to ginnie adams the owner of the bottled water company 561934

ACT 500 Portfolio Project Guidelines The Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master Budget In the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package. Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary.

Document Preview:

ACT 500 Portfolio Project Guidelines The Bottled Water Company Comprehensive Master Budget In the following pages, you are given basic information for the operating budgets including the sales budget, the production budget, the direct materials purchases budget, the direct labor budget, the overhead budget, the selling and administrative expense budget, and the cost of goods manufactured budget. Complete the operating budgets on spreadsheet(s) in a workbook, using formulas and linking figures for maximum effectiveness of the spreadsheet. Complete the budgeted income statement, linking the numbers from the supporting budgets to the income statement. Note, you are not given the information to complete the budgeted balance sheet, so a balance sheet is not expected to be a part of the assignment package. Prepare an executive summary to Ginnie Adams, the owner of the Bottled Water Company, with your results from the comprehensive budget for the new product and how launching the new product would affect net income. Your spreadsheet(s) will be your attachment to the executive summary. The project should include: 1. Executive Summary 2. Sales Budget 3. Production Budget 4. Direct Materials Budget 5. Direct Labor Budget 6. Overhead Budget 7. Selling and Administrative Expense Budget 8. Cost of Goods Manufactured Budget 9. Budget and Income Statement

Attachments:

accounting information system identify the internal control strengths in pei s syste 561961

Assessment Two – 30 marks Due 11pm on Sunday 27
th April 2014 (Week 10)

You must use the electronic
Assignment Cover Sheet. Download this cover sheet, fill in your details and then make this sheet the
first page of your assignment – do not send it as a separate document.

Your assignments must be submitted as a
Word document (with .doc or .docx file extension), or text documents with .rtf extension.

Assignments submitted as .pdf documents
WILL NOT
be accepted for marking. If you wish to submit in any other file format please discuss this with your lecturer well before the assignment submission date.

Part One: 15 marks.

Compare and contrast the following three frameworks: COBIT, COSO Integrated Control, and ERM.

Part Two: 15 marks.

PriceRight Electronics (PEI) is a small wholesale discount supplier of electronic instruments and parts. PEI’s competitive advantage is its deep discount, three day delivery guarantee, which allows retailers to order materials often to minimize in store inventories. PEI processes its records with stand alone, incompatible computer systems except for integrated enterprise resource planning (ERP) inventory and accounts receivable modules. PEI decided to finish integrating its operations with more ERP modules, but because of cash flow considerations, this needs to be accomplished on a step by step basis.

It was decided that the next function to be integrated should be sales order processing to enhance quick response to customer needs. PEI implemented and modified a commercially available software package to meet PEI’s operations. In an effort to reduce the number of slow paying or delinquent customers, PEI installed Web based software that links to the Web site of a commercial credit rating agency to check customer credit at the time of purchase. The following are the new sales order processing system modules:

  • Sales. Sales orders are received by telephone, fax, e mail, Web site entry, or standard mail. They are entered into the sales order system by the Sales department. If the order does not cause a customer to exceed his credit limit, the system generates multiple copies of the sales order.
  • Credit. When orders are received from new customers, the system automatically accesses the credit rating Web site and suggests an initial credit limit. On a daily basis, the credit manager reviews new customer applications for creditworthiness, reviews the suggested credit limits, and accepts or changes the credit limits in the customer database. On a monthly basis, the credit manager reviews the accounts receivable aging report to identify slow paying or delinquent accounts for potential revisions to or discontinuance of credit. As needed, the credit manager issues credit memos for merchandise returns based on requests from customers and forwards copies of the credit memos to Accounting for appropriate account receivable handling.
  • Warehousing. Warehouse personnel update the inventory master file for inventory purchases and sales, confirm availability of materials to fill sales orders, and establish back orders for sales orders that cannot be completed from stock on hand. Warehouse personnel gather and forward inventory to Shipping and Receiving along with the corresponding sales orders. They also update the inventory master file for merchandise returned to Receiving.
  • Shipping and receiving. Shipping and Receiving accepts inventory and sales orders from Warehousing, packs and ships the orders with a copy of the sales order as a packing slip, and forwards a copy of the sales order to Billing. Customer inventory returns are unpacked, sorted, inspected, and sent to Warehousing.
  • Accounting. Billing prices all sales orders received, which is done approximately 5 days after the order ships. To spread the work effort throughout the month, customers are placed in one of six 30 day billing cycles. Monthly statements, prepared by Billing, are sent to customers during the cycle billing period. Outstanding carry forward balances reported by Accounts Receivable and credit memos prepared by the credit manager are included on the monthly statement. Billing also prepares electronic sales and credit memos for each cycle. Electronic copies of invoices and credit memos are forwarded to Accounts Receivable for entry into the accounts receivable master file by customer account. An aging report is prepared at the end of each month and forwarded to the credit manager. The general accounting office staff access the accounts receivable master file that reflects total charges and credits processed through the accounts receivable system for each cycle. General accounting runs a query to compare this information to the electronic sales and credit memo and posts the changes to the general ledger master file.

Questions;

  1. Identify the internal control strengths in PEI’s system
  2. Identify the internal control weaknesses in PEI’s system, and suggest

ways to correct them.

Attachments:

sales mix decision dr massy who specializes in internal medicine wants to analyze 562007

Sales Mix Decision

Dr. Massy, who specializes in internal medicine, wants to analyze his sales mix to find out how the time of his

physician assistant, Consuela Ortiz, can be used to generate the highest operating income.

Ortiz sees patients in Dr. Massy’s office, consults with patients over the telephone, and conducts one daily

weight loss support group attended by up to 50 patients. Statistics for the three services are as follows:

Office Visits Phone Calls Weight Loss Support

Group

Maximum number

of patient billings per day

20 40 50

Hours per billing .25 .10 1.0

Billing rate $50 $25 $10

Variable costs $25 $12 $5

Ortiz works seven hours a day.

Required

1. Determine the best sales mix. Rank the services offered in order of their profitability.

2. Based on the ranking in I, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? (Hint:

Remember to consider the maximum number of patient billings per day.) What would be the daily total

contribution margin generated by Ortiz?

3. Dr. Massy believes the ranking is incorrect. He knows that the daily 60 minute meeting of the weightloss support group has 50 patients and should continue to be offered. If the new ranking for the

services is (1) weight loss support group, (2) phone calls, and (3) office visits, how much time should

Ortiz spend on each service in a day? What would be the total contribution margin generated by Ortiz,

assuming the weight loss support group has the maximum number of patient billings?

4. Manager Insight: Which ranking would you recommend? What additional amount of total contribution

margin would be generated if your recommendation is accepted?

Document Preview:

Sales Mix Decision Dr. Massy, who specializes in internal medicine, wants to analyze his sales mix to find out how the time of his physician assistant, Consuela Ortiz, can be used to generate the highest operating income. Ortiz sees patients in Dr. Massy’s office, consults with patients over the telephone, and conducts one daily weight loss support group attended by up to 50 patients. Statistics for the three services are as follows: Office Visits Phone Calls Weight Loss Support Group Maximum number 20 40 50 of patient billings per day Hours per billing .25 .10 1.0 Billing rate $50 $25 $10 Variable costs $25 $12 $5 Ortiz works seven hours a day. Required 1. Determine the best sales mix. Rank the services offered in order of their profitability. I, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? (Hint: 2. Based on the ranking in Remember to consider the maximum number of patient billings per day.) What would be the daily total contribution margin generated by Ortiz? 3. Dr. Massy believes the ranking is incorrect. He knows that the daily 60 minute meeting of the weight loss support group has 50 patients and should continue to be offered. If the new ranking for the services is (1) weight loss support group, (2) phone calls, and (3) office visits, how much time should Ortiz spend on each service in a day? What would be the total contribution margin generated by Ortiz, assuming the weight loss support group has the maximum number of patient billings? 4. Manager Insight: Which ranking would you recommend? What additional amount of total contribution margin would be generated if your recommendation is accepted?

Attachments:

quiz 3 name van persie corp 562037

Quiz 3 ??????Name ___________________________________________________________

VanPersieCorp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees.The following balancesrelated to the plan exist onDecember 31, 2009.

Plan assets (marketvalue)???$450,000

Projected benefit obligation???600,000

Pension asset/liability????150,000 Cr.

VanPersieamends the pension plan, effective 1/1/2010, and the actuary informs VanPersiethat the Prior Service Cost associated with the amendment equals $90,000.

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2010, the actuary provided the following additional dataonDecember 31,2010.

Service cost for2010????$ 75,000

Actual return on plan assets in2010?? 45,000

Amortization of prior service cost?? 20,000

Contributions in2010???115,000

Benefits paid retirees in2010?? 70,000

Settlement rate?????7%

Expected return rate?????8%

Instructions

(a)Compute pension expense forVanPersieCorp. for the year2010by preparingthe attachedpension worksheet.

(b)Prepare the journal entry for pension expense.

General Journal Entries

Memo Record

Other Comprehensive Income

Items

Pension Expense

Cash

Prior Service Cost

Gains/Losses

Pension Asset/Liability

PBO

Plan Assets

can i email you a document and you take a look at it for me 562061

can i email you a document and you take a look at it for me?

Document Preview:

11/13/2014 12/13/2014 1/14/2014 2/14/2014 3/14/2014 4/14/2014 5/14/2014 112500 102100 120000 112500 116000 125000 140000 11295 100500 183780 120595 B&B Corporation MASTER BUDGET Sales Budget Expected unit sales Unit selling price Production Budget For the _____ Quarter of ____ Total Sales Add: Desired ending finished goods units Total required unites Less: Beginning finished good units Required production units Month Quarter Direct Materials Budget Units to be produced Direct materials per unit Total pounds needed for production Add: Desired ending direct materials (lbs) Total materials required Less: Beginning direct materials (lbs) Direct materials purchases Cost per pound Total cost of direct materials purchases Direct Labor Budget Units to be produced Direct labor time (hours per unit) Total required direct labor hours Direct labor cost per hour Total direct labor cost Manufacturing Overhead Budget Variable costs Indirect materials Indirect labor Utilities Maintenance Total variable costs Fixed costs Salaries Depreciation Property Taxes Insurance Fixed manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing overhead Direct labor hours Predetermined overhead rate for the quarter Selling & Administrative Expense Budget Budget sales in units Variable expenses per unit Fixed expenses: Advertising Other Total fixed expenses Total S & A expenses Total variable S & A expense Schedule of Expected Collections from Customers Accounts receivable, XX/XX/XX Total Cash Collections Schedule of Expected Payments for Direct Materials Accounts Payable, XX/XX/XX Total Payments Cash Budget Beginning Cash Balance Add: Receipts Collections from customers Total available cash Less: Disbursements Direct materials Direct labor Manufacturing overhead Selling and administrative Equipment purchase Dividends Total disbursements Excess (deficiency) of available cash over cash disbursements Financing: Borrowings Repayments Interest Ending Cash Balance Unit…

Attachments:

compute the amount of stationery to be shown in the income and expenditure account f 562133

Compute the amount of stationery to be shown in the Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending at Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Stock of Stationery as on Jan 1, 2008

4,500

Unpaid during the year ending

500

Unpaid during the year ending on Dec 31, 2008

1,700

Pre paid during the year ending on Dec 31, 2007

1,000

Pre paid during the year ending on Dec 31, 2008

1,300

Payments to stationery during the year 2008

20,550

from the following particulars prepare the income and expenditure account for the ye 562137

From the following particulars prepare the Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending at Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Subscriptions received during the year

9,000

Subscriptions outstanding at Dec 31, 2008

1,700

Subscriptions received in advance at Dec 31, 2008

200

Life membership fees

2,500

Donations received

3,000

Interest received

250

Printing, postage and stationery

750

Office Expenses

1,200

Investments purchased

4,000

Outstanding office expenses at Dec 31, 2008

600

from the following extract of receipts and payments account and the additional infor 562140

From the following extract of Receipts and Payments Account and the Additional Information, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

Extract of Receipts and Payments Account for the Year Ending on Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Subscription

2007: 10,000

2008: 95,000

2009:7,500

Additional Information

Subscription outstanding as on Dec 31, 2007: Rs 11,000

Subscription received in advance as on Dec 31, 2007: Rs 5,400

(including Rs 1,400 for 2008).

There are 1,000 memberships each paying an annual subscription of Rs 100.

prepare receipts and payments account of leo club delhi for the year ending on dec 3 562142

Prepare Receipts and Payments Account of Leo Club, Delhi for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Cash at Jan 1, 2008

3,275

Subscriptions received (including Rs 200 for the year 2007 and Rs 250 for the year 2009)

9,725

Salaries

1,000

Life Membership subscription

500

Newspapers purchased

300

Books purchased

1,000

Donations received

2,000

Taxes Paid

250

Sale of Old Newspaper

50

Sale of Old Sports Materials

100

10% Tournament Fund Investments (invested on Sep 30, 2008)

5,000

Subscription for Tournament Received (on Sep 30, 2008)

5,000

Tournament Expenses

700

Sale of Old Machine

Sports Materials purchased

1,000

Interest on Tournament Fund Investment

125

Printing and Stationery

200

Furniture

500

prepare income and expenditure account for the year ending on dec 31 2008 562143

Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008

Rs

Subscriptions received (including Rs 5,000 for 2007 and Rs 4,000 for 2009)

65,000

Sports Equipment purchased

20,000

Printing and Stationery

3,200

Salary paid (including Rs 100 for 2007)

12,000

Donations received

5,000

Rent Paid

6,000

Salary outstanding for 2008

700

Tournament Expenses

2,300

Entrance Fees (60% to be capitalised)

8,000

Entertainment Expenses

1,800

Subscriptions due but not received for 2008

7,500

summary of cash book prepare income and expenditure account 562144

Summary of Cash Book: Prepare Income and Expenditure Account

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance

By Salaries

2,000

Cash at Bank:Rs 3,000

By Rent

600

Cash at Hand:Rs 500

3,500

By Stationery

1,400

To subscriptions (including)

19,500

By Postage

250

Rs 400 for 2007)

By Scooter

17,000

To Interest on Bank I.D.

200

By Fixed Deposit

4,000

To Sale of Old Scooter

3,800

By Balance

1,500

Cash at Bank

250

Cash in Hand

27,000

27,000

from the following particulars you are required to prepare income and expenditure ac 562145

From the following particulars you are required to prepare Income and Expenditure Account of Kolkata Golf Club for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and the Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Subscriptions received for 2008

21,000

Entrance fees received for 2008

1,500

Subscriptions for 2007, estimated Rs 300 has been realised

560

Subscriptions and entrances fees received for 2009

3,100

Subscriptions for 2008 due Rs 4,000 but to be taken at

2,000

Locker Rent received for 2008

3,200

Green fees received for 2008

1,000

Expenses for 2008 paid

6,000

Expenses unpaid

460

Liabilities for 2007 paid (estimated at Rs 1,400)

1,200

Audit fees for 2008 not paid

400

Profit on service account (met)

4,600

Interest on loan paid

640

Loan Taken

8,000

Balance of Capital Expenditure

50,000

Capital Expenditure written of

2,400

Surplus for 2007

4,240

Capital Expenditure in 2008

600

Cash in Hand

5,000

from the following receipts and payments account of stars cricket club prepare incom 562146

From the following Receipts and Payments Account of Stars Cricket Club, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and the Balance Sheet as on that date.

Dr.

Cr,

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

5,700

Salaries

8,500

Subscription

Painting

4,900

2007

500

Purchase of Investments

16,000

2008

17,900

Expenditure on Refreshment

8,400

2009

1,100

19,500

Payment of Expenses of the last year

680

Donations for Cricket Club

12,000

Additions of Club Building

8,000

Sale of Furniture

600

Cost of Gold Medal

350

Interest on Investments

2,400

balance c/d

4,570

Sale of Refreshments

11,200

51,400

51,400

In addition to the above, the following further details are available from the accounts of the club:

  1. The assets on Jan 1, 2008 include club building Rs 30,000; investments Rs 12,000; furniture Rs 4,000. The literalities on Jan 1, 2008 include an account styled Cricket Prizes Fund Account Rs 10,000.
  2. Of interest on investments, Rs 300 pertains to last year and Rs 640 is still owing.
  3. Stock of refreshments at the end of the year was valued at Rs 110.
  4. The Cricket Prize Fund was not separately invested. It was decided to set apart every year Rs 400 from the interest income of the club to be utilised for the purpose of awarding a gold medal to the best cricketer of the year.

depreciate building 2 furniture 10 and books 20 the investments were made against va 562147

The following is the Trial Balance of a pubic school on Mar 31, 2009.

DebitBalance

Rs

Credit Balance

Rs

Land

25,000

Capital Fund

7,80,000

Building

7,50,000

Tuition Fee Received

12,55,000

Furniture

1,50,000

Salaries Payable

87,500

Teacher Salary

6,00,000

Prize Fund

1,00,000

Clerks Salary

1,30,000

Tournament Fund

1,50,000

Investments

3,50,000

General Reserve fund

1,00,000

Stationery

86,500

General Reserve fund

38,500

Lighting

18,000

Interest received on

75,000

General Expenses

32,500

Investments

Prizes Awarded

10,000

Donations for School Hall

Tournament Express

15,000

Books

1,87,500

Bank Balance

2,31,500

25,86,000

28,86,000

Depreciate Building @ 2% furniture @ 10% and Books @ 20%. The investments were made against various funds commonly.

Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet as on that date.

march 1 jean kelly opened a dance school called jean s dance studio 561402

In an Excel spreadsheet configured similarly to the journal shown below, prepare journal entries (in journal entry

form) for the following transactions. If no entry is required, write “no entry.” Omit explanations.

March 1 Jean Kelly opened a dance school, called Jean’s Dance Studio, by depositing $15,000 into a business bank account.

March 2 Paid three months’ rent in advance, $1,800.

March 4 Hired a part time assistant, to be paid $250 per week, starting next week.

March 6 Purchased sound equipment for $2,000. Paid $400 in cash, the remainder to be paid in installments of $800 every two

weeks.

March 8 Signed up five students, who will begin lessons on March 10, at $80 per week per student.

March 17 Received the first week’s tuition from four students; the fifth student will remit payment in three days.

March 17 Paid the assistant his first week’s wages.

March 20 Received payment from the fifth student.

March 21 Paid the first installment on the sound equipment purchased on March 6.

March 23 Received an electric bill of $100, to be paid April 1.

Critical Thinking: Year end Adjustments (85 points)

In an Excel spreadsheet configured similarly to the journal shown below, prepare year end adjustments to the

following situations. Omit explanations.

1. Accrued interest on notes receivable is $105.

2. Of the $12,000 received in advance of earning a service, one third was still unearned by year end.

3. Three years’ rent, totaling $36,000, was paid in advance at the beginning of the year.

4. Services totaling $5,300 had been performed, but not yet billed.

5. Depreciation on trucks totaled $3,400 for the year.

6. Supplies available for use totaled $690. However, by year end, only $100 in supplies remained.

  1. Payroll for the five day work week, to be paid on Friday, is $30,000. Year end falls on a Monday.

For ACT 305

Critical Thinking: Cost of Goods Manufactured Statement (50 points)

Denny Corporation, a manufacturing company, produces a single product. The following information has been

taken from the company’s production, sales, and cost records for the year just completed:

Production in units 51,000

Direct labor $120,325

Raw materials purchased $325,019

Manufacturing overhead $250,265

Selling and administrative expenses $422,100 Raw Materials, Beginning $62,900

Raw Materials, Ending $45,345

Work in Process, Beginning $52,984

Work in Process, Ending $58,777

Prepare the cost of goods manufactured statement. Provide your answers in an Excel spreadsheet, clearly organized.

Critical Thinking: Job Costing Problem (50 points)

Hoover Inc. uses a job order coding system. The company’s inventory balances on February 1, the start of its fiscal

year, were as follows:

Raw Materials Inventory $69,325

Work in Process Inventory $55,100

Finished Goods Inventory $81,256

During the year, the following transactions were completed:

a. Raw materials were purchased on account, $215,221.

b. Raw materials were issued from the storeroom for use in production, $198,000 (70% direct and 30%

indirect).

c. Employee salaries and wages were accrued as follows: direct labor, $243,300; indirect labor, $98,750;

and selling and administrative salaries, $72,340.

d. Utility costs were incurred in the factory, $79,233.

e. Advertising costs were incurred. $110,600.

f. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $35,000 (80% related to factory operations, and 20% related to

selling and administrative activities).

g. Depreciation was recorded, $192,100 (75% related to factory assets, and 25% related to selling and

administrative assets).

h. Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs at the rate of 160% of direct labor cost.

i. Goods that cost $720,200 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the

finished goods warehouse.

j. Sales for the year totaled $1,293,300 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods

according to their job cost sheets was $725,825.

Submit your assignment as an Excel spreadsheet with each tab labeled by item number. Demonstrate the

following:

1. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions for the year.

2. Prepare the T accounts for raw materials inventory, work in process inventory, finished goods inventory,

manufacturing overhead, and cost of goods sold. Don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in the

inventory accounts.

3. Is manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close this

balance to cost of goods sold.

Provide your answers in an Excel spreadsheet, clearly organized.

Attachments:

i have to automate a revenue cycle using excel i will upload the case and what are u 561404

I have to automate a revenue cycle using excel, I will upload the case and what are u suppose to do with the case also I will upload a sample case so you can see it and do just like the sample.

Document Preview:

The Lemonade Stand: A Case for Developing an Accounting Information System for the Revenue Process Brad A. Schafer, School of Accountancy, College of Business Administration, University of South Florida Kathy Hurtt, Department of Accounting, Hankamer School of Business, Baylor University Schafer Lemonade Stand Co ABSTRACT For this case, each student assumes the role of an accountant and system designer developing a company’s accounting software application. The student is provided with company background information and relevant revenue processes for Schafer Lemonade Stand Company. Using a relatively simple business plan, each student documents the system and designs and implements a computerized application to record and report all of the necessary information for the revenue process of the business. By completing the requirements of the case, the student integrates the concepts of database design (data modeling), walkthrough documentation (flowcharting) and hands on development (creating tables, forms, queries, and reports) for accounting processes. CASE MATERIALS Learning Objectives This case involves four of the major learning objectives of a typical accounting information systems course including: creating business process documentation (Entity Relationship models and Data Flow Diagrams) creating a logical flowchart of the revenue process integrating internal controls in a computerized accounting system implementing appropriate segregation of duties in the business process Introduction “Dad, this is a really good idea and we think that we can make a lot of money!” exclaimed Abby Schafer as she presented her request for capital financing to her potential venture capital source (also known as “Dad”). The venture capitalist listened intently to the presentation and concluded that the project was intriguing, but he insisted that the managers of Schafer Lemonade Stand (SLS) have computerized accounting information systems (AIS) developed for…

problem 13 6a specific identification fifo lifo and weighted average hamilton compan 561416

Problem 13 6A
Specific Identification, FIFO, LIFO, and Weighted Average

Hamilton Company’s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended September 30, 20 2, were as follows:

Use the following information for the specific identification method.

There are 1,000 units of inventory on hand on September 30, 20 2. Of these 1,000 units:

Required:

Calculate the total amount to be assigned to cost of goods sold for the fiscal year ended September 30, 20 2, and ending inventory on September 30, 20 2, under each of the following periodic inventory methods. For the weighted average method, round the average unit cost to two decimal places. Round all final answers to the nearest dollar.

Cost of Goods Sold Cost of Ending Inventory
1.FIFO $ $
2.LIFO $ $
3.Weighted average $ $
4.Specific identification $ $

determine which alternative annie should invest in according to the expected value c 561440

Annie Hays recently sold a condominium she had bought and lived in while she was a college student over 15 years ago. She received $150,000 for the condominium and is considering two investment alternatives. Annie can invest the entire amount in a bank money market for 1 year at 8% interest and thus receive $162,000 at the end of a year, or she can invest in a speculative oil exploration project with a 50–50 chance of doubling her investment at the end of the year or losing everything.

a. Determine which alternative Annie should invest in, according to the expected value criterion, and indicate whether that is the alternative you would also select.

b. Suppose Annie determined that the probability of success for the oil exploration investment would have to be .80 before she would be indifferent between the two alternatives. In other words, if the probability of success for the oil exploration investment was less than .80, Annie would invest in the money market, but if the probability of success was greater than. 80, she would invest in the oil exploration. In this case, .80 is the utility value of the $162,000 safe return. Determine the preferred alternative, according to the expected utility value.

determine how much placeplus should be willing to pay the consulting firm and how ef 561444

The Place Plus real estate development firm in Problem 24 is dissatisfied with the economist’s estimate of the probabilities of future interest rate movement, so it is considering having a financial consulting firm provide a report on future interest rates. The consulting firm is able to cite a track record which shows that 80% of the time when interest rates declined, it had predicted they would, whereas 10% of the time when interest rates declined, the firm had predicted they would remain stable and 10% of the time it had predicted they would increase. The firm has been correct 70% of the time when rates have remained stable, whereas 10% of the time it has incorrectly predicted that rates would decrease, and 20% of the time it has incorrectly predicted that rates would increase. The firm has correctly predicted that interest rates would increase 90% of the time and incorrectly predicted rates would decrease 2% and remain stable 8% of the time. Assuming that the consulting firm could supply an accurate report, determine how much PlacePlus should be willing to pay the consulting firm and how efficient the information will be?

miramar company in problem 18 is considering contracting with a market research firm 561483

The Miramar Company in Problem 18 is considering contracting with a market research firm to do a survey to determine future market conditions. The results of the survey will indicate either positive or negative market conditions. There is a .60 probability of a positive report, given favorable conditions; a .30 probability of a positive report, given stable conditions; and a .10 probability of a positive report, given unfavorable conditions. There is a .90 probability of a negative report, given unfavorable conditions; a .70 probability, given stable conditions; and a .40 probability, given favorable conditions. Using decision tree analysis and posterior probability tables, determine the decision strategy the company should follow, the expected value of the strategy, and the maximum amount the company should pay the market research firm for the survey results.

for the month ended october 31 2012 aylesworth uses a periodic method for inventory 561502

. for the month ended October 31, 2012. Aylesworth uses a periodic method for inventory.

Date Description Units Unit Cost or Selling Price
October 1 Beginning inventory 61 $23
October 9 Purchase 122 24
October 11 Sale 102 33
October 17 Purchase 71 25
October 22 Sale 61 38
October 25 Purchase 82 26
October 29 Sale 112 38
LIFO FIFO AVERAGE COST
The ending inventory $ $ $
The cost of goods sold $ $ $
Gross profit $ $ $

Question 2

Lu Company had a beginning inventory of876units of Product Ribo at a cost of $3per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Feb. 20 1,314 @ $7 Aug. 12 657 @ $13
May 5 1,095 @ $8 Dec. 8 438 @ $14

Lu Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totaled3,285units.

Determine (1) the ending inventory, and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average).
(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,120.)

Determine (1) the ending inventory, and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average).
(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,120.)

FIFO LIFO averGE COST
The ending inventory $

14673

$ $
The cost of goods sold $

20586

$ $

Attachments:

tax return project acct407 spring 2014 due at 6 00pm may 1 st required use the follo 561529

Tax Return Project

ACCT407 Spring 2014

(Due at 6:00pm May 1st)

Required:

?Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s2013federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.

?Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

?You need to staple and hand in the forms in the proper order with a printed cover sheet (8% of the grade will be based on the document organization and clearance). The forms will include 1040, Schedule C, D, SE, 4562, 8949 and 4797.

?This project is time consuming. Please do not wait until the last minutes. Your solutions must be the result of your own work, not a copy of another student’s solutions.

Facts:

1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:

?The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

?The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, New Orleans, LA 70112.

?Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1966 and his Social Security number is 321 44 5766.

?Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1969 and her Social Security number is 567 77 1258.

?Haley’s birthday is 11/6/2000 and her Social Security number is 621 18 7592.

?Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2002 and her Social Security number is 621 92 8751.

?Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2006 and his Social Security number is 621 99 9926.

?The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

Phillip and Claire provided over half of the support of Claire’s mother, who currently lives in a nursing home in Houma, LA.

2. Claire received a Form W 2 from her employer reporting the following information for 2013:

Wages, tips, other compensation: $57,000

Federal income tax withheld 6,375

Social Security tax 3,600

Medicare tax 825

State income taxes withheld 1,800

3. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.

4. Phillip’s real estate business is named “Phillip Dunphy Realty.” His business is located at 645 Grove Street, New Orleans, LA 70112, and his employer identification number is 93 3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:

On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the §179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed §179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:

2

Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.

5. The Dunphys sold 60 shares of Fizbo Corporation common stock on September 3, for $65 a share (minus a $50 total commission). The Dunphys purchased the stock on November 8, 2012, for $90 a share. They also sold a painting for $13,000 on March 1. Claire purchased the painting for $20,050 on September 1, 2005, as an investment.

6. Phillip and Claire’s personal expenses for the year are as follows:

Credit card debt $ 800

Qualified medical bills 4,500

Real property taxes 3,300

Interest paid for

Home mortgage 9,500

Credit card interest 1,000

Personal car loan 1,720

Cash contributions to First Baptist church 4.500

State income taxes paid during 2013 2,100*

Claire’s unreimbursed employee expense 450**

Tax return preparation fee 560***

*Does not include amounts withheld fromClaire’s salary.

**Does not include any costs for meals or entertainment.

***$200 is related to preparation to Schedule C

7. Phillip made an $11,500 deductible contribution to her Keogh plan on December 15, 2013.

8. The Dunphys made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $16,000 each quarter during 2013. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $1,000 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $300 each quarter. The Dunphys made all fourth quarter payments on December 31, 2013. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.

job order cost accounting 561580

Rodman Corporation’s fiscal year ends on November 30. The following accounts are found in its job order cost accounting system for the first month of the new fiscal year.

Raw Materials Inventory

Dec. 1

Beginning balance

(a)

Dec. 31

Requisitions

16,850

31

Purchases

19,225

Dec. 31

Ending balance

7,975

Work in Process Inventory

Dec. 1

Beginning balance

(b)

Dec. 31

Jobs completed

(f)

31

Direct materials

(c)

31

Direct labor

8,800

31

Overhead

(d)

Dec. 31

Ending balance

(e)

 

Finished Goods Inventory

Dec. 1

Beginning balance

(g)

Dec. 31

Cost of goods sold

(i)

31

Completed jobs

(h)

Dec. 31

Ending balance

(j)

Factory Labor

Dec. 31

Factory wages

12,025

Dec. 31

Wages assigned

(k)

 

Manufacturing Overhead

Dec. 31

Indirect materials

1,900

Dec. 31

Overhead applied

(m)

31

Indirect labor

(l)

31

Other overhead

1,245

Other data:

 

 

1.

On December 1, two jobs were in process: Job No. 154 and Job No. 155. These jobs had combined direct materials costs of $9,750 and direct labor costs of $15,000. Overhead was applied at a rate that was 75% of direct labor cost.

2.

During December, Job Nos. 156, 157, and 158 were started. On December 31, Job No. 158 was unfinished. This job had charges for direct materials $3,800 and direct labor $4,800, plus manufacturing overhead. All jobs, except for Job No. 158, were completed in December.

3.

On December 1, Job No. 153 was in the finished goods warehouse. It had a total cost of $5,000. On December 31, Job No. 157 was the only job finished that was not sold. It had a cost of $4,000.

4.

Manufacturing overhead was $230 overapplied in December.

 

Instructions

List the letters (a) through (m) and indicate the amount pertaining to each letter.

 

the management of first american bank was concerned about the potential loss that mi 561590

The management of First American Bank was concerned about the potential loss that might occur in the event of a physical catastrophe such as a power failure or a fire. The bank estimated that the loss from one of these incidents could be as much as $100 million, including losses due to interrupted service and customer relations. One project the bank is considering is the installation of an emergency power generator at its operations headquarters. The cost of the emergency generator is $800,000, and if it is installed, no losses from this type of incident will be incurred. However, if the generator is not installed, there is a 10% chance that a power outage will occur during the next year. If there is an outage, there is a .05 probability that the resulting losses will be very large, or approximately $80 million in lost earnings.

Alternatively, it is estimated that there is a .95 probability of only slight losses of around $1 million. Using decision tree analysis, determine whether the bank should install the new power generator.

financial analysis knowledge and analytical skills to a real world setting 561600

The purpose of this assignment is to provide hands on experience for 7111AFE students on financial analysis using real data. It gives them the opportunity to demonstrate, through an extended exercise, their ability to apply their accounting knowledge and analytical skills to a real world setting. This assessment task is directly linked to learning objective number six and Griffith graduate attributes A1, A3, A4, and B2. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE ASSIGNMENT This assignment is a group task, not an individual task.

Document Preview:

7111AFE Accounting ASSIGNMENT ON FINANCIAL ANALYSIS Semester 1, 2014 Total Marks: 50 Weight: 15% of Final Grade PURPOSE The purpose of this assignment is to provide hands on experience for 7111AFE students on financial analysis using real data. It gives them the opportunity to demonstrate, through an extended exercise, their ability to apply their accounting knowledge and analytical skills to a real world setting. This assessment task is directly linked to learning objective number six and Griffith graduate attributes A1, A3, A4, and B2. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE ASSIGNMENT This assignment is a group task, not an individual task. Students will be evaluated both for their written communication skills and their ability to analyse financial statements with a view to providing advice to a potential investor. Detailed rubrics are included in this document as expected standards of achievement. Students are required to form groups. Each group must have two, three or four members. Each group will be hand in one combined report. It is the responsibility of students to organise themselves into groups and ensure that contact details of each student in the group have been given to all group members. Assignments submitted individually without the convenor’s prior written permission will be heavily penalised. If you have trouble joining or forming a group, you should contact the course convenor by email as soon as possible. The assignment must be word processed and presented in an appropriate report format. The report’s technical content, format, clarity of exposition, language usage and overall presentation quality will be assessed. For example, marks will be deducted for poorly presented assignments and for grammatical/spelling errors. The assignment must be submitted to University’s assignment collection (OC&AHS) by 4pm on 21 May 2014. Late submissions will attract a 10% penalty for each day they are late. As well…

the owner of the columbia construction company must decide between building a housin 561601

The owner of the Columbia Construction Company must decide between building a housing development, constructing a shopping center, and leasing all the company’s equipment to another company. The profit that will result from each alternative will be determined by whether material costs remain stable or increase. The profit from each alternative, given the two possibilities for material costs, is shown in the following payoff table:

Material Costs

Decision Stable Increase

Houses $70,000 $30,000

Shopping center 105,000 20,000

Leasing 40,000 40,000

Determine the best decision, using the following decision criteria.

a. Maximax

b. Maximin

c. Minimax regret

d. Hurwicz

e. Equal likelihood

(a=.2)

(a=.3)

a local real estate investor in orlando is considering three alternative investments 561603

A local real estate investor in Orlando is considering three alternative investments: a motel, a restaurant, or a theater. Profits from the motel or restaurant will be affected by the availability of gasoline and the number of tourists; profits from the theater will be relatively stable under any conditions.

The following payoff table shows the profit or loss that could result from each investment:

Gasoline Availability

Investment Shortage Stable Supply Surplus

Motel $ 8,000 $15,000 $20,000

Restaurant 2,000 8,000 6,000

Theater 6,000 6,000 5,000

Determine the best investment, using the following decision criteria.

a. Maximax

b. Maximin

c. Minimax regret

d. Hurwicz

e. Equal likelihood

a television network is attempting to decide during the summer which of the followin 561605

A television network is attempting to decide during the summer which of the following three football games to televise on the Saturday following Thanksgiving Day: Alabama versus Auburn, Georgia versus Georgia Tech, or Army versus Navy. The estimated viewer ratings (millions of homes) for the games depend on the win–loss records of the six teams, as shown in the following payoff table:

Number of Viewers (1,000,000s)

One Team Has

Both Teams Winning Record; Both Teams

Have Winning One Team Has Have Losing

Game Records Losing Record Records

Alabama vs. Auburn 10.2 7.3 5.4

Georgia vs. Georgia Tech 9.6 8.1 4.8

Army vs. Navy 12.5 6.5 3.2

Determine the best game to televise, using the following decision criteria.

a. Maximax

b. Maximin

c. Equal likelihood

what will be their best offensive play if state is equally likely to use any of its 561607

The Tech football coaching staff has six basic offensive plays it runs every game. Tech has an upcoming game against State on Saturday, and the Tech coaches know that State employs five different defenses. The coaches have estimated the number of yards Tech will gain with each play against each defense, as shown in the following payoff table:

Defense

Play 54 63 Wide Tackle Nickel Blitz

Off tackle 3 29 7 1

Option 18 2912 Toss sweep 6 16 5314 Draw 24 3 10 3

Pass 8 20 12 7 8

Screen 5 28 316

a. If the coaches employ an offensive game plan, they will use the maximax criterion. What will be their best play?

b. If the coaches employ a defensive plan, they will use the maximin criterion. What will be their best play?

c. What will be their best offensive play if State is equally likely to use any of its five defenses?

tracy mccoy is shopping for a new car she has identified a particular sports utility 561611

Tracy McCoy is shopping for a new car. She has identified a particular sports utility vehicle she likes but has heard that it has high maintenance costs. Tracy has decided to develop a simulation model to help her estimate maintenance costs for the life of the car. Tracy estimates that the projected life of the car with the first owner (before it is sold) is uniformly distributed with a minimum of 2.0 years and a maximum of 8.0 years. Furthermore, she believes that the miles she will drive the car each year can be defined by a triangular distribution with a minimum value of 3,700 miles, a maximum value of 14,500 miles, and a most likely value of 9,000 miles. She has determined from automobile association data that the maintenance cost per mile driven for the vehicle she is interested in is normally distributed, with a mean of $0.08 per mile and a standard deviation of $0.02 per mile. Using Crystal Ball, develop a simulation model (using 1,000 trials) and determine the average maintenance cost for the life of the car with Tracy and the probability that the cost will be less than $3,000.

using the seu virtual library locate two 2 research articles published within the la 561706

Using theSEU virtual library, locate two (2) research articles publishedwithin thelast five (5) years. One article should deal with measuring performanceand one article should relate toincremental analysis.
Complete theResearch Evaluation Tablesand post completed tables (one for each scholarly article) to theDiscussion Boardfor others to observe.
Chooseoneof the two articles to write aone to two page introductionto the article. Include the following sections and include no opinions, judgments, or beliefs about the study. Only present the facts.

  • Topic– State the broad organizational or field of study topic and establish the overall context for the study.
  • Problem or Opportunity– Describe the problem or opportunity that the researcher was trying to address.
  • Purpose of the Study– Discuss the intent of the study and list any research questions or hypotheses that were used.
  • Research Approach and Design– Describe the overall research approach and information that you find related to the research design. Research design might include such things as the setting (field, laboratory, etc), the type of data that was collected, the sample and sample selection, the way data was prepared, analyzed, or presented, for example.
  • Audience– Identify the individual or groups that might be interested in the findings of the study.
  • Summary– Present the main points that you have covered in your paper; introduce no new information or concepts.

Your paper should meet the following requirements:

  • Use academic writing style, clear and concise language, and well developed paragraphs (minimum of three sentences required to develop a paragraph)
  • Ensure graduate APA formatting standards
  • Be 1 2 pages in length

Attachments:

need help with assignment 561756

ACC311 Strategic and Sustainable Accounting?(Management Accounting 2)? Session 1 2014? Faculty of Business? School of Accounting and Finance? CSU Study Centre Sydney? Internal Mode? Subject Overview This subject emphasises the role of accounting in management decision making, particularly in providing information and analysis to support strategic management activity and the role of social and environmental accounting to support sustainability strategies.

Document Preview:

ACC311 Strategic and Sustainable Accounting?(Management Accounting 2)? Session 1 2014? Faculty of Business? School of Accounting and Finance? CSU Study Centre Sydney? Internal Mode? Subject Overview This subject emphasises the role of accounting in management decision making, particularly in providing information and analysis to support strategic management activity and the role of social and environmental accounting to support sustainability strategies.  These highlight the changing role of accountants and the challenge in balancing the needs of management, customers, employees, shareholders and other stakeholders with ethical and legal concerns.  The use of accounting information to evaluate existing competitive  strategies, develop new strategies, and monitor and assess progress towards chosen organisational solutions.  This subject requires the student to synthesise and integrate the theory and practice learned in subjects undertaken in the Accounting degree to understand, structure and resolve problems for organisations operating with a sustainable business model. Plagiarism Charles Sturt University expects that the work of its students and staff will uphold the values of academic honesty and integrity. The Guide to Avoiding Plagiarism is located at: ? HYPERLINK “http://student.csu.edu.au/study/plagiarism” ?http://student.csu.edu.au/study/plagiarism?. This is an important resource that will help you understand these values and apply them in practice. You should familiarise yourself with these requirements and ensure that all assessments submitted by you are your own work, have not been submitted elsewhere and comply with the University’s requirements for academic integrity.?The University has purchased Turnitin software. This software has two functions, a pre emptive education function which students may use to check their own work prior to submission, and a plagiarism detection function which academics may use to check the student’s work for improper…

Attachments:

this is from management accounting fundamental subject it not too big there are 3 ca 561821

this is from Management accounting fundamental subject.. it not too big.. there are 3 calucation question and 5 theories..

Document Preview:

Question 6 8 43 Equipment replacement decisions and performance evaluation Bob Marsden manages the Victorian plant of George Manufacturing. He has been approached by a representative of Garfield Engineering regarding the possible replacement of a large piece of manufacturing equipment that George uses in its process with a more efficient model. While the representative made some compelling arguments in favour of replacing the 3 year old equipment, Bob is hesitant. He is hoping to be promoted next year to manager of the larger New South Wales plant, and he knows that the accrual basis net operating income of the Victorian plant will be evaluated closely as part of the promotion decision. The following information is available concerning the equipment replacement decision: The historical cost of the old machine is $300,000. It has a current carrying amount of $120,000, two remaining years of useful life and a market value of $72,000. Annual depreciation expense is $60,000. It is expected to have a salvage value of $0 at the end of its useful life. The new equipment will cost $180,000. It will have a two year useful life and a $0 salvage value. George uses straight line depreciation on all equipment. The new equipment will reduce electricity costs by $35,000 per year and will reduce direct manufacturing labour costs by $30,000 per year. For simplicity, ignore income taxes and the time value of money. Required: Assume that Bob Marsden’s priority is to receive the promotion, and he makes the equipment replacement decision based on next year’s accrual based net operating income. Which alternative would he choose? Show your calculations. What are the relevant factors in the decision? Which alternative is in the best interest of the company over the next two years? Show your calculations. At what cost of the new equipment would Bob Marsden be willing to purchase it? Explain. Element 1: What problems arise from the case study? Element 2: A discussion of the possible…

Attachments:

the following information was provided by the treasurer of suret the following infor 561846

The following information was provided by the treasurer of SuretThe following information was provided by the treasurer of Surety, Inc., for the year 2012:

a. Cash sales for the year were $50,000; sales on account totaled $60,000.

b. Cost of goods sold was 50% of total sales.

c. All inventory is purchased on account.

d. Depreciation on equipment was $31,000 for the year.

e. Amortization of goodwill was $2,000.

f. Collections of accounts receivable were $38,000.

g. Payments on accounts payable for inventory equaled $39,000.

h. Rent expense paid in cash was $11,000.

i. The company issued 20,000 shares of $10 par stock for $240,000.

j. Land valued at $106,000 was acquired by issuance of a bond with a par value of $100,000.

k. Equipment was purchased for cash at a cost of $84,000.

1. Dividends of $46,000 were declared but not yet paid.

m. The company paid $15,000 of dividends that had been declared the previous year.

n. A machine used on the assembly line was sold for $12,000. The machine had a book value of $7,000.

o. Another machine with a book value of $500 was scrapped and was reported as an ordinary loss. No cash was received on this transaction.

p. The cash account increased $191,000 during the year to a total of $274,000.

Required:

1. Compute the beginning balance in the cash account.

2. How much cash was provided by (or used in) operating activities?

3. How much cash was provided by (or used in) investing activities?

4. How much cash was provided by (or used in) financing activities?

5. Would all the above items, (a) through (p), be reported on a cash flow statement? Explain.

which of the following should be reported as a change in accounting estimate 560453

Which of the following should be reported as a change in accounting estimate?

a) Change in the reported beginning inventory amount due to a discovery of a bookkeeping error

b) Change from the completed contract method to the percentage of completion method for revenue recognition on long term construction contracts

c) Increase in the rate applied to net credit sales from 1 percent to 1 1/2 percent in determining losses from uncollectible receivables

d) Change made to comply with a new FASB pronouncement

Save

Question 2 (3 points)

Question 2 Saved

Which of the following is NOT a change in reporting entity?

Question 2 options:

a) A company acquires a subsidiary that is to be accounted for as a purchase.

b) A company presents consolidated or combined statements in place of statements of individual companies.

c) A company changes the companies included in combined financial statements.

d) A company changes the subsidiaries for which consolidated statements are presented.

Save

Question 3 (3 points)

Question 3 Saved

McCartney Corp. reports on a calendar year basis. Its 2013 and 2014 financial statements contained the following errors:

2013

2014

Over(under)statement of ending inventory ….

$(10,000)

$ 4,000

Depreciation understatement ……………..

4,000

6,000

Failure to accrue salaries at year end ……

8,000

12,000

As a result of the above errors, 2014 income would be

Question 3 options:

a) overstated by $4,000.

b) overstated by $24,000.

c) overstated by $22,000.

d) overstated by $16,000.

Save

Question 4 (3 points)

Question 4 Saved

Badger Corporation purchased a machine for $132,000 on January 1, 2011, and depreciated it by the straight line method using an estimated useful life of eight years with no salvage value. On January 1, 2014, Badger determined that the machine had a useful life of six years from the date of acquisition and will have a salvage value of $12,000. A change in estimate was made in 2014 to reflect these additional data. What amount should Badger record as the balance of the accumulated depreciation account for this machine at December 31, 2014?

Question 4 options:

a) $73,000

b) $77,000

c) $61,250

d) $63,600

Save

Question 5 (3 points)

Question 5 Saved

Pages, Inc. receives subscription payments for annual (one year) subscriptions to its magazine. Payments are recorded as revenue when received. Amounts received but unearned at the end of each of the last three years are shown below.

2012

2013

2014

Unearned revenues ………….

$120,000

$150,000

$176,000

Pages failed to record the unearned revenues in each of the three years. The entry needed to correct the above errors is

Question 5 options:

a) Retained Earnings ……………… 150,000

Subscription Revenues ………….. 26,000

Unearned Revenues …………… 176,000

b) Retained Earnings ……………… 30,000

Subscription Revenues ………….. 26,000

Unearned Revenues …………… 56,000

c) Subscription Revenues ………….. 176,000

Unearned Revenues …………… 176,000

d) Subscription Revenues ………….. 150,000

Retained Earnings ……………… 26,000

Unearned Revenues …………… 176,000

Save

Question 6 (3 points)

Question 6 Saved

On December 31, 2014, Artistown Company appropriately changed to the FIFO cost method from the weighted average cost method for financial statement and income tax purposes. The change will result in a $700,000 increase in the beginning inventory at January 1, 2014. Assuming a 40 percent income tax rate and that no comparative financial statements for prior years are reported, the cumulative effect of this accounting change reported for the year ended December 31, 2014, is

Question 6 options:

a) $700,000.

b) $350,000.

c) $420,000.

d) $280,000.

Attachments:

compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using a fifo b lifo c weighted averag 560455

.

Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using(a)FIFO,(b)LIFO,(c)weighted average, and(d)specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 95 units from beginning inventory and 225 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 75 units from the March 18 purchase and 115 units from the March 25 purchase.(Round your average cost per unit to 2 decimal places.)

rev: 03_20_2013_QC_27089, 04_17_2013_QC_29162

check my workreferencesebook & resources

4.value:

12.50 points

Problem 6 1A Part 4

4.

Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 95 units from beginning inventory and 225 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 75 units from the March 18 purchase and 115 units from the March 25 purchase.(Round your final answers to two decimal places.)

rev: 11_25_2013_QC_41127

check my workreferencesebook & resources

©
2014 McGraw Hill Education. All rights reserved.

the following data were taken from the financial statements of weal construction inc 560468

The following data were taken from the financial statements of Weal Construction Inc. for December 31, 2014 and 2013:

Dec. 31, 2014 Dec. 31, 2013
Accounts payable $666,000 $199,000
Current maturities of serial bonds payable 440,000 440,000
Serial bonds payable, 10%, issued 2009, due 2019 1,840,000 2,280,000
Common stock, $1 par value 100,000 130,000
Paid in capital in excess of par 1,080,000 1,080,000
Retained earnings 3,730,000 2,960,000

The income before income tax was $843,600 and $738,200 for the years 2014 and 2013, respectively.

a.Determine the ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity at the end of each year. Round to one decimal place.

norbert corporation borrowed 24 000 on december 1 2011 by issuing a two month 8 perc 560538

Norbert Corporation borrowed $24,000 on December 1, 2011, by issuing a two month, 8 percent note payable to Service One Credit Union. The entire amount of the loan, plus interest, is due February 1, 2012.

a.

Prepare the necessary adjusting entry for interest expense on December 31, 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Dec. 31 (Click to select)Interest expenseInterest payableAccounts receivableShort term investmentSalaries expenseCashNotes payableRent expense
(Click to select)Short term investmentCashNotes payableAccounts receivableSalaries expenseRent expenseInterest payableInterest expense

b.

Record the repayment of the loan plus interest on February 1, 2012. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Feb. 1 (Click to select)Interest payableOffice suppliesInterest expenseShort term investmentCashRent expenseAccounts receivableNotes payable
(Click to select)CashInterest payableShort term investmentOffice suppliesNotes payableInterest expenseRent expenseAccounts receivable
(Click to select)Interest payableInterest expenseShort term investmentRent expenseNotes payableOffice suppliesCashAccounts receivable
(Click to select)Short term investmentInterest payableCashRent expenseOffice suppliesNotes payableInterest expenseAccounts receivable

auditing firm rotation and enhancing independence 560569

1800 2000 words

Harvard Style
7 references from the link bellow
https://app.box.com/s/a1fjqnekvrlfx8emci3w/2/1368913096
please read the attached file carefully.
Document Preview:

Auditing I — ACCT333 GROUP Project – Spring 2014 SUBMISSION DEADLINE: THURSDAY 24 APRIL 2014 Student Learning Outcome for this Project: Incorporate the ethical dimensions in business decision making Project Title: Auditing firm rotation and enhancing independence Making it mandatory for audit firms to rotate is one of the measures regulators around the world are looking with the intention of improving the independence, objectivity and professional scepticism of auditors. While the Big 4 audit firms agree these attributes are at the heart of the audit profession, they believe that mandatory audit firm rotation is likely to reduce – not improve – the quality of audits and the reliability of financial reporting. Not only would such measures add cost and complexity to audits, they believe the practice of audit firm rotation would actually undermine some of the recent reforms that have improved audit quality. Much research has been carried out to outline why it may be believed that mandatory audit firm rotation will put audit quality at significant unnecessary risk and undermine the reliability of financial reporting for any company. Thus, many argue that there are more effective ways to reinforce auditor independence, objectivity and professionalism. Discuss the above statement and evaluate the suggestions provided for and against mandatory audit firm rotation in reducing threats to auditor independence. In your report, you should be able to: Comprehensively describe and explain the ethical dilemma that may exist in the debate above re auditors’ independence and the impact on the credibility and reliability of financial reporting given the recent global financial crisis. Identify the relevant stakeholders involved in the ethical dilemma outlined above. Suggest/offer courses of actions or effective ways to reinforce auditor independence, objectivity and professionalism together with a comprehensive analysis of the several impacts on the various stakeholders…

Attachments:

provide a summary of the purpose of corporate sustainability reporting by referring 560591

Word limit: 2500 words (excluding abstracts and references)

Required:

1. Provide a summary of the purpose of Corporate Sustainability Reporting by referring to the Global Reporting Initiative’s Sustainability Reporting Framework (G3.1) available at https://www.globalreporting.org/resourcelibrary/G3.1 Guidelines Incl Technical Protocol.pdf

2. Critique Stakeholder Theory and Legitimacy Theory that you have learnt in this subject (See Deegan, 2009, Financial Accounting Theory, pp. 318 378) and the literature about the empirical application of the two theories published in academic journals (see Referencing and Style Item 2.2 on page 2) in explaining the motivators for corporate voluntary sustainability reporting practice

3. Identify two multinational companies from the Global 500 in 2012 (available at http://money.cnn.com/magazines/fortune/global500/2012/full_list/index l) and compare their reporting on economic, environmental and social aspects in their annual reports and standalone sustainability reports for the reporting year 2011

4. Discuss how legitimacy is managed through reporting by the two companies (in Item 3 above) from the perspectives of Stakeholder Theory and Legitimacy Theory

Attachments:

toni had worked as an apprentice baker in a large bakery that supplied different 560601

ACFI 2003

Management Accounting

Major Written Assignment

Due Date: April 16, at 5pm Sydney time.

Submit via Turnitin ONLY

Instructions:

Answer both Q1 and Q2

1

Question 1

Toni had worked as an apprentice baker in a large bakery that supplied different

types of bread – from the standard white loaf to the speciality bread such as rye,

gluten free and organic. At the end of her training, she decided to start a small

business specialising in producing cakes – in particular, cakes with ornate

decorations made from icing sugar – and Danish pastries because she did not want

to compete with the large bakeries for the “bread market”. As she was close to office

buildings, she decided to try and increase her daily cash flow by selling “fresh cut”

sandwiches.

Having spent most of her savings on purchasing equipment and supplies, renovating

shop premises, and employing two shop assistants, she did not want to spend

money for an accountant to set up an accounting system. She wondered whether

she should base her cost management system on the system adopted in the large

bakery.

As an apprentice, she had not been involved in the management aspects of

operating a bakery, and she did not know what sort of information she would need to

ensure that she did not lose her investment in her business. She was certain that

there was a ready and reasonably large market for her bakery products. She felt

that all she needed was a cash statement each week to show her what her receipts

and payments were, and an annual set of accounts to make sure that she was

operating at a profit. To ensure that she recovered her costs, she intended to follow

the product costing strategy used by the large bakery that she was an apprentice in.

The large bakery produced a variety of bread using highly automated processes. In

ascertaining the cost of its different types of bread, the large bakery treated flour as a

direct cost. All other costs were treated as indirect costs, and were allocated. It was

a simple system that Toni thought she could emulate. However, the large bakery did

not produce cakes and pastries. Cakes and pastries require highly specialised

labour skills because the processes may not be easily standardised and automated.

Required:

Toni is relying on weekly cash flow and annual financial accounts to ensure that she

remains in business in the long term. She is also attempting to ensure that her

pricing and cost management strategies are appropriate by adopting the cost

management system used in the large bakery. Do you agree with Toni’s approach?

Support your opinion by addressing the following issues:

a) How does one ensure that a cost management system provides relevant and

useful information?

(5 marks).

b) Toni is relying on financial feedback, and the product costing method adopted by

the large bakery. What are the strengths and weaknesses of these approaches?

(10 marks).

2

c) Outline any changes you would recommend that would help Toni to manage her

business. Explain how your changes would address the weaknesses that you have

identified in Toni’s proposed system.

(5 marks).

When answering Question 1, please maintain the 3 parts (a to c above). The word

length: the answer to each part should address the question for the marks awarded

to each part.

[Total: 20 marks]

Question 2

Zubick Corporation produces and supplies 2 types of component parts to industrial

equipment manufacturers. These parts are known as X123 and R907.

There are 2 departments in the factory: the machining and assembly departments.

The machining department has highly automated operations, while assembly has

labour intensive operations.

Table 1: Annual production data by product

Product X123 Product R907

Units produced 1,000 2,000

Total direct labour hours

(DLH) consumed per unit 5 DLH 15 DLH

Total machine hours (MH)

consumed per unit 15 MH 5 MH

The overhead cost incurred in the Machining department was $1,300,000, while the

overhead cost in the Assembly department was $350,000.

Table 2: Annual overhead costs and production activity by department

Machining dept Assembly dept Total

Overhead cost $1,300,000 $350,000 $1,650,000

Direct labour hours

(DLH) consumed

per dept

5,000 DLH 30,000 DLH 35,000 DLH

Machine hours

(MH) consumed

per dept

23,000 MH 2,000 MH 25,000 MH

The manager, Rex, decided to allocate costs to the 2 products in the following

manner: he divided the total overhead costs of $1,650,000 by the total number of

labour hours utilised in the factory (ie (1000 x5) plus (2000 x 15) = 35,000 DLH).

Therefore his overhead rate was $1,650,000/35,000 = $47.14 per DLH.

3

The overhead allocated to each product using Rex’s rate was as follows:

Product X123 = 5 DLH x$47.14 = $235.70

Product R907 = 15 DLH x $47.14 = $707.10

But Rex was losing sales of product R907 to his competitor who was able to sell a

similar product at a lower price, and recover all costs of production.

Additional information:

Tables 3 and 4 show how much direct labour and machine time is consumed by

each product in each production department.

Table 3: Machine hours (MH) consumed by each product in production departments.

Machining dept Assembly dept Total per unit of

product

Per unit of product

X123 14.5 MH 0.5 MH

15 MH per unit of

X123

Per unit of product

R907 4.25 MH 0.75 MH

5 MH per unit of

R907

Table 4: Direct labour hours (DLH) consumed by each product in production

departments.

Machining dept Assembly dept Total per unit of

product

Per unit of product

X123 2 DLH 3 DLH

5 DLH per unit of

product X123

Per unit of product

R907 1.5 DLH 13.5 DLH

15 DLH per unit of

product R907

Required:

i) Do you agree or disagree with Rex’s overhead allocation method? Explain. You

should draw on information provided in Tables 1 to 4 to help explain and support

your answer.

(5 marks).

ii) How would you improve it? Calculate alternative rates that you would use and

explain why you think it would help Rex. You should draw on information provided in

Tables 1 to 4 to support your recommendation.

(15 marks).

[Total: 20 marks]

4

Attachments:

factory overhead is allocated to jobs at a rate of 40 per machine hour machine hours 560624

Week 2 Individual Graded Assignment II S VII Job Order Costing
After you have read pages 371 393 of your textbook, viewed video Session VII, and completed the practice assignments for S VII, complete the following assignment:
GIVEN: Example Manufacturing Company uses a job order costing system. The following information summarizes its operations related to production for January, its first month of operations.
A. Purchased production materials on account, $82,000.
B. Production materials of $79,600 were requisitioned to the factory for the five jobs started in January and for general factory use as follows:

Job Materials
Job No. 1001 $10,300
Job No. 1002 13,670
Job No. 1003 11,200
Job No. 1004 18,800
Job No. 1005 21,900
General factory use 3,730
$79,600

C. Factory labor costs of $65,400 were incurred. The employee time tickets provided the following:

Job Factory Labor
Job No. 1001 $ 8,300
Job No. 1002 10,250
Job No. 1003 9,200
Job No. 1004 15,300
Job No. 1005 17,400
General factory use 4,950
$65,400

D. Factory overhead is allocated to jobs at a rate of $40 per machine hour. Machine hours used were:

Job Machine Hours
Job No. 1001 54
Job No. 1002 72
Job No. 1003 58
Job No. 1004 90
Job No. 1005 96
370

E. Depreciation on the factory machinery and equipment was $6,500.
F. Factory overhead costs incurred on account were $8,300.
G. Jobs 1001, 1002 and 1004 were completed.
H. Jobs 1001 and 1002 were shipped and the customers were billed $24,000 for job 1001 and $31,000 for job 1002.
REQUIRED:
Part 1: Prepare a schedule summarizing manufacturing costs by job incurred in January. Use the following columns and provide column totals.
Job Direct Materials Direct Labor Factory Overhead Total
Part 2: What are the January 31 balances for each of the following accounts? Support your answers by indicating the jobs in that balance.
Work in Process Inventory
Finished Goods Inventory
Cost of Goods Sold
Part 3: What was cost of goods manufactured for January? (Show supporting work.)
Part 4: What was gross profit for January? (Show supporting work.)
Part 5: Prepare summary journal entries for information a through h given above. (Hint: Refer to lecture slides S VI: 3, 4 & 5, and S VII: 4, 8 & 10)
You are to work independently on this assignment. When you submit your work for grading please use the following file name: your last namefirst name JOC>. This assignment is worth up to 24 points.

please help federal income tax 560636

Instructions:

  1. Prepare the 2013 Form 1040 and all other required Federal forms and schedules for Brett Simons. The returns should be prepared taking the maximum tax benefit allowable into consideration. Round all amounts to whole dollars.

  1. Do not prepare tax returns for any other individuals mentioned in the problem.

  1. The ages provided in the problem are determined as of 12/31/13.

  1. Must not use tax software. Prepare return using 2013 tax forms provided or found at www.irs.gov.

  1. Important Requirement! Any and all amounts excluded from income or deductions either limited or not taken must be identified. All calculations used in the determination of the components of taxable income or tax liability must be provided. This requirement should be provided in a separate file (Word or Excel) and must be submitted with the completed tax return.

  1. Work independently. Do not collaborate with anyone. Collaboration or assistance, in any form, is considered cheating and will result in a grade of zero for any student(s) involved.

  1. Brett Simon’s tax return must be saved as a PDF file and submitted to the relevant assignment link. (in addition to the documents required by #5 and #8 of this document). This assignment is subject to the 10% late submission discount.

Facts:

Brett, age 45, is single and resides at 123 Main Street, West Haven, CT 06516. His social security number is 123 45 6789. Brett has two children, Kyle (age 17) and Grace (age 10), and their social security #’s are 049 52 5472 and 045 23 5432 respectively. Brett’s mother, Donna Simons (age 70, social security #048 68 5874) lives at 50 Benton Street, West Haven, CT. Ella receives Social Security income of $15,000 per year and Brett pays his mother $75 per week to watch Grace after school (36 weeks). Brett does not want to designate $3 to the Presidential Election Campaign fund.

On New Year’s Eve 2009, Brett’s wife and Grace’s mother Susan, was tragically killed in an automobile accident caused by a drunk driver. Brett survived the accident sustaining a broken leg and arm. He filed a lawsuit with respect to his injuries which was settled in 2013 awarding compensatory damages of $15,000 and punitive damages of $35,000.

Brett was the named beneficiary of Susan’s $150,000 life insurance policy. Brett was given the option by Liberty Mutual to either receive the entire proceeds as one payment in 2010 or to receive $32,000 per year for five years. Brett chose to receive the proceeds in installments, the fourth of which was received in February, 2013.

Due to the loss of his wife, Brett decided that he should work from home. In December of 2012, he retired from his job as a Waterbury police officer and started his own security company on January 1, 2013. He continued to work part time for the Police Department in 2013. His W 2 from the Waterbury Police Department (EIN 06 1234567) reported the following: wages $10,000, federal income taxes withheld $1,000, and Connecticut income taxes withheld $500. WPD withheld the proper amounts of social security and medicare taxes from Brett’s pay during the year. Brett was not a participant in WPD’s retirement plan.

In 2013 Brett returned to school to pursue a master’s degree in Criminal Justice. During 2013, Brett paid $3,000 for qualified tuition expenses.

Brett’s business “Safe & Secure” (taxpayer I.D. #06 7654321) opened for business on January 1st. He uses the cash method of accounting and materially participates in the operation of this business. Brett uses his finished basement as his office. It has a separate entrance for clients and occupies approximately 500 of the 3,000 total square footage of his home. The home cost $400,000 at acquisition (12/01/2000 and does not include cost of land). Brett rents all necessary office furniture and equipment however repairs to the walls and painting were required to make it client ready. The total cost for the wall repairs and painting was $2,000.

Revenue and expenses for Safe & Secure for the year were as follows:

Security services Revenue

$50,000

Alarm monitoring services Revenue

$10,000

Equipment rent expense

$5,000

Business insurance expense

$500

Advertising expense

$800

Legal expenses

$500

Wages paid to his employee

$9,000

Payroll taxes paid on employee wages

$800

Office Supplies Expense

$1,000

Liability Insurance Expense

$500

Brett received the following interest and dividend income in 2013 (he did not have any interest in a foreign account or trust):

Interest

Dividends

Webster Bank

$500

UTC Corporation**

$2,000

Waterbury Credit Union

$300

Ace Corporation**

$300

Multistate Municipal Bonds

$800

Walmart**

$500

**Non Qualified dividends

On November 1, 2005, Brett and Susan invested in Ace Corporation by purchasing 100 shares at $60/share. Concerned about the future of the company, he sold the shares at $20/share on February 1, 2013. Brett received a Form 1099 B from his investment company that reported the sale and basis of the stock sold.

Prior to meeting Susan, Brett was married to Elaine, Kyle’s mother (social security #985 25 6975). Pursuant to their divorce agreement, Brett is required to make monthly alimony payments of $500 to Elaine. Brett faithfully makes each month’s payment. In addition, Elaine is required to pay Brett $800 per month for child support. Kyle resides with his mother during the summer and school vacations.

Brett is an avid fisherman. In December 2013, Brett’s fishing boat which is stored at the Mystic dock was stolen and not recovered. Prior to the theft, the boat’s fair market value and adjusted basis was $30,000 and $25,000 respectively. The boat which was acquired in 2010 was not insured.

Kyle graduated high school in June and decided to study chemistry at a state university. He received an academic scholarship of $10,000 towards his first semester tuition expenses of $18,000. In addition, he took a student loan for $6,000 to pay for room and board. Brett paid the balance of Kyle’s tuition costs from Brett’s savings account.

Brett paid (and can substantiate) the following during the year:

Health insurance premiums for Brett and kids (paid during 2013)

$5,600

Interest on Discover credit card

$300

Dental expenses (Grace’s braces)

$6,000

Donna’s medical expenses

$500

“Lifestyle” lift for Donna

$6,500

Mortgage interest (Main St) (Total mortgage

$5,800

Real estate taxes (Main St)

$2,000

Mortgage interest (Donna’s home)

$1,000

Property taxes (assessed on car’s value)

$350

Utilities for residence

$4,500

Homeowner’s insurance

$900

Contributions to church

$800

Used furniture donated to Goodwill (FMV) (Cost = 1,000)

$800

Cost of one dinner ticket to attend a fundraiser for the “Republican National Committee”; value of a comparable dinner = $50

$475

Brett did not keep mileage records for medical or charitable contribution deduction purposes.

In 2013, Brett paid a balance of $800 with his 2012 Connecticut income tax return. He also made state estimated tax payments totaling $1,000 ($250 on each of the following dates 4/15/13, 06/15/13, 09/15/13 and 01/15/14).

In the event he is due a refund of tax, Brett would like to apply all of his overpayment to his 2014 tax liability.

example manufacturing company uses a job order costing system the 560682

Example Manufacturing Company uses a job order costing system. The following information summarizes its operations related to production for January, its first month of operations.

A. Purchased production materials on account, $82,000.

B. Production materials of $79,600 were requisitioned to the factory for the five jobs started in January and for general factory use as follows:

Job Materials
Job No. 1001 $10,300
Job No. 1002 13,670
Job No. 1003 11,200
Job No. 1004 18,800
Job No. 1005 21,900
General factory use 3,730
$79,600

C. Factory labor costs of $65,400 were incurred. The employee time tickets provided the following:

Job Factory Labor
Job No. 1001 $ 8,300
Job No. 1002 10,250
Job No. 1003 9,200
Job No. 1004 15,300
Job No. 1005 17,400
General factory use 4,950
$65,400

D. Factory overhead is allocated to jobs at a rate of $40 per machine hour. Machine hours used were:

Job Machine Hours
Job No. 1001 54
Job No. 1002 72
Job No. 1003 58
Job No. 1004 90
Job No. 1005 96
370

E. Depreciation on the factory machinery and equipment was $6,500.

F. Factory overhead costs incurred on account were $8,300.

G. Jobs 1001, 1002 and 1004 were completed.

H. Jobs 1001 and 1002 were shipped and the customers were billed $24,000 for job 1001 and $31,000 for job 1002.

REQUIRED:

Part 1: Prepare a schedule summarizing manufacturing costs by job incurred in January. Use the following columns and provide column totals.

Job Direct Materials Direct Labor Factory Overhead Total

Part 2: What are the January 31 balances for each of the following accounts? Support your answers by indicating the jobs in that balance.

Work in Process Inventory

Finished Goods Inventory

Cost of Goods Sold

Part 3: What was cost of goods manufactured for January? (Show supporting work.)

Part 4: What was gross profit for January? (Show supporting work.)

Part 5: Prepare summary journal entries for information a through h given above. (Hint: Refer to lecture slides S VI: 3, 4 & 5, and S VII: 4, 8 & 10)

You are to work independently on this assignment. When you submit your work for grading please use the following file name:
your last namefirst name JOC>. This assignment is worth up to 24 points.

Attachments:

studying the elements of advanced financial accounting topics income statement 560732

Introduction Studying the elements of Advanced Financial Accounting topics can be challenging to say the least, and the perspective we take in this course is specifically from a preparer of the financial statements. In order holistically understand the concepts learned in the course, it will be beneficial to analyse consolidated financial statements from a user perspective. This enhances a better understanding of the material studied in the course to date and confirms your understanding of consolidated entities.

Once you have successfully located the most recent Financial Statements in the Investor Relations section (found in the 2012 Annual Report), you will need to answer the following questions:

Income Statement 1. Are the expenses presented by function or nature? How does this presentation enhance your understanding of the statement? 2. What is amortization on the intangible and other assets during the year and why does amortization expense not appear as a separate component on the income statement? 3. What portion of the company’s expenses are research and development? What is their policy regarding capitalization of such costs?

Balance Sheet 1. What portion of the company’s assets is property, plant, and equipment? Has the portion increased or decreased from the prior year? 2. How does the company value its plant and equipment? 3. Assume that one of the subsidiaries sold equipment to the parent two years ago and reported a substantial gain. The parent still owns and uses this equipment. Due to an oversight, the intercompany gain has never been eliminated when preparing the consolidated statements. What is the impact of this error on total asset turnover and return on assets for the current year?

Cash Flow Statement 1. Does the company employ the direct or indirect method of accounting for operating cash flows? 2. What was the biggest cash outflow during the year? 3. What percentage of the companies expenses were related to stock based compensation? Why does Google use stock based compensation to encourage employees? 4. If the company had reported gains or losses on sale of subsidiaries in income from continuing operations rather than in income from discontinued operations, what impact would this have had on the company’s share price? Briefly explain.

Reporting and Disclosure 1. Are the company’s operating segments based on product lines, geographic areas, or some other factor? 2. Does the company provide disclosures about major customers? If so, what is the nature of the disclosure? 3. Which of the operating segments is the biggest in terms of revenues? Profit? Assets? 4. Which of the operating segments reported the most improvement in return on assets from the previous year? 5. What currency is used in presenting the financial statements? 6. Identify the location(s) in the annual report where the company provides disclosures related to its current income tax status with the Internal Revenue Service and other tax authorities. Comment on whether you believe Google has reported their taxes properly in the past. 7. Indicate if and how the company describes the significance of foreign currency issues to the overall success/profitability of the company and sensitivity of its income to a change in foreign exchange risks. 8. Describe the types of hedging instruments the company uses to hedge foreign exchange risk. 9. What was the amount of foreign exchange gains or losses for the year on cash flow hedges? Describe how these gains or losses are reported. 10. Describe the basis for consolidation used by the company. Include a summary about relevant standards followed, the accounting for subsidiaries, business combinations, and non controlling interests.

Attachments:

c3 prepare the issuer s journal entry for each separate transaction a on march 1 atl 560806

C3 Prepare the issuer’s journal entry for each separate transaction. (a) On
March
1,
Atlantic
Co.
issues
42,500
sharesof
$4
par
value
common
stockfor
$297,500
cash. (b) On April
1, OP
Co.
issuesno
par
value
common
stockfor $70,000
cash. (c) On April 6, MPG
issues2,000
sharesof $25
par
value
common
stockfor $45,000 of inventory, $145,000 of machinery, and acceptance of a $94,000 note payable.

in january 2011 keona co pays 2 800 000 for a tract of land with two buildings on it 560919

In January 2011, Keona Co. pays $2,800,000 for a tract of land with two buildings on it. It plans to demolish Building 1 and build a new store in its place. Building 2 will be a company office; it is appraised at $641,300, with a useful life of 20 years and an $80,000 salvage value. A lighted parking lot near Building 1 has improvements (Land Improvements 1) valued at $408,100 that are expected to last another 14 years with no salvage value. Without the buildings and improvements, the tract of land is valued at $1,865,600. The company also incurs the following additional costs:

Cost to demolish Building 1 $ 422,600

Cost of additional land grading 167,200

Cost to construct new building (Building 3), having a useful life

of 25 years and a $390,100 salvage value 2,019,000

Cost of new land improvements (Land Improvements 2) near Building 2

having a 20 year useful life and no salvage value 158,000

Allocate the costs incurred by Keona to the appropriate columns and total each column. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Land Building 2 Building 3 Landimprovements 1 Landimprovements 2

Purchase price $ $ $ $ $

Demolition

Land grading

New building

New improvements

Totals $ $ $ $ $

I NEED TO KNOW THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR LAND, BUILDING 2, AND LAND IMPROVEMENTS 1? I already know the other amounts.
#dmRosAdWrapper MainNorth iframe{width:100%} <iframe id=”dmRosAd 1 north” width=”560″ height=”315″ frameborder=”0″ marginheight=”0″ marginwidth=”0″ scrolling=”no” src=”http://dmros.ysm.yahoo.com/ros/?c=cbdde9a2&w=678&h=315&ty=noscript&tt=Accounting%2FBusiness +Chapter+8+Long+Term+Assets%3F&r=https%3a%2f%2fwww.google.com%2furl%3fsa%3dt%26amp%3brct%3dj%26amp%3bq%3d%26amp%3besrc%3ds%26amp%3bfrm%3d1%26amp%3bsource%3dweb%26amp%3bcd%3d1%26amp%3bved%3d0CCYQFjAA%26amp%3burl%3dhttps%3A%2F%2Fanswers.yahoo.com%2Fquestion%2Findex%3Fqid%3D20111113101346AA1v5yy%26amp%3bei%3dOT5MU7oy17 xBKi gPAK%26amp%3busg%3dAFQjCNH5Vqzukneyvpld_B5Hv5tfHeVunw”> </iframe>
Best Answer

  • JKRB answered 2 years ago

Appraised value of Assets

Land $1,865,600

Building $641,300

Land Improvements $408,100

Total appraised value = $2,915,000 at time of purchase

Cost Allocated to each asset at time of purchase

Land

(1,865,600 / 2,915,000) x 2,800,000 = $1,792,000

Building (2)

(641,300 / 2,915,000) x 2,800,000 = $616,000

Land Improvements (1)

(408,100 / 2,915,000) x 2,800,000 = $392,000

Cost to demolish Building 1 $ 422,600

Add to Land

Cost of additional land grading 167,200

Add to Land

Cost to construct new building (Building 3), having a useful life

of 25 years and a $390,100 salvage value 2,019,000

Add $2,019,000 to Building (3)

Cost of new land improvements (Land Improvements 2) near Building 2

having a 20 year useful life and no salvage value 158,000

Add to Land Improvements (2)

assignment on management accounting questions needs to be answered answers needs to 560990

Assignment on “Management Accounting”.

Questions needs to be answered.
Answers needs to be correct.
Document Preview:

ASSIGNMENT : Worth 25 % ?Due : 28th May 2014 to be handed to tutor in the Tutorial ? ?Question 1(15 marks)??Penray uses a standard costing system in evaluating production operations .The company has had a number of problems with suppliers and employees in recent times so they hired a new production supervisor ,David Smith. David Smith has been working for the company for three months now and the employees appear much happier with the company.??The director of manufacturing commented that employees appear happier after Smith had been there for the last three months and with the changes in suppliers of material and various morale boosting activities the overall total labour and material variances being low he seemed to have transformed the company and to have considerably improved its performance from a company which has always struggled to achieve its cost targets and achieve positive material and labour variances .??The following additional information is provided:? The company purchased and consumed 90,000 kilograms of direct materials? at $7.90 per kilogram and paid $15.50 per hour for 42,000 direct labour? hours? Total units produced were 19,200? The company’s standard costs show that each completed unit required 4.4? kilograms of direct materials at $8.50 per kilogram and 2.5 direct? labour hours at $14 per hour.??Required :?1.Calculate the direct material and the direct labour variances.?2.Based on your answer to part 1 should the management of Penray be? concerned about its variances? Explain why.?3.Are things going as smoothly as the director of manufacturing believes?? Evaluate the company’s variances and determine whether or not the changes? in suppliers and the morale boosting activities appear to be working.Explain? why. ?????????Question 2(10 marks)??The accountant for Daily Manufacturing compares each month’s actual results with the monthly budget.The standard direct labour rates and the standard hours allowed based on expected…

Attachments:

prepare journal entries and post to the t accounts for the month of october 561084

REQUIREMENTS:

  1. Prepare Journal Entries and post to the T Accounts for the month of October.
  2. Prepare adjusting entries and post to the T Accounts for the month of October.
  3. Prepare an Income Statement, Equity Statement, and Balance Sheet
  4. Prepare closing entries for the month of October.

_______________________________________________________________________

For each transaction below, record
journal entries in
proper format before you post to the ledger.

Use the following accounts: Cash, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Equipment, Supplies, Capital, Drawing, Repair Fees Revenue, Prepaid Insurance, Wages Expense, Utilities Expense.

October Transactions

October 1 The owner invested $40,000 cash in the business

October 1 Purchased equipment for $15,000 on account.

October 1 Purchased a 4 year insurance policy to insure the business for $2000

for cash.

October 2 Paid $2000 cash for supplies.

October 4 Received $3,000 cash from customers for services rendered

October 14 Paid for the equipment purchase on October 1.

October 15 Paid wages $1,750

October 16 Performed services worth $4,500 for credit customers

October 20 Received $1,400 cash from customers previously billed on account

October 22 The owner withdrew $3,400 cash for personal use

October 31 Paid utility bill for October $500.

End of Month Adjustments

1. Assume that the equipment purchased on October 1 has no trade in value and an expected life of 5 years. Prepare the adjusting entry for the month of October.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry for the insurance policy purchased on October 1 for the month of October.

3. After taking a physical count of the supplies, you discover that there are actually $1,400 of supplies left in the supply room. Prepare the adjusting entry for supplies for the month of October.

4. Wages for October 29 – 31 are unpaid at the end of the month. Normally, wages for a regular 5 day work week total $5,000. Prepare the adjusting entry for unpaid wages for the month of October.

Financial Statements

1. Prepare a trial balance after posting your adjusting entries to your ledger.

1. Prepare an Income Statement for the month of October.

2. Prepare an Equity Statement for the month of October.

3. Prepare a Balance Sheet for the month of October.

Closing Entries

1. After preparing your financial statements, prepare the closing entries for the month of October.

2. Please state and show me your calculation for the new updated Capital balance after posting your closing entries.

Attachments:

two divisions of cmi are involved in a dispute division a purchases 561167

Two divisions of CMI are involved in a dispute. Division A purchases Part 101 and Division B purchases Part 201 from a third division, C. Both divisions need the parts for products that they assemble. The intercompany transactions have remained constant for several years. Recently, outside suppliers have lowered their prices, but Division C is not lowering its prices. In addition, all division managers are feeling the pressure to increase profit.

Document Preview:

Two divisions of CMI are involved in a dispute. Division A purchases Part 101 and Division B purchases Part 201 from a third division, C. Both divisions need the parts for products that they assemble. The intercompany transactions have remained constant for several years. Recently, outside suppliers have lowered their prices, but Division C is not lowering its prices. In addition, all division managers are feeling the pressure to increase profit. Managers of divisions A and B would like the flexibility to purchase the parts they need from external parties to lower cost and increase profitability. The current pattern is that Division A purchases 3,000 units of product part 101 from Division C (the supplying division) and another 1,000 units from an external supplier. The market price for Part 101 is $900 per unit. Division B purchases 1,000 units of Part 201 from Division C and another 1,000 units from an external supplier. Note that both divisions A and B purchase the needed supplies from both the internal source and an external source at the same time. The managers for divisions A and B are preparing a new proposal for consideration. Division C will continue to produce Parts 101 and 201. All of its production will be sold to Divisions A and B. No other customers are likely to be found for these products in the short term, given that supply is greater than demand in the market. Division C will manufacture 2,000 units of Part 101 for the Division A and 500 units of Part 201 for the Division B. Division A will buy 2,000 units of Part 101 from Division C and 2,000 units from an external supplier at $900 per unit. Division B will buy 500 units of Part 201 from Division C and 1,500 units from an external supplier at $1,900 per unit. Division C Data 2012 Based on the Current Agreement Part?101?201??Direct materials?$200?$300??Direct labor?$200?$300??Variable overhead?$300?$600??Transfer price?$1,000?$2,000??Annual volume?3,000 units?1,000 units?? Required: Calculate…

Attachments:

suppose that stillwater designs has two classes of distributors jit distributors and 561175

Suppose that Stillwater Designs has two classes of distributors: JIT distributors and nonJIT distributors. The JIT distributor places small, frequent orders, and the nonJIT distributor tends to place larger, less frequent orders. Both types of distributors are buying the same product. Still water Designs provides the following information about customer related activities and costs for the most recent quarter:
Exercises

Required:

  1. Calculate the total revenues per distributor category, and assign the customer costs to each distributor type by using revenues as the allocation base. Selling price for one unit is .

  2. CONCEPTUAL CONNECTION Calculate the customer cost per distributor type using activity based cost assignments. Discuss the merits of offering the nonJIT distributors a price decrease (assume that they are agitating for a price concession).

  3. CONCEPTUAL CONNECTION Assume that the JIT distributors are simply imposing the frequent orders on Stillwater Designs. No formal discussion has taken place between JIT customers and Stillwater Designs regarding the supply of goods on a JIT basis. The sales pattern has evolved over time. As an independent consultant, what would you suggest to Stillwater Designs’ management?

Exercise 7 43

Activity Based Supplier Costing

    OBJECTIVE 3

    Activity Based supplier costing Bowman Company manufactures cooling systems. Bowman produces all the parts necessary for its product except for one electronic component, which is purchased from two local suppliers: Manzer Inc. and Buckner Company. Both suppliers are reliable and seldom deliver late; however, Manzer sells the component for , while Buckner sells the same component for . Bowman purchases of its components from Buckner because of its lower price. The total annual demand is components.

    To help assess the cost effect of the two components, the following data were collected for supplier related activities and suppliers:

    1. Activity Data

      Exercises

    2. Supplier Data

      Exercises

    Required:

  1. Calculate the cost per component for each supplier, taking into consideration the costs of the supplier related activities and using the current prices and sales volume. (Note: Round the unit cost to two decimal places.)

  2. Suppose that Bowman loses in sales per year because it develops a poor reputation due to defective units attributable to failed components. Using warranty hours, assign the cost of lost sales to each supplier. By how much would this change the cost of each supplier’s component? (Round to two decimal places.)

  3. CONCEPTUAL CONNECTION Based on the analysis in Requirements 1 and 2, discuss the importance of activity based supplier costing for internal decision making.

dropping or retaining a tour 561184

Blueline Tours, Inc., operates tours throughout the United States. A study has indicated that some of the tours are not profitable, and consideration is being given to dropping these tours to improve the company’s overall operating performance.

One such tour is a two day Historic Mansions bus t…

Ticket revenue (115 seat capacity × 40%
occupancy × $80 ticket price per person)
$ 3,680 100 %
Variable expenses ($11.00 per person) 506 13.8




Contribution margin 3,174 86.2 %








Tour expenses:
Tour promotion $ 670
Salary of bus driver 350
Fee, tour guide 730
Fuel for bus 185
Depreciation of bus 400
Liability insurance, bus 180
Overnight parking fee, bus 60
Room and meals, bus driver and tour guide 180
Bus maintenance and preparation 200


Total tour expenses 2,955


Net operating loss $ (219)

ratios are used for many purposes performance measurement is one such application 561308

Ratios are used for many purposes; performance measurement is one such application. However, not all performance measures are expressed as a ratio. Do some research on the Internet to learn about operating leverage, ROI, EVA, DOL and another performance measure of your choice. You will note that there are variations in the computations of a particular measurement. Consistency in application is the key. Use information from Facebook to complete the assignment. http://investor.fb.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=802760http://investor.fb.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=802760 http://investor.

Document Preview:

Ratios are used for many purposes; performance measurement is one such application. However, not all performance measures are expressed as a ratio. Do some research on the Internet to learn about operating leverage, ROI, EVA, DOL and another performance measure of your choice. You will note that there are variations in the computations of a particular measurement. Consistency in application is the key. Use information from Facebook to complete the assignment. ? HYPERLINK “http://investor.fb.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=802760” ?http://investor.fb.com/releasedetail.cfm?ReleaseID=802760? ? HYPERLINK “http://investor.fb.com/secfiling.cfm?filingID=1326801 13 31” ?http://investor.fb.com/secfiling.cfm?filingID=1326801 13 31? ? HYPERLINK “http://wallstcheatsheet.com/stocks/analysts facebook expected to generate operating leverage and 3 other research notes to browse l/?a=viewall” ?http://wallstcheatsheet.com/stocks/analysts facebook expected to generate operating leverage and 3 other research notes to browse l/?a=viewall? Required: Reflect on the advantages and disadvantages of these performance measures. Choose your preferred measure and explain your rationale. Provide brief explanations Provide an Excel spreadsheet representing your findings

Attachments:

aloha can anyone do this part of learning team assignment my portion of team assignm 561370

Aloha, can anyone do this part of learning team assignment. My portion of team assignment

Horizontal Analysis for Income Statement


Statement
Ratio & Analysis Project

Createa horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement of your selected Virtual Organization..

Submit as an Excel spreadsheet file.

Due 4/20

compute gross profit for january using fifo lifo and average cost 559743

Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—FIFO, LIFO, and average cost; comparing FIFO, LIFO, and average cost

Ornamental Iron Works began January with 45 units of iron inventory that cost $24 each. During January, the company completed the following inventory transactions:

Units

Unit Cost

Unit Sale Price

Jan 3

Sale

35

$51

8

Purchase

70

$32

21

Sale

65

$73

30

Purchase

25

$47

Requirements

1. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using FIFO.

2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using LIFO.

3. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using average cost.

4. Determine the company’s cost of goods sold for January using FIFO, LIFO, and average cost.

5. Compute gross profit for January using FIFO, LIFO, and average cost.

what value would rocky bayou report on the balance sheet at july 31 2012 for invento 559744

Applying the lower of cost or market rule to inventories

Rocky Bayou Golf Clubs, which uses the FIFO method, has the following account balances at July 31, 2012, prior to releasing the financial statements for the year:

Inventory

Cost of goods sold

Sales revenue

Bal

13,500

Bal

68,000

Bal

119,000

Rocky Bayou has determined that the replacement cost (current market value) of the July 31, 2012, ending inventory is $13,000.

Requirements

1. Prepare any adjusting journal entry required from the information given.

2. What value would Rocky Bayou report on the balance sheet at July 31, 2012, for inventory?

prepare the july income statement through gross profit for kids costumes 559746

Estimating ending inventory by the gross profit method and preparing the income statement

Kids Costumes estimates its inventory by the gross profit method. The gross profit has averaged 39% of net sales. The company’s inventory records reveal the following data:

Inventory, July 1

$ 268,000

Transactions during July:

Purchases

7,661,000

Purchase discounts

171,000

Purchase returns

32,000

Sales

8,788,000

Sales returns

35,000

Requirements

1. Estimate the July 31 inventory using the gross profit method.

2. Prepare the July income statement through gross profit for Kids Costumes.

how often do you plan to do a physical count of inventory on hand 559747

Decision Case 6 1 Assume you are opening a Bed Bath & Beyond store. To finance the business, you need a $500,000 loan, and your banker requires a set of forecasted financial statements. Assume you are preparing the statements and must make some decisions about how to do the accounting for the business.

Requirements

Answer the following questions (refer to Chapter 5 if necessary):

1. Which type of inventory system will you use? Perpetual or Periodic? Give your reason.

2. Show how to compute net purchases (see the vocabulary list in Chapter 5 for the definition of “net purchases”) and net sales. How will you treat the cost of freight in?

3. How often do you plan to do a physical count of inventory on hand? What will the physical count accomplish?

4. Inventory costs are rising. Which inventory costing method would have the effect of

a. maximizing net income?

b. paying the least amount of income tax?

what kind of adjustment to cost of goods sold debit or credit would have the effect 559749

Ever since he was a kid, Carl Montague wanted to be a pro football player. When that didn’t work out, he found another way to channel his natural competitive spirit: He bought a small auto parts store in Kentucky that was deep in red ink (negative earnings). At the end of the year, he created “ghost” inventory by recording fake inventory purchases. He offset these transactions by “adjustments” to Cost of goods sold, thereby boosting profit and strengthening the balance sheet. Fortified with great financials, he got bank loans that allowed him to build up a regional chain of stores, buy a local sports franchise, and take on the lifestyle of a celebrity. When the economy in the region tanked, he could no longer cover his losses with new debt or equity infusions, and the whole empire fell like a house of cards.

Requirements

1. Name several parties that could have been hurt by the actions of Carl Montague.

2. What kind of adjustment to Cost of goods sold (debit or credit) would have the effect of boosting earnings?

how well does each of your companies compare to the average for its industry 559750

Link Back to Chapter 5 (Gross Profit Percentage and Inventory Turnover). Obtain the annual reports of as many companies as you have team members—one company per team member. Most companies post their financial statements on their Web sites.

Requirements

1. Identify the inventory method used by each company.

2. Compute each company’s gross profit percentage and rate of inventory turnover for the most recent two years.

3. For the industries of the companies you are analyzing, obtain the industry averages for gross profit percentage and inventory turnover from Robert Morris Associates, Annual Statement Studies; Dun and Bradstreet, Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios; or Leo Troy, Almanac of Business and Industrial Financial Ratios.

4. How well does each of your companies compare to the average for its industry? What insight about your companies can you glean from these ratios?

compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold using each of the following methods 559751

The periodic inventory records of Synergy Prosthetics indicate the following at July 31:

Jul 1

Beginning inventory

6 units

@ $60

8

Purchase

5 units

@ $67

15

Purchase

10 units

@ $70

26

Purchase

5 units

@ $85

At July 31, Synergy counts two units of inventory on hand.

Requirement

1. Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold, using each of the following methods:

a. Average cost (round average unit cost to the nearest cent)

b. First in, first out

c. Last in, first out

prepare the income statement for red company which uses the periodic inventory syste 559753

Computing periodic inventory amounts

Consider the data of the following companies:

Company

Net sales

Beginning inventory

Net purchases

Ending inventory

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit

Red

$ 101,000

$ 22,000

$ 65,000

$ 17,000

(a)

$ 31,000

Yellow

(b)

25,000

95,000

(c)

96,000

40,000

Orange

93,000

(d)

52,000

22,000

62,000

(e)

Green

86,000

12,000

(f)

5,000

(g)

49,000

Requirements

1. Supply the missing amounts in the preceeding table.

2. Prepare the income statement for Red Company, which uses the periodic inventory system. Include a complete heading and show the full computation of cost of goods sold. Red’s operating expenses for the year were $11,000.

which method will result in the lowest income taxes for tomorrows 559754

Computing periodic inventory amounts

A Tomorrows Electronic Center began October with 90 units of inventory that cost $70 each. During October, the store made the following purchases:

Oct 3

20 @ $75

12

40 @ $78

18

60 @ $84

Tomorrows uses the periodic inventory system, and the physical count at October 31 indicates that 110 units of inventory are on hand.

Requirements

1. Determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold amounts for the October financial statements using the average cost, FIFO, and LIFO methods.

2. Sales revenue for October totaled $26,000. Compute Tomorrows’ gross profit for October using each method.

3. Which method will result in the lowest income taxes for Tomorrows? Why? Which method will result in the highest net income for Tomorrows? Why?

which method will result in the lowest income taxes for easy use 559755

Computing periodic inventory amounts

Easy Use Electronic Center began October with 80 units of inventory that cost $57 each. During October, the store made the following purchases:

Oct 3

10 @ $65

12

30 @ $70

18

70 @ $72

Easy Use uses the periodic inventory system, and the physical count at October 31 indicates that 115 units of inventory are on hand.

Requirements

1. Determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold amounts for the October financial statements using the average cost, FIFO, and LIFO methods.

2. Sales revenue for October totaled $22,000. Compute Easy Use’s gross profit for October using each method.

3. Which method will result in the lowest income taxes for Easy Use? Why? Which method will result in the highest net income for Easy Use? Why?

what are the essential features of the fair value accounting as laid out in ifrs13 a 559812

What are the essential features of the ‘Fair value’ accounting, as laid out in IFRS13/AASB13 Fair Value? How are assets and liabilities valued under the Fair Value accounting system?

Document Preview:

ACC29083: THEORY OF ACCOUNTING Assessment details for ALL students Assessment item 1 — Group / Individual Case Study Due date:?Tuesday of Week 7?ASSESSMENT??Weighting: Length:?30% 2500 3000 words ?1??Objectives The objectives of your assignment are: To develop your critical analytical skills and written communication to a point that you have demonstrated you can communicate and argue a case from an accounting theory perspective. This assignment requires a substantial search of the accounting theory literature and contemporary developments on global accounting regulation. You will need to use the resources of the various databases and your text to successfully undertake this work. Extensive reading is highly desirable. Case Study: Case Study # 6.1 on pages 210 212 in Chapter 6 of your Textbook: Godfrey, Hodgson, Tarca, Hamilton and Holmes, 7th edition, 2010. Case Title: “Fair value or false accounting.” – By Anthony Rayman The case is about the global controversy around the adoption and application of the Fair Value measurement system as required by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), and followed by the Australian Accounting Standards Board (AASB). The specific debate in this case is about the rejection of historical cost and other valuation methods and adoption of the Fair Value measurement system. Required This case may have major implications and ramifications for asset and liability valuation and measurement of income across the board. Read the above case, examine the arguments and counter arguments, and research other relevant materials to answer the following questions in your own words: What are the essential features of the ‘Fair value’ accounting, as laid out in IFRS13/AASB13 Fair Value? How are assets and liabilities valued under the Fair Value accounting system? (6 marks) …

e17 21 analyzing activity in inventory accounts select data concerning operations of 559914

E17.21. Analyzing Activity in Inventory Accounts

Select data concerning operations of Cascade Manufacturing Company for the past fiscal year follow:

Raw materials used .. $300,000

Total manufacturing costs charged to production during the year (includes raw materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead applied at a rate of 60 percent of direct labor costs 680,000

Cost of goods available for sale 826,000

Selling and general expenses .. 30,000

Inventories

Beginning Ending

Raw materials $70,000 $80,000

Work in process $85,000 30,000

Finished goods . $90,000 110,000

Required

Determine each of the following:

a. Cost of raw materials purchased

b. Direct labor costs charged to production

c. Cost of goods manufactured

d. Cost of goods sold

can you help me 559970

Chapter 10 Case 2: Kamikaze Enterprises (Japan) Ray Addis, chairman of the board of Ace Inc., a medium sized airplane manufacturing company, had called Frank Anderson into his office to talk about an investment made by Ace in Japan five years ago. Ray was very upset because Ace’s Japanese affiliate, Kamikaze Enterprises, was owned 40 percent by Ace and 60 percent by the Bansha Group, was not doing well. He expected Frank, the CFO of Ace, to explain what was going on. Ray had been involved in marketing all his life, unlike Frank who came up through the finance route.

Document Preview:

Chapter 10 Case 2: Kamikaze Enterprises (Japan) Ray Addis, chairman of the board of Ace Inc., a medium sized airplane manufacturing company, had called Frank Anderson into his office to talk about an investment made by Ace in Japan five years ago. Ray was very upset because Ace’s Japanese affiliate, Kamikaze Enterprises, was owned 40 percent by Ace and 60 percent by the Bansha Group, was not doing well. He expected Frank, the CFO of Ace, to explain what was going on. Ray had been involved in marketing all his life, unlike Frank who came up through the finance route. “How are you doing, Frank?” “Pretty good, I guess, Ray. I gather from your note that you’re not too pleased with Kamikaze Enterprises.” “That’s an understatement. In our last set of statements, I noticed that we picked up a dollar loss from Kamikaze for the fifth year in a row. I wouldn’t mind it so much, but that loss reduced our earnings by nearly 40 percent. Why can’t we get that blasted operation in the black? I thought those Japanese were supposed to be cost efficient. I feel like we’re tapping money down a rat hole.” “I can understand your concern, Ray, but we’ve gotten a healthy yen dividend from Kamikaze every year since we’ve been in operation. Because the yen keeps strengthening, the dollar equivalent of that dividend goes up every year.” “I realize that, Frank, but we report in dollars to our shareholders, and I have to explain those foreign exchange losses at the next annual meeting. What am I going to do? I understand that the book value of our investment has been written down to practically nothing because of those losses. Either that operation becomes profitable or we cut loose. Let me know in three weeks what our plan of action should be.” “OK, Ray. I’ll see what I can do.” “What a circus,” thought Frank as he walked back to his office. “There’s no way I can explain this situation so that he understands.” Ace Inc. had entered into the minority joint venture with the Bansha…

Attachments:

mona s pharmacy inc mpi is a new audit client of sharp and ming cgas in your first e 560053

Mona’s Pharmacy Inc. (MPI) is a new audit client of Sharp and Ming, CGAs. In your first engagement since being promoted to the position of audit senior, you have been assigned to the audit of MPI as part of a team for the year ended December 31, 2012. During several meetings and discussions with the audit manager, you made the following notes:

  1. MPI is owned by Mona Mane and her husband, Michael Mane. The business consists of a small retail pharmacy shop and an import and wholesale operation for various pharmaceutical related products. Recently the store unit next door has become available for lease. Mona and Michael have decided to expand the business by leasing this unit and combining it with the current location. They plan on using the extra square footage for a small grocery section within the store, which would include basic grocery items (bread, milk, and packaged goods). In the past, the business was financed from their personal resources and loans from family members. In order to finance the expansion they are currently seeking approval of a loan from a bank.
  2. The bank has outlined the following preliminary conditions for the loan:
    • MPI must provide audited financial statements prepared in accordance with Accounting Standards for Private Enterprises to accompany the loan application. Subsequent to the loan being approved, audited financial statements will be required within 90 days of each year end. In previous years, the financial statements of MPI were reviewed by a CGA practising as a sole practitioner, who did not want to expand her business to include audit engagements.
    • The net income before taxes and management bonus must remain above $450,000.
    • MPI’s inventory will be held as collateral for the loan.

  3. MPI sells a range of prescription and non prescription medical products and a variety of beauty products, souvenir items, and so on. The company also imports other pharmaceutical related products such as first aid and hygiene products. These products are sold wholesale to other local owner managed pharmacies and convenience stores. MPI provides all of its wholesale customers payment terms of net 30 days.
  4. In order to keep prices lower than its competitors, MPI buys in bulk to benefit from supplier discounts, and encourages retail customers to use cash or debit cards as payment by offering a discount. In the past, this worked well with, on average, 60% of its retail sales and services volumes paid by debit cards or cash. In the current year, this has dropped by 10%, with 50% of its retail sales now being paid by debit cards or cash.
  5. You have conducted a preliminary survey to gain some knowledge about both the client company and the industry in which it competes. Recently Salmart and Boblaws have both opened large super center retail outlets in the neighbourhood, both containing pharmaceutical departments. As a result, both MPI and many of MPI’s wholesale customers have been experiencing increased competitive price pressure.
  6. In the current year, MPI has experienced a 15% reduction in sales. Inventory levels have increased by 20%, and there is concern that various high dollar value pharmaceutical items are approaching their expiry dates. The preliminary financial statements indicated a net income before taxes of $357,000 and a net income after taxes of $285,600. Mona and Michael were each awarded a $100,000 bonus.
  7. The firm’s policy, in the absence of known adverse factors, is to set audit risk at 3%. Your preliminary assessment of inherent risk for the revenue and collections cycle indicates that there is a 55% likelihood of a material misstatement occurring. Your preliminary assessment of control risk indicates a 10% probability that the control systems in place will not prevent or detect such an error. Your firm uses the planning model (audit risk model) to determine detection risk.
  8. As part of this assessment of control risk, you reviewed the accounting systems and internal controls over sales transactions. The controller has provided the following description of the company’s system of processing sales:
    • Orders are received in writing and by telephone from retail stores that sell the company’s products. Based on this information, a clerk prepares a two part pre numbered sales order. Part #1 of the order is sent to the warehouse, while part #2 is sent to the billing clerk.
    • The warehouse fills the orders and ships the goods to the customers. Any items that are not in stock at the time an order is filled are marked “back ordered” on part #1 of the order form. The shipping clerk prepares a three part bill of lading. Copy #1 accompanies the goods, while copy #2 is attached to part #1 of the order form and the two documents are sent to the billing clerk. The third copy of the bill of lading is retained at the warehouse in numerical sequence.
    • At the beginning of each month, the billing clerk matches the order/bill of lading copies received from the warehouse with part #2 of the order form, and then prepares a three part pre numbered sales invoice. The description of items and quantities shipped are taken from part #2 of the order, while the prices are taken from the company’s approved standard price list. The terms of all sales are net 30 days.
    • The original invoice is sent to the customer. Invoice copy #2, together with the sales order copies and the copy of the bill of lading, are filed by customer in the billing department. The third copy of the invoice is sent to the bookkeeper to serve as the basis for posting to the individual customer accounts and for preparing the monthly sales journal. Statements are prepared by the bookkeeper and sent to customers only when requested.
  9. In your discussions with the controller, he mentioned that the following issues have been occurring and he would like to know if you can provide any recommendations:
    • Many customers have indicated that they have been overcharged.
    • Customers have called, indicating they have not yet received goods that they ordered weeks ago.
    • The time to collect accounts receivable balances has increased from 30 days to 45 days, and several customers continue to order goods even though they have not yet paid for previous orders.

Required

Based on the work completed to date, the following items need to be resolved and tasks (among others) need to be completed.

Task 1: Distinguish between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement (10 marks)

A friend of Mona and Michael told them that there are several different types of assurance that an auditor can provide. They would like you to explain the differences between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement. They also would like to know the likely reason(s) that the bank has requested an audit. (10 marks)

Task 2: Materiality and audit risk model (25 marks)

  1. Identify three factors specific to MPI that could affect the preliminary assessment of inherent risk. For each factor, indicate whether it is at the account level or the financial statement level. For all factors affecting a specific account, indicate the account and assertion affected. (6 marks)
  2. Based on MPI’s preliminary financial information for December 31, 2012, calculate a preliminary materiality. Describe the users of the financial statements and explain your reasoning for the quantitative measure selected. (5 marks)
  3. Based on the preliminary determination of audit risk and your assessment of the risk of material misstatement, calculate the planned detection risk for the audit of the revenue and collections cycle. Show your work. (2 marks)
  4. Prepare a short analysis of each of the following independent what if situations for the audit manager. Consider each situation independently, varying only the factors stated in each situation and holding all other factors constant. When determining the effect of various changes on the detection risk, calculate the new detection risk and explain whether the detection risk varies directly, inversely, or independently of the factor that has changed.
    1. After further study of the client’s operations, you decide that the inherent risk of a material error is 45%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)
    2. You decide to test key internal controls and find that the control risk is 25%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)

  5. What effect does a decrease in the detection risk you are prepared to take have on the nature of the audit work performed? What effect does it have on the extent of audit work performed? What effect does it have on the timing of audit work performed? (3 marks)
  6. Assume you decide to decrease the amount of misstatement considered material by $20,000. What effect will this decrease in the amount considered material have on the detection risk? A change in the amount considered material is not an explicit component of the audit risk model. How then (if at all) does a change in the amount considered material result in a change in the detection risk if there is no change in the audit risk and no change in the client’s operations or controls? (5 marks)

Task 3: Audit programs and working papers (12 marks)

  1. During the course of the audit, you will be performing tests of control audit procedures as well as substantive procedures. Briefly explain the difference between these two types of procedures and describe the two major categories of substantive procedures. (6 marks)
  2. The audit work performed must be documented using appropriate working papers. List six purposes of audit working papers. (6 marks)

Task 4: Internal control assessment — sales transactions (17 marks)

  1. Identify three control weaknesses based on the controller’s description of the company’s system of processing sales and the current issues that MPI is experiencing. For each weakness identified, describe the implications of the weakness and provide a control recommendation. Use three columns headed “Control weakness,” “Implication,” and “Recommendation.” (9 marks)
  2. Identify two control procedures based on the controller’s description of the company’s system of processing sales. For each procedure, list the key objective it fulfills for internal control over sales transactions. Use two columns headed “Control procedure” and “Control objective.” (4 marks)
  3. List two examples of control tests that the auditor could perform to ensure the operating effectiveness of the controls identified in Task 4(b). Explain under what circumstances the auditor would perform the tests of controls. (4 marks)

Task 5: Dollar unit sampling — Accounts receivable (24 marks)

  1. To test existence and help assess valuation of accounts receivable, you have used dollar unit sampling to select a sample of account balances for confirmation. Total accounts receivable at year end amounted to 1,200 accounts, totalling $1,750,000. You used an ARIA of 5% and tolerable misstatement of $35,000, and estimated the likely misstatement in the population to be $4,375. What is the minimum sample size for this test? (Use Exhibit 6.5 1 in Topic 6.5.) (4 marks)
  2. You selected 200 balances for confirmation and found two errors in the customer responses. The first was an item with a recorded value of $260,000 and an audited value of $257,400; the second was an item with a recorded value of $95,000 and an audited value of $93,575. Determine the (unadjusted) upper error limit (upper bound) for the audit of accounts receivable, at 5% ARIA. (Use Exhibit 6.6 1 in Topic 6.6 to calculate the precision increment.) (8 marks)
  3. Note: Round any dollar amounts to the nearest dollar.

  4. Determine the likely aggregate misstatement overstating accounts receivable and the associated sampling risk. (4 marks)
  5. What options are available to you if the upper error bound exceeds the tolerable error amount for the population? (8 marks)

Task 6: Attributes sampling — Paid invoices (12 marks)

  1. You wish to test whether invoices for purchases are supported by receiving reports before payment using attribute sampling. The sample is to be drawn from paid invoices for inventory purchases. You have decided to use the following parameters for this test: ARO of 5%; TDR of 9% and an expected population deviation rate of 0.75%. Determine the minimum sample size for the test based on the assumptions provided. (Use Exhibit 6.5 1 in Topic 6.5.) (3 marks)
  2. You select a sample of 75 items and find four invoices which were paid, despite having no receiving report attached. Determine the computed upper deviation rate and state the audit conclusion based on your sample results. (Use Exhibit 6.6 1 in Topic 6.6.) (5 marks)
  3. Describe two options available to you if the upper deviation rate is greater than the tolerable deviation rate. (4 marks)

i have attached 3 discussion questions and one assignment the first discussion quest 560079

i have attached 3 discussion questions and one assignment. the first discussion question is due tomorrow.

Document Preview:

Week 1 eActivity Use the Internet to research the current provisions and proposed changes reflected in the exposure draft for lease accounting under generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and international financial reporting standards (IFRS). Be prepared to discuss Week 1 Discussion 1 Top of Form Total views: 66 (Your views: 9) “Operating and Capital Leases” Please respond to the following: From the e Activity, analyze the results of the proposed changes to lease accounting on operating and capital leases. Identifying how the right of use model will impact financial reporting, indicate how companies are likely to manage the change in reporting. Discuss recommendations you would make to chief financial officers (CFOs) of retailers, service providers, and other businesses that lease several locations or have substantial leases of real estate or other assets. Indicate the pros and cons of each approach. Please make sure you post an Initial Post and at least one Reply Post in this Thread All posts should be substantive and add value to the discussion. Please make sure your posts are grammatically correct and do not have any spelling errors. Each post should have original content and you must cite any sources that you quote or paraphrase. For additional guidance, please refer to the Threaded Discussion Announcement posted in the course. Bottom of Form Week 1 Discussion 2 “Leasing Restatements in the Restaurant Industry” Please respond to the following: From the case study, create an argument for the use of principles based accounting for leases over rules based accounting under GAAP, based on the financial statement restatements in the restaurant industry. Provide support for your argument. Assess the materiality of the errors, direction provided by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), and the Sarbanes Oxley Act (SOX) on the decision by management to restate the financial statements. Indicate the likely impact to stakeholders when financial…

Attachments:

bap corporation is reviewing an investment proposal the initial cost and estimates o 560118

BAP Corporation is reviewing an investment proposal. The initial cost and estimates of the book value of the investment at the end of each year, the net cash flows for each year, and the net income for each year are presented in the schedule below. All cash flows are assumed to take place at the end of the year. The salvage value of the investment at the end of each year is equal to its book value. There would be no salvage value at the end of the investment’s life.

Investment Proposal
Year Initial Cost
and Book Value
Annual
Cash Flows
Annual
Net Income
0 $105,200
1 69,870 $45,300 $9,970
2 42,840 40,800 13,770
3 20,780 35,600 13,540
4 8,950 30,300 18,470
5 0 24,800 15,850

BAP Corporation uses a 12% target rate of return for new investment proposals.

ma18 35 product costing department versus activity based costing for overhead 560173

MA18 35. Product Costing: Department versus Activity Based Costing for Overhead.

Advertising Technologies, Inc. (ATI) specializes in providing both published and online advertising services for the business marketplace. The company monitors its costs based on the cost per column inch of published space printed in print advertising media and based on the cost per minute of telephone advertising time delivered on “The Ad Line,” a computer based, online advertising service. ATI has one new competitor, Tel a Ad, in its local teleadvertising market; and with increased competition, ATI has seen a decline in sales of online advertising in recent years. ATI’s president, Beard, believes that predatory pricing by Tel a Ad has caused the problem. The following is a recent conversation between Robert and Jane Minnear, director of marketing for ATI.

Jane: I just received a call from one of our major customers concerning our advertising rates on “The AD Line” who said that a sales rep from another firm (it had to be Tel A Ad) had offered the same service at $1 per minute, which is $1.50 per minute less than our price.

Robert: It’s costing about $1.27 per minute to produce that product. I don’t see how they can afford to sell it so cheaply. I’m not convinced that we should meet the price. Perhaps the better strategy is to emphasize producing and selling more published ads, which we’re more experienced with and where our margins are high and we have virtually no competition.

Jane: You may be right. Based on recent survey of our customers, I think we can raise the price significantly for published advertising and still not lose business.

Robert: That sounds promising; however, before we make a major recommitment to publishing, lets explore other possible explanations. I want to know how our costs compare with our competitors. Maybe we could be more efficient and find a way to earn a good return on teleadvertising.

After this meeting, Robert and Jane requested an investigation of production costs and comparative efficiency of producing published versus online advertising services. The controller, Tim Gentry, indicated that ATT’s efficiency was comparable to that of its competitors and prepared the following cost data:

PublishedOnline

AdvertisingAdvertising

Estimated number of production units………………200,000 10,000,000

Selling price………………………………………….$200$2,50

Direct product costs………………………………….$21,000,000$5,000,000

Overhead allocation*………………………………….$9,800,000$7,700,000

Overhead per unit……………………………………………..$49$0.77

Direct costs per unit…………………………………………$105$0.50

Number of customers…………………………………..180,00025,000

Number of salesperson days…………………………….32,0005,500

Number of art and design hours…………………………35,0005,000

Number of creative services subcontract hours……….100,00025,000

Number of customer service calls………………………72,0008,000

*Based on direct labor costs

Upon examining the data, Robert decided that he wanted to know more about the overhead costs since they were such a high proportion of total production costs. He was provided the following list of overhead costs and told that they were currently being assigned to products in proportion to direct labor costs.

Selling costs………………………………………………$7,500,000

Visual and audio design costs………………………………3,000,000

Creative services costs………………………………………5,000,000

Customer service costs………………………………………2,000,000

Required

Using the data provided by the controller, prepare analyses to help Robert and Jane in making their decisions. (Hint: prepare cost calculations for both product lines using ABC to see whether there is any significant difference in their unit costs). Should ATI switch from the fast growing, online advertising market back into the well established published market? Does the charge of predatory pricing seem valid? Why are customers likely to be willing to pay higher price to get published services? Do traditional costing and activity based costing lead to the same conclusions?

you are a partner in a local accounting firm that does financial planning and prepar 560268

You are a partner in a local accounting firm that does financial planning and prepares tax returns, payroll, and financial reports for medium size companies. Your monthly financial statements show that your organization is consistently profitable. Cash flow is becoming a small problem, however, and you need to borrow from your bank. You have also been receiving some customer complaints about time delays and price increases.

a. What accounting information do you think is most important to take with you to discuss a possible loan with your banker?

b. What accounting information do you think is most important to address the issues of time delays and price increases in your business? What non accounting information is important?

Attachments:

omit journal explanations insert one blank line between journal 560341

Omit journal explanations, insert one blank line between journal

transactions. Do not alter the pages in the blank answer sheet. There

are sufficient number of lines for each part of the problem.

Problem Points = 30:

Kristin Malone opened Kristin’s Maids Cleaning Service on July 1, 2014.

During July, the company completed the following transactions.

July 1 Invested $14,400 cash in the business.

July 1 Purchased a used truck for $10,000, paying $2,000 cash and the

balance using a Notes Payable.

July 3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $600 on account.

July 5 Paid $3,600 on a 1 year insurance policy, effective July 1.

July 12 Billed customers $3,800 for cleaning services.

July 18 Paid $2,000 of amount owed on truck, and $400 of amount

owed on cleaning supplies (prepare a compound entry.)

July 20 Paid $1,600 for employee salaries.

July 25 Billed customers $1,500 for cleaning services.

July 31 Paid gasoline for truck, $400 and withdrew $600 cash for

personal use (prepare a compound entry.)

Acct220 Quiz #2 Part 1 Page 1 of 2

Instructions:

a. Journalize the July transactions.

b. Prepare and record the adjusting journal entries for the following

July 31 end of period adjustments:

1. Unbilled fees for services performed at July 31 were $1,300.

2. Depreciation on equipment for the month was $200.

3. One month of the insurance expired.

4. An inventory count shows $100 of cleaning supplies on hand at

July 31.

5. Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $500.

c. Prepare and record the closing journal entries for the month of July.

d. Prepare an income statement for the month of July.

acc 590 anderson internal audit sample 560451

ACC 590 Anderson Internal Audit Sample Exam 125 points I. (42 points 3 points each) This part of the exam consists of 14 multiple choice questions. Place the letter of the response that you consider the best answer in the space indicated at the end of each question. These questions will be graded based only on the letter response. You will not receive any partial credit on this section of the test. 1. The status of the internal audit function should be free from the impact of irresponsible policy changes by management.

Document Preview:

ACC 590 Anderson Internal Audit Sample Exam 125 points I. (42 points 3 points each) This part of the exam consists of 14 multiple choice questions. Place the letter of the response that you consider the best answer in the space indicated at the end of each question. These questions will be graded based only on the letter response. You will not receive any partial credit on this section of the test. 1. The status of the internal audit function should be free from the impact of irresponsible policy changes by management. The most effective way to make sure of that freedom is to: a. Develop written policies and procedures to serve as standards of performance of the internal audit function. b. Have the internal audit charter approved by both management and the board of directors. c. Adopt the policy that the audit function follows the Standards for the Professional Practice of Internal Auditing. d. Require that the external auditor approve any policy change by management regarding internal audit. e. Establish an audit committee within the board of directors. Answer ____________ 2. A chief audit executive (CAE) has been requested by the audit committee to conduct an engagement at one of the company’s chemical factories as soon as possible. The engagement will include reviews of health, safety, and environmental management and processes. The CAE knows that the internal audit department does not have the necessary technical knowledge to conduct such an engagement. What should the CAE do? a. Ask the audit committee for additional resources to obtain appropriate support from a health, safety and environmental professional for the engagement. b. Suggest to the audit committee that the factory’s own health, safety and environmental staff conduct the engagement. c. Begin the engagement and incorporate the necessary technical training into next year’s training program so as to be prepared for a follow up engagement. d. Defer the engagement and tell the…

Attachments:

journalize these transactions first on the books of the brookston drug store and sec 559706

Journalizing periodic transactions

Assume that the following transactions occurred between Springfield Medical Supply and a Brookston drug store during September of the current year.

Sep 6

Brookston purchased $6,300 of merchandise from Springfield Medical Supply on credit terms of 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, Brookston paid freight in of $500.

10

Brookston returned $700 of the merchandise to Springfield.

15

Brookston paid $3,150 of the invoice amount owed to Springfield for the September 6 purchase, less the discount.

27

Brookston paid the remaining amount owed to Springfield for the September 6 purchase.

Requirement

1. Journalize these transactions, first on the books of the Brookston drug store and second on the books of Springfield Medical Supply. Use the periodic inventory system.

how much is nile rsquo s cost of goods sold for the sale on april 14 559709

Assume Nile.com began April with 14 units of inventory that cost a total of $266. During April, Nile purchased and sold goods as follows:

Apr 8

Purchase

42 units @ $20

14

Sale

35 units @ $40

22

Purchase

28 units @ $22

27

Sale

42 units @ $40

Under the FIFO inventory method, how much is Nile’s cost of goods sold for the sale on April 14?

a. $1,106

b. $686

c. $1,400

d. $700

would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on august 31 559719

Applying the lower of cost or market rule

Refer to Short Exercises 6 3 through 6 9. At August 31, the accountant for Mountain Cycles determines that the current replacement cost of each bike is $40.

Requirements

1. Assuming inventory was calculated using the FIFO method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?

2. Assuming inventory was calculated using the LIFO method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?

3. Assuming inventory was calculated using the average cost method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?

inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value if rocket uses the av 559720

Applying the lower of cost or market rule

Assume that a Rocket Burger restaurant has the following perpetual inventory record for hamburger patties:

Hamburger Patties

Date

Purchases

Cost of Goods Sold

Inventory on Hand

Feb 9

$ 470

$ 470

22

$ 280

190

28

210

400

Requirements

1. At February 28, the accountant for the restaurant determines that the current replacement cost of the ending inventory is $447. Make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on February 28?

2. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value if Rocket uses the average cost method?

what are the correct amounts for cost of goods sold and gross profit 559721

Effect of an inventory error—one year only

California Pool Supplies’ inventory data for the year ended December 31, 2012, follow:

Sales revenue

$ 60,000

Cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

$ 4,200

Net purchases

26,600

Cost of goods available

$ 30,800

Ending inventory

(6,200)

Cost of goods sold

$ 24,600

Gross profit

$ 35,400

Assume that the ending inventory was accidentally overstated by $2,400.

Requirement

1. What are the correct amounts for cost of goods sold and gross profit?

describe which costs would be sold and which costs would remain in inventory 559722

Inventory methods

Express Lane, a regional convenience store chain, maintains milk inventory by the gallon. The first month’s milk purchases and sales at its Freeport, FL, location follows:

Nov 2

1 gallon @ $2.00 each

6

2 gallons @ $2.10 each

13

2 gallons @ $2.20 each

14

The store sold 4 gallons of milk to a customer.

Requirement

1. Describe which costs would be sold and which costs would remain in inventory. Then, identify the amount that would be reported in inventory on November 15 using

a. FIFO.

b. LIFO.

c. average cost.

journalize golf haven rsquo s inventory transactions using the fifo method 559723

Measuring and journalizing inventory and cost of goods sold in a perpetual system—FIFO

Golf Haven carries an inventory of putters and other golf clubs. Golf Haven uses the FIFO method and a perpetual inventory system. The sales price of each putter is $128. Company records indicate the following for a particular line of Golf Haven’s putters:

Date

Item

Quantity

Unit Cost

Nov 1

Balance

17

$68

6

Sale

7

8

Purchase

20

$74

17

Sale

20

30

Sale

4

Requirements

1. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the putters. Then determine the amounts Golf Haven should report for ending inventory and cost of goods sold using the FIFO method.

2. Journalize Golf Haven’s inventory transactions using the FIFO method.

journalize the inventory transactions for the company using the data given 559726

Journalizing perpetual inventory transactions—cost of sales given

Accounting records for Josh’s Shopping Bags yield the following data for the year ended May 31, 2012:

Inventory, May 31, 2011

$ 8,000

Purchases of inventory (on account)

46,000

Sales of inventory – 81% on account; 19% for cash (cost $38,000)

76,000

Inventory, May 31, 2012

?

Requirements

1. Journalize the inventory transactions for the company using the data given.

2. Report ending inventory on the balance sheet, and sales, cost of goods sold, and gross profit on the income statement.

which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory 559727

Comparing amounts for ending inventory—perpetual inventory—FIFO and LIFO

Assume that a Models and More store bought and sold a line of dolls during December as follows:

Beginning inventory

13

units @

$ 11

Sale

9

units

Purchase

17

units @

$ 13

Sale

13

units

Models and More uses the perpetual inventory system.

Requirements

1. Compute the cost of ending inventory using FIFO.

2. Compute the cost of ending inventory using LIFO.

3. Which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory?

which method results in the largest gross profit and why 559728

Comparing cost of goods sold in a perpetual system—FIFO, LIFO, and average cost methods

Assume that a JR Tire Store completed the following perpetual inventory transactions for a line of tires:

Beginning inventory

16

tires @

$ 65

Purchase

10

tires @

$ 78

Sale

12

tires @

$ 90

Requirements

1. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using FIFO.

2. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using LIFO.

3. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using average cost. (Round average cost per unit to the nearest cent and all other amounts to the nearest dollar.)

4. Which method results in the largest gross profit and why?

what value would eagle report on the balance sheet at may 31 2012 for inventory 559729

Applying the lower of cost or market rule to inventories

Eagle Resources, which uses the FIFO method, has the following account balances at May 31, 2012, prior to releasing the financial statements for the year:

Inventory

Cost of goods sold

Sales revenue

Beg Bal

12,500

End Bal

13,000

Bal 69,000

Bal 118,000

Eagle has determined that the replacement cost (current market value) of the May 31, 2012, ending inventory is $12,800.

Requirements

1. Prepare any adjusting journal entry required from the information given.

2. What value would Eagle report on the balance sheet at May 31, 2012, for inventory?

journalize the adjusting entry for inventory if any is required 559730

Applying the lower of cost or market rule to inventories

Naturally Good Foods reports inventory at the lower of average cost or market. Prior to releasing its March 2012 financial statements, Naturally’s preliminary income statement, before the year end adjustments, appears as follows:

NATURALLY GOOD FOODS Income Statement (partial) For the year ended March 31, 2012

Sales revenue

$ 117,000

Cost of goods sold

45,000

Gross profit

$ 72,000

Naturally has determined that the replacement cost of ending inventory is $17,000. Cost is $18,000.

Requirements

1. Journalize the adjusting entry for inventory, if any is required.

2. Prepare a revised income statement to show how Naturally Good Foods should report sales, cost of goods sold, and gross profit.

state whether each year rsquo s net income mdash before your corrections mdash is un 559732

Correcting an inventory error—two years

Great Foods Grocery reported the following comparative income statement for the years ended June 30, 2012 and 2011:

GREAT FOODS GROCERY Income Statements Years Ended June 30, 2012 and 2011

2012

2011

Sales revenue

$ 139,000

$ 120,000

Cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

$13,000

$12,000

Net purchases

76,000

70,000

Cost of goods available

$89,000

$82,000

Ending inventory

(17,000)

(13,000)

Cost of goods sold

72,000

69,000

Gross profit

$ 67,000

$ 51,000

Operating expenses

23,000

18,000

Net income

$ 44,000

$ 33,000

During 2012, Great Foods discovered that ending 2011 inventory was overstated by $4,500.

Requirements

1. Prepare corrected income statements for the two years.

2. State whether each year’s net income—before your corrections—is understated or overstated and indicate the amount of the understatement or overstatement.

which inventory method most likely mimics the physical flow of fit world rsquo s inv 559736

Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—LIFO, and journalizing inventory transactions

Fit World began January with an inventory of 80 crates of vitamins that cost a total of $4,000. During the month, Fit World purchased and sold merchandise on account as follows:

Purchase 1

140 crates

@ $ 55

Sale 1

160 crates

@ $ 100

Purchase 2

160 crates

@ $ 60

Sale 2

170 crates

@ $ 110

Fit World uses the LIFO method. Cash payments on account totaled $5,000. Operating expenses for the month were $3,300, with two thirds paid in cash, and the rest accrued as Accounts payable.

Requirements

1. Which inventory method most likely mimics the physical flow of Fit World’s inventory?

2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record, using LIFO cost, for this merchandise.

3. Journalize all transactions using LIFO.

prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using lifo 559737

Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—FIFO, LIFO, and average cost, and comparing FIFO, LIFO, and average cost

Decorative Steel began August with 55 units of iron inventory that cost $35 each. During August, the company completed the following inventory transactions:

Units

Unit Cost

Unit Sale Price

Aug 3

Sale

45

$52

8

Purchase

75

$52

21

Sale

70

$85

30

Purchase

10

$55

Requirements

1. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using FIFO.

2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using LIFO.

3. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for the inventory using average cost.

4. Determine the company’s cost of goods sold for August using FIFO, LIFO, and average cost.

5. Compute gross profit for August using FIFO, LIFO, and average cost.

what value would richmond report on the balance sheet at august 31 2012 for inventor 559738

Applying the lower of cost or market rule to inventories

Richmond Sporting Goods, which uses the FIFO method, has the following account balances at August 31, 2012, prior to releasing the financial statements for the year:

Inventory

Cost of goods sold

Sales revenue

Bal

14,500

Bal

67,000

Bal

117,000

Richmond has determined that the replacement cost (current market value) of the August 31, 2012, ending inventory is $13,500.

Requirements

1. Prepare any adjusting journal entry required from the information given.

2. What value would Richmond report on the balance sheet at August 31, 2012, for inventory?

prepare corrected income statements for the three years 559739

Correcting inventory errors over a three year period

Evergreen Carpets’ books show the following data. In early 2013, auditors found that the ending inventory for 2010 was understated by $6,000 and that the ending inventory for 2012 was overstated by $7,000. The ending inventory at December 31, 2011, was correct.

2012

2011

2010

Net sales revenue

$210,000

$ 27,000

$ 41,000

Cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

$ 20,000

108,000

98,000

Net purchases

140,000

$135,000

$139,000

Cost of goods available

$160,000

(20,000)

(27,000)

Ending inventory

(29,000)

$162,000

$169,000

Cost of goods sold

131,000

115,000

112,000

Gross profit

$ 79,000

$ 47,000

$ 57,000

Operating expenses

53,000

18,000

24,000

Net income

$ 26,000

$ 29,000

$ 33,000

Requirements

1. Prepare corrected income statements for the three years.

2. State whether each year’s net income—before your corrections—is understated or overstated and indicate the amount of the understatement or overstatement.

prepare the may income statement through gross profit for halloween costumes 559740

Estimating ending inventory by the gross profit method and preparing the income statement

Halloween Costumes estimates its inventory by the gross profit method. The gross profit has averaged 30% of net sales. The company’s inventory records reveal the following data:

Inventory, May 1

$ 270,000

Transactions during May:

Purchases

7,520,000

Purchase discounts

146,000

Purchase returns

37,000

Sales

8,719,000

Sales returns

27,000

Requirements

1. Estimate the May 31 inventory, using the gross profit method.

2. Prepare the May income statement through gross profit for Halloween Costumes.

which inventory method most likely mimics the physical flow of health world rsquo s 559742

Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—LIFO and journalizing inventory transactions

Health World began January with an inventory of 50 crates of vitamins that cost a total of $1,000. During the month, Health World purchased and sold merchandise on account as follows:

Purchase 1

100 crates

@ $ 25

Sale 1

130 crates

@ $ 40

Purchase 1

90 crates

@ $ 30

Sale 2

100 crates

@ $ 50

Health World uses the LIFO method. Cash payments on account totaled $5,500. Operating expenses for the month were $3,000, with two thirds paid in cash and the rest accrued as Accounts payable.

Requirements

1. Which inventory method most likely mimics the physical flow of Health World’s inventory?

2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record, using LIFO cost, for this merchandise.

3. Journalize all transactions using LIFO.

journalize the transactions on the books of thelma rsquo s amusements 559682

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory

Thelma’s Amusements completed the following transactions during November 2012:

Nov 1

Purchased supplies for cash, $700.

4

Purchased inventory on credit terms of 3/10, n/eom, $9,600.

8

Returned half the inventory purchased on November 4. It was not the inventory ordered.

10

Sold goods for cash, $1,200 (cost, $700).

13

Sold inventory on credit terms of 2/15, n/45, $9,900 (cost, $5,300).

14

Paid the amount owed on account from November 4, less the return (November 8) and the discount.

17

Received defective inventory as a sales return from the November 13 sale, $600. Thelma’s cost of the inventory received was $450.

18

Purchased inventory of $4,100 on account. Payment terms were 2/10, net 30.

26

Paid the net amount owed for the November 18 purchase.

28

Received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inventory on November 13, less the return and the discount.

29

Purchased inventory for cash, $12,000, plus freight charges of $200.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions on the books of Thelma’s Amusements.

prepare closing entries for the first year of operations 559683

Preparing financial statements and preparing closing entries

Alto Publishers Company’s selected accounts as of November 30, 2012, follow:

Selling expenses

$ 18,100

Inventory

$ 44,000

Furniture

37,300

Cash

36,100

Sales returns and allowances

3,000

Note payable

21,700

Salary payable

1,400

Accumulated depreciation

23,100

Alto, capital

29,400

Cost of goods sold

53,000

Sales revenue

114,200

Sales discounts

2,400

Accounts payable

13,400

General expenses

9,300

Requirements

1. Prepare the multi step income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet for the first year of operations.

2. Prepare closing entries for the first year of operations.

davidson manager of the company strives to earn gross profit percentage of at least 559684

Preparing a multi step income statement and calculating gross profit percentage

The records of Grade A Steak Company list the following selected accounts for the quarter ended April 30, 2012:

Interest revenue

$ 800

Accounts payable

$ 17,000

Inventory

45,100

Accounts receivable

33,500

Note payable, long–term

47,000

Accumulated depreciation

37,600

Salary payable

2,400

Angus, capital, Jan 31

53,300

Sales discounts

2,000

Angus, drawing

20,000

Sales returns and allowances

7,500

Cash

7,600

Sales revenue

296,100

Cost of goods sold

162,100

Selling expense

38,300

Equipment

130,600

Supplies

5,700

General expenses

16,300

Unearned sales revenue

13,300

Interest payable

1.200

Requirements

1. Prepare a multi step income statement.

2. M. Davidson, manager of the company, strives to earn gross profit percentage of at least 50% and net income percentage of 20%. Did Grade A achieve these goals? Show your calculations.

what type of inventory system is 5th grader using mdash periodic or perpetual 559685

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions

Consider the following transactions that occurred in January 2012 for 5th Grader.

Jan 1

Purchased $5,000 of inventory from M&P, terms 1/10, n/20.

3

Sold $1,000 of goods to Display Town, Inc., terms 2/10, n/eom *(Cost $700).

5

Display Town, Inc., returned $300 of goods (Cost $183).

11

Paid M&P.

13

Received payment from Display Town, Inc.

Requirements

1. What type of inventory system is 5th Grader using—periodic or perpetual?

2. Which transaction date helped you decide?

3. Journalize January transactions for 5th Grader. No explanations are required.

journalize february transactions for gems no explanations are required 559686

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory

Consider the following transactions that occurred in February 2012 for Gems.

Feb 3

Purchased inventory on terms 1/5, n/eom, $2,000.

4

Purchased inventory for cash of $1,600.

6

Returned $600 of inventory from February 4 purchase.

8

Sold goods on terms of 2/15, n/35 of $7,000 that cost $3,500.

10

Paid for goods purchased on February 3.

12

Received goods from February 8 sale of $500 that cost $190.

23

Received payment from February 8 customer.

25

Sold goods to Farms for $900 that cost $350. Terms of n/30 were offered.

As a courtesy to Farms, $75 of freight was added to the invoice for which cash was paid directly to UPS by Gems.

29

Received payment from Farms.

Requirement

1. Journalize February transactions for Gems. No explanations are required.

the following transactions occurred between east pharmaceuticals and e amp m the pha 559687

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred between East Pharmaceuticals and E & M, the pharmacy chain, during August of the current year:

Aug 6

E & M purchased $11,000 of merchandise from East on credit terms of 3/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, E & M paid a $250 bill for freight in. These goods cost East $3,300.

10

E & M returned $2,750 of the merchandise purchased on August 6. East accounted for the sales return and placed the goods back in inventory (East’s cost, $1,100).

15

E & M paid $5,500 of the invoice amount owed to East for the August 6 purchase less the discount.

27

E & M paid the remaining amount owed to East for the August 6 purchase. Requirement

Requirements

1. Journalize these transactions on the books of E & M.

2. Journalize these transactions on the books of East Pharmaceuticals.

received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inve 559688

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory

Trisha’s Amusements completed the following transactions during January 2012:

Jan 1

Purchased supplies for cash, $740.

4

Purchased inventory on credit terms of 3/10, n/eom, $9,400.

8

Returned half the inventory purchased on January 4. It was not the inventory ordered.

10

Sold goods for cash, $1,700 (cost, $1,200).

13

Sold inventory on credit terms of 2/15, n/45, $9,300 (cost, $4,700).

14

Paid the amount owed on account from January 4, less the return (January 8) and the discount.

17

Received defective inventory as a sales return from the January 13 sale, $700. Trisha’s cost of the inventory received was $550.

18

Purchased inventory of $3,300 on account. Payment terms were 2/10, net 30.

26

Paid the net amount owed for the January 18 purchase.

28

Received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inventory on January 13, less the return and the discount.

29

Purchased inventory for cash, $13,000, plus freight charges of $200.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions on the books of Trisha’s Amusements.

the following transactions occurred between east pharmaceuticals and e amp m the pha 559689

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred between East Pharmaceuticals and E & M, the pharmacy chain, during August of the current year:

Aug 6

E & M purchased $11,000 of merchandise from East on credit terms of 3/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, E & M paid a $250 bill for freight in. These goods cost East $3,300.

10

E & M returned $2,750 of the merchandise purchased on August 6. East accounted for the sales return and placed the goods back in inventory (East’s cost, $1,100).

15

E & M paid $5,500 of the invoice amount owed to East for the August 6 purchase less the discount.

27

E & M paid the remaining amount owed to East for the August 6 purchase.

Requirements

1. Journalize these transactions on the books of E & M.

2. Journalize these transactions on the books of East Pharmaceuticals.

journalize the transactions on the books of trisha rsquo s amusements 559692

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory

Trisha’s Amusements completed the following transactions during January 2012:

Jan 1

Purchased supplies for cash, $740.

4

Purchased inventory on credit terms of 3/10, n/eom, $9,400.

8

Returned half the inventory purchased on January 4. It was not the inventory ordered.

10

Sold goods for cash, $1,700 (cost, $1,200).

13

Sold inventory on credit terms of 2/15, n/45, $9,300 (cost, $4,700).

14

Paid the amount owed on account from January 4, less the return (January 8) and the discount.

17

Received defective inventory as a sales return from the January 13 sale, $700. Trisha’s cost of the inventory received was $550.

18

Purchased inventory of $3,300 on account. Payment terms were 2/10, net 30.

26

Paid the net amount owed for the January 18 purchase.

28

Received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inventory on

January 13, less the return and the discount.

29

Purchased inventory for cash, $13,000, plus freight charges of $200.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions on the books of Trisha’s Amusements.

did the results for the year ended april 30 2012 suggest improvement or deterioratio 559693

Making closing entries, preparing financial statements, and computing gross profit percentage, inventory turnover, and days in inventory

The adjusted trial balance of Daddy’s Music Company at April 30, 2012, follows:

DADDY’S MUSIC COMPANY Adjusted Trial Balance April 30, 2012

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,300

Accounts receivable

38,200

Inventory

17,800

Supplies

600

Furniture

39,400

Accumulated depreciation

$ 9,000

Accounts payable

13,600

Salary payable

1,200

Unearned sales revenue

6,600

Note payable, long–term

14,000

Otousan, capital

40,100

Otousan, drawing

40,000

Sales revenue

180,000

Sales returns

8,000

Cost of goods sold

81,800

Selling expense

19,200

General expense

14,000

Interest expense

1,200

Total

$ 264,500

$ 264,500

Requirements

1. Journalize Daddy’s closing entries.

2. Prepare Daddy’s single step income statement for the year.

3. Compute the gross profit percentage, the rate of inventory turnover, and the days in inventory for the fiscal year ending April 30, 2012. Inventory on hand one year ago, at April 30, 2011, was $13,000.

4. For the year ended April 30, 2011, Daddy’s gross profit percentage was 50%, and inventory turnover was 4.9 times. Did the results for the year ended April 30, 2012, suggest improvement or deterioration in profitability over last year?

prepare smith electronics rsquo classified balance sheet in report form 559694

Preparing a multi step income statement and a classified balance sheet

Link Back to Chapter 4 (Classified Balance Sheet). The accounts of Smith Electronics Company are listed along with their balances before closing for the month ended October 31, 2012.

Interest revenue

$ 500

Accounts payable

$ 16,900

Inventory

45,400

Accounts receivable

33,900

Note payable, long–term

47,000

Accumulated depreciation

38,100

Salary payable

3,400

Smith, capital, Sep 30

52,500

Sales discounts

2,700

Smith, drawing

19,000

Sales returns and allowances

8,100

Cash

7,600

Sales revenue

296,500

Cost of goods sold

162,100

Selling expense

37,500

Equipment

130,900

Supplies

6,300

General expenses

16,200

Unearned sales revenue

13,800

Interest payable

1,000

Requirements

1. Prepare Smith Electronics’ multi step income statement.

2. Prepare Smith Electronics’ statement of owner’s equity.

3. Prepare Smith Electronics’ classified balance sheet in report form.

did hill tower achieve these goals 559695

Preparing a multi step income statement and calculating gross profit percentage

The records of Hill Tower Steak Company list the following selected accounts for the quarter ended September 30, 2012:

Interest revenue

$ 400

Accounts payable

$ 16,500

Inventory

45,700

Accounts receivable

33,900

Note payable, long–term

42,000

Accumulated depreciation

37,500

Salary payable

3,400

Holstein, capital, Jun 30

52,900

Sales discounts

2,200

Holstein, drawing

18,500

Sales returns and allowances

8,400

Cash

8,100

Sales revenue

296,700

Cost of goods sold

162,400

Selling expense

37,500

Equipment

125,000

Supplies

6,000

General expenses

16,100

Unearned sales revenue

13,200

Interest payable

1,200

Requirements

1. Prepare a multi step income statement.

2. M. Davidson, manager of the company, strives to earn gross profit percentage of at least 50% and net income percentage of 20%. Did Hill Tower achieve these goals? Show your calculations.

prepare the june income statement of lawlor lawn service use the single step format 559696

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory; making closing entries, and preparing financial statements

Lawlor Lawn Service has also begun selling plants that it purchases from a wholesaler. During June, Lawlor Lawn Service completed the following transactions:

Jun 2

Completed lawn service and received cash of $800.

5

Purchased 110 plants on account for inventory, $304, plus freight in of $15.

15

Sold 60 plants on account, $600 (cost $174).

17

Consulted with a client on landscaping design for a fee of $250 on account.

20

Purchased 120 plants on account for inventory, $384.

21

Paid on account, $400.

25

Sold 110 plants for cash, $990 (cost $337).

30

Recorded the following adjusting entries: Depreciation $30 Physical count of plant inventory, 30 plants (cost $96)

Requirements

1. Open the following selected T accounts in the ledger: Cash; Accounts receivable; Lawn supplies; Plant inventory; Equipment; Accumulated depreciation— equipment; Accounts payable; Salary payable; Lawlor, capital; Lawlor, drawing; Income summary; Service revenue; Sales revenue; Cost of goods sold; Salary expense; Rent expense; Utilities expense; Depreciation expense— equipment; and Supplies expense.

2. Journalize and post the June transactions. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.

3. Journalize and post the closing entries. Denote each closing amount as Clo. After posting all closing entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.

4. Prepare the June income statement of Lawlor Lawn Service. Use the single step format.

prepare the january income statement of draper consulting use the single step format 559697

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory; making closing entries, and preparing financial statements

Draper has also begun selling accounting software. During January, Draper Consulting completed the following transactions:

Jan 2

Completed a consulting engagement and received cash of $7,800.

2

Prepaid three months office rent, $1,650.

7

Purchased 80 units software inventory on account, $1,680, plus freight in, $80.

18

Sold 40 software units on account, $3,500 (Cost $880).

19

Consulted with a client for a fee of $1,000 on account.

20

Paid employee salary, $2,055.

21

Paid on account, $1,760.

22

Purchased 240 units software inventory on account, $6,240.

24

Paid utilities, $250.

28

Sold 120 units software for cash, $4,680 (cost $2,960).

31

Recorded the following adjusting entries: Accrued salary expense, $685 Depreciation, $100 Equipment, $30; Furniture, $70) Expiration of prepaid rent, $550 Physical count of inventory, 145 units, $3,770

Requirements

1. Open the following selected T accounts in the ledger: Cash; Accounts receivable; Software inventory; Prepaid rent; Accumulated depreciation; Accounts payable; Salary payable; Draper, capital; Draper, drawing; Income summary, Service revenue; Sales revenue; Cost of goods sold; Salary expense; Rent expense; Utilities expense; and Depreciation expense.

2. Journalize and post the January transactions. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.

3. Journalize and post the closing entries. Denote each closing amount as Clo. After posting all closing entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.

4. Prepare the January income statement of Draper Consulting. Use the single step format.

journalize the december closing entries for the company 559698

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory; making closing entries, and preparing financial statements

Shine King Cleaning has decided that, in addition to providing cleaning services, it will sell cleaning products. During December, Shine King completed the following transactions:

Dec 2

Purchased 600 units of inventory for $3,600 from Sparkle, Co., on terms, 3/10, n/20.

5

Purchased 400 units of inventory from Borax on terms 4/5, n/30. The total invoice was for $3,200, which included a $200 freight charge.

7

Returned 100 units of inventory to Sparkle from the December 2 purchase (cost $600).

9

Paid Borax.

11

Sold 350 units of goods to Happy Maids for $4,900 on terms 5/10, n/30. Shine King’s cost of the goods was $2,100.

12

Paid Sparkle.

15

Received 30 units with a retail price of $420 of goods back from customer Happy Maids. The goods cost Shine King $180.

21

Received payment from Happy Maids, settling the amount due in full.

28

Sold 200 units of goods to Bridget, Inc., for cash of $3,000 (cost $1,144).

29

Paid cash for Utilities of $350.

30

Paid cash for Sales commission expense of $225.

31

Recorded the following adjusting entries: Physical count of Inventory on December 31 showed 330 units of goods on hand, $2,541 Depreciation, $170 Accrued salary expense of $700 Prepared all other adjustments necessary for December

Requirements

1. Add any needed accounts to Shine King’s existing chart of accounts.

2. Journalize and post the December transactions. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.

3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. After posting all adjusting entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.

4. Prepare the December multi step income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet for the company.

5. Journalize the December closing entries for the company.

do you approve or disapprove of dobbs rsquo manner of deciding when to ship goods to 559699

Dobbs Wholesale Antiques makes all sales under terms of FOB shipping point. The company usually ships inventory to customers approximately one week after receiving the order. For orders received late in December, Kathy Dobbs, the owner, decides when to ship the goods. If profits are already at an acceptable level, Dobbs delays shipment until January. If profits for the current year are lagging behind expectations, Dobbs ships the goods during December.

Requirements

1. Under Dobbs’ FOB policy, when should the company record a sale?

2. Do you approve or disapprove of Dobbs’ manner of deciding when to ship goods to customers and record the sales revenue? If you approve, give your reason. If you disapprove, identify a better way to decide when to ship goods. (There is no accounting rule against Dobbs’ practice.)

how would this kind of action impact the financial performance of the company 559700

Rae Philippe was a warehouse manager for Atkins Oilfield Supply, a business that operated across eight Western states. She was an old pro and had known most of the other warehouse managers for many years. Around December each year, auditors would come to do a physical count of the inventory at each warehouse. Recently, Rae’s brother started his own drilling company, and persuaded Rae to “loan” him 80 joints of 5 inch drill pipe to use for his first well. He promised to have it back to Rae by December, but the well encountered problems and the pipe was still in the ground. Rae knew the auditors were on the way, so she called her friend Andy, who ran another Atkins warehouse. “Send me over 80 joints of 5 inch pipe tomorrow and I’ll get them back to you ASAP” said Rae. When the auditors came, all the pipe on the books was accounted for, and they filed a “no exception” report.

Requirements

1. Is there anything the company or the auditors could do in future to detect this kind of fraudulent practice?

2. How would this kind of action impact the financial performance of the company?

does the manager use the gross profit percentage and the rate of inventory turnover 559701

With a small team of classmates, visit one or more merchandising businesses in your area. Interview a responsible manager of the company to learn about its inventory policies and accounting system. Obtain answers to the following questions, write a report, and be prepared to make a presentation to the class if your instructor so directs.

Requirements

1. What merchandise inventory does the business sell?

2. From whom does the business buy its inventory? Is the relationship with the supplier new or longstanding?

3. What are the FOB terms on inventory purchases? Who pays the freight, the buyer or the seller? Is freight a significant amount? What percentage of total inventory cost is the freight?

4. What are the credit terms on inventory purchases—2/10, n/30, or other? Does the business pay early to get purchase discounts? If so, why? If not, why not?

5. How does the business actually pay its suppliers? Does it mail a check or pay electronically? What is the actual payment procedure?

6. Which type of inventory accounting system does the business use—perpetual or periodic? Is this system computerized?

7. How often does the business take a physical count of its inventory? When during the year is the count taken? Describe the count procedures followed by the company.

8. Does the manager use the gross profit percentage and the rate of inventory turnover to valuate the business? If not, show the manager how to use these ratios in decision making.

9. Ask any other questions your group considers appropriate.

delta electric uses the periodic inventory system delta reported the following selec 559704

Cost of goods sold in a periodic system

Delta Electric uses the periodic inventory system. Delta reported the following selected amounts at May 31, 2012:

Inventory, May 31, 2011

$ 16,000

Freight in

$ 4,000

Inventory, May 31, 2012

23,000

Sales revenue

174,000

Purchases (of inventory)

84,000

Sales discounts

6,000

Purchase discounts

3,000

Sales returns

17,000

Purchase returns

9,000

Owner’s equity

47,000

Requirement

1. Compute Delta’s

a. Net sales revenue.

b. Cost of goods sold.

c. Gross profit.

journalize these transactions first on the books of the best drug store and second o 559705

Journalizing periodic transactions

Assume that the following transactions occurred between Brighton Medical Supply and a Best drug store during April of the current year.

Apr 6

Best purchased $5,800 of merchandise from Brighton Medical Supply on credit terms of 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, Best paid freight in of $150.

10

Best returned $900 of the merchandise to Brighton.

15

Best paid $2,900 of the invoice amount owed to Brighton for the April 6 purchase, less the discount.

27

Best paid the remaining amount owed to Brighton for the April 6 purchase.

Requirement

1. Journalize these transactions, first on the books of the Best drug store and second on the books of Brighton Medical Supply. Use the periodic inventory system.

journalize adjusting journal entries 559645

Completing the accounting cycle

The trial balance of Road Runner Internet at July 31, 2012, follows:

ROAD RUNNER INTERNET Trial Balance July 31, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,200

Accounts receivable

14,600

Prepaid rent

2,000

Supplies

1,600

Equipment

30,900

Accumulated depreciation

$ 3,900

Accounts payable

6,700

Salary payable

5,400

Unearned service revenue

25,800

Runner, capital

Runner, drawing

3,200

Service revenue

17,700

Salary expense

3,000

Rent expense

Depreciation expense

Supplies expense

Total

$59,500

$59,500

Adjusting data at July 31, 2012:

  1. Unearned service revenue still unearned, $1,200.
  2. Prepaid rent still in force at July 31, $1,900.
  3. Supplies used during the month, $800.
  4. Depreciation for the month, $300.
  5. Accrued salary expense at July 31, $500.

Requirements

1. Journalize adjusting journal entries.

2. Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet for Road Runner Internet.

3. Prepare the income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and classified balance sheet in report form.

4. Using the worksheet data that you prepared, journalize the closing entries and post the adjusting and closing entries to T accounts. Use dates and show the ending balance of each account.

5. Prepare a post closing trial balance.

6. Calculate the current and debt ratios for the company.

journalize the closing entries and post to the accounts that you opened draw double 559646

Journalizing adjusting and closing entries

The unadjusted trial balance and adjustment data of Smith Real Estate Appraisal Company at June 30, 2012, follow:

SMITH REAL ESTATE APPRAISAL COMPANY Unadjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2012

Account title

Debit

Cash

$ 4,600

Accounts receivable

3,500

Supplies

3,000

Prepaid insurance

2,100

Building

74,700

Accumulated depreciation

$ 18,600

Land

14,000

Accounts payable

18,900

Interest payable

8,000

Salary payable

600

Smith, capital

33,000

Smith, drawing

27,000

Service revenue

97,500

Salary expense

32,100

Depreciation expense

0

Insurance expense

5,100

Utilities expense

3,600

Supplies expense

6,900

Total

$ 176,600

$ 176,600

Adjustment data at June 30, 2012:

  1. Prepaid insurance expired, $400.
  2. Accrued service revenue, $1,100.
  3. Accrued salary expense, $700.
  4. Depreciation for the year, $8,500.
  5. Supplies used during the year, $100.

Requirements

1. Open T accounts for Smith, capital and all the accounts that follow on the trial balance. Insert their unadjusted balances. Also open a T account for Income summary, which has a zero balance.

2. Journalize the adjusting entries and post to the accounts that you opened. Show the balance of each revenue account and each expense account.

3. Journalize the closing entries and post to the accounts that you opened. Draw double underlines under each account balance that you close to zero.

4. Compute the ending balance of Smith, capital.

did the company rsquo s ability to pay debts improve or deteriorate or did it remain 559647

Preparing a classified balance sheet in report form, and using the current and debt ratios to evaluate a company

Selected accounts of Browne Irrigation Systems at December 31, 2012, follow:

Insurance expense

$ 500

Accounts payable

$22,300

Note payable, long term

4,200

Accounts receivable

43,600

Other assets

2,000

Accumulated depreciation—building

24,200

Building

58,200

Browne, capital, December 31, 2011

54,000

Prepaid insurance

4,800

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

6,900

Salary expense

17,700

Cash

6,500

Salary payable

2,800

Interest payable

400

Service revenue

73,000

Browne, drawing

5,000

Supplies

3,300

Equipment

23,000

Unearned service revenue

1,800

Depreciation expense

25,000

Requirements

1. Prepare the company’s classified balance sheet in report form at December 31, 2012.

2. Compute the company’s current ratio and debt ratio at December 31, 2012. At December 31, 2011, the current ratio was 1.83 and the debt ratio was 0.39. Did the company’s ability to pay debts improve or deteriorate, or did it remain the same during 2012?

prepare the income statement and the statement of owner rsquo s equity of wintz lawn 559649

Kathy Wintz formed a lawn service business as a summer job. To start the business on May 1, she deposited $1,000 in a new bank account in the name of the business. The $1,000 consisted of a $600 loan from Bank One to her company, Wintz Lawn Service, and $400 of her own money. The company gave $400 of capital to Wintz. Wintz rented lawn equipment, purchased supplies, and hired other students to mow and trim customers’ lawns. At the end of each month, Wintz mailed bills to the customers. On August 31, she was ready to dissolve the business and return to college. Because she was so busy, she kept few records other than the checkbook and a list of receivables from customers.

At August 31, the business’s checkbook shows a balance of $2,000, and customers still $750. During the summer, the business collected $5,500 from customers. The business checkbook lists payments for supplies totaling $400, and it still has gasoline, weed eater cord, other supplies that cost a total of $50. The business paid employees $1,800 and still owes $300 for the final week of the summer. Wintz rented some equipment from Ludwig’s Machine Shop. On May 1, the business signed a six month rental agreement on mowers and paid $600 for the full rental period in advance. Ludwig’s will refund the unused portion of the prepayment if the equipment is returned in good shape. In order to get the refund, Wintz has kept the mowers in excellent condition. In fact, the business had to pay $300 to repair a mower. To transport employees and equipment to jobs, Wintz used a trailer that the business bought for $300. The business estimates that the summer’s work used up one third of the trailer’s service potential. The business checkbook lists a payment of $500 for cash withdrawals during the summer. The business paid the loan back during August. (For simplicity, ignore any interest expense associated with the loan.)

Requirements

Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity of Wintz Lawn Service for the four months May through August.

Prepare the classified balance sheet of Wintz Lawn Service at August 31. Was Wintz’s summer work successful? Give the reason for your answer.

suppose dave rsquo s discount rsquo s inventory account showed a balance of 8 000 be 559653

Suppose Dave’s Discount’s Inventory account showed a balance of $8,000 before the year end adjustments. The physical count of goods on hand totaled $7,400. To adjust the accounts, Dave Marshall would make the following entry:

a.

Cost of goods sold

600

Inventory

600

b.

Inventory

600

Accounts payable

600

c.

Accounts payable

600

Inventory

600

d.

Cash

600

Inventory

600

the final closing entry for a proprietorship 559655

The final closing entry for a proprietorship is

a.

Sales Revenue

XXX

Income Summary

XXX

b.

Capital

XXX

Drawing

XXX

c.

Drawing

XXX

Capital

XXX

d.

Income summary

XXX

Expenses

XXX

journalize the required closing entries for rockwell rv center for december 31 2012 559662

Journalizing closing entries—perpetual inventory

Rockwell RV Center’s accounting records include the following accounts at December 31, 2012:

Cost of goods sold

$385,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 39,000

Accounts payable

17,000

Cash

43,000

Rent expense

21,000

Sales revenue

696,000

Building

108,000

Depreciation expense

12,000

Rockwell, capital

208,800

Rockwell, drawing

61,000

Inventory

261,000

Sales discounts

9,000

Requirement

1. Journalize the required closing entries for Rockwell RV Center for December 31, 2012.

prepare the business rsquo s multi step income statement for the year ended july 31 559663

Preparing a merchandiser’s income statement

Carolina Communications reported the following figures in its financial statements:

Cash

$ 3,800

Cost of goods sold

$ 18,000

Total operating expenses

3,500

Equipment, net

10,200

Accounts payable

4,100

Accrued liabilities

1,700

Total owner’s equity

4,200

Net sales revenue

28,000

Long–term notes payable

700

Accounts receivable

2,700

Inventory

500

Requirement

1. Prepare the business’s multi step income statement for the year ended July 31, 2012.

journalize the february transactions for soul art gift shop no explanations are requ 559665

Journalizing purchase and sales transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred during February 2012, for Soul Art Gift Shop:

Feb 3

Purchased $2,700 of inventory on account under terms of 4/10, n/eom (end of month) and FOB shipping point.

7

Returned $400 of defective merchandise purchased on February 3.

9

Paid freight bill of $110 on February 3 purchase.

10

Sold inventory on account for $4,350. Payment terms were 2/15, n/30. These goods cost the company $2,300.

12

Paid amount owed on credit purchase of February 3, less the return and the discount.

16

Granted a sales allowance of $500 on the February 10 sale.

23

Received cash from February 10 customer in full settlement of her debt, less the allowance and the discount.

Requirement

1. Journalize the February transactions for Soul Art Gift Shop. No explanations are required.

journalize the adjustment for inventory shrinkage 559666

Journalizing adjusting and closing entries, and computing gross profit

Emerson St. Paul Book Shop’s accounts at June 30, 2012, included the following unadjusted balances:

Inventory

$ 5,400

Cost of goods sold

40,300

Sales revenue

85,300

Sales discounts

1,400

Sales returns and allowances

2,000

The physical count of inventory on hand on June 30, 2012, was $5,000.

Requirements

1. Journalize the adjustment for inventory shrinkage.

2. Journalize the closing entries for June 2012.

3. Compute the gross profit.

set up t accounts for income summary and howe capital post the closing entries to th 559667

Making closing entries

Howe Audio Equipment’s accounting records carried the following selected accounts at April 30, 2012:

Inventory

$ 5,900

Selling expense

$ 7,300

Interest revenue

40

Sales revenue

38,400

Accounts payable

1,000

Interest expense

30

Cost of goods sold

26,900

Accounts receivable

600

Other expense

1,700

General and administrative expense

900

Howe, drawing

300

Howe, capital

8,730

Requirements

1. Journalize the closing entries at April 30, 2012.

2. Set up T accounts for Income summary and Howe, capital. Post the closing entries to the T accounts and calculate their ending balances.

the trial balance and adjustments columns of the worksheet of budget business system 559668

Journalizing closing entries

The trial balance and adjustments columns of the worksheet of Budget Business Systems at March 31, 2012, follow:

BUDGET BUSINESS SYSTEMS Worksheet Year Ended March 31,2012

Trial Balance

Adjustments

Account

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,400

Accounts receivable

8,900

(a)$2,500

Inventory

36,500

(b)$4,800

Supplies

13,700

(c) 7,300

Equipment

42,500

Accumulated depreciation

$11,600

(d)2,300

Accounts payable

9,200

Salary payable

(e)1,000

Note payable, long term

7,900

Bitzes, capital

34,000

Bitzes, drawing

43,000

Sales revenue

232,000

(a)2,500

Sales discounts

2,500

Cost of goods sold

111,500

(b) 4,800

Selling expense

21,100

(c) 5,100

(e) 1,000

General expense

10,300

(c) 2,200

(d) 2,300

Interest expense

2,300

Total

$294,700

$294,700

$ 17,900

$ 17,900

Requirements

1. Compute the adjusted balance for each account that must be closed.

2. Journalize the required closing entries at March 31, 2012.

3. How much was Budget’s net income or net loss?

which transaction date helped you decide 559669

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions

Consider the following transactions that occurred in May 2012 for High Roller.

May 1

Purchased $3,000 of inventory from P&M, terms 1/10, n/20.

3

Sold $3,500 of goods to Frames R Us, Inc., terms 2/10, n/eom. *(Cost $2,240).

5

Frames R Us, returned $300 of goods (Cost $198).

11

Paid P&M.

13

Received payment from Frames R Us.

Requirements

1. What type of inventory system is High Roller using—periodic or perpetual?

2. Which transaction date helped you decide?

3. Journalize May transactions for High Roller. No explanations are required.

journalize the february transactions for soul art gift shop no explanations are requ 559671

Journalizing purchase and sales transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred during February 2012, for Soul Art Gift Shop:

Feb 3

Purchased $2,700 of inventory on account under terms of 4/10, n/eom (end of month) and FOB shipping point.

7

Returned $400 of defective merchandise purchased on February 3.

9

Paid freight bill of $110 on February 3 purchase.

10

Sold inventory on account for $4,350. Payment terms were 2/15, n/30. These goods cost the company $2,300.

12

Paid amount owed on credit purchase of February 3, less the return and the discount.

16

Granted a sales allowance of $500 on the February 10 sale.

23

Received cash from February 10 customer in full settlement of her debt, less the allowance and the discount.

Requirement

1. Journalize the February transactions for Soul Art Gift Shop. No explanations are required.

journalize the closing entries for june 2012 559673

Journalizing adjusting and closing entries, and computing gross profit

Emerson St. Paul Book Shop’s accounts at June 30, 2012, included the following unadjusted balances:

Inventory

$ 5,400

Cost of goods sold

40,300

Sales revenue

85,300

Sales discounts

1,400

Sales returns and allowances

2,000

The physical count of inventory on hand on June 30, 2012, was $5,000.

Requirements

1. Journalize the adjustment for inventory shrinkage.

2. Journalize the closing entries for June 2012.

3. Compute the gross profit.

set up t accounts for income summary and howe capital post the closing entries to th 559674

Making closing entries

Howe Audio Equipment’s accounting records carried the following selected accounts at April 30, 2012:

Inventory

$ 5,900

Selling expense

$ 7,300

Interest revenue

40

Sales revenue

38,400

Accounts payable

1,000

Interest expense

30

Cost of goods sold

26,900

Accounts receivable

600

Other expense

1,700

General and administrative expense

900

Howe, drawing

300

Howe, capital

8,730

Requirements

1. Journalize the closing entries at April 30, 2012.

2. Set up T accounts for Income summary and Howe, capital. Post the closing entries to the T accounts and calculate their ending balances.

what type of inventory system is high roller using mdash periodic or perpetual 559679

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions

Consider the following transactions that occurred in May 2012 for High Roller.

May 1

Purchased $3,000 of inventory from P&M, terms 1/10, n/20.

3

Sold $3,500 of goods to Frames R Us, Inc., terms 2/10, n/eom. *(Cost $2,240).

5

Frames R Us, returned $300 of goods (Cost $198).

11

Paid P&M.

13

Received payment from Frames R Us.

Requirements

1.

2. Which transaction date helped you decide?

3. Journalize May transactions for High Roller. No explanations are required.

journalize september transactions for aquamarines no explanations are required 559680

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual inventory

Consider the following transactions that occurred in September 2012 for Aquamarines.

Sep 3

Purchased inventory on terms 1/15, n/eom, $5,000.

4

Purchased inventory for cash of $1,700.

6

Returned $500 of inventory from September 4 purchase.

8

Sold goods on terms of 2/15, n/35 of $6,000 that cost $2,640.

10

Paid for goods purchased September 3.

12

Received goods from September 8 sale of $400 that cost $160.

23

Received payment from September 8 customer.

25

Sold goods to Smithsons for $1,100 that cost $400.Terms of n/30 were offered. As a courtesy to Smithsons, $75 of freight was added to the invoice for which cash was paid directly to UPS by Aquamarines.

29

Received payment from Smithsons.

Requirement

1. Journalize September transactions for Aquamarines. No explanations are required.

journalize these transactions on the books of belvidere pharmaceuticals 559681

Journalizing purchase and sale transactions—perpetual system

The following transactions occurred between Belvidere Pharmaceuticals and D & S, the pharmacy chain, during July of the current year:

Jul 6

D & S purchased $12,000 of merchandise from Belvidere on credit terms of 3/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, D & S paid a $200 bill for freight in. These goods cost Belvidere $3,600.

10

D & S returned $3,000 of the merchandise purchased on July 6. Belvidere
accounted for the sales return and placed the goods back in inventory (Belvidere’s cost, $1,200).

15

D & S paid $6,000 of the invoice amount owed to Belvidere for the July 6
purchase, less the discount.

27

D & S paid the remaining amount owed to Belvidere for the July 6 purchase.

Requirements

1. Journalize these transactions on the books of D & S.

2. Journalize these transactions on the books of Belvidere Pharmaceuticals.

how should symington have recorded this transaction 559612

Hart Nance and Jason Symington operate gift boutiques in shopping malls. The partners split profits and losses equally, and each takes an annual drawing of $80,000. To even out the workload, Nance travels around the country inspecting their properties. Symington manages the business and serves as the accountant. From time to time, they use small amounts of store merchandise for personal use. In preparing for his daughter’s wedding, Symington took inventory that cost $10,000. He recorded the transaction as follows:

Cost of goods sold

10,000

Inventory

10,000

1. How should Symington have recorded this transaction?

2. Discuss the ethical aspects of Symington’s action.

what adjustment will appear on your worksheet 559618

Supplies has a $10,000 unadjusted balance on your trial balance. At year end you count supplies of $6,000. What adjustment will appear on your worksheet?

a.

Supplies

4,000

Supplies expense

4,000

b.

Supplies expense

6,000

Supplies

6,000

c.

Supplies expense

4,000

Supplies

4,000

d. No adjustment is needed because the Supplies account already has a correct balance.

which of the following is not a closing entry 559621

Which of the following is not a closing entry?

a.

Capital

XXX

Drawing

XXX

b.

Service revenue

XXX

Income summary

XXX

c.

Salary payable

XXX

Income summary

XXX

d.

Income summary

XXX

Rent expense

XXX

another correct explanation would be the asset account prepaid rent was overstated 559624

Explaining worksheet items

Consider the following adjusting entries:

Journal Entry

a.

Apr 30

Rent expense

900

Prepaid rent

900

b.

30

Unearned service revenue

350

Service revenue

350

c.

30

Supplies expense

200

Supplies

200

d.

30

Salary expense

850

Salary payable

850

e.

30

Depreciation expense—furniture

450

Accumulated depreciation—furniture

450

Requirement

State one reason why each of the previous adjusting entries were made. Example: The explanation for journal entry a could be some of the Prepaid rent has expired. Another correct explanation would be the asset account Prepaid rent was overstated. A third correct explanation would be that Rent expense incurred was understated.

compute the ending balance of simon capital 559627

Journalizing closing entries

It is December 31 and time for you to close the books for Brett Tilman Enterprises.

Requirement

1. Journalize the closing entries for Brett Tilman Enterprises:

a. Service revenue, $20,600.

b. Make a single closing entry for all the expenses: Salary, $7,200; Rent, $4,500; Advertising, $3,400.

c. Income summary.

d. Drawing, $3,800.

Requirements

1. Set up each T account given and insert its adjusted balance as given (denote as Bal) at December 31. Also set up a T account for Simon, capital, $26,100, and for Income summary.

2. Post the closing entries to the accounts, denoting posted amounts as Clo.

3. Compute the ending balance of Simon, capital.

journalize brown rsquo s closing entries as needed for these accounts 559628

Making closing entries

Brown Insurance Agency reported the following items at November 30, 2012:

Sales and marketing expense

$2,100

Cash

$1,100

Other assets

700

Service revenue

5,500

Depreciation expense

800

Accounts payable

500

Long term liabilities

600

Accounts receivable

900

Requirement

1. Journalize Brown’s closing entries, as needed for these accounts.

prepare t accounts for patel insurance agency insert the account balances prior to c 559629

Posting closing entries

Patel Insurance Agency reported the following items at September 30:

Sales and marketing expense

$1,600

Cash

$1,300

Other assets

700

Service revenue

4,000

Depreciation expense

900

Patel, capital

500

Long term liabilities

600

Accounts receivable

900

Requirement

1. Prepare T accounts for Patel Insurance Agency. Insert the account balances prior to closing. Post the closing entries to the affected T accounts, and show each account’s ending balance after closing. Also show the Income summary T account. Denote a balance as Bal and a closing entry amount as Clo.

identify the assets including contra assets and liabilities 559631

Classifying assets and liabilities as current or long term

Jet Fast Printing reported the following:

Buildings

$4,200

Service revenue

$1,115

Accounts payable

600

Cash

400

Total expenses

1,200

Receivables

700

Accumulated depreciation

3,000

Interest expense

110

Accrued liabilities (such as Salary payable)

400

Equipment

1,100

Prepaid expenses

300

Requirements

1. Identify the assets (including contra assets) and liabilities.

2. Classify each asset and each liability as current or long term.

how much in current assets does heart of texas telecom have for every dollar of curr 559632

Computing the current and debt ratios

Heart of Texas Telecom has these account balances at December 31, 2012:

Note payable, long term

$ 7,800

Accounts payable

$ 3,700

Prepaid rent

2,300

Accounts receivable

5,700

Salary payable

3,000

Cash

3,500

Service revenue

29,400

Depreciation expense

6,000

Supplies

500

Equipment

15,000

Requirements

1. Compute Heart of Texas Telecom’s current ratio and debt ratio.

2. How much in current assets does Heart of Texas Telecom have for every dollar of current liabilities that it owes?

how much was the net income net loss for march 559633

Preparing a worksheet

Data for the unadjusted trial balance of Mexican Riviera Tanning Salon at March 31, 2012, follow.

Cash

$ 13,000

Service revenue

$ 89,900

Equipment

66,500

Salary expense

42,200

Accumulated depreciation

18,500

Depreciation expense

Accounts payable

3,200

Supplies expense

Supplies

1,400

Neeland, drawing

Neeland, capital

11,500

Adjusting data for March 2012 are:

  1. Accrued service revenue, $2,600.
  2. Supplies used in operations, $400.
  3. Accrued salary expense, $1,700.
  4. Depreciation expense, $4,100.

Les Neeland, the owner, has received an offer to sell the company. He needs to know the net income for the month covered by these data.

Requirements

1. Prepare the worksheet for Mexican Riviera Tanning Salon.

2. How much was the net income/net loss for March?

how much was net income for november 559634

Preparing a worksheet and using it to calculate net income

The trial balance of Telegraphic Link at November 30, follows:

TELEGRAPHIC LINK Trial Balance November 30, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,000

Accounts receivable

3,200

Prepaid rent

1,900

Supplies

3,000

Equipment

34,800

Accumulated depreciation

$ 1,600

Accounts payable

5,400

Salary payable

Thomas, capital

35,700

Thomas, drawing

2,100

Service revenue

8,600

Depreciation expense

Salary expense

1,700

Rent expense

Utilities expense

600

Supplies expense

Total

$51,300

$51,300

Additional information at November 30, 2012:

  1. Accrued service revenue, $600.
  2. Depreciation, $300.
  3. Accrued salary expense, $800.
  4. Prepaid rent expired,
  5. Supplies used, $100.

1. Complete Telegraphic Link’s worksheet for the month ended November 30, 2012.

2. How much was net income for November?

how much net income or net loss did silver earn for january how can you tell 559635

Preparing closing entries from a partial worksheet

The adjusted trial balance from the January worksheet of Silver Sign Company follows:

SILVER SIGN COMPANY Partial Worksheet Month Ended January 31, 2012

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$14,300

Supplies

2,400

Prepaid rent

1,400

Equipment

45,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 6,100

Accounts payable

4,500

Salary payable

300

Unearned service revenue

4,500

Note payable, long term

5,300

Silver, capital

32,600

Silver, drawing

Service revenue

800

16,800

Salary expense

3,600

Rent expense

1,400

Depreciation expense

400

Supplies expense

200

Utilities expense

600

Total

$70,100

$70,100

Requirements

1. Journalize Silver’s closing entries at January 31.

2. How much net income or net loss did Silver earn for January? How can you tell?

what are their balances after closing 559636

Identifying and journalizing closing entries

Gunther recorded the following transactions and year end adjustments during 2012:

Journal Entry

Accounts and Explanations

Debit

Credit

Prepaid rent

8,000

Cash

8,000

Prepaid the annual rent.

Rent expense

5,100

Prepaid rent

5,100

Adjustment to record rent expense for the year.

Cash

4,200

Unearned service revenue

4,200

Collected cash in advance of service revenue to be earned.

Unearned service revenue

4,700

Service revenue

4,700

Adjustment to record revenue earned.

Requirements

1. Assuming that there were no other service revenue and rent expense transactions during 2012, journalize Gunther’s closing entries at the end of 2012.

2. Open T accounts for Service revenue and Rent expense. Post the closing entries to these accounts. What are their balances after closing?

compute o rsquo brion rsquo s current ratio and debt ratio at august 31 2012 559637

Preparing a classified balance sheet, and calculating the current and debt ratios

The adjusted trial balance and the income statement amounts from the August worksheet of Brian O’Brion Dance Studio Company follow:

BRIAN O’BRION DANCE STUDIO COMPANY Partial Worksheet Month Ended August 31, 2012

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$15,800

Supplies

2,000

Prepaid rent

900

Equipment

49,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 5,500

Accounts payable

4,500

Salary payable

500

Unearned service revenue

5,100

Long term note payable

4,400

O’Brion, capital

36,500

O’Brion, drawing

1,100

Service revenue

18,100

Salary expense

3,000

Rent expense

1,500

Depreciation expense

300

Supplies expense

400

Utilities expense

600

Total

$74,600

$74,600

Requirements

1. Prepare the classified balance sheet of Brian O’Brion Dance Studio Company at August 31, 2012. Use the report form. You must compute the ending balance of O’Brion, capital.

2. Compute O’Brion’s current ratio and debt ratio at August 31, 2012. One year ago, the current ratio was 1.49 and the debt ratio was 0.29. Indicate whether O’Brion’s ability to pay current and total debts has improved, deteriorated, or remained the same during the current year.

complete myla rsquo s worksheet for november key adjusting entries by letter 559638

Preparing a worksheet and the financial statements

The trial balance and adjustment data of Myla’s Motors at November 30, 2012, follow:

MYLA’S MOTORS Trial Balance November 30, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,300

Accounts receivable

26,600

Supplies

500

Prepaid insurance

1,700

Equipment

53,500

Accumulated depreciation

$36,400

Accounts payable

13,400

Wages payable

Unearned service

8,000

Myla, capital

19,700

Myla, drawing

3,800

Service revenue

16,000

Depreciation expense

Wage expense

1,600

Insurance expense

Utilities expense

1,500

Supplies expense

Total

$93,500

$93,500

Additional data at November 30, 2012:

  1. Depreciation on equipment, $1,100.
  2. Accrued wage expense, $600.
  3. Supplies on hand, $200.
  4. Prepaid insurance expired during November, $200.
  5. Unearned service revenue earned during November, $4,000.
  6. Accrued service revenue, $800.

Requirements

1. Complete Myla’s worksheet for November. Key adjusting entries by letter.

2. Prepare the income statement, the statement of owner’s equity, and the classified balance sheet in account form for the month ended November 30, 2012.

enter the account data in the trial balance columns of a worksheet and complete the 559639

Preparing a worksheet, financial statements, and closing entries

The trial balance of Fugazy Investment Advisers at December 31, 2012, follows:

FUGAZY INVESTMENT ADVISERS Trial Balance December 31, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 32,000

Accounts receivable

46,000

Supplies

3,000

Equipment

25,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 11,000

Accounts payable

15,000

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

2,000

Note payable, long term

39,000

Fugazy, capital

38,000

Fugazy, drawing

50,000

Service revenue

97,000

Salary expense

32,000

Supplies expense

Depreciation expense

Interest expense

3,000

Rent expense

9,000

Insurance expense

2,000

Total

$202,000

$202,000

Adjustment data at December 31, 2012:

  1. Unearned service revenue earned during the year, $500.
  2. Supplies on hand, $1,000.
  3. Depreciation for the year, $6,000.
  4. Accrued salary expense, $1,000.
  5. Accrued service revenue, $4,000.

Requirements

1. Enter the account data in the Trial Balance columns of a worksheet, and complete the worksheet through the Adjusted Trial Balance. Key each adjusting entry by the letter corresponding to the data given. Leave a blank line under Service revenue.

2. Prepare the income statement, the statement of owner’s equity, and the classified balance sheet in account format.

3. Prepare closing journal entries from the worksheet.

4. Did the company have a good or a bad year during 2012? Give the reason for your answer. (Challenge)

prepare the income statement the statement of owner rsquo s equity and the classifie 559640

Completing the accounting cycle

The trial balance of Wolfe Anvils at October 31, 2012, and the data for the month end adjustments follow:

WOLFE ANVILS Trial Balance October 31, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,300

Accounts receivable

15,000

Prepaid rent

2,700

Supplies

1,600

Equipment

31,200

Accumulated depreciation

$ 3,000

Accounts payable

6,900

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

5,400

Wolfe, capital

26,600

Wolfe, drawing

3,500

Service revenue

18,900

Salary expense

2,500

Rent expense

Depreciation expense

Supplies expense

Total

$60,800

$60,800

Adjustment data:

  1. Unearned service revenue still unearned at October 31, $1,200.
  2. Prepaid rent still in force at October 31, $2,500.
  3. Supplies used during the month, $1,000.
  4. Depreciation for the month, $300.
  5. Accrued salary expense at October 31, $200.

Requirements

1. Prepare adjusting journal entries.

2. Enter the trial balance on a worksheet and complete the worksheet through the Adjusted Trial Balance of Wolfe Anvils for the month ended October 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the income statement, the statement of owner’s equity, and the classified balance sheet in report form.

4. Using the worksheet data that you prepared, journalize the closing entries and post the adjusting and closing entries to T accounts. Use dates and show the ending balance of each account.

5. Prepare a post closing trial balance.

6. Calculate the current and debt ratios for the company.

journalize the closing entries and post to the accounts that you opened 559641

Journalizing adjusting and closing entries

The unadjusted trial balance and adjustment data of Elias Real Estate Appraisal Company at June 30, 2012, follow:

ELIAS REAL ESTATE APPRAISAL COMPANY Unadjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2012

Account title

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 4,900

Accounts receivable

4,000

Supplies

3,000

Prepaid insurance

2,200

Building

74,400

Accumulated depreciation

$ 18,800

Land

13,600

Accounts payable

19,500

Interest payable

8,800

Salary payable

1,300

Elias, capital

30,800

Elias, drawing

27,900

Service revenue

97,900

Salary expense

32,400

Depreciation expense

0

Insurance expense

4,200

Utilities expense

4,000

Supplies expense

6,500

Total

$ 177,100

$ 177,100

Adjustment data at June 30, 2012:

  1. Prepaid insurance expired, $300.
  2. Accrued service revenue, $1,300.
  3. Accrued salary expense, $900.
  4. Depreciation for the year, $8,500.
  5. Supplies used during the year, $600.

Requirements

1. Open T accounts for Elias, capital and all the accounts that follow on the trial balance. Insert their unadjusted balances. Also open a T account for Income summary, which has a zero balance.

2. Journalize the adjusting entries and post to the accounts that you opened. Show the balance of each revenue account and each expense account.

3. Journalize the closing entries and post to the accounts that you opened. Draw double underlines under each account balance that you close to zero.

4. Compute the ending balance of Elias, capital.

compute the company rsquo s current ratio and debt ratio at december 31 2012 at dece 559642

Preparing a classified balance sheet in report form, and using the current and debt ratios to evaluate a company Selected accounts of Blume Irrigation System at December 31, 2012, follow:

Insurance expense

$ 900

Accounts payable

$24,700

Note payable, long term

2,800

Accounts receivable

43,100

Other assets

2,200

Accumulated depreciation—building

24,000

Building

55,800

Blume, capital, December 31, 2011

52,000

Prepaid insurance

4,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

7,900

Salary expense

16,300

Cash3

11,000

Salary payable

3,900

Interest payable

400

Service revenue

74,800

Blume, drawing

2,000

Supplies

3,300

Equipment

23,000

Unearned service revenue

1,600

Depreciation expense

30,500

Requirements

1. Prepare the company’s classified balance sheet in report form at December 31, 2012.

2. Compute the company’s current ratio and debt ratio at December 31, 2012. At December 31, 2011, the current ratio was 1.81 and the debt ratio was Did the company’s ability to pay debts improve or deteriorate, or did it remain the same during 2012?

did the company have a good or a bad year during 2012 give the reason for your answe 559643

Preparing a worksheet and the financial statements

The trial balance and adjustment data of Brooke’s Motors at September 2012, follow:

BROOKE’S MOTORS Trial Balance September 30, 2012

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 28,000

Accounts receivable

50,000

Supplies

8,000

Equipment

26,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 16,000

Accounts payable

14,000

Salary payable

Unearned service revenue

1,000

Note payable, long term

44,000

Giambi, capital

40,000

Giambi, drawing

50,000

Service revenue

97,000

Salary expense

32,000

Supplies expense

Depreciation expense

Interest expense

7,000

Rent expense

7,000

Insurance expense

4,000

Total

$212,000

$212,000

Adjustment data at December 31, 2012:

  1. Unearned service revenue earned during the year, $500.
  2. Supplies on hand, $5,000.
  3. Depreciation for the year, $8,000.
  4. Accrued salary expense, $1,000.
  5. Accrued service revenue, $3,000.

Requirements

1. Enter the account data in the Trial Balance columns of a worksheet, and complete the worksheet through the Adjusted Trial Balance. Key each adjusting entry by the letter corresponding to the data given. Leave a blank line under Service revenue.

2. Prepare the income statement, the statement of owner’s equity, and the classified balance sheet in account format.

3. Prepare closing journal entries from the worksheet.

4. Did the company have a good or a bad year during 2012? Give the reason for your answer.

(Challenge)

what factors should the homs consider before they make their decision as to whether 559364

Steve and Linda Hom live in Bartlesville, Oklahoma. Two years ago, they visited Thailand. Linda, a professional chef, was impressed with the cooking methods and the spices used in the Thai food. Bartlesville does not have a Thai restaurant, and the Homs are contemplating opening one. Linda would supervise the cooking, and Steve would leave his current job to be the maitre d’. The restaurant would serve dinner Tuesday–Saturday.

Steve has noticed a restaurant for lease. The restaurant has seven tables, each of which can seat four. Tables can be moved together for a large party. Linda is planning two seatings per evening, and the restaurant will be open 50 weeks per year.

The Homs have drawn up the following estimates:

Average revenue, including beverages and dessert

$ 45 per meal

Average cost of food

$ 15 per meal

Chef’s and dishwasher’s salaries

$ 5,100 per month

Rent (premises, equipment)

$ 4,000 per month

Cleaning (linen and premises)

$ 800 per month

Replacement of dishes, cutlery, glasses

$ 300 per month

Utilities, advertising, telephone

$ 2,300 per month

Requirements

1. Compute the annualbreakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant.

2. Also compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year.

3. How many meals must the Homs serve each night to earn their target income of $75,600?

4. What factors should the Homs consider before they make their decision as to whether to open the restaurant or not?

why might the consequences not be as bad as you fear 559365

You have just begun your summer internship at Omni Instruments. The company supplies sterilized surgical instruments for physicians. To expand sales, Omni is considering paying a commission to its sales force. The controller, Matthew Barnhill, asks you to compute: (1) the new breakeven sales figure, and (2) the operating profit if sales increase 15% under the new sales commission plan. He thinks you can handle this task because you learned CVP analysis in your accounting class.

You spend the next day collecting information from the accounting records, performing the analysis, and writing a memo to explain the results. The company president is pleased with your memo. You report that the new sales commission plan will lead to a significant increase in operating income and only a small increase in breakeven sales.

The following week, you realize that you made an error in the CVP analysis. You overlooked the sales personnel’s $2,800 monthly salaries and you did not include this fixed marketing cost in your computations. You are not sure what to do. If you tell Matthew Barnhill of your mistake, he will have to tell the president. In this case, you are afraid Omni might not offer you permanent employment after your internship.

Requirements

1. How would your error affect breakeven sales and operating income under the proposed sales commission plan? Could this cause the president to reject the sales commission proposal?

2. Consider your ethical responsibilities. Is there a difference between: (a) initially making an error, and (b) subsequently failing to inform the controller?

3. Suppose you tell Matthew Barnhill of the error in your analysis. Why might the consequences not be as bad as you fear? Should Barnhill take any responsibility for your error? What could Barnhill have done differently?

4. After considering all the factors, should you inform Barnhill or simply keep quiet?

if a person dies is anyone liable for paying the remaining bills of the deceased 559366

Amanda Jackson loved reading obituaries. She was retired, but she had worked many bookkeeping jobs in her day and had made herself an expert in creating false invoices and opening bank accounts for fake companies. The scam was easy. When someone dies, the whole family is in grief, and one of the family members must clean up the deceased person’s paperwork, close out accounts, pay the last bills, etc. If the now deceased person had ordered a pricey box set of classical music CDs, or had his ventilation system cleaned out, or even gotten therapeutic massages, who would bother questioning the bill? Sometimes the families of the deceased person paid Amanda’s fake bills, and sometimes they didn’t, but nobody ever looked any further. Yes, Amanda Jackson loved reading obituaries.

Requirements

1. Although this fraud pertains to individuals, how do businesses make sure they do not pay fake invoices?

2. If a person dies, is anyone liable for paying the remaining bills of the deceased?

is the board satisfied with this provision if so explain why if not recommend how it 559367

FASTPACK Manufacturing produces filament packaging tape. In 2014, FASTPACK produced and sold 15,000,000 rolls of tape. The company has recently expanded its capacity, so it now can produce up to 30,000,000 rolls per year. FASTPACK’s accounting records show the following results from 2014:

Sale price per roll

$ 3.00

Variable manufacturing costs per roll

$ 2.00

Variable marketing and administrative costs per roll

$ 0.50

Total fixed manufacturing overhead costs

$8,400,000

Total fixed marketing and administrative costs

$1,100,000

Sales

15,000,000 rolls

Production

15,000,000 rolls

There were no beginning or ending inventories in 2014.

In January 2015, FASTPACK hired a new president, Kevin McDaniel. McDaniel has a one year contract that specifies he will be paid 10% of FASTPACK’s 2015 absorption costing operating income, instead of a salary. In 2015, McDaniel must make two major decisions:

? Should FASTPACK undertake a major advertising campaign? This campaign would raise sales to 24,000,000 rolls. This is the maximum level of sales FASTPACK can expect to make in the near future. The ad campaign would add an additional $2,300,000 in fixed marketing and administrative costs. Without the campaign, sales will be 15,000,000 rolls.

? How many rolls of tape will FASTPACK produce?

At the end of the year, FASTPACK’s Board of Directors will evaluate McDaniel’s performance and decide whether to offer him a contract for the following year.

Requirements

Within your group, form two subgroups. The first subgroup assumes the role of Kevin McDaniel, FASTPACK’s new president. The second subgroup assumes the role of FASTPACK’s Board of Directors. McDaniel will meet with the Board of Directors shortly after the end of 2014 to decide whether he will remain at FASTPACK. Most of your effort should be devoted to advance preparation for this meeting. Each subgroup should meet separately to prepare for the meeting between the Board and McDaniel.

Kevin McDaniel should

1. compute FASTPACK’s 2014 operating income.

2. decide whether to adopt the advertising campaign. Prepare a memo to the Board of Directors explaining this decision. Give this memo to the Board of Directors as soon as possible (before the joint meeting).

3. assume FASTPACK adopts the advertising campaign. Decide how many rolls of tape to produce in 2015.

4. (given the response to Requirement 3) prepare an absorption costing income statement for the year ended December 31, 2015, ending with operating income before bonus. Then compute the bonus separately. The variable cost per unit and the total fixed costs (with the exception of the advertising campaign) remain the same as in 2014. Give this income statement and bonus computation to the Board of Directors as soon as possible (before the meeting with the Board).

5. decide whether he wishes to remain at FASTPACK for another year. He currently has an offer from another company. The contract with the other company is identical to the one he currently has with FASTPACK—he will be paid 10% of absorption costing operating income instead of a salary.

The Board of Directors should

1. compute FASTPACK’s 2014 operating income.

2. determine whether FASTPACK should adopt the advertising campaign.

3. determine how many rolls of tape FASTPACK should produce in 2015.

4. evaluate McDaniel’s performance, based on his decisions and the information he provided the Board. (Hint: You may want to prepare a variable costing income statement.)

5. evaluate the contract’s bonus provision. Is the Board satisfied with this provision? If so, explain why. If not, recommend how it should be changed.

After McDaniel has given the Board his memo and income statement, and after the Board has had a chance to evaluate McDaniel’s performance, McDaniel and the Board should meet. The purpose of the meeting is to decide whether it is in their mutual interest for McDaniel to remain with FASTPACK, and if so, the terms of the contract FASTPACK will offer McDaniel.

the journal entry to record this transaction is 559570

Charles pays $30,000 to Steven to acquire Steven’s $15,000 interest in a partnership. The journal entry to record this transaction is

a.

Charles, capital

15,000

Steven, capital

15,000

b.

Charles, capital

15,000

Steven, capital

15,000

c.

Charles, capital

30,000

Steven, capital

30,000

d.

Charles, capital

45,000

Steven, capital

45,000

journalize the sale of the noncash assets for 25 000 the payment of the liabilities 559585

Accounting for the liquidation of a partnership

The Kelly & Lena partnership has the following balances on June 30, 2012:

KELLY & LENA Balance Sheet June 30, 2012

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ equity

Cash

$ 5,000

Accounts payable

$20,000

Other assets

30,000

Kelly, capital

8,000

Lena, capital

7,000

Total assets

$35,000

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$35,000

Kelly and Lena share profits 2:3.

Requirement

1. Journalize the sale of the noncash assets for $25,000, the payment of the liabilities, and the payment to the partners.

prepare the partnership rsquo s income statement for the year ended april 30 2012 559586

Preparing partnership financial statements

The partnership of Williams and Leblanc had these balances at April 30, 2012:

Cash

$24,000

Service revenue

$150,000

Liabilities

42,000

Leblanc, capital

26,000

Williams, capital

15,000

Total expenses

81,000

Other assets

59,000

Williams gets 70% of profits and losses, and Leblanc 30%.

Requirement

1. Prepare the partnership’s income statement for the year ended April 30, 2012.

journalize the entry on the partnership books to record morris rsquo s investment 559588

Account for partner investments

Nan Ferdinand has been operating an apartment locator service as a proprietorship. She and Misti Morris have decided to form a partnership. Ferdinand’s investment consists of cash, $6,000; accounts receivable, $13,000; furniture, $15,000; a building, $51,000; and a note payable, $22,000. To determine Ferdinand’s equity in the partnership, she and Morris hire an independent appraiser. The appraiser values all the assets and liabilities at their book value except the building, which has a current market value of $96,000. Also, there are additional accounts payable of $5,000 that Ferdinand will contribute. Morris will contribute cash equal to Ferdinand’s equity in the partnership.

Requirements

1. Journalize the entry on the partnership books to record Ferdinand’s investment.

2. Journalize the entry on the partnership books to record Morris’s investment.

parks will continue to operate the business as a proprietorship what is parks rsquo 559593

Accounting for withdrawal of a partner

The O’Hara and Parks partnership balance sheet reports capital of $55,000 for O’Hara and $110,000 for Parks. O’Hara is withdrawing from the firm. The partners agree to write partnership noncash assets to market value by increasing them $40,000. They have shared profits and losses in the ratio of 1/4 to O’Hara and 3/4 to Parks. The partnership agreement states that a withdrawing partner will receive assets equal to the book value of his owner’s equity.

Requirements

1. Journalize the revaluation of the noncash assets.

2. Journalize the withdrawal of O’Hara.

3. Parks will continue to operate the business as a proprietorship. What is Parks’ beginning capital on the books of his new proprietorship?

journalize the sale of the assets for 165 000 the payment of the liabilities and the 559596

Accounting for the liquidation of a partnership

The partnership of Driscoll, Charles, and Gavin is liquidating. Business assets, liabilities, and partners’ capital balances prior to liquidation follow. The partners share profits and losses as follows: Driscoll, 20%; Charles, 30%; and Gavin, 50%.

DRISCOLL, CHARLES, & GAVIN

Cash

Noncash assets

Liabilities

Driscoll capital

Charles capital

Gavin capital

$13,000

$130,000

$80,000

$18,000

$33,000

$12,000

Requirement

1. Journalize the sale of the assets for $165,000, the payment of the liabilities, and the payment of the partners’ final capital balances.

prepare the partnership balance sheet at december 31 2012 559597

Preparing partnership financial statements

On December 31, 2012, Dana Davis and Lou Ghai agree to combine their proprietorships into a partnership. Their balance sheets on December 31 are shown as follows.

Davis’s Business

Ghai’s Business

Book Value

Current Market Value

Book Value

Current Market Value

Assets

Cash

$9,000

$9,000

$6,000

$6,000

Accounts receivable

26,000

24,000

16,000

14,000

Inventory

49,000

43,000

38,000

38,000

Plant assets (net)

123,000

105,000

54,000

58,000

Total assets

$207,000

$181,000

$114,000

$116,000

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Accounts payable

$24,000

$24,000

$12,000

$12,000

Accrued expenses payable

12,000

12,000

Notes payable

55,000

55,000

Davis, capital

116,000

?

Ghai, capital

102,000

?

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$207,000

$181,000

$114,000

116,000

Requirements

1. Journalize the contributions of Davis and Ghai to the partnership.

2. Prepare the partnership balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

journalize the closing of the income summary and partner drawing accounts on decembe 559599

Account for partner investments, allocating profits and losses to the partners, preparing partnership financial statements

Lorena Lally and Allie Raras formed a partnership on March 15. The partners agreed to invest equal amounts of capital. Lally invested her proprietorship’s assets and liabilities (credit balances in parentheses). See the table that follows.

Lally’s Book Values

Current Market Values

Accounts receivable

$12,300

$10,600

Inventory

47,000

38,000

Prepaid expenses

3,600

3,400

Store equipment

41,000

28,000

Accounts payable

(24,000)

(24,000)

On March 15, Raras invested cash in an amount equal to the current market value of Lally’s partnership capital. The partners decided that Lally will earn 70% of partnership profits because she will manage the business. Raras agreed to accept 30% of the profits. During the period ended December 31, the partnership earned net income of $74,000. Lally ’s drawings were $42,000, and Raras ’s drawings totaled $22,000.

Requirements

1. Journalize the partners’ initial investments.

2. Prepare the partnership balance sheet immediately after its formation on March 15.

3. Journalize the closing of the Income summary and partner Drawing accounts on December 31.

prepare the june 30 entries to close the revenue expense income summary and drawing 559600

Allocating profits and losses to the partners, accounting for the liquidation of a partnership

ABAX is a partnership owned by Alders, Byron, and Calvin, who share profits and losses in the ratio of 1:3:4. The account balances of the partnership at June 30 follow.

ABAX Adjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2012

Account Title

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 33,000

Noncash assets

117,000

Notes payable

$ 32,000

Alders, capital

22,000

Byron, capital

50,000

Calvin, capital

53,000

Alders, drawing

9,000

Byron, drawing

27,000

Calvin, drawing

49,000

Sales revenue

164,000

Salary expense

74,000

Rent expense

12,000

Totals

$321,000

$321,000

Requirements

1. Prepare the June 30 entries to close the revenue, expense, income summary, and drawing accounts.

2. Insert the opening capital balances in the partners’ capital accounts, post the closing entries to their accounts, and determine each partner’s ending capital.

3. Prepare the June 30 entries to liquidate the partnership assuming the noncash assets are sold for $120,000.

compute the partners rsquo shares of profits and losses under each of the following 559601

Allocating profits and losses to the partners, preparing partnership financial statements

Edwards, French, and Gill formed the E, F and Gill partnership. Edwards invested $21,000; French, $35,000; and Gill, $44,000. Evans will manage the store; Furr will work in the store three quarters of the time; and Gill will not work.

Requirements

1. Compute the partners’ shares of profits and losses under each of the following plans:

a. Net loss is $42,000, and the partnership agreement allocates 45% of profits to Edwards, 35% to French, and 20% to Gill. The agreement does not discuss the sharing of losses b. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2012, is $97,000. The first $25,000 is allocated on the basis of partner capital balances. The next $48,000 is based on service, with $38,000 going to Edwards and $10,000 going to French. Any remainder is shared equally.

2. Revenues for the year ended September 30, 2012, were $209,000, and expenses were $112,000. Under plan (b), prepare the partnership income statement for the year

journalize the admission of saunders as a partner on july 31 for each of the followi 559602

Accounting for the admission of a new partner

Hitchcock, Michelson, and Jasper, a partnership, is considering admitting Ken Saunders as a new partner. On July 31 of the current year, the capital accounts of the three existing partners and their shares of profits and losses are as follows:

Capital

Profit and Loss %

Hitchcock

$33,000

20%

Michelson

66,000

25%

Jasper

99,000

55%

Requirements

Journalize the admission of Saunders as a partner on July 31 for each of the following independent situations:

1. Saunders pays Jasper $132,000 cash to purchase Jasper’s interest.

2. Saunders invests $66,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/4 interest in the business.

3. Saunders invests $66,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/6 interest in the business.

4. Saunders invests $66,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/3 interest in the business.

net income for the year ended september 30 2012 is 99 000 the first 30 000 is alloca 559605

Elliot, Ford, and Grant formed the E, F, and G partnership. Elliot invested $24,000, Ford $34,000, and Grant $42,000. Elliot will manage the store; Ford will work in the store three quarters of the time; and Grant will not work.

Requirements

1. Compute the partners’ shares of profits and losses under each of the following plans:

a. Net loss is $47,000, and the partnership agreement allocates 45% of profits to Elliot, 35% to Ford, and 20% to Grant. The agreement does not specify the sharing of losses.

b. Net income for the year ended September 30, 2012, is $99,000. The first $30,000 is allocated based on partner capital balances. The next $39,000 is based on service, with $29,000 going to Elliot and $10,000 going to Ford. Any remainder is shared equally.

2. Revenues for the year ended September 30, 2012, were $210,000, and expenses were $111,000. Under plan (b), prepare the partnership income statement for the year.

hancock mccabe and johnson are considering adding ken sacchetti as a new partner on 559606

Hancock, McCabe, and Johnson are considering adding Ken Sacchetti as a new partner. On July 31 of the current year, the capital accounts of the three existing partners and their shares of profits and losses are as follows:

Capital

Profit and Loss %

Hancock

$ 36,000

20%

McCabe

72,000

25%

Johnson

108,000

55%

Requirements

Journalize the admission of Sacchetti as a partner on July 31 for each of the following independent situations:

1. Sacchetti pays Johnson $144,000 cash to purchase Johnson’s interest in the partnership.

2. Sacchetti invests $72,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/4 interest in the business.

3. Sacchetti invests $72,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/6 interest in the business.

4. Sacchetti invests $72,000 in the partnership, acquiring a 1/3 interest in the business.

what are the balances in lawlor and tanya rsquo s capital accounts on march 31 559607

Account for partner investments, allocating profits and losses to the partners

This exercise is related to the Lawlor Lawn Service situation started in Chapter 1. Lawlor has decided to start a pressure washing business with her buddy Tanya. This will be a separate business from Lawlor Lawn Service. Lawlor and Tanya will be partners in the pressure washing business. Lawlor will contribute cash of $1,000 and a pressure washing machine that cost Lawlor $1,800 but has current market value of only $1,500. Tanya will contribute supplies of $500 and a storage building that cost $2,000 but has current market value of $2,200. They form the LT Pressure Washing Company on March 1, 2013. Lawlor and Tanya agree to share profits and losses 4:3, respectively.

Requirements

1. Journalize the investment of both partners in the LT Pressure Washing Company on March 1, 2013.

2. The partnership recorded a loss of $700 for March, 2013. Journalize the allocation of the loss from Income summary.

3. What are the balances in Lawlor and Tanya’s capital accounts on March 31? Prepare T accounts to answer the question.

assume that the 2011 omission of 60 000 was an account payable for an operating expe 559610

Decision Case P 2 Jana Bell invested $20,000 and Matt Fischer invested $10,000 in a public relations firm that has operated for 10 years. Bell and Fischer have shared profits and losses in the 2:1 ratio of their investments in the business. Bell manages the office, supervises employees, and does the accounting. Fischer, the moderator of a television talk show, is responsible for marketing. His high profile status generates important revenue for the business. During the year ended December 2011, the partnership earned net income of $220,000, shared in the 2:1 ratio. On December 31, 2011, Bell’s capital balance was $150,000, and Fischer’s capital balance was $100,000. (Bell drew more cash out of the business than Fischer.)

Requirements

Respond to each of the following situations.

1. During January 2012, Bell learned that revenues of $60,000 were omitted from the reported 2011 income. She brings this omission to Fischer’s attention, pointing out that Bell’s share of this added income is two thirds, or $40,000, and Fischer’s share is onethird, or $20,000. Fischer believes they should share this added income on the basis of their capital balances—60%, or $36,000, to Bell and 40%, or $24,000, to himself. Which partner is correct? Why?

2. Assume that the 2011 omission of $60,000 was an account payable for an operating expense. On what basis would the partners share this amount?

what could the partners have done to protect themselves from the situation 559611

Ellen Doran is an accounting analyst. She made a name for herself in the Panhandle with several small businesses. Growing tired of working seven days a week, Doran formed a partnership with a local software saleswoman, Penelope Bitz. They agreed via e mail as to how expenses and such would be handled—each department would be its own profit center, and each partner would be responsible for her individual departments. Although they agreed to this via e mail, the partners failed to draft a formal signed partnership agreement. While Doran went about working with clients and reimbursing her expenses, Bitz grew resentful of Doran’s growing profits. Seven weeks into the partnership, Doran realized that Bitz had cleaned out the partnership account and closed it. Three years of litigation ensued over the $5,000 profits: The results were dismal. Hundreds of thousands of dollars were spent in legal and accounting fees, not to mention the time each former partner spent on the case. The judge ruled that in absence of a written partnership agreement, Doran had mutual agency liability for the actions of Bitz. Doran filed bankruptcy while Bitz lost most of her clients in the aftermath.

Requirements

1. Did either of the partner commit a fraud?

2. Should an electronic agreement be held identical to a formal, written partnership agreement? Does the fact that the two partners worked in an environment where most decisions and work are performed electronically make a difference?

3. What could the partners have done to protect themselves from the situation? (Challenge)

cost and financial accounts are reconciled under non integral accounting 559142

State whether the following statements are true or false:
1.Cost and financial accounts are reconciled under non integral accounting.
2.Rent on owned buildings is not included in cost accounts.
3.Income tax is provided only in cost accounts.
4.Under absorption of production overheads is deducted while reconciling cost profit with financial profits.
5.Under valuation of closing stock in cost accounts is added while reconciling cost profit with financial profits.
6.Under absorption = actual > estimated.
7.Over absorption = actual > estimated.
8.Costing profit and loss account and financial profit and loss account are the same.
9.Capital losses shown in financial accounts are deducted while reconciling costing profits with financial profits.
10.Under absorptions are caused by clerical errors.

compute the weighted average contribution margin per ticket 559346

Calculating weighted average contribution margin

Wet Weekend Swim Park sells individual and family tickets, which include a meal, three beverages, and unlimited use of the swimming pools. Wet Weekend has the following ticket prices and variable costs for 2012:

Individual

Family

Sale price per ticket

$ 30

$ 90

Variable cost per ticket

15

60

Wet Weekend expects to sell two individual tickets for every four family tickets. Wet Weekend’s total fixed costs are $75,000.

Requirements

1. Compute the weighted average contribution margin per ticket.

2. Calculate the total number of tickets Wet Weekend must sell to break even.

3. Calculate the number of individual tickets and the number of family tickets the company must sell to break even.

prepare two contribution margin income statements one at the 245 000 leveland one at 559349

Preparing contribution margin income statements and calculating breakeven sales

For its top managers, Worldwide Travel formats its income statement as follows:

WORLDWIDE TRAVEL Contribution Margin Income Statement Three Months Ended March 31, 2012

Sales revenue

$ 317,500

Variable costs

95,250

Contribution margin

$ 222,250

Fixed costs

175,000

Operating income

$ 47,250

Worldwide’s relevant range is between sales of $245,000 and $364,000.

Requirements

1. Calculate the contribution margin ratio.

2. Prepare two contribution margin income statements: one at the $245,000 leveland one at the $364,000 level.

3. Compute breakeven sales in dollars.

if the firm is operating at full capacity and no new debt or equity is issued what i 556300

Calculating EFN

The most recent financial statements for Moose Tours, Inc., follow. Sales for 2003 are projected to grow by 20 percent. Interest expense will remain constant; the tax rate and the dividend payout rate will also remain constant. Costs, other expenses, current assets, and accounts payable increase spontaneously with sales. If the firm is operating at full capacity and no new debt or equity is issued, what is the external financing needed to support the 20 percent growth rate in sales?

MOOSE TOURS, INC.

2002 Income Statement

Sales

$980,000

Costs

770,000

Other expenses

14,000

Earnings before interest and taxes

$196,000

Interest paid

23,800

Taxable income

$172,200

Taxes (35%)

60,270

Net income

$111,930

Dividends

$44,772

Addition to retained earnings

67,158

MOOSE TOURS, INC.

Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2002

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets

Current liabilities

Cash

$ 28,000

Accounts payable

$ 70,000

Accounts receivable

49,000

Notes payable

7,000

Inventory

84,000

Total

$ 77,000

Total

$161,000

Long term debt

$168,000

Fixed assets

Owners’ equity

Net plant and

Common stock and paid in surplus

$ 21,000

equipment

$385,000

Retained earnings

280,000

Total assets

$546,000

Total

$301,000

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$546,000

asset needs will equal a times g the addition to retained earnings will equal pm s b 556306

EFN Define the following:

S

=Previous year’s sales

A

=Total assets

D

=Total debt

E

=Total equity

g

=Projected growth in sales

PM

=Profit margin

b

=Retention (plowback) ratio

Show that EFN can be written as:

EFN = PM(S)b +(A PM(S)b) ×g

Hint: Asset needs will equal A×g. The addition to retained earnings will equal PM(S)b ×(1 + g).

the interest on interest earned in the second year thus amounts to 45 50 times 556310

Interest on Interest Suppose you locate a two year investment that pays 14 percent per year. If you invest $325, how much will you have at the end of the two years? How much of this is simple interest? How much is compound interest?

At the end of the first year, you will have $325 × (1 +.14) = $370.50. If you reinvest this entire amount, and thereby compound the interest, you will have $370.50 × 1.14 =$422.37 at the end of the second year. The total interest you earn is thus $422.37 325 =$97.37.

Your $325 original principal earns $325 ×.14 =$45.50 in interest each year, for a two year total of $91 in simple interest. The remaining $97.37 91 =$6.37 results from compounding. You can check this by noting that the interest earned in the first year is $45.50. The interest on interest earned in the second year thus amounts to $45.50 ×.14 =$6.37, as we calculated.

how much of that interest results from compounding based on our discussion we can ca 556311

Compound Interest

You’ve located an investment that pays 12 percent. That rate sounds good to you, so you invest $400. How much will you have in three years? How much will you have in seven years? At the end of seven years, how much interest will you have earned? How much of that interest results from compounding? Based on our discussion, we can calculate the future value factor for 12 percent and three years as:

(1 +r )t = 1.123 =1.4049

Your $400 thus grows to:

$400 ×1.4049 = $561.97

After seven years, you will have:

$400 ×1.127= $400 ×2.2107= $884.27

Thus, you will more than double your money over seven years. Because you invested $400, the interest in the $884.27 future value is $884.27 400 = $484.27. At 12 percent, your $400 investment earns $400 ×.12 =$48 in simple interest every year. Over seven years, the simple interest thus totals 7 ×$48 =$336. The other $484.27 336 =$148.27 is from compounding.

at 10 percent 24 will grow by quite a bit over that time how much the future value f 556312

How Much for That Island?

To further illustrate the effect of compounding for long horizons, consider the case of Peter Minuit and the American Indians. In 1626, Minuit bought all of Manhattan Island for about $24 in goods and trinkets. This sounds cheap, but the Indians may have gotten the better end of the deal. To see why, suppose the Indians had sold the goods and invested the $24 at 10 percent. How much would it be worth today? Roughly 375 years have passed since the transaction. At 10 percent, $24 will grow by quite a bit over that time. How much? The future value factor is approximately:

(1 [1] r )t =1.1375 ˜ 3,000,000,000,000,000

That is, 3 followed by 15 zeroes. The future value is thus on the order of $24× 3 quadrillion or about $72 quadrillion (give or take a few hundreds of trillions).

what does it mean to compound interest how does compound interest differ from simple 556313

Dividend Growth

The TICO Corporation currently pays a cash dividend of $5 per share. You believe the dividend will be increased by 4 percent each year indefinitely. How big will the dividend be in eight years? Here we have a cash dividend growing because it is being increased by management, but, once again, the calculation is the same: Future value =$5 ×1.048 =$5 ×1.3686= $6.84 The dividend will grow by $1.84 over that period. Dividend growth is a subject we will return to in a later chapter.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What do we mean by the future value of an investment?

b What does it mean to compound interest? How does compound interest differ from simple interest?

c In general, what is the future value of $1 invested at r per period for t periods?

what do we mean by discounted cash flow or dcf valuation 556316

Deceptive Advertising?

Recently, some businesses have been saying things like “Come try our product. If you do, we’ll give you $100 just for coming by!” If you read the fine print, what you find out is that they will give you a savings certificate that will pay you $100 in 25 years or so. If the going interest rate on such certificates is 10 percent per year, how much are they really giving you today? What you’re actually getting is the present value of $100 to be paid in 25 years. If the discount rate is 10 percent per year, then the discount factor is: 1/1.125=1/10.8347×.0923 This tells you that a dollar in 25 years is worth a little more than nine cents today, assuming a 10 percent discount rate. Given this, the promotion is actually paying you about .0923×$100=$9.23. Maybe this is enough to draw customers, but it’s not $100.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What do we mean by the present value of an investment?

b The process of discounting a future amount back to the present is the opposite of doing what?

c What do we mean by discounted cash flow, or DCF, valuation?

d In general, what is the present value of $1 to be received in t periods, assuming

a discount rate of r per period?

hat do you think of the proposed investment this is not a good investment why not 556317

Evaluating Investments

To give you an idea of how we will be using present and future values, consider the following simple investment. Your company proposes to buy an asset for $335. This investment is very safe. You would sell off the asset in three years for $400. You know you could invest the $335 elsewhere at 10 percent with very little risk. What do you think of the proposed investment? This is not a good investment. Why not? Because you can invest the $335 elsewhere at 10 percent. If you do, after three years it will grow to:

$335 ×(1+r )t =$335 ×1.13

=$335 ××1.331

=$445.89

Because the proposed investment only pays out $400, it is not as good as other alternatives we have. Another way of seeing the same thing is to notice that the present value of $400 in three years at 10 percent is:

you are considering a one year investment if you put up 1 250 you will get back 1 35 556318

Finding r for a Single Period Investment

You are considering a one year investment. If you put up $1,250, you will get back $1,350. What rate is this investment paying? First, in this single period case, the answer is fairly obvious. You are getting a total of $100 in addition to your $1,250. The implicit rate on this investment is thus $100/1,2508 percent. More formally, from the basic present value equation, the present value (the amount you must put up today) is $1,250. The future value (what the present value grows to) is $1,350. The time involved is one period, so we have:

$1,250=$1,350/(1+r )1

1+r =$1,350/1,250=1.08

r =8%

In this simple case, of course, there was no need to go through this calculation, but, as we describe next, it gets a little harder when there is more than one period.

if you can earn 20 percent per year will you make it at what rate will you just reac 556320

Saving for College

You estimate that you will need about $80,000 to send your child to college in eight years. You have about $35,000 now. If you can earn 20 percent per year, will you make it? At what rate will you just reach your goal? If you can earn 20 percent, the future value of your $35,000 in eight years will be:

FV=$35,000×1.208=$35,000×4.2998=$150,493.59

So, you will make it easily. The minimum rate is the unknown r in the following:

FV =$35,000×(1+r )8=$80,000

(1+r )8=$80,000/35,000=2.2857

Therefore, the future value factor is 2.2857. Looking at the row in Table A.1 that corresponds to eight periods, we see that our future value factor is roughly halfway between the ones shown for 10 percent (2.1436) and 12 percent (2.4760), so you will just reach your goal if you earn approximately 11 percent. To get the exact answer, we could use a financial calculator or we could solve for r :

(1+r )8=$80,000/35,000=2.2857

1+r=2.2857(1/8)=2.2857.125=1.1089

r =10.89%

compare the impact of changes in the sales price variable costs and fixed costs on t 559353

Impact on breakeven point if sale price, variable costs, and fixed costs change

Dependable Drivers Driving School charges $250 per student to prepare and administer written and driving tests. Variable costs of $100 per student include trainers’ wages, study materials, and gasoline. Annual fixed costs of $75,000 include the training facility and fleet of cars.

Requirements

1. For each of the following independent situations, calculate the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units by first referring to the original data provided:

a. Breakeven point with no change in information.

b. Decrease sales price to $220 per student.

c. Decrease variable costs to $50 per student.

d. Decrease fixed costs to $60,000.

2. Compare the impact of changes in the sales price, variable costs, and fixed costs on the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units.

compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of 5 687 500 is this p 559356

Break even sales; sales to earn a target operating income; contribution margin income statement

England Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 1,300 tickets at $60 per ticket. There are 150 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 65, each earning a net average of $340 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is a program printing cost of $8 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $728,000.

Requirements

1. Compute revenue and variable costs for each show.

2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of shows England Productions must perform each year to break even.

3. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $5,687,500. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning.

4. Prepare England Productions’ contribution margin income statement for 150 shows performed in 2012. Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars should kincaid undertake the 559357

Analyzing CVP relationships

Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $583,200 per year plus variable costs of $4.80 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.00.

Requirements

1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags Kincaid must sell each year to break even.

2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales Kincaid needs to earn $33,000 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.)

3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 72,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 70% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 21% and variable costs by $0.60 per flag. Compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.

how does this affect the breakeven point 559358

Computing breakeven sales and sales needed to earn a target operating income; graphing CVP relationships; sensitivity analysis

National Investor Group is opening an office in Portland. Fixed monthly costs are office rent ($8,500), depreciation on office furniture ($2,000), utilities ($2,100), special telephone lines ($1,100), a connection with an online brokerage service ($2,800), and the salary of a financial planner ($4,500). Variable costs include payments to the financial planner (8% of revenue), advertising (13% of revenue), supplies and postage (3% of revenue), and usage fees for the telephone lines and computerized brokerage service (6% of revenue).

Requirements

1. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute National’s breakeven revenue in dollars. If the average trade leads to $1,000 in revenue for National, how many trades must be made to break even?

2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the dollar revenues needed to earn a target monthly operating income of $12,600.

3. Graph National’s CVP relationships. Assume that an average trade leads to $1,000 in revenue for National. Show the breakeven point, the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, the total cost line, the operating loss area, the operating income area, and the sales in units (trades) and dollars when monthly operating income of $12,600 is earned.

4. Suppose that the average revenue National earns increases to $1,200 per trade. Compute the new breakeven point in trades. How does this affect the breakeven point?

compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of 4 128 000 is this p 559359

Breakeven sales; sales to earn a target operating income; contribution margin income statement

British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500.

Requirements

1. Compute revenue and variable costs for each show.

2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of shows British Productions must perform each year to break even.

3. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $4,128,000. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning.

4. Prepare British Productions’ contribution margin income statement for 155 shows performed in 2012. Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

prepare kincaid rsquo s contribution margin income statement for the year ended dece 559360

Analyzing CVP relationships

Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $664,000 per year plus variable costs of $4.50 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.50.

Requirements

1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags Kincaid must sell each year to break even.

2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales. Kincaid needs to earn $33,600 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.)

3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 75,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 60% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 24% and variable costs by $0.25 per flag. Compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

how does this affect the breakeven point 559361

Computing breakeven sales and sales needed to earn a target operating income; graphing CVP relationships; sensitivity analysis

Diversified Investor Group is opening an office in Boise. Fixed monthly costs are office rent ($8,100), depreciation on office furniture ($1,600), utilities ($2,500), special telephone lines ($1,200), a connection with an online brokerage service ($2,700), and the salary of a financial planner ($4,900). Variable costs include payments to the financial planner (8% of revenue), advertising (14% of revenue), supplies and postage (1% of revenue), and usage fees for the telephone lines and computerized brokerage service (7% of revenue).

Requirements

1. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute Diversified’s breakeven revenue in dollars. If the average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified, how many trades must be made to break even?

2. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the dollar revenues needed to earn a target monthly operating income of $10,500.

3. Graph Diversified’s CVP relationships. Assume that an average trade leads to $750 in revenue for Diversified. Show the breakeven point, the sales revenue line, the fixed cost line, the total cost line, the operating loss area, the operating income area, and the sales in units (trades) and dollars when monthly operating income of $10,500 is earned.

4. Suppose that the average revenue Diversified earns increases to $1,000 per trade. Compute the new breakeven point in trades. How does this affect the breakeven point?

work out the mhr for the following machine 559114

Work out the MHR for the following machine:

Cost of machine

Rs 95,000

Installation charges

Rs 10,000

Scrap value after 10 years

Rs 5,000

Working hours per month

200 hours

Lighting

Rs 150 per month

Rent

Rs 200 per month

Insurance premium

Rs 500 per year

Repair charges

50% of depreciation

Other standing charges

Rs 1,000 per month

Power, 10 units per hour at

Rs 10 per 100 units

calculate mhr from the following 559116

Calculate MHR from the following:

(a) Cost of machine

Rs 12,000

(b) Average repairs and maintenance charges per month

Rs 150

(c) Estimated scrap value

Rs 1,200

(d) Standing charges allocated to machine per month

Rs 50

(e) Effective working life of machine

10,000 hours

(f) Running time per month

166 hours

(g) Power used by machine

  1. units per hour at 19 paise per unit

calculate mhr from the following data 559119

Calculate MHR from the following data.

Cost of machine

Rs 58,000

Estimated scrap value

Rs 3,000

Estimated working life

20,000 hours

Estimated cost of maintenance during working life of machine

Rs 12,000

Power used

Re 1 per hour

Rent & Rates per month (10% should be charged to this machine)

Rs 1,500

Normal machine running hours during a month

180 hours

Standing charges per month

Rs 200

calculate the mhr for machine a from the following data 559120

Calculate the MHR for Machine A from the following data:

Cost of machine

Rs 1,600

Estimated scrap value

Rs 100

Effective working life

10,000 hours

Running time per 4 weekly period

160 hours

Average cost of repairs and maintenance charges per four weekly period

Rs 12.00

Standing charges allowed to Machine A per four weekly period

Rs 4.00

Power used by machine

4 units per hour at a cost of 0.35 paise per unit

calculate from the following data the mhr for machine a 559121

Calculate from the following data the MHR for Machine A.

Cost of machine

Rs 1,050

Estimated scrap value

Rs 50

Effective working life

20,000 hours

Running time in 4 weekly periods

150 hours

Weekly amount payable under maintenance agreement covering all repairs

Rs 7.50

Standing charges allocated to machine per 4 weekly periods

Rs 6.00

Power used by machine

5 units per hour at 6 paise per unit

the supervisor spend one third of his time for this machine 559122

Compute the MHR from the following.

Cost of the machine

Rs 2,00,000

Installation charges

Rs 20,000

Estimated scrap value after expiry of its life of 15 years

Rs 10,000

Rent for the shop

Rs 400 per month

General lighting for the shop

Rs 600 per month

Insurance premium for the machine

Rs 1,920 per annum

Repairs expenses

Rs 2,000 per annum

Power 10 units per hour

Rate of power per 100 units

Rs 40

Estimated working hours

2,000 per annum

Shop supervisor’s salary

Rs 1,200 per month

The machine occupies one fourth of the area of the shop.

The supervisor spend one third of his time for this machine.

a machine was purchased on 01 january 1998 the following relate to the machine 559123

A machine was purchased on 01 January 1998. The following relate to the machine.

Cost of the machine

Rs 40,000

Estimated life

15 years of 1,800 hours per year

Estimated scrap value

Rs 2,500

Estimated repairs for whole life

Rs 10,500

Power consumed per hour 15 units at

0.07 paise per unit

Insurance

Rs 75 per month

Consumable stores

Rs 25 per month

The machine is installed in a department whose monthly rent is Rs 500, and this machine occupies one fifth of the area. Total monthly lighting cost is Rs 40 for 10 light points, of which three relate to the machine. A supervisor with a monthly salary of Rs 500 spend one fourth of his time for this machine. Calculate the MHR.

work out the mhr for the following machine for january 1989 559124

Work out the MHR for the following machine for January 1989.

Cost of the machine

Rs 90,000

Freight and installation

Rs 10,000

Working life

10 years

Working hours

2,000 per annum

Repair charges

50% of depreciation

Power

10 units per hour at 10 paise per unit

Lubricating oil at

Rs 2 per day of 8 hours

Stores at

Rs 10 per day of 8 hours

Wages of operator at

Rs 4 per day

Hint: Ignore wages of the operator. If it is also included, the MHR will be comprehensive or composite, Machine Hour Rate will be 10 + 0.50 = Rs 10.50.

calculate mhr for machine no 7 which is one of seven machines in operation in a depa 559125

Calculate MHR for machine no. 7, which is one of seven machines in operation in a department of a factory.

(a) Cost of the machine no. 7: Rs 1,000

(b) Estimated scrap value at finish of working life (10 years): Rs 100.

(c) Normal running hours per year: 1,800 hours

(d) Machine no. 7 occupies one fifth of the floor space of the department; the rent, rates, lighting etc. of which amounted to Rs 350 per annum

(e) Charges for electric power supplied to machine no. 7: Rs 200 per annum

(f) Charges for oil, waste etc. supplied to machine no. 7: Rs 30 per annum

(g) Repair and maintenance machine estimated: Rs 360 per annum.

(h) Cost of supervision and other expenses applicable to Machine no. 7 estimated at Rs 150 per annum. Labour cost of operating the machine should be ignored in your calculations.

the machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop the supervisor spend o 559126

Calculate the MHR from the following.

Cost of the machine

Rs 80,000

Cost of installation

Rs 20,000

Scrap value after 10 years

Rs 20,000

Rent and rates per quarter for the shop

Rs 3,000

General lighting (per month)

Rs 200

Shop supervision per quarter

Rs 6,000

Insurance premium per annum

Rs 600

Estimated repairs per annum

Rs 1,000

Power

2 units per hour at Rs 50 per 100 units

Estimated working hours per annum

2,000 hours

The machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop. The supervisor spend one sixth of his time for supervising this machine. General lighting is to be apportioned on the basis of floor area.

the machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop the shop supervisor is 559127

Compute MHR from the following data.

Cost of the machine

Rs 1,00,000

Installation charges

Rs 10,000

Estimated scrap value after the expiry of its life (15 years)

Rs 5,000

Rent and rates for the shop per month

Rs 200

General lighting for the shop per month

Rs 300

Insurance premium for the machine per annum

Rs 960

Repairs and maintenance per annum

Rs 1,000

Power consumption 10 units per hour

Rate of power per 100 units

Rs 20

Estimated working hours per annum, which includes setting up time of 200 hours

2,200

Shop supervisor’s salary per month

Rs 600

The machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop. The shop supervisor is expected to spend one fifth of his time for supervising the machine.

the machine occupies one fourth of the total area the supervisor is expected to devo 559131

Compute the MHR from the following data:

Cost of machine

Rs 1,00,000

Installation charges

Rs 10,000

Estimated scrap value after the expiry of life (15 years)

Rs 5,000

Rent and rates for the shop per month

Rs 200

General lighting for the shop per month

Rs 300

Insurance premium for the machine per annum

Rs 960

Repair and maintenance per annum

Rs 1,000

Power consumption of 10 units per hour

Rate of power per 100 units

20

Estimated working hours per annum

2,200

This includes setting up time of 200 hours

Shop supervisor’s salary per month

600

The machine occupies one fourth of the total area. The supervisor is expected to devote one fifth of his time for supervising the machine.

Hint: Assume setting up time of 200 hours as normal. Compute the rate for productive hours: 2,200 200 = 2,000.

an engineering company gives you the following details about a new machine installed 559133

An engineering company gives you the following details about a new machine installed by them. Calculate the MHR for the machine.

(1) Cost of the machine

Rs 24,000,000

(2) Customs duty, insurance, freight etc.

Rs 11,00,000

(3) Installation expenses

Rs 3,00,000

(4) Cost of tools for the first 2 years

Rs 4,00,000

(5) Cost of machine room

Rs 3,00,000

(6) Cost of air conditioning machine room

Rs 2,00,000

(7) Rate of interest on loan to finance the purchase

12% per annum

(8) Salaries of operators

Rs 2,00,000 per annum

(9) Cost of electricity

Rs 11 per hour

(10) Consumption of stores

Rs 5,000 per annum

(11) Other expenses

Rs 5,000 per annum

(12) Rate of depreciation at 10% per annum on fixed assets

(13) Total working hours of machine

200 hours per month

(14) Loading and unloading time

10% of the machine time

the following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where ma 559134

The following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where manual labour is almost nil and work is done by means of five machines of exactly similar type.

(a) Rent and rates for the shop: Rs 4,000

(b) Depreciation on each machine: Rs 400

(c) Power consumed (as per metre) at 10 paise per unit for shop: Rs 3,00

(d) Electric charges for light in the shop: Rs 540

(e) Attendants: There are two attendants for the five machines, and they are each paid Rs 60 per month.

The machine uses 10 units of power per hour. Calculate the MHR of the machine.

Note: The MHR is a comprehensive MHR since attendants’ wages are also included.

from details furnished below compute a comprehensive mhr 559136

From details furnished below, compute a comprehensive MHR.

(1) Original purchase price of the machine (subject to depreciation at 10% per year on original cost)

Rs 21,600

(2) Normal working hours for the month (the machine works to only 75% of capacity)

200 hours

(3) Wages of machine man

Rs 4 per day (hours)

(4) Wages of a helper

Rs 2 per day (8 hours)

(5) Power consumption (Horse Power) is estimated at Rs 150 per month for the time worked

(6) Supervision charges apportioned for the machine

Rs 300 per month

(7) Electricity and lighting

Rs 75 per month

(8) Repairs and maintenance (machine) including consumable store per month

Rs 150

(9) Insurance of plant and building (apportioned)

Rs 1,000 per year

(10) Other general expenses overhead per annum

Rs 2,160

(11) Production bonus payable to workers: in terms of an award of basicwages and dearness allowance

(12) Workers are also paid a fixed dearness allowance of Rs 75 per month

(13) Add 10% of the basic wages and dearness allowance against leave wages and holidays with pay to arrive at a comprehensive labour cost for debit to production

the estimated life of machine is 10 years and the estimated scrap value is rs 20 000 559137

The following particulars relate to a machine:

Purchase price of machine

Rs 80,000

Installation expenses

Rs 20,000

Rent per quarter

Rs 3,000

General lighting for the whole area

Rs 200 per month

Supervisor’s salary

Rs 6,000 per quarter

Insurance premium for the machine

Rs 600 per annum

Estimated repair for the machine

Rs 1,000 per annum

Estimated consumable stores

Rs 800 per annum

Power: 2 units per hour at

Rs 50 per 100 units

The estimated life of machine is 10 years, and the estimated scrap value is Rs 20,000. The machine is expected to run 20,000 hours in its life. The machine occupies 25% of the total area. The supervisor devotes one sixth of his time for the machine.You are required to work out MHR.

the following particulars relate to a processing machine treating a typical materia 559138

The following particulars relate to a processing machine treating a typical material:

1. Cost of the machine

Rs 10,000

2. Estimated life

10 years

3. Scrap value

Rs 1,000

4. Yearly working time (50 weeks of 44 hours each)

2,200 hours

5. Machine maintenance

200 hours per annum

6. Setting up time estimated at 5% of total productive time and is regarded as productive time

7. Electricity is 16 units per hour at 10 paise per unit

8. Chemical required weekly

Rs 20

9. Maintenance cost per year

Rs 1,200

10. Two attendants control the operations of machine together with six other machines. Their combined weekly wages are

Rs 140

11. Departmental overhead allocated to this machine per annum

Rs 2,000

You are required to calculate the MHR.

a machine costs rs 90 000 and is deemed to have a scrap value of 5 at the end of its 559139

A machine costs Rs 90,000 and is deemed to have a scrap value of 5% at the end of its effective life of 19 years. Usually, the machine is expected to run for 2,400 hours per annum, but it is estimated that 150 hours will be lost for normal repairs and further 750 hours will be lost due to staggering. The other details in respect of the machine shop are as follows:

(a) Wages, bonus and provident fund contribution of each of the two operators (each operator is in charge of two machines): Rs 6,000 per annum

(b) Rent and rates of the shop: Rs 3,000 per annum

(c) General lighting for the shop: Rs 250 per month

(d) Insurance premium per machine: Rs 200 per quarter

(e) Cost of repairs and maintenance per machine: Rs 250 per month

(f) Shop supervisor’s salary: Rs 500 per month

(g) Power consumption of the machine per hour: 20 units at Rs 10 per 100 units

(h) Other factory overheads chargeable to the shop: Rs 4,000 per annum

There are four identical machines in the shop. The supervisor is expected to spend of his time for supervising the machine. Form the above particulars, compute comprehensive MHR.

the machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop the supervisor is expe 559140

Calculate the MHR from the following:

Cost of the machine

Rs 8,000

Cost of installation

Rs 2,000

Scrap value after 10 years

Rs 2,000

Rates and rent for a quarter for the shop

Rs 300

General lighting

Rs 20 per month

Shop supervisor’s salary

Rs 600 per quarter

Insurance premium for a machine

Rs 60 per annum

Estimated repair

Rs 100 per annum

Power: 2 units per hour

Rs 50 per 100 units

Estimated working hours

2,000 hours per annum

The machine occupies one fourth of the total area of the shop. The supervisor is expected to spend one sixth of his time for supervising the machine. General lighting expenses are to be apportioned on the basis of floor area.

a machine shop contains four newly purchased machines each occupying practically equ 559141

A machine shop contains four newly purchased machines each occupying practically equal amount of space and costing, respectively, A: Rs 20,000; B: Rs 25,000; C: Rs 30,000 and D: Rs 40,000. The following are the expenses per annum of the machine shop.

Rent

Rs 10,000

Rates and water

Rs 4,250

Light and heat

Rs 3,150

Power for A

Rs 5,100

Power for B

Rs 5,000

Power for C

Rs 12,000

Power for D

Rs 14,500

Administration

Rs 9,500

Running expenses works sundries

Rs 20,000

Prepare an MHR for each machine, assuming 45 hours in a week and 50 weeks a year, 80% utilisation and life of machine being 10 years without scrap value.

a machine shop has 8 identical drilling machines manned by 6 operators the machines 559084

A machine shop has 8 identical drilling machines manned by 6 operators. The machines cannot be worked without an operator wholly engaged on it. The original cost of all these 8 machines works out to be Rs 8,80,000. These particulars are furnished for a 6 month period

Normal available hours per month

208

Absenteeism (without pay) hours

18

Leave (with pay) hours

30

Wages for 8 hours

Rs 20

Production bonus estimated 15% on wages

Value of power consumed

Rs 8,050

Supervision and indirect labour

Rs 3,300

Lighting and electricity

Rs 1,200

These particulars are for a year

Repairs and maintenance including consumables of 3% on the value of a machine.

Insurance

Rs 50,000

Depreciation

10% on original cost

Other sundry works expenses

Rs 18,000

General management expenses allocated

Rs 60,000

You are required to work out comprehensive MHR for the machine shop.

calculate the mhr from the following particulars of machine no 33 559085

Calculate the MHR from the following particulars of machine no. 33

Rs

Cost of machine

10,000

Estimated scrap value

250

Estimated working life

15,000 hours

Working hours per year

2,000 hours

Cost of repairs per year

1,500

Wages of operator per month

150

Chemical per month

100

Overheads chargeable to this machine per month

200

Power per hour

20 units at 7 paise per unit

No. of operators looking after four machines

2 persons

Note: The MHR is a comprehensive MHR since operator’s wages are included.

a machine costs rs 1 00 000 and is deemed to have a scrap value of 5 at the end of i 559086

A machine costs Rs 1,00,000 and is deemed to have a scrap value of 5% at the end of its effective life (19 years). Ordinarily, the machine is expected to run 2,400 hours per annum, but it is estimated that 150 hours will be lost for normal repairs and maintenance and further 750 hours will be lost due to staggering. The other details in respect of the machine shop are as follows

Rs

Wages, bonus and provident fund, contribution of each of two operators (each operator is in charge of two machines)

6,000 per year

Rent and rates of the shop

4,500 per year

General lighting of the shop

250 per month

Insurance premium for the machine

200 per quarter

Cost of repairs and maintenance per machine

250 per month

Shop supervisor’s salary

500 per month

Power consumption of the machine hour 20 units

Rate of power per hundred units = Rs 10

Other factory overheads attributable to the shop = 5,000 per year

There are 4 identical machines in the shop. The supervisor is expected to devote one fifth of his time for supervising the machine. Compute a comprehensive MHR from the above details.

calculate the mhr for the recovery of overheads for a group of 3 machines from the f 559087

Calculate the MHR for the recovery of overheads for a group of 3 machines from the following data.

Original cost of 3 machines

Rs 60,000

Depreciation at 10% per annum (straight line method)

Repairs and maintenance cost average

Rs 16 per day

Power

30 paise per running hour per machine

Supervision for the group of machines

Rs 1,000 per month

Allocation of rent for 3 machines on a floor area basis

Rs 240 per month

Share of manufacturing overheads

Rs 400 per month for the group of machines

Normal working days

300 in a year

Normal operation

1 shift of 8 hours

Normal allowance for repairs, maintenance, change over, idle time etc.

20%

a company has four departments a b c which are production departments and d which is 559088

A company has four departments A, B, C, which are production departments, and D, which is a service department. Costs of the department D are apportioned on the basis of the wages paid. The actual costs for the year were as follows:

Rent

Rs 21,000

Repairs to plant

Rs 1,26,000

Depreciation of plant

Rs 9,450

Light and power

Rs 2,100

Supervision

Rs 31,500

Repairs to building

Rs 8,400

The following information about the departments is available and is used as a basis for the distribution of costs.

Departments

Area (square Metres)

No. of employees

Wages paid

Value of plant

A

1,500

20

126,000

3,15,000

B

1,100

55

84,000

1,89,000

C

900

10

63,000

1,26,000

D

500

5

42,000

These costs are apportioned to production departments.

a machine costing rs 20 000 is expected to run for 10 years at the end of which its 559089

A machine costing Rs 20,000 is expected to run for 10 years, at the end of which its scrap value is estimated to be Rs 2,000. Its installation charges are Rs 200

Repairs for 10 years’ life is estimated to be

Rs 1,800

The machine is expected to run for 2,190 hours in a year

Its power consumption would be 15 units per hour

Rs 5 per 100 units.

The machine occupies ¼th of the area of the department and has 2/10 points for lighting.

The foreman has to spend about one third of his time for this machine.

The rent for the department is

Rs 300 per month

The charges for lighting are

Rs 80 per month

The foreman is paid a salary of

Rs 960 per month

Find out the hourly rate, assuming insurance is at 1% per annum and expenses on oil etc. are Rs 9 per month.

the following figures have been extracted from the books of a manufacturing company 559090

The following figures have been extracted from the books of a manufacturing company. All jobs pass through the company’s two departments.

Working department (Rs)

Finishing department (Rs)

Materials used

9,000

400

Direct labour

4,500

1,200

Factory overheads

1,800

1,200

Direct labour hours

14,000

6,000

Machine hours

12,000

1,000

The following information relates to Job no. 17.

Working department (Rs)

Finishing department (Rs)

Materials used

120

10

Direct Labour

65

25

Direct Labour Hours

265

70

Machine Hours

255

25

You are required (a) to enumerate four methods of absorbing factory overheads by jobs showing the rates for each department under the methods quoted and (b) to prepare a statement showing the different cost results for job no. 17 under each of four methods referred to.

a department is having three machines the figures below indicate the departmental ex 559091

A department is having three machines. The figures below indicate the departmental expenses. Calculate the MHR in respect of three machines from the information given below

Rs

Depreciation of machinery

24,000

Depreciation of building

5,760

Repairs of machinery

8,000

Insurance of machinery

1,600

Indirect wages

12,000

Power

12,000

Lighting

1,600

Miscellaneous expenses

8,400

73,360

Machine 1

Machine 2

Machine 3

Direct wages (Rs)

2,400

4,800

4,800

Power (units)

30,000

10,000

20,000

No. of workers

4

8

8

Light points

8

24

48

Space (Sq. ft.)

400

800

800

Cost of machine (Rs)

6,00,000

2,40,000

3,60,000

Hours worked

200

300

300

lion enterprises undertakes three different jobs a b and c all of them require the u 559092

Lion enterprises undertakes three different jobs A, B and C. All of them require the use of both a special machine and a computer. The computer is hired and the hire charges work out to Rs 4,20,000 per annum. The expenses regarding the machine are estimated to be as follows:

Rent for the quarter

Rs 17,500

Depreciation per annum

Rs 2,00,000

Indirect charges per annum

Rs 1,50,000

During the first month of operation, the following details were taken from the job register.

No.of hour the machine was used

A

B

C

(a)without the use of computer

600

900

(b)with the use of computer

400

600

1

You are required to compute the MHR:

For the firm as a whole for the month when the computer was used and was not used.

For the individual jobs A, B and C.

a machine costs rs 90 000 and is deemed to have a scrap value at 5 at the end of its 559093

A machine costs Rs 90,000 and is deemed to have a scrap value at 5% at the end of its effective life of 19 years. Usually, the machine is expected to run for 2,400 hours per annum, but it is estimated that 150 hours will be lost for normal repairs and maintenance and further 750 hours will be lost due to staggering. The other details in respect of the machine shop are as follows:

(a) Wages, bonus and provident fund contribution of each of the two operators (each operator is in charge of two machines)

Rs 6,000

(b) Rent and rates of the shop

Rs 3,000 per annum

(c) General lighting of the shop

Rs 250 per month

(d) Insurance premium for the machine

200 per month

(e) Cost of repairs and maintenance per machine

250 per month

(f) Shop supervisor’s salary

500 per month

(g) Power consumption of the machine would be 20 units per hour, rate of power per 100 units

Rs 10

(h) Other factory overhead attributable to shop

Rs 4,000 per annum

There are four identical machines in the shop. The supervisor is expected to spend one fifth of his time for supervising machines. Compute a comprehensive MHR from the above details:

in a machine shop the mhr is worked out at the beginning of a year on the basis of 1 559094

In a machine shop, the MHR is worked out at the beginning of a year on the basis of 1 to 3 weeks of period, which equals to three calendar months. The following estimates for operating a machine are relevant:

Total working hours available per week: 48 hours

Operator’s wages (per month): 650

Supervisor’s salary (per month, common supervisor for three machines): 1,500

Written Down Value of machine (depreciation at 10% plus 2% on an average for extra shift allowance: 1,80,000

Repairs and maintenance (per annum): 16,000

Consumable stores (per annum): 30,000

Rent, rates and taxes (for the quarter apportioned): 5,000

Power consumed at 15 units per hour at 40 paise per unit. Power required for productive hours only. Setting up time is part at productive time, but no power is required for setting up jobs. The operators and supervisors are permanent. Repairs and maintenance and consumable stores are variable.

You are required to:

Work out the MHR

Work out the rate for quoting the outside party for utilizing the idle capacity in the machine shop, assuming a profit at 20% above variable cost.

rate of interest on term loan to finance the above capital expenditure 12 559095

Calculate the MHR.

  1. Cost of the machine: Rs 24 lakh
  2. Custom duty, insurance, freight etc. Rs 11 lakhs.
  3. Installation expenses: Rs 3 lakh
  4. Cost of tools adequate for 2 years only: Rs 4 lakh
  5. Cost of machine room: Rs 3 lakh
  6. Cost of air conditioning for machine room: Rs 2 lakh
  7. Rate of interest on term loan to finance the above capital expenditure: 12%
  8. Salaries etc. for operators and supervisory staff: Rs 2 lakh per year
  9. Cost of electricity: Rs 11 per hour
  10. Consumption of stores: Rs 5,000 per month
  11. Other expenses: Rs 5 lakh per annum
  12. Assumed rate of depreciation at 10% per annum on fixed assets
  13. Total working hours in the machine room: 200 hours per month.
  14. Loading and unloading time: 10% of machine time
  15. You can make suitable assumptions, if necessary, for the purpose of your computation

a machine was purchased on february 2000 for rs 5 lakh the total cost of all machine 559096

A machine was purchased on February 2000 for Rs 5 lakh. The total cost of all machinery inclusive of the new machine was Rs 75 lakh. The further particulars of the machine are available as follows.

Expected life of the machine: 10 years

Scrap value at the end of the 10 years: Rs 5,000

Repairs and maintenance for the machine during the year: Rs 2,000

Expected number of working hours of the machine per year: 4,000 hours

Insurance premium annually for the machines: Rs 4,500

Electricity consumption for the machine per hour at 75 paise per unit: 25 units

Area occupied by one machine: 100 sq. ft.

Area occupied by other machine: 1,500 sq. ft.

Rent per month of the department: Rs 800

Lighting charges for 20 points for the whole department, out of which three points are for the machine: Rs 120 per month

Compute the MHR for the two machines on the basis of the data given above.

calculate the mhr from the following particulars of machine no 33 559097

Calculate the MHR from the following particulars of machine no. 33.

Cost of machine

Rs 10,000

Estimated scrap value

Rs 250

Estimated working life

15,000 hours

Working hours per year

2,000 hours

Cost of repairs per year

Rs 1,500

Wages of operator per month

Rs 150

Chemical per month

Rs 100

Overheads chargeable to this machine per month

Rs 200

Power per hour

20 units at 7 paise per unit

No. of operators looking after four machines

2 persons

Note: The MHR is a comprehensive MHR since operator’s wages are included.

find out the hourly rate assuming insurance is at 1 per annum and expenses on oil et 559098

A machine costing Rs 20,000 is expected to run for 10 years at the end of which its scrap value is estimated to be Rs 2,000. Its installation charges are Rs 200.

Repairs for 10 years’ life is estimated to be

Rs 1,800

The machine is expected to run for 2,190 hours in a year

Its power consumption would be 15 units per hour

Rs 5 per 100 units.

The machine occupies one fourth of the area of the department and has 2/10 points for lighting.

The foreman has to spend about one third of his time for this machine.

The rent for the department is

Rs 300 per month

The charges for lighting are

Rs 80 per month

The foreman is paid a salary of

Rs 960 per month

Find out the hourly rate, assuming insurance is at 1% per annum and expenses on oil etc. are Rs 9 per month.

calculate the mhr for the recovery of overheads for a group of 3 machines from the f 559099

Calculate the MHR for the recovery of overheads for a group of 3 machines from the following data.

Original cost of 3 machines

Rs 60,000

Depreciation at 10% per annum (straight line method)

Repairs and maintenance cost average

Rs 20 per day

Power

30 paise per running hour per machine

Supervision for the group of machines

Rs 1,200 per month

Allocation of rent for 3 machines on a floor area basis

Rs 160 per month

Share of manufacturing overheads

Rs 300 per month for the group of machines

Normal working days

300 in a year

Normal operation

1 shift of 8 hours

Normal allowance for repairs, maintenance, change over, idle time etc.

10%

the following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where ma 559100

The following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where manual labour is almost nil and work is done by means of five machines of exactly same type of specification:

(i) Rent and rates (proportional to the floor space) for the shop

Rs 6,000

(ii) Depreciation on each machine

Rs 1,000

(iii) Repairs and maintenance for the five machines

Rs 1,200

(iv) Power consumed (as per meter) at 5 paise per unit for the shop

Rs 3,000

(v) Electric charges for light in the shop

Rs 600

(vi) Attendants: There are two attendants for the five machines, and they are each paid Rs 80 per month.

(vii) Supervision: For the five machines in the shop, there is one supervisor whose emoluments are Rs 300 per month.

(viii) Sundry supplies for the shop is Rs 500.

(ix) Hire purchase instalments payable for the machine (including Rs 300 as interest) is Rs 1,200.

The machine uses 10 units of power per hour. Calculate the MHR for the machine for the year.

when actual overheads are more than absorbed overheads it is known as over absorptio 559101

State whether the following statements are true or false:

  1. When actual overheads are more than absorbed overheads, it is known as over absorption.
  2. A blanket overhead rate is a single overhead rate computed for the entire factory.
  3. MHR is separately computed for each machine.
  4. Under absorption of overhead results in understatement of cost.
  5. Under absorption of overheads means that actual overheads are more than absorbed overheads.
  6. Basis of apportionment of store’s service expenses is the value of the material consumed.
  7. Basis of apportionment of welfare department expenses is the number of employees.
  8. Basis of apportionment of Crèche expense is the number of male employees.
  9. Rent is apportioned based on the floor area.
  10. For calculating depreciation, scrap value is irrelevant.

calculate the mhr for machine a from the following data 559112

Calculate the MHR for Machine A from the following data:

Cost of machine

Rs 16,000

Estimated scrap value

Rs 1,000

Effective working life

10,000 hours

Running time per 4 weekly period

160 hours

Average cost of repairs and maintenance per 4 weekly period

Rs 120

Standing charges allocated to Machine A per 4 weekly period

Rs 40

Power used by the machine

4 units per hour at a cost of 5 paise per unit

calculate the mhr from the following 559113

Calculate the MHR from the following:

(1) Cost of the machine

Rs 19,200

(2) Estimated scrap value

Rs 1,200

(3) Average repairs and maintenance

Rs 150 p.m.

(4) Standing charges allocated

Rs 50 p.m.

(5) Effective working life of the machine

10,000 hours

(6) Running time per month

166 hours

(7) Power used by the machine; 5 units per hour at 20 paise per unit

a company reapportions the costs incurred by its two service centres d and e to its 559063

A company reapportions the costs incurred by its two service centres D and E to its three production centres A, B and C. The following are the overhead costs, which have been allocated and apportioned to the five cost center’s:

Rs

Machining

4,00,000

Finishing

2,00,000

Assembling

1,00,000

Material handling

1,00,000

Inspection

50,000

Estimates of the benefits received by each cost center are as follows:

A(%)

B(%)

C(%)

D(%)

E(%)

Material handling

30

25

35

10

Inspection

20

30

45

5

You are required to calculate the charge for overhead to each of the three production cost centres, including the amounts reapportioned from the two service centres using the continuous allotment or repeated distribution method.

you are supplied the following information and required to prepare secondary distrib 559064

You are supplied the following information and required to prepare secondary distribution summary under the trial and error method. Overhead as per primary distribution:

Rs

Production departments

A

9,500

B

15,000

C

7,000

Service departments

X

12,000

Y

10,000

The service department expenses are allocated as follows:

A

B

C

X

X

30%

20%

30%

Y

40%

30%

20%

10%

an analysis of overhead costs is as follows 559065

An analysis of overhead costs is as follows:

Service departments:

Stores—Rs 26,400 Costing—Rs 28,200

Production departments:

A—Rs 27,000

B—Rs 24,000

Service rendered by the service department is

Stores

Costing

A

B

Stores

15%

55%

30%

Costing

40%

25%

35%

Prepare the overhead distribution summary under the simultaneous equations method.

vasanth engineering amp co has three production departments and two service centres 559066

Vasanth Engineering & Co. has three production departments and two service centres. The overhead analysis gives the following overhead costs:

Rs

Production centres

A

1,380

B

2,190

C

1,290

Service departments

D

630

E

510

The overheads of service departments are apportioned as follows:

A

B

C

D

E

D

30%

40%

20%

10%

E

10%

20%

50%

20%

You are required to prepare secondary distribution summary under the trial and error method.

a manufacturing company has three production departments and two service departments 559068

A manufacturing company has three production departments and two service departments. The departmental expenses are as follows:

Production departments

Service departments

A(Rs)

B(Rs)

C(Rs)

X(Rs)

Z(Rs)

Total(Rs)

Expences

10000

8000

1200

2000

3000

3500

The service department expenses are charged on the following percentage basis:

Production departments

service departments

A

B

C

X

Z

X

25%

20%

30%

25%

Y

15%

30%

25%

30%

Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of overheads of the two service departments to the production departments.

Hint: The repeated distribution method is used in the absence of specific instruction.

from the following information work out the production hour rate of recovery of over 559069

From the following information, work out the production hour rate of recovery of overheads in departments A, B and C:

Particulars

Total

Production departments

Service departments

A

B

C

D

E

Rent (Rs)

1,000

200

400

150

150

100

Electricity

200

50

80

30

20

20

Fire Insurance (Rs)

400

80

160

60

60

40

Plant depreciation (Rs)

4,000

1,000

1,500

1,000

300

200

Transport (Rs)

400

50

50

50

100

150

Estimated working hours

1,000

2,500

1,800

The expenses of service departments D and E are apportioned as follows:

A

B

C

D

E

D

30%

40%

20%

10%

E

10%

20%

SC%

20%

indicate the basis you would adopt for apportionment of the following items of overh 559070

  1. Indicate the basis you would adopt for apportionment of the following items of overhead expenses to different departments:
    1. Factory rent
    2. Factory lighting
    3. Power
    4. Depreciation of plant and machinery
    5. Insurance of plant and machinery, and fire insurance of stock
    6. Welfare expenses
    7. Material handling charges
    8. Indirect material
    9. Indirect wages
    10. Supervision
    11. Repairs to plant
    12. Insurance of building
    13. Staff recreation
    14. Canteen expenses
    15. Creche expenses
    16. Employer’s contribution to ESI
    17. Employer’s contribution to PF
    18. Stores expenses
    19. Sundry expenses

kumaresh ltd has three production departments a b and c and two service departments 559071

Kumaresh Ltd. has three production departments A, B and C and two service departments D and E. The following figures are extracted from the records of the company:

Rs

Rent and rates

5,000

Indirect wages

1,500

Depreciation of machinery

10,000

General lighting

600

Power

1,500

Sundries

10,000

The following further details are available:

Total

A

Floor space (square feet)

10,000

2,000

2,500

3,000

2,00

500

Light points

60

10

15

20

10

5

Direct wages (Rs)

10,000

3,000

2,000

3,000

1,500

500

HP of machines

150

60

30

50

10

Value of machinery (Rs)

2,50,000

60,000

80,000

1,00,000

5,000

5,000

Apportion the cost to various departments on the most equitable basis by preparing a primary departmental distribution summary.

Note: Direct wages of service departments are also included in the distribution summary since they should also be reapportioned to the production departments and then finally be absorbed by the output. Ignoring the direct wages of service departments will result in unabsorbed expenses.

calculate the overheads allocated to production departments a and b from the followi 559072

Calculate the overheads allocated to production departments A and B from the following: There are two service departments X and Y. X renders service to A and B in the ratio 3:2 and Y renders service to A and B in the ratio 9:1. Overhead as per primary overhead distribution is A—Rs 49,800; B—Rs 29,600; X—Rs 15,600; Y—Rs 10,800.

Production departments

Service departments

A

B

C

X

Y

Direct wages (Rs)

7,000

6,000

5,000

1,000

1,000

Direct materials (Rs)

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

Employees (number)

200

150

150

50

50

Electricity (units)

8,000

6,000

6,000

2,000

3,000

Light points (number)

10

15

15

Asset value (Rs)

50,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

10,000

Area occupied (square yards)

800

600

600

200

200

The expenses (in rupees) for the month were as follows:

Stores overheads (Rs)

400

Motive power (Rs)

1,500

Lighting (Rs)

200

Labour welfare (Rs)

3,000

Depreciation (Rs)

6,000

Repairs and maintenance (Rs)

1,200

General overheads (Rs)

1,000

Rent and rates (Rs)

600

Apportion the expenses of X in the ratio 4:3:3 and those of department Y in the proportion of direct wages to departments A, B and C, respectively.

Total

— 18,400

5,190

3,520

2,850

3,650

3,190

Department X4:3:3

— —

1,460

1,095

1,095

( 3,650)

Department Y76:5

— —

1,241

1,063

886

( 3,190)

18,400

7,891

5,678

4,831

a company has four departments the actual costs for the period are given as follows 559073

A company has four departments. The actual costs for the period are given as follows. Apportion the costs to the various departments by the most equitable method.

Rs

Rent

2,000

Repairs

1,200

Depreciation

900

Light

200

Supervision

3,000

Employer’s liability insurance

300

Insurance

1,000

Power

1,800

The following data are also available for the four departments:

Data

A

B

C

D

Area (square feet)

150

110

90

50

Number of workers

24

16

12

8

Total wages (Rs)

8,000

6,000

4,000

2,000

Value of plant (Rs)

24,000

18,000

12,000

6,000

Value of stock (Rs)

15,000

9,000

6,000

Note: Insurance has been apportioned on the basis of the value of stock, under the assumption that it is only with regard to stock. Lighting has been distributed on the basis of area as no other relevant data are available as to the number of light points.

calculate the overheads that can be allocated to the production departments a and b 559074

Calculate the overheads that can be allocated to the production departments A and B. There are also two service departments X and Y. X renders service worth Rs 12,000 to Y and the balance to A and B in the ratio 3:2. Y renders service to A and B in the ratio 9:1.

A

B

X

Y

Floor area (square feet)

5,000

4,000

1,000

2,000

Assets (In lakh rupees)

10

5

3

1

HP of machines

1,000

500

400

100

Number of workers

100

50

50

25

Light points (number)

50

30

20

20

The expenses include the following:

Rs

Depreciation

1,90,000

Rent, rates, etc.

36,000

Insurance

15,200

Power

20,000

Canteen expenses

10,800

Electricity

4,800

Total (Rs)

2,76,800

1,39,800

74,600

42,600

19,800

Department X

As given

18,360

12,240

—42,600

12,000

Department Y

As given

28,620

3,180

—31,800

2,76,800

1,84780

90,020

amit company has five departments of which p n r and s are producing departments and 559075

Amit Company has five departments of which P, N, R and S are producing departments and T is a service department. The actual costs for a period are as follows:

Rs

Repairs

2,000

Rent

2,500

Depreciation

1,200

Supervision

4,000

Insurance

1,500

Employer’s liability of employees’ insurance

600

Light

1,800

The following data are also available for the five departments:

Department P

Department N

Department R

Department S

Department T

Area (square feet)

140

120

110

90

40

Number of workers

25

20

10

10

5

Total wages (Rs)

10,000

8,000

5,000

5,000

2,000

Value of plant (Rs)

20,000

18,000

16,000

10,000

6,000

Value of stock (Rs)

15,000

10,000

5,000

2,000

Apportion the costs to the various departments on an equitable basis.

Total

P

N

R

S

T

13600

4451

3626

2582

1997

944

a factory has three service departments l m and n and two production departments x a 559076

A factory has three service departments L, M and N and two production departments X and Y. The following are the expenses allocated and apportioned to the departments as per the primary distribution summary:

L

M

N

X

Y

Rs 100,00

Rs 8,000

Rs 12,000

Rs 30,000

Rs 40,000

The following additional information is also available on the basis of a detailed analysis:

Service departments

Production departments

L

M

N

X

Y

L’s service used

20%

30%

30%

20%

M’s service used

40%

30%

30%

NicSPIVICP 115Pd

60%

40%

X (Rs)

30,000

3,000

3,000

11,400

47,400

Y (Rs)

40,000

2,000

3,000

7,600

52,600

Total overhead (Rs)

1,00,000

1,00,000

Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of service department overheads under the step method.

a company is having three production departments x y and z and two service departmen 559077

A company is having three production departments, X, Y and Z, and two service departments, boiler house and pump room. The boiler house depends upon the pump room for supply of water and pump room in its turn is dependent on the boiler house for supply of steam power for driving the pump. The expenses incurred by the production departments are X—Rs 6,00,000; Y—Rs 5,25,000; and Z—Rs 3,75,000. The expenses for the boiler house are Rs 1,75,500 and the pump room are Rs 2,25,000. Expenses of the boiler house and the pump room are apportioned to the production departments on the following basis:

Departments

X

Y

Z

Boller house

pump room

Expenses of boller house

20%

40%

30%

10%

Expenses of pump room

40%

20%

20%

20%

Show clearly how the expenses of boiler house and pump room would be apportioned to X, Y and Z departments by following the simultaneous equations method.

a company has three production departments and two service departments their respect 559078

A company has three production departments and two service departments; their respective expenditures are as follows:

Production departments

Service departments

A—Rs 800

X—Rs 234

B—Rs 700

C—Rs 500

Y—Rs 300

Service departments provide service in the following manner to various departments:

Service departments

A

B

C

X

Y

X

20%

40%

30%

10%

Y

40%

20%

20%

20%

Show the distribution of service department overheads under the simultaneous equation method.

a manufacturing concern has three production departments and two service departments 559079

A manufacturing concern has three production departments and two service departments. In July 1990, the departmental expenses were as follows:

Rs

Production departments

A

16,000

B

13,000

C

14,000

Service departments

X

4,000

Y

6,000

The expenses of service departments are charged on a percentage basis, viz,

A

B

C

X

Y

Expenses of department E

20%

25%

35%

20%

Expenses of department F

25%

25%

40%

10%

Prepare a statement of secondary distribution under repeated distribution method.

calculate the mhr for machine no 33 from the following particulars 559080

Calculate the MHR for machine no. 33 from the following particulars.

Cost of machine

Rs 10,000

Estimated scrap value

Rs 250

Estimated working life

15,000 hours

Working hours per year

2,000 hours

Cost of repairs per year

Rs 1,500

Wages of operator per month

Rs 150

Chemical per month

100

Overheads chargeable to this machine per month

Rs 200

Power per hour

20 units at 7 paise per unit

No. of operators looking after 4 machine

2 persons

Note: The MHR is a comprehensive MHR since operator’s wages are included.

a machine costing rs 20 000 is expected to run for 10 years at the end of 10 years i 559081

A machine costing Rs 20,000 is expected to run for 10 years. At the end of 10 years, its scrap value is estimated to be Rs 2,000. Its installation charges are Rs 200.

Estimated cost of repairs for a 10 year life

Rs 1,800

No. of hours the machine is expected to run in a year

2,190

Its power consumption would be 15 units per hour

Rs 5 per 100 units

The machine occupies ¼th of the area of the department and has 2/10 points for lighting.

The foreman has to spend about one third of his time to this machine.

The rent for the department

Rs 300 per month

The charges for lighting

Rs 80 per month

Salary paid for the foreman

Rs 960 per month

Find out the hourly rate, assuming insurance is at 1% per annum and expenses on oil etc. are Rs 9 per month.

calculate the mhr for the recovery of overheads for a group of three machines from t 559082

Calculate the MHR for the recovery of overheads for a group of three machines from the following data.

Original cost of three machines

Rs 60,000

Depreciation at 10% per annum (straight line method)

Repairs and average maintenance cost

Rs 20 per day

Power

30 paise per running hour per machine

Supervision for the group of machines

Rs 1,200 per month

Allocation of rent for three machines on a floor area basis

Rs 160 per month

Share of manufacturing overheads

Rs 300 per month for the group of machines

No. of working days

300 in a year

Normal operation

1 shift of 8 hours

Normal allowance for repairs, maintenance, change over, idle time etc.

10%

Effective running hours per annum (300 × 8 × 90/100)

2,160

the following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where ma 559083

The following annual charges are incurred in respect of a machine in a shop where manual labour is almost nil and work is done by means of five machines of exactly same type of specification.

Rent and rates (proportional to the floor space) for the shop

Rs 6,000

Depreciation on each machine

1,000

Repairs and maintenance for the five machines

1,200

Power consumed (as per meter) at 5 paise per unit for the shop

Rs 3,000

Electric charges for lights used in the shop

Rs 600

Attendants: There are two attendants for the five machines and they are each paid Rs 80 per month

Supervision: For the five machines in the shop there is one supervisor whose emoluments are Rs 300 per month

Sundry supplies for the shop

Rs 500

Hire purchase installments payable for the machine (including Rs 300 as interest)

Rs 1,200

The machine uses 10 units of power per hour. Calculate the MHR for the machine for the year.

calculate the overheads applicable to production departments a and b there are also 559028

Calculate the overheads applicable to production departments A and B. There are also two service departments X and Y. X renders services worth Rs 12,000 to Y and the balance to A and B in the ratio 3:2. Y renders services to A and B in the ratio 9:1.

Floor space (square feet)

5000

4000

1000

2000

Assets(in lakh rupees)

10

5

3

1

HP of machine

1000

500

400

100

Number of workers

100

50

50

25

Light and fan points (number)

50

30

20

20

Expenses and charges are

Depreciation

Rs 190000

Power

Rs 20000

Rent and rates

Rs 36000

Canteen

Rs 10800

Insurance

Rs 15200

Electricity

Rs 4800

a company has four departments the actual costs for a period are given here apportio 559029

A company has four departments. The actual costs for a period are given here. Apportion the costs to various departments using the most equitable method.

Rs

Rent

2,000

Repairs

1,200

Depreciation

900

Light

200

Supervision

3,000

Employer’s liability insurance

300

Insurance

1,000

Power

1,800

The following data are also available for four departments:

Data

A

B

C

D

Area (squre feet)

150

110

90

50

Number of workers

24

16

12

8

Total wages(Rs)

8000

6000

4000

2000

Value of plant(Rs)

24000

18000

12000

6000

Value of stock(Rs)

15000

9000

6000

win ltd has three production departments a b and c and two service departments d and 559032

Win Ltd. has three production departments (A, B and C) and two service departments (D and E). From the following figures extracted from the records of the company, calculate the overhead rate per labour hour:

Indirect material

7,500

Indirect wages

5,000

Depreciation on machinery

12,500

Depreciation on building

2,500

Rent, rates and taxes

5,000

Electric power for machinery

7,500

Electric power for lighting

2,500

General expenses

7,500

Nuns

Total

A

B

C

D

E

Direct material 04)

60,000

20.000

10,000

19,000

6000

5,000

Direct wages IRS)

40.000

15.000

15,000

4,000

2000

1.000

Value of machinery (Rs)

2,50,000

60.000

1,00,000

40,000

25.000

25,000

Floor area more feet

50,000

15,000

10,000

10,000

5.000

10,030

HP of machines

150

50

60

30

5

5

Numbecol light plots

50

15

10

10

5

10

Labour hours

15,000

5,000

5,000

2.000

1.000

2,000

A technical assessment of the apportionment of expenses of service departments is as follows:

A

B

C

D

E

D

40%

20%

30%

10%

F

30%

30%

40%

a factory is having three production departments a b and c and two service departmen 559034

A factory is having three production departments A, B and C and two service departments D and E. Department D has to depend upon E for the supply of water and E in its turn is dependent on D for the supply of power. The expenses incurred by the production departments during a period are A—Rs 8,00,000; B—Rs 7,00,000; and C—Rs 5,00,000. The expenses for D are Rs 2,34,000 and E are Rs 3,00,000. The expenses of departments D and E are apportioned to the production departments on the following basis:

Basis

A

B

C

D

E

Expenses at D

20%

40%

30%

10%

Expenses at E

40%

20%

20%

20%

Show clearly how the expenses of D and E would be apportioned to departments A, B and C using algebraic equations.

calculate the overhead rate per rate of direct labour hour of production departments 559035

A company has two production departments and two service departments. The following data relates to a particular period:

Particulars

Production departments

Service departments

P1

P2

Direct material (Rs)

40.000

20,000

5,000

10,000

Direct wages (Rs)

47.5•0

25,000

101000

5,000

Overheads (Rs)

40,000

25,000

151000

10,000

Power requirement at normal capacity operations (KWH)

20,000

35,000

12,500

17,500

Actual power consumption during the period (KWH)

13,000

23,000

10,250

10,000

The power requirements of these departments are met by a power generation plant. The said plant incurred an expenditure, which is not included in the aforementioned information, of Rs 1,21,875 out of which a sum of Rs 84,375 was variable and the rest fixed. After apportionment of power generation plant costs to the four departments, the service department overheads must be redistributed on the following bases:

Department

P1

P2

S1

S2

S1

50%

40%

10%

S2

60%

20%

20%

You are required to perform the following:

Apportion the power generation plant costs to the four departments.

Re apportion the costs of service departments to production departments.

Calculate the overhead rate per rate of direct labour hour of production departments, given that the direct wages rates of P1 and P2 are Rs 5 and Rs 4 per hour, respectively.

the factory of a large manufacturing company has several departments indicate the ba 559047

The factory of a large manufacturing company has several departments. Indicate the bases you would adopt for apportionment of the following overhead expenses to various departments:

(1) Indirect material

(2) Indirect wages

(3) Depreciation

(4) Electricity for power purpose

(5) Lighting and heating

(6) Creche expenses

(7) Material handling charges

(8) Recreation expenses

(9) Welfare department’s expenses

(10) Stores service

(11) Fire insurance of stock

(12) Timekeeping expenses

a producing concern krishna is divided into four departments a b and c are productio 559048

A producing concern Krishna is divided into four departments. A, B and C are production departments and D is a service department. The actual expenses for a period are as follows:

Rs

Rs

Rent

10,000

Repairs to plant

6,000

Depreciation to plant

4,500

Lighting expenses

1,200

Supervisory expenses

15,000

Fire insurance (on stock)

5,000

Power

9,000

The following information is available for the four departments:

Departments

Particulars

A

Area (square feet)

1,500

1,100

900

500

HP of plant (horse power)

20

15

10

5

Number of employees

200

150

100

SO

Total wages (Rs)

60,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

Value of plant (Rs)

2,40,000

1,80,000

1,20,000

60,000

Value of stock (Rs)

1,50,000

90,000

60,000

Apportion the costs to various departments on the most equitable basis.

apportion the overheads among the departments a b c and d 559049

Apportion the overheads among the departments A, B, C and D.

Rs

Rs

Works manager’s salary

4,000

Contribution to PF

9,000

Plant maintenance

4,000

Canteen expenses

12,000

Power

21,000

Depreciation

20,000

Rent

6,000

Additional information:

RS

RS

Works manager’s salary

4,000

Power

21,000

Contribution to PF

9,000

Depreciation

20,000

Plant maintenance

4,000

Rent

6,000

Canteen expenses

12,000

the following data were obtained from the books of a company for the half year endin 559050

The following data were obtained from the books of a company for the half year ending on 30 June 1995:

Particulars

Production departments

Service departments

A

B

C

X

Y

Direct wages (Rs)

7,000

6,000

5,000

1,000

1,000

Direct material (RS)

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

Employees number

200

150

150

50

50

Ekarkity (KWH)

8,000

6,000

4000

2,000

3,000

Light points number

10

15

15

5

5

Assets value (Rs)

50,030

30,000

20,000

10,000

10,000

Area occupied (square metres)

800

600

600

200

200

The expenses for six months were: stores overhead—Rs 400; motive power—Rs 1,500; electric light—Rs 200; labour welfare—Rs 3,000; depreciation—Rs 6,000; repairs and maintenance—Rs 1,200; general overhead—Rs 10,000; rent and taxes—Rs 600. Prepare a primary distribution table for the departments.

calculate the overheads allocated to production departments a and b there are also t 559051

Calculate the overheads allocated to production departments A and B. There are also two service departments X and Y. X renders service worth Rs 12,000 to Y and the balance to A and B in the ratio 3:2. Y renders service to A and B in the ratio 9:1:

Particulars

A

B

X

Y

Floor space (Square feet)

5,000

4,000

1,000

2,000

Assets (In lakh rupees)

10

5

3

1

HP of machines

1,000

SOO

400

100

Number of workers

10

50

50

25

Light and fan points

50

30

20

20

Expenses and charges are as follows:

Rs

Rs

Depreciation

1,90,000

Rent, rates and taxes

36,000

Insurance

15,200

Power

20,000

Canteen expenses

10,800

Electricity

4,800

modern company has three production departments a b and c and two service department 559052

Modern company has three production departments A, B and C and two service departments D and E. The following is an abstract from the records of the company for the month of March 1993:

Rs

Rs

Rent and rates

20,000

Indirect wages

6,000

Depreciation on machinery

40,000

Power

6,000

General lighting

2,400

Sundries

40,000

The following further details are available:

Particulars

Total

A

B

C

0

E

Floor space (square feet)

20,00

4,000

5,000

6,000

4,000

1,000

HP of machines

300

120

60

100

20

Light points

120

20

10

40

20

10

Direct wages (AS)

20,000

6,000

4,000

4000

3,000

1,000

Value of machinery dis)

5,00,000

1,20,000

1,60,000

2,00,000

10,000

10000

Apportion the expenses to the departments on a suitable basis.

tamil nadu co ltd is a manufacturing company having three production departments a b 559053

Tamil Nadu Co. Ltd. is a manufacturing company having three production departments, A, B and C, and two service departments X and Y. The following is the budget for December 1985:

Total

A

B

C

X

Y

Direct material(Rs)

1,000

2,000

4,000

2,000

1,000

Direct wages (Rs)

5,000

2,000

8,000

1,000

2,000

Factory rent (Rs)

4,000

Power

2,500

Depredation (RS)

1,000

Other overheads

9,000

Additional information:

Area (square feet)

500

250

500

250

SOO

Capital value of assets
(In lakh rupees)

20

40

20

10

10

Machine hours

1,000

2,000

4000

1,000

1,000

HP of machine

50

40

20

15

25

A technical assessment for the apportionment of expenses of service departments is as follows:

Service department X

45%

15%

30%

10%

Service department Y

60%

35%

5%

You are required to prepare the following:

(a) Statement showing distribution of overheads to various departments.

janak ltd has two production departments m and n and two service departments r and s 559054

Janak Ltd. has two production departments M and N and two service departments R and S. After primary distribution, the following were the departmental overheads for the month of March 1998:

Rs

Production departments:

M

50,000

N

40,000

Service departments:

R

12,000

S

16,000

A detailed survey revealed that the services of department R are utilized by the production departments in the ratio 7:3. The services of S were used by M and N equally. Ascertain the total overhead of departments M and N by preparing a secondary distribution summary.

Using the repeated distribution method, solve the following problem:

(a) Service department A—expenses are to be allocated in the ratio 30:30:20:20 to production departments X, Y and Z and the service department B.

(b) Service department B—expenses are to be allocated in the ratio 50:20:20:10 to production departments X, Y and Z and the service department A.

(c) Expenses incurred:

Production departments

X

Rs 50,000

Y

Rs 20,000

Z

Rs 25,000

Service departments

A

Rs 5,000

B

Rs 8,000

ph ltd is a manufacturing company having three production departments a b and c and 559055

PH Ltd. is a manufacturing company having three production departments A, B and C and two service departments E and Y. The following is the budget for December 1994:

A (Rs)

B (Rs)

C (Rs)

X (Rs)

Y (Rs)

Direct materials

1,000

2,000

4,000

2,000

1,000

Direct wages Factory

5,000

2,000

8,000

1,000

2,000

rent

4,000

Power

2,500

Depreciation

1,000

Other overheads

9,000

Additional information:

A

B

C

X

Area (square feet)

500

250

500

250

500

Capital value of asset (In lakh rupees)

20

40

20

10

10

Machine hours

1,000

2,000

4,000

1,000

1,000

HP of machines

50

80

80

15

25

A technical assessment of the apportionment of expenses of service apartments is as follows:

A

B

C

X

Y

Service departments X

45%

15%

30%

10%

60%

35%

5%

You are required to prepare

  1. (i) A statement showing the distribution of overheads to various departments.
  2. (ii) A statement showing the redistribution of expenses of service departments to production departments.

modern machines ltd has three production departments a b and c and two service depar 559056

Modern Machines Ltd. has three production departments (A, B and C) and two service departments (D and E). From the following figures extracted from the records of the company, calculate the overhead rate per labour hour:

Rs

Indirect materials

15,000

Indirect wages

10,000

Depreciation on machinery

25,000

Depreciation on buildings

5,000

Rent, rates and taxes

10,000

Electric power for machinery

15,000

Electric power for lighting

500

General expenses

15,000

95,500

Items

Total

A

B

C

D

E

Direct materials (Rs)

60,000

20,000

10,000

19,000

6,000

5,000

Direct wages (Rs)

40,000

15,000

15,000

4,000

2,000

4,000

Value of machinery (Rs)

2,50,000

60,000

1,00,000

40,000

25,000

25,000

Floor area (square feet)

50,000

15,000

10,000

10,000

5,000

10,000

HP of machines

150

50

60

30

5

5

Number of light points

50

15

10

10

5

10

Labour hours

15,000

5,000

5,000

2,000

1,000

2,000

The expenses of service departments D and E are to be apportioned as follows:

A

B

C

D

E

D

40%

20%

30%

10%

E

30%

30%

40%

ph ltd is a manufacturing company having the production departments a b and c and tw 559057

PH Ltd. is a manufacturing company having the production departments A, B and C and two service departments X and Y. The following is the budget for December:

Total

A

B

C

X

Y

Direct material (Rs)

1,000

2,000

4,000

2,000

1,000

Direct wages (Rs)

5,000

2,000

8,000

1,000

2,000

Factory rent (Rs)

4,000

Power (Rs)

2,500

Depreciation (Rs)

1,000

Other overheads (Rs)

9,000

Additional information:

Area (square feet)

500

250

500

250

500

Capital value of assets (In lakh rupees)

20

40

20

10

10

Machine hours

1,000

2,000

4,000

1,000

1,000

HP of machines

50

40

20

15

25

A technical assessment for the apportionment of expenses of service departments is as follows:

A(%)

B(%)

C(%)

X(%)

Y(%)

Service department X

45

15

30

10

Service department Y

60

35

5

You are required to prepare the following:

(a) A statement showing distribution of overheads to various departments.

(b) A statement showing redistribution of service departments’ expenses to production departments.

(c) Machine hour rates of the production departments A, B and C.

a company has three production departments and two service departments and for a per 559060

A company has three production departments and two service departments, and for a period the departmental distribution summary has the following totals:

Rs

Production departments:

A—Rs 1,600; B—Rs 1,400; C—Rs 1,000

4,000

Service departments:

P—Rs 702; Q—Rs 900

1,602

5,602

The expenses of service departments are charged on a percentage basis as follows:

A

B

C

P

Q

Service department

P

20%

40%

30%

10%

Service department

Q

40%

20%

20%

20%

Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of the expenses of the two service departments to production departments by the simultaneous equations method.

the following particulars relate to a manufacturing company which has three producti 559061

The following particulars relate to a manufacturing company, which has three production departments A, B and C and two service departments X and Y:

A

B

C

X

Y

Total Departmental overheads as per primary destribution

Rs 6300

Rs 7400

Rs 2800

Rs 4500

Rs 2000

The company decided to charge the costs of its service departments on the basis of the following percentages:

Production departments

Service departments

A

B

C

X

Y

X

40%

30%

20%

10%

Y

30%

30%

20%

20%

Find the total overheads of the production departments using the repeated distribution method.

a company has three production departments and two service departments the distribut 559062

A company has three production departments and two service departments. The distribution summary of overheads is as follows:

Production departments

Service departments

Rs

Rs

A

9000

P

702

B

6000

Q

900

C

3000

The expenses of service departments are charged on a percentage basis as follows:

A

B

C

P

Q

P

20%

40%

30%

10%

Q

40%

20%

20%

20%

Apportion the expenses of service departments on the basis of the repeated distribution method.

in a manufacturing company the daily wage rate guaranteed for a worker is rs 25 and 558988

In a manufacturing company, the daily wage rate guaranteed for a worker is Rs 25 and the standard output fixed for the month is 1,000 units, representing 100% efficiency. The daily wage rate is paid without bonus to those workers who meet up to 66.3% the set efficiency standard. Beyond this, there is a bonus payable in a graded scale in a fixed ratio to the increased output as under:

Efficiency

Bonus payable

90%

10%

100%

20%

There is an increase of 1% for every 1% further rise in efficiency. Find the total earnings of A, B, C and D who have worked 26 days in a month. The workers’ outputs are A—500 units, B—900 units, C—1000 units and D—1,100 units.

from the following particulars calculate the earnings of two workers a and b under a 558993

From the following particulars, calculate the earnings of two workers, A and B, under (a) straight piece rate system and (b) Taylor’s differential piece rate system:

Standard time per unit: 36 seconds

Normal rate per hour: Rs 9

Differential rates to be applied:

80% of piece rate when below standard

120% of piece rate at or above standard

The workers have produced in a day of 8 hours as follows:

A—700 units

B—900 units

what will be the earnings of a worker at re 0 55 per hour when he takes 140 hours to 558994

What will be the earnings of a worker at Re 0.55 per hour when he takes 140 hours to do a volume of work for which the standard time allowed is 200 hours? The plan of payment of hours is on a sliding scale as under

Within the first 10% saving in standard time, bonus is 40% of the time saved.

Within the second 10% saving in time, bonus is 50% of the time saved.

Within the third 10% saving in standard time, bonus is 60% of the time saved.

Within the fourth 10% saving in standard time, bonus is 70% of the time saved.

For the rest, bonus is 75% of the time saved.

in a factory group bonus system is in use which is calculated on the basis of earnin 558996

In a factory, group bonus system is in use, which is calculated on the basis of earnings under time rate.

The following particulars are available for a group of four workers P, Q, R and S:

Output of the group: 16,000 units

Piece rate per 100 units: Rs 2.50, in addition to time wages

Number of hour worked

P

90

Q

72

R

80

S

100

Time Rate per Hour

A

Re 0.80

Q

Re 1.00

R

Rs 1.20

S

Re 0.80

Calculate the bonus and total wages earned by each worker.

from the following particulars find the amount of cash required for giving wages in 558997

From the following particulars, find the amount of cash required for giving wages in a factory for a particular month:

(i) Wages for normal hours worked

Rs 20,500

(ii) Wages for overtime

Rs 2,200

(iii) Leave wages

Rs 2,700

(iv) Deduction of employees’ share to state insurance

Rs 500

(v) Employee’s contribution to PF

Rs 1,600

(vi) House rent is to be recovered from 30 employees at the rate of Rs 10 per month

from the following particulars prepare the labour cost per man day of 8 hours 558999

From the following particulars, prepare the labour cost per man day of 8 hours:

(a) Basic salary: Rs 55 per day

(b) DA: Re 0.50 per every point over 100 (cost of living index for working class); current cost of living index is 700 points.

(c) Leave salary: 10% of (a) and (b)

(d) Employer’s contribution to PF: (a) + (b) + (c)

(e) Employer’s contribution to state insurance: 2.5% of (a) + (b) + (c)

(f) Expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 20 per head per month

(g) Number of working days in a month: 25 days of 8 hours

from the following details ascertain the amount of cash required for the payment of 559000

From the following details, ascertain the amount of cash required for the payment of salaries in a firm for the month of January:

(1) Normal time salaries: Rs 65,000

(2) DA: 20% of (1)

(3) Leave wages: 5% of (1) and (2)

(4) Employee’s contribution to ESI and PF: 3% and 5% respectively on (1) and (2)

(5) Income tax deduction at source: Rs 4,000

(6) Deduction for insurance premium: Rs 5,000

(7) Festival advance must be recovered from 60 employees at Rs 100 per employee.

from the following particulars prepare a statement showing the labour cost per man d 559001

From the following particulars, prepare a statement showing the labour cost per man day of 8 hours:

(a) Basic salary: Rs 2 per day

(b) DA: 25 paise for every point over 100 (cost of living index for working class); current cost of living index is 700 points

(c) Leave salary: 10% of (a) and (b)

(d) Employer’s contribution to PF: 8% of (a), (b) and (c)

(e) Employer’s contribution to state insurance: 2.5% of (a), (b) and (c)

(f) Expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 20 per head per mensem

(g) Number of working days in a month: 25 days of 8 hours each

calculate the earnings of workers a and b from the following particulars for a month 559004

Calculate the earnings of workers A and B from the following particulars for a month and allocate the earnings of each to jobs X, Y and Z:

A

B

(a) Basic wages

Rs 100

Rs 100

(b) DA on basic wages

50%

55%

(c) PF on basic wages

8%

8%

(d) ESI (on basic wages)

2%

2%

(e) Overtime

10 hours

(f) Idle time and leave

16 hours

The normal working hours for a month are 200. Overtime is paid at double the normal rate plus DA. Employee’s contributions to state insurance and provident fund are at equal rates with the employer’s contributions. The month has 25 working days and one paid holiday. The two workers were employed on jobs X, Y and Z in the following proportions:

Jobs

X

Y

Z

A

40%

30%

30%

B

50%

20%

30%

Overtime was done on job Y.

from the following particulars you are required to work out the earnings of a worker 559010

From the following particulars, you are required to work out the earnings of a worker for a week under (a) straight piece rate system, (b) differential piece rate system, (c) Halsey’s premium scheme (50% sharing) and (d) Rowan’s premium scheme:

Weekly working hours

40

Hourly wage rate

Rs 7.50

Piece rate per unit

Rs 3.00

Normal time taken per piece

20 minutes

Normal output per week

120 pieces

Actual output per week

150 pieces

Differential piece rate

80% of piece rate when output is below normal and 120% of piece rate when output is above normal

standard output per day of 8 hours is 16 units actual output of a worker for 8 hours 559012

Standard output per day of 8 hours is 16 units. Actual output of a worker for 8 hours is 20 units. Rate per hour is Rs 2.50. Calculate the wages payable to the worker according to Emerson’s efficiency plan.

Level of performance = actual outpu/standard ouput×100

= 20 units/16 units × 100

= 125%

Bonus payable is 45%, calculated as follows:

At 100% efficiency

20% of time wages

For the next 25% efficiency at 1% for each 1% increase in efficiency beyond 100%

25% of time wages

Total bonus payable

45% of time wages

from the following particulars prepare labour cost per man day of 8 hours 559013

From the following particulars, prepare labour cost per man day of 8 hours:

(a) Basic salary

Rs 2 per day

(b) DA

25 paise per every point over 100 (cost of living index for working class); current cost of living index is 700 points

(c) Leave salary

10% of (a) and (b)

(d) Employer’s contribution to PF

8% of (a), (b) and (c)

(e) Employer’s contribution to state insurance

2.5% of (a), (b) and (c)

(f) Expenditure on amenities to labour

Rs 20 per head per mensem

(g) Number of working days in a month

25 days of 8 hours each

calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data 559014

Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data:

Days

Hours worked

Monday

8 hours

Tuesday

10 hours

Wednesday

9 hours

Thursday

11 hours

Friday

9 hours

Saturday

4 hours

Total

51 hours

Normal working hours

8 hours per day

Normal rate

Re 1 per hour

Overtime rate

Up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours in a day at double rate, or up to 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is more beneficial to the workers

overtime rate is up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and at double rate if time ex 559016

Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker form the following data:

Days

Hours worked

Monday

8

Tuesday

10

Wednesday

9

Thursday

11

Friday

9

Saturday

4

Normal working hours are 8 per day, and normal rate is Rs 5 per hour. Overtime rate is up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and at double rate if time exceeds 9 hours, or up to 48 hours (in a 6 day week) at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is beneficial to the workers.

calculate the amount of wages and bonus for a worker from the following particulars 559019

Calculate the amount of wages and bonus for a worker from the following particulars:

Job commenced: Monday, 24 December 1994 at 8 a.m.

Job finished: Saturday, 29 December 1994 at 1 p.m.

Quantity of work turned out: 638

Quantity of pieces passed: 600

Worker’s rate: Rs 5.00 per hour

Time allowed: 10 pieces per hour

Bonus: 40% of time saved

Assume that the employee worked for 9 hours a day and there is no overtime.

what will be the earnings of a worker at rs 5 50 per hour when he takes 140 hours to 559020

What will be the earnings of a worker at Rs 5.50 per hour when he takes 140 hours to do a volume of work for which the standard time allowed is 200 hours? The plan of bonus is on sliding scale as under:

Bonus within the first 10% of saving in standard time

40% of time saved

Bonus within the second 10% of saving in standard time

50% of time saved

Bonus within the third 40% of saving in standard time

50% of time saved

Bonus within the fourth 10% of saving in standard time

70% of time saved

Bonus for the rest

75% of the time saved

calculation of earnings of workers and their allocation to jobs calculate the earnin 559022

Calculation of earnings of workers and their allocation to jobs: Calculate the earnings of A and B from the following particulars for a month and allocate the labour cost to each job X, Y and Z:

A

B

(a) Basic wages

Rs 100

Rs 160

(b) DA

50%

50%

(c) Contribution to PF (on basic wages)

8%

8%

(d) Contribution to ESI (on basic wages)

2%

2%

(e) Overtime (hours)

10

The normal working hours for the month are 200. Overtime is paid at double the total of normal wages and DA. Employer’s contributions to state insurance and PF are at equal rates with employees’ contributions. The two workers were employed on jobs X, Y and Z in the following proportions:

A

B

(a)Basic wages

Rs 100

Rs 160

(b)DA

50%

50%

(c) contribution to PF(on basic wages)

8%

8%

(d)Contribution to ESI (on basic wages)

2%

2%

(e)Overtime (hours)

10

Overtime was done on job Y.

kumaresh ltd has three production departments a b and c and two service departments 559024

Kumaresh Ltd. has three production departments, A, B and C, and two service departments, D and E. The following figures are extracted from the records of the company:

Rs

Rent and rates

5,000

Indirect wages

1,500

Depreciation of machinery

10,000

General lighting

600

Power

1,500

Sundries

10,000

The following further details are available:

Total

A

B

C

D

E

Floor space (square feet)

10,000

2000

2500

3000

2000

500

Light points (number)

60

10

15

20

10

5

Direct wages(Rs)

10000

3000

2000

3000

1500

500

HP of machines(Horse Power)

150

60

30

50

10

Value of machinery(Rs)

250000

60000

80000

100000

5000

5000

Apportion the cost to various departments on the most equitable basis by preparing a primary departmental distribution summary.

a company has four departments the following are the expenses recorded for a period 559025

A company has four departments. The following are the expenses recorded for a period of three months:

Rs

Rs

Rent

1000

Supervision

1500

Repairs

600

Insurance of plant

500

Depreciation

450

Employees insurance

150

Light

100

Power

900

The following data are also available:

Departments

A

B

C

D

Aria (square feet)

75

55

45

25

Total wages(Rs)

4000

3000

2000

1000

Number of worker

12

8

6

4

Value of plant(Rs)

12000

9000

6000

3000

calicut soaps ltd supplies you the following information for the month ending on jan 559027

Calicut Soaps Ltd. supplies you the following information for the month ending on January 1988. You are required to apportion the overheads to production departments:

Production departments

Service departments

A

B

C

X

Y

Direct wages(Rs)

7000

6000

5000

1000

1000

Direct materials(Rs)

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

Employees (number)

200

150

150

50

50

Electricity (units)

8000

6000

6000

2000

3000

Light points(numbers)

10

15

15

5

5

Assets value(Rs)

50000

30000

20000

10000

10000

Area occupied(squre yards)

800

600

600

200

200

The expenses (in rupees) for the month were as follows:

Stores overheads

Rs 400.00

Motive power

Rs 1,500

Lighting

Rs 200

Labour welfare

Rs 3,000

Depreciation

Rs 12,000

Repairs and maintenance

Rs 2,400

General overheads

Rs 1,000

Rent and rates

Rs 1,200

Apportion the expenses of department Y in the proportion of direct wages and those of X in the ratio 4:3:3 to departments A, B and C, respectively.

from the following data prepare a statement showing the cost per day of 8 hours of e 558933

From the following data, prepare a statement showing the cost per day of 8 hours of engaging a particular type of labour

(a)

Monthly basic salary plus DA: Rs 1,200

(b)

Leave salary: 5% of (a)

(c)

Employer’s contribution to PF: 8% of (a) and (b)

(d)

Employer’s contribution to employees’ state insurance (ESI): 2.5% of (a) and (b)

(e)

Pro rata expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 100 per month

(f)

Number of working hours in a month: 200.

calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data 558934

Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data:

Days

Hours worked

Monday

8 hours

Tuesday

10 hours

Wednesday

9 hours

Thursday

11 hours

Friday

10 hours

Saturday

10 hours

Total

58 hours

Normal working hours

8 hours per day

Normal rate

Re 1 per hour

Overtime rate

Up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours in a day at double rate, or up to 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is more beneficial to the workers

from the following data prepare a statement showing the cost per man day of 8 hours 558935

From the following data, prepare a statement showing the cost per man day of 8 hours:

(a)

Basic salary and DAs: Rs 300 per month

(b)

Leave salary to a worker: 6% of the basic salary and DA

(c)

Employer’s contribution to PF: 6% of (a) plus (b)

(d)

Employee’s contribution

(e)

Pro rata expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 25 per head per month

(f)

Number of working hours in a month: 200

Hint: Ignore employee’s contribution to PF.

from the following data prepare a statement showing the cost per day of 8 hours of e 558937

From the following data, prepare a statement showing the cost per day of 8 hours of engaging in a particular type of labour:

(a)

Monthly basic salary plus DA: Rs 400

(b)

Leave salary: 5% of (a)

(c)

Employer’s contribution to PF: 8% of (a) and (b)

(d)

Employer’s contribution to ESI: 2 ½% of (a) and (b)

(e)

Pro rata expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 35 per head per month

(f)

Number of working hours in a month: 200

calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker form the following data 558938

Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker form the following data:

Days

Hours worked

Monday

8

Tuesday

10

Wednesday

9

Thursday

11

Friday

10

Saturday

10

Normal working hours are 8 hours per day, and normal rate is Rs 5 per hour. Overtime rate is up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours at double rate, or up to 48 hours (in a 6 day week) at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is beneficial to the workers.

calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data 558939

Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a worker from the following data:

Days

Hours worked

Monday

8

Tuesday

10

Wednesday

9

Thursday

11

Friday

9

Saturday

4

Total

51

Normal working hours is eight per day, and normal rate is Re 0.50 per hour. Overtime rate is up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours in a day at double rate, or up to 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is more beneficial to the workers.

Hint: Saturday should be taken as half day with four normal working hours.

from the following particulars prepare a statement of labour cost showing the cost p 558942

From the following particulars, prepare a statement of labour cost showing the cost per day (8 hours

(a)

Monthly salary: Rs 900

(b)

Leave salary: 5% of (a)

(c)

Employer’s contribution to PF: 8 ½% of (a) and (b)

(d)

Employer’s contribution to ESI: 3% of (a) and (b)

(e)

Pro rata expenditure on amenities to labour: Rs 112 per head per month

(f)

Number of working hours in a month of 25 days: 8 hours per day

calculate the labour cost per hour for a worker from the following information 558944

Calculate the labour cost per hour for a worker from the following information

Basic pay

Rs 200 per month

DA

Rs 150

House rent allowance

Rs 100

Number of working days per year—300

Leave rules

30 days paid leave (PL) with full pay

20 days sick leave (SL) with half pay

Usually, sick leave is fully availed of.

Hint: Assume a normal working day of 8 hours.

calculate the labour cost per hour for a worker from the following information 558945

Calculate the labour cost per hour for a worker from the following information

Basic pay

Rs 200 per month

DA

Rs 150

House rent allowance

Rs 100

Number of working days per year—300

Leave rules

30 days paid leave (PL) with full pay

20 days sick leave (SL) with half pay

Usually, sick leave is fully availed of.

Hint: Assume a normal working day of 8 hours.

what will be the earnings of a worker at rs 6 50 per hour when the worker takes 140 558947

What will be the earnings of a worker at Rs 6.50 per hour when the worker takes 140 hours to do a volume of work for which the standard time allowed is 200 hours. The plan of bonus is on sliding scale as unde

Bonus within the first 10% of saving in standard time

40% of time saved

Bonus within the second 10% of saving in standard time

50% of time saved

Bonus within the third 40% of saving in standard time

50% of time saved

Bonus within the fourth 10% of saving in standard time

70% of time saved

Bonus for the rest

75% of the time saved

in a manufacturing concern bonus to workers is paid on a slab rate based on cost sav 558948

In a manufacturing concern, bonus to workers is paid on a slab rate based on cost saving towards labour and overheads. The following are the slab rates:

Up to 10% saving

5% of earnings

Up to 15% saving

9% of earnings

Up to 20% saving

13% of earnings

Up to 30% saving

21% of earnings

Up to 40% saving

28% of earnings

Above 40% saving

32% of earnings

The wage rates per hour of four workers P, Q, R and S are Re 1, Rs 1.10, Rs 1.20 and Rs 1.40, respectively. Overhead is recovered on direct wages at the rate of 200%. The standard cost under wages and overhead per unit of production is fixed at Rs 30. The workers completed one unit each in 8, 7, 5½ and 5 hours, respectively. Calculate the following for each worker

(a)

Amount of hours earned

(b)

Total earnings

(c)

Total earnings per hour

calculate the earnings of workers a and b from the following particulars for a month 558949

Calculate the earnings of workers A and B from the following particulars for a month and allocate the earnings to each job X, Y and Z

A

B

(a) Basic wages

Rs 200

Rs 200

(b) DA

50%

55%

(c) PF (on basic wages)

8%

8%

(d) ESI (on basic wages)

2%

2%

(e) Overtime

10 hours

(f) Idle time and leave

16 hours

The normal working hours for the month are 200 hours. Overtime is paid at double the normal wage plus DA. Employer’s contributions to ESI and PF are at equal in rate with employee’s contributions. The month contains 25 working days and one paid holiday. The two workers were employed on jobs X, Y and Z in the following proportions:

Job

X

Y

Z

Worker A

40

30

20

Worker B

50

20

30

Overtime was done on job Y.

following are the particulars for march 2000 relating to four employees working in d 558953

  1. Following are the particulars for March 2000 relating to four employees working in department A of a factory exclusively for job number 130:

Name

Designation

Wages(Rs)

Per

A

Foreman

800

Month

B

Mechanic

15

Day

C

Machine Operator

12

Day

D

Worker

10

Day

The normal working hours per week of 6 days are 48, or 8 hours per day. All Sundays are paid holidays. (There are no other holidays during the month.)

PF contribution was 8% of monthly wages by employees.

PF contribution was 8% of monthly wages by the employer.

ESI contribution was 3% of monthly wages by employee and 5% of monthly wages by the employer.

From the foregoing data, calculate the following:

  1. Net monthly wages payable by the employer.
  2. The total amount of PF contribution to be deposited by the employer.
  3. ESI contribution to be deposited by the employer.
  4. Total labour cost to the employer for the month of April, chargeable to the job
  5. Total cost of the job including the cost of materials valued at Rs 6,000 overheads at 50% of prime cost.

from the following particulars calculate the earnings of workers a and b under the p 558971

From the following particulars, calculate the earnings of workers A and B under the piece rate system:

Standard time allowed: 10 units per hour

Normal time rate per hour: Re 1

Differential to be applied:

80% of piece rate when below standard

120% of piece rate at or above standard

In a day of 8 hours,

A produced 75 units

B produced 100 units

A (Rs)

B (Rs)

Straight piece rate

7.5

10

Taylor’s differential piece rate

6

12

calculate the earnings of workers a and b under the straight piece rate system and t 558972

Calculate the earnings of workers A and B under the straight piece rate system and Taylor’s differential piece rate system from the following particulars:

Normal rate per hours: Rs 1.80

Standard time per unit: 20 seconds

Differentials to be applied:

80% of piece rate below standard

120% of piece rate at or above standard

Worker A produces 1,300 units per day, and worker B produces 1,500 units per day

A

B

(Rs ps.)

(Rs ps.)

Straight piece rate system

13.00

15.00

Taylor’s differential piece rate system

10.40

18.00

Hint: Assume normal working day of 8 hours.

calculate the earnings of three workers a b and c under merrick 39 s plan of piece r 558977

Calculate the earnings of three workers A, B and C under Merrick’s plan of piece rate system, given the following:

Standard production: 120 units

Production of A: 90 units

Production of B: 100 units

Production of C: 130 units

Ordinary piece rate: Re 0.10

On the basis of the following information, calculate the earnings of A, B, C and D under Merrick’s differential piece rate system:

Standard production per hour: 12 units

Normal rate per hour: Re 0.60

In an 8 hour day:

A produced 64 units, B produced 96 units,

C produced 84 units and D produced 100 units

Hint: At 100% efficiency also, 110% of the ordinary piece rate applies.

the rate of wages is paid without bonuses to those workers who show up to 66 2 3 eff 558981

In a manufacturing concern, the daily wages guaranteed for workers is Rs 20. The standard output for the month is 1,000 articles, representing 100% efficiency. The rate of wages is paid without bonuses to those workers who show up to 66 2/3% efficiency. Beyond this, bonus is payable in a graded scale:

Efficiency

Bonus

90%

10%

100%

20%

There is an increase of 1% of bonus for every 1% further rise in efficiency. Calculate the total earnings of A, B, C and D who worked 26 days in a month, with outputs 500; 900; 1,000; and 1,200 articles, respectively.

from the following particulars work out the earnings for the week of a worker under 558984

From the following particulars, work out the earnings for the week of a worker under (a) straight piece rate system, (b) differential piece rate system, (c) Halsey’s premium system and (d) Rowan’s system:

Number of working hours per week: 48

Wages per hour: Rs 3.75

Normal time per piece: 20 minutes

Rate per piece: Rs 1.50

Normal output per week: 120 pieces

Actual output for the week: 150 pieces

Differential piece rate: 80% of piece rate when output is below standard and 120% when output is above standard.

from the following particulars you are required to work out the earnings of a worker 558985

From the following particulars, you are required to work out the earnings of a worker for a week under (a) straight piece rate system, (b) differential piece rate system, (c) Halsey’s premium scheme (50% saving) and (d) Rowan’s premium scheme:

Weekly working hours

48

Hourly wage rate

Rs 7.50

Piece rate per unit

Rs 3

Normal time taken per piece

20 minutes

Normal output per week

120 pieces

Actual output for the week

150 pieces

Differential piece rate is 80% of piece rate when output is below normal and 120% of piece rate when output is above normal.

on the basis of the following information calculate the earnings of x and y under th 558987

On the basis of the following information, calculate the earnings of X and Y under the straight piece rate system and Taylor’s differential piece rate system:

Standard production: 10 units per hour

Normal time rate: Rs 5.00

Differential piece rate to be applied:

80% of piece rate for performance below standard

120% of piece rate for performance at or above the standard

Actual performance:

X produced 80 units in a day of 10 hours

Y produced 110 units in a day of 10 hours

from the following particulars prepare the stores ledger account under the fifo meth 558896

From the following particulars, prepare the stores ledger account under the FIFO method of pricing issues:

1992

1 January

Opening balance

50 units at Rs 30 per unit

5

Issued

20 units

7

Purchased

48 units at Rs 40 per unit

9

Issued

20 units

19

Purchased

36 units at Rs 35 per unit

24

Received back

10 units out of the units issued on 9 January

27

Issued

15 units

Hint: Returned material of 10 units is shown like a fresh receipt at the original issue price of Rs 30.

prepare a store ledger account from the following information adopting the fifo meth 558897

Prepare a store ledger account from the following information adopting the FIFO method of pricing of issues of materials:

1 March

Opening balance

500 tonne at Rs 200

3

Issued

70 tonne

4

Issued

100 tonne

8

Issued

80 tonne

13

Received from supplier

200 tonne at Rs 190

14

Returned from department A

15 tonne

16

Issued

180 tonne

20

Received from supplier

240 tonne at Rs 195

24

Issued

300 tonne

25

Received from supplier

320 tonne at Rs 200

26

Issued

115 tonne

27

Returned from department B

35 tonne

28

Received from supplier

100 tonne at Rs 200

Hint: Returns from departments on 14 and 27 March are to be assumed out of the immediate preceding issue since no details are given.

the following receipts and issues were made for a material during the month of may 1 558899

The following receipts and issues were made for a material during the month of May 1993:

Receipts

1 May 1993

Balance of stock

500 units at Rs 4.50 per unit

7 May 1993

Purchases

400 units at Rs 5.00 per unit

15 May 1993

Purchases

1,000 units at Rs 5.50 per unit

23 May 1993

Purchases

700 units at Rs 4.80 per unit

Issues

3 May 1993

Issued 200 units

8 May 1993

Issued 100 units

17 May 1993

Issued 700 units

26 May 1993

Issued 700 units

Assume that base stock is 200 units out of the opening stock; use FIFO method.

Hint: Base stock of 200 units at Rs 4.50 out of the opening stock should always be a part of the stock and should not be issued.

write the stores ledger account pricing the issues on the principle of fifo and lifo 558901

The Receipt; side of the stores ledger account shows the following particulars:

1 January

Opening balance of 500 units at Rs 4 per unit

5 January

Received 200 units at Rs 4.25 per unit

12 January

Received 150 units at Rs 4.10 per unit

20 January

Received 300 units at Rs 4.50 per unit

25 January

Received 400 units at Rs 4.00 per unit

Issues of the materials are as follows:

4 January

Issued 200 units

10 January

Issued 400 units

15 January

Issued 100 units

19 January

Issued 100 units

26 January

Issued 200 units

30 January

Issued 250 units

Write the stores ledger account pricing the issues on the principle of FIFO and LIFO.

prepare a statement showing how the issues would be priced under lifo method 558902

Prepare a statement showing how the issues would be priced under LIFO method:

1998

1 February

Opening balance

100 units at Rs 10 each

1 February

Received

200 units at Rs 10.50 each

2 February

Received

300 units at Rs 10.60 each

4 February

Issued

400 units to job A

6 February

Issued

120 units to job K

7 February

Received

400 units at Rs 11 each

10 February

Issued

200 units at job B

12 February

Received

400 units at Rs 11.50 each

17 February

Issued

300 units to job D

prepare a store ledger account and enter the following transactions adopting the sim 558903

Prepare a store ledger account and enter the following transactions adopting the simple average method of pricing issues:

1985

1 February

Opening balance

50 units at Rs 3 per unit

5

Issued

20 units

7

Purchased

40 units at Rs 4 per unit

9

Issued

25 units

19

Purchased

75 units at Rs 5 per unit

20

Issued

15 units

21

Received back

10 units out of the 9 February issue

26

Issued

60 units

the following particulars have been extracted for material x prepare a store ledger 558904

The following particulars have been extracted for material X. Prepare a store ledger account showing the receipts and issues, pricing the materials issued on the basis of (a) simple average and (b) weighted average methods:Receipts

1 October 1994, opening stock

200 units

Rs 3.50 per unit

3 October 1994, purchased

300 units

Rs 4.00 per unit

13 October 1994, purchased

900 units

Rs 4.30 per unit

23 October 1994, purchased

600 units

Rs 3.80 per unit

Issues

5 October 1994, issued

400 units

15 October 1994, issued

600 units

25 October 1994, issued

600 units

from the following particulars prepare the store ledger account showing the pricing 558905

From the following particulars, prepare the store ledger account showing the pricing of material issue under (a) simple average and (b) weighted average:

December 1994

1

Opening stock is 500 units at Rs 2 each

3

Purchased 400 units at Rs 2.10 each

5

Issued 600 units, vide MR number 15

7

Purchased 800 units at Rs 2.40 each

9

Issued 501 units, vide MR number 22

12

Returned from issue on 5 December, 12 units

17

Purchased 400 units at Rs 2.50 each

25

Issued 600 units, vide MR number 30

prepare a store ledger account by adopting the weighted average method of pricing 558906

Prepare a store ledger account by adopting the weighted average method of pricing.

1 September 1997

Opening balance

50 units at Rs 3 per unit

4

Issued

2 units

8

Purchased

48 units at Rs 4 per unit

9

Issued

20 units

15

Purchased

76 units at Rs 3 per unit

22

Received back into stores 19 units out of the 20 units issued on 9 September

30

Issued 10 units to production

prepare a store ledger account assuming that issues are priced on the principle of h 558907

Prepare a store ledger account assuming that issues are priced on the principle of HIFO:

1 December

Received

1,000 units at Rs 20 per unit

10

Received

500 units at Rs 22 per unit

11

Received

200 units at Rs 21 per unit

15

Issued

500 units

20

Issued

150 units

22

Received

700 units at Rs 23 per unit

24

Received

300 units at Rs 19 per unit

28

Issued

500 units

30

Received

200 units at Rs 18 per unit

31

Issued

300 units

issues are to be priced on the principle of fifo the stock verifier of the factory n 558908

The following is the summary of the receipts and issues of materials in a factory during February:

1 February

Opening stock

500 kg

Rs 25.00

3

issued

70 kg

4

issued

100 kg

8

issued

80 kg

13

Received from suppliers

200 kg

Rs 24.75

14

Refund of surplus a work order

15 kg

Rs 24.00

16

issued

180 kg

20

Received from suppliers

240 kg

Rs 24.75

24

issued

304 kg

25

Received from suppliers

320 kg

Rs 24.00

26

issued

112 kg

27

Refund of surplus a work order

12 kg

Rs 24.50

28

Received from suppliers

100 kg

Rs 25.00

Issues are to be priced on the principle of FIFO. The stock verifier of the factory noticed that on 15 February there was a shortage of 5 kg and on 27 February there was another shortage of 8 kg. Write the stores ledger account, recording the aforementioned transactions.

computation of standard price and variance with the help of the following informati 558910

(Computation of standard price and variance) With the help of the following information, prepare the store ledger card based on the standard price method:

1 august 1998

Opening Balance

2000 kg

Rs 11 per unit

2

purchased

3000 kg

Rs 12 per unit

3

issued

2500 kg

5

issued

500 kg

8

purchased

1000 kg

Rs 13 per units

10

issued

500 kg

15

issued

200 kg

18

issued

100 kg

20

purchased

1000 kg

Rs 11 per unit

28

issued

500 kg

30

issued

200 kg

The credit balance of material price variance was Rs 1,000 on 1 August 1998.

during the month 20 workers left 50 workers were discharged and 200 workers were rec 558914

Different methods of labour turnover

  1. What is meant by the term labour turnover? What is the effect of labour turnover on cost of production?
  2. From the following data given by the personnel department, calculate LTR by applying the (a) separation, (b) replacement and (c) flux methods:

Number of workers on the payroll:

At the beginning of the month

1,200

At the end of the month

1,500

During the month, 20 workers left, 50 workers were discharged and 200 workers were recruited. Of these, 30 workers were recruited in the vacancies of those leaving, whereas the rest were engaged for an expansion scheme.

during the month five workers left 20 workers were discharged and 125 workers were r 558915

From the following data provided, find the LTR by applying the (a) flux, (b) replacement and (c) separation methods

Number of workers on the payroll:

At the beginning of the month

500

At the end of the month

600

During the month, five workers left, 20 workers were discharged and 125 workers were recruited. Of these, 10 workers were recruited in the vacancies of those leaving, whereas the rest were engaged for an expansion scheme.

Hint: Replacement method ignores recruitment for expansion. Flux method includes all recruitments including those for expansion.

the following information is extracted from the records of a company for the month o 558917

The following information is extracted from the records of a company for the month of October 1998:

Number of employees at the beginning of the month

950

Number of employees at the end of the month

1,050

Number of employees who resigned

10

Number of employees who were discharged

30

Number of employees replaced in the vacancies

20

Number of employees appointed due to an expansion scheme

120

Calculate LTR.

Hint: Replacement method ignores recruitment for expansion, and flux method includes all recruitments including those for expansions.

calculate the earnings of workers a b and c under straight piece rate system and mer 558922

Calculate the earnings of workers A, B and C under straight piece rate system and Merrick’s multiple piece rate system from the following particulars:

Normal rate per hour

Rs 1.80

Standard time per unit

1 minute

Output per day is as follows:

Worker A: 390 units

Worker B: 470 units

Worker C: 575 units

Working hours per day are eight.

you are required to work out the amount of bonus earned and the total amount of wage 558928

In a manufacturing concern, employees are paid incentive bonus in addition to their normal wages at hourly rates. Incentive bonus is calculated in the proportion of time saved to time allowed. The following are the details of employee X

Normal wages (rupees per hour)

4

Completed units of production

6,000

Time allowed (per 100 units)

0.8 hour

Actual time taken

42 hours

You are required to work out the amount of bonus earned and the total amount of wages received.

you are required to work out the amount of bonus earned and the total amount of wage 558929

In a manufacturing concern, employees are paid incentive bonus in addition to their normal wages at hourly rates. Incentive bonus is calculated in the proportion of time saved to time allowed. The following are the details of employee X

Normal wages (rupees per hour)

4

Completed units of production

6,000

Time allowed (per 100 units)

0.8 hour

Actual time taken

42 hours

You are required to work out the amount of bonus earned and the total amount of wages received.

a further increase of 1 of bonus is provided for every 1 increase in efficiency calc 558931

In a manufacturing concern, the daily wages guaranteed for workers is Rs 40. The standard output for a month is 1,000 articles, representing 100% efficiency. The rate of wages is paid without bonus to those workers who show up to 66 2/3% efficiency. Beyond this, bonus is payable in a graded scale

Efficiency (%)

Bonus (%)

90

10

100

20

A further increase of 1% of bonus is provided for every 1% increase in efficiency. Calculate the total earnings of A, B, C and D who have worked 26 days in a month with the following productivity: A—500 units, B—900 units, C—1,000 units and D—1,200 units.

form the following particulars prepare labour cost per man day of 8 hours 558932

Form the following particulars prepare labour cost per man day of 8 hours

(a) Basic salary

Rs 4 per day

(b) Dearness allowance (DA)

25 paise per every point over 100 (cost of living index for working class); current cost of living index is 800 points

(c) Leave salary

10% of (a) and (b)

(d) Employer’s contribution to provident fund (PF)

8% of (a), (b) and (c)

(e) Employer’s contribution to state insurance

2.5% of (a), (b) and (c)

(f) Expenditure on amenities to labour

Rs 20 per head per mensem

(g) Number of working days in a month

25 days of 8 hours each

from the following particulars write the stores ledger card 558875

From the following particulars, write the stores ledger card:

1 January

Opening stock is 1,000 units at Rs 26.00 each

5

Purchased 500 units at Rs 24.50 each

7

Issued 750 units

10

Purchased 1,500 units at Rs 24.00 each

12

Issued 1,100 units

15

Purchased 1,000 units at Rs 25.00 each

17

Issued 500 units

18

Issued 300 units

25

Purchased 1,500 units at Rs 26.00 each

29

Issued 1,500 units

Adopt the FIFO method of issue and ascertain the value of closing stock.

the following information is provided by coorg coffee manufacturing unit for the for 558877

The following information is provided by Coorg Coffee manufacturing unit for the fortnight of April 1996:

Material A

Stock on 1 April 1996

100 units at Rs 5 per unit

Purchases: 5 April 1996

300 units at Rs 6

8 April 1996

500 units at Rs 7

12 April 1996

600 units at Rs 8

Issues: 6 April 1996

250 units

10 April 1996

400 units

14 April 1996

500 units

Calculate the value of material consumed during the period under LIFO method.

the maximum level fixed is 400 tonne the minimum is 75 tonne and the reorder level i 558878

The following are the receipts and issues of coal in a factory during March 1994:

1 March

Opening stock is 200 tonne at Rs 460 per tonne

4

Issued 140 tonne

6

Purchased 350 tonne at Rs 450 per tonne

8

Condemned due to deterioration in quality and transferred to scrap, 30 tonne

9

Issued 80 tonne

14

Issued 210 tonne

17

Purchased 200 tonne at Rs 480 per tonne

20

Issued 120 tonne

25

Purchased 180 tonne at Rs 470 per tonne

28

Issued 280 tonne

31

Excess found in stock, 43 tonne, due to wrong weighing during the month

The maximum level fixed is 400 tonne, the minimum is 75 tonne and the reorder level is 100 tonne. Show the stores ledger under LIFO system.

enter the following transactions in the stores ledger of material y using the i fifo 558879

Enter the following transactions in the stores ledger of material Y using the (i) FIFO and (ii) LIFO methods:

May 1980

1

Balance of 250 units at Re 1 per unit

3

Issued 50 units on MR number 61

6

Received 800 units, vide goods received [note number 13] at Rs 1.10 per unit

7

Issued 300 units on MR number 63

8

Returned to stores 20 units issued on MR number 61

12

Received 300 units as per GRN number 15 at Rs 1.20 per unit

15

Issued 320 units [MR number 83]

18

Received 100 units, vide GRN number 77 at 1.20 per unit

20

Issued 80 units [MR number 102]

23

Returned to vendors 20 units from GRN number 77 received on 18 May

26

Received 200 units on GRN number 96 at Re 1 per unit

28

Freight paid on purchase [vide GRN number 96] Rs 50

30

Issued 250 units on MR number 113

from the following transaction prepare separately the stores ledger accounts using t 558880

From the following transaction, prepare separately the stores ledger accounts, using the (i) FIFO and (ii) LIFO pricing methods:

January

1

Opening balance is 100 units at Rs 5 each

January

5

Received 500 units at Rs 6 each

January

20

Issued 300 units

February

5

Issued 200 units

February

6

Received 600 units at Rs 5 each

March

10

Issued 300 units

March

12

Issued 250 units

stock verification on 15 march revealed a shortage of 10 units 558881

From the following transactions, prepare separately the stores ledger account, using the (i) FIFO and (ii) LIFO methods:

1 January

Opening balance

100 units at Rs 5 each

5

Received

500 units at Rs 6 each

20

Issued

300 units

5 February

Issued

200 units

6 February

Received back from work order

10 units

Issued on 5 February

7 February

Received

600 units at Rs 5 each

20 February

Issued

300 units

25 February

Returned to supplier

50 units purchased on 7 February

26 February

Issued

200 units

10 March

Received

500 units at Rs 7 per unit

15 March

Issued

300 units

Stock verification on 15 March revealed a shortage of 10 units.

write the stores ledger cards with the aforementioned transactions based on both the 558882

In the beginning of October 1994, Bangalore Tin Co. had 10,000 lb of tin at Rs 2 per lb. Further purchases were made during the month as follows:

4 October

2,000 lb at Rs 2.50 per lb

10 October

6,000 lb, at Rs 2.00 per lb

20 October

10,000 lb at Rs 3.50 per lb

The issues to manufacture were as follows:

12 October

16,000 lb

22 October

10,000 lb

Write the stores ledger cards with the aforementioned transactions based on both the FIFO and LIFO methods. What will be the value of closing stock in each case?

prepare a stores ledger account from the following transactions assuming that the is 558883

Prepare a stores ledger account from the following transactions assuming that the issue of stores has been priced on the LIFO principle:

January

1

Received 1,000 units at Rs 20 per unit

January

10

Received 260 units at Rs 21 per unit

January

20

Issued 700 units

February

4

Received 400 units at Rs 23 per unit

February

21

Received 300 units at Rs 25 per unit

March

16

Issued 620 units

April

12

Issued 240 units

May

10

Received 500 units at Rs 22 per unit

May

25

Issued 380 units

from the following information prepare a store ledger account under specific pricing 558884

From the following information, prepare a store ledger account under specific pricing with FIFO:

1 April

Opening balance

50 kg at Rs 10

2 April

Issued

30 kg

4 April

Purchased

60 kg at Rs 11

5 April

Purchased

50 kg at Rs 12 for a specific job to be issued on 15 April

6 April

Issued

25 kg

10 April

Purchased

50 kg at Rs 10

16 April

Issued

60 kg

25 April

Purchased

25 kg at Rs 12

30 April

Issued

35 kg

Hint: The lot purchased on 5 April was reserved and issued to the specific job on 15 April.

from the following particulars write the stores ledger card 558885

From the following particulars, write the stores ledger card:

1990

1 January

Purchased

500 ton at Rs 2 per ton

10

Purchased

300 ton at Rs 2.10 per ton

13

Issued

500 ton

20

Purchased

400 ton at Rs 2.20 per ton

25

Issued

300 ton

27

Purchased

500 ton at Rs 2.10 per ton

31

Issued

200 ton

Adopt base stock method with LIFO. Base stock is 200 ton out of the 1 January purchase.

ascertain the quantity of closing stock as on 31 march and state its value under the 558886

XY Ltd. purchased and issued materials in the following order:

March 1985

1

Purchased

300 units at Rs 3 per unit

5

Purchased

500 units at Rs 4 per unit

10

Issued

500 units

12

Purchased

700 units at Rs 4.50 per unit

15

Issued

700 units

20

Purchased

300 units at Rs 5 per unit

30

Issued

150 units

Ascertain the quantity of closing stock as on 31 March and state its value under the weighted average cost method.

from the following particulars prepare stores ledger account showing the pricing of 558887

From the following particulars, prepare stores ledger account showing the pricing of material issues under (i) simple average and (ii) weighted average methods:

2 August 1983

Opening stock

800 units at Rs 4.20

3 August 1983

Purchased

800 units at Rs 4.20

4 August 1983

Issued

1,200 units

6 August 1983

Purchased

1,600 units at Rs 4.80

7 August 1983

Issued

1,000 units

9 August 1983

Purchased

400 units at Rs 6.00

11 August 1983

Issued

800 units

13 August 1983

Issued

100 units

15 August 1983

Purchased

500 units at Rs 8.00

from the aforementioned details write the stores ledger account on simple average ba 558889

The following were the receipts and issues of a material during March:

1 March

Opening balance is 1,000 units at Rs 50 per unit

3

Issued 140 units

4

Issued 200 units

8

Issued 160 units

13

Received from vendor 400 units at Rs 48 per unit

14

Refund of surplus from a work order, 30 units at Rs 48 per unit

16

Issued 360 units

20

Received from vendor 480 units at Rs 52 per unit

24

Issued 608 units

25

Received from vendor 640 units at Rs 50 per unit

26

Issued 524 units

28

Refund of surplus from a work order, 24 units (issued on 3 March)

31

Received from vendor 200 units at Rs 54 per unit

From the aforementioned details, write the stores ledger account on simple average basis following the FIFO method.

write a stores ledger card in the proper form making use of the following particular 558890

Write a stores ledger card in the proper form making use of the following particulars, pricing issues on the principle of FIFO:

Date

transection

Quantity(units)

Rate per units(Rs)

I January

Balance

500

20

3

Issues

300

6

Purchases

800

22

8

Issues

400

12

Issues

300

14

Purchases

400

25

20

Issues

600.00

24

Purchases

500

28

25

Issues

300

28

Issues

100

The stock verifier found a shortage of 10 units on 30 January and left a note.

explain the following two methods of pricing of material issues and also the circums 558891

Explain the following two methods of pricing of material issues and also the circumstances under which these methods are used: FIFO and LIFO

Draw a stores ledger card recording the following transactions that took place in a month under the aforementioned two methods:

1,994

1

January

Opening stock

200 pieces

Rs 2 each

5

January

Purchases

100 pieces

Rs 2.20 each

10

January

Purchases

150 pieces

Rs 2.40 each

20

January

Purchases

180 pieces

Rs 2.50each

2

January

Issues

150 pieces

7

January

Issues

100 pieces

12

January

Issues

100 pieces

28

January

Issues

200 pieces

the following transactions took place for an item of a material 558892

The following transactions took place for an item of a material:

Receipt Quantity KGS

Rate(Rs ps)

Issues Quantity KGS

2 march 1982

200

2

10 march 1982

300

2.4

15 march 1982

250.00

18 march 1982

250

2.6

20 march 1982

200

Record the aforementioned transactions in the stores ledger, pricing issues at simple average rate.

the following transactions took place for a material item 558893

The following transactions took place for a material item:

Date

Receipt Quantity KGS

Rate(Rs ps)

Issues Quantity KGS

2 march 1980

200

2

10 march 1980

300

2.4

15 march 1980

250.00

18 march 1980

250

2.6

20 march 1980

200

Prepare a priced ledger sheet, pricing the issues at weighted average rate.

in a period of rising prices such as above what are the effects of each method 558894

Show the stores ledger entries as they would appear when using the (a) weighted average method and (b) LIFO method of pricing issues in connection with the following transactions:

April

Units

Value(Rs)

1

Balance in hand(b/f)

300

600

2

purchased

200

440

4

Issued

150

6

Purchased

200

460

11

Issued

150.00

19

Issued

200

22

Purchased

200

480

27

Issued

250

In a period of rising prices such as above, what are the effects of each method?

issues are to be priced on the principle of fifo write the stores ledger account 558895

The following information is extracted from the stores ledger:

1 September

Opening balance

500 units at Rs 10

6

Purchases

100 units at Rs 11

20

Purchases

700 units at Rs 12

27

Purchases

400 units at Rs 13

13 October

Purchases

1,000 units at Rs 14

20

Purchases

500 units at Rs 15

17 November

Purchases

400 units at Rs 16

Issues of materials:

9 September

500 units

22

500 units

30

500 units

15 October

500 units

22

500 units

11 November

500 units

Issues are to be priced on the principle of FIFO. Write the stores ledger account.

prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case assuming that lightning purc 558842

Recording Passive Investments On March 1, 2011, Lightning Technology purchased 8,000 shares of Computing Services Company for $17 per share. The following information applies to the stock price of Computing Services:

Price

12/31/2011

$15

12/31/2012

21

12/31/2013

26

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Lightning purchased the shares for the trading securities portfolio.

2. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Lightning purchased the shares for the available for sale securities portfolio.

how would year end reporting change if the investments were categorized as trading s 558843

Recording Passive Investments Below are selected T accounts for the RunnerTech Company. Balance Sheet Accounts

(In Other Investments) Investments in SAS

(In Other Comprehensive Income)
Net Unrealized Losses/Gains—SAS

1 Jan

5,587

Purchase

19,000

1,565

1 Jan

AJE

?

15,239

Sale

Sale

?

?

AJE

31 Dec

14,558

5,683

31 Dec

Income Statement Accounts

Dividend Revenue

Gain on Sale of Investments

?

Earned

2,384

Sale

7,771

31 Dec

2,384

31 Dec

Required:

Complete the following journal entries and answer the following questions:

a. Purchased securities available for sale for cash. Prepare the journal entry.

b. Received cash dividends on the investments. Prepare the journal entry.

c. Sold SAS investments at a gain. Prepare the journal entry.

d. At year end, the SAS portfolio had a fair value of $14,558. Prepare the adjusting entry.

e. What would be reported on the balance sheet related to the SAS investments on December 31?

f. What would be reported on the income statement for the year?

g. How would year end reporting change if the investments were categorized as trading securities instead of securities available for sale?

prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case assuming that glenn used the 558845

Recording Passive Investments and Investments for Significant Influence – On August 4, 2012, Glenn Corporation purchased 3,000 shares of Riley Company for $150,000. The following information applies to the stock price of Riley Company:

Price

12/31/2011

$57

12/31/2012

51

12/31/2013

43

Riley Company declares and pays cash dividends of $2 per share on June 1 of each year.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Glenn purchased the shares for the trading securities portfolio.

2. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Glenn purchased the shares for the available for sale securities portfolio.

3. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Glenn used the equity method to account for the investment. Glenn owns 30 percent of Riley and Riley reported $45,000 in income each year.

explain why assets stockholders rsquo equity and revenues for the two cases are diff 558846

Comparing Methods to Account for Various Levels of Ownership of Voting Stock Company T had outstanding 25,000 shares of common stock, par value $10 per share. On January 1, 2011, Company P purchased some of these shares as a long term investment at $25 per share. At the end of 2011, Company T reported the following: income, $45,000, and cash dividends declared and paid during the year, $16,500. The fair value of Company T stock at the end of 2011 was $22 per share.

Required:

1. For each of the following cases (in the tabulation), identify the method of accounting that Company P should use. Explain why.

2. Give the journal entries for Company P at the dates indicated for each of the two independent cases, assuming that the investments will be held long term. If no entry is required, explain why. Use the following format:

Tabulation of Items

Case A: 3,000 Shares Purchased

Case B: 8,750 Shares Purchased

1. Accounting method?

2. Journal entries:

a. To record the acquisition at January 1, 2011.

b. To recognize the income reported by Company T for 2011.

c. To recognize the dividends declared and paid by Company T.

d. To recognize fair value effect at end of 2011.

3. Complete the following schedule to show the separate amounts that should be reported on the 2011

financial statements of Company P:

DOLLAR AMOUNTS

Case A

Case B

Balance sheet

Investments

Stockholders’ equity

Income statement

Dividend revenue

Equity in earnings of affiliate

4. Explain why assets, stockholders’ equity, and revenues for the two cases are different.

explain why the amounts reported in requirement 3 are different for the two cases 558847

Comparing the Fair Value and Equity Methods Cruise Corporation had outstanding 100,000 shares of no par common stock. On January 10, 2011, Dock Company purchased a block of these shares in the open market at $20 per share for long term investment purposes. At the end of 2011, Cruise reported net income of $280,000 and cash dividends of $0.60 per share. At December 31, 2011, Cruise stock was selling at $18 per share. This problem involves two separate cases:

Case A: Purchase of 10,000 shares of Cruise common stock.

Case B: Purchase of 40,000 shares of Cruise common stock.

Required:

1. For each case, identify the accounting method that the company should use. Explain why.

2. For each case, in parallel columns, give the journal entries for each of the following (if no entry is required, explain why):

a. Acquisition.

b. Revenue recognition.

c. Dividends received.

d. Fair value effects.

3. For each case, show how the following should be reported on the 2011 financial statements:

a. Long term investments.

b. Stockholders’ equity.

c. Revenues.

4. Explain why the amounts reported in requirement (3) are different for the two cases.

what would be reported on the balance sheet related to the investments in affiliates 558848

Recording Investments for Significant Influence Below are selected T accounts for Gauge Company.

Investments in Affiliates

Equity in Affiliate Earnings

1 Jan

83,619

0

1 Jan

Purchase

12,844

?

Share of
affiliate net
income

Share of affiliate net income

?

10,102

Share of affiliate dividends

2,869

31 Dec

31 Dec

89,230

Required:

Complete the following journal entries and answer the following questions:

a. Purchased additional investments in affiliated companies for cash. Prepare the journal entry.

b. Received cash dividends on the investments. Prepare the journal entry.

c. At year end, the investments in affiliates account had a fair value of $62,000; the affiliate also reported $5,800 in net income for the year. Prepare the adjusting entry.

d. What would be reported on the balance sheet related to the investments in affiliates on December 31?

e. What would be reported on the income statement for the year?

indicate how the operating activities and investing activities sections of the cash 558849

Determining Cash Flow Statement Effects of Investments for Significant Influence During 2011, Bradford Company purchased some of the 90,000 shares of common stock, par $6, of Hall, Inc., as a long term investment. The annual accounting period for each company ends December 31. The following transactions occurred during 2011:

Jan. 7 Purchased 40,500 shares of Hall stock at $30 per share.

Dec. 31 a. Received the 2011 financial statements of Hall, which reported net income of $215,000.

b. Hall declared and paid a cash dividend of $1.50 per share.

c. Determined that the current market price of Hall stock was $41 per share.

Required:

Indicate how the Operating Activities and Investing Activities sections of the cash flow statement (indirect method) will be affected by each transaction

how much goodwill was involved in this merger show computations 558850

Analyzing Goodwill and Reporting a Merger On January 4, 2011, D’Angelo Company acquired all of the net assets (assets and liabilities) of Barato Company for $124,000 cash. The two companies merged, with D’Angelo Company surviving. On the date of acquisition, Barato’s balance sheet included the following.

Balance Sheet at January 4, 2011

Barato
Company

Cash

$23,000

Property and equipment (net)

65,000

Total assets

$88,000

Liabilities

$12,000

Common stock (par $5)

40,000

Retained earnings

36,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$88,000

The property and equipment had a fair value of $72,000. Barato also owned an internally developed patent with a fair value of $4,000. The book values of the cash and liabilities were equal to their fair values.

Required:

1. How much goodwill was involved in this merger? Show computations.

2. Give the journal entry that D’Angelo would make to record the merger on January 4, 2011.

should sonic prepare a journal entry if the fair value of the bonds increased to 16 558852

Determining Financial Statement Effects for Bonds Held to Maturity – Sonic Corp. operates and franchises a chain of quick service drive in restaurants in most of the United States and in Mexico. Customers drive up to a canopied parking space and order food through an intercom speaker system. A carhop then delivers the food to the customer. Assume that Sonic has $15 million in cash to support future expansion and has decided to invest the funds in corporate bonds until the money is needed. Sonic purchases bonds with $15 million face value for $15.7 million cash on January 1, 2011. The bonds pay 9 percent interest annually with payments each June 30 and December 31 and mature in four years. Sonic plans to hold the bonds until maturity.

Required:

1. What accounts were affected when the bonds were purchased on January 1, 2011?

2. What accounts were affected when interest was received on June 30, 2011?

3. Should Sonic prepare a journal entry if the fair value of the bonds increased to $16,300,000 on December 31, 2011? Explain.

prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case assuming that hill nielson p 558853

Recording Passive Investments On September 15, 2011, Hill Nielson Corporation purchased 7,000 shares of Community Communications Company for $32 per share. The following information applies to the stock price of Community Communications:

Price

12/31/2011

$34

12/31/2012

25

12/31/2013

21

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Hill Nielson purchased the shares for the trading securities portfolio.

2. Prepare journal entries to record the facts in the case, assuming that Hill Nielson purchased the shares for the available for sale securities portfolio.

what accounting method should pentagon company use why 558854

Reporting Passive Investments During January 2011, Pentagon Company purchased 12,000 shares of the 200,000 outstanding common shares (no par value) of Square Corporation at $25 per share. This block of stock was purchased as a long term investment. Assume that the accounting period for each company ends December 31. Subsequent to acquisition, the following data were available:

2011

2012

Income reported by Square Corporation at December 31

$40,000

$60,000

Cash dividends declared and paid by Square Corporation during the year

$60,000

$80,000

Market price per share of Square common stock on 12/31/2014

$28

$27

Required:

1. What accounting method should Pentagon Company use? Why?

2. Give the journal entries for the company for each year (use parallel columns) for the following (if none, explain why):

a. Acquisition of Square Corporation stock.

b. Net income reported by Square Corporation.

c. Dividends received from Square Corporation.

d. Fair value effects at year end.

3. For each year, show how the following amounts should be reported on the financial statements:

a. Long term investments.

b. Stockholders’ equity—net unrealized loss/gain.

c. Revenues.

give the amounts for each case that should be reported on the 2012 financial stateme 558855

Comparing the Fair Value and Equity Methods Cardinal Company purchased, as a long term investment, some of the 200,000 shares of the outstanding common stock of Arbor Corporation. The annual accounting period for each company ends December 31. The following transactions occurred during 2012:

Jan. 10 Purchased shares of common stock of Arbor at $12 per share as follows:

Case A—30,000 shares

Case B—80,000 shares

Dec. 31 a. Received the 2012 financial statements of Arbor Corporation; the reported net income was $90,000.

b. Received a cash dividend of $0.60 per share from Arbor Corporation.

c. Determined that the current market price of Arbor stock was $9 per share.

Required:

1. For each case, identify the accounting method that the company should use. Explain why.

2. Give the journal entries for each case for these transactions. If no entry is required, explain why. (Hint: Use parallel columns for Case A and Case B.)

3. Give the amounts for each case that should be reported on the 2012 financial statements. Use the following format:

Case A

Case B

Balance sheet (partial)

Investments

Investments in common stock, Arbor Corporation

Stockholders’ equity

Net unrealized gain or loss

Income statement (partial)

Dividend revenue

Equity in earnings of affiliate

how much goodwill was involved in this merger show computations 558857

Analyzing Goodwill and Reporting a Merger On June 1, 2011, Gamma Company acquired all of the net assets of Pi Company for $140,000 cash. The two companies merged, with Gamma Company surviving. On the date of acquisition, Pi Company’s balance sheet included the following:

Balance Sheet at June 1, 2011

Pi Company

Inventory

$13,000

Property and equipment (net)

165,000

Total assets

$178,000

Liabilities

$82,000

Common stock (par $1)

65,000

Retained earnings

31,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$178,000

On the date of acquisition, the inventory had a fair value of $12,000 and the property and equipment had a fair value of $180,000. The fair value of the liabilities equaled their book value.

Required:

1. How much goodwill was involved in this merger? Show computations.

2. Give the journal entry that Gamma Company would make to record the merger on June 1, 2011.

what do the results in requirement 1 suggest about selma international 558858

Interpreting the Economic Return from Investing Ratio Selma International, Inc., reported the following information regarding its investment portfolio in the company’s 2012 annual report:

Investments Dividend revenue

2012

2011

Investments

$8,942

$8,903

Dividend revenue

696

362

Required:

1. Compute the economic return from investing ratio for 2012.

2. What do the results in requirement (1) suggest about Selma International?

explain why the investment account balance increased from 660 000 to 780 000 during 558861

Using Financial Reports: Analyzing the Financial Effects of the Fair Value and Equity Methods On January 1, 2012, Sheena Company purchased 30 percent of the outstanding common stock of Maryn Corporation at a total cost of $660,000. Management intends to hold the stock for the long term. On the December 31, 2012, balance sheet, the investment in Maryn Corporation was $780,000, but no additional Maryn stock was purchased. The company received $120,000 in cash dividends from Maryn. The dividends were declared and paid during 2012. The company used the equity method to account for its investment in Maryn. The market price of Sheena Company’s share of Maryn stock increased during 2012 to a total value of $750,000.

Required:

1. Explain why the investment account balance increased from $660,000 to $780,000 during 2012.

2. What amount of revenue from the investment was reported during 2012?

3. If Sheena did not have significant influence over Maryn and used the fair value method, what amount of revenue from the investment should have been reported in 2012?

4. If Sheena did not have significant influence over Maryn and used the fair value method, what amount should be reported as the investment in Maryn Corporation on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet?

discuss how this accounting treatment compares with procedures used in this country 558862

Using Financial Reports: Interpreting International Goodwill Disclosures Diageo is a major international company located in London, best known for its Smirnoff, Johnnie Walker, and Bailey’s brands of spirits. Its financial statements are accounted for under IFRS. A recent annual report contained the following information concerning its accounting policies. Acquired brands and other intangible assets are recognised when they are controlled through contractual or other legal rights, or are separable from the rest of the business, and the fair value can be reliably measured. Intangible assets that are regarded as having limited useful economic lives are amortised on a straight line basis over those lives and reviewed for impairment whenever events or circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. Goodwill and intangible assets that are regarded as having indefinite useful economic lives are not amortised. These assets are reviewed for impairment at least annually or when there is an indication that the assets may be impaired. To ensure that assets are not carried at above their recoverable amounts . . . Amortisation and any impairment writedowns are charged to other operating expenses in the income statement.

Required:

Discuss how this accounting treatment compares with procedures used in this country.

the following information is extracted from the stores ledger 558871

The following information is extracted from the stores ledger:

1 January

Opening balance

500 units at Rs 4 each

5

Purchases

200 units at Rs 4.25 each

12

Purchases

150 units at Rs 4.10 each

20

Purchases

300 units at Rs 4.50 each

25

Purchases

400 units at Rs 4.00 each

Issues of materials were as follows:

4 January

200 units

10

400 units

15

100 units

19

100 units

26

200 units

30

250 units

Issues are to be priced on the principle of FIFO. Write the stores ledger account.

issues are to be priced on the principle of fifo the stock verifier noted that on 15 558872

The following transactions are recorded in respect of materials used in a factory during April 1984:

1 April

Opening balance

500 tonne at Rs 25

2

Issue

70 tonne

4

Issue

100 tonne

7

Issue

80 tonne

12

Received from vendor

200 tonne at Rs 26

14

Return of surplus from a work order

15 tonne at Rs 25

16

Issue

180 tonne

20

Received from vendor

240 tonne at Rs 25

24

Issue

300 tonne

25

Received from vendor

320 tonne at Rs 28

26

Issue

112 tonne

27

Refund of surplus from a work order

12 tonne at Rs 27

28

Received from vendor

100 tonne at Rs 29

Issues are to be priced on the principle of FIFO. The stock verifier noted that on 15 April he found a shortage of 5 tonne and on 27 April another shortage of 8 tonne. Write the stores ledger account.

at what prices will you issue the materials use two important methods for this purpo 558873

The following is the record of receipts and issues for a certain material in a factory during a week:

1 January

Opening balance is 50 tonne at Rs 10.00 per tonne

1

Issued 30 tonne

2

Received 60 tonne at Rs 10.20 per tonne

3

Issued 25 tonne

3

Stock verification revealed a loss of 1 tonne

4

Received back from work orders 10 tonne (previously issued at Rs 9.15 per tonne)

5

Issued 40 tonne

6

Received 22 tonne at Rs 10.30 per tonne

7

Issued 38 tonne

At what prices will you issue the materials? Use two important methods for this purpose and show the comparative results.

materials were charged to the factory at cost on the fifo principle prepare stores l 558874

A clothing manufacturer commenced business on 1 January 1989. Textile materials used by the manufacturer include two types: M and N. During the six months till 30 June 1989, purchases were as follows:

4 January

1,000 m of type M

Rs 10.00 per metre

6 January

1,600 m of type N

Rs 15.00 per metre

18 March

2,300 m of type M

Rs 12.00 per metre

16 April

3,000 m of type N

Rs 16.00 per metre

26 May

800 m of type M

Rs 9.50 per metre

Issues from the storeroom to the factory were as follows:

7 January

700 m of M

12 January

1,200 m of N

28 March

1,420 m of M

22 April

2,860 m of N

1 June

1,580 m of M

Materials were charged to the factory at cost on the FIFO principle. Prepare stores ledger account.

deposited 250 000 in a debt retirement fund interest will be computed annually and a 558643

Computing Future Values (Supplement C) On January 1, 2011, Spearfish Company completed the following transactions (use an 8 percent annual interest rate for all transactions):

a. Deposited $50,000 in a debt retirement fund. Interest will be computed at six month intervals and added to the fund at those times (i.e., semiannual compounding). ( Hint: Think carefully about n and i. )

b. Established a pension retirement fund to be available by the end of year 6 by making six annual deposits of $130,000 at year end, starting on December 31, 2011.

c. Deposited $250,000 in a debt retirement fund. Interest will be computed annually and added to the fund at those times.

Required:

1. In transaction ( a ), what will be the balance in the fund at the end of year 3? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

2. In transaction ( b ), what is the amount of the retirement fund at the end of year 6? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

3. In transaction ( c ), what will be the balance in the fund at the end of year 6? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the 558644

Recording and Reporting Current Liabilities with Discussion of Cash Flow Effects Sturgis Company completed the following transactions during 2012. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2012.

Jan. 15 Recorded tax expense for the year in the amount of $125,000. Current taxes payable were $93,000. 31 Paid accrued interest expense in the amount of $52,000.

Apr. 30 Borrowed $550,000 from Commerce Bank; executed a 12 month, 12 percent interestbearing note payable.

June 3 Purchased merchandise for resale at an invoice cost of $75,820, on account. July 5 Paid June 3 invoice.

Aug. 31 Signed contract to provide security service to a small apartment complex and collected six months’ fees in advance amounting to $12,000. (Record the collection in a way that will not require an adjusting entry at year end.)

Dec. 31 Reclassified a long term liability in the amount of $100,000 as a current liability.

31 Determined salary and wages of $85,000 earned but not yet paid December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2012.

3. Show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

4. For each transaction, state whether cash flow from operating activities is increased or decreased or whether there is no effect.

in your own words explain brunswick rsquo s accounting policy for environmental expe 558646

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Various Liabilities Ford Motor Company is one of the world’s largest companies with annual sales of cars and trucks in excess of $170 billion. A recent annual report for Ford contained the following note:

Warranties

Estimated warranty costs are accrued for at the time the vehicle is sold to a dealer. Estimates for warranty cost are made based primarily on historical warranty claim experience.

1. This year, Ford reported claims amounting to $4.0 billion and accrued expenses for warranties in the amount of $3.9 billion. Describe the financial statement effects for this year.

Bally Total Fitness Holding Corporation is the largest publicly traded commercial operator of fitness centers in North America in terms of members, revenues, and square footage of its facilities.

The company operates 409 fitness centers primarily under the Bally Total Fitness name. The following note was contained in a recent annual report for Bally.

Revenue Recognition

As a general principle, revenue is recognized when the following criteria are met: (i) persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, (ii) delivery has occurred and services have been rendered, (iii) the price to the buyer is fixed or determinable and, (iv) collectability is reasonably assured. Membership revenue is earned on a straight line basis over the longer of the contractual term or the estimated membership term. The weighted average membership life is 39 months.

2. In your own words, explain how unearned revenue is reported in the balance sheet for Bally. Assume that the company collected $23 million in December 2011 for “New Year’s Resolution” memberships starting January 1, 2012. What is the amount of unearned revenue that should be reported on the 2011 and 2012 balance sheets?

3. A recent annual report for ExxonMobil reported a quick ratio of 0.20. For the previous year, the ratio was 0.45. Based on this information, do you think that Exxon is experiencing financial difficulty?

What other information would you want to consider in making this evaluation? Brunswick Corporation is a multinational company that manufactures and sells marine and recreational products. A recent annual report for Brunswick contained the following information:

Legal and Environmental

The company is involved in numerous environmental remediation and clean up projects with an aggregate estimated exposure of approximately $21 million to $42 million. The Company accrues for environmental remediation related activities for which commitments or clean up plans have been developed and for which costs can be reasonably estimated.

4. In your own words, explain Brunswick’s accounting policy for environmental expenditures. What is the justification for this policy?

performed services for a customer who had paid for them in the previous accounting p 558647

Determining Cash Flow Effects For each of the following transactions, determine whether cash flows from operating activities will increase, decrease, or remain the same:

a. Purchased merchandise for cash.

b. Paid salaries and wages for the last month of the previous accounting period.

c. Paid taxes to the federal government.

d. Borrowed money from the bank. The term of the note is two years.

e. Withheld FICA taxes from employees’ paychecks and immediately paid to the government.

f. Recorded accrued interest expense.

g. Paid cash as the result of losing a lawsuit. A contingent liability associated with the liability had been recorded.

h. Paid salaries and wages for the current month in cash.

i. Performed services for a customer who had paid for them in the previous accounting period (i.e., deferred revenue is earned).

if you were a financial analyst would your answer be different 558648

Analyzing the Reclassification of Debt General Mills is a multibillion dollar company that makes and sells products used in the kitchens of most American homes. The Company’s annual report included the following note:

We have a revolving credit agreement expiring in two years that provides for a credit line (which permits us to borrow money when needed). This agreement provides us with the opportunity to refinance short term borrowings on a long term basis. Should General Mills classify the short term borrowings as current or noncurrent debt based on this ability to borrow money to refinance the debt if needed? If you were a member of the management team, explain what you would want to do and why. If you were a financial analyst, would your answer be different?

what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the not 558649

Computing Present Values On January 1, 2011, Ellsworth Company completed the following transactions (use an 8 percent annual interest rate for all transactions):

a. Borrowed $2,000,000 to be repaid in five years. Agreed to pay $150,000 interest each year for the five years.

b. Established a plant addition fund of $1,000,000 to be available at the end of year 10. A single sum that will grow to $1,000,000 will be deposited on January 1, 2011.

c. Purchased a $750,000 machine on January 1, 2011, and paid cash, $400,000. A four year note payable is signed for the balance. The note will be paid in four equal year end payments starting on December 31, 2011.

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In transaction ( a ), determine the present value of the obligation.

2. In transaction ( b ), what single amount must the company deposit on January 1, 2011? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

3. In transaction ( c ), what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the note? What is the total amount of interest expense that will be incurred?

compare the latest year payable turnover ratio for each company to the industry aver 558654

Comparing Companies within an Industry Refer to the financial statements of American Eagle (Appendix B) and Urban Outfitters (Appendix C) and the Industry Ratio Report (Appendix D) at the end of this book.

Required:

1. Compute the quick ratio for each company for the current year.

2. Compare the most recent quick ratio for each company to the industry average from the Industry Ratio Report. Based solely on the quick ratio, are these companies more or less liquid than the average company in their industry?

3. Compute the payable turnover ratio for each company for the most recent reporting year.

4. Compare the latest year payable turnover ratio for each company to the industry average from the Industry Ratio Report. Are these companies doing better or worse than the average company in their industry at paying trade creditors?

5. Using this information and any other data from the annual report, write a brief assessment of the liquidity for the two companies.

entered a borrowing agreement that guarantees the ability to borrow up to 10 million 558656

Making Decisions as a Manager : Liquidity In some cases, a manager can engage in transactions that improve the appearance of financial reports without affecting the underlying economic reality. In this chapter, we discussed the importance of liquidity as measured by the quick ratio and working capital. For each of the following transactions, ( a ) determine whether reported liquidity is improved and ( b ) state whether you believe that the fundamental liquidity of the company has been improved. Assume that the company has positive working capital and a quick ratio of 0.5.

a. Borrowed $1 million from the bank, payable in 90 days.

b. Borrowed $10 million with a long term note, payable in five years.

c. Reclassified current portion of long term debt as long term as the result of a new agreement with the bank that guarantees the company’s ability to refinance the debt when it matures.

d. Paid $100,000 of the company’s accounts payable.

e. Entered a borrowing agreement that guarantees the ability to borrow up to $10 million when needed.

could anyone be misled do you agree that the lottery winner has won 3 million if not 558657

Evaluating an Ethical Dilemma : Managing Reported Results The president of a regional whole sale distribution company planned to borrow a significant amount of money from a local bank at the beginning of the next fiscal year. He knew that the bank placed a heavy emphasis on the liquidity of potential borrowers. To improve the company’s quick ratio, the president told his employees to stop shipping new merchandise to customers and to stop accepting merchandise from suppliers for the last three weeks of the fiscal year. Is this behavior ethical? Would your answer be different if the president had been concerned about reported profits and asked all of the employees to work overtime to ship out merchandise that had been ordered at the end of the year?

Evaluating an Ethical Dilemma: Fair Advertising The New York State Lottery Commission ran the following advertisement in a number of New York newspapers:

The Lotto jackpot for Wednesday, August 25, 1999, will be $3 million including interest earned over a 20 year payment period. Constant payments will be made each year. Explain the meaning of this advertisement in your own words. Evaluate the “fairness” of this advertisement. Could anyone be misled? Do you agree that the lottery winner has won $3 million? If not, what amount is more accurate? State any assumptions you make.

for bott company the amount of investments reported on the balance sheet at year end 558818

Bott Company acquired 500 shares of stock of Barus Company at $50 per share as a long term investment. This represents 10 percent of the outstanding voting shares of Barus. During the year, Barus paid stockholders $2 per share in dividends. At year end, Barus reported net income of $40,000. Barus’s stock price at the end of the year was $53 per share. For Bott Company, the amount of investments reported on the balance sheet at year end and the amount reported on the income statement for the year are:

Balance Sheet

Income Statement

a. $26,500

$1,000

b. $25,000

$1,000

c. $28,000

$4,000

d. $26,500

$4,000

bott company acquired 500 shares of stock of barus company at 50 per share as a long 558819

Bott Company acquired 500 shares of stock of Barus Company at $50 per share as a long term investment. This represents 40 percent of the outstanding voting shares of Barus. During the year, Barus paid stockholders $2 per share in dividends. At year end, Barus reported net income of $40,000. Barus’s stock price at the end of the year was $53 per share. For Bott Company, the amount of investments reported on the balance sheet at year end and the amount reported on the income statement for the year are:

Balance Sheet

Income Statement

a. $26,500

$1,000

b. $26,000

$0

c. $40,000

$16,000

d. $26,500

$16,000

compute the economic return from investing ratio for 2012 2013 and 2014 what do the 558831

Computing and Interpreting Economic Return from Investing Ratio N.M.S. Company held securities available for sale and reported the following information at the end of each year:

Year

Dividend Revenue

Ending Fair Value of Investments

2011

$1,500

$64,000

2012

3,000

70,000

2013

4,200

82,000

2014

3,500

80,000

Compute the economic return from investing ratio for 2012, 2013, and 2014. What do the results suggest about N.M.S. Company?

what amount of unrealized loss should company a report at the end of the first year 558834

Comparing Fair Value and Equity Methods Company A purchased a certain number of Company B’s outstanding voting shares at $20 per share as a long term investment. Company B had outstanding 20,000 shares of $10 par value stock. Complete the following table relating to the measurement and reporting by Company A after acquisition of the shares of Company B stock.

Questions

Fair Value Method

Equity
Method

a. What level of ownership by Company A of Company B is required to apply the method?

%

%

For b, e, f, and g, assume the following:

Number of shares acquired of Company B stock

2,500

7,000

Net income reported by Company B in first year

$59,000

$59,000

Dividends declared by Company B in first year

$12,000

$12,000

Market price at end of first year, Company B stock

$17

$17

b. At acquisition, the investment account on the books of Company A should be debited at what amount? $_____ $_____

c. When should Company A recognize revenue earned on the stock of Company B? Explanation required. _____ _____

d. After the acquisition date, how should Company A change the balance of the investment account with respect to the stock owned in Company B (other than for disposal of the investment)? Explanation required. _____ _____

e. What is the balance in the investment account on the balance sheet of Company A at the end of the first year? $_____ $_____

f. What amount of revenue from the investment in Company B should Company A report at the end of the first year? $_____ $_____

g. What amount of unrealized loss should Company A report at the end of the first year? $_____ $_____

prepare any journal entries that are required by the facts presented in this case 558835

Recording Transactions in the Available for Sale Securities Portfolio – On June 30, 2011, Slick Books, Inc., purchased 9,000 shares of Syntax stock for $20 per share. Management recorded the stock in the securities available for sale portfolio. The following information pertains to the price per share of Syntax stock:

Price

12/31/2011

$24

12/31/2012

29

12/31/2013

26

Slick Books sold all of the Syntax stock on February 14, 2014, at a price of $23 per share. Prepare any journal entries that are required by the facts presented in this case.

show how the long term investment and the related revenue should be reported on the 558839

Recording and Reporting an Equity Method Investment Gioia Company acquired some of the 65,000 shares of outstanding common stock (no par) of Tristezza Corporation during 2011 as a long term investment. The annual accounting period for both companies ends December 31. The following transactions occurred during 2011:

Jan. 10 Purchased 17,875 shares of Tristezza common stock at $11 per share.

Dec. 31 a. Received the 2011 financial statements of Tristezza Corporation that reported net income of $80,000.

b. Tristezza Corporation declared and paid a cash dividend of $0.60 per share.

c. Determined the market price of Tristezza stock to be $10 per share.

Required:

1. What accounting method should the company use? Why?

2. Give the journal entries for each of these transactions. If no entry is required, explain why.

3. Show how the long term investment and the related revenue should be reported on the 2011 financial statements (balance sheet and income statement) of the Gioia Company.

should starbucks prepare a journal entry if the fair value of the bonds decreased to 558841

Determining Financial Statement Effects for Bonds Held to Maturity Starbucks is a global company that provides high quality coffee products. Assume that as part of its expansion strategy, Starbucks plans to open numerous new stores in Mexico in three years. The company has $7 million to support the expansion and has decided to invest the funds in corporate bonds until the money is needed. Assume that Starbucks purchased bonds with $7 million face value at par for cash on July 1, 2012. The bonds pay 7 percent interest each June 30 and December 31 and mature in three years. Starbucks plans to hold the bonds until maturity.

Required:

1. What accounts are affected when the bonds are purchased on July 1, 2012?

2. What accounts are affected when interest is received on December 31, 2012?

3. Should Starbucks prepare a journal entry if the fair value of the bonds decreased to $6,000,000 on December 31, 2012? Explain.

collected cash from a customer for services that will be performed in the next accou 558637

Determining Cash Flow Effects For each of the following transactions, determine whether cash flows from operating activities will increase, decrease, or remain the same:

a. Purchased merchandise on credit.

b. Paid an account payable in cash.

c. Accrued payroll for the month but did not pay it.

d. Borrowed money from the bank. The term of the note is 90 days.

e. Reclassified a long term note as a current liability.

f. Paid accrued interest expense.

g. Disclosed a contingent liability based on a pending lawsuit.

h. Paid back the bank for money borrowed in ( d ). Ignore interest.

i. Collected cash from a customer for services that will be performed in the next accounting period (i.e., deferred revenues are recorded).

as a financial analyst would you use the quick ratio before the reclassification or 558638

Analyzing the Reclassification of Debt PepsiCo, Inc., is a $25 billion company in the beverage, snack food, and restaurant businesses. PepsiCo’s annual report included the following note:

At year end, $3.5 billion of short term borrowings were reclassified as long term, reflecting PepsiCo’s intent and ability to refinance these borrowings on a long term basis, through either long term debt issuances or rollover of existing short term borrowings. As a result of this reclassification, PepsiCo’s quick ratio improved from 0.21 to 0.59. Do you think the reclassification was appropriate? Why do you think management made the reclassification? As a financial analyst, would you use the quick ratio before the reclassification or after the reclassification to evaluate PepsiCo’s liquidity?

compute the deferred income tax amount reported on the balance sheet for each year i 558639

Recording and Reporting Deferred Income Tax: Depreciation (Supplement B) Mansfield Corporation purchased a new warehouse at the beginning of 2011 for $1,000,000. The expected life of the asset is 20 years with no residual value. The company uses straight line depreciation for financial reporting purposes and accelerated depreciation for tax purposes (assume 10 percent of original cost for this problem). The company’s marginal federal income tax rate is 34 percent. The company determined its income tax obligation was as follows: 2011, $400,000; 2012, $625,000.

Required:

1. Compute the deferred income tax amount reported on the balance sheet for each year. Is the deferred income tax a liability or an asset? Explain.

2. Compute income tax expense for each year.

what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the not 558640

Computing Present Values On January 1, 2011, Boston Company completed the following transactions (use a 7 percent annual interest rate for all transactions):

a. Borrowed $115,000 for seven years. Will pay $8,050 interest at the end of each year and repay the $115,000 at the end of the 7th year.

b. Established a plant addition fund of $490,000 to be available at the end of year 8. A single sum that will grow to $490,000 will be deposited on January 1, 2011.

c. Agreed to pay a severance package to a discharged employee. The company will pay $75,000 at the end of the first year, $112,500 at the end of the second year, and $150,000 at the end of the third year.

d. Purchased a $170,000 machine on January 1, 2011, and paid cash, $40,000. A five year note payable is signed for the balance. The note will be paid in five equal year end payments starting on December 31, 2011.

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In transaction ( a ), determine the present value of the debt.

2. In transaction ( b ), what single sum amount must the company deposit on January 1, 2011? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

3. In transaction ( c ), determine the present value of this obligation.

4. In transaction ( d ), what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the note? What is the total amount of interest expense that will be incurred?

what is the company rsquo s fixed asset turnover ratio for the most recent year what 558578

Finding Financial Information Refer to the financial statements of Urban Outfitters given in Appendix C at the end of this book.

Required:

For each question, answer it and indicate where you located the information to answer the question.

1. What method of depreciation does the company use?

2. What is the amount of accumulated depreciation and amortization at the end of the most recent reporting year?

3. For depreciation purposes, what is the estimated useful life of furniture and fixtures?

4. What was the original cost of leasehold improvements owned by the company at the end of the most recent reporting year?

5. What amount of depreciation and amortization was reported as expense for the most recent reporting year?

6. What is the company’s fixed asset turnover ratio for the most recent year? What does it suggest?

compute the fixed asset turnover ratio for the most recent year presented for both c 558579

Comparing Companies within an Industry Refer to the financial statements of American Eagle Outfitters (Appendix B) and Urban Outfitters (Appendix C) and the Industry Ratio Report (Appendix D) at the end of this book.

Required:

1. Compute the percentage of net fixed assets to total assets for both companies for the most recent year. Why do the companies differ?

2. Compute the percentage of gross fixed assets that has been depreciated for both companies for the most recent year. Why do you think the percentages differ?

3. Compute the fixed asset turnover ratio for the most recent year presented for both companies. Which company has higher asset efficiency? Why?

4. Compare the fixed asset turnover ratio for both companies to the industry average. Are these companies doing better or worse than the industry average in asset efficiency?

which is the better deal and why 558585

The university spirit organization needs to buy a car to travel to football games. A dealership in Lockhart has agreed to the following terms: $4,000 down plus 20 monthly payments of $750. A dealership in Leander will agree to a $1,000 down payment plus 20 monthly payments of $850. The local bank is currently charging an annual interest rate of 12 percent for car loans. Which is the better deal, and why?

a. The Leander offer is better because the total payments of $18,000 are less than the total payments of $19,000 to be made to the Lockhart dealership.

b. The Lockhart offer is better because the cost in terms of present value is less than the present value cost of the Leander offer.

c. The Lockhart offer is better because the monthly payments are less.

d. The Leander offer is better because the cash down payment is less.

e. The Leander offer is better because the cost in terms of present value is less than the present value cost of the Lockhart offer.

would your computations be different if the company reported 250 000 worth of contin 558605

Computing Working Capital; Explaining the Quick Ratio and Working Capital Diane Corporation is preparing its 2012 balance sheet. The company records show the following selected amounts at the end of the accounting period, December 31, 2012:

Total assets

$530,000

Total noncurrent assets

362,000

Liabilities:

Notes payable (8%, due in 5 years)

15,000

Accounts payable

56,000

Income taxes payable

14,000

Liability for withholding taxes

3,000

Rent revenue collected in advance

7,000

Bonds payable (due in 15 years)

90,000

Wages payable

7,000

Property taxes payable

3,000

Note payable (10%, due in 6 months)

12,000

Interest payable

400

Common stock

100,000

Required:

1. Compute ( a ) working capital and ( b ) the quick ratio (quick assets are $70,000). Why is working capital important to management? How do financial analysts use the quick ratio?

2. Would your computations be different if the company reported $250,000 worth of contingent liabilities in the notes to the statements? Explain.

give a combined journal entry to show the payment of amounts owed to governmental ag 558606

Recording Payroll Costs Paul Company completed the salary and wage payroll for March 2011. The payroll provided the following details:

Salaries and wages earned

$200,000

Employee income taxes withheld

40,000

Insurance premiums withheld

1,000

FICA payroll taxes*

15,000

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the payroll for March, including employee deductions.

2. Give the journal entry to record the employer’s payroll taxes.

3. Give a combined journal entry to show the payment of amounts owed to governmental agencies.

what amount of additional labor expense to the company was due to tax laws what was 558607

Computing Payroll Costs; Discussion of Labor Costs Oaks Company has completed the payroll for January 2012, reflecting the following data:

Salaries and wages earned

$86,000

Employee income taxes withheld

10,000

FICA payroll taxes*

6,000

Required:

1. What amount of additional labor expense to the company was due to tax laws? What was the amount of the employees’ take home pay?

2. List the liabilities and their amounts reported on the company’s January 31, 2012, balance sheet, assuming the employees have been paid.

3. Would employers react differently to a 10 percent increase in the employer’s share of FICA than to a 10 percent increase in the basic level of salaries? Would financial analysts react differently?

if neiman marcus needs extra cash during every christmas season should management bo 558608

Recording a Note Payable through Its Time to Maturity with Discussion of Management Strategy Many businesses borrow money during periods of increased business activity to finance inventory and accounts receivable. Neiman Marcus is one of America’s most prestigious retailers. Each Christmas season, Neiman Marcus builds up its inventory to meet the needs of Christmas shoppers. A large portion of these Christmas sales are on credit. As a result, Neiman Marcus often collects cash from the sales several months after Christmas. Assume that on November 1, 2011, Neiman Marcus borrowed $4.8 million cash from Texas Capital Bank for working capital purposes and signed an interest bearing note due in six months. The interest rate was 8 percent per annum payable at maturity. The accounting period ends December 31.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the note on November 1.

2. Give any adjusting entry required at the end of the annual accounting period.

3. Give the journal entry to record payment of the note and interest on the maturity date, April 30, 2012.

4. If Neiman Marcus needs extra cash during every Christmas season, should management borrow money on a long term basis to avoid the necessity of negotiating a new short term loan each year?

if neiman marcus needs extra cash during every christmas season should management bo 558609

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Transactions Involving Notes Payable Using the data from the previous exercise, complete the following requirements.

Required:

1. Determine the financial statement effects for each of the following: ( a ) issuance of the note on November 1, ( b ) the impact of the adjusting entry at the end of the accounting period, and ( c ) payment of the note and interest on April 30, 2012. Indicate the effects (e.g., cash + or ) using the following schedule:

2. If Neiman Marcus needs extra cash during every Christmas season, should management borrow money on a long term basis to avoid the necessity of negotiating a new short term loan each year?

Date Assets Liabilities Stockholders’ Equity

what conditions should exist to permit a company to make this type of classification 558610

Reporting Short Term Borrowings PepsiCo, Inc., manufactures a number of products that are part of our daily lives. Its businesses include Pepsi, Frito Lay, Tropicana, Quaker, and Gatorade. The company’s annual revenues exceed $22 billion. A recent PepsiCo annual report contained the following information:

At the end of the current year, $3.6 billion of short term borrowings were classified as long term, reflecting PepsiCo’s intent and ability to refinance these borrowings on a long term basis, through either long term debt issuances or rollover of existing short term borrowings. The significant amount of short term borrowings classified as long term, as compared to the end of the previous year when no such amounts were reclassified, primarily reflects the large commercial paper issuances in the current year but also resulted from a refined analysis of amounts expected to be refinanced beyond one year.

Required:

As an analyst, comment on the company’s classification of short term borrowings as long term liabilities. What conditions should exist to permit a company to make this type of classification?

what amount of cash is paid on the maturity date of the note 558612

Determining the Impact of Transactions, Including Analysis of Cash Flows Vernon Company sells a wide range of goods through two retail stores operated in adjoining cities. Most purchases of goods for resale are on invoices. Occasionally, a short term note payable is used to obtain cash for current use. The following transactions were selected from those occurring during 2012:

a. Purchased merchandise on credit, $18,000 on January 10, 2012; the company uses a periodic inventory system.

b. Borrowed $45,000 cash on March 1, 2012, from City Bank and gave an interest bearing note payable:

face amount, $45,000, due at the end of six months, with an annual interest rate of 10 percent payable at maturity.

Required:

1. Describe the impact of each transaction on the balance sheet equation. Indicate the effects (e.g., cash + or ), using the following schedule:

Date Assets Liabilities Stockholders’ Equity

2. What amount of cash is paid on the maturity date of the note?

3. Discuss the impact of each transaction on Vernon’s cash flows.

should mcdonald rsquo s report lease obligations on its balance sheet explain if the 558613

Reporting a Liability McDonald’s is one of the world’s most popular fast food restaurants, offering good food and convenient locations. Effective management of its properties is a key to its success. As the following note in its current annual report indicates, McDonald’s both owns and leases property:

The Company owns and leases real estate primarily in connection with its restaurant business. The Company identifies and develops sites that offer convenience to customers and long term sales and profit potential to the Company. The Company generally owns the land and building or secures long term leases for restaurant sites, which ensures long term occupancy rights and helps control related costs.

Required:

Should McDonald’s report lease obligations on its balance sheet? Explain. If the obligation should be reported as a liability, how should the amount be measured?

that way we can get the assets we want without having to record a liability on the b 558614

Evaluating Lease Alternatives As the new vice president for consumer products at Heffner Manufacturing, you are attending a meeting to discuss a serious problem associated with delivering merchandise to customers. Bob Smith, director of logistics, summarized the problem: “It”s easy to understand, we just don”t have enough delivery trucks given our recent growth.” Barb Bader from the accounting department responded: “Maybe it”s easy to understand but it”s impossible to do anything. Because of Wall Street”s concern about the amount of debt on our balance sheet, we”re under a freeze and can”t borrow money to acquire new assets. There”s nothing we can do.” On the way back to your office after the meeting, your assistant offers a suggestion: “Why don”t we just lease the trucks we need? That way we can get the assets we want without having to record a liability on the balance sheet.” How would you respond to this suggestion?

is the deferred tax liability reported on the 2008 balance sheet 111 1 million expla 558618

Reporting Deferred Income Taxes (Supplement B) The annual report for Starbucks contains the following information (in millions):

Income Taxes

The provision for income taxes consisted of the following (in millions):

2008

2007

2006

Current income taxes

$255.10

$423.20

$402.40

Deferred Taxes

111.1

39.5

77.6

Total

$144.00

$383.70

$324.80

Required:

1. Determine whether tax expense is higher or lower than taxes payable for each year.

2. Is the deferred tax liability reported on the 2008 balance sheet $111.1 million? Explain.

what single sum must be deposited in the bank on january 1 2011 558619

Computing Four Present Value Problems On January 1, 2011, Shannon Company completed the following transactions (assume a 10 percent annual interest rate):

a. Bought a delivery truck and agreed to pay $50,000 at the end of three years.

b. Rented an office building and was given the option of paying $10,000 at the end of each of the next three years or paying $28,000 immediately.

c. Established a savings account by depositing a single amount that will increase to $40,000 at the end of seven years.

d. Decided to deposit a single sum in the bank that will provide 10 equal annual year end payments of $15,000 to a retired employee (payments starting December 31, 2011).

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In ( a ), what is the cost of the truck that should be recorded at the time of purchase?

2. In ( b ), which option for the office building should the company select?

3. In ( c ), what single amount must be deposited in this account on January 1, 2011?

4. In ( d ), what single sum must be deposited in the bank on January 1, 2011?

what will be the balance in the savings account at the end of the 10th year i e afte 558629

Recording Growth in a Savings Account with Equal Periodic Payments (Supplement C) On each December 31, you plan to deposit $2,000 in a savings account. The account will earn 9 percent annual interest, which will be added to the fund balance at year end. The first deposit will be made December 31, 2011 (end of period).

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. Give the required journal entry on December 31, 2011.

2. What will be the balance in the savings account at the end of the 10th year (i.e., after 10 deposits)?

3. What is the interest earned on the 10 deposits?

4. How much interest revenue did the fund earn in 2012? 2013?

5. Give all required journal entries at the end of 2012 and 2013.

how much interest revenue did the fund earn in 2011 2012 2013 and 2014 558630

Computing Growth for a Savings Fund with Periodic Deposits (Supplement C) On January 1, 2011, you plan to take a trip around the world upon graduation four years from now. Your grandmother wants to deposit sufficient funds for this trip in a savings account for you. On the basis of a budget, you estimate that the trip currently would cost $15,000. To be generous, your grandmother decides to deposit $3,500 in the fund at the end of each of the next four years, starting on December 31, 2011. The savings account will earn 6 percent annual interest, which will be added to the savings account at each year end.

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. How much money will you have for the trip at the end of year 4 (i.e., after four deposits)?

2. What is the interest for the four years?

3. How much interest revenue did the fund earn in 2011, 2012, 2013, and 2014?

prepare all adjusting entries required on december 31 2011 558631

Recording and Reporting Current Liabilities Vigeland Company completed the following transactions during 2011. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2011. Jan. 15 Purchased and paid for merchandise for resale at an invoice cost of $14,200; periodic inventory system.

Apr. 1 Borrowed $700,000 from Summit Bank for general use; executed a 10 month, 8 percent interest bearing note payable.

June 14 Received a $15,000 customer deposit from Mark Muller for services to be performed in the future.

July 15 Performed $3,750 of the services paid for by Mr. Muller.

Dec. 12 Received electric bill for $27,860. The company will pay it in early January.

31 Determined wages of $15,000 earned but not yet paid on December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2011.

show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the 558632

Recording and Reporting Current Liabilities with Discussion of Cash Flow Effects Rogers Company completed the following transactions during 2011. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2011.

Jan. 8 Purchased merchandise for resale on account at an invoice cost of $14,860; assume a periodic inventory system. 17 Paid January 8 invoice.

Apr. 1 Borrowed $35,000 from National Bank for general use; executed a 12 month, 12 percent interest bearing note payable.

June 3 Purchased merchandise for resale on account at an invoice cost of $17,420. July 5 Paid June 3 invoice.

Aug. 1 Rented a small office in a building owned by the company and collected six months’ rent in advance amounting to $6,000. (Record the collection in a way that will not require an adjusting entry at year end.)

Dec. 20 Received a $100 deposit from a customer as a guarantee to return a large trailer “borrowed” for 30 days.

31 Determined wages of $9,500 earned but not yet paid on December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2011.

3. Show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

4. For each transaction, state whether cash flow from operating activities is increased or decreased or whether there is no effect.

explain why the accrual method of accounting provides more relevant information to f 558634

Recording and Reporting Accrued Liabilities and Deferred Revenue with Discussion During 2012, Walnut Company completed the following two transactions. The annual accounting period ends December 31.

a. Paid and recorded wages of $130,000 during 2012; however, at the end of December 2012, three days’ wages are unpaid and unrecorded because the weekly payroll will not be paid until January 6, 2013. Wages for the three days are $4,000.

b. Collected rent revenue on December 10, 2012, of $2,400 for office space that Walnut rented to another party. The rent collected was for 30 days from December 10, 2012, to January 10, 2013, and was credited in full to Rent Revenue.

Required:

1. Give ( a ) the adjusting entry required on December 31, 2012, and ( b ) the January 6, 2013, journal entry for payment of any unpaid wages from December 2012.

2. Give ( a ) the journal entry for the collection of rent on December 10, 2012, and ( b ) the adjusting entry on December 31, 2012.

3. Show how any liabilities related to these transactions should be reported on the company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

4. Explain why the accrual method of accounting provides more relevant information to financial analysts than the cash method.

explain why the accrual method of accounting provides more relevant information to f 558635

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Transactions Involving Accrued Liabilities and Deferred Revenue Using the data from the previous exercise, complete the following requirements.

Required:

1. Determine the financial statement effects for each of the following: ( a ) the adjusting entry for accrued wages required on December 31, 2012, ( b ) the January 6, 2013, journal entry for payment of any unpaid wages from December 2012, ( c ) the journal entry for the collection of rent on December 10, 2012, and ( d ) the adjusting entry for rent on December 31, 2012. Indicate the effects (e.g., cash + or ) using the following schedule:

Date Assets Liabilities Stockholders’ Equity

2. Explain why the accrual method of accounting provides more relevant information to financial analysts than the cash method.

doors down maintains a constant 50 percent dividend payout ratio 556282

EFN The most recent financial statements for 2 Doors Down, Inc., are shown here:

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$3,100

Assets

$4,000

Current liabilities

$ 750

Costs

2,600

Fixed

3,000

Long term debt

1,250

Taxable income

$ 500

Total

$7,000

Equity

5,000

Taxes (34%)

170

Total

$7,000

Net income

$ 330

Assets, costs, and current liabilities are proportional to sales. Long term debt and equity are not. 2 Doors Down maintains a constant 50 percent dividend payout ratio. Like every other firm in its industry, next year’s sales are projected to increase by exactly 16%. What is the external financing needed?

assets and costs are proportional to sales debt and equity are not barely heroes mai 556283

Calculating Internal Growth

The most recent financial statements for Barely Heroes Co. are shown here:

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$6,475

Current assets

$ 9,000

Debt

$22,000

Costs

3,981

Fixed assets

25,000

Equity

12,000

Taxable income

$2,494

Total

$34,000

Total

$34,000

Taxes (34%)

848

Net income

$1,646

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. Barely Heroes maintains a constant 20 percent dividend payout ratio. No external equity financing is possible. What is the internal growth rate?

what is the maximum increase in sales that can be sustained assuming no new equity i 556285

Sales and Growth

The most recent financial statements for Tool Co. are shown here:

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$46,000

Net working capital

$ 21,000

Long term debt

$ 60,000

Costs

30,400

Fixed assets

100,000

Equity

61,000

Taxable income

$15,600

Total

$121,000

Total

$121,000

Taxes (34%)

5,304

Net income

$10,296

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Tool Co. maintains a constant 30 percent dividend payout ratio and a constant debt equity ratio. What is the maximum increase in sales that can be sustained assuming no new equity is issued?

what is the projected addition to retained earnings 556286

Calculating Retained Earnings from Pro Forma Income

Consider the following income statement for the Heir Jordan Corporation:

HEIR JORDAN CORPORATION

Income Statement

Sales

$24,000

Costs

13,500

Taxable income

$10,500

Taxes (34%)

3,570

Net income

$ 6,930

Dividends

$2,426

Addition to retained earnings

4,504

A20 percent growth rate in sales is projected. Prepare a pro forma income statement assuming costs vary with sales and the dividend payout ratio is constant. What is the projected addition to retained earnings?

assume that accounts payable vary with sales whereas notes payable do not put where 556287

Applying Percentage of Sales

The balance sheet for the Heir Jordan Corporation follows. Based on this information and the income statement in the previous= problem, supply the missing information using the percentage of sales approach. Assume that accounts payable vary with sales, whereas notes payable do not. Put &where needed.

HEIR JORDAN CORPORATION

Balance Sheet

$

Percentage of Sales

$

Percentage of Sales

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets

Current liabilities

Cash

$ 3,525

Accounts payable

$ 3,000

Accounts receivable

7,500

Notes payable

7,500

Inventory

6,000

Total

$10,500

Total

$17,025

Long term debt

$19,500

Fixed assets

Owners’ equity

Net plant and

Common stock and paid in surplus

$15,000

equipment

$30,000

Retained earnings

2,025

Total assets

$47,025

Total

$17,025

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$47,025

what will be the net effect of changing estimates on the balance sheet net income an 558562

Computing the Effect of a Change in Useful Life and Residual Value on Financial Statements and Cash Flows (Straight Line Depreciation) – Burbank Company owns the building occupied by its administrative office. The office building was reflected in the accounts at the end of last year as follows:

Cost when acquired

$330,000

Accumulated depreciation (based on straight line depreciation, an estimated life of 50 years, and a $30,000 residual value)

78,000

During January of this year, on the basis of a careful study, management decided that the total estimated useful life should be changed to 30 years (instead of 50) and the residual value reduced to $22,500 (from $30,000). The depreciation method will not change.

Required:

1. Compute the annual depreciation expense prior to the change in estimates.

2. Compute the annual depreciation expense after the change in estimates.

3. What will be the net effect of changing estimates on the balance sheet, net income, and cash flows for the year?

explain the basis you used for any questionable items 558563

Explaining the Nature of a Long Lived Asset and Determining and Recording the Financial Statement Effects of Its Purchase On January 2, 2012, Cruz Company bought a machine for use in operations. The machine has an estimated useful life of eight years and an estimated residual value of $2,600. The company provided the following expenditures:

a. Invoice price of the machine, $85,000.

b. Freight paid by the vendor per sales agreement, $1,000.

c. Installation costs, $2,400 paid in cash.

d. Payment was made as follows:

On January 2:

¦The installation costs were paid in cash.

¦Cruz Company common stock, par $1; 2,000 shares (market value, $3.50 per share).

¦Note payable, $45,000; 11.5 percent due April 16, 2012 (principal plus interest).

¦Balance of invoice price to be paid in cash. The invoice allows for a 3 percent discount for cash paid by January 12. On January 15:

¦Cruz Company paid the balance due.

Required:

1. What are the classifications of long lived assets? Explain their differences.

2. Record the purchase on January 2 and the subsequent payment on January 15. Show computations.

3. Indicate the accounts, amounts, and effects ( + for increase and for decrease) of the purchase and subsequent cash payment on the accounting equation. Use the following structure:

Date Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

4. Explain the basis you used for any questionable items.

computing the acquisition cost and recording depreciation under three alternative me 558564

Computing the Acquisition Cost and Recording Depreciation under Three Alternative Methods At the beginning of the year, Plummer’s Sports Center bought three used fitness machines from Advantage, Inc. The machines immediately were overhauled, installed, and started operating. The machines were different; therefore, each had to be recorded separately in the accounts.

Machine A

Machine B

Machine C

Amount paid for asset

$11,000

$30,000

$8,000

Installation costs

500

1,000

500

Renovation costs prior to use

2,500

1,000

1,500

By the end of the first year, each machine had been operating 4,800 hours.

Required:

1. Compute the cost of each machine.

2. Give the entry to record depreciation expense at the end of year 1, assuming the following:

ESTIMATES

Machine

Life

Residual Value

Depreciation Method

A

5 years

$1,000

Straight line

B

60,000 hours

2,000

Units of production

C

4 years

1,500

Double declining balance

would your recommendation change for year 2 why or why not 558565

Evaluating the Effect of Alternative Depreciation Methods on Key Ratios from an Analyst’s Perspective You are a financial analyst for Ford Motor Company and have been asked to determine the impact of alternative depreciation methods. For your analysis, you have been asked to compare methods based on a machine that cost $106,000. The estimated useful life is 13 years, and the estimated residual value is $2,000. The machine has an estimated useful life in productive output of 200,000 units. Actual output was 20,000 in year 1 and 16,000 in year 2.

Required:

1. For years 1 and 2 only, prepare separate depreciation schedules assuming:

a. Straight line method.

b. Units of production method.

c. Double declining balance method.

Method:

Year

Computation

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation

Net Book Value

At acquisition

1

2

2. Evaluate each method in terms of its effect on cash flow, fixed asset turnover, and EPS. Assuming that Ford Motor Company is most interested in reducing taxes and maintaining a high EPS for year 1, what would you recommend to management? Would your recommendation change for year 2? Why or why not?

explain the accounting rationale for the way that you recorded each disposal 558566

Recording and Interpreting the Disposal of Three Long Lived Assets – During 2012, Jensen Company disposed of three different assets. On January 1, 2012, prior to their disposal, the accounts reflected the following:

Asset

Original Cost

Residual Value

Estimated Life

Accumulated Depreciation (straight line)

Machine A

$21,000

$3,000

8 years

$13,500 (6 years)

Machine B

41,000

4,000

10 years

29,600 (8 years)

Machine C

75,000

5,000

15 years

56,000 (12 years)

The machines were disposed of in the following ways:

a. Machine A: Sold on January 1, 2012, for $7,200 cash.

b. Machine B: Sold on December 31, 2012, for $8,500; received cash, $2,500, and a $6,000 interestbearing (12 percent) note receivable due at the end of 12 months.

c. Machine C: On January 1, 2012, this machine suffered irreparable damage from an accident. On January 10, 2012, a salvage company removed the machine at no cost.

Required:

1. Give all journal entries related to the disposal of each machine in 2012.

2. Explain the accounting rationale for the way that you recorded each disposal.

inferring activities affecting fixed assets from notes to the financial statements a 558567

Inferring Activities Affecting Fixed Assets from Notes to the Financial Statements and Analyzing the Impact of Depreciation on Cash Flows Singapore Airlines reported the following information in the notes to a recent annual report (in Singapore dollars):

SINGAPORE AIRLINES
Notes to the Accounts
19. Property, Plant and Equipment (in $ millions)
The Company

Beginning
of Year

Additions

Disposals/
Transfers

End
of Year

Cost

Aircraft

18,180.10

2,257.20

1,730.30

18,707.00

Other fixed assets (summarized)

6,659.10

2,160.80

2,399.00

6,420.90

24,839.20

4,418.00

4,129.30

25,127.90

Beginning
of Year

Depreciation

Impairment
Loss

Disposals/
Transfers

End
of Year

Accumulated depreciation

Aircraft

5,634.20

1,427.10

41.4

843.9

6,258.80

Other fixed assets (summarized)

2,730.90

385.2

––

239.4

2,876.70

8,365.10

1,812.30

41.4

1,083.30

9,135.50

Singapore Airlines also reported the following cash flow details:

Cash Flow from Operating Activities (in $ millions)

Current Year

Prior Year

Profit before taxation

1,198.60

2,547.20

Adjustments for

Depreciation

1,812.30

1,488.80

Impairment loss

41.4

Surplus (gain) on disposal of fixed assets

62.7

49.1

Other adjustments (summarized)

1,544.20

414.9

Cash generated from operations

1,445.40

4,401.80

Required:

1. Reconstruct the information in Note 19 using T accounts for Fixed Assets and Accumulated Depreciation:

Fixed Assets

Accumulated Depreciation

Beg. balance

Beg. balance

Acquisitions

Disposals/transfers

Disposals/transfers

Depreciation expense

End. balance

Impairment loss

End. balance

2. Compute the amount of cash the company received for disposals and transfers for the current year. Show computations.

3. Compute the percentage of depreciation expense to cash flows from operations for the current year. What do you interpret from the result?

for each of these assets except the assets not detailed in b compute depreciation an 558568

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Activities Related to Various Long Lived Assets During the 2011 annual accounting period, BSP Company completed the following transactions:

a. On January 1, 2011, purchased a patent for $28,000 cash (estimated useful life, seven years).

b. On January 1, 2011, purchased the assets (not detailed) of another business for $164,000 cash, including $10,000 for goodwill. The company assumed no liabilities. Goodwill has an indefinite life.

c. On December 31, 2011, constructed a storage shed on land leased from D. Heald. The cost was $15,600. The company uses straight line depreciation. The lease will expire in three years. (Amounts spent to enhance leased property are capitalized as intangible assets called Leasehold Improvements.)

d. Total expenditures during 2011 for ordinary repairs and maintenance were $5,500.

e. On December 31, 2011, sold Machine A for $6,000 cash. Original cost on January 1, 2010, was $25,000; accumulated depreciation (straight line) to December 31, 2010, was $16,000 ($5,000 residual value and five year useful life).

f. On December 31, 2011, paid $5,000 for a complete reconditioning of Machine B acquired on January 1, 2010. Original cost, $31,000; accumulated depreciation (straight line) to December 31, 2010, $1,600 ($7,000 residual value and 15 year useful life).

Required:

1. For each of these transactions, indicate the accounts, amounts, and effects ( + for increase and – for decrease) on the accounting equation. Use the following structure:

Date Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

2. For each of these assets, except the assets not detailed in ( b ), compute depreciation and amortization to be recorded at the end of the year on December 31, 2011.

compute the amount of goodwill resulting from the purchase 558569

Business Acquisitions During the current year, the Company acquired the assets of Sport Shoes, Inc. . . Assume that Weebok acquired Sport Shoes on January 5, 2010. Weebok acquired the name of the company and all of its assets for $500,000 cash. Weebok did not assume the liabilities. The transaction was closed on January 5, 2010, at which time the balance sheet of Sport Shoes reflected the following book values and an independent appraiser estimated the following market values for the assets:

Sport Shoes, Inc.

5 Jan 10

Book Value

Market Value*

Accounts receivable (net)

$41,000

$41,000

Inventory

215,000

200,000

Fixed assets (net)

33,000

50,000

Other assets

4,000

10,000

Total assets

$293,000

Liabilities

$55,000

Stockholders’ equity

238,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$293,000

Required:

1. Compute the amount of goodwill resulting from the purchase.

2. Compute the adjustments that Weebok would make at the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2010, for the following:

a. Depreciation of the fixed assets (straight line), assuming an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years and no residual value.

b. Goodwill (an intangible asset with an indefinite life).

compute the amount of amortization that should be recorded for each intangible asset 558570

Computing Amortization, Book Value, and Asset Impairment Related to Different Intangible Assets Starn Tool Company has five different intangible assets to be accounted for and reported on the financial statements. The management is concerned about the amortization of the cost of each of these intangibles. Facts about each intangible follow:

a. Patent. The company purchased a patent at a cash cost of $55,900 on January 1, 2011. The patent has an estimated useful life of 13 years.

b. Copyright. On January 1, 2011, the company purchased a copyright for $22,500 cash. It is estimated that the copyrighted item will have no value by the end of 10 years.

c. Franchise. The company obtained a franchise from McKenna Company to make and distribute a special item. It obtained the franchise on January 1, 2011, at a cash cost of $14,400 for a 10 year period.

d. License. On January 1, 2010, the company secured a license from the city to operate a special service for a period of five years. Total cash expended to obtain the license was $14,000.

e. Goodwill. The company started business in January 2008 by purchasing another business for a cash lump sum of $400,000. Included in the purchase price was “Goodwill, $40,000.” Company executives stated that “the goodwill is an important long lived asset to us.” It has an indefinite life.

Required:

1. Compute the amount of amortization that should be recorded for each intangible asset at the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2011.

2. Give the book value of each intangible asset on December 31, 2012.

3. Assume that on January 2, 2013, the copyrighted item was impaired in its ability to continue to produce strong revenues. The other intangible assets were not affected. Starn estimated that the copyright would be able to produce future cash flows of $17,000. The fair value of the copyright was determined to be $16,000. Compute the amount, if any, of the impairment loss to be recorded.

compute the amount of depreciation that should be recorded in 2011 show computations 558571

Analyzing and Recording Entries Related to a Change in Estimated Life and Residual Value Rungano Corporation is a global publisher of magazines, books, and music and video collections and is a leading direct mail marketer. Many direct mail marketers use high speed Didde press equipment to print their advertisements. These presses can cost more than $1 million. Assume that Rungano owns a Didde press acquired at an original cost of $400,000. It is being depreciated on a straight line basis over a 20 year estimated useful life and has a $50,000 estimated residual value. At the end of 2010, the press had been depreciated for a full six years. In January 2011, a decision was made, on the basis of improved maintenance procedures, that a total estimated useful life of 25 years and a residual value of $73,000 would be more realistic. The accounting period ends December 31.

Required:

1. Compute ( a ) the amount of depreciation expense recorded in 2010 and ( b ) the book value of the printing press at the end of 2010.

2. Compute the amount of depreciation that should be recorded in 2011. Show computations (round amount to the nearest dollar).

3. Give the adjusting entry for depreciation at December 31, 2011.

explain the basis you used for any questionable items 558572

Explaining the Nature of a Long Lived Asset and Determining and Recording the Financial Statement Effects of Its Purchase On June 1, 2012, the Wallace Corp. bought a machine for use in operations. The machine has an estimated useful life of six years and an estimated residual value of $2,000. The company provided the following expenditures:

a. Invoice price of the machine, $60,000.

b. Freight paid by the vendor per sales agreement, $650.

c. Installation costs, $1,500.

d. Payment was made as follows:

On June 1:

¦The installation costs were paid in cash.

¦Wallace Corp. common stock, par $2; 2,000 shares (market value, $6 per share).

¦Balance of the invoice price on a note payable, 12 percent due September 2, 2012 (principal plus interest). On September 2:

¦Wallace Corp. paid the balance and interest due on the note payable.

Required:

1. What are the classifications of long lived assets? Explain their differences.

2. Record the purchase on June 1 and the subsequent payment on September 2. Show computations.

3. Indicate the accounts, amounts, and effects ( + for increase and for decrease) of the purchase and subsequent cash payment on the accounting equation. Use the following structure:

Date Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

4. Explain the basis you used for any questionable items.

computing the acquisition cost and recording depreciation under three alternative me 558573

Computing the Acquisition Cost and Recording Depreciation under Three Alternative Methods At the beginning of the year, Ramos Inc. bought three used machines from Santaro Corporation. The machines immediately were overhauled, installed, and started operating. The machines were different; therefore, each had to be recorded separately in the accounts.

Machine A

Machine B

Machine C

Cost of the asset

$12,200

$32,500

$21,700

Installation costs

800

1,100

1,100

Renovation costs prior to use

600

1,400

1,600

By the end of the first year, each machine had been operating 7,000 hours.

Required:

1. Compute the cost of each machine.

2. Give the entry to record depreciation expense at the end of year 1, assuming the following:

ESTIMATES

Machine

Life

Residual Value

Depreciation Method

A

8 years

$1,000

Straight line

B

33,000 hours

2,000

Units of production

C

5 years

1,400

Double declining balance

determining financial statement effects of activities related to various long lived 558575

Determining Financial Statement Effects of Activities Related to Various Long Lived Assets During the 2012 annual accounting period, Nguyen Corporation completed the following transactions:

a. On January 1, 2012, purchased a license for $7,200 cash (estimated useful life, four years).

b. On January 1, 2012, repaved the parking lot of the building leased from H. Lane. The cost was $17,800; the estimated useful life was five years with no residual value. The lease will expire in 10 years. (Amounts spent to enhance leased property are capitalized as intangible assets called Leasehold Improvements.)

c. On July 1, 2012, purchased another business for $120,000 cash. The transaction included $115,000 for the assets and $24,000 for the liabilities assumed by Nguyen. The remainder was goodwill with an indefinite life.

d. On December 31, 2012, sold Machine A for $6,000 cash. Original cost, $21,500; accumulated depreciation (straight line) to December 31, 2011, $13,500 ($3,500 residual value and four year life).

e. Total expenditures during 2012 for ordinary repairs and maintenance were $6,700.

f. On December 31, 2012, paid $8,000 for a complete reconditioning of Machine B acquired on January 1, 2009. Original cost, $18,000; accumulated depreciation (straight line) to December 31, 2011, $12,000 ($2,000 residual value and four year life).

Required:

1. For each of these transactions, indicate the accounts, amounts, and effects ( + for increase and – for decrease) on the accounting equation. Use the following structure:

Date Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

2. For each of these assets, except the assets not detailed in (c), compute depreciation and amortization to be recorded at the end of the year on December 31, 2012.

compute the amount of amortization that should be recorded for each intangible asset 558576

Computing Amortization, Book Value, and Asset Impairment Related to Different Intangible Assets Carey Corporation has five different intangible assets to be accounted for and reported on the financial statements. The management is concerned about the amortization of the cost of each of these intangibles. Facts about each intangible follow:

a. Patent. The company purchased a patent at a cash cost of $18,600 on January 1, 2012. It is amortized over its expected useful life of 10 years.

b. Copyright. On January 1, 2012, the company purchased a copyright for $24,750 cash. It is estimated that the copyrighted item will have no value by the end of 30 years.

c. Franchise. The company obtained a franchise from Cirba Company to make and distribute a special item. It obtained the franchise on January 1, 2012, at a cash cost of $19,200 for a 12 year period.

d. License. On January 1, 2011, the company secured a license from the city to operate a special service for a period of seven years. Total cash expended to obtain the license was $21,700.

e. Goodwill. The company started business in January 2013 by purchasing another business for a cash lump sum of $650,000. Included in the purchase price was “Goodwill, $75,000.” Company executives stated that “the goodwill is an important long lived asset to us.” It has an indefinite life.

Required:

1. Compute the amount of amortization that should be recorded for each intangible asset at the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2012.

2. Give the book value of each intangible asset on January 1, 2015.

3. Assume that on January 2, 2015, the franchise was impaired in its ability to continue to produce strong revenues. The other intangible assets were not affected. Carey estimated that the franchise would be able to produce future cash flows of $13,500. The fair value of the franchise was determined to be $12,000. Compute the amount, if any, of the impairment loss to be recorded.

what is the company rsquo s fixed asset turnover ratio for fiscal 2008 558577

Finding Financial Information Refer to the financial statements of American Eagle Outfitters in Appendix B at the end of this book.

Required:

For each question, answer it and indicate where you located the information to answer the question.

1. How much did the company spend on property and equipment (capital expenditures) in fiscal 2008 (the year ended January 31, 2009)?

2. What is the typical estimated useful life of leasehold improvements for amortization purposes?

3. What was the original cost of fixtures and equipment held by the company at the end of the most recent reporting year?

4. What was the amount of depreciation and amortization reported as an expense for the current year? Compare this amount to the change in accumulated amortization and depreciation from fiscal 2007 to fiscal 2008. Why would these numbers be different?

5. What is the company’s fixed asset turnover ratio for fiscal 2008?

how do you interpret the standardized net income what percentage of sales goes to co 556211

Common Size Statements

Below is the most recent income statement for Philippe. Prepare a common size income statement based on this information. How do you interpret the standardized net income? What percentage of sales goes to cost of goods sold?

PHILIPPE CORPORATION

2002 Income Statement

($ in millions)

Sales

$4,053

Cost of goods sold

2,780

Depreciation

550

Earnings before interest and taxes

$ 723

Interest paid

502

Taxable income

$ 221

Taxes (34%)

75

Net income

$ 146

Dividends

$47

Addition to retained earnings

99

the major sources of cash to do this were additional long term borrowing reductions 556214

We’ve filled in the answers in the following table. Remember, increases in assets and decreases in liabilities indicate that we spent some cash. Decreases in assets and increases in liabilities are ways of getting cash. Philippe used its cash primarily to purchase fixed assets and to pay off short term debt. The major sources of cash to do this were additional long term borrowing, reductions in current assets, and additions to retained earnings.

PHILIPPE CORPORATION

Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2002

($ in millions)

2001

2002

Change

Source or

Assets

Use of Cash

Current assets

Cash

$ 210

$ 215

+ $ 5

Accounts receivable

355

310

45

Source

Inventory

507

328

179

Source

Total

$1,072

$ 853

$219

Use

Fixed assets

Net plant and equipment

$6,085

$6,527

+$442

Use

Total assets

$7,157

$7,380

+$223

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$ 207

$ 298

+$ 91

Source

Notes payable

1,715

1,427

288

Use

Total

$1,922

$1,725

$197

Long term debt

$1,987

$2,308

+$321

Source

Owners’ equity

Common stock and paid in surplus

$1,000

$1,000

+$ 0

Retained earnings

2,248

2,347

+99

Source

Total

$3,248

$3,347

+$ 99

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$7,157

$7,380

+$223

The current ratio went from $1,072/1,922 =. 56 to $853/1,72= .49, so the firm’s liquidity appears to have declined somewhat. Over all, however, the amount of cash on hand increased by $5.

we rsquo ve calculated the common size income statement below remember that we simpl 556215

We’ve calculated the common size income statement below. Remember that we simply divide each item by total sales.

PHILIPPE CORPORATION

2002 Common Size Income Statement

Sales

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

68.6

Depreciation

13.6

Earnings before interest and taxes

17.8

Interest paid

12.3

Taxable income

5.5

Taxes (34%)

1.9

Net income

3.6%

Dividends

1.2%

Addition to retained earnings

2.4%

Net income is 3.6 percent of sales. Because this is the percentage of each sales dollar that makes its way to the bottom line, the standardized net income is the firm’s profit margin. Cost of goods sold is 68.6 percent of sales.

we have calculated the following ratios based on the ending figures if you don rsquo 556216

We have calculated the following ratios based on the ending figures. If you don’t remember a definition, refer back to Table 3.8.

Current ratio

$853/$1,725

=.49 times

Quick ratio

$525/$1,725

=.30 times

Cash ratio

$215/$1,725

=.12 times

Inventory turnover

$2,780/$328

=8.48 times

Receivables turnover

$4,053/$310

=13.07 times

Days’ sales in inventory

365/8.48

= 43.06 days

Days’ sales in receivables

365/13.07

=27.92 days

Total debt ratio

$4,033/$7,380

=54.6%

Long term debt ratio

$2,308/$5,655

=40.8%

Times interest earned ratio

$723/$502

=1.44 times

Cash coverage ratio

$1,273/$502

=2.54 times

why might companies focus on same store sales rather than total sales 556226

Industry Specific Ratios So called “same store sales” are a very important measure for companies as diverse as McDonald’s and Sears. As the name suggests, examining same store sales means comparing revenues from the same stores or restaurants at two different points in time. Why might companies focus on same store sales rather than total sales?

10. Industry Specific Ratios There are many ways of using standardized financial information beyond those discussed in this chapter. The usual goal is to put firms on an equal footing for comparison purposes. For example, for auto manufacturers, it is common to express sales, costs, and profits on a per car basis. For each of the following industries, give an example of an actual company and discuss one or more potentially useful means of standardizing financial information:

a. Public utilities

b. Large retailers

c. Airlines

d. On line services

e. Hospitals

f. College textbook publishers

what is the equity multiplier return on equity net income 556238

Equity Multiplier and Return on Equity

Haselden Fried Chicken Company has a debt equity ratio of 1.10. Return on assets is 8.4 percent, and total equity is $440,000. What is the equity multiplier? Return on equity? Net income? Just Dew It Corporation reports the following balance sheet information for 2001 and 2002.

JUST DEW IT CORPORATION

Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2002

2001

2002

2001

2002

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets

Current liabilities

Cash

$ 9,201

$ 9,682

Accounts payable

$ 71,802

$ 56,382

Accounts receivable

28,426

29,481

Notes payable

36,108

50,116

Inventory

54,318

63,682

Total

$107,910

$106,498

Total

$ 91,945

$102,845

Long term debt

$ 50,000

$ 35,000

Fixed assets

Owners’ equity

Net plant and equipment

$296,418

$327,154

Common stock and

Total assets

$388,363

$429,999

paid in surplus

$ 75,000

$ 75,000

Retained earnings

155,453

213,501

Total

$230,543

$288,501

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$388,363

$429,999

preparing standardized financial statements 556239

Preparing Standardized Financial Statements

JUST DEW IT CORPORATION

Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2002

2001

2002

2001

2002

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets

Current liabilities

Cash

$ 9,201

$ 9,682

Accounts payable

$ 71,802

$ 56,382

Accounts receivable

28,426

29,481

Notes payable

36,108

50,116

Inventory

54,318

63,682

Total

$107,910

$106,498

Total

$ 91,945

$102,845

Long term debt

$ 50,000

$ 35,000

Fixed assets

Owners’ equity

Net plant and equipment

$296,418

$327,154

Common stock and

Total assets

$388,363

$429,999

paid in surplus

$ 75,000

$ 75,000

Retained earnings

155,453

213,501

Total

$230,543

$288,501

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$388,363

$429,999

evaluate the grocery chain claim what is the basis for the statement is this claim m 556245

Profit Margin

In response to complaints about high prices, a grocery chain runs the following advertising campaign: “If you pay your child 50 cents to go buy $25 worth of groceries, then your child makes twice as much on the trip as we do.” You’ve collected the following information from the grocery chain’s financial statements:

(millions)

Sales

$550.0

Net income

5.5

Total assets

140.0

Total debt

90.0

Evaluate the grocery chain claim. What is the basis for the statement? Is this claim misleading? Why or why not?

calculating financial ratios find the following financial ratios for smolira golf co 556251

Calculating Financial Ratios Find the following financial ratios for Smolira Golf Corp. (use year end figures rather than average values where appropriate):

Short term solvency

a. Current ratio

b. Quick ratio

c. Cash ratio

Asset utilization ratios

d. Total asset turnover

e. Inventory turnover

f. Receivables turnover

Long term solvency ratios

g. Total debt ratio

h. Debt equity ratio

i. Equity multiplier

j. Times interest earned ratio

k. Cash coverage ratio

Profitability ratios

l. Profit margin

m. Return on assets

n. Return on equity

do you notice any trends in these ratios which company appears to be operating at a 556258

Ratio Analysis Look under “Valuation” and download the “Profitability” spreadsheet for Southwest Airlines (LUV) and Continental Airlines (CAL). Find the ROA (Net ROA), ROE (Net ROE), PE ratio (P/E High and P/E low), and the market to book ratio (Price/Book high and Price/Book low) for each company. Since stock prices change daily, PE and market to book ratios are often reported as the highest and lowest values over the year, as is done in this instance. Look at these ratios for both companies over the past five years. Do you notice any trends in these ratios? Which company appears to be operating at a more efficient level based on these four ratios? If you were going to invest in an airline, which one (if either) of these companies would you choose based on this information? Why?

what are the basic components of a financial plan 556260

A Simple Financial Planning Model

We can begin our discussion of long term planning models with a relatively simple example. The Computer field Corporation’s financial statements from the most recent year are as follows:

COMPUTERFIELD CORPORATION

Financial Statements

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$1,000

Assets

$500

Debt

$250

Costs

800

Equity

250

Net income

$ 200

Total

$500

Total

$500

Unless otherwise stated, the financial planners at Computer field assume that all variables are tied directly to sales and current relationships are optimal. This means that all items will grow at exactly the same rate as sales. This is obviously oversimplified; we use this assumption only to make a point. Suppose sales increase by 20 percent, rising from $1,000 to $1,200. Planners would then also forecast a 20 percent increase in costs, from $800 to $800×1.2= $960. The pro forma income statement would thus be:

Pro Forma

Income Statement

Sales

$1,200

Costs

960

Net income

$ 240

The assumption that all variables will grow by 20 percent will enable us to easily construct the pro forma balance sheet as well:

Pro Forma Balance Sheet

Assets

$600 (+100)

Debt

$300 (+50)

Equity

300 (+50)

Total

$600 (+100)

Total

$600 (+100)

Notice we have simply increased every item by 20 percent. The numbers in parentheses are the dollar changes for the different items. Now we have to reconcile these two pro formas. How, for example, can net income be equal to $240 and equity increase by only $50? The answer is that Computer field must have paid out the difference of $240 50 = $190, possibly as a cash dividend. In this case, dividends are the plug variable. Suppose Computer field does not pay out the $190. In this case, the addition to retained earnings is the full $240. Computer field’s equity will thus grow to $250 (the starting amount) plus $240 (net income), or $490, and debt must be retired to keep total assets equal to $600. With $600 in total assets and $490 in equity, debt will have to be $600 490 = $110. Since we started with $250 in debt, Computer field will have to retire $250 110 = $140 in debt. The resulting pro forma balance sheet would look like this:

Pro Forma Balance Sheet

Assets

$600 (+100)

Debt

$110 ( 140)

Equity

490 (+240)

Total

$600 (+100)

Total

$600 (+100)

In this case, debt is the plug variable used to balance out projected total assets and liabilities. This example shows the interaction between sales growth and financial policy. As sales increase, so do total assets. This occurs because the firm must invest in net working capital and fixed assets to support higher sales levels. Because assets are growing, total liabilities and equity, the right hand side of the balance sheet, will grow as well. The thing to notice from our simple example is that the way the liabilities and owners’ equity change depends on the firm’s financing policy and its dividend policy. The growth in assets requires that the firm decide on how to finance that growth. This is strictly a managerial decision. Note that, in our example, the firm needed no outside funds. This won’t usually be the case, so we explore a more detailed situation in the next section.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What are the basic components of a financial plan?

b Why is it necessary to designate a plug in a financial planning model?

how is a firm rsquo s sustainable growth related to its accounting return on equity 556261

Profit Margins and Sustainable Growth

The Sandar Co. has a debt equity ratio of .5, a profit margin of 3 percent, a dividend payout ratio of 40 percent, and a capital intensity ratio of 1. What is its sustainable growth rate? If Sandar desired a 10 percent sustainable growth rate and planned to achieve this goal by improving profit margins, what would you think?

ROE is .03×1 ×1.5 = 4.5 percent. The retention ratio is 1 .40 =.60. Sustainable growth is thus .045(.60)/[1 .045(.60)] = 2.77 percent. For the company to achieve a 10 percent growth rate, the profit margin will have to rise. To see this, assume that sustainable growth is equal to 10 percent and then solve for profit margin, PM:

.10 = PM(1.5)(.6)/[1 PM(1.5)(.6)]

PM =.1/.99 = 10.1%

For the plan to succeed, the necessary increase in profit margin is substantial, from 3 percent to about 10 percent. This may not be feasible.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What are the determinants of growth?

b How is a firm’s sustainable growth related to its accounting return on equity (ROE)?

what are some important elements that are often missing in financial planning models 556262

Financial planning models do not always ask the right questions. A primary reason is that they tend to rely on accounting relationships and not financial relationships. In particular, the three basic elements of firm value tend to get left out, namely, cash flow size, risk, and timing. Because of this, financial planning models sometimes do not produce output that gives the user many meaningful clues about what strategies will lead to increases in value. Instead, they divert the user’s attention to questions concerning the association of, say, the debt equity ratio and firm growth. The financial model we used for the Hoffman Company was simple—in fact, too simple. Our model, like many in use today, is really an accounting statement generator at heart. Such models are useful for pointing out inconsistencies and reminding us of financial needs, but they offer very little guidance concerning what to do about these problems. In closing our discussion, we should add that financial planning is an iterative process. Plans are created, examined, and modified over and over. The final plan will be a result negotiated between all the different parties to the process. In fact, long term financial planning in most corporations relies on what might be called the Procrustes approach. 1 Upper level management has a goal in mind, and it is up to the planning staff to rework and to ultimately deliver a feasible plan that meets that goal. The final plan will therefore implicitly contain different goals in different areas and also satisfy many constraints. For this reason, such a plan need not be a dispassionate assessment of what we think the future will bring; it may instead be a means of reconciling the planned activities of different groups and a way of setting common goals for the future.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What are some important elements that are often missing in financial planning models?

b Why do we say planning is an iterative process?

what is efn if sales are predicted to grow by 10 percent use the percentage of sales 556263

Calculating EFN

Based on the following information for the Skandia Mining Company, what is EFN if sales are predicted to grow by 10 percent? Use the percentage of sales approach and assume the company is operating at full capacity. The payout ratio is constant.

SKANDIA MINING COMPANY

Financial Statements

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Sales

$4,250.0

Current assets

$ 900.0

Current liabilities

$ 500.0

Costs

3,875.0

Net fixed assets

2,200.0

Long term debt

1,800.0

Taxable income

$ 375.0

Total

$3,100.0

Owners’ equity

800.0

Taxes (34%)

127.5

Total liabilities and

Net income

$ 247.5

owners’ equity

$3,100.0

Dividends

$ 82.6

Addition to retained earnings

164.9

we can calculate efn by preparing the pro forma statements using the percentage of s 556266

We can calculate EFN by preparing the pro forma statements using the percentage of sales approach. Note that sales are forecasted to be $4,250 ×1.10 = $4,675.

SKANDIA MINING COMPANY

Pro Forma Financial Statements

Income Statement

Sales

$4,675.0

Forecast

Costs

4,262.7

91.18% of sales

Taxable income

$ 412.3

Taxes (34%)

140.2

Net income

$ 272.1

Dividends

$ 90.8

33.37% of net income

Addition to retained earnings

181.3

Balance Sheet

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets

$ 990.0

21.18%

Current liabilities

$ 550

11.76%

Net fixed assets

2,420.0

51.76%

Long term debt

1,800.0

n/a

Total assets

$3,410.0

72.94%

Owners’ equity

981.3

n/a

Total liabilities and

$3,331.3

n/a

EFN

owners’ equity

$ 78.7

n/a

full capacity sales are equal to current sales divided by the capacity utilization 556267

Full capacity sales are equal to current sales divided by the capacity utilization. At 60 percent of capacity:

$4,250 =.60 ×Full capacity sales

$7,083 =Full capacity sales

With a sales level of $4,675, no net new fixed assets will be needed, so our earlier estimate is too high. We estimated an increase in fixed assets of $2,420 2,200 = $220. The new EFN will thus be $78.7 220 = 2$141.3, a surplus. No external financing is needed in this case.

At 95 percent capacity, full capacity sales are $4,474. The ratio of fixed assets to full capacity sales is thus $2,200/4,474= 49.17%. At a sales level of $4,675, we will thus need $4,675 ×.4917 =$2,298.7 in net fixed assets, an increase of $98.7. This is $220 98.7 =$121.3 less than we originally predicted, so the EFN is now $78.7 121.3 =2$42.6, a surplus. No additional financing is needed.

why what happens to the projected efn if the retention ratio is increased what if th 556271

EFN and Growth Rates

Broslofski Co. maintains a positive retention ratio and keeps its debt equity ratio constant every year. When sales grow by 20 percent, the firm has a negative projected EFN. What does this tell you about the firm’s sustainable growth rate? Do you know, with certainty, if the internal growth rate is greater than or less than 20 percent? Why? What happens to the projected EFN if the retention ratio is increased? What if the retention ratio is decreased? What if the retention ratio is zero?

Use the following information to answer the next six questions: A small business called The Grandmother Calendar Company began selling personalized photo calendar kits in 1992. The kits were a hit, and sales soon sharply exceeded forecasts. The rush of orders created a huge backlog, so the company leased more space and expanded capacity, but it still could not keep up with demand. Equipment failed from overuse and quality suffered. Working capital was drained to expand production, and, at the same time, payments from customers were often delayed until the product was shipped. Unable to deliver on orders, the company became so strapped for cash that employee paychecks began to bounce. Finally, out of cash, the company ceased operations entirely in January 1995.

lafferty ranch has predicted a sales increase of 10 percent it has predicted that ev 556278

Pro Forma Statements Consider the following simplified financial statements for the Lafferty Ranch Corporation (assuming no income taxes):

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$15,000

Assets

$4,300

Debt

$2,800

Costs

11,000

Equity

1,500

Net income

$ 4,000

Total

$4,300

Total

$4,300

Lafferty Ranch has predicted a sales increase of 10 percent. It has predicted that every item on the balance sheet will increase by 10 percent as well. Create the pro forma statements and reconcile them. What is the plug variable here?

next year rsquo s sales are projected to be 5 320 what is the external financing nee 556280

Calculating EFN

The most recent financial statements for Bradley’s Bagels, Inc., are shown here (assuming no income taxes):

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$3,800

Assets

$13,300

Debt

$ 9,200

Costs

1,710

Equity

4,100

Net income

$2,090

Total

$13,300

Total

$13,300

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. No dividends are paid. Next year’s sales are projected to be $5,320. What is the external financing needed?

assets and costs are proportional to sales debt and equity are not adividend of 1 44 556281

EFN

The most recent financial statements for Schism, Inc., are shown here:

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$19,200

Assets

$93,000

Debt

$20,400

Costs

15,550

Equity

72,600

Taxable income

$ 3,650

Total

$93,000

Total

$93,000

Taxes (34%)

1,241

Net income

$ 2,409

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. Adividend of $1,445.40 was paid, and Schism wishes to maintain a constant payout ratio. Next year’s sales are projected to be $24,000. What is the external financing needed?

complete the passage below by selecting the most appropriate terms from the followin 556074

Complete the passage below by selecting the most appropriate terms from the following list: floating charge, syndicated, commercial paper, warehouse receipt, arranger, collateral, commitment fee, line of credit, medium term notes, collateralized loan obligations (CLOs). Companies with fluctuating capital needs often arrange a ________ with their bank. This is relatively expensive because companies need to pay a ________ on any unused amount. Secured short term loans are sometimes covered by a ________ on all receivables and inventory. Generally, however, the borrower pledges specific assets as ________.For example, if goods are stored in a ware house, an independent warehouse company may issue a ________ to the lender. The goods can then only be released with the lender’s consent. Very large bank loans are often ________.In this case the lead bank acts as the ________ and will parcel out the loan among a group of banks. Banks also often sell loans. Sometimes they put together a portfolio of loans and sell separate slices (or tranches). These are known as ________. Banks are not the only source of short term debt. Many large companies issue their own unsecured debt directly to investors, often on a regular basis. If the maturity is less than nine months, this debt is generally known as ________. Companies also make regular issues of longer term debt to investors. These are called ________.

until recently augean cleaning products sold its products on terms of net 60 with an 556080

Until recently, Augean Cleaning Products sold its products on terms of net 60, with an average collection period of 75 days. In an attempt to induce customers to pay more promptly, it has changed its terms to 2/10, EOM, net 60. The initial effect of the changed terms is as follows:

Average Collection Periods, Days

Percent of Sales with Cash Discount

Cash Discount

Net

60

30*

80

Calculate the effect of the changed terms. Assume

• Sales volume is unchanged.

• The interest rate is 12%.

• There are no defaults.

• Cost of goods sold is 80% of sales.

suppose that you are a banker responsible for approving corporate loans nine firms a 556094

Suppose that you are a banker responsible for approving corporate loans. Nine firms are seeking secured loans. They offer the following assets as collateral:

a. Firm A, a heating oil distributor, offers a tanker load of fuel in transit from the Middle East.

b. Firm B, a wine wholesaler, offers 1,000 cases of Beaujolais Nouveau, located in a ware house.

c. Firm C, a stationer, offers an account receivable for office supplies sold to the City of New York.

d. Firm D, a bookstore, offers its entire inventory of 15,000 used books.

e. Firm E, a wholesale grocer, offers a boxcar full of bananas.

f. Firm F, an appliance dealer, offers its inventory of electric typewriters.

g. Firm G, a jeweler, offers 100 ounces of gold.

h. Firm H, a government securities dealer, offers its portfolio of Treasury bills.

i. Firm I, a boat builder, offers a half completed luxury yacht. The yacht will take four months more to complete. Which of these assets are most likely to be good collateral? Which are likely to be bad collateral? Explain.

as credit manager of reliant how do you feel about extending credit to plumpton 556095

Reliant Umbrellas has been approached by Plumpton Variety Stores of Nevada. Plumpton has expressed interest in an initial purchase of 5,000 umbrellas at $10 each on Reliant’s standard terms of 2/30, net 60. Plumpton estimates that if the umbrellas prove popular with customers, its purchases could be in the region of 30,000 umbrellas a year. After deductions for variable costs, this account would add $47,000 per year to Reliant’s profits.

Reliant has been anxious for some time to break into the lucrative Nevada market, but its credit manager has some doubts about Plumpton. In the past five years, Plumpton had embarked on an aggressive program of store openings. In 2007, however, it went into reverse. The recession, combined with aggressive price competition, caused a cash shortage. Plumpton laid off employees, closed one store, and deferred store openings. The company’s Dun and Bradstreet rating is only fair, and a check with Plumpton’s other suppliers reveals that, although Plumpton traditionally took cash discounts, it has recently been paying 30 days slow. A check through Reliant’s bank indicates that Plumpton has unused

2010

2009

2010

2009

Cash

$ 1.0

$ 1.2

Payables

$ 2.3

$ 2.5

Receivables

1.5

1.6

Short term loans

3.9

1.9

Inventory

10.9

11.6

Long term debt

1.8

2.6

Fixed assets

5.1

4.3

Equity

10.5

11.7

Total assets

$18.5

$18.7

Total liabilities

$18.5

$18.7

2010

2009

Sales

$55.0

$59.0

Cost of goods sold

32.6

35.9

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

20.8

20.2

Interest

.5

.3

Tax

.5

1.3

Net income

$ .6

$ 1.3

credit lines of $350,000 but has entered into discussions with the banks for a renewal of a $1,500,000 term loan due at the end of the year. Table 30.5 summarizes Plumpton’s latest financial statements. As credit manager of Reliant, how do you feel about extending credit to Plumpton?

why might you suspect that galenic rsquo s estimates of default rates will not be re 556096

Galenic, Inc., is a wholesaler for a range of pharmaceutical products. Before deducting any losses from bad debts, Galenic operates on a profit margin of 5%. For a long time the firm has employed a numerical credit scoring system based on a small number of key ratios. This has resulted in a bad debt ratio of 1%. Galenic has recently commissioned a detailed statistical study of the payment record of its customers over the past eight years and, after considerable experimentation, has identified five variables that could form the basis of a new credit scoring system. On the evidence of the past eight years, Galenic calculates that for every 10,000 accounts it would have experienced the following default rates:

Credit Score under Proposed System

Number of Accounts

Defaulting

Paying

Total

Greater than 80

60

9,100

9,160

Less than 80

40

800

840

Total

100

9,900

10,000

By refusing credit to firms with a low credit score (less than 80), Galenic calculates that it would reduce its bad debt ratio to 60/9,160, or just under .7%. While this may not seem like a big deal, Galenic’s credit manager reasons that this is equivalent to a decrease of one third in the bad debt ratio and would result in a significant improvement in the profit margin.

a. What is Galenic’s current profit margin, allowing for bad debts?

b. Assuming that the firm’s estimates of default rates are right, how would the new credit scoring system affect profits?

c. Why might you suspect that Galenic’s estimates of default rates will not be realized in practice? What are the likely consequences of overestimating the accuracy of such a credit scoring scheme?

d. Suppose that one of the variables in the proposed scoring system is whether the customer has an existing account with Galenic (new customers are more likely to default). How would this affect your assessment of the proposal?

what factors would you consider in analyzing these alternatives under what circumsta 556098

Term loans usually require firms to pay a fluctuating interest rate. For example, the interest rate may be set at “1% above prime.” The prime rate sometimes varies by several percentage points within a single year. Suppose that your firm has decided to borrow $40 million for five years. It has three alternatives. It can ( a ) borrow from a bank at the prime rate, currently 10%. The proposed loan agreement requires no principal repayments until the loan matures in five years. It can ( b ) issue 26 week commercial paper, currently yielding 9%. Since funds are required for five years, the commercial paper will have to be rolled over semiannually. That is, financing the $40 million requirement for five years will require 10 successive commercial paper sales. Or, finally, it can ( c ) borrow from an insurance company at a fixed rate of 11%. As in the bank loan, no principal has to be repaid until the end of the five year period. What factors would you consider in analyzing these alternatives? Under what circumstances would you choose ( a )? Under what circumstances would you choose ( b ) or ( c )?

how would the cost of the cash offer and the share offer alter if the expected growt 556108

As treasurer of Leisure Products, Inc., you are investigating the possible acquisition of Plastitoys. You have the following basic data:

Leisure Products

Plastitoys

Earnings per share

$ 5.00

$ 1.50

Dividend per share

$ 3.00

$ .80

Number of shares

1,000,000

600,000

Stock price

$90

$20

You estimate that investors currently expect a steady growth of about 6% in Plastitoys’ earnings and dividends. Under new management this growth rate would be increased to 8% per year, without any additional capital investment required.

a. What is the gain from the acquisition?

b. What is the cost of the acquisition if Leisure Products pays $25 in cash for each share of Plastitoys?

c. What is the cost of the acquisition if Leisure Products offers one share of Leisure Products for every three shares of Plastitoys?

d. How would the cost of the cash offer and the share offer alter if the expected growth rate of Plastitoys were not changed by the merger?

how many shares of world enterprises are exchanged for each share of wheel rim and a 556109

The Muck and Slurry merger has fallen through .But World Enterprises is determined to report earnings per share of $2.67. It therefore acquires the Wheel rim and Axle Company. You are given the following facts:

World Enterprises

Wheel rim and Axle

Merged Firm

Earnings per share

$2.00

$2.50

$2.67

Price per share

$40

$25

?

Price–earnings ratio

20

10

?

Number of shares

100,000

200,000

?

Total earnings

$200,000

$500,000

?

Total market value

$4,000,000

$5,000,000

?

Once again there are no gains from merging. In exchange for Wheel rim and Axle shares,World Enterprises issues just enough of its own shares to ensure its $2.67 earnings per share objective.

a. Complete the above table for the merged firm.

b. How many shares of World Enterprises are exchanged for each share of Wheel rim and Axle?

c. What is the cost of the merger to World Enterprises?

d. What is the change in the total market value of the World Enterprises shares that were outstanding before the merger?

what are the primary advantages and disadvantages of sole proprietorships and partne 556134

The corporate form of organization has many variations around the world. The exact laws and regulations differ from country to country, of course, but the essential features of public ownership and limited liability remain. These firms are often called joint stock companies, public limited companies, or limited liability companies, depending on the specific nature of the firm and the country of origin. Table 1.1 gives the names of a few well known international corporations, their country of origin, and a translation of the abbreviation that follows the company name.

Type of Company

Company

Country of Origin

In Original Language

Translated

Bayerische Moterenwerke (BMW) AG

Germany

Aktiengesellschaft

Corporation

Dornier GmBH

Germany

Gesellschaft mit Beschraenkter Haftung

Limited liability company

Rolls Royce PLC

United Kingdom

Public limited company

Public limited company

Shell UK Ltd.

United Kingdom

Limited

Unilever NV

Netherlands

Naamloze Vennootschap

Joint stock company

Fiat SpA

Italy

Societa per Azioni

Joint stock company

Volvo AB

Sweden

Aktiebolag

Joint stock company

Peugeot SA

France

Société Anonyme

Joint stock company

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What are the three forms of business organization?

b What are the primary advantages and disadvantages of sole proprietorships and partnerships?

c What is the difference between a general and a limited partnership?

d Why is the corporate form superior when it comes to raising cash?

what are some shortcomings of the goal of profit maximization 556135

Given our goal as stated in the preceding section (maximize the value of the stock), an obvious question comes up: What is the appropriate goal when the firm has no traded stock? Corporations are certainly not the only type of business; and the stock in many corporations rarely changes hands, so it’s difficult to say what the value per share is at any given time. As long as we are dealing with for profit businesses, only a slight modification is needed. The total value of the stock in a corporation is simply equal to the value of the owners’ equity. Therefore, a more general way of stating our goal is as follows: maximize the market value of the existing owners’ equity. With this in mind, it doesn’t matter whether the business is a proprietorship, a partnership, or a corporation. For each of these, good financial decisions increase the market value of the owners’ equity and poor financial decisions decrease it. In fact, although we choose to focus on corporations in the chapters ahead, the principles we develop apply to all forms of business. Many of them even apply to the not for profit sector. Finally, our goal does not imply that the financial manager should take illegal or unethical actions in the hope of increasing the value of the equity in the firm. What we mean is that the financial manager best serves the owners of the business by identifying goods and services that add value to the firm because they are desired and valued in the free marketplace.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is the goal of financial management?

b What are some shortcomings of the goal of profit maximization?

c Can you give a definition of corporate finance?

what are agency problems and how do they come about what are agency costs 556136

The available theory and evidence are consistent with the view that stockholders control the firm and that stockholder wealth maximization is the relevant goal of the corporation. Even so, there will undoubtedly be times when management goals are pursued at the expense of the stockholders, at least temporarily.

Our discussion thus far implies that management and stockholders are the only parties with an interest in the firm’s decisions. This is an oversimplification, of course. Employees, customers, suppliers, and even the government all have a financial interest in the firm.

Taken together, these various groups are called stakeholders in the firm. In general, a stakeholder is someone other than a stockholder or creditor who potentially has a claim on the cash flows of the firm. Such groups will also attempt to exert control over the firm, perhaps to the detriment of the owners.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is an agency relationship?

b What are agency problems and how do they come about? What are agency costs?

c What incentives do managers in large corporations have to maximize share value?

what is a dealer market how do dealer and auction markets differ 556137

Financial markets function as both primary and secondary markets for debt and equity securities. The term primary market refers to the original sale of securities by governments and corporations. The secondary markets are those in which these securities are bought and sold after the original sale. Equities are, of course, issued solely by corporations. Debt securities are issued by both governments and corporations. In the discussion that follows, we focus on corporate securities only.

In a primary market transaction, the corporation is the seller, and the transaction raises money for the corporation. Corporations engage in two types of primary market transactions: public offerings and private placements. Apublic offering, as the name suggests, involves selling securities to the general public, whereas a private placement is a negotiated sale involving a specific buyer. By law, public offerings of debt and equity must be registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). Registration requires the firm to disclose a great deal of information before selling any securities. The accounting, legal, and selling costs of public offerings can be considerable.

Partly to avoid the various regulatory requirements and the expense of public offerings, debt and equity are often sold privately to large financial institutions such as life insurance companies or mutual funds. Such private placements do not have to be registered with the SEC and do not require the involvement of underwriters (investment banks that specialize in selling securities to the public).

A secondary market transaction involves one owner or creditor selling to another. It is therefore the secondary markets that provide the means for transferring ownership of corporate securities. Although a corporation is only directly involved in a primary market transaction (when it sells securities to raise cash), the secondary markets are still critical to large corporations. The reason is that investors are much more willing to purchase securities in a primary market transaction when they know that those securities can later be resold if desired.

There are two kinds of secondary markets: auction markets and dealer markets. Generally speaking, dealers buy and sell for themselves, at their own risk. A car dealer, for example, buys and sells automobiles. In contrast, brokers and agents match buyers and sellers, but they do not actually own the commodity that is bought or sold. A real estate agent, for example, does not normally buy and sell houses.

Dealer markets in stocks and long term debt are called over the counter (OTC) markets. Most trading in debt securities takes place over the counter. The expression over the counter refers to days of old when securities were literally bought and sold at counters in offices around the country. Today, a significant fraction of the market for stocks and almost all of the market for long term debt have no central location; the many dealers are connected electronically.

Auction markets differ from dealer markets in two ways. First, an auction market or exchange has a physical location (like Wall Street). Second, in a dealer market, most of the buying and selling is done by the dealer. The primary purpose of an auction market, on the other hand, is to match those who wish to sell with those who wish to buy. Dealers play a limited role.

Trading in Corporate Securities The equity shares of most of the large firms in the United States trade in organized auction markets. The largest such market is the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), which accounts for more than 85 percent of all the shares traded in auction markets. Other auction exchanges include the American Stock Exchange (AMEX) and regional exchanges such as the Pacific Stock Exchange. In addition to the stock exchanges, there is a large OTC market for stocks. In 1971, the National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD) made available to dealers and brokers an electronic quotation system called NASDAQ (NASD Automated Quotation system, pronounced “naz dak” and now spelled “Nasdaq”). There are roughly two times as many companies on Nasdaq as there are on NYSE, but they tend to be much smaller in size and trade less actively. There are exceptions, of course. Both Microsoft and Intel trade OTC, for example. Nonetheless, the total value of Nasdaq stocks is much less than the total value of NYSE stocks. There are many large and important financial markets outside the United States, of course, and U.S. corporations are increasingly looking to these markets to raise cash. The Tokyo Stock Exchange and the London Stock Exchange (TSE and LSE, respectively) are two well known examples. The fact that OTC markets have no physical location means that national borders do not present a great barrier, and there is now a huge international OTC debt market. Because of globalization, financial markets have reached the point where trading in many investments never stops; it just travels around the world.

Listing Stocks that trade on an organized exchange are said to be listed on that exchange. In order to be listed, firms must meet certain minimum criteria concerning, for example, asset size and number of shareholders. These criteria differ from one exchange to another. NYSE has the most stringent requirements of the exchanges in the United States. For example, to be listed on NYSE, a company is expected to have a market value for its publicly held shares of at least $100 million and a total of at least 2,000 shareholders with at least 100 shares each. There are additional minimums on earnings, assets, and number of shares outstanding.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is a dealer market? How do dealer and auction markets differ?

b What is the largest auction market in the United States?

c What does OTC stand for? What is the large OTC market for stocks called?

what are the implications of this trend for agency problems and corporate control 556156

Agency Problems and Corporate Ownership

Corporate ownership varies around the world. Historically, individuals have owned the majority of shares in public corporations in the United States. In Germany and Japan, however, banks, other large financial institutions, and other companies own most of the stock in public corporations. Do you think agency problems are likely to be more or less severe in Germany and Japan than in the United States? Why? In recent years, large financial institutions such as mutual funds and pension funds have been becoming the dominant owners of stock in the United States, and these institutions are becoming more active in corporate affairs. What are the implications of this trend for agency problems and corporate control?

explain the difference between accounting value and market value which is more impor 556164

Market Value versus Book Value

The values shown on the balance sheet for the firm’s assets are book values and generally are not what the assets are actually worth. Under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), audited financial statements in the United States generally show assets at historical cost. In other words, assets are “carried on the books” at what the firm paid for them, no matter how long ago they were purchased or how much they are worth today. For current assets, market value and book value might be somewhat similar because current assets are bought and converted into cash over a relatively short span of time. In other circumstances, the two values might differ quite a bit. Moreover, for fixed assets, it would be purely a coincidence if the actual market value of an asset (what the asset could be sold for) were equal to its book value. For example, a railroad might own enormous tracts of land purchased a century or more ago. What the railroad paid for that land could be hundreds or thousands of times less than what the land is worth today. The balance sheet would nonetheless show the historical cost. The difference between market value and book value is important for understanding the impact of reported gains and losses. For example, to open the chapter, we discussed the huge charges against earnings taken by GE and other large, well known corporations.

What actually happened is that these charges were the result of accounting rule changes that led to reductions in the book value of certain types of financial assets. However, a change in accounting rules all by itself has no effect on what the assets in question are really worth. Instead, the market value of a financial asset depends on things like its riskiness and cash flows, neither of which have anything to do with accounting. The balance sheet is potentially useful to many different parties. A supplier might look at the size of accounts payable to see how promptly the firm pays its bills. A potential creditor would examine the liquidity and degree of financial leverage. Managers within the firm can track things like the amount of cash and the amount of inventory that the firm keeps on hand. Managers and investors will frequently be interested in knowing the value of the firm. This information is not on the balance sheet. The fact that balance sheet assets are listed at cost means that there is no necessary connection between the total assets shown and the value of the firm. Indeed, many of the most valuable assets that a firm might have—good management, a good reputation, talented employees—don’t appear on the balance sheet at all. Similarly, the shareholders’ equity figure on the balance sheet and the true value of the stock need not be related. For financial managers, then, the accounting value of the stock is not an especially important concern; it is the market value that matters. Henceforth, whenever we speak of the value of an asset or the value of the firm, we The Klingon Corporation has fixed assets with a book value of $700 and an appraised market value of about $1,000. Net working capital is $400 on the books, but approximately $600 would be realized if all the current accounts were liquidated. Klingon has $500 in long term debt, both book value and market value. What is the book value of the equity? What is the market value?

We can construct two simplified balance sheets, one in accounting (book value) terms and one in economic (market value) terms:

KLINGON CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

Market Value versus Book Value

Book

Market

Book

Market

Assets

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

Net working capital

$ 400

$ 600

Long term debt

$ 500

$ 500

Net fixed assets

700

1,000

Shareholders’ equity

600

1,100

$1,100

$1,600

$1,100

$1,600

In this example, shareholders’ equity is actually worth almost twice as much as what is shown on the books. The distinction between book and market values is important precisely because book values can be so different from true economic value.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is the balance sheet identity?

b What is liquidity? Why is it important?

c What do we mean by financial leverage?

d Explain the difference between accounting value and market value. Which is more important to the financial manager? Why?

when looking at an income statement the financial manager needs to keep three things 556165

Calculating Earnings and Dividends per Share

Suppose that U.S. had 200 million shares outstanding at the end of 2002.What was EPS? What were dividends per share? From the income statement, we see that U.S. had a net income of $412 million for the year. Total dividends were $103 million. Because 200 million shares were outstanding, we can calculate earnings per share, or EPS, and dividends per share as follows:

= Net income/Total shares outstanding

&;= $412/200 = $2.06 per share

Dividends per share = Total dividends/Total shares outstanding

=$103/200 = $.515 per share

When looking at an income statement, the financial manager needs to keep three things in mind: GAAP, cash versus noncash items, and time and costs.

what are the three things to keep in mind when looking at an income statement 556166

GAAP and the Income Statement

An income statement prepared using GAAP will show revenue when it accrues. This is not necessarily when the cash comes in. The general rule (the realization principle) is to recognize revenue when the earnings process is virtually complete and the value of an exchange of goods or services is known or can be reliably determined. In practice, this principle usually means that revenue is recognized at the time of sale, which need not be the same as the time of collection. Expenses shown on the income statement are based on the matching principle. The basic idea here is to first determine revenues as described previously and then match those revenues with the costs associated with producing them. So, if we manufacture a product and then sell it on credit, the revenue is realized at the time of sale. The production and other costs associated with the sale of that product will likewise be recognized at that time. Once again, the actual cash outflows may have occurred at some very different time. As a result of the way revenues and expenses are realized, the figures shown on the income statement may not be at all representative of the actual cash inflows and outflows that occurred during a particular period.

Noncash Items

A primary reason that accounting income differs from cash flow is that an income statement contains noncash items. The most important of these is depreciation. Suppose a firm purchases an asset for $5,000 and pays in cash. Obviously, the firm has a $5,000 cash outflow at the time of purchase. However, instead of deducting the $5,000 as an expense, an accountant might depreciate the asset over a five year period. If the depreciation is straight line and the asset is written down to zero over that period, then $5,000/5 = $1,000 will be deducted each year as an expense.2

The important thing to recognize is that this $1,000 deduction isn’t cash—it’s an accounting number. The actual cash outflow occurred when the asset was purchased. The depreciation deduction is simply another application of the matching principle in accounting. The revenues associated with an asset would generally occur over some length of time. So, the accountant seeks to match the expense of purchasing the asset with the benefits produced from owning it. As we will see, for the financial manager, the actual timing of cash inflows and out flows is critical in coming up with a reasonable estimate of market value, so we need to learn how to separate the cash flows from the noncash accounting entries. In reality, the difference between cash flow and accounting income can be pretty dramatic. For example, media company Clear Channel Communications reported a net loss of $332 million for the first quarter of 2001. Sounds bad, but Clear Channel also reported a positive cash flow of $324 million! The reason the difference is so large is that Clear Channel has particularly big noncash deductions related to, among other things, the acquisition of radio stations.

Time and Costs

It is often useful to think of the future as having two distinct parts: the short run and the long run. These are not precise time periods. The distinction has to do with whether costs are fixed or variable. In the long run, all business costs are variable. Given sufficient time, assets can be sold, debts can be paid, and so on. If our time horizon is relatively short, however, some costs are effectively fixed— they must be paid no matter what (property taxes, for example). Other costs such as wages to laborers and payments to suppliers are still variable. As a result, even in the short run, the firm can vary its output level by varying expenditures in these areas. The distinction between fixed and variable costs is important, at times, to the financial manager, but the way costs are reported on the income statement is not a good guide as to which costs are which. The reason is that, in practice, accountants tend to classify costs as either product costs or period costs.

Product costs include such things as raw materials, direct labor expense, and manufacturing overhead. These are reported on the income statement as costs of goods sold, but they include both fixed and variable costs. Similarly, period costs are incurred during a particular time period and might be reported as selling, general, and administrative expenses. Once again, some of these period costs may be fixed and others may be variable. The company president’s salary, for example, is a period cost and is probably fixed, at least in the short run. The balance sheets and income statement we have been using thus far are hypothetical. Our nearby Work the Web box shows how to find actual balance sheets and income statements on line for almost any company.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is the income statement equation?

b What are the three things to keep in mind when looking at an income statement?

c Why is accounting income not the same as cash flow? Give two reasons.

what is the difference between a marginal and an average tax rate 556167

Deep in the Heart of Taxes

Algernon, Inc., has a taxable income of $85,000. What is its tax bill? What is its average tax rate? Its marginal tax rate? We see that the tax rate applied to the first $50,000 is 15 percent; the rate applied to the next $25,000 is 25 percent, and the rate applied after that up to $100,000 is 34 percent. So Algernon must pay .15 × $50,000 + .25 ×25,000 + .34 ×(85,000 75,000) =$17,150. The average tax rate is thus $17,150/85,000= 20.18%. The marginal rate is 34 percent because Algernon’s taxes would rise by 34 cents if it had another dollar in taxable income.

Table 2.4 summarizes some different taxable incomes, marginal tax rates, and average tax rates for corporations. Notice how the average and marginal tax rates come together at 35 percent.

With a flat rate tax, there is only one tax rate, so the rate is the same for all income levels. With such a tax, the marginal tax rate is always the same as the average tax rate. As it stands now, corporate taxation in the United States is based on a modified flat rate tax, which becomes a true flat rate for the highest incomes.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(3)/(1)

Taxable Income

Marginal Tax Rate

Total Tax

Average Tax Rate

$ 45,000

15%

$ 6,750

15.00%

70,000

25

12,500

17.86

95,000

34

20,550

21.63

250,000

39

80,750

32.30

1,000,000

34

340,000

34.00

17,500,000

38

6,100,000

34.86

50,000,000

35

17,500,000

35.00

100,000,000

35

35,000,000

35.00

In looking at Table 2.4, notice that the more a corporation makes, the greater is the percentage of taxable income paid in taxes. Put another way, under current tax law, the average tax rate never goes down, even though the marginal tax rate does. As illustrated, for corporations, average tax rates begin at 15 percent and rise to a maximum of 35 percent. It will normally be the marginal tax rate that is relevant for financial decision making. The reason is that any new cash flows will be taxed at that marginal rate. Because financial decisions usually involve new cash flows or changes in existing ones, this rate will tell us the marginal effect of a decision on our tax bill. There is one last thing to notice about the tax code as it affects corporations. It’s easy to verify that the corporate tax bill is just a flat 35 percent of taxable income if our taxable income is more than $18.33 million. Also, for the many midsize corporations with taxable incomes in the range of $335,000 to $10,000,000, the tax rate is a flat 34 percent. Because we will normally be talking about large corporations, you can assume that the average and marginal tax rates are 35 percent unless we explicitly say otherwise. Before moving on, we should note that the tax rates we have discussed in this section relate to federal taxes only. Overall tax rates can be higher once state, local, and any other taxes are considered.

C O N C E P T Q U E S T I O N S

a What is the difference between a marginal and an average tax rate?

b Do the wealthiest corporations receive a tax break in terms of a lower tax rate? Explain.

at the end of the year net fixed assets were 8 400 current assets were 3 100 and cur 556196

Calculating Cash Flows Faulk Industries had the following operating results for 2002: sales= $12,200; cost of goods sold =$9,000; depreciation expense =$1,600; interest expense = $200; dividends paid =$300. At the beginning of the year, net fixed assets were $8,000, current assets were $2,000, and current liabilities were $1,500. At the end of the year, net fixed assets were $8,400, current assets were $3,100, and current liabilities were $1,800. The tax rate for 2002 was 34 percent.

a. What is net income for 2002?

b. What is the operating cash flow for 2002?

c. What is the cash flow from assets for 2002? Is this possible? Explain.

d. If no new debt was issued during the year, what is the cash flow to creditors?

What is the cash flow to stockholders? Explain and interpret the positive and negative signs of your answers in (a) through (d).

why do you think the marginal tax rate jumps up from 34 percent to 39 percent at a t 556199

Tax Rates Refer to the corporate marginal tax rate information.

a. Why do you think the marginal tax rate jumps up from 34 percent to 39 percent at a taxable income of $100,001, and then falls back to a 34 percent marginal rate at a taxable income of $335,001?

b. Compute the average tax rate for a corporation with exactly $335,001 in taxable income. Does this confirm your explanation in part (a)? What is the average tax rate for a corporation with exactly $18,333,334? Is the same thing happening here?

c. The 39 percent and 38 percent tax rates both represent what is called a tax “bubble.” Suppose the government wanted to lower the upper threshold of the 39 percent marginal tax bracket from $335,000 to $200,000. What would the new 39 percent bubble rate have to be?

Use the following information for Taco Swell, Inc., for Problems 25 and 26 (assume the tax rate is 34 percent):

2001

2002

Sales

$2,870

$3,080

Depreciation

413

413

Cost of goods sold

987

1,121

Other expenses

238

196

Interest

192

221

Cash

1,505

1,539

Accounts receivable

1,992

2,244

Short term notes payable

291

273

Long term debt

5,040

5,880

Net fixed assets

12,621

12,922

Accounts payable

1,581

1,533

Inventory

3,542

3,640

Dividends

350

385

what were the major sources and uses of cash did the company become more or less liq 556210

Sources and Uses of Cash

Consider the following balance sheets for the Philippe Corporation. Calculate the changes in the various accounts and, where applicable, identify the change as a source or use of cash. What were the major sources and uses of cash? Did the company become more or less liquid during the year? What happened to cash during the year?

PHILIPPE CORPORATION

Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2002

($ in millions)

Assets

Current assets

Cash

$ 210

$ 215

Accounts receivable

355

310

Inventory

507

328

Total

$1,072

$ 853

Fixed assets

Net plant and equipment

$6,085

$6,527

Total assets

$7,157

$7,380

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$ 207

$ 298

Notes payable

1,715

1,427

Total

$1,922

$1,725

Long term debt

$1,987

$2,308

Owners’ equity

Common stock and paid in surplus

$1,000

$1,000

Retained earnings

2,248

2,347

Total

$3,248

$3,347

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$7,157

$7,380

you are required to prepare a cost sheet from the aforementioned data showing a the 555964

Gopal furnishes the following data relating to the manufacture of a standard product during the month of April:

Rs

Raw materials consumed

15,000

Direct labour charges

9,000

Machine hours worked

900

Machine hour rate

Rs 5

Administrative overheads

20% on works cost

Selling overheads

Rs 0.50 per unit

Units produced: 17,100

Units sold: 18,000

at Rs 4 per unit

You are required to prepare a cost sheet from the aforementioned data showing(a) the cost per unit and (b) profit per unit sold and profit for the period.

prepare statement on cost of production of goods manufactured statement of cost of p 555967

The following information is obtained from the records of a factory for the period from 1 June to 30 June:

Rs

Opening balance of raw materials on 1 June

15,000

Purchases of raw materials during the month

2,25,000

Wages paid

1,15,000

Factory overheads

46,000

Opening balance of WIP on 1 June

6,000

Opening balance of WIP on 30 June

7,500

Closing balance of raw materials on 30 June

12,500

Opening balance of finished goods manufactured on 1 June

30,000

Closing balance of finished goods manufactured on 30 June

27,500

Selling and distribution overheads

10,000

Administration overheads

15,000

Sales

4,50,000

Prepare statement on cost of production of goods manufactured, statement of cost of production of goods sold and statement of profit on sales.

the modern manufacturing company submitted the following information on 31 march 199 555968

The Modern manufacturing company submitted the following information on 31 March 1993:

Rs

Sales for the year

2,75,000

Inventories at the beginning of the year:

Finished goods

7,000

WIP

4,000

Purchase of materials

1,10,000

Materials inventory:

At the beginning of the year

3,000

At the end of the year

4,000

Direct labour

65,000

Factory overheads were 60% of direct labour cost

Inventories at the end of the year:

WIP

6,000

Finished goods

8,000

Other expenses for the year:

Selling expenses

Administration expenses

10% of sales

Prepare a statement of cost

5% of sales

from the following particulars you are required to prepare a statement showing a the 555969

From the following particulars, you are required to prepare a statement showing (a) the cost of materials consumed, (b) prime cost, (c) works cost, (d) total cost and (e) cost of sales and profit

Rs

Stock of finished goods on 31 December 1993

73,000

Stock of raw materials on 31 December 1993

35,000

Purchase of raw materials

7,60,000

Productive wages

5,20,000

Stock of finished goods on 31 December 1994

82,500

Stock of raw materials on 31 December 1994

37,500

Sales of finished goods

15,45,800

Works overhead charges

1,30,200

Office and general charges

69,700

you are required to prepare a cost sheet with respect to the preceding data showing 555970

The following data are related to the manufacture of a standard product during the month of April 1984:

Raw material

Rs 80,000

Direct wages

Rs 48,000

Machine hours worked

8,000 hours

Machine hour rate

Rs 4

Administration overheads

10% of works cost

Selling overheads

Rs 1.50 per unit

Units produced

4,000

Units sold

3,000

Selling price

Rs 50 per unit

You are required to prepare a cost sheet with respect to the preceding data showing (a) cost per unit and (b) profit for the month.

you are required to construct the statement so as to show a value of the material co 555971

The directors of a manufacturing business require a statement showing the production results of the business for the month of March 1994. The cost accounts reveal the following information:

Rs

Stock on hand, 1 March 1994:

Raw materials

25,000

Finished goods

17,360

Stock on hand, 31 March 1994

Raw materials

26,250

Finished goods

15,750

Purchase of raw materials

21,900

WIP, 1 March 1994

8,220

WIP, 31 March 1994

9,100

Sale of finished goods

72,310

Direct wages

17,150

Non productive wages

830

Works expenses

8,340

Office and administrative expenses

3,160

Selling and distributive expenses

4,210

You are required to construct the statement so as to show (a) value of the material consumed, (b) total cost of production, (c) cost of goods sold, (d) profit on goods sold and (e) net profit for the month.

you are required to prepare a cost sheet from the aforementioned data showing a the 555974

Gopal furnishes the following data relating to the manufacture of a standard product during the month of April 1984:

Raw materials consumed

Rs 15,000

Direct labour charges

Rs 9,000

Machine hours worked

900

Machine hour rate

Rs 5

Administrative overheads

20% on works cost

Selling overheads

Re 0.50 per unit

Units produced

17,100

Units sold

16,000 at Rs 4 per unit

You are required to prepare a cost sheet from the aforementioned data showing (a) the cost per unit and (b) profit per unit sold and profit for the period.

the closing stock of finished goods is 120 units profit is 10 on sales during 1987 i 555975

Prepare a cost sheet for 1986 from the following details showing the total cost and cost per unit. The number of units produced is 2,000:

Rs

Opening stock of raw materials

10,000

Purchases

1,80,000

Direct wages

56,000

Indirect wages

48,000

Closing stock of raw materials

12,000

WIP on 1 January 1986

5,000

WIP on 31 December 1986

6,000

Factory overheads

26,000

Office overheads

45,000

Selling overheads

16,000

Opening stock of finished goods (100 units)

20,000

The closing stock of finished goods is 120 units. Profit is 10% on sales. During 1987, it was decided to increase the production to 2,400 units. It was anticipated that (a) Material prices would increase by 10%. (b) Wages would reduce by 20%. (c) Other expenses would remain constant per unit. (d) Expected profit would become 20% of sales.Ascertain the selling price to be fixed per unit.

you are required to submit a statement to the board of directors showing the price a 555976

The company Cooling Limited manufactured and sold 1,000 refrigerators in the year ending on 31 December 1997. The summarized trading, profit and loss account is as follows:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

To cost of materials

80,000

By sales

400000

To Direct wages

120,000

To other manufacturing cost

50,000

To gross profit(c/d)

150,000

400,000

400,000

To management salaries

60,000

By gross profit(b/d)

150,000

To rent rate

10,000

To Selling expenses

30,000

To general expenses

20,000

To net profit

30,000

150,000

150,000

For the year ending on 31 December 1998, it was estimated that

  1. Output and sales would be 1,200 refrigerators.
  2. Prices of materials would go up by 20% on the level of the previous year.
  3. Wages would increase by 5%.
  4. Manufacturing cost would rise in proportion to the combined cost of materials and wages.
  5. Selling costs per unit would remain unchanged.
  6. Other expenses would also remain constant.

You are required to submit a statement to the board of directors showing the price at which the refrigerators should be sold so as to show a profit of 10% on selling price.

a work order was executed in 1990 and the following expenses were incurred materials 555977

For a factory, the following figures have been obtained for 1989:

Rs

Cost of materials

3,00,000

Direct wages

2,50,000

Factory overheads

1,50,000

Administration overheads

1,68,000

Selling overheads

1,12,000

Distribution overheads

70,000

Profit

2,10,000

A work order was executed in 1990 and the following expenses were incurred: materials—Rs 16,000 and wages—Rs 10,000.Assuming that in 1990 the rate of factory overheads increased by 20%, distribution overheads went down by 10%, and selling and administration overheads each went up by 12 ½%, at what price should the product be sold so as to earn the same rate of profit on the selling price as in 1989? Factory overheads are based on direct wages, whereas all other overheads are based on factory cost.

a t ltd furnishes the following store transactions for september 1992 556032

  1. A.T. Ltd. furnishes the following store transactions for September 1992

1 September 1993

Opening balance

25 units at Rs 162.50

4 September 1993

Issue register number 85

8 units

6 September 1993

Receipts from B&W GRN number 26

50 units at Rs 5.75

7 September 1993

Issue register number 97

12 units

10 September 1993

Returns to B&W

10 units

12 September 1993

Issues

15 units

13 September 1993

Issues

20 units

15 September 1993

Receipts from M&W

25 units at Rs 6.10

17 September 1993

Issues

10 units

19 September 1993

Received replacement from B&W

10 units

20 September 1993

Return from department material at M&W

5 units

22 September 1993

Transfer from job 182 to job 187 in the department MTR 6

5 units

26 September 1993

Issues

10 units

29 September 1993

Transfer from department A to department B

5 units

30 September 1993

Shortage in stocktaking

2 units

Write the priced stores ledger on FIFO method and discuss how you would treat the shortage in stocktaking

you are required to prepare a stores ledger card for the month of march 2000 on the 556033

  1. In the beginning of March 2000, Ram and company had in stock 10,000 brushes valued at Rs 10 each. Further purchases were made during the month as follows:

7 March

4,000 brushes at Rs 12.50

14 March

6,000 brushes at Rs 15.00

24 March

8,000 brushes at Rs 16.50

Issues to the shop were as follows:

16 March

16,000 brushes

28 March

10,000 brushes

You are required to prepare a stores ledger card for the month of March 2000 on the assumption that materials were issued on the FIFO principle.

the stores ledger account of material c in the book of chemical process ltd shows th 556034

The stores ledger account of material C in the book of Chemical Process Ltd. shows the following transactions for the month of December 1995.

1995

1 December

Opening stock is 200 kg at Rs 7.50 per kg

5

Received from supplier 5,400 kg at Rs 7.75 per kg

8

Issued to production department 240 kg

10

Issued 160 kg

12

Received from supplier 500 kg at Rs 7.90 per kg

15

Issued to production department 400 kg

16

Received from supplier 250 kg at Rs 8.00 per kg

19

Received from supplier 600 kg at Rs 8.25 per kg

21

Issued to department 350 kg

24

Issued to production department 260 kg

27

Issued 340 kg

All are required to price the issues and draw out the closing balances in the form of stores ledger account under the pricing method of LIFO.

the following is an extract of the record of receipts and issues of sulphur in a fac 556035

The following is an extract of the record of receipts and issues of sulphur in a factory during November 2005:

1 January

Opening balance is 500 tonne at Rs 100 per tonne

3

Issue: 70 tonne

4

Issue: 100 tonne

8

Issue: 80 tonne

13

Received 200 tonne at Rs 95 per tonne

14

Return from department 15 tonne

16

Issue: 180 tonne

20

Received from supplier 240 tonne at Rs 95 per tonne

24

Issue: 300 tonne

25

Received from supplier 320 tonne at Rs 95 per tonne

26

Issue: 115 tonne

27

Return from department 35 tonne

28

Received from supplier 100 tonne at Rs 95 per tonne

Issues are to be priced on the LIFO principle.

indian oil is a bulk distributor of high octane petrol a periodic inventory of petro 556036

Indian Oil is a bulk distributor of high octane petrol. A periodic inventory of petrol at hand is made when the books are closed at the end of each month. The following summary of information is available for the month of June.

Sales

Rs 9,45,000

General administration cost

Rs 25,000

Opening stock: 1,00,000 l at Rs 3 per litre

Rs 3,00,000

Purchases (including freight inwards):

1 June

2,00,000 l at Rs 2.85 per litre

30 June

1,00,000 l at Rs 3.03 per litre

30 June

Closing stock is 1,30,000 l

Compute the following data by the weighted average method of inventory costing:

  1. Value of inventory on 30 June
  2. Amount of the cost of goods sold in June
  3. Profit or loss for June

Weighted average method:

from the following details of stores receipts and issues of material abc in a manufa 556037

From the following details of stores receipts and issues of material ABC in a manufacturing unit, prepare the stock ledger using the weighted average method of valuing the issues:

1 January

Opening stock is 2,000 units at Rs 2.50 each

3 January

Issued 1,500 units to production

4 January

Received 4,500 units at Rs 3 each

8 January

Issued 1,600 units to production

9 January

Returned to stores 100 units by production department (from the issue of 3 January)

16 January

Received 2,400 units at Rs 3.25 each

19 January

Returned to the supplier 200 units out of the quantity received on 4 January

20 January

Received 1,000 units at Rs 3.50 each

24 January

Issued to production 2,100 units

27 January

Received 1,200 units at Rs 3.75 each

29 January

Issued to production 2,800 units

when material prices fluctuate widely the method of pricing that gives absurd result 556038

State whether the following statements are true or false:
a. In standard price method, issue of materials is priced at a predetermined rate.
b. When material prices fluctuate widely, the method of pricing that gives absurd result is simple average price. 3. When prices fluctuate widely, the method that will smooth out the effects of fluctuations is the weighted average method.
c. Price fluctuation is not an important criterion in fixing pricing methods.
d. Under replacement price method, issues are priced at the market rate.
e. In LIFO, issues are close to current economic values.
f. Weighted average method is adding all the different prices and dividing the sum by the number of such prices.
g. FIFO is suitable in times of rising prices.
h. Material should be issued against material requisition.
i. Market price method is suitable when quotations have to be sent.

what do you conclude about the relationship between dividend policy and requirements 556059

Bio Plasma Corp. is growing at 30% per year. It is all equity financed and has total assets of $1 million. Its return on equity is 20%. Its plowback ratio is 40%.

a. What is the internal growth rate?

b. What is the firm’s need for external financing this year?

Income Statement

Sales

$950

Costs

250

Pretax income

700

Taxes (at 28.6%)

200

Net income

$500

Balance Sheet, Year end

2011

2010

2011

2010

Debt

$1,000

$900

Assets

$3,000

$2,700

Equity

2,000

1,800

Total

$3,000

$2,700

Total

$3,000

$2,700

c. By how much would the firm increase its internal growth rate if it reduced its payout rate to zero?

d. By how much would such a move reduce the need for external financing? What do you conclude about the relationship between dividend policy and requirements for external financing?

the company plans to invest a further 200 000 per year in fixed assets for the next 556060

Table 29.18 shows the 2010 financial statements for the Executive Cheese Company. Annual depreciation is 10% of fixed assets at the beginning of the year, plus 10% of new investment. The company plans to invest a further $200,000 per year in fixed assets for the next five years and net working capital is expected to remain a constant proportion of fixed

Income Statement

Revenue

$1,785

Fixed costs

53

Variable costs (80% of revenue)

1,428

Depreciation

80

Interest (at 11.8%)

24

Taxes (at 40%)

80

Net income

$ 120

Balance Sheet, Year end

2010

2009

Assets:

Net working capital

$ 400

$ 340

Fixed assets

800

680

Total assets

$1,200

$1,020

Liabilities:

Debt

$ 240

$ 204

Book equity

960

816

Total liabilities

$1,200

$1,020

Sources and Uses

Sources:

Net income

$120

Depreciation

80

Borrowing

36

Stock issues

104

Total sources

$340

Uses:

Increase in net working capital

$ 60

Investment

200

Dividends

80

Total uses

$340

assets. The company forecasts that the ratio of revenues to total assets at the start of each year will remain at 1.75. Fixed costs are expected to remain at $53, and variable costs at 80% of revenue. The company’s policy is to pay out two thirds of net income as dividends and to maintain a book debt ratio of 20%.

a. Construct a model for Executive.

b. Use your model to produce a set of financial statements for 2011.

assume that the discount rate is 10 per year there is no chance of a repeat order an 556063

The lag between the purchase date and the date on which payment is due is known as the terms lag. The lag between the due date and the date on which the buyer actually pays is the due lag, and the lag between the purchase and actual payment dates is the pay lag. Thus, Pay lag=terms lag + due lag

State how you would expect the following events to affect each type of lag:

a. The company imposes a service charge on late payers.

b. A recession causes customers to be short of cash.

c. The company changes its terms from net 10 to net 20.

4. The Branding Iron Company sells its irons for $50 apiece wholesale. Production cost is $40 per iron. There is a 25% chance that wholesaler Q will go bankrupt within the next year. Q orders 1,000 irons and asks for six months’ credit. Should you accept the order? Assume that the discount rate is 10% per year, there is no chance of a repeat order, and Q will pay either in full or not at all.

calculate a prime cost b factory cost c cost of production d cost of sales and e pro 555942

Calculate (a) prime cost, (b) factory cost, (c) cost of production, (d) cost of sales and (e) profit from the following particulars:

Rs

Direct materials

1,00,000

Direct wages

25,000

Direct expenses

5,000

Wages of foremen

2,500

Electric power

500

Lighting:

Factory

1,500

Office

500

Rent:

Factory

5,000

Office

500

Salaries to salespeople

1,250

Advertising

1,250

Income tax

10,000

Sales

1,89,500

a manufacturing company submits to you the following details about the various expen 555943

A manufacturing company submits to you the following details about the various expenses incurred by it during the year ending on 31 December 1985:

Rs

Cost of raw materials consumed

25,000

Advertising

1,000

Depreciation on plant and machinery

1,500

Factory office salaries

6,000

Legal expenses

300

Supervisor’s salary

5,500

Factory rates and insurance

1,000

Carriage outwards

1,500

Direct labour

20,000

Bad debts

300

Office stationery

200

Rent of factory buildings

2,500

Office salary

10,000

Commission on sales

4,000

Audit fees

300

Income tax

1,500

Donation to charitable institutions

500

Purchase of new plant

10,000

Classify the aforementioned expenses under various heads of cost, showing separately the total expenditure under each head. Also show separately the expenses that shall not be included in calculating the cost.

a manufacturer presents the following details about the various expenses incurred by 555944

A manufacturer presents the following details about the various expenses incurred by him:

Rs

Raw materials consumed

70,000

Carriage inwards

2,000

Factory rent

2,400

Bad debts

440

Printing and stationery

620

Legal expenses

350

Carriage outwards

1,540

Indirect material

560

Power

4,600

Depreciation on furniture

160

Postage expenses

465

Repairs to plant and machinery

1,200

Salespeople’s expenses

3,400

Advertising

500

Direct wages

85,000

General manager’s salary

36,000

Factory manager’s salary

18,000

Depreciation on plant and machinery

1,240

Audit fees

350

Classify the aforementioned expenses under the various elements of cost, showing separately the total expenditure under each element.

the following particulars relating to the year 1994 have been taken from the books o 555945

The following particulars relating to the year 1994 have been taken from the books of a chemical works, manufacturing and selling a chemical mixture:

Stock on 1 January 1994

Kg

Rs

Raw materials

2,000

2,000

Finished mixture

500

1,750

Factory stores

7,250

Purchases

Raw materials

1,60,000

1,80,000

Factory stores

24,250

Sales

Finished mixture

1,53,050

9,18,000

Factory scrap

8,170

Factory wages

178,650

Power

30,400

Depreciation of machinery

18,000

Salaries

Factory

72,220

Office

37,220

Selling

41,500

Expenses

Direct

18,500

Office

18,200

Selling

18,000

Stock on 31 December 1994

Raw materials

1,200

Finished mixture

450

Factory stores

5,550

The stock of finished mixture at the end of 1994 is to be valued at the factory cost of the mixture for that year. The purchase price of raw materials remained unchanged throughout 1994.

Prepare a statement giving the maximum possible information on cost and its break up for 1994.

the following particulars are extracted from the books of a manufacturing company 555947

The following particulars are extracted from the books of a manufacturing company:

Rs

Stock of material on 1 January 1994

47,000

Stock of material on 31 December 1994

50,000

Materials purchased

2,08,000

Office salaries (drawing)

9,600

Counting house salaries

14,000

Carriage inwards

8,200

Carriage outwards

5,100

Cash discount allowed

3,400

Bad debts written off

4,700

Repairs to plant and machinery

10,600

Rent, rates, etc.—factory

3,000

Rent, rates, etc.—office

1,600

Travelling expenses

3,100

Travelling commission

8,400

Production wages

1,40,000

Depreciation on plant and machinery

7,100

Depreciation on office furniture

600

Directors’ fees

6,000

Gas and water charges—factory

1,500

Gas and water charges—office

300

General charges

5,000

Manager’s salary

12,000

Out of 48 hours in a week, time devoted by the manager to the factory and the office was on average 40 hours and 8 hours, respectively, throughout the accounting year. Prepare a statement giving the following information: (a) prime cost, (b) factory cost as a percentage of production wages, (c) factory cost, (d) general on cost as a percentage factory cost and (e) total cost.

the following details are obtained from the cost records of comet paints limited 555948

The following details are obtained from the cost records of Comet Paints Limited:

Rs

Stock of raw materials on 1 December 1994

75,000

Stock of raw materials on 31 December 1994

91,500

Direct wages

52,500

Indirect wages

2,750

Sales

2,11,000

WIP, 1 December 1994

28,000

WIP, 31 December 1994

35,000

Purchases of raw materials

66,000

Factory rent, rates and powers

15,000

Depreciation of plant and machinery

3,500

Expenses on purchases

1,500

Carriage outwards

2,500

Advertising

3,500

Office rent and taxes

2,500

Travellers’ wages and commission

6,500

Stock of finished goods, 1 December 1994

54,000

Stock of finished goods, 31 December 1994

31,000

Prepare a production account giving the maximum possible break up of costs and profit.

prepare a statement showing cost and profit from the following details clearly showi 555949

Prepare a statement showing cost and profit from the following details, clearly showing (a) prime cost, (b) works cost, (c) cost of production, (d) cost of sales and (e) profit:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

Direct wages

1,50,000

Directs materials

5,00,000

Power

2,500

Oil and water

2,500

Storekeeper wages

5,000

Transfer to general reserve

5,000

Factory Rent

25,000

Foreman’s Salary

12,500

Office Rent

12,500

Factory Lighting

7,500

Repairs

Office Lighting

2,500

Factory plant

17,500

Depreciation:

Office building

2,500

Factory plant

2,500

Goodwill written off

2,500

office building

6,250

Consumables stores

12,500

Managers salary

25,000

Director’s fees

6,250

office stationary

2,500

telephone rent

625

postage

1,250

salespeople’s salaries

6,250

Travelling expenses

2,500

Advertising

6,250

warehouse rent

2,500

Income tax

50,000

Dividend paid

10,000

sales

947,500

the following data are extracted from pavan kishore for the year 1991 555950

The following data are extracted from Pavan Kishore for the year 1991:

Rs

Opening stock of raw materials

25,000

Closing stock of raw materials

40,000

Purchase of raw materials

85,000

Carriage inwards

5,000

Wages direct

75,000

Wages indirect

10,000

Other direct charges

15,000

Rent and rates:

Factory

5,000

Office

500

Indirect consumption of material

500

Depreciation on plant

1,500

Depreciation on office furniture

100

Salary—office

2,500

Salary—salesmen

2,000

Other office expenses

900

Other factory expenses

5,700

Managing director’s remuneration

12,000

Other selling expenses

1,000

Travelling expenses

1,100

Carriage outwards

1,000

Sales

2,50,000

Advance income tax paid

15,000

Advertisement

2,000

Managing director’s remuneration is allocated as follows: Rs 4,000 to the factory, Rs 2,000 to the office and Rs 6,000 to the selling departments.From the aforementioned information, calculate (a) prime cost, (b) works cost, (c) cost of production (d) cost of sales and (e) net profit.

it is customary to fix the selling price by adding 20 to the total cost prepare a co 555951

The following details relating to a factory are available for the month of March 1999:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

Materials used:

Labour used:

In manufacturing

80,000

For production

25,000

In primary Packing

20,000

For factory supervision

5,000

In the factory

2,000

Office salaries

6,000

In the Office

4,000

Salespeople’s salaries

8,000

In selling

5,000

Expenses:

In Secondary packing

6,000

Direct

2,000

Depreciation:

Factory

6,000

Factory

4,000

Office

4,000

Office

3,000

Selling

5,000

Distribution vans

2,000

Distribution

2,000

It is customary to fix the selling price by adding 20% to the total cost. Prepare a cost sheet showing the profit for the month.

prepare a statement showing a cost of materials used b prime cost c works cost d per 555952

From the following particulars of a manufacturing company, prepare a statement showing (a) cost of materials used, (b) prime cost, (c) works cost, (d) percentage of works overheads to productive wages, (e) cost of production, (f) percentage of general overheads to works cost and (g) net profit:

Rs

Stock of materials on 1 January 1985

20,000

Purchase of materials in January

5,50,000

Stock of finished goods on 1 January 1985

25,000

Productive wages

2,50,000

Finished goods sold

12,00,000

Works overhead charges

75,000

Office and general expenses

50,000

Stock of materials on 31 January 1985

70,000

Stock of finished goods on 31 January 1985

30,000

draw a statement of cost from the following particulars 555953

Draw a statement of cost from the following particulars:

Rs

Opening stock:

Materials

2,00,000

Work in progress

60,000

Finished goods

5,000

Closing stock:

Materials

1,80,000

WIP

50,000

Finished goods

15,000

Materials purchased

5,00,000

Direct wages

1,50,000

Manufacturing expenses

1,00,000

Sales

8,00,000

Selling and distribution expenses

20,000

from the trading account of a concern prepare a cost sheet showing the cost of mater 555955

From the trading account of a concern, prepare a cost sheet showing the cost of materials, used prime cost, cost of goods sold and profit per unit. Trading account for the year ending on 31 December 1994:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

To Stock:

By sales(3000 units)

4,20,000

Finished goods

40,000

By stock

Raw materials

12,000

Finished goods

35,000

To purchases

120,000

Raw materials

14,000

To wages

200,000

To carriage

10,000

To gross profit

87,000

469,000

469,000

from the following information prepare a cost sheet for the month of december 1989 555956

From the following information, prepare a cost sheet for the month of December 1989:

Rs

Stock on hand—1 December 1989:

Raw materials

25,000

Finished goods

17,300

Stock on hand—31 December 1989:

Raw materials

26,200

Finished goods

15,700

Purchase of raw materials

21,900

Carriage on purchases

1,100

WIP, 1 December 1989 at works cost

8,200

WIP, 31 December 1989 at works cost

9,100

Sale of finished goods

72,300

Direct wages

17,200

Non productive wages

800

Direct expenses

1,200

Factory overheads

8,300

Administration overheads

3,200

Selling and distribution overheads

4,200

from the following particulars prepare a statement showing a prime cost b works cost 555957

From the following particulars, prepare a statement showing (a) prime cost, (b) works cost, (c) cost of production and (d) cost of sales:

Rs

Opening stock of finished goods

9,750

Closing stock of finished goods

11,100

Raw materials purchased

35,250

Carriage on materials purchased

850

Direct wages

18,450

Factory expenses

2,750

Selling expenses

2,450

Office cost

1,850

Sales

75,000

Sales of scrap

250

Also show by what percentage the average selling price in the aforementioned case should be increased in order to double the net profit.

from the following details relating to kannan ltd for the quarter ending on 31 march 555958

From the following details relating to Kannan Ltd. for the quarter ending on 31 March 1999, prepare a cost sheet showing profit or loss for the quarter:

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

wages

35,000

Loss on sale of plant

1500

Factory Expenses

7,500

Stock of raw material,31 march 1999

22,500

Stock of raw material,

15,000

factory rent

2,000

1 January 1999

Sundry office expenses

3,000

raw material purchase

140,000

Advertise

3,000

packing and delivery charges

14,000

finished stock on 1 January 1999,200 unit(fully sold)

14,000

Income tax

10,000

Sales

250,000

Units produced

3,000

finished stock on 31 march 1999,400 units

from the following particulars prepare a statement showing the components of total s 555959

From the following particulars, prepare a statement showing the components of total sales and the profit for the year ending on 31 December.

Rs

Stock of finished goods (1 January)

6,000

Stock of raw materials (1 January)

40,000

WIP (1 January)

15,000

Purchase of raw materials

4,75,000

Carriage inwards

12,500

Factory rent, taxes

7,250

Other production expenses

43,000

Stock of finished goods (31 December)

15,000

Wages

1,75,000

Works manager’s salary

30,000

Factory employees’ salary

60,000

Power expenses

9,500

General expenses

32,500

Sales for the year

8,60,000

Stock of raw materials (31 December)

50,000

WIP (31 December)

10,000

prepare a statement showing the price to be fixed that will result in a profit of 20 555960

A company received an enquiry for the supply of 10,000 steel folding chairs. The costs are estimated as follows:

Raw materials

1,00,000 kg at Re 1 per kg

Direct wages

10,000 hours at Rs 4 per hour

Variable overheads:

Factory

Rs 2.40 per labour hour

Selling and distribution

Rs 16,000

Fixed overheads:

Factory

Rs 6,000

Selling and distribution

Rs 14,000

Prepare a statement showing the price to be fixed that will result in a profit of 20% on the selling price.

no office and administration expenses were incurred during 1988 prepare a statement 555961

The following information was obtained from the cost records of Aditya Chemicals Ltd. for 1998:

Rs

Finished goods on 1 January 1998

50,000

Raw materials, 1 January 1988

10,000

WIP, 1 January 1988

14,000

Direct labour

1,60,000

Purchase of raw materials

98,000

Indirect labour

40,000

Heat, light and power

20,000

Factory insurance and taxes

5,000

Repairs to plant

3,000

Factory supplies

5,000

Depreciation—factory building

6,000

Depreciation—plant

10,000

Other information made available is

Factory cost of goods produced in 1988

2,80,000

Raw materials consumed in 1988

95,000

Cost of goods sold in 1988

1,60,000

No office and administration expenses were incurred during 1988. Prepare a statement of cost for the year ending on 1988 giving the maximum possible information and the detailed break up of cost.

from the following information prepare a cost sheet for the month of january 555962

From the following information, prepare a cost sheet for the month of January:

Rs

Stock of raw materials on 1 January

25,000

Stock of raw materials on 31 January

26,200

Purchase of raw materials

21,900

Carriage on purchases

1,100

Sale of finished goods

72,300

Direct wages

17,200

Non productive wages

800

Direct expenses

1,200

Factory overheads

8,300

Administrative overheads

3,200

Selling overheads

4,200

classify the aforementioned expenses under the various elements of cost showing sepa 555963

A manufacturer presents the following details about the various expenses incurred by him:

Rs

Raw materials consumed

70,000

Carriage inwards

2,000

Factory rent

2,400

Bad debts

440

Printing and stationery

620

Legal expenses

350

Carriage outwards

1,540

Indirect material

560

Power

4,600

Depreciation on furniture

160

Postage expenses

465

Repairs to plant and machinery

1,200

Salespeople’s expense

3,400

Advertising

500

Direct wages

85,000

General manager’s salary

36,000

Factory manager’s salary

18,000

Depreciation on plant and machinery

1,240

Audit fees

350

Classify the aforementioned expenses under the various elements of cost, showing separately the total expenditure under each element.

assume that the second sale was selected from the remainder of the beginning invento 555636

Analyzing the Effects of Four Alternative Inventory Methods – Kirtland Corporation uses a periodic inventory system. At the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2012, the accounting records for the most popular item in inventory showed the following:

Transactions

Units

Unit Cost

Beginning inventory, January 1, 2012

400

$3.00

Transactions during 2012:

a. Purchase, January 30

600

3.2

b. Purchase, May 1

460

3.5

c. Sale ($5 each)

160

d. Sale ($5 each)

700

Required:

Compute the amount of ( a ) goods available for sale, ( b ) ending inventory, and ( c ) cost of goods sold at December 31, 2012, under each of the following inventory costing methods (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. Average cost (round the average cost per unit to the nearest cent).

2. First in, first out.

3. Last in, first out.

4. Specific identification, assuming that the first sale was selected two fifths from the beginning inventory and three fifths from the purchase of January 30, 2012. Assume that the second sale was selected from the remainder of the beginning inventory, with the balance from the purchase of May 1, 2012.

of fifo and lifo which method would result in the higher pretax income which would r 555637

Evaluating Four Alternative Inventory Methods Based on Income and Cash Flow At the end of January 2011, the records of Donner Company showed the following for a particular item that sold at $16 per unit:

Transactions

Units

Amount

Inventory, January 1, 2011

500

$2,500

Purchase, January 12

600

3,600

Purchase, January 26

160

1,280

Sale

370

Sale

250

Required:

1. Assuming the use of a periodic inventory system, prepare a summarized income statement through gross profit for the month of January under each method of inventory: ( a ) average cost, ( b ) FIFO, (c ) LIFO, and (d ) specific identification. For specific identification, assume that the first sale was selected from the beginning inventory and the second sale was selected from the January 12 purchase. Round the average cost per unit to the nearest cent. Show the inventory computations in detail.

2. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the higher pretax income? Which would result in the higher EPS?

3. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the lower income tax expense? Explain, assuming a 30 percent average tax rate.

4. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would produce the more favorable cash flow? Explain.

assuming that the unit cost of test equipment is expected to continue to decline in 555638

Analyzing and Interpreting Income Manipulation Under the LIFO Inventory Method Atlantic Company sells electronic test equipment that it acquires from a foreign source. During the year 2011, the inventory records reflected the following:

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Beginning inventory

20

$11,500

$230,000

Purchases

42

10,000

420,000

Sales (47 units at $24,500 each)

Inventory is valued at cost using the LIFO inventory method.

Required:

1. Complete the following income statement summary using the LIFO method and the periodic inventory system (show computations):

Sales revenue

$

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit

Expenses

300,000

Pretax income

$

Ending inventory

$

2. The management, for various reasons, is considering buying 20 additional units before December 31, 2011, at $9,500 each. Restate the income statement (and ending inventory), assuming that this purchase is made on December 31, 2011.

3. How much did pretax income change because of the decision on December 31, 2011? Assuming that the unit cost of test equipment is expected to continue to decline in 2012, is there any evidence of income manipulation? Explain.

identify the different depreciation methods and discuss how the choice of depreciati 555780

Analysis of Long Lived Assets, Part 2 – Analysis of Depreciation and Impairment
a. Identify the different depreciation methods and discuss how the choice of depreciation method affects a company’s financial statements, ratios, and taxes.
Explain the role of depreciable lives and salvage values in the computation of depreciation expenses, and compute and describe how changing depreciation methods or changing the estimated useful life or salvage value of an asset affects financial statements and ratios.
b. Discuss the use of fixed asset disclosures to compare companies’ average age of depreciable assets, and calculate, using such disclosures, the average age and average depreciable life of fixed assets.
c. Define impairment of long lived assets and explain what effect such impairment has on a company’s financial statements and ratios.
d. List the requirements of SFAS 143, Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations
(AROs), and explain the likely financial statement and ratio effects for most firms.

list and explain the key terms used in income tax accounting explain why and how def 555781

Analysis of Income Taxes
a. List and explain the key terms used in income tax accounting, explain why and how deferred tax liabilities and assets are created, and describe the liability method of accounting for deferred taxes.
b. Discuss the implications of a valuation allocation (i.e. when it is required, what impact it has on the financial statements, and how it might affect an analyst’s review of a company).
c. Explain the factors that determine whether a company’s deferred tax liabilities should be treated as a liability or as equity for purposes of financial analysis.
d. Distinguish between temporary and permanent items in pretax financial income and taxable income.
e. Compute income tax expense, income taxes payable, deferred tax assets, and deferred tax liabilities.
f. Calculate the adjustment to the financial statements related to a change in the tax rate.

distinguish between cash flows and accounting profits and discuss the relevance to c 555792

Cash Flow Estimation and Other Topics in Capital Budgeting
a. Distinguish between cash flows and accounting profits and discuss the relevance to capital budgeting of the following: incremental cash flow, sunk cost, opportunity cost, externality, and cannibalization.
b. Explain the importance of changes in net working capital in the capital budgeting process.
c. Determine by NPV analysis whether a project (expansion or replacement) should be undertaken and compute and interpret each of the following for an expansion project and a replacement project: initial investment outlay, operating cash flow over a project’s life, and terminal year cash flow.
d. Compare two projects with unequal lives, using both the replacement chain and equivalent annual annuity approaches.
e. Discuss how the effects of inflation are reflected in capital budgeting analysis.

explain the relationship between a firm rsquo s optimal dividend policy and the firm 555795

Dividend Policy
a. Explain the relationship between a firm’s optimal dividend policy and the firm stock price.
b. Describe the dividend irrelevance theory, the “bird in the hand” theory, and the tax preference theory and explain the dividend irrelevance theory in the context of the determinants of the value of the company, and discuss the principal conclusion for dividend policy of the dividend irrelevance theory and describe how any shareholder can construct his or her own dividend policy.
c. Calculate, assuming a constant return on equity, a company’s implied dividend growth rate, given the company’s dividend payout rate.
d. Describe how managers signal their company’s earnings forecast through changes in dividend policy describe the clientele effect.
e. Describe the residual dividend model and discuss the model’s possible advantages or disadvantages to the company.
f. Describe dividend payment procedures, including the declaration, holder of record,ex dividend, and payment dates.
g. Describe stock dividends and stock splits, and explain their likely pricing effects and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of stock repurchases, and calculate and interpret the price effect of a stock repurchase.

what happens to the expected return the standard deviation of returns and possible r 555834

An Introduction to Asset Pricing Models
a. List the assumptions of the capital market theory.
b. Explain what happens to the expected return, the standard deviation of returns, and possible risk return combinations when a risk free asset is combined with a portfolio of risky assets.
c. Identify the market portfolio and describe the role of the market portfolio in the formation of the capital market line (CML).
d. Define systematic and unsystematic risk and explain why an investor should not expect to receive additional return for assuming unsystematic risk.
e. Describe the capital asset pricing model, diagram the security market line (SML), and define beta.
f. Calculate and interpret using the SML, the expected return on a security and evaluate whether the security is undervalued, overvalued, or properly valued.
g. Explain how the systematic risk of an asset is estimated using the characteristic line.

comprehensive magna charter has been asked to operate a beaver bush plane for a mini 555842

Comprehensive. Magna Charter has been asked to operate a Beaver bush plane for a mining company exploring in Yukon. Magna will have a one year contract with the mining company and expects that the contract will be renewed after one year, for the remaining four years of the exploration program . If the mining company renews after one year, it will commit to use the plane for four more years. Magna Charter has the following choices:
Buy the plane for $500,000.
Arrange a 5 year, non cancellable, net financial lease at a rate of $75,000 per year, paid in advance.
How would you advise Agnes Magna, the chaner company”s CEO? Assume that the CCA rate is 25 percent and Magna has many other airplanes in its asset pool. The first CCA deduction is made at the end of the first year. The company”s tax rate is 35 percent. The weighted average cost of capital for the bush plane business is 14 percent, but Magna can borrow at 9 percent. Ms. Magna thinks the plane will be worth $300,000 after 5 years. She also thinks that there is a 20 percent chance that the contract will not be renewed at Year 1. If the contract is not renewed, the plane will have to be sold on short notice for $400,000.
If Magna Charters takes the 5 year financial lease and the mining company cancels at Year 1, Magna can sublet the plane, that is, rent it out to another user. Make additional assumptions as necessary.

expenses incurred in the production of goods in the factory are known as factory ove 555908

Expenses incurred in the production of goods in the factory are known as factory overheads. Such costs are concerned with the running of the factory or plant. Factory overheads include indirect material, indirect labour and indirect expenses incurred in the factory. Some examples are as follows:
Indirect materials
a.Grease, oil, lubricants, cotton waste, etc.
b.Small tools, brushes for sweeping, sundry supplies, etc.
c.Cost of threads, gum, nails, etc.
d.Consumables stores
Factory printing and stationery
a.Indirect wages
b.Salaries of factory manager, foremen, supervisors, clerks, etc.
c.Salary of storekeeper
d.Salaries and fees of factory directors and technical directors
Contribution to Employees State Insurance, provident fund, leave pay, etc., of factory employees Indirect expenses
a.Rent of factory buildings and land
b.Insurance of factory building, plant and machinery
c.Municipal taxes of factory building
d.Depreciation of factory building, plant and machinery, and their repairs and maintenance charges
e.Power and fuel used in factories
f.Factory telephone expenses

indirect costs incurred in the execution of sales order is termed distribution overh 555910

Indirect costs incurred in the execution of sales order is termed distribution overheads. Some examples of distribution overheads are as follows:

  1. Indirect material

a. Cost of packing material.

    1. Oil, grease, spare parts, etc., for maintaining delivery vans.
  1. Indirect wages
    1. Salaries of go down employees.
    2. Wages of drivers of delivery vans.
    3. Wages of packers and dispatch staff.
  2. Indirect expenses
    1. Packing expenses
    2. Go down rent, insurance, depreciation, repair, etc.
    3. Outward freight carriage and other transport charges.
    4. Running expenses of delivery vans, expenses incurred for their repair and depreciation.
    5. Insurance in transit, etc.

Elements of cost

a. Direct material

  1. Direct labor
  2. Direct expenses
  3. Overheads
  4. Factory overheads
  5. Selling and distribution overheads
  6. Office and administration overheads
  7. Indirect material
  8. Indirect labor
  9. Indirect expenses
  10. Indirect material
  11. Indirect labor
  12. Indirect expenses

the following figures are extracted from the trial balance of gogetter company on 30 555922

The following figures are extracted from the trial balance of Gogetter company on 30 September 1998:

i. Inventories:

Finished stock

40,000

Raw materials

70,000

WIP

1,00,000

Office appliances

8,700

Plant and machinery

2,30,250

Buildings

1,00,000

Sales

3,84,000

Sales return and rebates

7,000

Material purchased

1,60,000

Freight incurred on materials

8,000

Purchase returns

2,400

Direct labour

80,000

Indirect labour

9,000

Factory supervision

5,000

Repairs and upkeep of factory

7,000

Heat, light and power

32,500

Rates and taxes

3,150

Sales travelling

5,500

Miscellaneous factory expenses

9,350

Sales commission

16,800

Sales promotion

11,250

Distribution department salaries and expenses

9,000

ii.Office salaries and expenses:

Office salaries and expenses

4,300

Interest on borrowed funds

1,000

Further details are available as follows:

i.Closing inventories:

Finished goods

57,500

Raw materials

90,000

Work in process

96,000

ii. Accrued expenses on

Direct labour

4,000

Indirect labour

600

Interest on borrowed funds

1,000

iii. Depreciation to be provided on

Office appliances

5%

Plant and machinery

10%

Buildings

4%

iv.Distribution of the following costs:

Heat, light and power to factory, office and selling in the ratio 8:1:1. Rates and taxes two thirds of factory and one third of office. Depreciation on buildings to factory, office and selling in the ratio 8:1:1.

Prepare

  1. Administration ratio
  2. Selling and distribution expenses
  3. Cost of sales
  4. Profit and sales statement

the books of adarsh manufacturing company present the following data for the month o 555923

The books of Adarsh manufacturing company present the following data for the month of June 2005:Direct labour cost is Rs 35,000 being 17.5% of works overheads. Cost of goods sold excluding administration expenses is Rs 1,12,000.Inventory account showed the following opening and closing balances:

1 June

30 June

Raw materials

16,000

21,200

WIP

21,000

29,000

Finished goods

35,200

38,000

Other data:

Selling expenses

7,000

General and administration expenses

5,000

Sales for the month

1,50,000

You are required to compute the value of materials purchased.

meera industries ltd is a single product organization having a manufacturing capacit 555924

Meera Industries Ltd. is a single product organization having a manufacturing capacity of 6,000 units per week at 48 hours. The output data vis a vis different elements of cost for three consecutive weeks are given as follows:

units produces

Area Material

Direct Labour

Total factory overheads

(variable and fixed)

2,400

4,800

6,000

37,200

2,800

5,600

7,000

38,400

3,600

7,200

9,000

40,800

As a cost accountant, you are asked by the company management to work out the selling price assuming an activity level of 4,000 units per week and a profit of 20% on selling price.

ravi manufacturing company submits the following information on 31 march 1999 555925

Ravi manufacturing company submits the following information on 31 March 1999:

Sales for the year

1,37,500

Inventories at beginning of the year:

Finished goods

3,500

WIP

2,000

Purchase of material

55,000

Material inventory:

At the beginning f the year

1,500

At the end of the year

2,000

Direct labour

32,500

Factory overheads were 60% of direct labour cost

Inventories at the end of the year:

WIP

3,000

Finished goods

4,000

Other expenses for the year:

Selling expenses: 10% of sales

Administrative expenses: 5% of sales

Prepare a statement of cost.

the following is the manufacturing and profit and loss accounts of ramya ltd for the 555926

The following is the manufacturing and profit and loss accounts of Ramya Ltd. for the year ending on 30 June 2004:

Opening stock

Sales

2,50,000

Materials

1,000

Closing stock:

Finished Goods

1,500

Material

9,250

purchase of materials

75,000

Finished Goods

1,500

directs wages

60,000

power

7,750

Carriage on material

1,000

Royalty

12,000

Cost of special design

2,500

gross profit(c/d)

1,00,000

2,60,750

2,60,750

Rent and rates:

Gross profit (b/d)

1,00,000

Office

2,500

Interest on Loan

2,250

Factory

3,500

Sales of scrap(at work cost)

375

Telephone

1,500

Discount received

875

Advertisement

3,750

Electricity

Office

1,500

Factory

2,250

Provision for bad debts

5,000

Depreciation

Plant and machinery

3,000

Delivery vans

1,000

Income Tax

6,000

Salaries

12,500

Donation

3,500

Established

5,000

Depreciation on furniture:

Office

1,250

Factory

1,000

Rent on warehouse

3,250

Net profit

47,000

1,03,500

1,03,500

You are required to prepare a statement showing the classification of cost under different components from the aforementioned information after giving due consideration to the following facts:

  1. 60% of telephone expenses relate to office and 40% to sales department.
  2. 25% of salaries relate to factory, 50% to office and 25% to sales department
  3. 50% of the establishment expenses relate to office and 50% to sales department.

Chandan: ___________________

The following is the manufacturing and profit and loss accounts of Ramya Ltd. for the year ending on 30 June 2004:

Opening stock

Sales

2,50,000

Materials

1,000

Closing stock:

Finished Goods

1,500

Material

9,250

purchase of materials

75,000

Finished Goods

1,500

directs wages

60,000

power

7,750

Carriage on material

1,000

Royalty

12,000

Cost of special design

2,500

gross profit(c/d)

1,00,000

2,60,750

2,60,750

Rent and rates:

Gross profit (b/d)

1,00,000

Office

2,500

Interest on Loan

2,250

Factory

3,500

Sales of scrap(at work cost)

375

Telephone

1,500

Discount received

875

Advertisement

3,750

Electricity

Office

1,500

Factory

2,250

Provision for bad debts

5,000

Depreciation

Plant and machinery

3,000

Delivery vans

1,000

Income Tax

6,000

Salaries

12,500

Donation

3,500

Established

5,000

Depreciation on furniture:

Office

1,250

Factory

1,000

Rent on warehouse

3,250

Net profit

47,000

1,03,500

1,03,500

You are required to prepare a statement showing the classification of cost under different components from the aforementioned information after giving due consideration to the following facts:
1. 60% of telephone expenses relate to office and 40% to sales department.
2. 25% of salaries relate to factory, 50% to office and 25% to sales department
3. 50% of the establishment expenses relate to office and 50% to sales department.

the books and records of ajith manufacturing company present the following data for 555927

The books and records of Ajith manufacturing company present the following data for the month of January 2000:

Direct labour

32,000 (160% of factory overheads)

Cost of goods sold

1,12,000

Administration overhead

5,200

Selling overhead

6,800

Sales

1,50,000

Inventory accounts showed the following opening and closing balances:

1 January

31 January

Raw materials

16,000

17,200

WIP

16,000

24,000

Finished goods

28,000

36,000

You are required to prepare a statement showing the cost of goods manufactured and sold and the profit earned. Raw materials consumed:

from the account books of m s aryan enterprises the following details are extracted 555928

From the account books of M/s. Aryan Enterprises, the following details are extracted for the year ending on 31 March 2006:

Stock of material—opening

94,000

Stock of material—closing

1,00,000

Direct wages

1,19,200

Material purchases during the year

4,16,000

Indirect wages

8,000

Salaries to administrative staff

20,000

Freights inwards

16,000

Freights outwards

10,000

Cash discounts allowed

7,000

Bad debts written off

9,400

Repairs to plant and machinery

21,200

Rent rates and taxes—factory

6,000

Rent rates and taxes—office

3,200

Travelling expenses

6,200

Salespeople’s salaries and commissions

16,800

Depreciation written off—plant and machinery

14,200

Depreciation written off—furniture

1,200

Directors’ fees

12,000

Electricity charges (factory)

24,000

Fuel (for boiler)

32,000

General chargers

12,400

Manager’s salary

24,000

The manager’s time is shared between the factory and the office in the ratio 20:80. For the aforementioned details, you are required to prepare (a) prime cost, (b) factory cost, (c) factory overheads, (d) general overheads and (e) total cost. Cost statement:

ascertain prime cost from the following data 555940

Ascertain prime cost from the following data:

Rs

Direct wages

50,000

Chargeable expenses

5,000

Opening stock of raw materials

10,000

Raw materials bought during the period

60,000

Closing stock of raw materials

20,000

Carriage inwards

1,500

Carriage outwards

2,000

Raw materials returned to the supplier

1,500

prepare a cost sheet indicating the prime cost works cost production cost cost of sa 555941

The following cost data are available for a firm from its books for the year ending on 31 December 1995:

Rs

Direct material

9,00,000

Direct wages

7,50,000

Profit

6,09,000

Selling and distribution overheads

5,25,000

Administrative overheads

4,20,000

Factory overheads

4,50,000

Prepare a cost sheet indicating the prime cost, works cost, production cost, cost of sales and sales value.

prepare the asset section of the balance sheet for hasbro inc classifying the assets 558544

Preparing a Classified Balance Sheet The following is a list of account titles and amounts (dollars in millions) from a recent annual report of Hasbro, Inc., a leading manufacturer of games, toys, and interactive entertainment software for children and families:

Buildings and improvements

$196

Goodwill

$474

Prepaid expenses and other

Machinery and equipment

413

current assets

171

Accumulated depreciation

403

Allowance for doubtful accounts

32

Inventories

300

Other noncurrent assets

200

Other intangibles

1,368

Accumulated amortization

Land and improvements

7

(other intangibles)

800

Accounts receivable

644

Cash and cash equivalents

630

Required:

Prepare the asset section of the balance sheet for Hasbro, Inc., classifying the assets into Current Assets, Property, Plant, and Equipment (net), and Other Assets.